JP2022172958A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suitably performing control of movable means.SOLUTION: An upper performance accessory unit 761 is provided in a variable display device unit 35 of a Pachinko machine. The upper performance accessory unit 761 has a movable accessory 811 provided so as to travel vertically and an upper/lower drive mechanism for moving the movable accessory 811 up and down, and is driven and controlled by a sub-control device. The sub-control device executes processing for determining whether a condition for completing an accessory appearance operation is satisfied at timing when the movable accessory 811 returns to a reference position during execution of the accessory appearance operation in which the movable accessory 811 repeats elevation operation for multiple times on the basis of an accessory appearance operation control table stored in a ROM in advance. When a completion condition of the accessory appearance operation is satisfied, the accessory appearance operation is completed readily even during execution of the accessory appearance operation. In the meantime, when the completion condition is not satisfied, the accessory appearance operation is continued as it is.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 173

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a game area.

Among game machines, there is a game machine that causes a movable means (movable body) to execute a series of actions in which a predetermined action is repeated multiple times (see, for example, Patent Document 1). A series of such operations of the movable means are executed based on setting information stored in advance in a storage means such as a ROM.

JP 2010-184066 A

However, when a condition for terminating the series of operations is satisfied in the middle of the series of operations of the movable means, it is desirable to terminate the series of operations appropriately.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its object is to provide a game machine capable of suitably controlling movable means.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention
Starting ball entry means provided in the game area;
A lottery means capable of executing various lotteries when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means;
display control means capable of determining and executing one specific effect to be executed by the display means provided in the game area according to the result of the lottery from among a plurality of effect display modes;
movable control means provided in the game area and capable of determining and executing one movable mode of the movable means operable during display of the specific effect on the display means from among a plurality of movable modes. A game machine that
The movable control means controls the movable means based on specific information set corresponding to one of the movable modes determined from among the plurality of movable modes based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition. It is the one that causes the action to take place,
The movable means is movably controlled between a first position, which is the initial position side, and a second position, which is the most movable position in the series of specific operations,
The series of specific actions are configured to be able to perform a predetermined action of positioning the movable means at or near the first position a plurality of times,
The movable control means is
determination means capable of determining whether or not a condition for ending the series of specific actions is satisfied when the predetermined action is executed;
terminating means capable of terminating the series of specific actions by stopping the movable means positioned at or near the first position when the determining means determines that the termination condition is satisfied; The gist of it is that it has

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to suitably control the movable means.

It is a front view showing a pachinko machine in one embodiment. It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the inner frame and the front frame set. It is a front view showing the configuration of the inner frame, the game board, and the like. It is a rear view showing the configuration of the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view showing a state in which the inner frame, the back pack unit and the like are opened. It is a block diagram showing the main electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline|summary of the various counters used for game control. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing by a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; 4 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing; It is a flow chart which shows starting prize-winning processing. It is a flow chart which shows right or wrong judging processing. 9 is a flow chart showing fluctuation time determination processing. 4 is a flowchart showing through gate passage processing; It is a flow chart which shows entering ball count processing. It is a flow chart which shows a special winning a prize process. It is a flow chart which shows non-special prize-winning processing. It is a flowchart which shows a special gate passage process. It is a flow chart which shows a kind entry process. It is a flow chart which shows V prize big hit setting processing. 8 is a flowchart showing first display control processing; 10 is a flowchart showing variable display setting processing; It is a flowchart which shows a discrimination|determination information setting process. It is a flow chart which shows variable winning a prize device control processing. 9 is a flowchart showing end setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows blade member opening and closing processing. 9 is a flowchart showing second display control processing; It is a flow chart which shows starting prize winning section control processing. 9 is a flowchart showing third display control processing; 4 is a flowchart showing bypass mechanism control processing; It is a flowchart which shows a remaining ball monitoring process. 4 is a flowchart showing reception interrupt processing; It is a flow chart which shows the main processing of a payout control device. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; 4 is a flowchart showing command determination processing; 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing of a sub-controller; It is a flowchart which shows a pending|holding information storage process. It is a front view of a central winning unit. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the operation of the route sorting member. It is an exploded perspective view showing a route distribution member. It is an exploded perspective view showing a rotating body unit. (a) is a front view showing a rotating body unit in which a movable accessory is housed, and (b) is a front view showing a rotating body unit in which a movable accessory is in a projecting state. (a) is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram showing a movable accessory in an accommodated state and its related configuration, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram showing a movable accessory in a projected state and its related configuration. It is a front view for explaining a route distribution member etc. concerning another embodiment. FIG. 11 is a partial cross-sectional front view for explaining route distribution areas and the like according to another embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows a start winning a prize pre-process. It is a flow chart which shows the 4th display control processing. It is a front view showing a pachinko machine in one embodiment. It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the inner frame and the front frame set. It is a front view which shows the structure, such as an inner frame and a game board. It is a rear view showing the configuration of the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view showing a state in which the inner frame, the back pack unit and the like are opened. It is a front view of a variable display device unit. 3 is a perspective view of a variable display device unit; FIG. FIG. 11 is a front view of the variable display device unit in a state in which the performance accessory unit has appeared; It is a block diagram showing the main electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline|summary of the various counters used for game control. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing by a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart which shows starting prize-winning processing. It is a flow chart which shows big hit judging processing. It is a flowchart which shows a reach determination process. 4 is a flowchart showing through gate passage processing; It is a flow chart which shows game state check processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the correspondence of a lottery mode flag, a support mode flag, a game state specific counter, and a game state determination value. 8 is a flowchart showing first display control processing; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a process for setting fluctuation end time; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing variable display setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows variable winning a prize device control processing. 9 is a flowchart showing second display control processing; It is a flow chart which shows opening and closing accessory control processing. 4 is a flowchart showing reception interrupt processing; It is a flow chart which shows the main processing of a payout control device. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; 4 is a flowchart showing command determination processing; 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing of a sub-controller; It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline|summary of the various counters used for the determination of a decorative design. 10 is a flowchart showing counter update processing; 4 is a flowchart showing command determination processing of a sub control device; 10 is a flowchart showing variable display setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows a reservation display setting process. It is a figure for demonstrating a jackpot classification. It is a figure which shows the structure of a 1st jackpot classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structure of a 2nd jackpot classification determination table. (a) is a diagram showing the storage configuration of a probability variable jackpot time/variation pattern table, and (b) is a diagram showing the storage configuration of a complete loss/variation pattern table. It is a diagram showing the configuration of a probability variable jackpot time/fluctuation pattern table in a normal state. 4 is a diagram showing the configuration of an opening/closing pattern control table; FIG. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display mode of the decorative design display apparatus in a normal state. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display mode of the decorative symbol display device when a big hit occurs. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display mode of the decorative design display apparatus in chance mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display mode of the decorative design display apparatus in gold mode. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode of the decorative symbol display device during the roulette performance; It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display mode of a decorative design display device when pending|holding display change processing is performed. It is a flow chart which shows a part of character object production|presentation setting processing. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing a continuation of FIG. 98, which is part of the character object effect setting process. (a) is a diagram showing the configuration of an "end" time/accessory effect pattern determination table, and (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of an "until next time" time/accessory effect pattern determination table. FIG. 4 is a front view showing the upper rotating body and the like in a diameter-reduced state; FIG. 4 is a rear view showing a part of the upper rotating body in a diameter-reduced state, etc. FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view showing the upper rotating body and the like in a diameter-expanded state; It is a rear view which shows a part of upper rotary body etc. which are in a diameter-expanding state. FIG. 102 is a sectional view taken along line KK of FIG. 101; It is a front view showing a part of the lower movable accessory (right and left lower rotating bodies, etc.). It is a side view showing a part of the lower movable accessory (left and right lower rotating bodies, etc.). FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect using the upper rotating body; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a state in which the upper rotating body and the left and right lower rotating bodies are stopped (a stopped state without enlarged display) according to the first development effect pattern; FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a state in which the upper rotating body and the left and right lower rotating bodies are stopped (weak/SMALL enlarged stop state) according to the second development effect pattern; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a state in which the upper rotating body and the left and right lower rotating bodies are stopped (strong/SMALL enlarged stop state) according to the third development effect pattern; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a state in which the upper rotating body and the left and right lower rotating bodies are stopped (weak/BIG enlargement stopped state) according to the fourth development effect pattern; FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a state in which the upper rotating body and the left and right lower rotating bodies are stopped (strong/BIG enlargement stopped state) according to the fifth development effect pattern; It is a schematic diagram which shows the rotating body which concerns on another embodiment. It is a front view showing a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened|released the inner frame and the front frame. It is a front view which shows the structure, such as an inner frame and a game board. It is a rear view showing the configuration of the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view showing a state in which the inner frame, the back pack unit and the like are opened. It is a block diagram showing the main electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline|summary of the various counters used for game control. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing by a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; 4 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing; It is a flow chart which shows starting prize-winning processing. (a) is a flowchart which shows 1st right/wrong determination processing, (b) is a flowchart which shows 2nd right/wrong determination processing, (c) is a flowchart which shows time saving right/wrong determination processing. It is a flow chart which shows type judging processing. It is a flowchart which shows a reach determination process. 4 is a flowchart showing through gate passage processing; It is a flow chart which shows firing permission command setting processing. 9 is a flowchart showing first special display control processing; 9 is a flow chart showing a first variable display setting process; It is a flow chart showing a special figure 1 determination information setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing second special display control processing; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a second variable display setting process; FIG. It is a flow chart showing a special figure 2 determination information setting process. It is a flow chart which shows variable winning a prize device control processing. It is a flow chart which shows specific prize-winning processing. 9 is a flowchart showing end setting processing; It is a flowchart which shows a remaining ball monitoring process. 8 is a flowchart showing normal display control processing; It is a flow chart which shows normal figure fluctuation setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows normal figure discrimination|determination information setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows starting prize winning section control processing. 4 is a flowchart showing reception interrupt processing; It is a flow chart which shows the main processing of a payout control device. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; 4 is a flowchart showing command determination processing; 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing of a sub-controller; It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline|summary of various counters used for determination of a decorative design. 10 is a flowchart showing counter update processing; It is a flowchart which shows a pending|holding information storage process. It is a flow chart which shows suspension processing. It is a flow chart which shows hit display processing. 10 is a flowchart showing variable display setting processing; It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation|variation stop process. It is a figure which shows the example of 1 display mode of a production|presentation display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of 1 display mode of a production|presentation display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of 1 display mode of a production|presentation display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of 1 display mode of a production|presentation display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of 1 display mode of a production|presentation display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of 1 display mode of a production|presentation display apparatus. (a) and (b) are time charts for explaining the flow of variable display and the like in the first special symbol display device, the second special symbol display device, and the effect display device. It is a front view showing a pachinko machine in one embodiment. It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the inner frame and the front frame set. It is a front view which shows the structure, such as an inner frame and a game board. It is a rear view showing the configuration of the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view showing a state in which the inner frame, the back pack unit and the like are opened. It is a front view of a variable display device unit. FIG. 11 is a front view of the variable display device unit in a state in which the performance accessory unit has appeared; (a) is a diagram showing a movable accessory and a vertical drive mechanism in a standby state, and (b) is a diagram showing a movable accessory and a vertical drive mechanism in an operating state. It is a block diagram showing the main electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline|summary of the various counters used for game control. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing by a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart which shows starting prize-winning processing. It is a flow chart which shows big hit judging processing. It is a flowchart which shows a reach determination process. 4 is a flowchart showing through gate passage processing; It is a flow chart which shows game state check processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the correspondence of a lottery mode flag, a support mode flag, a game state specific counter, and a game state determination value. 8 is a flowchart showing first display control processing; 10 is a flowchart showing variable display setting processing; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a process for setting fluctuation end time; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows variable winning a prize device control processing. 9 is a flowchart showing second display control processing; It is a flow chart which shows opening and closing accessory control processing. 4 is a flowchart showing reception interrupt processing; It is a flow chart which shows the main processing of a payout control device. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; 4 is a flowchart showing command determination processing; 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing of a sub-controller; It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline|summary of the various counters used for the determination of a decorative design. 10 is a flowchart showing counter update processing; 4 is a flowchart showing command determination processing of a sub control device; 10 is a flowchart showing variable display setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows a reservation display setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a display setting process during hitting. It is a figure for demonstrating a jackpot classification. It is a figure which shows the structure of a 1st jackpot classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structure of a 2nd jackpot classification determination table. (a) is a diagram showing the storage configuration of a probability variable jackpot time/variation pattern table, and (b) is a diagram showing the storage configuration of a complete loss/variation pattern table. It is a diagram showing the configuration of a probability variable jackpot time/fluctuation pattern table in a normal state. 4 is a diagram showing the configuration of an opening/closing pattern control table; FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode of the effect display device (liquid crystal display section) in a normal state; It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display mode of the production|presentation display apparatus (liquid crystal display part) at the time of big-hit occurrence. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display mode of the production|presentation display apparatus (liquid crystal display part) during chance mode. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode of the effect display device (liquid crystal display section) during the gold mode; FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode of the effect display device (liquid crystal display section) during the roulette effect; FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode of the effect display device (liquid crystal display section) when the pending display change process is performed; FIG. 4 is a front view showing a rotating body and the like in a diameter-reduced state; It is a rear view which shows a part etc. of the rotary body in a diameter-reduced state. It is a front view which shows the rotary body etc. which are in a diameter-expanding state. It is a rear view which shows some rotating bodies etc. which are in a diameter-expanding state. FIG. 216 is a sectional view taken along line KK of FIG. 215; FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect using a rotating body; It is a flow chart which shows a part of character object production|presentation setting processing. FIG. 222 is a flowchart showing a continuation of FIG. 221, which is part of the character object effect setting process. (a) is a diagram showing the configuration of an "end" time/accessory effect pattern determination table, and (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of an "until next time" time/accessory effect pattern determination table. It is a flow chart which shows character object appearance setting processing. It is a figure which shows the structure of a character appearance operation control table. It is an operation|movement process diagram for demonstrating the operation|movement aspect etc. of role object appearance operation|movement. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the configuration of a role object appearance operation control table according to another embodiment; FIG. 11 is an operation process diagram for explaining an operation mode and the like of a role object appearance operation according to another embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the structure of a conventional character object appearance operation control table;

[First embodiment]
An embodiment of a pachinko machine as a gaming machine will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 3 and the like, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that constitutes its outer shell. However, in FIG. 3, for the sake of convenience, nails and accessories arranged on the surface of the game board 30, the glass unit 137 attached to the front frame set 14, and the like are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 6 and the like, the outer frame 11 includes an upper frame-constituting portion 11a and a lower frame-constituting portion 11b made of wooden plate material, and a left side frame-constituting portion 11c and a right side frame-constituting portion 11d made of aluminum alloy by extrusion molding. These frame-constituting parts 11a to 11d are assembled into a rectangular frame as a whole by detachable fasteners such as screws.

An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left side frame-constituting portion 11c (see FIG. 1). The upper and lower parts of the inner frame 12 are rotatably supported by the upper hinge 81 and the lower hinge 82, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed. A space formed inside the outer frame 11 accommodates the inner frame 12 and the like.

An extension wall portion 83 that protrudes toward the inside of the outer frame 11 from the vicinity of the rear end in the width direction is formed on the right-side frame-constituting portion 11d. The extending wall portion 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see FIG. 6) provided on the right side back side of the inner frame 12 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 5).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 3 , a pair of upper and lower receiving portions 84 and 85 to which the locking member of the locking device 600 is locked is provided on the front side of the extending wall portion 83 . A pressing portion 86 that abuts on an inner frame open detection switch 92 (to be described later) protrudes toward the inside of the outer frame 11 from the lower receiving portion 85 .

Further, a resin-made curtain plate decoration 87 is attached to the lower side frame-constituting portion 11b. A rib 88 protruding upward is integrally formed in the inner part of the upper surface of the curtain plate decoration 87 . This makes it difficult for a gap to be formed with the inner frame 12 .

As shown in FIG. 3, the opening/closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set vertically along the left side of the pachinko machine 10 when viewed from the front, and the inner frame 12 can be opened forward with this opening/closing axis as the axis. It has become. The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 38 having a rectangular outer shape, and a substantially elliptical window hole 39 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 38 .

A front frame set 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so that it can be opened and closed. As with the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 can be opened forward with an opening/closing axis set along the top and bottom on the left side of the pachinko machine 10 as viewed from the front.

The front frame set 14 has a rectangular outer shape like the inner frame 12, and covers substantially the entire front side of the inner frame 12 in the closed state. A substantially elliptical window portion 101 is formed in the central portion of the front frame set 14 . Thereby, the game board 30 (game area) attached to the rear surface of the inner frame 12 can be visually recognized from the outside through the window portion 101 of the front frame set 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12 . A detailed configuration of the game board 30 will be described later.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, on the front side of the front frame set 14, a lower plate 15 is provided as a ball tray at the center of the lower portion thereof, and game balls discharged from a discharge port 16 are placed in the lower plate 15. can be stored in Further, on the front side of the lower tray 15, a ball extracting lever 25 for ejecting game balls from the inside of the lower tray 15 is provided.

A performance button 125 is provided on the left side of the lower plate 15. - 特許庁When the player presses the effect button 125, a predetermined effect is performed on the effect display device 42 or the like, which will be described later, or the content of the effect is changed.

On the right side of the lower plate 15, there is provided a game ball shooting handle (hereinafter simply referred to as "handle") 18 protruding forward. The handle 18 is provided with a touch sensor (not shown), an operation amount detection means (variable resistor) (not shown) for detecting an operation amount of an operation portion of the handle 18, and the like.

Then, when the handle 18 is rotated clockwise, a game ball is shot by a shooting device 60 as a shooting means, which will be described later, with a force corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. Also, the handle 18 is provided with a firing prohibition button 18a that can be pressed with the thumb of the right hand holding the handle 18. As shown in FIG. When the shooting prohibition button 18a is pressed, shooting of game balls by the shooting device 60 is prohibited even if the handle 18 is gripped. Therefore, it is possible to rotate the handle 18 while prohibiting the shooting of the game ball, or temporarily stop shooting the game ball while gripping the handle 18.例文帳に追加

An upper plate 19 is provided above the lower plate 15 . The upper plate 19 is a ball receiver that temporarily stores game balls and guides them toward a launching device 60 to be described later while aligning them in a row. When the upper tray 19 is filled with game balls, the game balls to be paid out are guided to the lower tray 15 via a lower tray communication passage 71 and a discharge port 16, which will be described later.

A ball lending button 121 and a returning button 122 are provided on the upper plate 19. - 特許庁As a result, when the ball lending button 121 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like, the ball lending button 121 is operated. A rented ball is supplied to the upper tray 19 . On the other hand, the return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. However, the ball lending button 121 and the return button 122 are unnecessary in a pachinko machine in which game balls are directly lent to the upper tray 19 from a ball lending device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine.

Furthermore, the upper plate 19 is provided with a ball removal button 123 . By pressing the ball removal button 123, a communication hole (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the ball guide path of the upper tray 19 and communicating with the lower tray 15 is opened and stored in the upper tray 19. The game ball is guided (dropped) to the lower tray 15. - 特許庁That is, the player can move the game ball on the upper tray 19 to the lower tray 15 at any time by operating the ball removal button 123 .

Further, the front face of the front frame set 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it. These light emitting means play a role of increasing the effect during the game by changing and controlling the light emitting mode such as lighting and blinking according to the change of the game state such as when a big win or a predetermined reach.

For example, on the periphery of the window portion 101, an annular illumination portion 102 containing light emitting means such as an LED is provided. In addition, error display lamps 104 are provided on both sides of the ring-shaped decorative portion 102 to light up in the event of a predetermined error. A large number of fine through-holes are formed in the annular illumination portion 102 above each error display lamp 104 corresponding to the speaker SP (see FIG. 3) provided on the back surface of the front frame set 14. .

A glass unit 137 is attached to the rear side of the front frame set 14 . The glass unit 137 is not a conventional front and rear pair of rectangular plate glasses that are attached separately as a front and rear pair, but is formed in a round shape as a whole and attached after being assembled.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3 , a ball passage unit 70 is provided on the back side of the front frame set 14 below the window portion 101 . The ball passage unit 70 includes a lower tray communication path 71 that connects the payout mechanism 352 to the outlet 16 of the lower tray 15 and an upper tray communication path 73 that connects the payout mechanism 352 to the upper tray 19 .

In addition, the ball passage unit 70 is provided with a full detection switch (not shown) for detecting game balls positioned in the lower tray communication passage 71 . Due to the presence of the full detection switch, it is grasped that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls (that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls and that the game balls are staying in the lower tray communication passage 71). be able to.

Next, the inner frame 12 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 4 and the like. At the lower front portion of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), that is, below the window hole 39 (game board 30), there is a shooting device 60 and a shooting rail 61 for guiding game balls immediately after being shot from the shooting device 60. installed. In this embodiment, a solenoid type launcher is adopted as the launcher 60 .

In this embodiment, control is performed such that launching of the launching device 60 is prohibited based on the game ball being continuously detected for a predetermined period of time by the full detection switch. On the other hand, when the stagnation of the game balls in the lower tray communication passage 71 is eliminated and the game balls are no longer detected by the full detection switch (when the game balls are no longer detected continuously for a predetermined time), the launching of the shooting device 60 is permitted.

A ball feeder 63 is provided above the launcher 60 . The ball feeding device 63 guides the game balls guided from the upper tray 19 one by one to the shooting position of the shooting device 60 by driving means such as a solenoid.

3 and 4, reference numeral 67 denotes a payout passage for guiding game balls paid out by a payout mechanism 352, which will be described later, to the front of the inner frame 12, and an upper tray communication passage 73 (upper tray 19). and a passage leading to the lower tray communication passage 71 (lower tray 15).

Further, a shutter 68 is provided below the payout passage 67, and when the front frame set 14 is opened, the shutter 68 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring or the like so as to close the outlet of the payout passage 67. It has become.

On the other hand, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the shutter 68 is pushed open by the inlet-side rear end of the lower tray communication passage 71 . In the closed state of the front frame set 14, the inlet portions (ball inlet portions) of the lower tray communicating passage 71 and the upper tray communicating passage 73 and the dispensing passage 67 are adjacent to each other with a predetermined distance therebetween. A game ball can pass through the gap. As a result, when the upper tray 19 and the upper tray communication path 73 are filled with game balls, the game balls to be put out flow to the lower tray communication path 71 side and are paid out to the lower tray 15 through the lower tray communication path 71. It will happen.

As described above, the game board 30 is attached behind the window hole 39 to the inner frame 12 (resin base 38). The game board 30 is attached with its peripheral portion in contact with the back side of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38). Therefore, a substantially central portion of the front surface of the game board 30, which serves as a game area, is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39 of the resin base 38. As shown in FIG.

Here, the configuration of the game board 30 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The game board 30 is provided with a rail 50 which is composed of an inner rail component 51 and an outer rail component 52 and guides the game ball shot from the shooting device 60 to the upper part of the game board 30 . The rail 50 may be a ball passage. As a result, the game ball shot with the rotating operation of the handle 18 is guided into the game area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137 through the shooting rails 61 and 50 .

A return ball preventing member 53 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion in FIG. 4) of the inner rail constituting portion 51 . As a result, the game ball once guided from the rail 50 to the game area is prevented from returning into the rail 50 again. Further, a return rubber 54 is attached to substantially the tip portion (upper right portion in FIG. 4) of the outer rail constituting portion 52 . A game ball shot with a force greater than or equal to a predetermined amount hits the return rubber 54 and is returned to, for example, the substantially central portion side of the game board 30 .

In this embodiment, the outer rail component 52 ends at the upper right portion of the game board 30 , and the inner rail component 51 ends at the lower right portion of the game board 30 . Therefore, the play area is defined by the rails 50 and the inner peripheral surfaces of the window holes 39 of the resin base 38 . However, until the game ball hit by the launching device 60 passes through the return ball preventing member 53 as a restricting means, it may flow backward on the rail 50. Excluded from the domain.

In addition, there is a gap of a predetermined distance between the launch rail 61 provided on the inner frame 12 and the rail 50 (outer rail constituting portion 52), and the ball passage unit 70 receives a game ball dropped from the gap. A foul ball passage 72 is formed leading to the plate 15 . The specific area may be the area where the return ball prevention member 53 is arranged. If a game ball shot from the shooting device 60 does not reach the return ball preventing member 53 and travels back along the rail 50 as a foul ball, the foul ball is discharged to the lower tray 15 through the foul ball passage 72. .

In addition, the game board 30 includes a general winning section 31, a variable winning device 32, a starting winning section 33 (specifically, a first starting winning section 33a and a second starting winning section 33b) as a starting ball winning means, a through A gate 34, a central winning unit 37 as variable ball entry means, and the like are arranged in through holes formed by router processing and attached from the front side of the game board 30 .

Further, the game board 30 is provided with ball entry detection switches (ball entry detection means) for detecting game balls entering the various ball entry means corresponding to the various ball entry means such as the general winning section 31. ing.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, a general winning switch 221 is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning section 31, a count switch 223 is provided at a position corresponding to the variable winning device 32, and the first starting A first start-up prize switch 224a is provided at a position corresponding to the prize-winning portion 33a, a second start-up prize switch 224b is provided at a position corresponding to the second start-up prize portion 33b, and a position corresponding to the through gate 34 is provided. A through gate switch 225 is provided.

As is well known, when a game ball enters (wins a prize) in various winning means such as the general winning section 31, the variable winning device 32, and the starting winning section 33, it is detected by various detection switches, and a predetermined number of balls are sent to the upper tray 19 or the lower tray 15. prize balls (game balls) are paid out. For example, if a ball enters the starting prize winning section 33, there are three prizes, if a ball enters the general prize winning section 31, there are five prizes, and if a ball enters the variable prize winning device 32, there are ten prizes. A ball is paid out.

In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an out port 36, and game balls that do not win various prize winning means such as the general prize winning portion 31 are discharged out of the game area through the out port 36. . Also, the game board 30 is provided with a large number of nails and various members such as windmills in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls.

Here, the configuration of the central winning unit 37 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 4, 40 to 45, and the like.

The center prize winning unit 37 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area (game board 30). The central winning unit 37 includes a housing (center frame) 400 forming an internal area 401 into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter, and a front panel 402 attached to the front opening of the housing 400. ing. The front panel 402 is made of a transparent member, and the internal area 401 can be seen through the front panel 402 .

A pair of left and right ball entry openings 403 are formed in the upper part of the housing 400 to serve as entrances for game balls flowing down the game area to enter the internal area 401 . In addition, the central winning unit 37 is provided with a pair of left and right blade members 404 for opening and closing the entrance opening 403, and a blade solenoid 405 (see FIG. 7) for operating the blade members 404. there is The "blade member 404" constitutes the "opening/closing member" in this embodiment.

Each blade member 404 is rotatably displaceable between a closed position for closing the corresponding ball entry opening 403 and an open position for opening it. When the blade member 404 is displaced to the closed position and the ball entry opening 403 is closed, the central winning unit 37 is closed, and the game ball cannot enter the internal area 401 (ball cannot be entered). On the other hand, when the blade member 404 is displaced to the open position and the ball entry opening 403 is opened, the central prize winning unit 37 is in an open state, and the game ball can enter the internal area 401 (enter the ball). becomes.

Although details will be described later, the blade member 404 has a winning ball in the starting winning part 33 (the first starting winning part 33a or the second starting winning part 33b), and a winning lottery based on the winning ball. When winning a prize, it is in an open state for a predetermined time. In other words, the predetermined starting condition (opening opportunity) in the present embodiment is when a small winning lottery is won based on the ball entering the starting winning part 33 (first starting winning part 33a or second starting winning part 33b). Equivalent to the case of establishment. Further, in this embodiment, the pair of left and right blade members 404 are configured to operate in synchronization with each other. is also in the closed position.

On the other hand, the internal area 401 includes a route sorting area 406 in which a game ball entered from the ball entry opening 403 is first guided, a winning lottery area 407 provided at the lower position, and further provided at the lower position. It is divided into a type lottery area 408 as a type lottery area and an accessory actuation lottery area 409 provided on the right side of the winning lottery area 407 .

First, the route distribution area 406 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 40 to 42 and the like. In the route distribution area 406, a game ball entering the inner region 401 from the entrance opening 403 is temporarily guided to the rear side of the upper rear wall portion 400a of the housing 400, and then guided to the center of the route distribution area 406 in the left-right direction. An introduction passage 601 that guides, a drop passage 602 that causes game balls to fall downward from an exit portion 601a of the introduction passage 601 that opens in the center of the route distribution area 406 in the left-right direction, and a drop passage 602 A route distributing member 603 as a route distributing means provided, a normal guide passage 604 provided at a left position of the route distributing member 603 and capable of guiding game balls to the lottery area 407, and the route distributing member 603. A special guide passage (special passage) 605 is provided at the right position and can guide the game ball to the accessory operation lottery area 409 .

In this embodiment, the normal guide passage 604 and the like constitute a "first route", and the special guide passage 605 and the like constitute a "second route".

A pair of left and right inlets 601b of the lead-in passage 601 are provided with internal ball detection switches 437 as predetermined detection means for detecting passage of game balls that have entered from the ball entry opening 403, respectively.

In this embodiment, a game ball that enters the left ball entrance opening 403 always passes through the left entrance portion 601b, and a game ball that enters the right ball entrance opening 403 always passes through the right entrance portion 601b. A game ball entering the internal area 401 is always detected by either the left or right internal ball detection switch 437 .

In addition, in this embodiment, when game balls are detected by the internal ball detection switch 437, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls are paid out.

As shown in FIG. 42, the route distribution member 603 includes a cylindrical shaft portion 611 having an axial hole 611a extending in the front-rear direction, a central piece portion 613 projecting upward from the shaft portion 611, and a shaft portion. A left piece 614 protruding leftward from 611 and a right piece 615 protruding rightward from shaft 611 are provided.

A shaft pin 610 is inserted through the shaft hole 611 a of the shaft portion 611 . The shaft pin 610 has its rear end supported by the upper rear wall portion 400a defining the back side of the drop passage 602, and its front end supported by the front panel 402 (bearing hole 402a) defining the front side of the drop passage 602. It is As a result, the route distribution member 603 is rotatably supported around the shaft pin 610 .

A projecting portion 617 having a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front is formed below the route distribution member 603 . Normally, as shown in FIG. 41(a), the route distributing member 603 is arranged such that the center piece 613 is positioned at the center in the left-right direction (axial pin) by biasing means (maintaining means) such as a weight or a coil spring (not shown). 610 ), and the right piece 615 is tilted downward from the horizontal direction, and is maintained in the right tilted state by being biased by the right tilted surface of the protrusion 617 .

In this right tilted state, the tip 613a of the center piece 613 comes into contact with or comes close to the right side wall 602a of the drop passage 602, and the game ball falling down the drop passage 602 moves toward the special guide passage 605 on the right side. It becomes a state in which it is impossible to flow down to the normal guide passage 604 on the left side, and a state in which it is possible to flow down to the normal guide passage 604 on the left side.

In other words, when the route sorting member 603 is tilted to the right during normal operation, the special guide passage 605 is closed by the route sorting member 603, while the normal guide passage 604 is open. The game ball is guided to the left normal guide passage 604 along the left guide surface formed by the left side surface of the central piece portion 613 and the upper surface of the left piece portion 614 of the route distribution member 603 .

Along with this, the route distribution member 603 is rotated counterclockwise against the biasing force of the biasing means by the force received from the game ball contacting the left piece 614 (see FIG. 41(b)). ].

As a result, the route distribution member 603 tilts the center piece 613 leftward from the center position in the horizontal direction (the position of the shaft pin 610) for a predetermined time, and tilts the left piece 614 downward from the horizontal direction to form a protrusion. The left tilted state is urged by the left tilted surface of the portion 617 .

In such a left inclined state, the tip portion 613a of the central piece portion 613 comes into contact with or comes close to the left side wall portion 602b of the drop passage 602, and the game ball falling down the drop passage 602 moves toward the normal guide passage 604 on the left side. It becomes a state where it cannot flow down to the right side, and it becomes a state where it can flow down to the special guide passage 605 on the right side.

In other words, during the predetermined time period in which the route sorting member 603 is tilted to the left, the normal guide passage 604 is closed by the route sorting member 603, while the special guide passage 605 is opened. As a result, the game ball falling down the drop path 602 at this timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 41, the second game ball B1 that is normally guided to the guide path 604 and the If there is a game ball B2), the game ball is guided to the special guide passage 605 on the right side along the right guide surface composed of the right side surface of the central piece portion 613 and the upper surface of the right piece portion 615 of the route distribution member 603. will be taken.

Once the route distribution member 603 is in the left tilted state, the biasing force of the biasing means (when the game ball is guided to the special guide passage 605 on the right side, the game ball from contacting the right piece portion 615 41(c)].

In this embodiment, the state in which the route distribution member 603 is in the right tilted posture, which is the first posture, corresponds to the first state, and the state in which the route distribution member 603 is in the left tilted posture, which is the second posture, corresponds to the second state. Equivalent to. In addition, in the present embodiment, the route distribution member 603, such as the first state and the second state, directs the game ball to the first route including the normal guide passage 604 and the like, and the second route including the special guide passage 605 and the like. A flowable state constitutes a specific state. Of course, the specific state is not limited to these, and other configurations may be adopted.

Next, the structure of the accessory operation lottery area 409 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 40, the accessory activation lottery area 409 is provided with a special gate 650 through which game balls guided by the special guide passage 605 can enter (pass). The passage widths of the special guide passage 605 and the special gate 650 are set to a width through which game balls can pass one by one. Also, the game ball that has passed through the special gate 650 is discharged outside the internal area 401 (on the back side of the game board 30) through a discharge passage (not shown). The "special gate 650" constitutes the "opportunity ball entry means" in this embodiment.

The special gate 650 is provided with a special gate switch 651 for detecting game balls passing therethrough. The "special gate switch 651" constitutes the "momentary ball entry detection means" in this embodiment.

When a game ball is detected by the special gate switch 651, an operation assist lottery is performed to determine whether or not to operate a movable accessory 722, which will be described later. Then, when winning the operation assist lottery, the movable accessory 722 operates for a predetermined time. The details of the configuration and operation mode of the movable accessory 722 will be described later.

In addition, in this embodiment, even if a game ball is detected by the special gate switch 651, no prize ball is paid out (the number of prize balls is 0). Not limited to this, when game balls are detected by the special gate switch 651, a predetermined number of prize balls may be paid out.

Next, the configuration of the lottery area 407 will be described in detail. A winning/failing lottery area 407 is provided with a rotary unit 410 as a winning/failing sorting means. The rotator unit 410 has a function of distributing the destination of game balls guided from the route distribution area 406 via the normal guide passage 604 to either the type lottery area 408 or outside the internal area 401 . The passage width of the normal guide passage 604 is set to a width through which game balls can pass one by one.

As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the rotator unit 410 includes a unit base 411 serving as a base portion, and a unit cover 412 attached to the unit base 411 so as to cover the upper surface thereof.

The unit base 411 has a substantially disc-shaped rotating body 414 mounted on an installation table 413 projecting from the upper surface thereof, and a rotating body motor 415 for rotating the rotating body 414 is mounted. . On the other hand, a gear mechanism (not shown) for transmitting the driving force of the rotating body motor 415 to the rotating body 414 is provided on the lower surface side of the unit base 411 .

The rotating body 414 is installed such that the rotating shaft is inclined with respect to the vertical direction so that the upper surface thereof faces obliquely upward on the front side. The rotator motor 415 is composed of a stepping motor and is driven and controlled by pulse signals output from the main controller 261 . With such a configuration, the rotating body 414 is configured to always rotate in a constant direction (counterclockwise direction in this embodiment) at a constant cycle.

The rotating body 414 is formed with pocket portions 416 each capable of receiving one game ball at three locations on the outer peripheral edge thereof. The three pocket portions 416 are divided into one special pocket portion 416a and the other (two) non-special pocket portions 416b.

The non-special pocket portion 416 b has a bottom wall portion 417 and opens to the outer peripheral side and upper side of the rotating body 414 . The upper surface of the bottom wall portion 417 is inclined downward toward the outer peripheral side of the rotating body 414 .

On the other hand, the special pocket portion 416a is open to the outer peripheral side of the rotating body 414, upward and downward, and does not have the bottom wall portion 417 like the non-special pocket portion 416b. In addition, the peripheral portion of the special pocket portion 416a is made of a colored resin material different from that of other portions. This makes it easier for the player to distinguish between the special pocket portion 416a and the non-special pocket portion 416b.

The unit cover 412 includes a substantially cylindrical cylindrical wall portion 431 arranged to surround the rotating body 414, and a stage portion 432 formed to extend outward from the cylindrical wall portion 431. ing.

An upper edge portion of the cylindrical wall portion 431 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the stage portion 432, and a gate portion 435 is provided on the front side thereof to allow communication between the inner peripheral side and the outer peripheral side of the cylindrical wall portion 431. .

In addition, the upper surface of the stage portion 432 is configured so that a game ball can roll. A portion of the stage portion 432 located behind the gate portion 435 is inclined downward toward the front and toward the cylinder wall portion 431 side, and a portion located in front of the gate portion 435 is inclined backward (toward the gate portion 435 side). downward sloping.

As a result, the game ball guided to the rear side of the stage portion 432 through the outlet portion 604a of the normal guide passage 604 opened in the central rear wall portion 400b of the housing 400 defining the back side of the lottery area 407 is While the movement toward the rotating body 414 is restricted by the cylindrical wall portion 431 , it rolls clockwise or counterclockwise on the stage portion 432 toward the near side, swings left and right several times in front of the gate portion 435 , and so on. Then, when the relative positions of the gate portion 435 and the pocket portion 416 (the special pocket portion 416a or the non-special pocket portion 416b) of the rotating body 414 match, they enter the pocket portion 416. .

Further, the unit base 411 includes a first V prize passage 427 for guiding game balls housed in the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414 to the type lottery area 408, and a game ball housed in the non-special pocket portion 416b. and an out passage 428 for discharging to the outside of the internal region 401 is provided.

The first V winning passage 427 is formed slightly downstream of the gate portion 435 with respect to the rotating direction (counterclockwise direction) of the rotor 414 , that is, on the right side of the gate portion 435 . On the other hand, the out passage 428 is formed further downstream than the first V winning passage 427 , that is, at the right back position of the first V winning passage 427 .

In addition, the entrance side of the first V prize passage 427 is opened on the upper surface of the installation table 413, and the pocket portion 416 of the rotating body 414 can pass thereabove. Then, the game ball entering the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414 through the gate portion 435 moves to the position between the special pocket portion 416a and the entrance portion of the first V winning passage 427 as the rotating body 414 rotates. match, the ball drops downward from the special pocket portion 416 a and enters the first V prize passage 427 . At a position corresponding to the first V winning path 427 , a cylindrical wall portion 431 protruding downward from the back surface of the stage portion 432 restricts game balls from falling out of the side surface of the rotating body 414 .

On the other hand, when the game ball enters the non-special pocket portion 416b of the rotating body 414 through the gate portion 435, as the rotating body 414 rotates, the non-special pocket portion 416b and the entrance portion of the first V winning passage 427 Even if the positions match, the game ball housed in the non-special pocket portion 416b is prevented from falling (entering) into the first V winning passage 427 by the bottom wall portion 417 provided in the non-special pocket portion 416b. It's becoming

A notch portion 431 a is formed in the lower edge portion of the cylindrical wall portion 431 at a position corresponding to the out passage 428 . As a result, the rotating body 414 rotates further, and when the positions of the non-special pocket portion 416b containing the game ball and the out passage 428 match, the game ball contained in the non-special pocket portion 416b moves toward the bottom wall. Due to the inclination of the portion 417 , the ball moves to the outer peripheral side of the rotating body 414 and falls (enters) into the out passage 428 through the notch portion 431 a of the cylindrical wall portion 431 .

The housing 400 is formed with a connection passage 429 connected to the exit of the first V prize passage 427, and the connection passage 429 establishes communication between the first V prize passage 427 and the type lottery area 408.

Also, the first V winning path 427 is provided with a first special ball entry detection switch 461 as special ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball passing therethrough. When a game ball enters the first V winning passage 427 and is detected by the first special ball entry detection switch 461, the right to generate a jackpot state (special game state) is granted. becomes. Therefore, the "1st V winning path 427" constitutes the "special ball entry means" in this embodiment.

When a game ball enters the 1st V winning path 427 and generates a big hit, the regulation time of 30 seconds elapses after the big winning opening opening/closing member 32a of the variable winning device 32 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Alternatively, on the condition that a prescribed number of eight game balls are won in the variable prize winning device 32, one opening/closing operation until the variable prize winning device 32 is closed is regarded as one prize state, and this is repeated for a predetermined number of times (predetermined rounds).

In this embodiment, as the types of the big win state, the "3 round big win" in which the above-mentioned special prize state (round) is repeated three times, the "7 round big win" in which the above-mentioned special prize state (round) is repeated seven times, and the above-mentioned special prize state A "15-round jackpot" is set in which (round) is repeated 15 times.

However, although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the first special ball detection switch 461 detects the ball, instead of immediately starting the jackpot state, the jackpot is won in the type lottery area 408. After the type of state is determined, the jackpot state is initiated.

As described above, in this embodiment, the game ball that enters the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414 and passes through the first V winning passage 427 is detected by the first special entering ball detection switch 461, You will be guided to area 408 .

On the other hand, the out passage 428 is provided with a non-special entering ball detection switch 462 for detecting game balls passing through and discharged out of the internal region 401 .

In addition, in the upper edge of the cylindrical wall portion 431, a predetermined circumferential section including the upper side of the entrance portions of the first V winning passage 427 and the out passage 428 is formed so as to extend toward the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical wall portion 431. A formed ledge 440 is provided.

The protruding portion 440 is configured to cover from above a part of each pocket portion 416 located therebelow (an area of about half of the rotating body 414 in the radial direction). As a result, another game ball rides on the upper side of the game ball that has entered the predetermined pocket portion 416, and the two game balls that are vertically overlapped are continuously connected to the first V winning passage 427 or the out passage 428. To avoid a situation in which a game ball enters or jumps over a cylindrical wall part 431 for some reason and directly enters a pocket part 416 at a position coinciding with a first V winning passage 427 and an out passage 428.例文帳に追加can be done.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 43 to 45, a bypass mechanism section 721 is provided at the rear portion of the rotor unit 410. As shown in FIGS. The bypass mechanism section 721 includes a movable accessory 722 as a movable body (movable member) assembled in an opening accommodating section 433 formed at the most upstream portion of the stage section 432, and a movable mechanism for operating the movable accessory 722. It is provided with a movable accessory solenoid 725 as member driving means. The movable accessory solenoid 725 is driven and controlled by the main controller 261 constituting movable body control means.

The movable accessory 722 is assembled so as to be slidable (elevating) in the vertical direction. In a normal state in which the movable accessory solenoid 725 is in a non-excited state, the movable accessory 722 is almost entirely accommodated in the opening accommodating portion 433, and its upper surface is substantially continuous with the upper surface of the stage portion 432. It is in a state [see FIGS. 44(a) and 45(a)]. The accommodation state of the movable accessory 722 corresponds to the non-advantageous state in this embodiment.

On the other hand, when the movable accessory solenoid 725 is energized and the bypass mechanism 721 is activated, the movable accessory 722 rises, and a part of it protrudes upward from the upper surface of the stage 432 [Fig. 44(b) and FIG. 45(b)]. The action of the movable accessory 722 corresponds to the predetermined action in this embodiment, and the operating state of the movable accessory 722 corresponds to the advantageous state in this embodiment.

On the upper surface of the movable accessory 722, there are a left inclined portion 727 that gently slopes downward toward the left from the approximate center in the horizontal direction, and a right inclined portion 727 that gently slopes downward toward the right from the approximate center in the horizontal direction. A ramp 728 is formed.

In a normal state in which almost the entire movable accessory 722 is accommodated in the opening accommodation portion 433, the exit portion of the normal guide passage 604 opened in the middle rear wall portion 400b of the housing 400 at a position above the movable accessory 722. The game ball drawn out from 604 a is guided to the left or right of stage section 432 by left inclined portion 727 or right inclined portion 728 on the upper surface of movable accessory 722 .

Further, as shown in FIGS. 45(a) and 45(b), inside the movable accessory 722, a second V winning path 730 is provided. The passage width of the 2nd V winning passage 730 is set to a width that allows game balls to pass through one by one.

When the movable accessory 722 protrudes from the stage portion 432, the movable accessory 722 blocks the front of the exit portion 604a of the normal guide passage 604, and the entrance portion 730a of the second V prize passage 730 and the normal guide passage 44(b) and 45(b)]. As a result, the game ball can enter from the normal guide path 604 to the second V winning path 730, and both paths 604 and 730 are in a communicating state.

In addition, when the movable accessory 722 protrudes from the stage portion 432, the exit portion 730b of the second V prize passage 730 faces the entrance portion 737a of the bypass passage 737 formed on the rear side of the middle rear wall portion 400b of the housing 400. It will be in the facing state. As a result, the game ball can enter the bypass passage 737 from the second V winning passage 730, and both passages 730 and 737 are in a communicating state.

That is, when the movable accessory 722 protrudes from the stage portion 432, the normal guide passage 604 and the bypass passage 737 are in communication through the second V winning passage 730 so that the game ball can pass through.

The passage width of the bypass passage 737 is set to a width that allows game balls to pass through one by one. An exit portion 737 b of the bypass passage 737 opens in a lower rear wall portion 400 c of the housing 400 that defines the back side of the type lottery area 408 above the 15R ball entrance 731 . As a result, when the movable accessory 722 protrudes from the stage portion 432, the game balls normally guided to the guide passage 604 are directly guided to the guide passage 604 without going through the rotor unit 410 and the type sorting mechanism portion 741, which will be described later. It becomes possible to guide to the ball entrance 731. That is, by activating the movable accessory 722, it is possible to avoid sorting by the rotator unit 410 and the type sorting mechanism section 741. FIG.

The bypass passage 737 is provided with a second special ball entry detection switch 738 as special ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball passing therethrough. When the game ball enters the bypass passage 737 and is detected by the second special ball entry detection switch 738, the right to generate a big hit state (special game state) is granted. .

However, although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when a ball is detected by the second special ball detection switch 738, the jackpot state is not immediately started, and the game ball is 15R ball. After the ball hits the mouth 731, the jackpot state is started.

In addition, when the game ball remains in the second V winning passage 730 and the movable accessory 722 descends and returns to the accommodation state, the remaining ball is guided to the bypass passage 737 through the lower passage 739. , and is configured to be detected by the second special incoming ball detection switch 738 .

In addition, in this embodiment, when the game ball is detected by the first special ball-entering detection switch 461 or the second special ball-entering detection switch 738, the upper plate 19 (or the lower plate 15) is 10 It is configured such that one game ball is paid out. Of course, the number of game balls to be paid out in response to these entering ball detection switches is not limited to ten, and may be any other number. Further, it may be configured such that no game ball is paid out when the game ball is detected by these entering ball detection switches (the number of prize balls is 0).

Hereinafter, the above-mentioned "jackpot caused by a game ball entering the 1st V winning passage 427" and "jackpot caused by a game ball entering the bypass passage 737 via the 2nd V winning passage 730" are common. It may be called a "V winning jackpot".

Next, the type lottery area 408 will be described in detail. In the type lottery area 408, there are a 15R ball entrance 731 that gives a "15 rounds" jackpot state (15 rounds jackpot) when a game ball enters, and a "7 rounds" when a game ball enters. A 7R ball entrance 732 where a jackpot state (7 round jackpot) is awarded, and a 3R ball entrance 733 where a "3 round" jackpot state (3 round jackpot) is awarded when a gaming ball enters. is provided. Here, the "15R ball entrance 731", the "7R ball entrance 732" and the "3R ball entrance 733" constitute the "type corresponding ball entrance means" in this embodiment.

Also, the 15R ball entrance 731 is provided with a 15R ball entrance detection switch 734 for detecting a game ball that has entered here. Similarly, the 7R ball entrance 732 is provided with a 7R ball entrance detection switch 735 that detects a game ball that has entered here, and the 3R ball entrance 733 is provided with a 3R that detects a game ball that has entered here. A ball entry detection switch 736 is provided.

In the type lottery area 408, the destination of the game ball led to the type lottery area 408 via the 1st V winning passage 427 and the connection passage 429 is indicated by a 15R entrance 731, a 7R entrance 732, or a 3R entrance. 733 is provided as a type sorting means (type determining means).

The type sorting mechanism unit 741 includes a start table 742 guided by the game balls drawn out from the outlet part 429a of the connection passage 429, a first bridge plate 744 guided by the game balls passing through the start table 742, and the A second bridge plate 745 to which the game ball that has passed through the first bridge plate 744 is guided, and a 15R guide that guides the game ball that has passed through the second bridge plate 745 and guides the game ball to the 15R ball entrance 731. A passageway 746 is provided.

The start stand 742 is installed in the upper left part of the type lottery area 408, and its upper surface is inclined downward to the right.

The first bridge plate 744 is installed on the right side of the start table 742 and slightly below the start table 742. The left end portion of the first bridge plate 744 is supported so as to be rotatable with the front-rear direction as the axial direction, and the right end side is provided as a free end. It is

The rotation shaft of the first bridge plate 744 is connected to a swinging mechanism (not shown) consisting of a motor or the like on the back side of the lower rear wall portion 400c of the housing 400, and the swinging mechanism is controlled by the main controller 261. The first bridge plate 744 is configured to swing up and down by being driven and controlled.

Specifically, the upper surface of the first bridge plate 744 is tilted slightly downward to the right, and the forward position guides the game ball to the second bridge plate 745. , and a drop position that guides the game ball to the 3R entrance 733 so as to be displaceable.

Then, when the game ball guided to the first bridge plate 744 via the start table 742 rolls to the right end of the first bridge plate 744, if the first bridge plate 744 is in the advance position, The game ball is guided to the second bridge plate 745 .

On the other hand, when the game ball guided by the first bridge plate 744 rolls to the right end of the first bridge plate 744, if the first bridge plate 744 is in the falling position, the game ball enters 3R. It is guided to mouth 733 .

In other words, the first bridge board 744 has a function of distributing the destination of the game ball guided via the start table 742 to either the 3R ball entrance 733 or the second bridge board 745 .

The second bridge plate 745 is installed to the right of and slightly below the first bridge plate 744. The left end of the second bridge plate 745 is rotatably supported with the longitudinal direction as the axial direction, and the right end is a free end. is provided in

The rotation shaft of the second bridge plate 745 is connected to a swinging mechanism (not shown) comprising a motor or the like on the back side of the lower rear wall portion 400c of the housing 400, and the swinging mechanism is controlled by the main controller 261. The second bridge plate 745 is configured to swing up and down by being driven and controlled.

Specifically, the upper surface of the second bridge plate 745 is slightly downwardly inclined toward the right, and the forward position where the game ball is guided to the 15R guide passage 746, and the upper surface is greatly downwardly inclined, It is configured to be displaceable between the falling position that guides the game ball to the 7R entrance 732 .

Then, when the game ball guided to the second bridge plate 745 rolls to the right end of the second bridge plate 745, if the second bridge plate 745 is in the advance position, the game ball moves to the 15R guide path. You will be directed to 746.

On the other hand, when the game ball guided to the second bridge plate 745 rolls to the right end of the second bridge plate 745, if the second bridge plate 745 is in the falling position, the game ball enters 7R. It is guided to mouth 732 .

That is, the second bridge plate 745 has a function of distributing the destination of the game ball guided through the first bridge plate 744 to either the 7R entrance 732 or the 15R guide passage 746 .

The 15R guide passage 746 is installed on the right side of the second bridge plate 745 and slightly below, and its upper surface slopes downward toward the 15R entrance 731 on the right.

In this embodiment, the first bridge plate 744 and the second bridge plate 745 are configured to swing at different cycles. For example, the first bridge plate 744 is configured to swing slightly faster than the second bridge plate 745 .

In addition, in this embodiment, after the first special ball detection switch 461 detects the ball, any one of the 15R ball ball detection switch 734, the 7R ball ball detection switch 735, or the 3R ball ball detection switch 736 is activated. When the entry detection is performed, the jackpot state of the corresponding type is started. Also, after the second special ball detection switch 738 is detected, when the 15R ball detection switch 734 is detected, the jackpot state corresponding to the 15 round jackpot is started. It has become.

From here, the description of the game board 30 is returned to. As shown in FIG. 4, the first starting prize winning section 33a is provided on the lower left and lower right sides of the central prize winning unit 37. As shown in FIG. In addition, the second starting prize winning section 33 b is provided directly below the central prize winning unit 37 .

Further, the second starting winning portion 33b has a pair of opening/closing members 33c that can be opened and closed on both sides thereof. In this embodiment, when the starting opening opening/closing member 33c is in the closed state, the game ball is configured to be unable to enter the second starting winning portion 33b.

In other words, the first start winning part 33a allows the game ball to enter at all times, while the second start winning part 33b is used for the entry assist lottery based on the game ball passing through the through gate 34. When winning, the starting opening opening/closing member 33c is opened, and the game ball can enter the second starting winning part 33b.

Not limited to this, when the starting opening opening/closing member 33c is in a closed state, the game ball becomes difficult to enter the second starting winning part 33b, and when winning the ball assist lottery, opening and closing the starting opening It may be configured such that the member 33c is in an open state and the game ball can easily enter the second starting prize winning portion 33b.

As described above, the first start-up winning section 33a is provided with the first start-up winning switch 224a for detecting a game ball that has entered the first start-up winning section 33a. Similarly, the second start prize winning section 33b is provided with a second start prize winning switch 224b for detecting a game ball entered here. Each starting winning switch 224a, 224b constitutes the "starting winning ball detection means" in the present embodiment.

Then, although the details will be described later, when the game ball is detected by the first start winning switch 224a or the second starting winning switch 224b, it becomes a "hit" or a "loss" advantageous to the player. A lottery will be held to determine whether or not

The "hit" in the win/fail lottery includes a "small win" in which the blade member 404 of the central prize winning unit 37 is opened and a "big win" in which the big prize opening opening/closing member 32a of the variable prize winning device 32 is opened.

In addition, when a winning lottery is performed based on detection of a ball by the first start winning switch 224a or the second starting winning switch 224b, the result of the winning lottery is indicated on the special display device 43, which will be described later. A variable display and a stop display are performed for this purpose.

In the present embodiment, a common lottery is performed when the first start winning switch 224a detects the entry of a ball and when the second start winning switch 224b detects the entry of a ball. , The common special display device 43 is configured to perform variable display, but the first variable display for teaching the result of the lottery performed based on the detection by the first start winning switch 224a is performed. A special display device and a second special display device that performs variable display for teaching the result of the winning lottery performed based on the detection by the second start winning switch 224b may be provided separately. The first starting winning switch 224a or the second starting winning switch 224b may be used as the first or second opportunity winning ball detection means. Furthermore, when adopting such a configuration, each variable display is stored separately, and the corresponding variable display is digested in the order in which it was stored, or one is prioritized over the other. It may be configured as In addition, when adopting such a configuration, the distribution ratio of the type of the big win state to be given when winning the winning lottery may be made different or may be made the same.

In the game areas on both the left and right sides of the central winning unit 37, there are formed downflow areas in which game balls can flow down. The through gates 34 are arranged in the flow-down areas on the left and right sides of the central winning unit 37, respectively, and are configured so that the game balls flowing down here can pass through one by one. The flow area on the right side of the central winning unit 37 may be set as the first flow route, and the flow area on the left side may be set as the second route. Also, the through gate 34 is provided with a through gate switch 225 for detecting game balls passing through the through gate 34 . When a game ball is detected by the through gate switch 225, a ball-entering assist lottery is performed to determine whether or not the second starting winning portion 33b (starting port opening/closing member 33c) is to be opened. Then, when winning the ball-entering assist lottery, the second start winning portion 33b (start opening opening/closing member 33c) is opened for a prescribed time.

In the upper right part of the game board 30, there is a through-gate display device (ordinary symbol display device) 41 that displays the lottery result of the ball-entering assist lottery based on the ball entering the through-gate 34 (ball passing), and each start winning part. A special display device (special pattern display device) 43 for displaying the lottery results of the winning lottery based on the ball entering the 33a and 33b, and the lottery for the operation assist lottery based on the ball entering the special gate 650 (ball passing). A special gate display 44 is provided for displaying the results. The "special gate display device 44" constitutes the "display means" in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, the through gate display device 41 is composed of two lamps, the special display device 43 constituting the first display means is composed of eight lamps, and the special gate display device 44 is composed of two lamps. It is

The configuration of these display devices 41, 43, and 44 is not particularly limited to the configuration described above. It may be configured by a different display device such as a display device.

In addition, in the special display device 43, when a game ball enters the starting winning portion 33 (first starting winning portion 33a or second starting winning portion 33b), a variable display (switching display) is started, and after a predetermined time, when the variable display is stopped, a mode corresponding to the result of the lottery is displayed. The first starting winning part 33a or the second starting winning part 33b may be used as the first or second opportunity ball entry means. Furthermore, the display contents of the special display device 43 are directly controlled by the main control device 261, which will be described later, so that the result of the winning lottery is definitively displayed.

In the case of winning a jackpot in such a winning lottery, the specified time of 30 seconds has elapsed after the large winning opening opening/closing member 32a of the variable winning device 32 was switched from the closed state to the open state, or the variable winning device 32 On the condition that a specified number of 8 game balls wins, one opening and closing operation until the closed state is regarded as one special prize state, and this is repeated 15 times (15 rounds). ) is given.

In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, only when a "jackpot" is won in the winning lottery based on the ball entering the starting prize winning section 33 (the first starting prize winning section 33a or the second starting prize winning section 33b). Instead, when a game ball enters the first V winning passage 427 via the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414, and the game ball is detected by the first special entering ball detection switch 461, the movable accessory 722 ( A game ball enters the bypass passage 737 via the second V winning passage 730), and a jackpot state (V winning jackpot) also occurs when the game ball is detected by the second special ball entry detection switch 738.

Also, during the variable display of the special display device 43, when a new game ball enters the starting winning section 33 (first starting winning section 33a or second starting winning section 33b), the corresponding variable display is , after the end of the variable display being performed at that time. That is, the variable display of the special display device 43 is put on standby (suspended). The maximum number of times that the variable display is suspended is determined for each pachinko machine model. , a total of four variable displays are reserved.

Further, the number of suspension times of the variable display of the special display device 43 is displayed by a special display device suspension lamp 47 provided in the vicinity of the special display device 43 . The special display device suspension lamp 47 of the present embodiment is composed of four lamps, and the number of suspensions is indicated by appropriately switching the ON/OFF state of each lamp.

In addition, when a game ball newly wins the start winning part 33 during the big win or the small win, the variable display for that amount is also suspended, and the variable display is executed after the big win state or the small win state. be done.

In the through-gate display device 41, when the game ball passes through the through-gate 34, a variable display (switching display) for displaying the lottery result of the ball entry assist lottery is started, and after a predetermined time, the variable display is stopped. When doing so, a mode corresponding to the result of the entry assist lottery is displayed. Here, when the lottery result of the ball-entering assist lottery is a lottery result corresponding to the opening of the starting port opening/closing member 33c, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the through-gate display device 41, and the variable display is stopped. After that, the starting port opening/closing member 33c is opened. Further, the through-gate display device 41 is directly controlled by the main control device 261, which will be described later, to display the result of the ball-entering assist lottery.

Further, when a game ball newly passes through the through gate 34 during the variable display of the display device 41 for the through gate, the variable display for that amount is performed after the end of the variable display being performed at that time. It is configured. That is, the variable display of the through-gate display device 41 is put on standby (suspended). The maximum number of times the variable display is suspended is determined for each pachinko machine model. The gate holding lamp 48 is turned on to display. The through-gate suspension lamp 48 of the present embodiment is composed of four lamps, and the number of suspensions is taught by appropriately switching the ON/OFF state of each lamp.

In the special gate display device 44, when the game ball passes through the special gate 650, a variable display (switching display) for displaying the lottery result of the operation assist lottery is started, and after a predetermined time, the variable display is stopped. At that time, a mode corresponding to the result of the operation assist lottery is displayed. Here, when the lottery result of the operation assist lottery is the winning result of activating the movable accessory 722, after the predetermined stop result is displayed on the special gate display device 44 and the variable display is stopped, the movable Role 722 is activated. Further, the display contents of the special gate display device 44 are directly controlled by the main control device 261, which will be described later, so that the result of the operation assist lottery is definitively displayed.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, during the variable display of the special gate display device 44 and during the operation of the movable accessory 722, the game ball newly passes through the special gate 650 and is activated by the special gate switch 651. Even if it is detected, the variation display (actuation assist lottery result) for that amount is not withheld.

A performance display device 42 is provided above the central winning unit 37 . The effect display device 42 is composed of a liquid crystal display device, and display contents are controlled by a sub-control device 262 and a display control device 45, which will be described later. In the effect display device 42, auxiliary display contents are determined by the sub-control device 262 based on commands from the main control device 261 so as to correspond to the variable display and lottery results displayed on the special display device 43. , the display is performed by a display control device 45, which will be described later.

The variable winning device 32 is arranged in the center of the lower portion of the game area (game board 30). In addition, the variable winning device 32 is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot win, and when a big win occurs, the big winning opening opening/closing member 32a is opened so that the game balls can enter the big winning opening. It is in an open state.

Next, the rear configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. On the back of the pachinko machine 10, various control boards are arranged vertically and horizontally, and some of them are arranged so as to be overlapped in the front and back, and a game ball supply device (payout mechanism) for supplying game balls. and a resin protective cover, etc. are attached. Since the dispensing mechanism and the protective cover are integrated as one unit, and the resin portion is generally called the back pack, the unit is called "back pack unit 203" here.

First, the rear configuration of the game board 30 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, on the rear surface of the game board 30, a resin-made frame cover 213 that covers the center winning unit 37 and the like from behind is provided so as to protrude rearward. A display control device 45 and a sub-control device 262 are detachably attached to the back side of the frame cover 213 .

The display control device 45 is housed in a substrate box 45 a and fixed to the rear side of the frame cover 213 . The sub-controller 262 is accommodated in a substrate box 262a and fixed to the rear side of the display control device 45 (substrate box 45a). Also, the board boxes 45a and 262a are made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the inside can be visually recognized.

Below the frame cover 213, a back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 so as to cover the general winning section 31, the variable winning device 32, the starting winning section 33 and the like from behind. The back frame set 215 includes a ball recovery mechanism (not shown) for recovering game balls that have won various prizes. The game balls collected by this ball collecting mechanism are guided to a discharge passage portion 217 which will be described later, and discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 from a discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217 .

Also, in this embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the main controller 261 . More specifically, a substrate box 263 in which a main controller 261 is mounted is rotatably pivoted to the back frame set 215 and can be opened rearward.

The main controller 261 is housed in a substrate box 263 made of transparent resin material or the like. The board box 263 includes a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and these box base and box cover are connected by a sealing member. The board box 263 connected by the sealing member is configured so that it cannot be opened unless a predetermined trace is left. As a result, it is possible to easily discover that the board box 263 has been illegally opened.

Further, the back frame set 215 is provided with a first board relay board (not shown) electrically connected to the general winning switch 221, the count switch 223 and the through gate switch 225 via cable connectors. . This first board relay board relays the general winning switch 221 and the like and the main controller 261, and is electrically connected to the main controller 261 via a cable connector.

Further, the back frame set 215 is provided with a second board relay board (not shown) electrically connected to various switches provided in the central winning unit 37 via cable connectors. Specifically, the second board surface relay board includes an internal ball entry detection switch 437, a first special ball entry detection switch 461, a non-special entry ball detection switch 462, a round entry detection switch (15R entry detection switch 734, 7R entry It is electrically connected to the ball detection switch 735, the 3R ball entry detection switch 736), the second special ball entry detection switch 738, and the special gate switch 651, respectively. This second board relay board relays various switches provided in the central winning unit 37 and the main controller 261, and like the first board relay board, it connects with the main controller 261 via a cable connector. electrically connected.

On the other hand, the start winning switches 224a and 224b for detecting the ball entering the start winning portions 33a and 33b are directly connected to the main controller 261 via a connector cable without going through the relay board.

Under the above configuration, the detection results detected by the various incoming ball detection switches are taken into the main controller 261 . Then, a payout command (the number of game balls to be paid out) according to the winning situation of each time is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the payout control device 311, and based on the output signal from the payout control device 311, a predetermined number of game balls is sent. are paid out (except when detected by the through gate switch 225, the non-special ball entry detection switch 462, the round entry detection switches 734, 735, 736, and the special gate switch 651).

In addition, although not shown, on the back side of the game board 30, a solenoid for opening and closing the large winning opening opening/closing member 32a is provided by the variable winning device 32. A starting port solenoid is provided for opening and closing the pair of starting port opening/closing members 33c. The back frame set 215 is also provided with a third board relay board (not shown) that relays these solenoids and the main controller 261 .

Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, the back pack unit 203 is formed by integrating a resin-molded back pack 351 and a game ball payout mechanism 352 . The back pack unit 203 is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the left side (the right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened rearward about an opening/closing axis extending in the vertical direction. ing. In addition, an external terminal plate 240 is provided on the upper left portion of the back pack unit 203 (upper right portion in FIG. 5).

The external terminal board 240 is for relaying transmission of various kinds of information to a game hall computer or the like, and is provided with a plurality of external connection terminals. For the sake of convenience, no reference numerals are attached, but for example, terminals for outputting information about the current game state (jackpot state, time reduction mode, etc.), front frame set 14 detected by open detection switches 91 and 92 described later, and inner A terminal for outputting information about the opening of the frame 12, a terminal for outputting information about various error states such as ball entry error, lower tray full error, tank no ball error, payout error, payout from payout control device 311 A terminal or the like is provided for outputting information about the number of winning balls.

The back pack 351 is integrally formed of, for example, ABS resin, and has a protective cover portion 354 that protrudes rearward from the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 354 has a shape in which left and right side surfaces and an upper surface are closed and only a lower surface is opened, and has a size sufficient to cover at least the frame cover 213 . However, in this embodiment, the protective cover portion 354 is configured to cover the upper portion and the right portion (the left portion in FIG. 5) of the board box 263 as well. As a result, in the closed state of the back pack unit 203, the sealing member provided on the right side of the board box 263 and the terminal section (board side connector) provided along the upper edge of the main controller 261 are covered. It will happen.

The dispensing mechanism section 352 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover section 354 . Namely, above the protective cover portion 354, a tank 355 which opens upward is provided, and the tank 355 is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall. Below the tank 355 is connected a tank rail 356 which has, for example, two rows of ball passages in the horizontal direction and is gently inclined toward the downstream side. Concatenated. A payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 357, and payout of the required number of game balls is appropriately performed by a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor. The game balls paid out from the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper tray 19 and the like.

In the payout mechanism section 352, a payout relay board 381 for relaying a payout command signal from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358 is installed, and a power switch board 382 for taking in the main power supply from the outside is installed. there is The power switch board 382 is supplied with a main power supply of, for example, 24 V AC via a voltage converter, and is turned on or off by a switching operation of the power switch 382a.

Below the back pack unit 203 (board box 263), a lower frame set 251 that is pivotally supported by the left side (the right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12 and that can be opened rearward is provided. As shown in FIG. 6, the lower frame set 251 is formed with a discharge passage portion 217 into which the game balls collected by the ball collection mechanism described above flow in. A discharge chute (not shown) for discharging the pachinko machine 10 to the outside is formed.

That is, the game balls that have won prizes in the general prize winning section 31 and the like are collected via the ball recovery mechanism of the back frame set 215 and discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute of the discharge passage section 217 . The out port 36 is similarly connected to the discharge passage portion 217, and game balls that have not won any winning means are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute.

In this embodiment, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are configured as separate bodies and can be opened and closed independently, but the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are integrally formed. It is also possible to

In addition, as shown in FIG. 5, on the back side of the lower frame set 251, a payout control device 311, a firing control device 312, a power supply device 313, and a card unit connection board 314 are detachably attached in a state of being stacked back and forth. It is

The firing control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are housed in a board box 313 a and fixed to the back side of the lower frame set 251 . For the sake of convenience, the launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are described as independent control devices, but they are actually configured by one substrate (printed circuit board).

Also, the payout control device 311 is housed in the board box 311a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (the firing control device 312 and the power supply device 313). The board box 311a housing the payout control device 311 is provided with a sealing member in the same manner as the board box 263 housing the above-described main control device 261 so that a trace of the opening of the board box 311a remains. It's becoming

In addition, the card unit connection board 314 is housed in a board box 314a and fixed to the rear side of the board box 313a (the firing control device 312 and the power supply device 313).

The board boxes 311a, 313a, and 314a are made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the inside can be visually recognized.

Also, the payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 321 projecting outward from the substrate box 311a. For example, when the state recovery switch 321 is pressed when a payout error such as a ball clogging occurs in the payout motor, the payout motor is rotated forward or reverse to clear the ball jam (return to normal state).

Further, the power supply device 313 is provided with a RAM erase switch 323 projecting outward from the board box 313a. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, and even in the event of a power failure, it can retain the state at the time of the power failure, and can be restored to the state at the time of the power failure when recovering from the power failure (recovery of power). can. Therefore, when the power is turned off in a normal procedure (for example, when the game hall is closed), the state before the power is turned off is stored. to put in.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6, a locking device 600 is provided on the rear side of the right side portion of the inner frame 12 . The locking device 600 is provided with a cylinder lock 600a (see FIG. 1, etc.) exposed on the front side of the front frame set 14. A key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 600a and turned to one side to open the lock. The frame 12 can be unlocked, and the front frame set 14 can be unlocked by rotating it in the other direction. In this embodiment, inner frame 12 is locked to outer frame 11 and front frame set 14 is locked to inner frame 12 .

As described above, the right-side frame-constituting portion 11d of the outer frame 11 is formed with the extending wall portion 83 that covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 5). reference). As a result, it becomes difficult to insert a wire or the like from the back side of the outer frame 11 and operate the locking device 600 with the wire or the like. As a result, the defense performance can be improved. Furthermore, the extending wall portion 83 is configured to cover the right end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 from the back side, and in the closed state of the inner frame 12, The rear pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 cannot be opened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a front frame open detection switch 91 for detecting the opening of the front frame set 14 is provided at the lower right portion of the front side of the inner frame 12 (the right side of the launching device 60), and FIG. As shown in , an inner frame open detection switch 92 for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12 is provided on the lower right portion of the back side of the inner frame 12 (lower left in FIG. 5). The front frame open detection switch 91 and the inner frame open detection switch 92 each have a detection part that can appear and disappear with respect to the switch body, and the front frame open detection switch 91 is provided so that the detection part faces forward, The inner frame open detection switch 92 is provided so that the detection portion faces rearward. When the detector is in a state of protruding from the switch body, an ON signal is output to the main controller 261, and when the detector is pushed toward the switch body and retracted into the switch body, an OFF signal is output. It is configured to output to the main controller 261 . That is, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the detection part of the front frame open detection switch 91 is pressed by the back surface of the front frame set 14 and is turned off. It turns on. Similarly, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the inner frame open detection switch 92 is turned off by pressing the pressing portion 86 integrally formed with the receiving portion 85 of the outer frame 11. When the inner frame 12 is opened, the switch 92 is turned off. The part returns to the protruding state and is turned on.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The main controller 261 (main substrate) is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The main controller 261 constitutes special game state imparting means, opening/closing control means, and the like in this embodiment.

The CPU 501 includes a ROM 502 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 501, and a RAM 503 that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 502. Also, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. However, the CPU, ROM, and RAM may not be integrated into one chip, but may be integrated into chips for each function.

The RAM 503 includes a stack area that stores the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 501 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 501, and a work area (work area) that stores various flags, counters, I/O values, and the like. ) and a backup area 503a.

The RAM 503 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. All data stored in the

The backup area 503a is designed to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power cut when the power is turned off when the power is turned off due to a power cut or the like. (similarly)) and the values of each register, I/O, etc. are stored. Writing to the backup area 503a is executed by the main processing when the power is turned off, and conversely, each value written to the backup area 503a is restored when the power is turned on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation; the same applies hereinafter). is executed in The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 is configured to receive a power failure signal SK1 output from a power failure monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, when the power supply is interrupted due to a power failure or the like. Upon occurrence, power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing) is immediately executed.

If at least the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a are backed up, it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

An input/output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 containing the ROM 502 and RAM 503 via a bus line 504 including an address bus, a data bus, and the like. Connected to the input/output port 505 are a RAM erase switch circuit 543, a payout control device 311, a sub-control device 262, a through gate display device 41, a special display device 43, a special gate display device 44, and the like, which will be described later. With this configuration, the through gate display device 41 , the special display device 43 and the special gate display device 44 are directly controlled by the main controller 261 . On the other hand, the effect display device 42 is controlled via the sub-control device 262 .

In addition, although illustration of various relay boards etc. is omitted for convenience, the input/output port 505 includes a general winning switch 221, a count switch 223, a start winning switch 224a, 224b, a through gate switch 225, an internal ball detection switch 437, Special entry detection switches 461, 738, non-special entry detection switch 462, round entry detection switches 734, 735, 736, special gate switch 651, various detection switches that can constitute predetermined detection means, various substrates, blades A blade solenoid 405 that opens and closes the member 404, a rotating body motor 415 that rotates the rotating body 414, a movable accessory solenoid 725 that vertically moves the movable accessory 722, and swings the first bridge plate 744 and the second bridge plate 745. Various electric parts such as a motor that drives the motor are connected. In other words, the main controller 261 is provided with a plurality of terminal portions (board-side connectors) for connecting connectors of various cable connectors.

The sub-control device 262 (sub-control board) as a sub-control means includes a CPU 551 which is an arithmetic device, a ROM 552 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 551, and a control program stored in the ROM 552. It includes a RAM 553, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data, etc., an input/output port 554, a bus line 555, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit (not shown). It has The RAM 553 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when various programs are executed by the CPU 551 .

The input/output port 554 is connected to the CPU 551 , the ROM 552 and the RAM 553 via a bus line 555 and also to the display control device 45 . Further, the input/output port 554 is connected with the speaker SP, the performance button 125, various illumination parts, and the lamps 102 and 104. FIG.

The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 causes the display control device 45 to perform display control based on, for example, a command signal (for example, a production pattern command such as a variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control device 261, and displays on the production display device 42 Let As described above, in the present embodiment, the special display device 43 controlled by the main control device 261 displays whether or not it is a hit, and the effect display device 42 controlled by the sub-control device 262 , a display matching the display of the special display device 43 is performed.

The payout control device 311 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 358 . A CPU 511, which is an arithmetic device, includes a ROM 512 storing control programs executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 513 used as a work memory and the like.

Similar to the RAM 503 of the main controller 261, the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 includes a stack area for storing the contents of the internal register of the CPU 511 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 511, various flags and counters, It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored, and a backup area 513a.

The RAM 513 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 313 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. data is backed up. If at least the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a are backed up, it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

Backup area 513a, when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power cut when the power is turned on again, the stack pointer at the time of power cut, each register, This is an area for storing values such as I/O. Writing to the backup area 513a is executed by the main process when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the backup area 513a is executed by the main process when the power is turned on. As with the CPU 501 of the main controller 261, the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SK1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 when the power supply is interrupted due to a power failure or the like. When input to the CPU 511, NMI interrupt processing is immediately executed as power failure processing.

In the work area, a payout permission flag set to allow the payout of prize balls by the payout control device 311, a command reception flag set when a command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received, and a main control device 261 A command buffer is provided in which commands sent from are stored.

The payout permission flag is a flag for setting the payout permission of prize balls, and is turned on when a specific command permitting the payout of prize balls is transmitted from the main controller 261 and the specific command is received. or when it returns to the state before power-off. In this embodiment, the specific commands are a payout initialization command that instructs the initialization process of the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, a prize ball command that instructs the payout of prize balls, and a There are three payout return commands sent in the case.

The command reception flag is a flag for confirming whether or not the payout control device 311 has received a command, and is turned on when any command is received. It is turned off when returning to the previous state, and is turned off when the received command is determined by the command determination process.

The command buffer consists of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main controller 261 . The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when a command is stored and read, the store pointer and read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

An input/output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 containing the ROM 512 and RAM 513 via a bus line 514 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 515 is connected to the RAM erasing switch circuit 543, the main controller 261, the firing controller 312, the dispensing device 358, and the like.

The card unit connection board 314 includes a ball rental operation unit (ball rental button 121 and return button 122) on the front of the pachinko machine 10, and a card unit (ball rental unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like. and are electrically connected to each other, take in the command of the player's ball lending operation, and output it to the card unit. Note that the card unit connection board 314 may be omitted in a cash machine in which game balls are directly lent to the upper tray 19 from a ball lending device or the like without going through the card unit.

The shooting control device 312 permits or prohibits shooting of game balls by the shooting device 60, and the shooting device 60 is allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, a firing permission signal is output from the payout control device 311, a sensor signal detects that the player is touching the handle 18, and a firing prohibition button 18a ( 1) is not operated, the shooting device 60 is driven, and game balls are shot at predetermined intervals with an intensity corresponding to the amount of operation of the handle 18. FIG. In this embodiment, it is configured so that it can be fired at an interval of about 0.6 seconds (about 100 shots per minute).

The display control device 45 follows the instruction from the sub-control device 262 and executes the variable display of the decorative symbols on the effect display device 42 . The display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, a video display processor (VDP) 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, and bus lines 530, 531. and An input/output port 554 of the sub-controller 262 is connected to the input port 527 . Also, the CPU 521 , program ROM 522 , work RAM 523 and VDP 526 are connected to the input port 527 via the bus line 530 . An output port 529 is connected to the VDP 526 via a bus line 531, and the effect display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device, is connected to the output port 529. FIG.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the display command transmitted from the sub-control device 262 via the input port 527, analyzes the received command or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received command, and controls the VDP 526. (specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 526). Thereby, display control in the effect display device 42 is performed.

A program ROM 522 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 521, and a work RAM 523 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various programs are executed by the CPU 521. is.

The video RAM 524 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the effect display device 42. By rewriting the contents of the video RAM 524, the display contents of the effect display device 42 are changed. The character ROM 525 is a memory for storing character data such as patterns displayed on the effect display device 42 .

The VDP 526 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an LCD driver (liquid crystal driving circuit) incorporated in the effect display device 42 . Since the VDP 526 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 526 adjusts the timing of each of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524, etc., and intervenes in the reading and writing of data.

In addition, the power supply device 313 includes a power supply unit 541 that supplies power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM deletion switch circuit 543 that is connected to the RAM deletion switch 323. and

The power supply unit 541 supplies necessary operating power to each of the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 541 takes in an AC 24V power supply supplied from the outside, and generates +12V power supply for driving various switches and motors, +5V power supply for logic, backup power supply for RAM backup, etc. These +12V power supply, +5V power supply and backup power supply are supplied to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like. An operating power source (+12V power source, +5V power source, etc.) is supplied to the launch control device 312 via the payout control device 311 . Similarly, various switches, motors, and the like are supplied with operating power through the control device to which they are connected.

The power failure monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power failure signal SK1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 and the CPU 511 of the payout controller 311 when the power is shut off due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 542 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and determines that a power failure (power failure) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. A power failure signal SK1 is output to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. By the output of this power failure signal SK1, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 recognize the occurrence of power failure and execute power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing).

Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 541 normally outputs 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the power failure processing. configured to maintain value. Therefore, the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311 can normally execute and complete the power failure process.

The RAM erase switch circuit 543 is a circuit that takes in the switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323 and clears the backup data of the RAM 503 of the main controller 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout controller 311 according to the state of the switch 323 . When the RAM erasing switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erasing switch circuit 543 outputs a RAM erasing signal SK2 to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the RAM erasing switch 323 is pressed (including power-on due to power failure cancellation), the data in the RAMs 503 and 513 of the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311 are cleared. be.

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described. In this embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 as main control means performs a lottery using various counter information during the game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, based on the detection of the start-up winning switches 224a and 224b, the variable winning device 32 (large winning opening opening/closing member 32a) is opened, the central winning unit 37 (wing member 404 ) and a variable time selection counter used to determine the variable display time (variable time) performed by the special display device 43. C2, the initial value random number counter CINI used to set the initial value of the success/fail random number counter C1, and based on the detection of the thru gate switch 225, whether the second start winning portion 33b (start opening opening/closing member 33c) is opened. A ball-entering assist random number counter C3 used for the entry assist lottery to determine whether or not, and an operation assist random number used for the operation assist lottery to determine whether to operate the movable accessory 722 based on the detection of the special gate switch 651. A counter C4 is used.

Each of the counters C1, C2, CINI, C3, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 as the lower limit after reaching the upper limit. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 (except for the random number initial value counter CINI).

The RAM 503 has a special fluctuation holding area as a holding storage area in which the values of the win/fail random number counter C1 and the fluctuation time selection counter C2 are stored, and a normal fluctuation holding area in which the value of the entry assist random number counter C3 is stored. is provided. Both the special variable reservation area and the normal variable reservation area have one execution area and four reservation areas (first reservation to fourth reservation area).

In addition, in each reservation area of the special variable reservation area, the values of the winning random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2 are set according to the winning history of the game balls to the first and second start winning parts 33a and 33b. Stored sequentially. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to suspend the variable display on the special display device 43 up to four times in total as described above.

Further, in each holding area of the normal fluctuation holding area, the value of the ball-entering assist random number counter C3 is stored in chronological order according to the passage history of the game ball to the through gate 34.例文帳に追加By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to suspend the variable display on the through-gate display device 41 up to four times as described above.

To explain each counter in detail, the hit/fail random number counter C1 is, for example, incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 399. It is configured to return to Normally, when the yes/no random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the corresponding no random number counter C1. The initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter (value=0 to 399) similar to the success/failure random number counter C1, and is updated once for each timer interrupt and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of normal processing. On the other hand, the success/failure random number counter C1 is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 is stored in the success/failure random number counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first start prize winning portion 33a or the second start prize winning portion 33b (timing detected by the first start prize winning switch 224a or the second start prize winning switch 224b), it is stored in the hit/fail random number counter buffer. The value of the hit/fail random number counter C1 is stored in the special change holding area.

In this embodiment, in the win/loss lottery performed based on the value of the win/fail random number counter C1 stored in the special change holding area, one of the lottery results of 'small win', 'big win' and 'loss' is obtained. Winning lottery processing related to the big winning lottery and the small winning lottery constitutes the open lottery processing in the present embodiment.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, the number of random number values that become a "jackpot" is one, and the value is "0". That is, the "jackpot" is won with a probability of 1/400, and the special display device 43 performs a stop display in a manner (combination of lit lamps) corresponding to the "jackpot", and a 15-round jackpot state occurs. It will happen.

In addition, the number of random number values that become the "minor win" is 398, and the values are "2 to 399". That is, the "small hit" is won with a probability of 398/400.

In particular, the "small win" of this embodiment includes a "short win" in which the blade member 404 of the central winning unit 37 is opened for 0.5 seconds, and a "long small win" in which the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds. Hit" exists. Therefore, among the values of the success/failure random number counter C1, "2 to 21" correspond to the "long small win", and "22 to 399" correspond to the "short small win".

Then, when the "short-term small prize" is won, the special display device 43 performs a stop display in a mode (combination of lighting lamps) corresponding to the "short-term small prize", and the blade members 404 are opened for 0.5 seconds. It will happen. Further, when the "long small win" is won, the special display device 43 performs a stop display in a mode (combination of lighting lamps) corresponding to the "long small win", and the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds. It will happen. Here, the function of the main controller 261 that executes the small winning lottery and the big winning lottery and determines the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing members such as the blade member 404 constitutes the opening/closing pattern determination means in this embodiment.

Also, "1" among the values of the success/failure random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to "missing". combination) to give a stop indication.

In this embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with a hit/fail judgment table that is referred to when judging whether or not the value of the hit/fail random number counter C1 corresponds to a "small win" or a "big win".

Further, in the present embodiment, after the end of the jackpot state, while the special display device 43 performs four times of the variable display, a game state is provided in which the variable display time (variation time) on the special display device 43 is shortened. be. Even if the next big win state does not occur after the end of the big win state, this game state ends when the special display device 43 performs four fluctuation displays, and after that, the normal game state is reached. back to

Hereinafter, the game state in which the variable time of the special display device 43 is shortened is called "time shortening mode", and the normal game state in which normal variable display is performed without shortening the variable time is called "normal mode". Specific fluctuation times of the special display device 43 in the "time reduction mode" and the "normal mode" will be described later.

Furthermore, in the "time reduction mode", the start opening opening and closing member 33c of the second start winning part 33b is opened relatively frequently, and the "high ball entry state" that makes it easy to enter the game ball into the second start winning part 33b. becomes. As a result, the starting opening opening/closing member 33c is hardly opened, and the game ball is hard to enter the second starting winning part 33b. , making it easier to enter the game ball into the second start winning part 33b.

Specifically, in the "normal mode", the fluctuation time of the through-gate display device 41 for displaying the result of the ball entry assist lottery performed based on the passage of the game ball through the through-gate 34 is 10 seconds. , the opening time of the starting port opening/closing member 33c in the case of winning the ball-entering assist lottery is 0.4 seconds. On the other hand, in the "time reduction mode", the change time of the through gate display device 41 is 0.5 seconds, and the opening time of the opening opening/closing member 33c in the case of winning the ball-entering assist lottery is 2 seconds.

That is, in the "time shortening mode", the change time of the through-gate display device 41 is shorter and the opening time of the starting port opening/closing member 33c is longer than in the "normal mode". Since the time zone in which the starting port opening/closing member 33c is in an open state becomes longer, the game balls enter the second starting prize winning portion 33b frequently, and the lottery is continuously performed. It will be in a good state of ball retention.

In this way, in the "time reduction mode", when the variable display of the reserved special display device 43 continuously wins a small hit (the blade member 404 is closed once, the variable display is performed, Although the flow of opening is the same, the blade member 404 is opened almost continuously (in quick succession) because the fluctuation time is short. For this reason, it is easy to collectively enter a plurality of game balls into the inner area 401 of the central winning unit 37 .

In addition, in the present embodiment, the probability of winning the "big hit" or "small hit (short small win and long small win)" in the lottery based on the ball entering the start winning part 33, and the "small win (short The opening time of the blade member 404 at the time of occurrence of "small hit and long small hit" is the same in any mode (time shortening mode and normal mode).

In addition, the winning probability of the ball entry assist lottery performed based on the passage of the game ball through the through gate 34 and the winning probability of the operation assist lottery performed based on the passage of the game ball through the special gate switch 651 mode is the same.

The variable time selection counter C2 is configured such that it is incremented by one within a range of 0 to 9, for example, and returns to 0, which is the lower limit, after reaching the upper limit (that is, 9). The variable time selection counter C2 is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the variable time selection counter C2 is stored in the variable time selection counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first start winning part 33a or the second starting winning part 33b (the timing detected by the first starting winning switch 224a or the second starting winning switch 224b), the variable time selection counter buffer The stored value of the fluctuation time selection counter C2 is stored in the special fluctuation holding area of the RAM503.

In this embodiment, the variation time of the special display device 43 is set to "2 seconds" or "3 seconds" when a "small win" is obtained in the winning lottery in the "normal mode". Note that the ROM 502 stores in advance a variable time selection table that is referred to when determining to which of the "two-second variation" and the "three-second variation" the value of the variation time selection counter C2 corresponds. Therefore, the ROM 502 that stores the variation time selection table and the like constitutes the first variation pattern storage means in this embodiment.

Further, the variation time of the special display device 43 is "7 seconds" in the case of "big hit" or "loss" in the lottery in the "normal mode".

On the other hand, the fluctuation time of the special display device 43 in the "time reduction mode" is uniformly "0.1 second" regardless of the result of the lottery ("small win", "big win" or "loss"). . It should be noted that the variation time associated with the special display device 43 is not limited to the four variations of the 2-second variation, 3-second variation, 7-second variation, and 0.1-second variation according to the present embodiment, and different variation times are employed. You may

Also, the size and range of each counter is merely an example and can be arbitrarily changed. However, it is desirable that the magnitudes of the success/failure random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2 are different prime numbers and that they are not synchronized in any case.

Also, the ball-entering assist random number counter C3 is configured as a loop counter that sequentially adds 1 within a range of 0 to 9, for example, and returns to 0 as the lower limit after reaching the upper limit (that is, 9). The ball-entering assist random number counter C3 is periodically updated (once per timer interruption in this embodiment), and the value of the ball-entering assist random number counter C3 is acquired when the game ball passes through either the left or right through gate 34. be.

Usually, there are 8 random number values to be won, and the range is "1 to 8". Then, when the value of the entry assist random number counter C3 is acquired, after the variable display is performed for a predetermined time on the display device 41 for the through gate, the game is stopped in a manner corresponding to winning or losing (a combination of lamps that light up). A display is made, and if the winning is won, the second starting winning part 33b (starting port opening/closing member 33c) is opened for a predetermined period of time.

Further, the actuation assist random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one within a range of 0 to 19, for example, and returns to 0 as the lower limit after reaching the upper limit (that is, 19). The activation assist random number counter C4 is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the activation assist random number counter C4 is acquired when the game ball passes through the special gate 650.

Usually, there are 15 random number values to be won, and the range is "1 to 15". Then, when the value of the operation assist random number counter C4 is acquired, after a variable display is performed for a predetermined time on the special gate display device 44, a stop display is performed in a manner corresponding to winning or losing (a combination of lamps that light up). is performed, and if the player wins, the movable accessory 722 of the bypass mechanism 721 will be in a projecting state for a predetermined time. Therefore, the operation assist lottery constitutes the operation lottery process in this embodiment, and the function of the main controller 261 that executes the operation assist lottery constitutes the "lottery process executing means" and the "status lottery means".

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 will be described with reference to flowcharts. The processing of the CPU 501 can be broadly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 2 msec in this embodiment), and a stop signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). There is an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of . For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt processing and the NMI interrupt processing will be explained first, and then the main processing will be explained.

FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing, which is executed by the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 every 2 msec, for example.

In FIG. 11, first, in step S301, various prize winning switches are read. That is, it reads the states of various switches (except for the RAM erase switch 323) connected to the main controller 261, judges the states of the switches, and saves detection information. When game balls are to be paid out in response to the detection of the switch, the value of the prize ball counter corresponding to this is added, and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the detection signal has not been input, the process ends. In addition, in the external output processing of the normal processing to be described later, a prize ball command based on the value of each prize ball counter is output to the payout control device 311 . Also, when this prize ball command is output, the value of each prize ball counter is reset.

In step S302, random number initial value update processing is executed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this example).

Also, in step S303, random number update processing is executed. Specifically, the hit/fail random number counter C1, the variation time selection counter C2, the entry assist random number counter C3, and the actuation assist random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are set to their maximum values (in this embodiment, they are "399", "9", "9", "19") are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1, C2, C3 and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 503. FIG.

After that, in step S304, the starting winning process accompanying the winning to the starting winning part 33 (first starting winning part 33a or second starting winning part 33b) is executed, and in step S305, the game ball passes through the through gate 34. In step S306, a ball count process accompanying a ball entering the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37 is executed.

In the subsequent step S307, detection by the first special ball-entering detection switch 461 (entering the first V prize passage 427 via the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414) or the second special ball-entering detection switch 738 Executes a special winning process associated with the detection by (entering the bypass passage 737 through the second V winning passage 730 of the movable accessory 722).

Further, in step S308, non-special winning processing accompanying detection by the non-special ball detection switch 462 (entering the out passage 428 via the non-special pocket portion 416b of the rotating body 414) is executed, and in step S309. , special gate passage processing accompanying the passage of the game ball to the special gate 650 is executed.

After that, in step S310, the ball type entry processing accompanying the detection by the round entry detection switches 734, 735, and 736 (entering the 15R entry hole 731, 7R entry hole 732, and 3R entry hole 733) is executed. , once terminates the timer interrupt processing.

Here, the starting winning process of step S304 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In addition, in the execution area and each reservation area of the special variation reservation area, the success/failure random number storage area that stores the value of the success/failure random number counter C1, the variation time random number storage area that stores the value of the variation time selection counter C2, and the suspended variation A start winning determination flag is provided for determining whether the display is based on the entry of a ball into the start winning portion 33 of either the first start winning portion 33a or the second start winning portion 33b.

In addition, in the special variable holding area in the present embodiment, in addition to the area for storing the values of the above-described win/fail random number counter C1 and variable time selection counter C2, in the win/fail lottery based on the ball entering the start winning section 33, the "jackpot "Jackpot occurrence flag indicating that you have won", "Out" flag indicating that you have won, Long small hit occurrence flag indicating that you have won "Long small hit", Short indicating that you have won "Short small hit" A small hit occurrence flag is provided. In addition, a 2-second variation flag, a 3-second variation flag, and a 7-second variation flag that indicate the variation time on the special display device 43 are provided.

First, in step S501, the value of the suspension counter Na that counts the number of suspensions of the variable display triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first and second start winning portions 33a and 33b is the upper limit value (in this embodiment, " 4”) Determine whether it is less than If a negative determination is made in step S501, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S501 is affirmative, in step S502, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the first start prize winning section 33a based on the detection information of the first start prize winning switch 224a. If the determination in step S502 is negative, the process proceeds to step S509, which will be described later. On the other hand, if the determination in step S502 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S503, and the suspension counter Na is incremented by one.

In the following step S504, the values of the hit/fail random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2 updated in the random number update process of step S303 are stored in the first area among the vacant reservation areas of the special variable reservation area. Here, the predetermined condition may be satisfied when various counter values corresponding to the big win are stored in the special change holding area during a predetermined big win state. Alternatively, in a predetermined jackpot state, when various counter values corresponding to the jackpot are stored in the special variable holding area, the predetermined condition may be satisfied at a predetermined rate, for example, 60% probability.

In step S505, the starting prize determination flag in the holding area storing the values of the win/fail random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2 is turned on. In addition, the starting winning determination flag of the present embodiment is set to ON when the suspended variable display is based on the winning of the ball into the first starting winning section 33a, and the flag of winning into the second starting winning section 33b is set to off if it is based on

In the subsequent step S506, a success/failure determination process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 newly stored in the special change reservation area is a value corresponding to a "small hit" or a "big win". In addition, the details of the success/failure determination process will be described later.

In the subsequent step S507, a variable time determination process for determining the variable time in the special display device 43 is performed based on the value of the variable time selection counter C2 newly stored in the special variable reservation area. Details of the fluctuation time determination process will be described later.

After that, in step S508, setting processing of the preceding command is performed. It should be noted that, in the starting command, the reserved and stored variation information (predetermined information used for determining the contents of the variation display) is used to determine which of the first start prize winning section 33a or the second start prize winning section 33b. Information indicating whether it is based on fluctuation information, information indicating "small hit" or "big hit", information indicating fluctuation time, etc. Output to the sub control device 262 in the next external output process (see step S201) be done.

Here, the details of the success/failure determination process in step S506 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, in this embodiment, it is configured to determine also the types of small hits (long small hits, short small hits) in the propriety determination process.

First, in step S5101, it is determined whether or not the value of the hit/fail random number counter C1 newly stored in the special change reservation area matches the value "0" corresponding to the "jackpot". In addition, during a predetermined jackpot state, for example, various counter values corresponding to specific jackpots that can be given a specific game mode such as a high probability mode or a high support mode after the end, such as a variable jackpot, are stored in a special fluctuation reservation area. A predetermined condition may be satisfied when the Then, if the determination in step S5101 is affirmative, that is, if it is determined that a big win state will occur, the big win occurrence flag is turned on in step S5102, and then this processing ends.

Also, if the determination in step S5101 is negative, in step S5103 it is determined whether the value of the hit/fail random number counter C1 newly stored in the special change holding area matches the value "1" corresponding to "out". determine whether or not If the determination in step S5103 is affirmative, that is, if it is determined to be "out", the out flag is turned on in step S5104, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5103, that is, if it is determined to be a "small hit", then in step S5105 the value of the hit/fail random number counter C1 newly stored in the special change holding area is changed to "long small". It is determined whether or not it matches any of the values "2 to 21" corresponding to "hit". If the determination in step S5105 is affirmative, the process ends after turning on the long small hit generation flag in step S5106.

Also, if the determination in step S5105 is negative, that is, if it is determined to be a "short-time small win", in step S5107, the short-time small win occurrence flag is turned on, and then this process ends.

Next, the variation time determination process in step S507 will be described with reference to FIG. The function of executing the fluctuation time determination process and the like in step S507 constitutes the first fluctuation pattern selection means in this embodiment.

First, in step S5201, it is determined whether or not the time reduction mode is set. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5201, in step S5202, the 0.1 second variation flag indicating that the variation time of the variation display performed on the special display device 43 is 0.1 seconds is set to on. , the process ends. That is, in the time shortening mode, regardless of whether the lottery result is a big win, a small long win, a small short win, or a loss, the fluctuation time of the corresponding fluctuation display is uniformly set to 0.1 seconds.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5201, in step S5203, it is determined whether or not the long small hit generation flag has been set in the success/failure determination process performed immediately before. If the determination in step S5203 is affirmative, that is, if it is determined to be a "long small win", in step S5204, the value of the variation time selection counter C2 newly stored in the special variation reservation area is set to "0". , 1”.

If a negative determination is made in step S5204, that is, if the value of the variable time selection counter C2 is any one of "2 to 9", then in step S5205, the variable display performed by the special display device 43 is displayed as a variable time. After turning on the 3-second variation flag indicating that the time is 3 seconds, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination in step S5204 is affirmative, in step S5206, after turning on the 2-second variation flag indicating that the variation time of the variation display performed on the special display device 43 is 2 seconds, this processing is executed. finish.

Also, if the determination in step S5203 is negative, it is determined in step S5207 whether or not the short-circuit small hit occurrence flag is ON. If the determination in step S5207 is affirmative, that is, if a "short hit" occurs, in step S5208, the value of the variable time selection counter C2 newly stored in the special variable holding area is "0, 1". Determines whether or not it matches with either of

If the determination in step S5208 is affirmative, in step S5205, the 3-second variation flag indicating that the variation time of the variation display performed on the special display device 43 is set to ON for 3 seconds, and then this process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5208, in step S5206, the 2-second variation flag indicating that the variation time of the variation display performed on the special display device 43 is set to ON for 2 seconds, and then this process is executed. finish. That is, there is a higher possibility that a longer variation time (3 seconds) is selected when a "long small win" occurs than when a "short small win" occurs.

In addition, if the determination in step S5207 is negative, that is, in the case of a "jackpot" or "loss", in step S5209, the variable display performed on the special display device 43 is displayed for 7 seconds. After turning on the second fluctuation flag, this processing is terminated.

Returning to the description of FIG. 13, after the process of step S508, or when a negative determination is made in step S502, in step S509, whether or not the game ball has won the second start winning section 33b is determined by the second start It is determined by the detection information of the winning switch 224b. If a negative determination is made in step S509, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination is affirmative, the suspension counter Na is incremented by one in step S510.

In the following step S511, each value of the hit/fail random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2 is stored in the first area among the vacant reservation areas of the special variable reservation area. In step S512, a win/fail determination process is performed. The success/failure determination process in step S512 is the same as the success/failure determination process in step S506, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In subsequent step S513, fluctuation time determination processing is performed. The suitability determination process in step S513 is the same as the variation time determination process in step S507, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. After step S513, in step S514, a preceding command setting process is performed, and this process ends.

Next, the through gate passage processing in step S305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S601, whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 is determined based on the detection information of the through gate switch 225. FIG.

If a negative determination is made in step S601, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination in step S601 is affirmative, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, then in step S602, the number of suspensions of the variable display performed by the through gate display device 41 is counted. It is determined whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made here, the processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the determination in step S602 is affirmative, that is, if it is confirmed that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, and the value of the normal reservation counter Nc is less than 4, the process proceeds to step S603, and the normal reservation is performed. The counter Nc is incremented by one.

In addition, in the following step S604, a random number related to success or failure is acquired. Specifically, the value of the entry assist random number counter C3 updated in the random number updating process of step S303 is stored in the first area of the free storage areas of the normal variation holding area of the RAM 503. FIG. After that, the through gate passage processing ends.

Next, the entering ball counting process in step S306 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S7201, it is determined whether or not the internal ball entry detection switch 437 provided at the inlet portion 601b of the lead-in passage 601 is detected. determine whether it did. If a negative determination is made in step S7201, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S7201 is affirmative, in step S7202, a ball entry command is set to the sub-control device 262 to notify that the game ball has entered the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37. When the sub-control device 262 receives a ball entry command, it outputs a ball entry effect sound and lights and blinks a ball entry lamp (not shown) to inform the player that a ball has been entered. configured to notify.

After that, in step S7203, the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter for grasping the number of game balls in the internal area 401 is incremented by one. In the following step S7204, setting processing of a monitoring timer that is taken into account in the remaining ball monitoring processing is performed. In this embodiment, "10000" is set to the watchdog timer each time the internal ball entry detection switch 437 is detected. Also, even if a predetermined numerical value has already been set in the watchdog timer, it will be overwritten with "10000". Note that the monitor timer is decremented by one in normal processing (remaining ball monitoring processing in step S212, which will be described later) performed every 4 mecs. After step S7204, this process ends.

Next, the special winning process in step S307 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S7301, it is determined whether or not there is game ball detection information by the first special entering ball detection switch 461 or the second special entering ball detection switch 738. FIG. If a negative determination is made in step S7301, this processing ends.

On the other hand, when the affirmative determination is made in step S7301, in step S7302, it is determined whether or not it is in a big hit state by referring to a flag during a big hit, which will be described later. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7302, this processing ends. That is, during the jackpot state, a game ball enters the first V winning path 427 through the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414, and the game ball is detected by the first special entering ball detection switch 461, or , The game ball enters the bypass passage 737 via the movable accessory 722 (second V winning passage 730), and even if the game ball is detected by the second special entering ball detection switch 738, The right to generate a jackpot condition is not granted.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7302, in step S7303, the special winning flag indicating that the first special entering ball detection switch 461 or the second special entering ball detection switch 738 has detected the entering ball has already been set. Determine whether or not it is turned on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7303, this processing ends. That is, in a state where it has already been decided to generate a jackpot state (the right to generate a jackpot state has been granted), the first special ball detection switch 461 or the second special ball detection switch 738 Even if the ball is detected, the jackpot for that amount is invalidated.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7303, the special prize winning flag is turned on in step S7304, and then this processing ends.

In this embodiment, at the stage when the first special ball detection switch 461 detects the ball, only the right to generate the jackpot state is given, and which type of jackpot state is given Since it is not determined until the type is determined, the jackpot state is not started until the type is determined.

Similarly, at the stage when the second special entrance ball detection switch 738 is detected, the right to generate a jackpot state is only granted, and the game ball is still entering the 15R entrance ball opening 731. Since there is no state, the big win state is not started until the game ball enters the 15R ball entrance 731 and the "15 round big win" is confirmed.

Next, the non-special winning process of step S308 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S7401, it is determined whether or not there is detection information of a game ball by the non-special entering ball detection switch 462 or not. That is, it is determined whether or not the game ball is ejected outside the central winning unit 37 (internal area 401) through the out passage 428 or not. If a negative determination is made in step S7401, this processing ends. On the other hand, if the determination in step S7401 is affirmative, the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter is decremented by 1 in step S7402, and then this processing ends.

Next, the special gate passage processing in step S309 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S7501, whether or not the game ball has passed through the special gate 650 is determined based on the detection information of the special gate switch 651. If a negative determination is made in step S7501, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S7501 is affirmative, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the special gate 650, in step S7502, it is determined whether or not the third display flag to be described later is on, that is, the special gate It is determined whether or not the display device 44 is performing variable display. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7502, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7502, in step S7503, it is determined whether or not the role product operating flag, which will be described later, is on, that is, whether or not the movable accessory 722 is in operation (protruding state). determine. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7503, this processing ends.

As a result, even if the game ball passes through the special gate 650 and is detected by the special gate switch 651 during the variable display on the special gate display device 44 or during the operation of the movable accessory 722, The operation assist lottery is invalidated, and the right to operate the movable accessory 722 is not newly granted.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S7503 is negative, in step S7504, the value of the actuation assist random number counter C4 updated by the random number updating process in step S303 is stored in the predetermined actuation assist random number storage area set in the RAM 503. do.

In the next step S7505, the special gate passage flag is turned on, and in step S7506, 1 is subtracted from the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter, and then this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 21, a description will be given of the type entry processing in step S310. First, in step S7601, it is determined whether or not the special prize winning flag is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S7601, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7601, it is determined in step S7602 whether or not the 15R entering ball detection switch 734 has detected entering a ball. When the determination in step S7602 is affirmative, in step S7603, the 15R jackpot flag indicating that the 15 round jackpot is set to ON. After that, in step S7604, the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter is decremented by 1, and then this processing ends.

If the determination in step S7602 is negative, it is determined in step S7605 whether or not the 7R entrance detection switch 735 has detected an entrance. When the determination in step S7605 is affirmative, in step S7606, a 7R jackpot flag indicating that the game is a 7 round jackpot is turned on. After that, in step S7604, the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter is decremented by 1, and then this processing ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S7605, it is determined in step S7608 whether or not the 3R entering detection switch 736 has detected entering a ball. If a negative determination is made in step S7608, this processing ends. On the other hand, when the determination in step S7608 is affirmative, in step S7609, the 3R jackpot flag indicating the 3 round jackpot is turned on. After that, in step S7604, the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter is decremented by 1, and then this processing ends.

Next, NMI interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing, which is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt, the state of the main controller 261 at the time of power failure is stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. FIG.

That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like, a power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main controller 261. FIG. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control being executed and starts NMI interrupt processing. finish.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 311 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the backup area 513 a of the RAM 513 by such NMI interrupt. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 interrupts the control being executed. to start the NMI interrupt processing in FIG. The contents are as described above.

Next, the flow of main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This main process is activated upon resetting when the power is turned on.

First, in step S101, initial setting processing is executed upon power-on. Specifically, in order to set a predetermined value in the stack pointer and wait for the sub-side control devices (sub-control device 262, payout control device 311, etc.) to become operable, for example, 1 Execute wait processing for about a second. In the following step S102, RAM access is permitted.

After that, data backup processing is executed for the RAM 503 in the CPU 501 . That is, in step S103, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply device 313 is pressed (ON). do. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 has not been pressed, it is determined in the following step S104 whether or not the power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 or not. Here, if it is not set, backup data is not stored, so in this case also, the process proceeds to step S111. If the power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S105, and in the subsequent step S106, it is determined whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value saved at the time of power failure. , that is, determine the validity of the backup. If the RAM determination value calculated here does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power failure, the backed-up data is destroyed, and in this case also, the process proceeds to step S111.

In the processing of step S111, an initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the sub-control device 262, the payout control device 311, etc., which are sub-side control devices. Thereafter, the process proceeds to RAM initialization processing (step S112, etc.). Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 503 . Instead of using this RAM determination value, it is also possible to determine the validity of the backup based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 503 is correctly saved.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is powered on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323 when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 323 is ON, the process proceeds to RAM initialization processing (step S112, etc.). Also, when power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process of the RAM 503 (step S112, etc.) is similarly performed. That is, the used area of the RAM 503 is cleared to 0 in step S112, and the initial value of the RAM 503 is set in the following step S113. After that, in step S114, interrupt permission is set, and the normal processing described later is performed.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed (step S103: NO), the condition is that power failure occurrence information is set and that the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. Then, the power recovery process (power recovery process) is executed. That is, in step S107, the stack pointer before power-off is restored, and in step S108, power-off occurrence information is cleared. In step S109, a command is transmitted to return the sub-side control device to the game state at the time of power failure, and in step S110, the used register is restored from the backup area 503a of the RAM503. After that, in step S114, interrupt permission is set, and the normal processing described later is performed.

Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. Main processing of the game is executed in this normal processing. As an overview, the processes of steps S201 to S212 are executed as regular processes with a period of 4 msec, and the initial value random number counter update process of step S215 is executed during the remaining time.

First, in step S201, a control signal based on the setting contents of the special display device 43 and the second start winning section 33b updated in the previous process is transmitted to each device, or output data such as a command is sent to each device on the sub side. Execute external output processing such as sending to the control device.

For example, when the effect display device 42 starts the variable display, a variable pattern command is transmitted to the sub-controller 262 . In other words, the variation pattern command is a command signal output to the sub-control device 262 to cause the effect display device 42 to perform a display effect matching the display performed by the special display device 43 . On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 that has input the variation pattern command determines the display mode of the effect display device 42 based on the command, and causes the display control device 45 to display the display mode on the effect display device 42. give instructions to

On the other hand, when stopping the variable display on the effect display device 42 , a confirmation command is transmitted to the sub-control device 262 . In response to this, the sub-control device 262 that has input the confirmation command instructs the display control device 45 to end the variable display (display effect) being performed by the effect display device 42 based on the command. put out.

However, in this embodiment, as will be described later, when the state is in the jackpot state, or when the right to the jackpot state has been granted but the jackpot state has not yet started, the central winning unit 37 is open. In the case of (during the small hit state), since the subtraction process of the first display timer for measuring the fluctuation time in the special display device 43 is not performed (see FIG. 23), it is assumed that the special display device 43 During the variable display of (effect display device 42), when the first special winning ball detection switch 461 or the second special winning ball detection switch 738 is detected and the special winning flag is turned on, the special winning flag is turned on. The determination command is not transmitted to the sub-control device 262 until the V winning jackpot related to the flag ends, and is transmitted after the jackpot ends.

In step S202, the prize ball count signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step S203, the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

In the subsequent step S204, a V winning jackpot setting process is executed. In this process, a game ball entering the inner area 401 of the central winning unit 37 enters the first V winning passage 427 via the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414, and the game ball enters the first V winning passage 427. When detected by the special entering ball detection switch 461, the game ball enters the bypass passage 737 via the movable accessory 722 (second V winning passage 730), and the game ball enters the second special entering ball detection switch 738 The setting of the jackpot that occurs based on the detection is performed. The details of this V winning jackpot setting process will be described later.

In step S205, a first display control process is executed. In this process, what kind of display is to be performed on the special display device 43, the control details of the special display device 43 are set, and hit determination and effect patterns for the effect display device 42 are set. Details of the first display control process will be described later. The function of the main controller 261 that executes the first display control process constitutes the first display control means in this embodiment.

In step S206, a variable winning device control process is executed. In this processing, setting of control contents of the variable winning device 32 is performed as to what kind of control is performed in the variable winning device 32 . As a result, when the jackpot state (special game state) is reached, the opening/closing process of the variable winning device 32 (big winning opening opening/closing member 32a) is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times. The details of the variable winning device control process will be described later.

In step S207, blade member opening/closing processing is executed. In this process, the control contents of the blade member 404 (blade solenoid 405) of the central winning unit 37 are set. Details of the blade member opening/closing process will be described later.

In step S208, a second display control process is executed. In this process, what kind of display is to be performed on the through-gate display device 41, the control contents of the through-gate display device 41, and the like are set. The details of this second display control process will be described later.

In step S209, a starting winning section control process is executed. In this process, the control contents of the starting port opening/closing member 33c of the second starting winning section 33b are set. The details of the starting winning section control process will be described later.

In step S210, a third display control process is executed. In this process, what kind of display is to be performed on the display device 44 for special gates, the content of control of the display device 44 for special gates, and the like are set. Details of the third display control process will be described later. The function of the main controller 261 that executes the third display control process constitutes the display control means in this embodiment.

In step S211, a role product driving control process related to the central winning unit 37 is executed. In this processing, drive control processing related to the rotating body unit 410, drive control processing related to the bypass mechanism section 721, drive control processing related to the type sorting mechanism section 741, and the like are performed.

For example, in the drive control processing related to the rotator unit 410, control such as rotating the rotator 414 in the counterclockwise direction at a constant speed is performed. Control such as swinging the plate 744 and the second bridge plate 745 at a predetermined rhythm is performed.

Further, in the drive control processing related to the bypass mechanism section 721, control such as projecting the movable accessory 722 is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Details of the drive control process (hereinafter referred to as "bypass mechanism control process") relating to the bypass mechanism unit 721 will be described later.

In step S212, a remaining ball monitoring process is executed. In this process, a process of confirming whether or not a game ball exists in the inner area 401 of the central winning unit 37 is performed. The details of the remaining ball monitoring process will be described later.

After that, in step S213, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 or not. Here, if power-off occurrence information is not set in the backup area 503a, in step S214, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has come. Then, it is determined whether or not 4 msec) has elapsed. Then, if the predetermined time has already passed, an affirmative determination is made in step S214, the process proceeds to step S201, and the processes after step S201 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S214 is negative, the process advances to step S215 to update the random number initial value counter CINI. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this example). After this process, the process proceeds to step S213. That is, at the time of determination in step S214, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the previous normal process, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated within the remaining time until the next normal process execution timing. will be executed repeatedly.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S212 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the success/failure random number counter C1) can be randomly updated.

Now, if the power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step S213: YES), it means that the power has been shut off, so the processes from step S216 onward are performed as power failure processing at the time of power failure. will be In the power failure process, first, in step S216, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited. In step S217, the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 are saved in the stack area. memorize to After that, in step S219, a power cutoff notification command indicating that the power has been cut off is transmitted to other control devices (payout control device 311, etc.). Then, in step S220, the RAM judgment value is calculated and stored in the backup area 503a. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of RAM 503 . Thereafter, in step S221, RAM access is prohibited, and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed.

It should be noted that the processing of step S213 is the timing at which a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed at steps S201 to S212 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of step S215 performed within the remaining time. is running on Therefore, in the normal processing of the main controller 261, since information on occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the end of each processing, the amount of data to be stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is smaller than when each processing is in progress. and can be easily memorized. In addition, when returning to the state before the power shutdown, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, it can be easily restored, and the processing load on the main controller 261 can be reduced. . Furthermore, since the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited before data is stored (step S216), it is possible to prevent the data from being changed when the power is cut off, and the state before the power cut-off can be reliably stored. .

Next, the V winning jackpot setting process in step S204 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S1501, whether the special winning flag (see special winning processing in FIG. 18) indicating that the game ball has been detected by the first special winning ball detection switch 461 or the second special winning ball detection switch 738 is ON. determine whether or not If a negative determination is made in step S1501, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1501, the process advances to step S1503 to determine whether or not the 15R jackpot flag indicating that the game ball has been detected by the 15R entering ball detection switch 734 is set to ON.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1503, in step S1504, "15" is set in the round number counter for grasping the number of remaining rounds in the jackpot state, and then the process proceeds to step S1505.

In step S1505, the special prize winning flag is turned off, and the during-big-hit flag indicating that the big-hit state is in progress is turned on. After that, in the following step S1506, the first variable flag indicating that the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 32 is underway is set to ON, and in step S1507, the first variable timer used for the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 32 is set to " 7500" is set, and in step S1508, the winning counter is set to "8", and then this process is terminated.

In addition, when the negative determination is made in step S1503, in step S1509, it is determined whether or not the 7R jackpot flag indicating that the game ball has been detected by the 7R entering ball detection switch 735 is set to ON. If the determination in step S1509 is affirmative, in step S1510, the round number counter is set to "7", and then the process proceeds to step S1505 to perform the same processing as described above.

Also, if a negative determination is made in step S1509, in step S1513, it is determined whether or not the 3R jackpot flag indicating that the game ball has been detected by the 3R entrance detection switch 736 is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S1513, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S1513 is affirmative, in step S1514, the round number counter is set to "3", and then the process proceeds to step S1505 to perform the same processing as described above.

Next, the first display control processing in step S205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the jackpot state flag is referred to. If the determination in step S801 is affirmative, that is, if the game is in the jackpot state, the process ends. That is, during the jackpot state, a new variable display is not started, and the variable display that has already been started is not terminated.

The big win state includes the middle of the big win state (special game state), the opening period before the start of the big win state, and the ending period after the end of the big win state. In general, during the opening period (for example, the period from when the variable display is stopped in the special display device 43 in a manner corresponding to the big win to when the variable prize winning device 32 starts to open for the first time), The effect display device 42 displays the start of the jackpot state. On the other hand, during the ending period (predetermined period after opening of the final round by the variable winning device 32), the performance display device 42 displays the end of the big win state and the mode given after the big win.

If the determination in step S801 is negative, it is determined in step S802 whether or not the special winning flag is on. In addition, the special winning flag is set to ON when the game ball is detected by the first special winning ball detection switch 461 or the second special winning ball detection switch 738 (see step S7304 of the special winning process), and the flag during the jackpot is set. It is turned off when it is turned on (see step S1505 of the V winning jackpot setting process). If an affirmative determination is made in step S802, this process is terminated. In other words, in a state where the right to generate the jackpot state has been granted but the jackpot state has not yet started, the variable display is not newly started and the variable display that has already started is not terminated. .

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S802, in step S803, it is determined whether or not the small hit opening flag is set to ON. Although the details will be described later, the open small winning flag is turned on during the state in which the blade member 404 of the central winning unit 37 is open, that is, in the small winning state.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S803, this process is terminated. In other words, while the central prize winning unit 37 is open (during the small win state), the variable display is not newly started, and the variable display that has already been started is not terminated.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S803, it is determined in step S804 whether or not the special display device 43 is performing variable display by looking at the setting state of the first display flag. When the first display flag is turned on, it is considered that the variable display is being performed, and when the first display flag is turned off, it is considered that the variable display is not performed. Although details will be described later, the flag during the first display is turned on when the variable display of the special display device 43 is started (see step S808), and when the variable display of the special display device 43 is stopped and displayed ( (see step S812).

Then, if a negative determination is made in step S804, that is, it is not in the big win state, the right to the big win state has been granted but the big win state has not yet started, and the central winning unit 37 is being opened (small win state) and not during the variable display of the special display device 43, the process proceeds to step S805, and the value of the suspension counter Na for counting the number of suspensions of the variable display triggered by the entry of the ball into the starting prize winning section 33 is Determine whether it is greater than 0. If a negative determination is made in step S805, that is, if not even one variable display is retained and stored, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S805, that is, if at least one variable display is retained and stored, 1 is subtracted from the value of the retention counter Na in step S806.

In subsequent step S807, a process of shifting the data stored in the special change reservation area is executed. This shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth holding areas of the special variable holding area to the execution area side, and the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → holding The data in each area is shifted such as the first area, the third reserved area→the second reserved area, the fourth reserved area→the third reserved area, and so on. In the shift process, not only the values of the success/failure random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2, but also the big hit occurrence flag, the outlier flag, the long small win occurrence flag, the short small win occurrence flag, the 2-second variation flag, and the 3-second The ON/OFF setting states of the fluctuation flag and the 7-second fluctuation flag are also shifted.

In the subsequent step S808, variable display setting processing is performed. Details of the variable display setting process will now be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the variation information corresponds to "big hit" by determining whether or not the big hit generation flag in the execution area of the special variation reservation area is set to ON. In addition, as a modification, the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the special variation holding area is a value corresponding to the jackpot, by referring to the success/failure determination table again in the same way as the success/failure determination process of the start winning process. It may be determined whether or not it is "0".

If affirmative determination is made in step S901, that is, if a "jackpot" is won in the lottery, in step S902, a direct hit indicating that a "jackpot" has been won in the lottery (a "direct hit"). Turn on the jackpot flag. After step S902, in step S903, it is determined whether or not the 7-second variation flag in the execution area of the special variation reservation area is set to ON.

If the determination in step S903 is affirmative, in step S904, a variation pattern command to determine a variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) to be a jackpot and to transmit the variation pattern (variation information) to the sub-control device 262 settings. In the following step S905, the first display timer used for variation control of the special display device 43 is set to a value "1750" corresponding to 7 seconds. The first display timer is means for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time of the fluctuation display) in the special display device 43, and is taken into consideration when determining whether or not a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation display. . After step S905, the process proceeds to step S938.

Further, if the determination in step S903 is negative, in step S906, a variation pattern (jackpot shortening pattern) that shortens the variation time and becomes a big hit is determined, and further, the variation pattern (variation information) is sent to the sub control device. In order to transmit to H.262 as well, a variation pattern command is set. In the following step S907, a value "25" corresponding to 0.1 seconds is set to the first display timer used for variation control of the special display device 43. FIG. After step S907, the process proceeds to step S938.

Also, if the determination in step S901 is negative, it is determined in step S908 whether or not the deviation flag in the execution area of the special variation holding area is set to ON, thereby determining whether or not it is "out". As a modification, in the same way as the success/failure determination process of the starting winning process, it is again determined whether or not the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 in the execution area is "1". It may be determined.

If the determination in step S908 is affirmative, that is, if it is "out", in step S909 it is determined whether or not the 7-second variation flag in the execution area of the special variation reservation area is set to ON. If the determination in step S909 is affirmative, in step S910, a variation pattern to be out (outlier variation pattern) is determined, and a variation pattern command is set to transmit the variation pattern to the sub-controller 262. I do. Thereafter, in step S911, after setting the value "1750" corresponding to 7 seconds to the first display timer, the process proceeds to step S938.

If a negative determination is made in step S909, in step S912, a variation pattern (loss shortening pattern) that shortens the variation time and causes a deviation is determined, and furthermore, the variation pattern (variation information) is transmitted to the sub-controller. In order to transmit to H.262 as well, a variation pattern command is set. In the following step S913, a value "25" corresponding to 0.1 seconds is set to the first display timer used for variation control of the special display device 43. FIG. After step S913, the process proceeds to step S938.

If a negative determination is made in step S908, that is, if it is a "small hit", the blade open flag is turned on in step S914. In the following step S915, it is determined whether or not the long small hit occurrence flag in the execution area of the special change reservation area is ON. As a modification, in the same way as the success/failure determination process of the starting winning process, it is determined again whether the value of the variable time selection counter C2 in the execution area matches any one of "2 to 21". It may be determined whether or not the "Long Small Win" has been won.

If the determination in step S915 is affirmative, that is, if it is a "long small win", it is determined in step S916 whether or not the 3-second variation flag of the execution area is set to ON. If the determination in step S916 is affirmative, in step S917, the special display device 43 displays a variable display for 3 seconds, followed by a variable pattern in which the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds. A variation pattern) is determined, and a variation pattern command is set in order to transmit the variation pattern to the sub-controller 262 as well.

In the subsequent step S918, a value "750" corresponding to 3 seconds is set in the first display timer. Furthermore, in step S919, the open/close control timer used for the open/close control of the blade member 404 is set to "750" corresponding to 3 seconds. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after the special display device 43 performs the variable display for 3 seconds. After that, the process moves to step S938.

Further, if the determination in step S916 is negative, it is determined in step S920 whether or not the 2-second variation flag of the execution area is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S920, in step S921, the special display device 43 displays a variable display for 2 seconds, followed by a variable pattern in which the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds (long small per 2 seconds A variation pattern) is determined, and a variation pattern command is set in order to transmit the variation pattern to the sub-controller 262 as well.

In the following step S922, a value "500" corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the first display timer. Furthermore, in step S923, the opening/closing control timer is set to "500" corresponding to 2 seconds. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after the special display device 43 performs the variable display for 2 seconds. After that, the process moves to step S938.

In addition, when the negative determination is made in step S920, in step S924, a variation pattern (long small hit shortening pattern) that shortens the variation time and becomes a long small hit is determined, and further, the variation pattern (variation information) is also sent to the sub-controller 262, a variation pattern command is set.

In the subsequent step S925, a value "25" corresponding to 0.1 seconds is set to the first display timer. Furthermore, in step S926, "25" corresponding to 0.1 second is set to the opening/closing control timer. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after the special display device 43 performs the variable display for 0.1 seconds. After that, the process moves to step S938.

Also, if the determination in step S915 is negative, that is, if it is a "short hit", it is determined in step S927 whether or not the 3-second variation flag of the execution area is set to ON. If the determination in step S927 is affirmative, in step S928, the special display device 43 displays a variable display for 3 seconds and then the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds. A variation pattern) is determined, and a variation pattern command is set in order to transmit the variation pattern to the sub-controller 262 as well.

In the following step S929, a value "750" corresponding to 3 seconds is set in the first display timer. Furthermore, in step S930, the open/close control timer used for the open/close control of the blade member 404 is set to "750" corresponding to 3 seconds. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after the special display device 43 performs the variable display for 3 seconds. After that, the process moves to step S938.

If the determination in step S927 is negative, it is determined in step S931 whether or not the 2-second variation flag of the execution area is set to ON. If the determination in step S931 is affirmative, in step S932, the special display device 43 displays a variable display for 2 seconds, followed by a variable pattern in which the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds A variation pattern) is determined, and a variation pattern command is set in order to transmit the variation pattern to the sub-controller 262 as well.

In the following step S933, a value "500" corresponding to 2 seconds is set to the first display timer. Furthermore, in step S934, the opening/closing control timer is set to "500" corresponding to 2 seconds. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after the special display device 43 performs the variable display for 2 seconds. After that, the process moves to step S938.

In addition, when the negative determination is made in step S931, in step S935, a variation pattern (short small winning shortening pattern) that shortens the variation time and becomes a short small winning is determined, and further, the variation pattern (variation information) is also sent to the sub-controller 262, a variation pattern command is set.

In the following step S936, a value "25" corresponding to 0.1 seconds is set to the first display timer. Furthermore, in step S937, "25" corresponding to 0.1 second is set to the opening/closing control timer. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after the special display device 43 performs the variable display for 0.1 second. After that, the process moves to step S938.

In step S938, the first display flag indicating that the special display device 43 is performing variable display is turned on. After step S938, the process ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 23, if the determination in step S804 is affirmative, that is, if the variable display is in progress, the process advances to step S809 to perform first display timer subtraction processing. That is, the value of the first display timer is decremented by one every 4 msec.

Subsequently, in step S810, the value of the first display timer after the subtraction is taken into account to determine whether or not the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed. At this time, when the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the first display timer becomes "0", affirmative determination is made in step S810.

If a negative determination is made in step S810, in step S811, switching display setting is performed to continue the variable display (switching display) of the special display device 43, and this processing ends. Based on the contents of the switching display setting, a control signal is output to the special display device 43 to perform switching display in the next external output process in the normal process. Specifically, the combination of lamps to be lit is set to be switched sequentially. As a result, the variable display (switching display) of the special display device 43 is realized at the timing of the first display control process, that is, every 4 msec.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S810 is affirmative, that is, if the time has come to stop the variable display in the special display device 43, the first display flag is turned off in step S812.

In the following step S813, the stop display setting for performing the stop display on the special display device 43 is performed. Based on the setting contents of this stop display setting, a control signal for performing stop display is output to the special display device 43 in the external output processing in the next normal processing. That is, in the case of a "jackpot", a plurality of lamps constituting the special display device 43 are stopped (for example, lit for a few seconds) in a mode (combination) corresponding to the "jackpot", and the result is a "loss". If it is a "long small win", it is stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to "out", and if it is a "long small win", it is stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to "long small win", and if it is a "short small win". Stop and display in a mode corresponding to "short win".

Further, in the stop display setting process in step S813, a setting process for transmitting a confirmation command to the effect display device 42 to stop display to the sub-control device 262 is performed.

Then, in the following step S814, after the determination information setting process is performed, this process is terminated.

Here, the determination information setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. First, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the direct hit big hit flag is set to ON. If affirmative determination is made in step S1001, that is, if it is determined that a big win has been won in the winning lottery, the big win setting after step S1002 is performed.

Specifically, in step S1002, a flag during a jackpot indicating whether or not a jackpot state as a special game state is set to ON. In subsequent step S1003, the first variable flag indicating whether or not the variable winning device 32 is in the open state is turned on. In this embodiment, the variable winning device 32 is opened when the first variable flag is turned on.

Subsequently, in step S1004, a first variable timer, which is a means for measuring the opening time of the variable winning device 32 and the like and indicates whether or not a specified time has passed since the start of opening, is set. In this example, "7500" corresponding to 30 seconds is set as the value for the first variable timer. As a result, the maximum open time per round (the longest time the variable winning device 32 is open) is 30 seconds.

Next, in step S1005, a round number counter indicating the number of rounds to be executed during the jackpot state (the number of occurrences of the special prize state, that is, the number of executions of the opening/closing process of the variable winning device 32) is set. Here, "15" indicating the total number of rounds is set as the value corresponding to the "direct hit big win".

In the subsequent step S1006, setting processing of a winning counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning device 32 is performed. In this example, the value is set to "8", which indicates the maximum number of balls entered per round. After that, this process is terminated. In the switch reading process (see step S301 in FIG. 11) of the timer interrupt process, it is determined whether or not a ball has entered the variable winning device 32 based on the detection information of the count switch 223. If it is determined that there is a winning counter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the winning counter.

If a negative determination is made in step S1001, that is, if it is determined that the jackpot has not been won in the winning lottery, the process proceeds to step S1007.

In step S1007, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation number counter is set. The fluctuation number counter is means for measuring the duration of the time reduction mode (high ball entry state). In the present embodiment, the time shortening mode is until the special display device 43 performs four fluctuation displays after the end of the jackpot state, and as will be described later, "4" is set as the counter value after the end of the jackpot. .

Here, if the counter value of the variation number counter is "0", this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the fluctuation number counter is set (when the counter value is other than "0"), it is considered that the time reduction mode is in progress, and in step S1008, the value of the fluctuation number counter is subtracted by 1, and step The process proceeds to S1009.

In step S1009, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the fluctuation number counter is "0". That is, it is determined whether or not the current variation display is the fourth variation display after the end of the big win (after the time reduction mode is applied). Here, if the value of the fluctuation number counter is "0", a process of turning off the time reduction mode flag is performed in step S1010, a process of turning on the normal mode flag is performed in step S1011, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1009 that the counter value of the fluctuation number counter is not "0", this processing ends.

Next, the variable winning device control processing in step S206 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S1201, the flag during the big hit is taken into consideration, and it is determined whether or not the game is in the middle of the big hit. If a negative determination is made here, the processing is terminated as it is.

If the determination in step S1201 is affirmative, the count value of the first variable timer is subtracted by 1 in step S1202. In the subsequent step S1203, it is determined whether or not the first variable flag is ON.

If the determination in step S1203 is affirmative, that is, if the variable winning device 32 is open, the process proceeds to step S1204 to determine whether or not the count value of the first variable timer is "0". That is, in the step S1204, it is determined whether or not the opening time of the variable prize winning device 32 per round, which is set when the first variable flag is turned on, remains.

If the determination in step S1204 is negative, the process advances to step S1205 to determine whether or not the value of the winning counter is "0". That is, it is determined whether or not the number of game balls winning the variable winning device 32 has reached a specified number per round (eight in this example). If a negative determination is made in step S1205, that is, if the timing for closing the variable prize winning device 32 (timing for ending the round) has not yet arrived, this process ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1204 or step S1205, the process advances to step S1206 to determine whether or not the counter value of the round number counter is "0". That is, it is determined whether or not the number of rounds (the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened) has reached the specified number of times.

If the determination in step S1206 is affirmative, end setting processing is performed in step S1207, and this processing ends. Details of the end setting process will be described later.

If the determination in step S1206 is negative, that is, if the number of rounds has not reached the specified number of times, in step S1208, round forward processing is performed, and this processing ends. In the round forwarding process, 1 is subtracted from the value of the round number counter. In other words, the opening/closing process of the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly performed until the number of executed rounds reaches the predetermined number of times. Also, in the round forwarding process, the first variable flag is turned off, and a wait time (interval time) until the next round is started is set for the first variable timer.

Then, if the determination in step S1203 is negative, that is, if it is during the interval period between rounds, the process advances to step S1209 to determine whether or not the value of the first variable timer is "0". .

If the determination in step S1209 is affirmative, that is, if the interval period has ended and the timing for starting the next round has arrived, round start processing is performed in step S1210. In the round start process, the first variable flag is turned on, the opening time of the variable winning device 32 per round ("7500" in this example) is set for the first variable timer, and the winning counter is set to The maximum winning number per round ("8" in this example) is set. If the determination in step S1209 is negative, or if the round start process is completed in step S1210, this process ends.

Various control signals are output to the variable winning device 32 in the external output process of the next normal process based on the on/off state of the first variable flag. When the first variable flag is ON, a control signal for opening the variable winning device 32 is output, and the variable winning device 32 is in an open state. On the other hand, when the first variable flag is off, a control signal for closing the variable winning device 32 is output, and the variable winning device 32 is closed.

Here, the end setting processing in step S1207 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S1301, the first variable flag is turned off. In the following step S1302, the jackpot middle flag is turned off. After that, in step S1303, the time reduction mode flag is set to ON. That is, in the present embodiment, after the jackpot state of all jackpot types of "direct hit jackpot" and "V prize jackpot" ("15 round jackpot", "7 round jackpot", and "3 round jackpot") , the time reduction mode is provided.

After step S1303, in step S1304, the normal mode flag is turned off, and in step S1305, "4" is set in the fluctuation number counter, and then the process proceeds to step S1306. That is, after the end of the jackpot, the time shortening mode is set until the variable display is performed four times. In step S1306, processing for turning off various jackpot flags is performed. After step S1306, the process ends.

Next, the blade member opening/closing process in step S207 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not the blade open flag (see step S914 of the variable display setting process) is turned on. If a negative determination is made in step S1801, this processing ends.

On the other hand, when the affirmative determination is made in step S1801, in step S1802, it is determined whether or not the small hit open flag indicating that the blade member 404 is being opened is on. If a negative determination is made in step S1802, that is, if the blade member 404 is to be released by winning the "small win", the process proceeds to step S1803.

In step S1803, it is determined whether or not the value of the open/close control timer is "0". In addition, as described above, when it is determined that the "small winning" is won in the variable display setting process, the opening and closing control timer corresponds to the same time as the variable display variable time performed by the special display device 43. A value is set (see steps S919, S923, S926, S930, S934, and S937). Therefore, at the same time when the corresponding variable display ends, the determination is also affirmative.

If the determination in step S1803 is negative, the value of the open/close control timer is decremented by 1 in step S1804, and this process ends. On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step S1803, that is, if the timing to open the blade member 404 has arrived, in step S1805, while turning on the small hit open flag, in step S1806, the blade member 404 Perform processing to open.

After that, in step S1807, it is determined whether or not the long small hit generation flag in the execution area of the special change reservation area is set to ON. If the determination in step S1807 is affirmative, in step S1808, a value "375" corresponding to 1.5 seconds is set for the open/close control timer, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S1807 is negative, in step S1809 a value "125" corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set for the open/close control timer, and this processing ends.

If the determination in step S1802 is affirmative, it is determined in step S1810 whether or not the value of the open/close control timer is "0". If the determination in step S1810 is negative, the value of the opening/closing control timer is decremented by 1 in step S1811, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1810, that is, if the timing for closing the blade member 404 has arrived, the small hit open flag is turned off in step S1812, and the blade open flag is turned off in step S1813. It is turned off, and in step S1814, a process for closing the blade member 404 is performed, and then this process ends. Therefore, the function of executing the blade member opening/closing process in step S207 can execute the opening/closing operation of the variable ball entry means in the present embodiment a predetermined number of times (the open game state in which the variable ball entry means is opened in a predetermined manner can be executed). This constitutes opening/closing control means.

Next, the second display control processing of step S208 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2101, the setting state of the second display flag indicating whether or not the through-gate display device 41 is performing variable display is checked, and the through-gate display device 41 is performing variable display (switching display). or not. Specifically, when the second display flag is ON, it is assumed that the through-gate display device 41 is performing variable display, and when the second display flag is OFF, the through-gate display device 41 , it is considered to be in the stopped display, which corresponds to the state in which the variable display is stopped.

If the determination in step S2101 is negative, the process advances to step S2102 to determine whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is greater than zero. At this time, if the value of the normal reservation counter Nc is 0, the process is terminated.

If the variable display is not in progress and the value of the normal hold counter Nc is greater than 0, the process proceeds to step S2103. In step S2103, 1 is subtracted from the normal hold counter Nc. In step S2104, a process of shifting the data stored in the normal variation reservation area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth reserve areas of the normal variable reserve area to the execution area side. The data in each area is shifted in the order of reserved first area, reserved third area→reserved second area, reserved fourth area→reserved third area, and so on.

Then, in step S2105, start setting processing is executed. In this processing, processing is performed to indicate that the condition for performing variable display (switching display) in the through-gate display device 41 has been established. Specifically, the setting process of the second display timer is performed while turning on the second display flag. The second display timer is means for measuring the fluctuation time (residual time) of the fluctuation display performed by the through-gate display device 41. be considered.

In this embodiment, the time shortening mode in which the ball is in a high ball entry state and the normal mode have different fluctuation times of the variable display in the through-gate display device 41. In the time shortening mode, the second display timer A value "125" corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set, and in the normal mode, a value "1250" corresponding to 5 seconds is set for the second display timer. Of the jackpots, for example, the game state of a specific jackpot in which a specific game mode such as a high probability mode or a high support mode can be given after the end of a variable jackpot, or the opening period may be set as a predetermined open game state. It should be noted that during the jackpot state, "1250" is set for the second display timer as in the normal mode.

After step S2105 ends, the second display control process ends. When a control signal for starting variable display (switching display) is output to the through-gate display device 41 in the next external output processing of the normal processing based on the setting in the start setting processing, A variable display (switching display) is started on the through-gate display device 41 .

If the determination in step S2101 is affirmative, that is, if the through-gate display device 41 is performing variable display, the flow advances to step S2106 to perform second display timer subtraction processing. Each time this process is performed, the count value of the second display timer is decremented by one.

Subsequently, proceeding to step S2107, it is determined whether or not the count value of the second display timer is "0". That is, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2107, the second display flag is turned off in step S2108, and stop display setting for performing stop display on the through-gate display device 41 is performed in step S2109. Then, based on the setting contents of the stop display setting, a control signal for performing stop display is output to the through-gate display device 41 in the external output processing in the next normal processing.

It should be noted that, as described above, whether or not the game is won is determined based on the value of the ball-entering assist random number counter C3 stored in the execution area of the normal variation reservation area. Specifically, "1 to 8" among the numerical values 0 to 9 of the entry assist random number counter C3 are the winning values.

Subsequently, the process advances to step S2110 to perform determination information setting processing, and ends this processing. In this process, if the stop display corresponds to winning, a setting process for opening and closing the second start winning portion 33b (start opening opening/closing member 33c) is performed. Specifically, the second variable flag is turned on and the open time is set in the second variable timer.

The second variable flag is discrimination information for discriminating whether or not the second starting winning part 33b (starting port opening/closing member 33c) is in the open state.

The second variable timer is means for measuring the opening time (remaining time) of the second starting prize winning section 33b, and is taken into account when determining whether or not a specified time has elapsed since the start of opening. In the present embodiment, the opening time of the second start winning portion 33b (starting port opening/closing member 33c) differs between the time shortening mode, which is a high ball winning state, and the normal mode, and in the time shortening mode, the second variable A value "500" corresponding to 2 seconds is set for the timer, and a value "100" corresponding to 0.4 seconds is set for the second variable timer in the normal mode. Incidentally, during the jackpot state, "100" is set for the second variable timer as in the normal mode.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S2107 is negative, in step S2111, switching display setting is performed to continue the variable display (switching display) of the through-gate display device 41, and this processing ends. Then, based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, a control signal for performing switching display is output to the through-gate display device 41 in the external output processing in the next normal processing. Specifically, the combination of lamps to be lit is set to be switched sequentially. As a result, the variable display (switching display) of the through-gate display device 41 is realized at the timing of the second display control process, that is, every 4 msec.

Next, the starting winning section control processing of step S209 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the second variable flag indicating whether or not the second start winning portion 33b (start opening/closing member 33c) is in the open state is turned on. Here, if it is determined that the second variable flag is not ON (the second starting prize winning section 33b is in the closed state), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S2201 is affirmative, that is, if the second variable flag is ON, it is assumed that the second start winning section 33b is open, and the second variable timer subtraction process is performed in step S2202. Each time this process is performed, the value of the second variable timer is decremented by one.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S2203, and the value of the second variable timer after the above subtraction is taken into account to determine whether or not the specified opening time has elapsed. Here, when the specified opening time has passed, that is, when the value of the second variable timer becomes "0", affirmative determination is made in step S2203. If a negative determination is made here, the processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2203, the process proceeds to step S2204, and after performing end setting processing in step S2204, this processing ends. In the end setting process of step S2204, a process of turning off the second variable flag is performed.

Various control signals are output to the second starting winning section 33b in the next external output process of the normal process based on the ON/OFF state of the second variable flag. When the second variable flag is ON, a drive signal for opening the starting opening/closing member 33c is output to the second starting winning portion 33b (starting opening solenoid), and the second starting winning portion 33b is opened. Become. On the other hand, when the second variable flag is off, a drive signal for closing the starting port opening/closing member 33c is output to the second starting winning section 33b, and the second starting winning section 33b is closed.

Next, the third display control process of step S210 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2301, the set state of the third display flag indicating whether or not the special gate display device 44 is performing variable display is checked, and the special gate display device 44 is performing variable display (switching display). or not. Specifically, when the third display flag is ON, it is assumed that the special gate display device 44 is performing variable display, and when the third display flag is OFF, the special gate display device 44 , it is considered to be in the stopped display, which corresponds to the state in which the variable display is stopped.

If the determination in step S2301 is negative, the process advances to step S2302 to determine whether or not the special gate passage flag is on. If the determination in step S2302 is negative, that is, if the special gate passage flag is not ON, the process ends.

On the other hand, if the variable display is not in progress and the special gate passage flag is on, the process advances to step S2303 to turn off the special gate passage flag. In subsequent step S2304, start setting processing is executed. In this process, a process is performed to indicate that the conditions for performing variable display (switching display) on the special gate display device 44 have been met. Specifically, the third display flag is turned on, and the third display timer is set. The third display timer is a means for measuring the fluctuation time (residual time) of the fluctuation display performed by the special gate display device 44. be considered.

In this embodiment, regardless of whether the game state is the time reduction mode or the normal mode, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display is uniformly set to 1 second, which corresponds to 1 second for the third display timer. A value of "250" is set.

After step S2304 ends, the third display control process ends. If a control signal for starting variable display (switching display) is output to the special gate display device 44 in the external output processing of the next normal processing based on the setting in the start setting processing, A variable display (switching display) is started on the special gate display device 44 .

If the determination in step S2301 is affirmative, that is, if the special gate display device 44 is performing variable display, the flow advances to step S2306 to perform a third display timer subtraction process. Each time this process is performed, the count value of the third display timer is decremented by one.

Subsequently, proceeding to step S2307, it is determined whether or not the count value of the third display timer is "0", that is, whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2307, the third display flag is turned off in step S2308, and stop display setting for performing stop display on the special gate display device 44 is performed in step S2309. Then, based on the setting contents of the stop display setting, a control signal is outputted to the display device 44 for the special gate in the external output processing in the next normal processing to perform the stop display.

As described above, it is determined whether or not the prize is won based on the value of the actuation assist random number counter C4 stored in the actuation assist random number storage area. Specifically, "1 to 15" among the numerical values 0 to 19 of the actuation assist random number counter C4 are the winning values.

Subsequently, the process advances to step S2310 to perform determination information setting processing, and ends this processing. In this process, when the stop display corresponds to winning, a setting process for driving the movable accessory 722 of the bypass mechanism section 721 is performed. Specifically, the flag during operation of the accessory is turned on, and the operating time is set to the accessory operating timer.

The accessory in operation flag is determination information for determining whether or not the movable accessory 722 is in operation.

The role product operation timer is means for measuring the operating time (remaining time) of the movable role product 722, and is taken into account when determining whether or not a specified time has elapsed from the start of operation. In this embodiment, a value "1000" corresponding to 4 seconds is set for the accessory actuation timer.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S2307 is negative, in step S2111, switching display setting is performed to continue the variable display (switching display) of the special gate display device 44, and this processing ends. Then, based on the contents of the switching display setting, a control signal for switching display is output to the special gate display device 44 in the next external output process in the normal process. Specifically, the combination of lamps to be lit is set to be switched sequentially. As a result, the variable display (switching display) of the special gate display device 44 is realized at the timing of the third display control process, that is, every 4 msec.

Next, the bypass mechanism control process performed in the accessory drive control process of step S211 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the role product operating flag indicating whether or not the movable role product 722 is in the operating state is on. Here, if it is determined that the accessory in operation flag is not ON (the movable accessory 722 is in the accommodated state), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S2401 is affirmative, that is, if the role product operating flag is ON, the movable role product 722 is considered to be in a projecting state, and the role product operation timer subtraction process is performed in step S2402. Each time this processing is performed, the value of the accessory activation timer is decremented by one.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S2403, and it is determined whether or not the defined projecting time has elapsed by taking into account the value of the accessory actuation timer after the above subtraction. Here, when the defined projecting time has passed, that is, when the value of the accessory activation timer has become "0", step S2403 is positively determined. If a negative determination is made here, the processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2403, the process proceeds to step S2404, and after performing end setting processing in step S2404, this processing ends. In the end setting process of step S2404, the process of turning off the accessory in operation flag is performed.

Various control signals are output to the bypass mechanism unit 721 (movable accessory solenoid 725) in the external output process of the next normal process based on the ON/OFF state of the accessory operating flag. When the accessory operating flag is ON, a drive signal is output to excite the movable accessory solenoid 725, and the movable accessory 722 is in a projecting state. On the other hand, when the accessory operating flag is off, a drive signal is output to de-energize the movable accessory solenoid 725, and the movable accessory 722 is placed in the accommodated state.

Next, the remaining ball monitoring processing in step S212 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S7101, in order to specify the number of game balls remaining in the internal area 401, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter is "0".

As described above, the "remaining balls monitoring counter" is incremented by 1 based on the detection of the internal ball detection switch 437, and the non-special ball detection switch 462, 15R ball detection switch 734, and 7R ball detection switch 735 , 3R incoming ball detection switch 736 and special gate switch 651 are decremented by one.

If the determination in step S7101 is affirmative, that is, if no game balls remain in the internal area 401, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7101, then in step S7102, the value of the monitoring timer for determining whether or not a predetermined time has passed since the game ball finally entered the internal area 401. is "0".

If the determination in step S7102 is negative, the value of the watchdog timer is decremented by 1 in step S7103, and this processing ends. In this embodiment, when a ball enters the internal area 401, "10000" is set to the monitoring timer. Therefore, the watchdog timer becomes "0" 40 seconds after the last ball is entered in the internal area 401.例文帳に追加Also, in this embodiment, the time from when the game ball enters the internal area 401 until it is discharged (specifically, after the game ball is detected by the internal ball detection switch 437, the game ball Non-special entry detection switch 462, 15R entry detection switch 734, 7R entry detection switch 735, 3R entry detection switch 736, or time to be detected by special gate switch 651) is approximately 8 seconds to 30 seconds.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7102, that is, even if the time assumed as the time from when the game ball enters the internal area 401 to when it is ejected has passed significantly, the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter is " 0”, it is assumed that ball clogging has occurred in the inner area 401, and error notification processing is performed in step S7104. For example, control is performed such as lighting the error display lamp 104, outputting an error notification sound, or prohibiting the shooting of game balls. After that, this process is terminated.

Next, the payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. For convenience of explanation, first the reception interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. 34, and then the main processing will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing reception interrupt processing executed by the payout control device 311. As shown in FIG. The reception interrupt process is a process that is executed by interrupting when the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261 . When the payout control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, other processing executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 is put on standby for a while, and reception interrupt processing is executed. When the reception interrupt process is executed, the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is first stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513 in step S3001, and the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is stored in step S3002. Turns on the command reception flag and terminates this reception interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referenced and stored in a predetermined storage area, and the storage pointer is used to store the next received command in the next storage area. is updated.

In this embodiment, the reception processing of the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is performed by the interrupt processing executed when the command is received. In interrupt processing, it is checked whether or not a command has been received before command determination processing (step S3201) is performed. The reception flag may be turned on, and if the command has not been received, the process may proceed to the command determination process. In such a case, whether or not the command has been received is checked by checking the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port at predetermined intervals.

Next, the main processing of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing the main processing of the payout control device 311, and this main processing is activated upon resetting when the power is turned on.

First, in step S3101, initial setting processing is executed upon power-on. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. Then, in step S3103, RAM access is permitted, and in step S3104, an external interrupt vector is set.

After that, in step S3106, it is determined whether information on the occurrence of power failure is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 or not. If power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S3107. No, that is, the validity of the backup is determined. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of RAM 513 . It is also possible to determine the effectiveness of the backup by checking whether the keywords written in a predetermined area of the RAM 513 are correctly saved.

If power failure occurrence information is not set in step S3106, or if backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) in step S3108, the process proceeds to initialization processing of the RAM 513 after step S3115. Transition.

At step S3115, the entire area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and at step S3116 the initial value of the RAM 513 is set. Thereafter, in step S3117, the CPU peripheral device is initialized, and in step S3114 the interrupt is permitted.

On the other hand, on the condition that power failure occurrence information is set in step S3106, and that the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal in step S3108, processing at the time of power recovery process). That is, in step S3109, the stack pointer before the power cutoff is restored, in step S3110, the power cutout occurrence information is cleared, and in step S3111, the payout permission flag for permitting the payout of prize balls is cleared. In step S3112, the CPU peripheral device is initialized, and in step S3113, the used register is restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. FIG. Further, in step S3114, interrupts are permitted.

After the interruption is permitted in step S3114, in the process of step S3122, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a. Here, if the information on the occurrence of power failure is set, it means that the power has been shut off, so the processing from step S3123 onwards is performed as power failure processing at the time of power failure. In the power failure process, first, in step S3123, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited, and in the next step S3124, command determination processing, which will be described later, is executed. After that, in step S3125, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 are saved in the stack area, in step S3126 the value of the stack pointer is stored in the backup area 513a, and in step S3127 the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the backup area 513a. , the RAM access is prohibited in step S3128, and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area backed up in the RAM 513 .

In the processing of step S3122, the power failure occurrence information is confirmed after the processing that is performed when the power is turned on is completed. less and can be easily memorized. In addition, when returning to the state before the power shutdown, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, the return can be easily performed, and the processing load of the payout control device 311 can be reduced. .

Next, timer interrupt processing of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This timer interrupt process is started periodically (with a cycle of 2 msec in this embodiment).

In the timer interrupt process, first, in step S3201, a command from the main controller 261 is acquired, and determination processing of the command is performed.

Here, the command determination processing in step S3201 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S3301, it is determined whether or not the command reception flag is turned on. The command reception flag is turned on when a command transmitted from main controller 261 is received in the above-described reception interrupt processing (see FIG. 34).

If it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is off, no new command has been received from the main controller 261, so this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command reception flag is on in step S3301, the received command is read from the RAM 513 in step S3302, and the command reception flag is turned off in step S3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step S3303, the processing of steps S3302 to S3311 can be skipped until a new command is received, so the control of the payout control device 311 can be reduced.

The type of command read out from the RAM 513 is discriminated in the processing of steps S3304 to S3306. In step S3304, it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a payout initialization command, in step S3305 it is determined whether or not it is a payout return command, and in step S3306 whether it is a prize ball command It is determined whether or not

If the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a payout initialization command, it is determined whether or not the payout permission flag is already turned on in step S3307. Since the controller 261 has instructed the initialization of the RAM 513, the work area (area) of the RAM 513 other than the stack area is cleared to 0 in step S3308, and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set in step S3309. After that, in step S3311, the payout permission flag is turned on, and the payout permission of prize balls is set.

As described above, the main controller 261 performs the initialization process of the RAM 503 after transmitting the payout initialization command, and the payout control device 311 initializes the RAM 513 after receiving the payout initialization command. is performed, the timing at which the RAM 503 is initialized and the timing at which the RAM 513 is initialized are substantially the same. Therefore, even if the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261, the RAM 513 is initialized due to the timing of initialization being shifted, and control corresponding to the received command cannot be performed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of harmful effects. Also, since the payout permission flag is turned on after the RAM 513 is initialized, the payout permission of prize balls can be reliably set.

On the other hand, if the payout permission flag is already turned on in step S3307, this command determination process is terminated without clearing the work area of the RAM 513 and initializing the RAM 513. FIG. That is, the process of step S3307 prohibits the RAM 513 from being initialized while the payout permission flag is set. Since the payout initialization command is a command that is transmitted only when the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on when the power is turned on, it will not be received with the payout permission flag turned on. It is conceivable that the payout control device 311 has recognized it as a payout initialization command due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, if the work area of the RAM 513 is cleared (step S3308) and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set (step S3309) while the payout permission flag is turned on, it will not be paid out if there are prize balls remaining. A bad effect occurs and a loss is given to the player, but since the RAM 513 is prevented from being initialized while the payout permission flag is turned on, the loss to the player can be prevented.

Also, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout return command (step S3304: NO, step S3305: YES), the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power shutdown, In order to permit the payout of prize balls, the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311. That is, when there is power-off occurrence information and the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power-off, payout of prize balls is permitted. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so the read pointer is set to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

Furthermore, if the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a prize ball command (step S3305: NO, step S3306: YES), in step S3310, the received number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls and stored. , the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311 to allow the payout of prize balls. At this time, the payout control device 311 sequentially reads the prize ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer), and adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the commands to the total number of prize balls stored in a predetermined buffer area. and memorize it. Since the payout of prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls is performed based on the prize ball command transmitted from the main controller 261, the prize ball command is a payout instruction command for instructing the payout of prize balls. . In addition, when the prize ball command is received, the payout permission is set immediately, so the prize balls can be paid out early for the win. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so the read pointer is set to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

It should be noted that the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is neither a payout initialization command (step S3304: NO), nor a payout return command (step S3305: NO), nor a prize ball command (step S3306: NO), The command determination process is ended without turning on the payout permission flag.

Here, returning to the flowchart of FIG. 36, description will be made. When the command determination process ends, it is determined in step S3202 whether or not the payout permission flag is turned on in the command determination process. Here, if the payout permission flag is not turned on, this processing is terminated as it is. In other words, it is possible to prevent the prize balls from being paid out before the command is transmitted from the main controller 261 .

On the other hand, if the determination in step S3202 is affirmative, the firing control device 312 is set to permit firing in step S3203, and the state return switch 321 is checked in step S3204. Execute the return operation. By this process, when the state recovery switch 321 is pressed when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging occurs in the dispensing motor, the dispensing motor is rotated forward and reverse, and the ball clogging is resolved (returned to a normal state). .

Thereafter, in step S3205, setting of the lower tray full state or the lower tray full cancellation state is executed according to the change in the state of the lower tray 15. FIG. That is, the full state of the lower tray 15 is determined by the detection signal of the lower tray full switch. When the lower tray is full, the lower tray full state is set. Perform state setting. Further, in step S3206, setting of the no-ball-in-tank state (out-of-ball state) or no-ball-in-tank canceled state (with-ball state) is executed according to the change in the state of the ball in the tank. That is, the no-ball-in-tank state is determined by the detection signal of the no-tank-ball switch, the no-ball-in-tank state, the no-ball-in-tank state are set, the no-ball-in-tank state, and the no-tank-ball canceled state are executed. Run the settings.

After that, in step S3207, it is determined whether or not there is a state to be notified, such as an error state, and if there is a state to be notified, it is notified.

Subsequently, a prize ball and rental ball payout control process is executed. Specifically, payout number setting processing is performed in step S3208, motor control state acquisition processing is performed in step S3209, and motor driving processing is performed in step S3210.

In step S3211, the state return switch 321 is checked, and on the condition that the ball removal is not possible and the ball removal operation is not started, the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the ball removal process. In subsequent step S3212, control of vibrator 360 (vibration motor control) is executed on the condition that the ball is clogged. After that, it returns to the beginning of this timer interrupt processing.

Next, the normal processing of the sub-controller 262 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. First, in step S3901, the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port 554 is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main controller 261 has been received.

If a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of RAM 553 in step S3902. A command buffer of the RAM 553 is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main controller 261 . The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when a command is stored and read, the store pointer and read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

In subsequent step S3903, pending information storage processing is performed to store the variation information included in the preceding command in the pending information storage area provided in the RAM 553. FIG. In the starting command, as described above, whether the first start prize winning portion 33a or the second start prize prize portion 33b is a variable display triggered by the ball entering the start prize prize portion 33 (the start prize determination flag setting), information indicating whether it is fluctuation information corresponding to the jackpot (setting of the jackpot generation flag), information indicating whether it is a fluctuation display corresponding to the long or short information indicating whether the variation display corresponds to the loss (setting of the loss flag), the variation time of the variation display (2-second variation flag, 3-second variation flag, 7-second variation flag, setting of 0.1 second variation flag).

The pending information storage area, like the special variable pending area of the main controller 261, comprises four pending areas (first pending area to fourth pending area) and one execution area. In the pending information storage area, the variation information included in the preceding command is stored chronologically in accordance with the reception history of the preceding command based on the variable display (information stored in the special variable pending area). By adopting this configuration, the sub-controller 262 can also grasp the fluctuation information stored in the special fluctuation holding area of the main controller 261 .

Here, the hold information storage processing in step S3903 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S4101, it is determined whether or not an advance command has been received (whether or not the advance command has been stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). When an affirmative determination is made in step S4101, in step S4102, the pending counter Np for counting the pending number of variation information stored in the pending information storage area is incremented by one.

In the following step S4103, the variation information including the information on whether or not it is a big win, the information on whether or not it is a small win, the information on the variation time, etc. included in the starting command is stored in the first open reservation area of the reservation information storage area. Store in area. After that, in step S4104, the values of various counters used for determining the effect display contents are obtained, and the values are stored in the same holding area as the variation information is stored.

After performing the process of step S4104, or when a negative determination is made in step S4101, the process proceeds to step S4105, and whether or not the variation pattern command is received (whether the variation pattern command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553 or not). If the determination in step S4105 is affirmative, in step S4106, the value of the pending counter Np is subtracted by one.

After step S4106, in step S4107, a process of shifting the data stored in the pending information storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data (including flag information) stored in the first to fourth reserved areas of the reserved information storage area to the execution area side. , second reservation area→first reservation area, third reservation area→second reservation area, fourth reservation area→third reservation area, and so on.

After performing the process of step S4107, or when a negative determination is made in step S4105, this process ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 38, after step S3903 or if a negative determination is made in step S3901, the process proceeds to step S3904, and whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, the start of the previous normal process is performed. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (1 msec in this example) has passed since. If the predetermined time has already passed, the process moves to step S3905. On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the previous normal process, the process moves to step S3911.

In step S3905, update processing of various counters used for determining the effect display contents is executed. In the following step S3906, display setting processing is performed. Here, basically based on the information stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553 when receiving the variation pattern command, various arithmetic processing such as generating a display command to be output to the display control device 45 and output setting of the command are performed. Therefore, the display mode to be displayed on the effect display device 42 is determined here. At this time, the sub-control device 262 performs processing based on a table that associates the types of various effects (variation types) with variation pattern commands.

In addition, the display command is, for example, a command for specifying a series of display effects from the start to the end of the variable display, or a command for specifying a display effect during the big win, and is information stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553. A necessary display command is generated each time. Normally, the display commands related to the variable display generated by the sub-control device 262 are roughly divided into a group of normal variable data and a group of ready-to-win effect data. By sequentially outputting in accordance with a predetermined time order based on , a display effect corresponding to various variation patterns is performed. For example, the normal fluctuation data group consists of normal fluctuation data 1, normal fluctuation data 2, . n, data output is sequentially performed in the order of normal fluctuation data 1→2→ . . . , data output is performed in order of n.

The display control device 45 performs drawing processing in accordance with a command from the sub-control device 262 and starts variable display, etc. on the effect display device 42 . Once the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 261, the sub-controller 262 and the display controller 45 cooperate to continue the effect display until the confirmation command is received. Then, when the confirmation command is received, the variable display on the effect display device 42 is stopped.

Further, in step S3906, it is confirmed whether or not the effect button 125 has been operated, and if it is confirmed that the effect button 125 has been operated, settings are made accordingly. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when "4" is set to the variation counter in the end setting process, or when the value of the variation counter is decremented by 1 in the determination information setting process, the command including that effect is mainly used. The command information is output from the control device 261 to the sub-control device 262, and the sub-control device 262 displays the remaining number of times of the time reduction mode on the effect display device 42 based on the command information.

In addition, in step S3906, when the sub-controller 262 receives an operation notice command output from the main controller 261 based on the game ball passing through the special gate 650, the movable accessory 722 is activated. A configuration may be adopted in which an operation forewarning performance for notifying that it is the intense heat time is performed.

For example, when the game ball is guided to the normal guide passage 604 at what timing by the route distribution member 603, the movable accessory 722 is better. A production or the like is performed to notify that it will operate at the timing.

In the lamp setting process of step S3907, the lighting pattern of lamps/electrical decorations is set in order to synchronize with the effect performed by the central winning unit 37 and the display effect performed by the effect display device .

In the sound setting process of step S3908, the output pattern of the speaker 24 is set in order to synchronize with the effect performed by the central winning unit 37 and the display effect performed by the effect display device 42. FIG. Also, when a command related to sound such as notification of error occurrence is transmitted from the main controller 261, settings for performing these controls are also performed in step S3908.

In step S3909, a customer waiting effect (for example, a demo screen which is set to be displayed when a predetermined time elapses while the display effect corresponding to the variable display of the special display device 43 is not being performed on the effect display device 42). display) and other processing such as control settings.

At step 3910, an external output process is executed to transmit a control signal based on the settings made at steps S3905 to S3909 to each device. For example, a display command is transmitted to the display control device 45 when causing the effect display device 42 to perform a display effect corresponding to the variable display of the special display device 43 .

After the processing of steps S3905 to S3910 performed every 1 msec is executed, or if the determination in step S3904 is negative, the process proceeds to step S3911 to determine whether the RAM 553 stores information on occurrence of power failure. determine whether Note that the power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 261 .

If the power-off occurrence information is not stored, the process advances to step S3912 to determine whether or not the RAM 553 has been destroyed. If the RAM 553 is not destroyed here, the process returns to step S3901 and the normal process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 553 has been destroyed, the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3911 that power-off occurrence information is stored, power-off processing is executed in step S3913. In the power-off processing, generation of interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased. After executing the power-off process, the process loops infinitely.

As described in detail above, according to the present embodiment, the game ball launched into the game area enters the starting winning portion 33 (first starting winning portion 33a or second starting winning portion 33b), and When a small winning lottery based on the winning ball is won, the vane member 404 of the central winning unit 37 opens and closes, and the ball opening 403 is opened for a predetermined time.

When the ball entry opening 403 is opened, the game ball that has entered the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37 through the ball entry opening 403 is dropped through the lead-in passage 601 and into the drop passage 602. be guided to

The destination of the game ball dropped down the drop path 602 is a normal guide path 604 that can be guided to the win/fail lottery area 407 or a special guide path 605 that can be guided to the accessory operation lottery area 409 by the route sorting member 603. distributed to.

However, normally, the route distribution member 603 is in a right inclined state, and since the special guide passage 605 on the right side is closed, game balls falling down the drop passage 602 are guided to the normal guide passage 604 on the left side. will be taken.

When the game ball is guided to the normal guide passage 604, the route distribution member 603 is tilted to the left for a predetermined period of time due to the force received from the contacting game ball. Therefore, if there is a game ball falling down the drop path 602 at this timing, the game ball will be guided to the special guide path 605 .

The game balls guided to the normal guide passage 604 are guided to the success/fail lottery area 407, and their destinations are sorted by the rotator unit 410 (rotator 414). Here, when a game ball enters the first V winning path 427 and is detected by the first special ball entering detection switch 461, the right to generate a jackpot state (V prize jackpot) is granted. The Rukoto.

After that, the game ball detected by the first special entering ball detection switch 461 is guided to the type lottery area 408 and used for determination of the jackpot type. After the jackpot type (number of rounds) is determined here, the jackpot state is started.

On the other hand, the game ball guided to the special guidance passage 605 is guided to the accessory operation lottery area 409 and passes through the special gate 650 . When the game ball is detected by the special gate switch 651 of the special gate 650, an operation assist lottery is conducted, and if the player wins the operation assist lottery, the movable accessory 722 operates for a predetermined time.

When the movable accessory 722 is activated and protrudes from the stage portion 432 , the normal guide passage 604 and the bypass passage 737 communicate with each other through the second V winning passage 730 in the movable accessory 722 .

When the game ball enters the second V winning passage 730 while the movable accessory 722 is in operation, the game ball is guided to the bypass passage 737 and detected by the second special ball detection switch 738. By doing so, the right to generate a jackpot state (V prize jackpot) is granted.

After that, when the game ball enters the 15R ball entrance 731 via the bypass passage 737, the 15R jackpot is started.

In other words, when the movable accessory 722 is in the operating state (protruding state), the game ball guided to the normal guide passage 604 directly enters the 15R without going through the rotating body unit 410 and the type sorting mechanism 741. You will be guided to the spherical mouth 731 .

Main effects of this embodiment will be described below. As described above, in this embodiment, by providing the movable accessory 722 in the inner area 401 of the central winning unit 37, the behavior of the game ball entering the inner area 401 can be changed. Especially in this embodiment, by activating the movable accessory 722, it is possible to perform a game effect that increases the degree of expectation for the occurrence of the V prize jackpot. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a game ball is detected at the special gate 650 (special gate switch 651) of the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37, an operation assist that determines whether or not to operate the movable accessory 722 A lottery is held, and the movable accessory 722 is configured to operate when winning the operation assist lottery.

As a result, the movable accessory 722 does not always move regularly or continuously, and does not operate every time the special gate switch 651 detects the ball entering. It is possible to suppress the monotony of the performance and increase the player's expectation for the movement of the movable accessory 722.例文帳に追加

In addition, by providing a trigger ball entry means (special gate 650) for detecting the movement trigger of the movable accessory 722 in the inner area 401 of the central winning unit 37, based on the behavior of the game ball entering the inner area 401, Since it is determined whether or not the movable accessory 722 is in an advantageous state, etc., the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the inner area 401 of the central winning unit 37, further improving interest. can be achieved.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the special gate 650 is discharged outside the internal area 401, and cannot flow down to the 1st V winning passage 427 or the like (ball cannot enter). If the game ball passing through the special gate 650 flows down toward the first V prize passage 427, etc., there is a risk that the timing at which the movable accessory 722 acts on the game ball will always be constant. There is As a result, the effect of the action of the movable accessory 722 is always the same, and there is a possibility that the player's interest may decrease. Furthermore, there is a possibility that fraud such as vibrating the gaming machine may be easily performed in accordance with the operation timing of the movable accessory 722 . In addition, there is a possibility that other game balls flowing down toward the first V winning passage 427 or the like through the normal guide passage 604 without going through the special gate 650 may be disturbed. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the game ball passing through the special gate 650 and the game ball on which the movable accessory 722 acts are always different, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the various problems described above. can.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the destination of the game ball that entered the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37, the normal guidance passage 604 that can guide the winning lottery area 407, or the role product operation lottery area 409 (special gate 650) is provided with a route distribution member 603 for distribution to a special guide passage 605 that can be guided to 650).

Then, for example, when two game balls enter the inner area 401 of the central winning unit 37 continuously, the preceding first game ball is guided to the normal guide passage 604, and the following second game ball is guided. The ball is configured to be guided to the special guide passage 605 . As a result, when two game balls enter the internal area 401 in succession, the game balls can be directed to both the normal guide passage 604 and the special guide passage 605, respectively. The action and effect of will be more successful.

However, in the present embodiment, under the configuration in which game balls are shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds by the shooting device 60, the blade member 404 of the central winning unit 37 is opened for 0.5 seconds during the "short hit", At the time of "long small win", the blade member 404 is configured to be opened for 1.5 seconds. As a result, during one open state period in which the central winning unit 37 (wing member 404) is in the open state, it is advantageous to the player that a plurality of game balls enter the central winning unit 37 continuously. The configuration makes it difficult for the situation to occur frequently.

Under this configuration, if a plurality of game balls do not continuously enter the central winning unit 37 at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the blade member 404), the action of the movable accessory 722 (assist ), and if the configuration is such that the game ball does not win the V prize with a higher probability, the game is started at the stage where a plurality of game balls do not enter the central winning unit 37 continuously at the same time. There is a risk that people's expectations will fade and interest will decline.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, after a predetermined game ball passes through the special gate 650, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed by the special gate display device 44 (time until the movable accessory 722 starts operating) ) is set to “1 second”, and the operation time of the movable accessory 722 after the start of operation is set to “4 seconds”.

As a result, for example, other game balls do not enter the central prize winning unit 37 together with the game balls that have entered the special gate 650, or enter the central prize winning unit 37 together with the game balls that have entered the special gate 650. Even if the game ball does not win the V prize, the game ball that enters the central prize winning unit 37 after that is given a chance of winning the V prize with a higher probability.

In other words, a game ball other than the game ball entering the central winning unit 37 at the same time as the game ball passing through the special gate 650 (for example, during one open state period of the blade member 404) has a higher probability. It is configured to give you a chance to win a V prize.

More specifically, for example, two game balls enter the internal region 401 during one open state period of the central winning unit 37 (wing member 404), and the preceding first game ball (first identified A game ball that has passed through the entrance portion 601b as a region) flows down into the normal guide passage 604, and the second subsequent game ball (the game ball that has passed through the entrance portion 601b next) flows down into the special guide passage 605. After that, when the game ball that has flowed down to the special guide passage 605 passes through the special gate 650 and the movable accessory 722 is activated, at the time the game ball that has flowed down to the normal guide passage 604 passes through the movable accessory 722, Even if the movable accessory 722 has not yet operated and the game ball that has flowed down to the normal guide passage 604 does not receive the action (assist) of the movable accessory 722 and does not win the V prize, then the central winning unit 37 (wing member 404) during the next open state period, the game ball that entered the inner area 401 (the game ball that passed through the entrance portion 601 after that) flows down to the normal guide passage 604, and due to the action of the movable accessory 722, A chance to win the V prize will be given.

Of course, instead of the above configuration, the variable display time (the time until the movable accessory 722 starts to operate) performed by the special gate display device 44, the operation time of the movable accessory 722 after the start of operation, etc. A game in which various set times are set to times different from the set times, and a predetermined game ball enters the internal area 401 after a relatively long period of time (for example, one minute or more) after passing through the special gate 650. A configuration may be adopted in which the ball normally flows down to the guide passage 604 and the action of the movable accessory 722 gives a chance of winning the V prize.

With such a configuration, the player actively tries to make the game ball enter the central winning unit 37 even after confirming that the game ball has passed through the special gate 650. It is possible to do As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in the above-described embodiment, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Here, each of the following configurations may be applied to the above embodiment individually, or may be applied to the above embodiment by combining a part or all of them. Moreover, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments.

(a) The pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described embodiment is of a type in which a jackpot state (direct hit jackpot) occurs in which the variable prize winning device 32 opens and closes when a jackpot win is won in a winning lottery based on the ball entering the starting prize winning section 33. and a central prize winning unit 37 which is opened when a small prize is won in a winning lottery based on the entry of a ball into a starting prize winning section 33, and the central prize winning unit 37 is provided. It also has the function of a type of game machine (so-called old type 2 pachinko machine) in which a game ball entering the unit 37 enters the first V winning path 427 or the like to generate a big win state (V winning big win). , a so-called one-kind-two-mixer.

Not limited to this, it may be implemented as another type of pachinko machine that provides a predetermined game value. The game value includes, for example, game media such as prize balls paid out to the player, a special prize state (round) given during the big win, and a game mode such as a high probability mode given after the big win. In addition to the pachinko machine, it can also be implemented as various game machines such as an arrangement ball machine and a mammoth ball.

For example, without performing a predetermined lottery process when a game ball enters the starting winning part 33 (or a lottery process with a winning probability of 100% may be performed), based on the ball entering the starting winning part 33 , the central prize winning unit 37 is opened, and a game ball that enters the central prize winning unit 37 enters the first V prize passage 427 or the like to cause a big win state (so-called old type 2 pachinko) machine).

Further, instead of the variable winning device 32, a configuration may be adopted in which a central winning unit 37 as variable ball winning means opens and closes to generate a big winning state. In such a case, the variable winning device 32 may be omitted. In other words, when a big win is won in a winning lottery based on a ball entering a predetermined starting ball-entering means, a predetermined variable ball-entering means (large winning opening as a specific area) opens and closes to create a jackpot state. The machine may have a configuration in which a movable body is provided in the internal region of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, a variable ball entry means such as a central prize winning unit 37 which is opened when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery based on the ball entering the starting prize winning section 33 is provided, and a game ball entering the variable ball entry means is provided. It may be implemented as a type of gaming machine in which a specific game value is given when a ball enters a special ball entry means such as a V winning hole. In other words, in this type of game machine, a movable body may be provided in the internal region of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, in the central winning unit 37 according to the above-described embodiment, a game ball that enters the left ball entry opening 403 always passes through the left entrance 601b that constitutes the specific area, and enters the right ball entry opening 403. A game ball that has entered is configured to always pass through the right entrance portion 601b that constitutes the specific area, and a game ball that has entered the internal area 401 is detected by either the left or right internal ball that constitutes a predetermined detection means. A switch 437 always detects it. However, various configurations related to the specific region and the predetermined detection means, such as the position and number of the specific region and the predetermined detection means, are not limited to the configuration related to the entrance portion 601b and the internal entrance detection switch 437. Other configurations may be employed. For example, one exit portion 601a of the introduction passage 601 is defined as a specific region, and an internal ball entry detection switch 437 as a predetermined detection means is arranged here. It may be configured to be provided at a position different from the portion 601b.

Further, in the central winning unit 37, one of the pair of left and right ball entry openings 403 and the like (including the pair of left and right blade members 404, the introduction passage 601 and the pair of left and right inlets 601b) may be omitted. good. For example, the left ball entrance opening 403 and the like (including the left blade member 404, the left portion of the introduction passage 601 and its left inlet portion 601b) are omitted, and the right ball entrance opening 403 and the like (the right blade (including the member 404, the right portion of the introduction passage 601, and the inlet portion 601b on the right side thereof). As a result, there is one ball passage (the right side of the introduction passage 601) through which the game balls can pass one by one and can guide the game balls one by one to the exit portion 601a as a specific area provided only in one place. It is a configuration provided only for In other words, a game ball that does not pass through the one ball passage cannot enter the internal area 401 through the exit portion 601a. Also, the ball passage (the right part of the lead-in passage 601) is provided at a position through which only the game ball that is shot with a predetermined strength (right-handed) and jumps over the center winning unit 37 can pass.

Instead of or in addition to this, at the outer position (outer position than the blade member 404) on one side (for example, the right side) of the left and right sides of the central winning unit 37, the ball entry opening 403 on the one side (one side A ball passage (such as a ball passage member having a ball passage) that can guide game balls one by one to the side blade member 404, one side portion of the introduction passage 601, and the entrance portion 601b on the one side. may be configured as follows.

In addition, in a specific region such as the exit portion 601a and the entrance portion 601b of the introduction passage 601, while allowing the game ball to pass in a predetermined direction (internal region 401 side), the game ball in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction It is good also as a structure provided with the control means (valve-shaped member etc. which change a state from a 1st state to a 2nd state by the force received from a game ball) which controls the passage of.

Incidentally, the winning probability related to various lotteries related to the pachinko machine 10 (soft lottery process, lottery by mechanical mechanism, etc.) is appropriately set for each model, and any value can be adopted. . It goes without saying that the configuration of the board surface of the game board 30 can also be changed as appropriate.

Also, the game machine may be implemented as a type of game machine that circulates game balls in the game machine and does not directly pay out the game balls to the player, that is, a so-called enclosed pachinko machine.

(b) The types of jackpots (the number of rounds, the content of the configuration, etc.) are not limited to the above embodiment, and different configurations may be adopted.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, the types of the jackpot state are "3 round jackpot" in which the grand prize state (round) is repeated three times, "7 round jackpot" in which the grand prize state (round) is repeated seven times, and the grand prize state (round ) is repeated 15 times.

Of course, the gaming machine may be implemented as a gaming machine in which only one type of jackpot state (for example, a 15-round jackpot) occurs, instead of a gaming machine in which a plurality of types of jackpot states can occur.

(c) The configuration of the game mode to be awarded after the end of the jackpot state (granting period, configuration content, etc.) is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and a different configuration may be adopted.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, after the end of the jackpot state, a time reduction mode is provided in which the time (variation time) of the variable display on the special display device 43 is shortened while the variable display is performed four times on the special display device 43. However, the application period of the time reduction mode is not limited to this. For example, after the end of the big win state, the time reduction mode may be continued until the next big win state occurs.

Also, as a game mode after the end of the big win state, a high probability mode or the like may be provided in which the winning probability of the big win state (direct hit big win) is high instead of or in addition to the time shortening mode. A specific game mode such as a time reduction mode or a high probability mode may be set as a special game state. After the end of the jackpot state, when a jackpot with the right to be given a high probability mode, that is, a so-called probability variable jackpot occurs, a special display device 43 or the like is made to perform a stop display in a specific mode corresponding to the probability variable jackpot. may Of course, the game machine may be configured such that the time reduction mode, the high probability mode, etc. are not provided after the end of the jackpot state.

Further, in the above embodiment, the winning probability of the ball entry assist lottery performed based on the passage of the game ball through the through gate 34 and the winning probability of the operation assist lottery performed based on the passage of the game ball to the special gate switch 651 The probability is configured to be the same in any mode.

Not limited to this, as a game mode after the end of the big win state, instead of or in addition to the time reduction mode or the high probability mode, the winning probability of the ball entry assist lottery, the winning probability of the operation assist lottery, the small winning ( In particular, a configuration may be adopted in which a mode (high support mode) in which the winning probability of a long small win is higher than in the normal mode is performed. At least one of these high support modes may be a specific game mode.

(d) The configuration related to the accessory activation lottery (accessory activation lottery area 409, etc.) is not limited to the above embodiment.

(d-1) For example, in the above embodiment, whether or not to activate the movable accessory 722 when a game ball is detected at the special gate 650 (special gate switch 651) provided in the accessory activation lottery area 409 An actuation assist lottery is held to decide whether or not, and when the actuation assist lottery is won, the actuation condition is established and the movable accessory 722 is configured to act.

Without being limited to this, for example, when a game ball is detected by the special gate switch 651 without performing the lottery process, the operating condition is always satisfied and the movable accessory 722 may be configured to operate.

Further, it is also possible to provide a counting means for counting the number of game balls detected by the special gate switch 651, and when the counted value exceeds a predetermined number, the operating condition is satisfied and the movable accessory 722 is operated. good. Alternatively, a counting means for counting the number of game balls detected by the special gate switch 651 is provided, and when the counted value exceeds a predetermined number, a predetermined lottery process is executed and a predetermined lottery result is obtained. In this case, the operating condition may be established and the movable accessory 722 may be operated.

(d-2) In addition, the operation assist lottery for determining whether or not to operate the movable accessory 722 is not a software lottery process, but a mechanical lottery mechanism such as a rune is provided in the internal area 401 of the central prize winning unit 37, A lottery may be drawn based on the behavior of the game ball. However, it is preferable to perform lottery processing by software in terms of simplifying the configuration of the central winning unit 37 .

For example, in the role product operation lottery area 409, game balls do not always pass through the special gate 650 (special gate switch 651), but the game balls pass through the special gate 650 at a predetermined rate (or do not pass). may be

(d-3) In addition, in the above embodiment, the trigger ball entry means (special gate) for detecting the movement trigger of the movable accessory 722 is provided in the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37. However, the position where the opportunity ball entry means (special gate) is provided is not limited to this, and may be different.

For example, the central winning unit 37 has a second internal area different from the internal area 401 (an area where a ball can be entered from an entrance different from the ball entry opening 403 opened and closed by the blade member 404). A configuration in which an opportunity ball entry means (special gate) is provided in the inner area may be employed.

(d-4) In addition, like the through gate 34, an opportunity ball entry means (special gate) is provided in the game area outside the central winning unit 37, and game balls flowing down the game area can enter (pass). may be configured. It should be noted that the configuration related to the opportunity ball entry means is not limited to a ball entry means such as a through gate through which the entered game ball can pass, but is an entrance such as a prize opening through which the entered game ball is discharged out of the game area. Ball means may be used. Then, a predetermined lottery process is executed based on the entry of a game ball into a predetermined through gate or a predetermined prize winning opening, and predetermined operation conditions are met, such as when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained. It may be configured such that the movable accessory 722 operates when it is established. For example, as will be described later, when a game ball is detected by the starting winning parts 33a, 33b (starting winning switches 224a, 224b) during the lottery invalid period, an operation assist lottery to determine whether or not to operate the movable accessory 722 is performed. It may be configured such that the operation condition is established and the movable accessory 722 is operated when the operation assist lottery is won.

Also, after entering the central winning unit 37 (internal area 401) and being guided to the special guide passage 605, the game ball passes through the special gate 650 and is detected by the special gate switch 651, the back side of the game board 30. Instead of being discharged to the central winning unit 37, it may be configured to return to the game area outside the central winning unit 37 again.

Also, the game ball entering the central winning unit 37 (internal area 401) and guided to the special guide passage 605 passes through the special guide passage 605 without being detected by the predetermined ball detecting means, Returning to the game area outside the central prize winning unit 37 again, the ball is configured to be able to enter the opportunity ball entry means (special gate, etc.) provided in the game area outside the central prize winning unit 37, and here the opportunity ball entry is possible. A configuration that can be detected by detection means (a special gate switch or the like) may be employed.

However, if the opportunity ball entry means (special gate) for detecting the movement opportunity of the movable accessory 722 is arranged outside the central prize winning unit 37, the opportunity ball entry detection means (special gate switch) can be detected by using a wire rod or the like. erroneous detection and activating the movable accessory 722. From this point of view, the opportunity ball entry means (special gate) is arranged in the central prize winning unit 37. is more preferred.

(d-5) In the above embodiment, when the game ball passes through the special gate 650, the special gate display device 44 starts the variable display, and after a predetermined period of time, stops the display in a manner corresponding to the lottery result of the operation assist lottery. is performed, and if the lottery result of the actuation assist lottery here is a winning result, then the movable accessory 722 is configured to operate.

The present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the display means (the special gate display device 44) for displaying the lottery result of the operation assist lottery is omitted.

In the above-described embodiment, the variation time of the variation display on the special gate display device 44 is uniform (1 second). may be configured.

For example, in the main control unit 261, a variation pattern storage means for storing a plurality of variation patterns with different variation display times, and a special gate switch 651 based on the detection of a game ball, stored in the variation pattern storage means A variation pattern selection means capable of selecting any one of a plurality of variation patterns, and controlling the special gate display device 44 based on the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection means. good too.

As a result, the variable time from when the variable display is started to when the stop display is made on the special gate display device 44 can be made variable. As a result, the operation start period from when the game ball is detected by the special gate switch 651 to when the movable accessory 722 actually enters the operating state (advantageous state) can be made variable.

(d-6) In the above embodiment, a new game ball passes through the special gate 650 and is detected by the special gate switch 651 during the variable display on the special gate display device 44 or during the operation of the movable accessory 722. However, the variable display (operation assist lottery result) for that amount is not withheld. In other words, the activation assist lottery for that amount is invalidated, and the right to activate the movable accessory 722 is not newly granted.

Not limited to this, when a new game ball passes through the special gate 650 and is detected by the special gate switch 651 during the variable display of the special gate display device 44 or during the operation of the movable accessory 722, a predetermined number of times A configuration may be provided with holding means (variation holding area) capable of holding the variable display of minutes (operation assist lottery result).

Here, the holding means (variation holding area) includes one execution area and a plurality of holding areas, for example, in the same manner as the normal fluctuation holding area that stores the value of the entry assist random number counter C3 in the above embodiment. The values of the actuation assist random number counter C4 may be stored in the plurality of reservation areas in chronological order in accordance with the history of passage of game balls to the special gate 650. FIG. Of course, the information stored in the holding means is not limited to the value of the actuation assist random number counter C4, and other information may be stored.

(e) The configuration related to route distribution (route distribution area 406, etc.) is not limited to the above embodiment.

(e-1) For example, the route sorting member 603 of the above embodiment is pivotally supported to be able to swing, and is normally maintained in a right inclined state by an urging means such as a coil spring (not shown) so that the drop path 602 can be moved. A falling game ball can flow down to the normal guide passage 604 on the left side. In this state, when the game ball falling down the drop passage 602 is guided to the left normal guide passage 604, the route distribution member 603 is moved by the force received from the game ball contacting the left piece portion 614. , rotates in the counterclockwise direction against the biasing force of the biasing means, is left inclined for a predetermined time, and the game balls falling down the drop passage 602 can flow down to the special guide passage 605 on the right side. state is configured.

The configuration (shape, operation mode, etc.) of the route distribution means is not limited to this, and other configurations may be adopted.

For example, the shaft pin 610 is fixed to the shaft portion 611 of the route distribution member 603, and the shaft portion 611 protrudes toward the rear side of the upper rear wall portion 400a. It has an action piece 800 extending downward from its rear end, and a pair of coil springs 801 and 802 as maintenance means for supporting the action piece 800 from the left and right. The central piece 613 may be configured to be maintained in a balanced state (reference posture) without tilting to the left or right at the central position in the left-right direction (the position of the shaft pin 610).

With such a configuration, when a game ball falls to the route distribution member 603 which is in an equilibrium state at normal times, the game ball is guided to the normal guide passage 604 on the left side, or is guided to the special guide passage on the right side. It is in a state where it is not known whether it will be guided to 605 or not.

Then, when a game ball falling against the route distribution member 603 in equilibrium is guided to the special guide passage 605 on the right side, the route distribution member 603 moves from the game ball contacting the right piece portion 615. By the force received, it once rotates in the clockwise direction and enters the first state (first posture), ie, the right-tilted state [see FIG. As a result, it rotates in the counterclockwise direction and enters a left tilted state (see FIG. 41(b)), which is the second state (second posture). After that, the route distributing member 603 swings left and right a plurality of times, and then returns to a balanced state due to the elastic force of the pair of coil springs 801 and 802, such that the route distributing member 603 is tilted to the right again.

Similarly, when a game ball falling against the route distribution member 603 in equilibrium is guided to the left normal guide passage 604, the route distribution member 603 is placed in contact with the left piece 614. After it rotates in the counterclockwise direction by the force received from the coil springs 801 and 802, it rotates in the clockwise direction by the elastic force of the pair of coil springs 801 and 802, and becomes in the right tilted state. After that, the route distributing member 603 swings left and right a plurality of times so as to be in the left tilted state again, and then returns to the balanced state by the elastic force of the pair of coil springs 801 and 802 .

Under such a configuration, when two game balls continuously fall to the root distribution member 603 in equilibrium, for example, when the preceding first game ball is guided to the left normal guide passage 604 Then, the following second game ball is guided to the special guide passage 605 on the right side. Conversely, when the preceding first game ball is guided to the special guide passage 605 on the right side, the subsequent second game ball is guided to the normal guide passage 604 on the left side.

According to the above configuration, a plurality of game balls falling continuously are alternately distributed to different routes while adopting a relatively simple configuration without providing a driving means for driving the route distribution member 603. configuration can be realized. As a result, simplification of the configuration and control, compactness, etc. can be achieved.

(e-2) In the route distributing member 603 illustrated in FIG. 46, instead of the pair of coil springs 801 and 802, a weight is attached to the lower end of the action piece 800, so that the route distributing member 603 normally operates. The route distribution member 603 may be configured to be freely swingable by the action of the game ball while maintaining the balanced state.

(e-3) In place of the pair of coil springs 801 and 802, the route distribution member 603 illustrated in FIG. A configuration may be adopted in which the route distribution member 603 periodically or continuously swings between the right-tilting state and the left-tilting state. Alternatively, the route distributing means such as the route distributing member 603 may normally be in a stopped state, and may enter a predetermined operating state only when a predetermined drive condition is satisfied and a specific state is reached.

(e-4) The route sorting means may not operate, and may be fixed to the housing 400 or the like, or may be integrally provided. In other words, the route may be distributed according to the random behavior of the game ball. In addition, various other configurations related to the route sorting means, such as the position and number of the route sorting means, are not limited to the above embodiment, and different configurations may be adopted. For example, one or a plurality of route distribution means may be provided at positions different from those in the above-described embodiment (other variable ball entry means different from the above-described central winning unit 37).

(f) The configuration of various guidance routes is not limited to the above embodiment.

(f-1) For example, although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, in the configuration according to the above embodiment, from the time the game ball is guided to the normal guide passage 604 by the route distribution member 603, the game ball From the time the game ball is guided to the special guide passage 605 by the route distribution member 603 than the movable body arrival time until reaching the movable accessory 722 (the exit portion 604a of the normal guide passage 604), the game ball reaches the special gate. 650 (special gate switch 651), it is preferable to shorten the time required for the movable accessory 722 to reach an advantageous state.

From the time when the game ball is guided to the normal guide passage 604 by the route distribution member 603, the game ball reaches the movable accessory 722 (the exit portion 604a of the normal guide passage 604). The game ball is guided to the special guide passage 605 by the distributing member 603, the game ball reaches the special gate 650, and the advantageous state reaching time until the movable accessory 722 becomes advantageous is made longer. If so, two game balls enter the inner area 401 of the central prize winning unit 37 continuously, the preceding first game ball is distributed to the normal guide passage 604 by the route distribution member 603, and the subsequent game ball When the second game ball is distributed to the special guide passage 605, the player will know that the game ball will reach the movable accessory 722 before the timing when the movable accessory 722 is activated. , there is a risk that interest will be significantly reduced.

Incidentally, in order to lengthen the movable body arrival time for the game ball guided to the normal guide path 604 to reach the movable accessory 722, for example, lengthening the moving distance of the game ball required for passing through the normal guide path 604 is one example. Conceivable. Also, instead of or in addition to this, for example, a configuration in which delay means for delaying passage of game balls is installed in the normal guide passage 604 may be adopted.

Here, as the delay means, for example, a structure such as a stage or a rune, in which the game ball goes back and forth in the same place several times, or advances after going around, or a structure such as a rib that stops the momentum of the game ball and delays the time. One example is a configuration in which the game ball advances over the ball.

(f-2) For example, in the above-described embodiment, the game ball is placed in the special gate as the second route (momentary ball entry guide route) for guiding the game ball distributed by the route distribution member 603 to the opportunity ball entry means (special gate). 650 is provided with only one special guide passage 605, but not limited to this, the time required for the game ball to reach the trigger ball entry means (special gate) from the route distribution member 603 is A configuration including a plurality of different second routes (momentary ball entry guidance routes) may be employed.

By providing a plurality of second routes (opportunity ball entry guide routes), the movable accessory 722 is actually in an operating state (advantageous state) from the time when the game ball is distributed by the route distribution member 603 (predetermined timing). The period until it becomes can be made variable.

In addition, according to the above configuration, the period from when the game ball is distributed by the route distribution member 603 to when the trigger ball entry means (special gate) is made variable by the mechanical structure based on the behavior of the game ball. As a result, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the inner area 401 of the central prize winning unit 37, which can further improve the interest.

As a more specific configuration, for example, as shown in FIG. 47, when the game ball is guided to the normal guide passage 604 by the route distribution member 603, the game ball moves to the movable accessory 722 (the exit portion of the normal guide passage 604). 604a), from the time the game ball is distributed by the route distribution member 603, the game ball reaches the first trigger ball entry means (first special gate 650A), and the movable accessory Advantageous state leading to the first second route (first special guide passage 605A) with a long time to reach the advantageous state until 722 is activated and the second opportunity ball entry means (second special gate 650B) A second route (second special guide passage 605B) having a short arrival time may also be provided. Here, the "first second route (first special guidance passage 605A)" constitutes the "first flow-down route", and the "second second route (second special guidance passage 605B)" constitutes A "second downstream route" is configured (the same applies hereinafter).

In the example shown in FIG. 47, a first special gate switch 651A for detecting a game ball passing through is provided at the first special gate 650A, and a game ball passing therethrough is detected at the second special gate 650B. A second special gate switch 651B is provided for sensing. Here, the ``first special gate switch 651A'' constitutes the ``first opportunity entry detection means'', and the ``second special gate switch 651B'' constitutes the ``second opportunity entry detection means'' ( Same below).

The passage widths of the special guide passages 605A, 605B and the special gates 650A, 650B are set to a width through which one game ball can pass. Also, game balls that have passed through the special gates 650A and 650B are discharged out of the internal area 401 through discharge passages (not shown).

A slide member 655 capable of opening and closing the entrance is provided at the entrance of the second special guide passage 605B. The slide member 655 is slidably displaceable in the front-rear direction, and when it is displaced to a position protruding forward, it becomes a closed state in which the entrance of the second special guide passage 605B is closed, and moves to a rearward retracted position. The displacement results in an open state in which the entrance of the second special guide passage 605B is opened.

Then, when the slide member 655 is in the closed state, the game balls distributed by the route distribution member 603 as the upstream route distribution means pass through the upper surface of the slide member 655 and enter the first special guide passage. You will be directed to 605A. On the other hand, when the slide member 655 is in the open state, the game balls distributed by the route distribution member 603 are guided to the second special guide passage 605B.

Here, a configuration in which the slide member 655 always repeats the slide displacement operation may be employed, or a configuration in which the state of the slide member 655 is periodically or randomly changed may be employed. Further, in a specific state, control may be performed so that the proportion of the slide member 655 in the open state differs from the proportion in which the slide member 655 is in the closed state.

In other words, the slide member 655 constitutes the opportunity route change means (downstream route distribution means) in this embodiment, and the destination of the game ball is set to "first second route (first special guide passage 605A)" or " Second second route (second special guidance passage 605B)". Note that the route sorting means such as the route sorting member 603 may be configured to open and close a predetermined route like the slide member 655 .

When game balls are detected by the special gate switches 651A and 651B, an operation assist lottery is performed to determine whether or not to operate the movable accessories 722 respectively. Here, when winning the operation assist lottery, the movable accessory 722 operates for a predetermined time. In addition, in a specific state, the winning probability in the operation assist lottery differs between when the game ball is detected by the first special gate switch 651A and when the game ball is detected by the second special gate switch 651B. may be That is, when the game ball flows down to the "first second route (first special guide passage 605A)", the game ball flows down to the "second second route (second special guide passage 605B)" A configuration may be adopted in which the ratio at which the movable accessory 722 can be in a predetermined operating state differs depending on the case.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 47, in the first special guide passage 605A, by projecting ribs 653A, 653B, the passage length of the first special guide passage 605A, which is the movement path of the game ball, is lengthened. , the momentum of the game ball is stopped and the game ball advances over time.

Instead of or in addition to the ribs 653A and 653B, other delaying means for delaying the passage of the game ball (for example, a stage, a crew, etc., where the game ball goes back and forth in the same place several times, or advances after going around) mechanism) may be arranged in the middle of the first special guide passage 605A.

In the example shown in FIG. 47, special gates 650A and 650B (special gate switches 651A and 651B) are provided individually corresponding to the first special guide passage 605A and the second special guide passage 605B. However, instead of this, the game balls passing through the first special guide passage 605A or the second special guide passage 605B move toward one special gate (special gate switch), and the same special It may be configured to be detected by a gate switch.

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 47, when a game ball flows down to the "first second route (first special guide passage 605A)", the game ball always passes through the first special gate 650A (the first special gate 650A). When the game ball passes through the special gate switch 651A) and flows down to the "second second route (second special guide passage 605B)", the game ball always passes through the second special gate 650B (second 2 special gate switch 651B), but not limited to this, game balls pass through the first special gate 650A and the second special gate 650B as trigger ball entry means at a predetermined rate. It is good also as a structure which can pass (or does not pass). In addition, when the game ball flows down to the "first second route (first special guide passage 605A)", the game ball goes to the "second second route (second special guide passage 605B)" A configuration may be adopted in which the rate at which the game ball can pass through the opportunity ball entry means (the rate at which the movable accessory 722 can be in a predetermined operating state) differs between when it flows down.

(f-3) The configuration provided with a plurality of second routes (momentary ball entry guidance routes) as described in (f-2) above is the route illustrated in (e-1) to (e-3) above. Under the configuration related to the distribution member 603, it is more effective.

If the game ball is guided to the normal guide passage 604 by the route distribution member 603, the game ball is guided to the special guide passage by the route distribution member 603 than the movable body arrival time until the game ball reaches the movable accessory 722. 605 until the game ball reaches the special gate 650 and the movable accessory 722 becomes in an advantageous state. Two game balls enter the internal area 401 continuously, the preceding first game ball is distributed to the normal guide passage 604 by the route distribution member 603, and the subsequent second game ball is the special guide passage. If the game is sorted to 605, the player will know that the game ball will reach the movable accessory 722 before the timing when the movable accessory 722 is activated.

Conversely, under the above configuration, when the preceding first game ball is distributed to the special guide passage 605 by the route distribution member 603 and the subsequent second game ball is distributed to the normal guide passage 604 , the degree of expectation for the occurrence of the big win state increases, and the player watches the behavior of the game ball guided to the special guide passage 605 with anticipation.

On the other hand, from the time the game ball is guided to the normal guide passage 604 by the route distribution member 603, the game ball is specially guided by the route distribution member 603 than the movable body arrival time until the game ball reaches the movable accessory 722. When the game ball is guided to the passage 605, the game ball reaches the special gate 650, and when the movable accessory 722 is in an advantageous state, the time to reach the advantageous state is shortened, the central winning unit 37 Two game balls enter the internal area 401 continuously, the preceding first game ball is distributed to the special guide passage 605 by the route distribution member 603, and the subsequent second game ball is normally guided When distributed to the passage 604, unless the movable accessory 722 is maintained in an advantageous state for a relatively long period of time, the game ball reaches the movable accessory 722 after the timing when the advantageous state of the movable accessory 722 ends. There is a risk that the interest will be significantly reduced because it will be understood that it will be done.

Conversely, under the above configuration, when the preceding first game ball is distributed to the normal guide passage 604 by the route distribution member 603 and the subsequent second game ball is distributed to the special guide passage 605 , the degree of expectation for the occurrence of the big win state increases, and the player watches the behavior of the game ball guided to the special guide passage 605 with anticipation.

Therefore, if the configuration is provided with a plurality of second routes (opportunity ball entry guide routes) as described above, two game balls enter the inner area 401 of the central winning unit 37 in succession, and the preceding one Even if the first game ball is distributed to either the normal guide passage 604 or the special guide passage 605, the second game ball that follows is the "first second route with a long time to reach an advantageous state (first Special guide passage 605A)” or “Second second route with short advantageous state arrival time (second special guide passage 605B)” depends on the timing at which the movable accessory 722 operates and the game ball Since there is still a possibility that the timing of reaching the movable accessory 722 matches, the player can watch the behavior of the game ball with anticipation for the occurrence of the big win state.

(g) The configuration related to the success/failure lottery (the success/failure lottery area 407, etc.) is not limited to the above embodiment.

(g-1) For example, in the above-described embodiment, the rotating body unit 410 (rotating body 414) is provided as win/loss sorting means. The rotating body 414 has one special pocket portion 416a for big wins and two non-special pocket portions 416b for winning, and rotates counterclockwise at a constant speed.

Not limited to this, for example, the number and ratio of the pocket portions 416a and the non-special pocket portions 416b of the rotating body 414 may be changed so that the odds of winning the jackpot lottery are different.

(g-2) In addition, in the rotating body 414, for example, a special pocket portion 416a for the 3R jackpot and a special pocket portion 416a for the 7R jackpot are provided. may be In such a case, the type lottery area 408 may be omitted.

(g-3) In place of the rotating body 414, a configuration may be adopted in which another win/fail lottery mechanism such as a crun is provided.

(h) The configuration of the type lottery (type lottery area 408, etc.) is not limited to the above embodiment.

(h-1) In the type lottery area 408, there is a type distribution means (type determination means) that distributes the destination of the game ball to either the 15R ball entrance 731, the 7R ball entrance 732, or the 3R ball entrance 733. ) is provided.

Instead of the type sorting mechanism unit 741, a configuration including another type lottery mechanism such as Krun may be used.

(h-2) The type lottery area 408 may be omitted and, for example, when a game ball enters a special ball entry means such as the 1st V winning passage 427, the type of jackpot state to be awarded may be determined. In other words, the type determination for determining the type of the jackpot state may be performed by software determination processing.

(i) The configuration of the central winning unit 37 and the internal area 401 is not limited to the above embodiment.

For example, the route sorting area 406 (route sorting member 603) and the accessory operation lottery area 409 (special gate 650) may be omitted. In such a case, for example, when a ball is detected by the internal ball detection switch 437, an operation assist lottery may be performed to determine whether or not the movable accessory 722 is to be operated.

However, if only the movable accessory 722 is configured to perform a predetermined action based on the ball detection by the internal ball detection switch 437, the game in which the ball enters the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37 The movable accessory 722 moves with respect to the ball at the same timing each time.

Therefore, in such a case, it is preferable to employ various configurations that make the operation timing variable, such as the configuration that makes the variation time variable as described above.

(j) The configuration (position, shape, operation mode, advantageous state, etc.) of the movable body whose state changes based on the game ball passing through the special gate 650 is limited to the configuration related to the movable accessory 722 of the above embodiment. However, other configurations such as an opening/closing member may be adopted.

(j-1) For example, the movable accessory 722 according to the above-described embodiment is in an operating state (advantageous state), thereby avoiding the winning lottery by the rotating body unit 410 and the type lottery by the type sorting mechanism section 741. , the game ball normally guided to the guide passage 604 can be directly guided to the 15R ball entrance 731.

That is, when the movable accessory 722 is in an operating state (advantageous state), it is easier to win the V prize jackpot than when the movable accessory 722 is in a non-operating state (non-advantageous state). In addition, the game ball is configured to easily enter the 15R ball entrance 731 corresponding to the 15R jackpot that is the most advantageous for the player among a plurality of types of special game states (15R jackpot, 7R jackpot, and 3R jackpot). ing.

Not limited to this, it may be configured to guide the game ball to the entrance part of the type lottery area 408 while avoiding only the lottery by the rotary unit 410 and giving only the right to generate a big win state. .

(j-2) In addition, the movable body is provided in the type lottery area 408, and when the state of the movable body changes to an advantageous state, the type lottery by the type sorting mechanism unit 741 is avoided, and the game ball is placed in the 15R entrance. 731 may be configured.

(j-3) The rotator unit 410 (rotator 414) may be used as the movable body in this embodiment. For example, the rotating body 414 normally rotating at a constant speed changes its state to an advantageous state based on the passage of the game ball through the special gate 650, and the special pocket portion 416a for big wins is positioned at a position corresponding to the gate portion 435. , or the special pocket portion 416a for the big win moves to the position corresponding to the gate portion 435 at a very low speed.

(j-4) The rotating body 414 includes, for example, a special pocket portion 416a for the 3R jackpot, a special pocket portion 416a for the 7R jackpot, and a special pocket portion 416a for the 15R jackpot. In the (non-advantageous state), the special pocket portion 416a for the 15R big win is controlled to move to a position corresponding to the gate portion 435 at a very high speed, and a game ball is placed against the special pocket portion 416a for the 15R big win. makes it difficult to enter the ball, and when the game ball becomes advantageous based on passing through the special gate 650, the special pocket portion 416a for the 15R jackpot is once at a position corresponding to the gate portion 435 It may be configured to stop, or to perform control such that the special pocket portion 416a for the 15R jackpot moves to a position corresponding to the gate portion 435 at a normal speed.

(j-5) The type sorting mechanism section 741 (the first bridge plate 744 and the second bridge plate 745) may be used as the movable body in this embodiment.

For example, the first bridging plate 744 and the second bridging plate 745, which are swinging normally, change their state to an advantageous state based on the passage of the game ball through the special gate 650, and temporarily stop at the advance position, or It may be configured such that the game ball can easily enter the 15R ball entrance 731 by, for example, increasing the time in the advance position.

(j-6) Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of operating states (advantageous states) of the movable bodies (movable accessory 722, rotating body 414, type sorting mechanism 741, etc.) are set. Alternatively, it may be determined by a lottery result of a predetermined actuation lottery process. The function of determining which of a plurality of operation patterns is to be executed when the movable body is put into the operation state (advantageous state) constitutes the operation pattern determining means in the present embodiment.

Furthermore, when the movable body such as the movable accessory 722 is controlled to a predetermined operating state (advantageous state), the movable body such as the movable accessory 722 is controlled so as not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. It may be configured such that it is easier to enter a ball into the special ball-entering means (V-winning path 427, 730, etc.) than in the case, and it is easier to win a V-winning big hit. Further, when the movable body such as the movable accessory 722 is controlled to a predetermined operating state (advantageous state), the movable body such as the movable accessory 722 is controlled so as not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. A configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined type of special game state (for example, the most advantageous 15R jackpot for the player) is likely to occur among a plurality of types of special game states (eg, 15R jackpot, 7R jackpot, and 3R jackpot).

(k) Although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, when a winning result is obtained by the operation assist lottery, during the operation start period before the movable accessory 722 is activated, the effect of the effect display device 42 etc. The means may be configured to be capable of executing an opening effect as a preceding effect suggesting that the movable accessory 722 will be in an operating state.

Incidentally, such an opening effect is performed after the stop display when the variable display is performed on the special gate display device 44 and the stop display is performed in a mode corresponding to the lottery result of the operation assist lottery. On the other hand, in a configuration in which the special gate display device 44 is omitted (a configuration in which variable display is not performed), the operation assistance lottery is performed after a winning result is obtained.

(k-1) In addition to the above configuration, in the main controller 261 or the sub-controller 262, production pattern storage means for storing a plurality of production patterns that determine the production time of the opening production, establishment of the operating condition (for example, operation assist A performance pattern selection means capable of selecting any one of a plurality of performance patterns stored in a performance pattern storage means, and the performance pattern selection means selects one based on the case where a winning result is obtained by lottery. A configuration may also be provided with an effect control means capable of controlling a predetermined effect means based on the produced effect pattern.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make variable the operation start period (for example, opening period) from a predetermined trigger (for example, when the operation condition is established) to when the movable accessory 722 is actually in an advantageous state.

(k-2) The operation start period from a predetermined trigger (for example, when the operation condition is satisfied) until the movable accessory 722 actually becomes advantageous may be made variable without performing the opening effect or the like. .

For example, in the main control device 261, the operation pattern storage means that stores a plurality of operation patterns that determine the operation start period from the time when the operation condition is satisfied until the movable accessory 722 is in the operation state, and the special gate switch 651 The game ball is set. operation pattern selection means capable of selecting any one of a plurality of operation patterns stored in the operation pattern storage means based on the detected operation pattern; It may also be configured to include control means capable of controlling the movable accessory 722 based on the above.

(l) Not only game effects using movable bodies such as the movable accessories 722, but also other game effects may be performed.

(l-1) For example, without being guided to the first V winning passage 427, etc., the discharge route (second route) such as the out passage 428 (non-special entrance ball detection switch 462) and the special guidance passage 605 (special gate switch 651) ), when a predetermined condition is satisfied based on detection of a game ball discharged out of the internal area 401, a configuration may be adopted in which specific processing advantageous to the player can be executed. The functions of the main controller 261 and the like that execute such processing constitute the specific processing executing means in this embodiment.

As a result, not only the behavior of the game balls guided toward the 1st V winning path 427, etc., but also the game balls discharged via the discharge route (second route) are used to impart new game features. As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

(l-2) Equipped with counting means for counting the number of game balls detected by ball detection means (ejection ball detection means) such as non-special entry ball detection switch 462 and special gate switch 651, and the count value is predetermined. A predetermined condition is satisfied when the count value is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, or when a predetermined lottery process is executed and a predetermined lottery result is obtained when the count value is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the predetermined condition is satisfied. , it may be configured to execute a specific process that is advantageous to the player.

In addition, as such specific processing, for example, when the movable accessory 722 is in the operating state, processing to lengthen the time in which it is in the operating state, processing to increase the winning probability in the operation assist lottery, special pocket portion of the rotating body 414 416a easy to enter the game ball processing, the type lottery area 408 easy to guide the game ball to the 15R ball entrance 731, and the like.

(m) The small winning opening mode (opening/closing pattern) of the blade member 404 of the central winning unit 37 and the big winning opening opening mode (opening/closing pattern) of the big winning opening opening/closing member 32a of the variable winning device 32 are limited to the above embodiments. not a thing

(m-1) For example, in the above-described embodiment, the blade member 404 has two opening/closing patterns of "short win" and "long win". A configuration including one or three or more opening/closing patterns is also possible.

(m-2) In the above embodiment, the blade member 404 of the central winning unit 37 is opened for 0.5 seconds during the "short-time small win", and the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds during the "long-time small win". However, one opening mode (opening time) of the blade member 404 is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and other opening modes with different opening times may be provided.

(m-3) In the above-described embodiment, for one occurrence of a small win (result of one winning lottery performed based on detection of entering a ball by the first start-up prize switch 224a or the second start-up prize switch 224b), the blade member The opening and closing operation (opening operation) of 404 is performed only once (one round), but this is not limiting, and the opening and closing operation of blade member 404 is performed two or more times (multiple times) for each occurrence of a small hit. round).

(m-4) For example, a first opening/closing pattern in which the blade members 404 are opened/closed once (one round) and a second opening/closing pattern in which the blade members 404 are opened/closed twice (two rounds). A configuration in which a plurality of opening/closing patterns with different numbers of opening/closing operations (number of rounds) can be executed, such as the configuration provided with the device, may be employed. However, if a predetermined opening/closing pattern among the plurality of opening/closing patterns (for example, a long small win open for 1.5 seconds) is performed, if the predetermined opening/closing pattern is not performed (for example, a short time open for 0.5 seconds It is preferable that the movable body such as the movable accessory 722 is more likely to be in a predetermined advantageous state than in the case of a small hit.

(n) Considering the remaining balls in the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37, the above embodiment is configured to perform the remaining ball monitoring process (step S212). Further, in the first display control process (step S205), it is determined whether or not the blade member 404 of the central winning unit 37 is open for a small hit, and if it is open for a small hit, it is also possible to start a new variable display. It is configured so as not to end the variable display that has already started.

In place of or in addition to these configurations, the game ball is detected at the starting winning portion 33 (first starting winning portion 33a or second starting winning portion 33b) while the blade member 404 of the central winning unit 37 is open for a small hit. It may be configured not to execute the big winning lottery or the small winning lottery when it is done. In other words, the configuration may be such that the lottery invalid period is set.

Considering the discharge period of the remaining balls, in the lottery invalid period, in addition to the opening period (small hit open period) of the blade member 404 as an open game state, after the opening period (the blade member 404 (post-closure) may be included. Of course, the lottery invalid period is not limited to this, and may be a different period. For example, the period from when the game ball enters the starting prize winning section 33 to when the small winning opening is started may be included in the lottery invalid period. In addition, in a game machine of a type in which a predetermined lottery process is performed even during a predetermined winning state (during opening/closing control of the variable ball entry means), the lottery invalid period is set so that a predetermined opening of the predetermined variable ball entry means is performed. It may be a predetermined period (lottery period) during which it is executed.

In the pachinko machine in which the lottery invalid period is set, for example, before starting the start winning process in step S304, it is determined whether or not it is during the lottery invalid period. In the winning process, only the prize ball payout setting (the prize ball command setting) related to the starting prize winning section 33 is performed without storing various counter values such as the win/fail random number counter C1. It is good also as composition which shifts to start prize-winning processing.

Further, when adopting such a configuration, instead of or in addition to the operation assist lottery related to the special gate 650 (special gate switch 651), during the lottery invalid period, the start prize winning section 33 (first start prize winning section 33a or the second start winning part 33b), an operation assist lottery is performed to determine whether or not to operate the movable accessory 722, and if the operation assist lottery is won, the movable A configuration in which the accessory 722 operates may be employed.

When the operation assist lottery related to the starting prize winning section 33 is performed, the accessory operation lottery area 409 (the special gate 650 and the special gate switch 651) and related structures may be omitted.

Here, in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 11, an example of start-up winning pre-processing that can be executed before starting the start-up winning process of step S304 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S7700, it is determined whether or not the lottery invalid period is in effect by referring to a predetermined flag or the like. In this example, the small winning opening period of the central winning unit 37 and the predetermined period after the ending of the small winning opening period are set as the lottery invalid period. Here, if a negative determination is made, that is, if it is not the lottery invalid period, this process is terminated as it is, and the process proceeds to the starting prize winning process of step S304.

On the other hand, if the determination is affirmative in step S7700, that is, if it is the lottery invalid period, in step S7701, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the first starting winning part 33a or the second starting winning part 33b. It is determined by detection information of the starting winning switch 224a or the second starting winning switch 224b. When a negative determination is made in step S7701, this process is terminated as it is, and the process proceeds to the starting winning process of step S304.

On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step S7701, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has won the first starting winning portion 33a or the second starting winning portion 33b, in step S7702, the third display flag is turned on. It is determined whether or not there is, that is, whether or not the special gate display device 44 is in the process of changing display. When an affirmative determination is made in step S7702, this process is terminated as it is, and the process proceeds to the starting prize winning process of step S304.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7702, it is determined in step S7703 whether or not the accessory in operation flag is ON, that is, whether or not the movable accessory 722 is in operation. When an affirmative determination is made in step S7703, this process is terminated as it is, and the process proceeds to the starting winning process of step S304.

As a result, during the variable display of the special gate display device 44 and during the operation of the movable accessory 722, the game ball wins the first start prize winning portion 33a or the second start prize winning portion 33b, and the game ball wins the first start prize winning portion. Even if it is detected by the winning switch 224a or the second starting winning switch 224b, the operation assist lottery for that amount is invalidated, and the right to operate the movable accessory 722 is not newly granted.

Not limited to this, during the variable display of the special gate display device 44 or during the operation of the movable accessory 722, the game ball newly wins the first start winning part 33a or the second starting winning part 33b, and the first starting A configuration may be provided with holding means (variation holding area) capable of holding variable display (operation assist lottery results) for a predetermined number of times when detected by the prize winning switch 224a or the second starting prize winning switch 224b.

Here, the holding means (variation holding area) includes, for example, one execution area and a plurality of In the plurality of reservation areas, each value of the operation assist random number counter C4 and the variable time selection counter C2 is chronologically set in accordance with the winning history of the game balls to the start winning parts 33a and 33b. It may be configured to be stored in . Of course, the information stored in the holding means is not limited to the values of the actuation assist random number counter C4 and the variable time selection counter C2, and other information may be stored.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S7703 is negative, in step S7704, the values of the actuation assist random number counter C4 and the variable time selection counter C2 updated in the random number updating process of step S303 are changed to the lottery invalidation set in the RAM 503. Store in the random number storage area for the period.

In the next step S7705, the starting award determination flag for the lottery invalid period is turned on, and in step S7706, the value of the operation assist random number counter C4 newly stored in the random number storage area for the lottery invalid period is the value corresponding to the assist winning. A suitability determination process is performed to determine whether or not. Here, when the value of the actuation assist random number counter C4 is a value corresponding to the winning of the assist, that is, the case of winning the act assist corresponds to the case where the predetermined condition in this example is satisfied.

In this example, it is determined whether or not the prize is won based on the value of the operation assist random number counter C4 stored in the random number storage area for the lottery invalid period. Specifically, "1 to 5" among the numerical values "0 to 19" of the actuation assist random number counter C4 are the winning values. That is, the assist winning probability is 5/20. Of course, the configuration is not limited to this, and assist winning may be performed with a different winning probability.

In the following step S7707, the variable time for determining the variable time in the invalid period display device (not shown) constituting the second display means is based on the value of the variable time selection counter C2 stored in the random number storage area for the lottery invalid period. A determination process is performed, and then this process ends. Therefore, the second fluctuation pattern selection means in this example is configured by the function of executing the fluctuation time determination process and the like in step S7707.

The correspondence between the value of the variable time selection counter C2 and the variable time in the invalid period display device is stored in advance in the ROM 502 as a variable time selection table for the invalid lottery period (not shown). Therefore, the ROM 502 for storing the variation time selection table and the like constitutes the second variation pattern storage means in this example.

For example, if the value of the variable time selection counter C2 is one of "0 to 2" out of "0 to 9", the variable time of the variable display performed by the invalid period display device is set to 3 seconds. If it is any one of "3 to 5", the fluctuation time of the variable display performed by the invalid period display device is set to 5 seconds, and if it is any of "6 to 9" , the variation time of the variation display performed by the invalid period display device is set to 7 seconds.

Next, the fourth display control process performed in the normal process of FIG. 10 in relation to the invalid period display device will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The function of the main controller 261 that executes the fourth display control process constitutes the second display control means in this example.

First, in step S7801, it is determined whether or not variable display is being performed by the invalid period display device by looking at the setting status of the fourth display flag indicating whether variable display is being performed by the invalid period display device. . Specifically, when the fourth display flag is ON, it is considered that the invalid period display device is performing variable display, and when the fourth display flag is OFF, the variable display is performed on the invalid period display device. It is considered that the display is stopped, which corresponds to a state in which the display is stopped. The invalid period display device and the special gate display device 44 may be shared.

If the determination in step S7801 is negative, the process advances to step S7802 to determine whether or not the starting award determination flag for the lottery invalid period is on. If the determination in step S7802 is negative, that is, if the start prize determination flag for the lottery invalid period is not ON, this process ends.

On the other hand, if the variable display is not in progress and the start winning judgment flag for the lottery invalid period is ON, the flow advances to step S7803 to turn off the starting winning judgment flag for the lottery invalid period. In subsequent step S7804, start setting processing is executed. In this process, a process is performed to indicate that the conditions for performing variable display in the invalid period display device have been met. Specifically, the fourth display flag is turned on, and the fourth display timer is set. The fourth display timer is means for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time) of the fluctuation display performed by the invalid period display device, and is taken into account when determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation display. be done.

In this embodiment, the fourth display timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable time determined in the variable time determination process of step S7707. That is, the value "750" corresponding to 3 seconds, the value "1250" corresponding to 5 seconds, or the value "1750" corresponding to 7 seconds is set for the fourth display timer.

After the end of step S7804, the fourth display control process ends. In addition, based on the setting in the start setting process, when a control signal for starting variable display is output to the invalid period display device in the next external output process of the normal process, the invalid period display device , the variable display is started.

If the determination in step S7801 is affirmative, that is, if the invalid period display device is performing variable display, the flow advances to step S7806 to perform fourth display timer subtraction processing. Each time this process is performed, the count value of the fourth display timer is decremented by one.

Subsequently, proceeding to step S7807, it is determined whether or not the count value of the fourth display timer is "0", that is, whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed. If the determination in step S7807 is affirmative, the fourth display flag is turned off in step S7808, and in step S7809 stop display setting is performed to perform stop display on the invalid period display device. Then, based on the setting contents of the stop display setting, a control signal is output to the invalid period display device to perform stop display in the external output processing in the next normal processing.

Subsequently, the flow advances to step S7810 to perform determination information setting processing, and terminates this processing. In this process, when the stop display corresponds to winning, a setting process for driving the movable accessory 722 of the bypass mechanism section 721 is performed. Specifically, the accessory operating flag is turned on, and the operating time is set to the accessory operating timer. In this embodiment, a value "3000" corresponding to 12 seconds is set for the accessory action timer. As a result, the movable accessory 722 is controlled to a predetermined operating state (advantageous state). The function of the main control device 261 that performs the driving process of the movable accessory 722 based on this setting content constitutes the movable body control means in this example.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S7807 is negative, in step S7811, switching display setting is performed to continue the variable display of the invalid period display device, and this processing ends. Then, based on the contents of the switching display setting, in the external output processing in the next normal processing, a control signal for switching display is output to the invalid period display device. As a result, the variable display of the invalid period display device is realized at the timing of the fourth display control process, that is, every 4 msec.

Therefore, the actuation lottery process (operation assist lottery) in this example is constituted by the random number storage process (storage of the actuation assist random number counter C4) in step S7704 and the success/failure determination process in step S7706. The function of the device 261 constitutes lottery processing execution means (invalid period lottery processing execution means).

The function of the main controller 261 that executes the random number storage process (storage of the variable time selection counter C2) in step S7704 and the variable time determination process in step S7707 constitutes the set time selection means in this example.

As described above, according to this example, the small winning opening period for causing the central winning unit 37 to perform a predetermined opening based on the entry of the game ball into the starting winning section 33 and the end of the small winning opening period The later predetermined period (during the remaining ball monitoring period) is set as a lottery invalid period, and whether or not to operate the movable accessory 722 when a game ball newly enters the start winning part 33 within the lottery invalid period is determined. An actuation assist lottery is held to decide, and the movable accessory 722 is activated when the actuation assist lottery is won.

As a result, even during the opening period of the central winning unit 37, in which an opening opportunity or the like cannot be obtained in the conventional art, the movable accessory 722 performs a predetermined action based on the entry of the game ball into the start winning section 33. Advantageous conditions can arise.

Conventionally, when a game ball enters the starting prize winning section 33, at the opening timing of the central prize winning unit 37 related to the starting ball entering, some players know that the game ball does not win a V prize at the center. Some players temporarily stop shooting game balls during the period when the winning unit 37 is open so that the game balls do not wastefully enter the starting winning section 33 .

On the other hand, according to the present example, even in such a situation after the game ball enters the starting prize winning portion 33, the player can newly start winning in order to be assisted by the movable accessory 722. Since game balls are required to enter the portion 33 and the game balls are continuously shot, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the game machine.

Furthermore, since the profit given to the player differs depending on whether or not the timing at which the game ball enters the starting prize winning section 33 is during the opening period of the central prize winning unit 37, the diversification of the game can be achieved.

As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

In addition, under the configuration according to this example, when a relatively small value is set for the accessory operation timer and the fourth display timer, immediately after the game ball enters the starting winning section 33 during the predetermined lottery invalid period. Then, the movable accessory 722 becomes operable, and the movable accessory 722 can act on the game ball entering the central winning unit 37 during the small winning opening before the lottery invalid period.

On the other hand, when a relatively large value is set for the accessory operation timer or the fourth display timer, the movable accessory 722 is applied to the game ball entering the central winning unit 37 after the predetermined lottery invalid period ends. It becomes the structure which can act. As a result, even if the game ball does not exist in the internal area 401 of the central prize winning unit 37 at the time when the game ball enters the starting prize winning portion 33 within the lottery invalid period, the center is opened at a predetermined timing thereafter. A game ball entering the winning unit 37 is acted upon by the movable accessory 722, and a chance of winning V is given.

As a result, the player actively tries to make the game ball enter the central prize winning unit 37 even after confirming that the game ball has entered the starting prize winning section 33 within the lottery invalid period. It is possible to play games. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

[Appendix]
Technical ideas that can be grasped from the above embodiments will be described below together with their effects.

Conventional problem A. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a game area. For example, a variable ball entry means that opens when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means is provided, and a game ball entering an internal area of the variable ball entry means is provided in the internal area. A pachinko machine is known in which a special game state advantageous to the player is generated when a ball enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

Among such pachinko machines, some have a movable body that changes the behavior of a game ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

However, in the conventional game machine, for example, the movable body performs a predetermined action regularly or continuously regardless of the game, or the movable body moves every time the variable ball entry means is opened. The performance related to the movable body becomes monotonous, such as the player performing a predetermined action, and the player's interest (excitement) in the movement of the movable body tends to fade. In this respect, further enhancement of interest has been desired.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a game machine capable of dramatically improving amusement.

Means A1. a launching means for launching a game ball;
a game area in which the launched game ball is guided;
An opening/closing member capable of changing its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter the internal area and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area, variable ball entry means that allows only game balls that have passed through the specific area to enter the internal area;
a special ball entry means that allows a game ball that has entered the internal area to enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine comprising special game state imparting means capable of imparting a special game state advantageous to a player when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
In the internal region of the variable ball entry means, the state can be changed between at least an advantageous state (special state) that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, a movable body that can change the behavior of the game ball (can act on the game ball);
Trigger ball entry means provided so that a game ball can enter (or pass through);
a trigger ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the trigger ball entry means;
lottery process execution means capable of executing a predetermined operation lottery process based on the ball entry detection means;
a movable body control means capable of executing control to bring the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform a predetermined operation at least when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operation lottery process. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the above means A1, by providing the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to change the behavior of the game ball entering the internal area. For example, by putting the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game effect that heightens the player's expectation for the provision of the special game state, such as increasing the degree of expectation of the ball entering the special ball-entering means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Further, in this means, whether or not to place the movable body in a predetermined advantageous state is determined by a lottery. As a result, for example, the movable body does not always operate regularly or continuously, and the variable ball entry means does not open. , it is possible to suppress the monotony of the performance related to the movable body, and to increase the player's expectation for the movement of the movable body.

In particular, in this means, determination as to whether or not the movable body is to be placed in a predetermined advantageous state is performed by means of software by the lottery process execution means (actuation lottery process). As a result, there is no need to newly provide a complicated mechanism such as a mechanical lottery mechanism for performing lottery based on the behavior of game balls, and the configuration can be simplified.

Here, the arrangement position of the "opportunity ball-entering means" may be, for example, "within the internal area of the variable ball-entering means", "within an area different from the internal area of the variable ball-entering means", or "within the above-mentioned "within the game area outside the variable ball entry means" and the like.

Means A2. The gaming machine according to means A1, wherein the trigger ball entry means is configured to allow a game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter.

According to the above means A2, by providing the trigger ball entry means (the trigger ball entry detection means) for detecting the movement trigger of the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, the behavior of the game ball entering the internal area can be detected. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state, etc., so that the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, which will further enhance interest. can be improved.

Incidentally, if the trigger ball entry means (the trigger ball entry detection means) for detecting the movement trigger of the movable body is arranged outside the variable ball entry means (internal area), the trigger ball entry detection means may be performed using a wire rod or the like. There is a risk that fraudulent acts such as erroneous detection by the means and activation of the movable body are likely to occur.

On the other hand, according to the means A2, by providing the opportunity ball-entering means in the inner region of the variable ball-entering means, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-described problems.

Means A3. The gaming machine according to means A1 or A2, wherein a game ball entering (or passing through) the trigger ball entering means cannot flow down to the special ball entering means (cannot be entered).

If a game ball that has passed through the opportunity ball entry means flows down toward the special ball entry means, there is a risk that the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball will always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body is always the same, which may reduce the interest of the player. Furthermore, there is a risk that cheating, such as vibrating the gaming machine, is likely to occur in accordance with the movement timing of the movable body. In addition, there is a possibility that other game balls flowing down toward the special ball entering means may be disturbed without going through the opportunity ball entering means.

On the other hand, according to the above means A3, the game ball that enters the trigger ball entering means and the game ball that the movable body acts on are always different, so that the occurrence of the various problems described above can be suppressed. can be done.

Means A4. a first route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the special ball entry means and cannot flow down to the trigger ball entry means;
a second route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the trigger ball entry means and cannot flow down to the special ball entry means;
a route sorting means capable of sorting the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route in a specific state;
The game machine according to any one of means A1 to A3, wherein the movable body can change the behavior of the game ball flowing down the first route.

Under the configuration of each of the above means, if a plurality of (for example, two) game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (two game balls flow down continuously with almost no interval) The same applies hereinafter), etc.), even if a situation that is advantageous to the player occurs, if all of these game balls go toward the opportunity ball entry means, no matter how much the movable body Even if is in an advantageous state, there is a possibility that a problem such as not even one game ball entering the special ball entering means may occur.

On the other hand, according to the above means A4, for example, when two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means continuously at the same time, the preceding first game ball is the first route or It is possible to direct the game ball to both the special ball entry means and the opportunity ball entry means such that the game ball flows down one of the second routes and the subsequent second game ball flows down the other route. Therefore, the function and effect of providing the movable body are more effective.

It should be noted that "the first flow route (the first route) that allows the game ball that has passed through the specific area to flow down to the special ball entry means, and the game ball that has passed through the specific area is the first route. In the case of a configuration including a second downstream route (second first route) that can flow down to the special ball entry means with a higher probability than the downstream route (first first route), the entire As a result, the proportion of game balls flowing down to the special ball entry means increases. It must be set, and there is a risk that the interest of the player will be reduced.

Means A5. When a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entering means, the movable body can act on the game ball that has passed through the specific area after the game ball enters the game ball. The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A4, characterized in that:

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which game balls are intermittently shot at predetermined intervals, during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in an open state, a plurality of A situation that is advantageous to the player, such as game balls entering the game continuously, is unlikely to occur frequently. In particular, in a situation where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the variable ball entry means due to the nail adjustment of the game board in the game hall, such a situation that is advantageous to the player may not occur at all. could be.

In other words, if a plurality of game balls do not continuously enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the variable ball entry means), they will receive the action (assist) of the movable body. Therefore, in a gaming machine configured so that a game ball does not enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability, at the stage where a plurality of game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means continuously at the same time, There is a risk that the player's sense of anticipation will fade and interest will decline.

On the other hand, according to the above means A5, a game ball other than a game ball entered (in a continuous ball state) at the same time as the game ball entered by the triggering ball entering means has a higher probability of being special. A chance to enter the ball into the ball entry means is given.

In other words, even if a game ball entered the triggering ball-entering means does not enter the variable ball-entering means, or enters the variable ball-entering means together with the game ball entered the triggering ball-entering means. Even when other game balls do not enter the special ball entry means, the game balls that enter the variable ball entry means after that are given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability. It will happen.

As a result, even after confirming that the game ball has entered the triggering ball entering means, the player can actively play the game to enter the game ball into the variable ball entering means. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

For example, according to the above means A5, two game balls enter the internal area during the predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, and the preceding first game ball (the game ball that first passed through the specific area ball) flows down either the first route or the second route, and the subsequent second game ball (the game ball that has passed through the specific area next) flows down the other route, and then to the second route. When the game ball that has flowed down enters the trigger ball entry means and the movable body is activated, when the game ball that has flowed down to the first route passes through the movable body, the movable body is not yet activated and the first route is activated. Even if the game ball that has flowed down to does not enter the special ball entry means, after that, the game ball that entered the internal area during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means It is also possible to construct a configuration in which the game ball that has been played flows down the first route and is given a chance to enter the special ball entry means by the action of the movable body.

Therefore, the means A5 is set to "open and close in the open state period after the open state period of the opening and closing member through which the game ball passes when the game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entering means." The game machine according to any one of the means A1 to A4, characterized in that the movable body can act on a game ball that has passed through the member."

It should be noted that, under the configuration of each of the above means, the configuration related to the above means A5 is the time from when the game ball enters the trigger ball entry means to the start of operation of the movable body, and By adjusting the operating period, etc., this can be easily achieved without having to enter a plurality of game balls into the variable ball entering means at the same time.

Means A6. display means for starting a variable display based on the detection of a game ball by the opportunity ball entry detection means, and performing stop display in a predetermined manner based on the lottery result of the operation lottery process;
The movable body control means is
The game machine according to any one of means A1 to A5, wherein after the stop display is made on the display means, the control for placing the movable body in the predetermined advantageous state can be executed.

If the movable body were to suddenly operate without warning, the player, who had not paid attention to the movable body until then, would not be able to grasp the situation and might be confused.

On the other hand, according to the means A6, by providing the display means, the player can be made to recognize in advance that there is a possibility that the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of interest in the game presentation using the movable body, and to further improve the interest of the player.

Means A7. Variation pattern storage means for storing a plurality of variation patterns with different time periods for the variation display;
variation pattern selection means capable of selecting one of the plurality of variation patterns stored in the variation pattern storage means based on the detection of the game ball by the opportunity ball detection means;
The gaming machine according to means A6, further comprising display control means for controlling the display means based on the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection means.

According to the means A7, the fluctuation time from the start of the fluctuation display to the stop display on the display means can be made variable. As a result, it is possible to make variable the operation start period from when the game ball is detected by the opportunity ball detection means until the movable body actually becomes in an advantageous state.

As a result, since the movable body does not always operate at a constant timing, it is possible to suppress the monotony of the game performance using the movable body. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player.

In addition, according to this means, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the movement timing of the movable body. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk of cheating, such as vibrating the gaming machine at that timing.

Means A8. When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the game ball enters the special ball entry means more than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. The game machine according to any one of means A1 to A7, characterized in that it is configured to facilitate.

According to the above means A8, if the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the degree of expectation of the ball entering the special ball-entering means is increased, so a game effect is performed to increase the player's expectation for the provision of the special game state or the like. be able to.

As a result, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the inner area of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

Means A9. The special game state imparting means is configured to be capable of imparting a plurality of types of special game states having different game values to be imparted to the player,
A type determining means for determining one game value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the predetermined state among the plurality of types of special game states is higher than when the movable body is controlled so as not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among a plurality of types of special game states) is configured to be easily determined by the type determination means. The gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the means A9, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, it becomes a configuration that is likely to be determined to a predetermined type of special game state among a plurality of types of special game states. It is possible to perform a game effect that heightens the player's sense of anticipation for the provision of a special game state of a type with a high game value.

As a result, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the inner area of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

The "game value" includes, for example, the number of balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) performed during the special game state, and the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) provided after the special game state. is included.

Means A10. a starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
opening/closing control means capable of executing the opening/closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition (opening opportunity) is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means; The game machine according to any one of means A1 to A9, characterized by comprising:

It should be noted that when ``a predetermined starting condition (opening opportunity) is established based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means,'' for example, ``a game ball that has entered the starting ball entry means can be detected. Under the configuration provided with a "starting ball detection means", "when a game ball is detected by the starting ball detection means" or "a predetermined start lottery based on the ball detection by the start ball detection means" and a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the starting lottery."

Means A11. a starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
Opening/closing control capable of executing an open game state in which the variable ball entering means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening opportunity is established based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. means and
The movable body control means is
A game ball enters the starting ball entering means during the predetermined open game state in which the variable ball entering means is caused to execute a predetermined release at least based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. Any one of the means A1 to A10 is configured to be capable of executing control to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform the predetermined action as a benefit that can be imparted when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above means A11, even during an open game state (during an open period of the variable ball entry means) in which an opening opportunity or the like cannot be obtained conventionally, the movable body can be generated based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. A situation can occur that is advantageous to a player who performs a predetermined action.

Conventionally, some players believe that when a game ball enters the start ball entry means, the game ball cannot enter the special ball entry means at the timing of opening the variable ball entry means related to the start ball entry. When it is known, the shooting of the game ball is temporarily stopped at that time so that the game ball does not wastefully enter the starting ball entering means during the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entering means). There are also players.

On the other hand, according to this means, after the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, even in such a situation, the player can renew the starting ball entering means in order to be assisted by the movable body. Since the game ball is required to enter the game ball and continuously shoots the game ball, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the operating rate of the game machine.

Furthermore, since the profit given to the player differs depending on whether or not the timing at which the game ball enters the starting ball entry means is in the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means), diversification of games is desired. can be planned.

As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Conventional problem B. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a game area. For example, a variable ball entry means that opens when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means is provided, and a game ball entering an internal area of the variable ball entry means is provided in the internal area. A pachinko machine is known in which a special game state advantageous to the player is generated when a ball enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

Among such pachinko machines, some have a movable body that changes the behavior of a game ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

However, in conventional game machines, there are effects related to the movable body, such as the movable body periodically or continuously performing a predetermined action regardless of the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means. It became monotonous, and the player's interest in the movable body tended to fade. In this respect, further enhancement of interest has been desired.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a game machine capable of dramatically improving amusement.

Means B1. a launching means for launching a game ball;
a game area in which the launched game ball is guided;
An opening/closing member capable of changing its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter the internal area and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area, variable ball entry means that allows only game balls that have passed through the specific area to enter the internal area;
a special ball entry means that allows a game ball that has entered the internal area to enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine comprising special game state imparting means capable of imparting a special game state advantageous to a player when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
In the internal region of the variable ball entry means, the state can be changed between at least an advantageous state (special state) that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, a movable body that can change the behavior of the game ball (can act on the game ball);
a trigger ball entry means that allows a game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter (or pass through);
a movable body control means capable of executing control to bring the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform a predetermined action when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the trigger ball entry means; A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above means B1, by providing the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to change the behavior of the game ball entering the internal area. For example, by putting the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game effect that heightens the player's expectation for the provision of the special game state, such as increasing the degree of expectation of the ball entering the special ball-entering means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In particular, in this means, by providing a trigger ball entry means (a trigger ball entry detection means) for detecting the movement trigger of the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, the behavior of the game ball entering the internal area can be detected. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, so that the player pays more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Incidentally, if the trigger ball entry means (the trigger ball entry detection means) for detecting the movement trigger of the movable body is arranged outside the variable ball entry means (internal area), the trigger ball entry detection means may be performed using a wire rod or the like. There is a risk that fraudulent acts such as erroneous detection by the means and activation of the movable body are likely to occur.

On the other hand, according to this means, by providing the opportunity ball-entering means in the inner region of the variable ball-entering means, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-described problems.

Means B2. Provided with a predetermined detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has passed through the specific area,
The gaming machine according to means B1, wherein the trigger ball entry means is provided at a position downstream of the predetermined detection means, where the game ball detected by the predetermined detection means can be entered. .

If the movable body is configured to perform a predetermined motion based on detection by the predetermined detection means, the movable body moves at the same timing every time the game ball enters the variable ball entry means (internal area). It will be done.

As a result, the presentation related to the movable body becomes monotonous, and the player easily grasps the movement timing of the movable body.

On the other hand, according to the means B2, it is possible to suppress monotony of the presentation related to the movable body, and to suppress the fraudulent act as described above.

Means B3. a trigger ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball entered by the trigger ball entry means;
The gaming machine according to means B1 or B2, wherein the operating condition can be established when the game ball is detected by the opportunity ball entry detection means.

According to the above means B3, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the movable body should be placed in a predetermined advantageous state by a software-based lottery process, so that the control process can be simplified.

Means B4. a trigger ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the trigger ball entry means;
a lottery process executing means capable of executing a predetermined operation lottery process based on the ball detection by the triggered ball ball detection means;
A game machine according to means B1 or B2, characterized in that the operation condition is satisfied at least when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operation lottery process.

According to the above means B4, determination as to whether or not the movable body is to be placed in a predetermined advantageous state is performed by means of software by the lottery process execution means (actuation lottery process).

As a result, since the action is not performed every time in accordance with a predetermined opportunity, monotony of presentation related to the movable body can be suppressed, and the player's expectation for the action of the movable body can be increased. As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Means B5. A game according to any one of means B1 to B4, characterized in that a game ball entering (or passing through) said trigger ball entering means cannot flow down to said special ball entering means (cannot be entered). machine.

If a game ball that has passed through the opportunity ball entry means flows down toward the special ball entry means, there is a risk that the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball will always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body is always the same, which may reduce the interest of the player. Furthermore, there is a risk that cheating, such as vibrating the gaming machine, is likely to occur in accordance with the movement timing of the movable body. In addition, there is a possibility that other game balls flowing down toward the special ball entering means may be disturbed without going through the opportunity ball entering means.

On the other hand, according to the above means B5, the game ball that enters the trigger ball entering means and the game ball that the movable body acts on are always different, so that the occurrence of the above various problems can be suppressed. can be done.

Means B6. a first route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the special ball entry means and cannot flow down to the trigger ball entry means;
a second route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the trigger ball entry means and cannot flow down to the special ball entry means;
a route sorting means capable of sorting the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route in a specific state;
The game machine according to any one of means B1 to B5, wherein the movable body can change the behavior of the game ball that has flowed down the first route.

Under the configuration of each of the above means, if a plurality of (for example, two) game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (two game balls flow down continuously with almost no interval) The same applies hereinafter), etc.), even if a situation that is advantageous to the player occurs, if all of these game balls go toward the opportunity ball entry means, no matter how much the movable body Even if is in an advantageous state, there is a possibility that a problem such as not even one game ball entering the special ball entering means may occur.

On the other hand, according to the above means B6, for example, when two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means continuously at the same time, the preceding first game ball is the first route or It is possible to direct the game ball to both the special ball entry means and the opportunity ball entry means such that the game ball flows down one of the second routes and the subsequent second game ball flows down the other route. Therefore, the function and effect of providing the movable body are more effective.

Means B7. A gaming machine according to means B6, characterized by comprising a plurality of said second routes configured so that the time required for a game ball to reach said opportunity ball entry means from said route sorting means is different.

If the movable body were configured to move at a constant timing every time when the game ball was distributed by the route distribution means, the performance related to the movable body would become monotonous and the player would be able to move the movable body. It becomes easy to grasp the movement timing of the body, and there is a possibility that cheating such as vibrating the game machine according to the timing is performed.

On the other hand, according to the above means B7, it is possible to make the operation start period variable from the time when the game ball is distributed by the route distribution means until the movable body becomes in a predetermined advantageous state.

As a result, since the movable body does not always operate at a constant timing, it is possible to suppress the monotony of the game performance using the movable body. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player.

In addition, according to this means, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the movement timing of the movable body. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk of cheating, such as vibrating the gaming machine at that timing.

In addition, ``the time required for a game ball to reach the trigger ball entry means from the route distribution means is different'' includes, for example, ``the distance from the route distribution means to the trigger ball entry means is different''. included.

In addition, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a trigger ball entry means (a trigger ball entry detection means) is provided individually corresponding to each of the "plurality of second routes", or a game ball passing through each of the "plurality of second routes". may move toward one occasional ball-entering means (incentive ball-entering detection means) and be detected by the same occasional ball-entering detection means.

For example, "the first route through which the game ball can flow down to the first trigger ball-entering means, and the second route through which the game ball can flow down to the second trigger ball-entering means. It is good also as a structure with ".

In addition, there is provided an opportunity route change means (downstream side route distribution means) capable of periodically or randomly changing the destination of the game ball to at least the "first said second route" or "second said second route". may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the behavior of the game ball and improve the interest of the player.

Means B8. The game ball flows down to the second route by the route distribution means than the movable body arrival time until the game ball reaches the movable body from the time when the game ball flows down to the first route by the route distribution means. the second route having a long advantageous state arrival time until the game ball reaches the triggered ball entry means (the triggered ball entry detection means) and the movable body attains a predetermined advantageous state from the time point of the first and second routes; The gaming machine according to means B6, further comprising a second route in which the advantageous state arrival time is shorter than the movable body arrival time.

If the game ball reaches the movable body from the time when the game ball flows down to the first route by the route distribution means, the time from the time when the game ball flows down to the second route by the route distribution means is longer than the movable body arrival time. When the game ball reaches the opportunity ball entry means and the movable body is configured to reach an advantageous state for a long time until it reaches a predetermined advantageous state, two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means. enter the ball continuously, the preceding first game ball is distributed to the first route by the route distribution means, and the following second game ball is distributed to the second route, the player Since it is known that the game ball will reach the movable body before the timing when the movable body is activated, there is a possibility that interest will be significantly reduced.

Conversely, the time when the game ball flows down to the second route by the route sorting means is longer than the movable body arrival time until the game ball reaches the movable body from the time when the game ball flows down to the first route by the route sorting means. Therefore, when the game ball reaches the opportunity ball entry means and the movable body reaches a predetermined advantageous state in an advantageous state reaching time is shortened, two internal regions of the variable ball entry means are arranged. When the game balls enter continuously, the first preceding game ball is distributed to the second route by the route distributing means, and the second following game ball is distributed to the first route, the comparison is performed. Unless the movable body is maintained in an advantageous state for a long period of time, it is known that the game ball will reach the movable body after the timing when the advantageous state of the movable body ends, so there is a risk that the interest will be significantly reduced. .

On the other hand, according to the means B8, two game balls continuously enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means, and the preceding first game ball takes either the first route or the second route. Even if it is sorted, the subsequent second game ball is sorted to either "the first said second route with a long advantageous state reaching time" or "the second said second route with a short advantageous state reaching time". Depending on whether the movable body is activated or not, there is a possibility that the timing when the movable body is activated and the timing when the game ball reaches the movable body match. Behavior can be observed.

Means B9. When a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entering means, the movable body can act on the game ball that has passed through the specific area after the game ball enters the game ball. The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B8, characterized in that:

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which game balls are intermittently shot at predetermined intervals, during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in an open state, a plurality of A situation that is advantageous to the player, such as game balls entering the game continuously, is unlikely to occur frequently. In particular, in a situation where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the variable ball entry means due to the nail adjustment of the game board in the game hall, such a situation that is advantageous to the player may not occur at all. could be.

In other words, if a plurality of game balls do not continuously enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the variable ball entry means), they will receive the action (assist) of the movable body. Therefore, in a gaming machine configured so that a game ball does not enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability, at the stage where a plurality of game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means continuously at the same time, There is a risk that the player's sense of anticipation will fade and interest will decline.

On the other hand, according to the above means B9, a game ball other than a game ball entered (in a continuous ball state) at the same time as the game ball entered by the triggering ball entry means is special with a higher probability. A chance to enter the ball into the ball entry means is given.

In other words, even if a game ball entered the triggering ball-entering means does not enter the variable ball-entering means, or enters the variable ball-entering means together with the game ball entered the triggering ball-entering means. Even when other game balls do not enter the special ball entry means, the game balls that enter the variable ball entry means after that are given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability. It will happen.

As a result, even after confirming that the game ball has entered the triggering ball entering means, the player can actively play the game to enter the game ball into the variable ball entering means. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

For example, according to the above means B9, two game balls enter the internal area during the predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, and the preceding first game ball (the game ball that first passed through the specific area ball) flows down either the first route or the second route, and the subsequent second game ball (the game ball that has passed through the specific area next) flows down the other route, and then to the second route. When the game ball that has flowed down enters the trigger ball entry means and the movable body is activated, when the game ball that has flowed down to the first route passes through the movable body, the movable body is not yet activated and the first route is activated. Even if the game ball that has flowed down to does not enter the special ball entry means, after that, the game ball that entered the internal area during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means It is also possible to construct a configuration in which the game ball that has been played flows down the first route and is given a chance to enter the special ball entry means by the action of the movable body.

Therefore, the means B9 is set so that "when a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means, it is opened and closed in the open state period after the open state period of the opening and closing member through which the game ball has passed. The game machine according to any one of the means B1 to B8, characterized in that the movable body can act on a game ball that has passed through the member."

It should be noted that the configuration of the above means B9, under the configuration of each of the above means, is the time from when the game ball enters the trigger ball entry means until the movable body starts operating, and the movable body after the start of operation. By adjusting the operating period, etc., this can be easily achieved without having to enter a plurality of game balls into the variable ball entering means at the same time.

Means B10. When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the game ball enters the special ball entry means more than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. The game machine according to any one of means B1 to B9, characterized in that it is configured to facilitate.

According to the above means B10, when the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the degree of expectation of the ball entering the special ball-entering means is increased, so a game effect is performed to increase the player's expectation for the provision of the special game state or the like. be able to.

As a result, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the inner area of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

Means B11. The special game state imparting means is configured to be capable of imparting a plurality of types of special game states having different game values to be imparted to the player,
A type determining means for determining one game value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the predetermined state among the plurality of types of special game states is higher than when the movable body is controlled so as not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among a plurality of types of special game states) is configured to be easily determined by the type determination means. The gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the above means B10, the determination of the type of the special game state is performed based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, it becomes a configuration that is likely to be determined to a predetermined type of special game state among a plurality of types of special game states. It is possible to perform a game effect that heightens the player's sense of anticipation for the provision of a special game state of a type with a high game value.

As a result, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the inner area of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

The "game value" includes, for example, the number of balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) performed during the special game state, and the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) provided after the special game state. is included.

Means B12. a starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
opening/closing control means capable of executing the opening/closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition (opening opportunity) is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means; The game machine according to any one of means B1 to B11, characterized by comprising:

It should be noted that when ``a predetermined starting condition (opening opportunity) is established based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means,'' for example, ``a game ball that has entered the starting ball entry means can be detected. Under the configuration provided with a "starting ball detection means", "when a game ball is detected by the starting ball detection means" or "a predetermined start lottery based on the ball detection by the start ball detection means" and a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the starting lottery."

Means B13. a starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
Opening/closing control capable of executing an open game state in which the variable ball entering means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening opportunity is established based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. means and
The movable body control means is
A game ball enters the starting ball entering means during the predetermined open game state in which the variable ball entering means is caused to execute a predetermined release at least based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. Any one of the means B1 to B12, characterized by being capable of executing control to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform the predetermined action as a benefit that can be granted when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above means B13, even during an open game state (during an open period of the variable ball entry means) in which an opening opportunity or the like cannot be obtained conventionally, based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means, the movable body A situation can occur that is advantageous to a player who performs a predetermined action.

Conventionally, some players believe that when a game ball enters the start ball entry means, the game ball cannot enter the special ball entry means at the timing of opening the variable ball entry means related to the start ball entry. When it is known, the shooting of the game ball is temporarily stopped at that time so that the game ball does not wastefully enter the starting ball entering means during the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entering means). There are also players.

On the other hand, according to this means, after the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, even in such a situation, the player can renew the starting ball entering means in order to be assisted by the movable body. Since the game ball is required to enter the game ball and continuously shoots the game ball, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the operating rate of the game machine.

Furthermore, since the profit given to the player differs depending on whether or not the timing at which the game ball enters the starting ball entry means is in the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means), diversification of games is desired. can be planned.

As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Conventional problem C. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a game area. For example, a variable ball entry means that opens when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means is provided, and a game ball entering an internal area of the variable ball entry means is provided in the internal area. A pachinko machine is known in which a special game state advantageous to the player is generated when a ball enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

Among such pachinko machines, some have a movable body that changes the behavior of a game ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

However, in conventional gaming machines, even if a situation occurs that is advantageous to the player, for example, when a plurality of game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time in succession, these plurality of game balls Depending on the ball entry timing, all of the plurality of game balls are directed to the special ball entry means, or all of the plurality of game balls are not directed to the special ball entry means and are guided to the discharge section or non-special ball entry means. It was a configuration that easily caused a problem such as being put away.

Normally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, even if a game ball newly enters the special ball entry means in a state in which the right to the special game state is obtained, the special game state is not granted for that amount. It is configured.

Therefore, even if two game balls continuously enter the special ball entry means, two special game states are not given, and only one special game state occurs. Therefore, the player may have negative feelings such as loss, waste, waste, and the like.

As a result, it is feared that the player loses interest in the game even though a situation favorable to the player, such as the provision of a special game state, has occurred.

Conversely, when all of the plurality of game balls are guided to the discharge section or the like, since a plurality of game balls have entered the variable ball entry means at the same time, the game is sent to the special ball entry means. There is a risk that this will not contribute to the player's sense of expectation that it will work in favor of hitting the ball, and that interest will decrease.

In this sense, further enhancement of interest has been desired.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its object is to dramatically improve interest when a plurality of game balls enter the variable ball entering means. To provide a game machine capable of

Means C1. a launching means for launching a game ball;
a game area in which the launched game ball is guided;
An opening/closing member capable of changing its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter the internal area and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area, variable ball entry means that allows only game balls that have passed through the specific area to enter the internal area;
a special ball entry means that allows a game ball that has entered the internal area to enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine comprising special game state imparting means capable of imparting a special game state advantageous to a player when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
a trigger ball entry means that allows a game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter (or pass through);
a first route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the special ball entry means and cannot flow down to the trigger ball entry means;
a second route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the trigger ball entry means and cannot flow down to the special ball entry means;
route sorting means capable of sorting the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route in a specific state;
In the internal region of the variable ball entry means, the state can be changed between at least an advantageous state (special state) that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, a movable body that can change the behavior of the game ball that has flowed down to the first route (can act on the game ball),
a movable body control means capable of executing control to bring the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform a predetermined action when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the trigger ball entry means; A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

In addition, when ``when a predetermined operating condition is established based on the entry of a game ball into the trigger ball entry means'', for example, ``a trigger ball entry capable of detecting the game ball that has entered the trigger ball entry means. detection means", "when a game ball is detected by said opportunity ball detection means" or "a predetermined operation lottery is performed based on the ball detection by said opportunity ball entry detection means, When a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operation lottery”.

According to the means C1, by providing the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to change the behavior of the game ball entering the internal area. For example, by putting the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game effect that heightens the player's expectation for the provision of the special game state, such as increasing the degree of expectation of the ball entering the special ball-entering means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In particular, this means is provided with a route sorting means capable of sorting the destination of a game ball entering the internal area of the variable ball entering means to the first route or the second route.

As a result, for example, when two game balls continuously enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means at the same time, the preceding first game ball flows down either the first route or the second route. The movable body is provided because it is possible to direct the game ball to both the special ball entry means and the opportunity ball entry means, such as the following second game ball flowing down the other route. The action effect will be more successful.

As a result, it is possible to heighten the player's expectation that a plurality of game balls may be entered into the internal area of the variable ball entry means at the same time, thereby increasing the expectation of occurrence of the special game state.

Furthermore, when two game balls continuously enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means, which route the preceding first game ball and the second subsequent game ball flow respectively? Since the results will differ depending on the route, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game balls distributed by the route distribution means with a sense of anticipation. As a result, it is possible to further improve interest.

Means C2. The route sorting means (route sorting mechanism, route sorting member, etc.)
The state can be changed between a first state in which game balls can flow down to the first route and a second state in which game balls can flow down to the second route,
a maintaining means capable of maintaining the route sorting means in the first state;
When a game ball flows down to the first route by the route sorting means maintained in the first state, the force received from the game ball changes the route sorting means to the second state. The gaming machine according to means C1, characterized in that

Under the configuration related to the means C2, in order to operate the movable body, it is necessary to enter the game ball into the opportunity ball entry means. It is necessary to change the sorting means to the second state and guide the game ball to the second route.

That is, in order to operate the movable body, at least two game balls are continuously entered into the variable ball entry means, and the preceding first game ball is moved by the route distribution means maintained in the first state. After flowing down to the first route, the following second game ball needs to flow down to the second route by the route sorting means changed to the second state.

As a result, it is more advantageous for the player to enter a plurality of game balls than to enter one game ball into the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby ensuring the game performance. can be done.

As a more specific configuration of the means C2, for example, "Means C2. The route sorting means
A route distributing member configured to be changeable between a first posture in which game balls can flow down to the first route and a second posture in which game balls can flow down to the second route,
Maintaining means (biasing means, etc.) capable of maintaining the route distribution member in the first posture,
When a game ball flows down to the first route by the route distribution member maintained in the first posture, the force received from the game ball causes the route distribution member (for example, to resist the biasing force of biasing means). and) the gaming machine according to means C1, wherein the gaming machine is configured to change to the second posture. and so on.

Means C3. The game ball flows down to the second route by the route distribution means than the movable body arrival time until the game ball reaches the movable body from the time when the game ball flows down to the first route by the route distribution means. From the point of time when the game ball reaches the trigger ball entry means (the trigger ball entry detection means) and the movable body reaches a predetermined advantageous state, the time for reaching an advantageous state is shortened. The gaming machine according to means C2 for

If the game ball reaches the movable body from the time when the game ball flows down to the first route by the route distribution means, the time from the time when the game ball flows down to the second route by the route distribution means is longer than the movable body arrival time. When the game ball reaches the opportunity ball entry means and the time required for the movable body to reach the advantageous state is long, two game balls are continuously inserted into the internal region of the variable ball entry means. When the first game ball is distributed to the first route by the route distribution means and the second game ball is distributed to the second route by the route distribution means, the player enters the movable body. Since it is known that the game ball will reach the movable body before the timing of the operation, there is a possibility that interest will be significantly reduced.

On the other hand, according to the means C3, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems and to suppress the decrease in interest of the player.

The above-mentioned "advantageous state arrival time" should be shorter than the above-mentioned "movable body arrival time". This is intended to include a configuration in which the distance is zero, etc.).

Also, in order to lengthen the "movable body reaching time", for example, lengthening the moving distance of the game ball required to pass through the "first route" can be considered as an example.

Also, instead of or in addition to this, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a delay means for delaying the passage of the game ball is installed in the "first route". Here, as the delay means, for example, a structure such as a stage or a rune, in which the game ball goes back and forth in the same place several times, or advances after going around, or a structure such as a rib that stops the momentum of the game ball and delays the time. One example is a configuration in which the game ball advances over the ball.

In addition, "from the point in time when the game ball flows down to the second route by the route sorting means, the game ball reaches the opportunity ball entry means (the opportunity ball entry detection means), and the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state. After that, the movable body from the time when the game ball flows down to the first route by the route sorting means until the game ball reaches the movable body than the advantageous end arrival time until the advantageous state ends It is preferable to be configured so that the arrival time is short.

If the "movable body reaching time" is longer than the "advantageous end reaching time", two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entering means continuously, and the preceding first game is played. When the ball is sorted to the first route by the route sorting means and the subsequent second game ball is sorted to the second route, the game ball is released after the timing when the advantageous state of the movable body ends. reaches the movable body, there is a risk that interest will be significantly reduced.

Means C4. The route sorting means (route sorting mechanism, route sorting member, etc.)
At least a state changeable between a first state in which game balls can flow down to the first route and a second state in which game balls can flow down to the second route,
The game machine according to means C1, further comprising a distribution drive means for periodically or continuously performing a predetermined operation for changing the state of the route distribution means.

If two game balls continuously enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means, the preceding first game ball is always distributed to either the first route or the second route, and the subsequent game ball is assigned to either the first route or the second route. In the case where the second game ball is distributed to the other route, the relationship between the preset "advantageous state arrival time" and the "movable body arrival time" allows continuous entry. At the time when the two game balls are alternately distributed by the route distribution means, the result after that is decided, so there is a possibility that the interest of the player may decrease.

On the other hand, according to the means C4, even if two game balls continuously enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means, the preceding first game ball is the first route or the second route. Since it is not decided which way to distribute, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-described problems.

As a result, the player can keep an eye on the behavior of the game ball with a sense of anticipation for the occurrence of the special game state, thereby suppressing a decline in interest.

Means C5. The route sorting means (route sorting mechanism, route sorting member, etc.)
At least a state changeable between a first state in which game balls can flow down to the first route and a second state in which game balls can flow down to the second route,
a maintaining means capable of maintaining the route sorting means in a reference state between the first state and the second state;
In a state in which the route sorting means is maintained in the reference state, game balls can flow down either the first route or the second route,
When the game ball flows down to the first route by the route sorting means maintained in the reference state, the force received from the game ball causes the route sorting means to change to the second state,
When a game ball flows down to the second route by the route sorting means maintained in the reference state, the route sorting means is changed to the first state by the force received from the game ball. The gaming machine according to means C1, characterized in that

According to the means C5, the same effects as those of the means C4 can be obtained. In particular, according to this means, since it is not necessary to provide a driving means for driving the route sorting means, while adopting a relatively simple configuration, a plurality of (two) game balls that continuously flow down are alternately distributed. Configurations can be implemented to flow down different routes. As a result, simplification of the configuration and control, compactness, etc. can be achieved.

As a more specific configuration of the means C5, for example, "means C5. The route sorting means
A route distributing member configured to be able to change its posture between at least a first posture that allows game balls to flow down to the first route and a second posture that allows game balls to flow down to the second route,
Maintaining means (biasing means, etc.) capable of maintaining the route distribution member in a reference posture between the first posture and the second posture,
In a state in which the route distribution member is maintained in the reference posture, game balls can flow down either the first route or the second route,
When the game ball flows down to the first route by the route distributing member maintained in the reference posture, the force received from the game ball causes the route distributing member to change to the second posture,
When a game ball flows down to the second route by the route distributing member maintained in the reference posture, the force received from the game ball causes the route distributing member to change to the first posture. The gaming machine according to means C1, characterized in that and so on.

Means C6. The game ball flows down to the second route by the route distribution means than the movable body arrival time until the game ball reaches the movable body from the time when the game ball flows down to the first route by the route distribution means. from the point in time when the game ball reaches the trigger ball entry means (the trigger ball entry detection means) and the movable body attains an advantageous state; The gaming machine according to means C4 or C5, further comprising a second route in which the advantageous state reaching time is shorter than the body reaching time.

If the game ball reaches the movable body from the time when the game ball flows down to the first route by the route distribution means, the time from the time when the game ball flows down to the second route by the route distribution means is longer than the movable body arrival time. When the game ball reaches the opportunity ball entry means and the time required for the movable body to reach the advantageous state is long, two game balls are continuously inserted into the internal region of the variable ball entry means. When the first game ball is distributed to the first route by the route distribution means and the second game ball is distributed to the second route by the route distribution means, the player enters the movable body. Since it is known that the game ball will reach the movable body before the timing of the operation, there is a possibility that interest will be significantly reduced.

Conversely, the time when the game ball flows down to the second route by the route sorting means is longer than the movable body arrival time until the game ball reaches the movable body from the time when the game ball flows down to the first route by the route sorting means. Therefore, when the game ball reaches the opportunity ball entry means and the time required for the movable body to reach the advantageous state is shortened, two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means. enter the ball continuously, the first preceding game ball is distributed to the second route by the route distribution means, and the second game ball following is distributed to the first route, a relatively long Unless the movable body is maintained in an advantageous state for a period of time, it is known that the game ball will reach the movable body after the timing when the advantageous state of the movable body ends, so there is a possibility that interest will be significantly reduced.

On the other hand, according to the means C6, two game balls continuously enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means, and the preceding first game ball takes either the first route or the second route. Even if it is sorted, the subsequent second game ball is sorted to either "the first said second route with a long advantageous state reaching time" or "the second said second route with a short advantageous state reaching time". Depending on whether the movable body is activated or not, there is a possibility that the timing when the movable body is activated and the timing when the game ball reaches the movable body match. Behavior can be observed.

It should be noted that it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a trigger ball entry means (a trigger ball detection means) is provided individually corresponding to each of the ``first said second route'' and the ``second said second route''. A game ball passing through the first said second route or the second said second route respectively moves toward one opportunity ball entry means (event ball entry detection means), and the same opportunity ball entry detection means. It is good also as a structure detected by a means.

For example, "the first route through which the game ball can flow down to the first trigger ball-entering means, and the second route through which the game ball can flow down to the second trigger ball-entering means. It is good also as a structure with ".

In addition, there is provided an opportunity route change means (downstream side route distribution means) capable of periodically or randomly changing the destination of the game ball to at least the "first said second route" or "second said second route". may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the behavior of the game ball and improve the interest of the player.

Means C7. A game according to any one of the means C1 to C6, characterized in that a game ball entering (or passing through) the trigger ball entering means cannot flow down to the special ball entering means (cannot be entered). machine.

If a game ball that has passed through the opportunity ball entry means flows down toward the special ball entry means, there is a risk that the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball will always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body is always the same, which may reduce the interest of the player. Furthermore, there is a risk that cheating, such as vibrating the gaming machine, is likely to occur in accordance with the movement timing of the movable body. In addition, there is a possibility that other game balls flowing down toward the special ball entering means may be disturbed without going through the opportunity ball entering means.

On the other hand, according to the means C7, the game ball that enters the opportunity ball entry means and the game ball that the movable body acts on are always different, so that the occurrence of the above various problems can be suppressed. can be done.

Means C8. When a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entering means, the movable body can act on the game ball that has passed through the specific area after the game ball enters the game ball. The game machine according to any one of means C1 to C7, characterized in that:

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which game balls are intermittently shot at predetermined intervals, during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in an open state, a plurality of A situation that is advantageous to the player, such as game balls entering the game continuously, is unlikely to occur frequently. In particular, in a situation where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the variable ball entry means due to the nail adjustment of the game board in the game hall, such a situation that is advantageous to the player may not occur at all. could be.

In other words, if a plurality of game balls do not continuously enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the variable ball entry means), they will receive the action (assist) of the movable body. Therefore, in a gaming machine configured so that a game ball does not enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability, at the stage where a plurality of game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means continuously at the same time, There is a risk that the player's sense of anticipation will fade and interest will decline.

On the other hand, according to the above means C8, a game ball other than a game ball entered at the same time as the game ball entered by the triggering ball entry means (in a continuous ball state) is treated with a higher probability. A chance to enter the ball into the ball entry means is given.

In other words, even if a game ball entered the triggering ball-entering means does not enter the variable ball-entering means, or enters the variable ball-entering means together with the game ball entered the triggering ball-entering means. Even when other game balls do not enter the special ball entry means, the game balls that enter the variable ball entry means after that are given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability. It will happen.

As a result, even after confirming that the game ball has entered the triggering ball entering means, the player can actively play the game to enter the game ball into the variable ball entering means. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

For example, according to the means C8, two game balls enter the internal area during the predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, and the preceding first game ball (the game ball that first passed through the specific area ball) flows down either the first route or the second route, and the subsequent second game ball (the game ball that has passed through the specific area next) flows down the other route, and then to the second route. When the game ball that has flowed down enters the trigger ball entry means and the movable body is activated, when the game ball that has flowed down to the first route passes through the movable body, the movable body is not yet activated and the first route is activated. Even if the game ball that has flowed down to does not enter the special ball entry means, after that, the game ball that entered the internal area during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means It is also possible to construct a configuration in which the game ball that has been played flows down the first route and is given a chance to enter the special ball entry means by the action of the movable body.

Therefore, the means C8 is set to "open and close in the open state period after the open state period of the opening and closing member through which the game ball passes when the game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entering means." The game machine according to any one of the means C1 to C7, characterized in that the movable body can act on a game ball that has passed through the member."

It should be noted that, under the configuration related to the above means C8, the time from when the game ball enters the triggering ball entry means until the movable body starts operating, and the movable body after the start of operation By adjusting the operating period, etc., this can be easily achieved without having to enter a plurality of game balls into the variable ball entering means at the same time.

Means C9. When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the game ball enters the special ball entry means more than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to C8, characterized in that it is configured to facilitate.

According to the above means C9, if the movable body becomes in a predetermined advantageous state, the degree of expectation of the ball entering the special ball-entering means increases, so a game effect is performed to increase the player's expectation for the provision of the special game state or the like. be able to.

As a result, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the inner area of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

Means C10. The special game state imparting means is configured to be capable of imparting a plurality of types of special game states having different game values to be imparted to the player,
A type determining means for determining one game value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the predetermined state among the plurality of types of special game states is higher than when the movable body is controlled so as not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among a plurality of types of special game states) is configured to be easily determined by the type determination means. The gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the means C10, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, it becomes a configuration that is likely to be determined to a predetermined type of special game state among a plurality of types of special game states. It is possible to perform a game effect that heightens the player's sense of anticipation for the provision of a special game state of a type with a high game value.

As a result, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the inner area of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

The "game value" includes, for example, the number of balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) performed during the special game state, and the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) provided after the special game state. is included.

Means C11. a starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
opening/closing control means capable of executing the opening/closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition (opening opportunity) is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means; The game machine according to any one of means C1 to C10, characterized by comprising:

It should be noted that when ``a predetermined starting condition (opening opportunity) is established based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means,'' for example, ``a game ball that has entered the starting ball entry means can be detected. Under the configuration provided with a "starting ball detection means", "when a game ball is detected by the starting ball detection means" or "a predetermined start lottery based on the ball detection by the start ball detection means" and a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the starting lottery."

Means C12. a starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
Opening/closing control capable of executing an open game state in which the variable ball entering means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening opportunity is established based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. means and
The movable body control means is
A game ball enters the starting ball entering means during the predetermined open game state in which the variable ball entering means is caused to execute a predetermined release at least based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. Any one of the means C1 to C11, characterized by being capable of executing control to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform the predetermined operation as a benefit that can be granted when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above means C12, even during the open gaming state (during the opening period of the variable ball entering means) in which the opening opportunity etc. cannot be obtained conventionally, based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means, the movable body A situation can occur that is advantageous to a player who performs a predetermined action.

Conventionally, some players believe that when a game ball enters the start ball entry means, the game ball cannot enter the special ball entry means at the timing of opening the variable ball entry means related to the start ball entry. When it is known, the shooting of the game ball is temporarily stopped at that time so that the game ball does not wastefully enter the starting ball entering means during the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entering means). There are also players.

On the other hand, according to this means, after the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, even in such a situation, the player can renew the starting ball entering means in order to be assisted by the movable body. Since the game ball is required to enter the game ball and continuously shoots the game ball, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the operating rate of the game machine.

Furthermore, since the profit given to the player differs depending on whether or not the timing at which the game ball enters the starting ball entry means is in the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means), diversification of games is desired. can be planned.

As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Conventional problem D. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a game area. For example, a variable ball entry means that opens when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means is provided, and a game ball entering an internal area of the variable ball entry means is provided in the internal area. A pachinko machine is known in which a special game state advantageous to the player is generated when a ball enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

Among such pachinko machines, some have a movable body that changes the behavior of a game ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, the movable body is configured to operate at a constant timing every time when a game ball enters the internal area of the variable ball entering means.

Therefore, conventionally, there is a possibility that the player will grasp the timing of the movement of the movable body, and commit fraud such as vibrating the gaming machine in accordance with the timing.

In addition, the presentation related to the movable body tends to be monotonous, and in this respect, further enhancement of interest has been desired.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its object is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing cheating and improving interest.

Means D1. a launching means for launching a game ball;
a game area in which the launched game ball is guided;
An opening/closing member capable of changing its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter the internal area and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area, variable ball entry means that allows only game balls that have passed through the specific area to enter the internal area;
a special ball entry means that allows a game ball that has entered the internal area to enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine comprising special game state imparting means capable of imparting a special game state advantageous to a player when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
In the internal region of the variable ball entry means, the state can be changed between at least an advantageous state (special state) that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, a movable body that can change the behavior of the game ball (can act on the game ball);
Movable body control capable of executing control to bring the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform a predetermined action when at least a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (for example, when a game ball is detected by predetermined ball detection means). means and
A gaming machine characterized in that a period from at least a predetermined trigger (for example, when the operating condition is established) to when the movable body enters the predetermined advantageous state is variable.

According to the means D1, by providing the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to change the behavior of the game ball entering the internal area. For example, by putting the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game effect that heightens the player's expectation for the provision of the special game state, such as increasing the degree of expectation of the ball entering the special ball-entering means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In particular, in this means, the period (for example, the opening period) from a predetermined trigger (for example, when the operating condition is satisfied) until the movable body actually enters a predetermined advantageous state is variable, so that the movable body Since there is no need to perform actions at fixed timings, it is possible to suppress the monotony of the game presentation using the movable body. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player.

In addition, it is possible to reduce the risk that the player will grasp the movement timing of the movable body. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk of cheating, such as vibrating the gaming machine at that timing.

Means D2. a trigger ball entry means that allows a game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter (or pass through);
a trigger ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball entered by the trigger ball entry means;
The gaming machine according to means D1, wherein the operation condition can be established based on the detection of a game ball by the opportunity ball-entering detection means.

If the triggering ball entry means that triggers the movement of the movable body is placed outside the variable ball entry means (internal area), the triggering ball entry detection means will make an erroneous detection using a wire rod or the like, and the movable body will be activated. There is a risk that fraudulent acts such as

On the other hand, according to the means D2, the movement of the game ball entering the internal area causes the movable body to operate, so that the occurrence of the above-described problems can be suppressed.

Here, for example, if it is set as "a configuration in which the operating condition is satisfied when the game ball is detected by the trigger ball-entering detection means", the determination of whether or not the movable body should be placed in a predetermined advantageous state is determined by software. Since there is no need to execute the random lottery process, the control process can be simplified. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraud such as installing an illegal ROM or the like in which the program related to the lottery process is altered.

Means D3. operation pattern storage means for storing a plurality of operation patterns that define an operation start period from at least when the operation condition is established until the movable body enters the predetermined advantageous state;
operation pattern selection means capable of selecting any one of a plurality of operation patterns stored in the operation pattern storage means based on detection of a game ball by the opportunity ball entry detection means; The game machine according to means D2 characterized by:

According to the above means D3, a plurality of patterns of operation start periods (for example, opening periods) are prepared, and a predetermined operation start period is selected from among these patterns by software. As a result, it is possible to more easily diversify the operation start period. As a result, it is possible to more easily diversify the period from a predetermined trigger until the movable body enters a predetermined advantageous state, and it is possible to further enhance the effect of the means D1 and the like.

Furthermore, according to this means, it is not necessary to provide the variable ball-entering means with a complicated mechanical selection mechanism, and the structure of the variable ball-entering means can be simplified.

Means D4. production means capable of executing a preceding production (opening production) suggesting that at least the movable body is in the predetermined advantageous state during the operation start period;
production pattern storage means for storing a plurality of production patterns corresponding to the plurality of operation patterns;
A gaming machine according to means D3, further comprising an effect control means capable of controlling the effect means based on an effect pattern corresponding to the operation pattern selected by the operation pattern selection means.

According to the above means D4, the player can be made to recognize in advance that the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state by performing a preceding effect suggesting that the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state. .

Furthermore, the player is nervous without knowing when the movable body will reach a predetermined advantageous state, but with a sense of expectation that the movable body will reach a predetermined advantageous state at a timing that is advantageous to him. Along with the behavior of the game ball, it is possible to pay attention to the game performance related to the movable body, and it is possible to further improve the interest.

In addition, in a configuration in which the operation start period from when the operating condition is established until the movable body enters a predetermined advantageous state is variable, when the operation start period becomes relatively long, the operating condition is satisfied. However, there is a risk that the player will feel uneasiness and resentment that the movable body will not be in a predetermined advantageous state.

On the other hand, according to the present means, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of such troubles, and to suppress the decrease in interest of the player.

Means D5. a lottery process execution means capable of executing a predetermined operation lottery process based on the ball entry detection by the opportunity ball entry detection means;
The gaming machine according to any one of means D2 to D4, wherein the operation condition is satisfied at least when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operation lottery process. .

According to the above-mentioned means D5, the decision as to whether or not the movable body is to be placed in a predetermined advantageous state is determined by means of software by means of the lottery process execution means (actuation lottery process).

As a result, since the action is not performed every time in accordance with a predetermined opportunity, monotony of presentation related to the movable body can be suppressed, and the player's expectation for the action of the movable body can be increased. As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Means D6. display means for starting a variable display based on the detection of a game ball by the opportunity ball entry detection means, and performing stop display in a predetermined manner based on the lottery result of the operation lottery process;
Variation pattern storage means for storing a plurality of variation patterns with different time periods for the variation display;
variation pattern selection means capable of selecting one of the plurality of variation patterns stored in the variation pattern storage means based on the detection of the game ball by the opportunity ball detection means;
Display control means for controlling the display means based on the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection means,
The movable body control means is
The game machine according to any one of means D2 to D5, wherein control is executable to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state after the stop display is made on the display means.

According to the means D6, by providing the display means, the player can be made to recognize in advance that there is a possibility that the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state.

Furthermore, the player, while not knowing whether or not the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state, has a sense of anticipation that it will be in an advantageous state, and watches the movement of the game ball and the variable display. As a result, it is possible to further improve interest.

As a result, it is possible to increase the attention level of the game presentation related to the movable body, and to further improve the interest of the player.

In addition, according to the means D6, it is possible to make the variable time from the start of the variable display to the stop display on the display means variable. As a result, it is possible to make variable the operation start period from when the game ball is detected by the opportunity ball detection means until the movable body actually becomes in a predetermined advantageous state.

As a result, it is possible to more easily diversify the operation start period. As a result, it is possible to more easily diversify the period from a predetermined trigger until the movable body enters a predetermined advantageous state, and it is possible to further enhance the effect of the means D1 and the like.

Means D7. a first route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the special ball entry means and cannot flow down to the trigger ball entry means;
a second route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the trigger ball entry means and cannot flow down to the special ball entry means;
a route sorting means capable of sorting the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route in a specific state;
The gaming machine according to any one of means D2 to D6, wherein the movable body can change the behavior of the game ball that has flowed down the first route.

If a plurality of (for example, two) game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (including a continuous ball state in which two game balls flow down continuously with almost no interval between them. Similarly.), etc., even if a situation that is advantageous to the player occurs, if all of these game balls go toward the opportunity ball entry means, no matter how advantageous the movable body becomes, There is a possibility that a problem such as not even one game ball entering the special ball entering means may occur.

On the other hand, according to the above means D7, for example, when two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means continuously at the same time, the preceding first game ball is the first route or It is possible to direct the game ball to both the special ball entry means and the opportunity ball entry means such that the game ball flows down one of the second routes and the subsequent second game ball flows down the other route. Therefore, the function and effect of providing the movable body are more effective.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned "predetermined opportunity" may be that the game ball is distributed to the second route by the route distribution means.

Means D8. The route sorting means (route sorting mechanism, route sorting member, etc.)
The state can be changed between a first state in which game balls can flow down to the first route and a second state in which game balls can flow down to the second route,
Distributing driving means for periodically or continuously performing a predetermined operation to change the state of the route distributing means,
A means D7 characterized by comprising a plurality of said second routes configured so that the time required for a game ball passing through said specific area from said route sorting means to said opportunity ball entry means is different. The game machine described.

If the movable body were configured to move at a constant timing every time when the game ball was distributed by the route distribution means, the performance related to the movable body would become monotonous and the player would be able to move the movable body. It becomes easy to grasp the movement timing of the body, and there is a possibility that cheating such as vibrating the game machine according to the timing is performed.

On the other hand, according to the means D8, by providing a plurality of second routes, it is possible to make the period from when the game ball is distributed by the route distributing means to when the opportunity ball entering means be variable.

As a result, the period from when the game ball is distributed by the route distribution means (predetermined timing) to when the movable body actually becomes in an advantageous state can be made variable.

In addition, according to this means, the period from when the game ball is distributed by the route distribution means to when the trigger ball entry means can be made variable by the mechanical configuration based on the behavior of the game ball. Players will be able to watch the behavior of the game ball in the inner area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further improving the interest.

In addition, ``the time required for a game ball to reach the trigger ball entry means from the route distribution means is different'' includes, for example, ``the distance from the route distribution means to the trigger ball entry means is different''. included.

In addition, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a trigger ball entry means (a trigger ball entry detection means) is provided individually corresponding to each of the "plurality of second routes", or a game ball passing through each of the "plurality of second routes". may move toward one occasional ball-entering means (incentive ball-entering detection means) and be detected by the same occasional ball-entering detection means.

For example, "the first route through which the game ball can flow down to the first trigger ball-entering means, and the second route through which the game ball can flow down to the second trigger ball-entering means. It is good also as a structure with ".

In addition, there is provided an opportunity route change means (downstream side route distribution means) capable of periodically or randomly changing the destination of the game ball to at least the "first said second route" or "second said second route". may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the behavior of the game ball and improve the interest of the player.

Means D9. As the plurality of second routes,
The game ball flows down to the second route by the route distribution means than the movable body arrival time until the game ball reaches the movable body from the time when the game ball flows down to the first route by the route distribution means. The second route having a long advantageous state arrival time until the game ball reaches the triggered ball entry means (the triggered ball entry detection means) and the movable body enters the predetermined advantageous state from the time point of the first and second routes. , and the second route in which the advantageous state arrival time is shorter than the movable body arrival time.

If the game ball reaches the movable body from the time when the game ball flows down to the first route by the route distribution means, the time from the time when the game ball flows down to the second route by the route distribution means is longer than the movable body arrival time. When the game ball reaches the opportunity ball entry means and the movable body is configured to reach an advantageous state for a long time until it reaches a predetermined advantageous state, two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means. enter the ball continuously, the preceding first game ball is distributed to the first route by the route distribution means, and the following second game ball is distributed to the second route, the player Since it is known that the game ball will reach the movable body before the timing when the movable body is activated, there is a possibility that interest will be significantly reduced.

Conversely, the time when the game ball flows down to the second route by the route sorting means is longer than the movable body arrival time until the game ball reaches the movable body from the time when the game ball flows down to the first route by the route sorting means. Therefore, when the game ball reaches the opportunity ball entry means and the movable body reaches a predetermined advantageous state in an advantageous state reaching time is shortened, two internal regions of the variable ball entry means are arranged. When the game balls enter continuously, the first preceding game ball is distributed to the second route by the route distributing means, and the second following game ball is distributed to the first route, the comparison is performed. Unless the movable body is maintained in a predetermined advantageous state for a long period of time, it is known that the game ball will reach the movable body after the timing when the advantageous state of the movable body ends, so there is a possibility that the interest will be significantly reduced. There is

On the other hand, according to the means D9, two game balls continuously enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means, and the preceding first game ball goes to either the first route or the second route. Even if it is sorted, the subsequent second game ball is sorted to either "the first said second route with a long advantageous state reaching time" or "the second said second route with a short advantageous state reaching time". Depending on whether the movable body is activated or not, there is a possibility that the timing when the movable body is activated and the timing when the game ball reaches the movable body match. Behavior can be observed.

It should be noted that the ``second said second route'' may be shorter than the ``first said second route'' in terms of the time required for the game ball to pass through. It is intended to include a configuration in which the ball is entered (such as a configuration in which the distance to the opportunity ball entry means is zero).

In addition, in order to lengthen the time required for the game ball to pass through the "first and second route", for example, lengthening the moving distance of the game ball required to pass through the "first and second route" is one example. can be considered as

Also, instead of or in addition to this, for example, a configuration may be employed in which a delay means for delaying the passage of the game ball is installed in the "first second route". Here, as the delay means, for example, a structure such as a stage or a rune, in which the game ball goes back and forth in the same place several times, or advances after going around, or a structure such as a rib that stops the momentum of the game ball and delays the time. One example is a configuration in which the game ball advances over the ball.

Furthermore, by installing the delay means as described above in the "first route", the game ball flowing down to the first route can be moved longer than the time required for the game ball to pass through the "second route". A configuration may be adopted in which the movable body reaching the body takes a long time.

Means D10. A game according to any one of means D2 to D9, characterized in that a game ball entering (or passing through) said trigger ball entering means cannot flow down (cannot enter) to said special ball entering means. machine.

If a game ball that has passed through the opportunity ball entry means flows down toward the special ball entry means, there is a risk that the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball will always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body is always the same, which may reduce the interest of the player. Furthermore, there is a risk that cheating, such as vibrating the gaming machine, is likely to occur in accordance with the movement timing of the movable body. In addition, there is a possibility that other game balls flowing down toward the special ball entering means may be disturbed without going through the opportunity ball entering means.

On the other hand, according to the above means D10, the game ball that enters the trigger ball entering means and the game ball that the movable body acts on are always different, so that the occurrence of the above various problems can be suppressed. can be done.

Means D11. When a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entering means, the movable body can act on the game ball that has passed through the specific area after the game ball enters the game ball. The gaming machine according to any one of means D2 to D10, characterized in that:

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which game balls are intermittently shot at predetermined intervals, during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in an open state, a plurality of A situation that is advantageous to the player, such as game balls entering the game continuously, is unlikely to occur frequently. In particular, in a situation where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the variable ball entry means due to the nail adjustment of the game board in the game hall, such a situation that is advantageous to the player may not occur at all. could be.

In other words, if a plurality of game balls do not continuously enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the variable ball entry means), they will receive the action (assist) of the movable body. Therefore, in a gaming machine configured so that a game ball does not enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability, at the stage where a plurality of game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means continuously at the same time, There is a risk that the player's sense of anticipation will fade and interest will decline.

On the other hand, according to the above means D11, a game ball other than a game ball entered (in a continuous ball state) at the same time as the game ball entered by the triggering ball entry means has a higher probability of being special. A chance to enter the ball into the ball entry means is given.

In other words, even if a game ball entered the triggering ball-entering means does not enter the variable ball-entering means, or enters the variable ball-entering means together with the game ball entered the triggering ball-entering means. Even when other game balls do not enter the special ball entry means, the game balls that enter the variable ball entry means after that are given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability. It will happen.

As a result, even after confirming that the game ball has entered the triggering ball entering means, the player can actively play the game to enter the game ball into the variable ball entering means. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

For example, according to the means D11, two game balls enter the internal area during the predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, and the preceding first game ball (the game ball that first passed through the specific area ball) flows down either the first route or the second route, and the subsequent second game ball (the game ball that has passed through the specific area next) flows down the other route, and then to the second route. When the game ball that has flowed down enters the trigger ball entry means and the movable body is activated, when the game ball that has flowed down to the first route passes through the movable body, the movable body is not yet activated and the first route is activated. Even if the game ball that has flowed down to does not enter the special ball entry means, after that, the game ball that entered the internal area during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means It is also possible to construct a configuration in which the game ball that has been played flows down the first route and is given a chance to enter the special ball entry means by the action of the movable body.

Therefore, the means D11 is set to "open and close during the open state period after the open state period of the opening and closing member through which the game ball passes when the game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entering means." The game machine according to any one of the means D2 to D10, characterized in that the movable body can act on a game ball that has passed through the member."

In addition, the configuration related to the means D11, under the configuration related to each of the above means, is the time from when the game ball enters the trigger ball entry means to the start of operation of the movable body, and By adjusting the operating period, etc., this can be easily achieved without having to enter a plurality of game balls into the variable ball entering means at the same time.

Means D12. When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the game ball enters the special ball entry means more than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. The gaming machine according to any one of means D1 to D11, characterized in that it is configured to facilitate.

According to the above means D12, when the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the degree of expectation of the ball entering the special ball-entering means is increased, so a game effect is performed to increase the player's expectation for the provision of the special game state. be able to.

As a result, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the inner area of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

Means D13. The special game state imparting means is configured to be capable of imparting a plurality of types of special game states having different game values to be imparted to the player,
A type determining means for determining one game value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the predetermined state among the plurality of types of special game states is higher than when the movable body is controlled so as not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among a plurality of types of special game states) is configured to be easily determined by the type determination means. The gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the means D13, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, it becomes a configuration that is likely to be determined to a predetermined type of special game state among a plurality of types of special game states. It is possible to perform a game effect that heightens the player's sense of anticipation for the provision of a special game state of a type with a high game value.

As a result, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the inner area of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

The "game value" includes, for example, the number of balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) performed during the special game state, and the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) provided after the special game state. is included.

Means D14. a starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
opening/closing control means capable of executing the opening/closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition (opening opportunity) is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means; The gaming machine according to any one of means D1 to D13, characterized by comprising:

It should be noted that when ``a predetermined starting condition (opening opportunity) is established based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means,'' for example, ``a game ball that has entered the starting ball entry means can be detected. Under the configuration provided with a "starting ball detection means", "when a game ball is detected by the starting ball detection means" or "a predetermined start lottery based on the ball detection by the start ball detection means" and a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the starting lottery."

Means D15. a starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
Opening/closing control capable of executing an open game state in which the variable ball entering means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening opportunity is established based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. means and
The movable body control means is
A game ball enters the starting ball entering means during the predetermined open game state in which the variable ball entering means is caused to execute a predetermined release at least based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. Any one of the means D1 to D14, characterized by being capable of executing control to put the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform the predetermined operation as a benefit that can be imparted when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above means D15, even during the open game state (during the opening period of the variable ball entry means) in which the opening opportunity etc. cannot be obtained in the conventional art, the movable body is generated based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. A situation can occur that is advantageous to a player who performs a predetermined action.

Conventionally, some players believe that when a game ball enters the start ball entry means, the game ball cannot enter the special ball entry means at the timing of opening the variable ball entry means related to the start ball entry. When it is known, the shooting of the game ball is temporarily stopped at that time so that the game ball does not wastefully enter the starting ball entering means during the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entering means). There are also players.

On the other hand, according to this means, after the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, even in such a situation, the player can renew the starting ball entering means in order to be assisted by the movable body. Since the game ball is required to enter the game ball and continuously shoots the game ball, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the operating rate of the game machine.

Furthermore, since the profit given to the player differs depending on whether or not the timing at which the game ball enters the starting ball entry means is in the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means), diversification of games is desired. can be planned.

As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Conventional problem E. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a game area. For example, a variable ball entry means that opens when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means is provided, and a game ball entering an internal area of the variable ball entry means is provided in the internal area. A pachinko machine is known in which a special game state advantageous to the player is generated when a ball enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

In such a pachinko machine, for example, a guide route is provided for directing a game ball that has entered the internal area of the variable ball entry means toward the special ball entry means, and a game ball that has deviated from the guide route is guided to the internal area. Some are equipped with a deviating route (ejection route) for discharging to the outside.

However, in the conventional art, even though the game ball entered the internal area of the variable ball entry means, the game ball was once deviated from the guidance route and guided to the deviation route, and then entered the variable ball entry means. It did not contribute to the game of the game, and was just discharged. In this regard, further enhancement of interest has been desired.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a game machine capable of dramatically improving amusement.

Means E1. a launching means for launching a game ball;
a game area in which the launched game ball is guided;
An opening/closing member capable of changing its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter the internal area and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area, variable ball entry means that allows only game balls that have passed through the specific area to enter the internal area;
a special ball entry means that allows a game ball that has entered the internal area to enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine comprising special game state imparting means capable of imparting a special game state advantageous to a player when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
a first route (guidance route) that allows the game ball that has passed through the specific area to flow down to the special ball entry means;
a second route (discharge route) capable of discharging game balls that do not flow down to the first route outside the internal region;
ball detection means (ejection ball detection means) capable of detecting game balls that have passed through the second route;
a specific processing execution means capable of executing specific processing advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the detection of the game ball by the ball detection means.

According to the above means E1, based on the detection of the game ball ejected through the second route (ejection route), specific processing advantageous to the player is executed, such as facilitating the occurrence of a special game state. be done.

As a result, not only the behavior of the game balls flowing down toward the special ball entry means via the first route (guide route), but also the game balls discharged via the second route can be used to create new gameplay. can be given, and it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Means E2. The gaming machine according to means E1, wherein the predetermined condition is established when the game ball is detected by the ball detecting means.

According to the above means E2, every time the game ball is detected by the ball detection means, the specific processing advantageous to the player can be executed, so that the interest of the player can be dramatically improved. .

Means E3. a lottery process execution means capable of executing a predetermined lottery process based on the detection by the ball detection means;
The gaming machine according to means E1, characterized in that the predetermined condition is satisfied at least when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the lottery process.

According to the above means E3, the specific processing advantageous to the player is not executed each time the game ball is detected by the ball detecting means, so that the specific processing is suppressed from becoming monotonous and the specific processing is executed. It is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for that. As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Means E4. counting means for counting the number of game balls detected by the ball detecting means;
The gaming machine according to means E1, wherein the predetermined condition is established when the number of game balls counted by the counting means reaches a predetermined number or more.

According to the means E4, even when the number of game balls flowing out of the first route (guidance route) and flowing into the second route (discharge route) is relatively large, the decrease in interest of the player is suppressed. be able to.

Means E5. a counting means for counting the number of game balls detected by the ball detecting means;
a lottery process executing means capable of executing a predetermined lottery process when the number of game balls counted by the counting means reaches a predetermined number or more;
The gaming machine according to means E1, characterized in that the predetermined condition is satisfied at least when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the lottery process.

According to the above means E5, every time the number of game balls detected by the ball detection means exceeds the predetermined number, the specific processing advantageous to the player is not executed, so the same operation as the above means E3 is performed. effect is played.

Means E6. In the internal region of the variable ball entry means, the state can be changed between at least an advantageous state (special state) that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, Equipped with a movable body that can change the behavior of the game ball (can act on the game ball),
The specific process executing means is
The means according to any one of means E1 to E5, characterized by comprising movable body control means capable of executing control to bring the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform a predetermined action when the predetermined condition is established. game machine.

According to the means E6, by providing the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to change the behavior of the game ball entering the internal area. For example, by putting the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game effect that heightens the player's expectation for the provision of the special game state, such as increasing the degree of expectation of the ball entering the special ball-entering means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Means E7. A route sorting means capable of sorting the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route in a specific state,
The game machine according to means E6, wherein the movable body can change the behavior of the game ball flowing down the first route.

Under the configuration related to the means E6, for example, when the predetermined condition is about to be established, if a plurality of (for example, two) game balls enter the variable ball entering means at the same time (two game balls are almost spaced apart) The same applies hereinafter.), etc.), even if a situation occurs that is advantageous to the player, all of these game balls are the second route (discharge route), even if the movable body is in an advantageous state, there is a risk that a single game ball will not enter the special ball entry means.

On the other hand, according to the above means E7, for example, when two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means continuously at the same time, the preceding first game ball is the first route or Since it is possible to make one game ball go to the first route such that one game ball flows down one of the second routes and the second game ball that follows flows down to the other route, the movable body The action and effect provided will be more effective.

As a result, the player comes to pay attention to the behavior of the game balls distributed by the route distribution means with a sense of anticipation, thereby further improving interest.

Means E8. When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the game ball enters the special ball entry means more than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. A gaming machine according to means E6 or E7, characterized in that it is configured to facilitate.

According to the above means E8, if the movable body becomes in a predetermined advantageous state, the degree of expectation of the ball entering the special ball-entering means increases, so a game effect is performed to increase the player's expectation for the provision of the special game state or the like. be able to.

As a result, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the inner area of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

Means E9. The special game state imparting means is configured to be capable of imparting a plurality of types of special game states having different game values to be imparted to the player,
A type determining means for determining one game value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the predetermined state among the plurality of types of special game states is higher than when the movable body is controlled so as not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among a plurality of types of special game states) is easily determined by the type determining means. game machine.

According to the means E9, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, it becomes a configuration that is likely to be determined to a predetermined type of special game state among a plurality of types of special game states. It is possible to perform a game effect that heightens the player's sense of anticipation for the provision of a special game state of a type with a high game value.

As a result, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the inner area of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

The "game value" includes, for example, the number of balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) performed during the special game state, and the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) provided after the special game state. is included.

Means E10. When the game ball that has passed through the specific area is detected by the ball detection means and the predetermined condition is satisfied, the game ball that has passed through the specific area is detected by the movable body after the game ball. A game machine according to any one of means E6 to E9, characterized in that it is configured to be operable.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which game balls are intermittently shot at predetermined intervals, during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in an open state, a plurality of A situation that is advantageous to the player, such as game balls entering the game continuously, is unlikely to occur frequently. In particular, in a situation where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the variable ball entry means due to the nail adjustment of the game board in the game hall, such a situation that is advantageous to the player may not occur at all. could be.

In other words, if a plurality of game balls do not continuously enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the variable ball entry means), they will receive the action (assist) of the movable body. Therefore, in a gaming machine configured so that a game ball does not enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability, at the stage where a plurality of game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means continuously at the same time, There is a risk that the player's sense of anticipation will fade and interest will decline.

On the other hand, according to the above means E10, the game balls other than the game balls entered (in a continuous ball state) at the same time as the game balls involved (last) in the establishment of the predetermined condition are also more expensive. A chance to enter the special ball entry means will be given with a probability.

In other words, even if the game ball that was (last) involved in the establishment of the predetermined condition did not enter the variable ball entry means, or the game ball that was (finally) involved in the establishment of the prescribed condition did not enter the variable entry means. Even if the other game ball that entered the ball means did not enter the special ball entry means, the game ball that entered the variable ball entry means after that entered the special ball entry means with a higher probability. You will be given a chance to hit the ball.

As a result, even after confirming that the predetermined condition has been established, the player can actively play the game to enter the game ball into the variable ball entering means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Therefore, the means E10 is defined as "when the game ball that has passed through the specific area is detected by the ball detection means and the predetermined condition is satisfied, the opening state period of the opening and closing member through which the game ball has passed has been opened. The game machine according to any one of the means E6 to E9, characterized in that the movable body can act on a game ball that has passed through the opening/closing member during the open state period." .

In addition, in the configuration related to the above means E10, under the configuration related to each of the above means, the time from the time when the predetermined condition is satisfied until the movable body starts to operate, the operation period of the movable body after the operation starts, etc. are adjusted. By doing so, it is possible to easily achieve this without having to enter a plurality of game balls into the variable ball entering means at the same time.

Means E11. a starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
Opening/closing control capable of executing an open game state in which the variable ball entering means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening opportunity is established based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. means and
The movable body control means is
A game ball enters the starting ball entering means during the predetermined open game state in which the variable ball entering means is caused to execute a predetermined release at least based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. Any one of the means E6 to E10, characterized in that it is configured to be capable of executing control to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform the predetermined operation as a benefit that can be imparted when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above-described means E11, even during an open game state (during an open period of the variable ball entry means) in which an opening opportunity or the like cannot be obtained conventionally, based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means, the movable body A situation can occur that is advantageous to a player who performs a predetermined action.

Conventionally, some players believe that when a game ball enters the start ball entry means, the game ball cannot enter the special ball entry means at the timing of opening the variable ball entry means related to the start ball entry. When it is known, the shooting of the game ball is temporarily stopped at that time so that the game ball does not wastefully enter the starting ball entering means during the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entering means). There are also players.

On the other hand, according to this means, after the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, even in such a situation, the player can renew the starting ball entering means in order to be assisted by the movable body. Since the game ball is required to enter the game ball and continuously shoots the game ball, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the operating rate of the game machine.

Furthermore, since the profit given to the player differs depending on whether or not the timing at which the game ball enters the starting ball entry means is in the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means), diversification of games is desired. can be planned.

As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Means E12. a starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
opening/closing control means capable of executing the opening/closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition (opening opportunity) is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means; The gaming machine according to any one of means E1 to E10, characterized by comprising:

It should be noted that when ``a predetermined starting condition (opening opportunity) is established based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means,'' for example, ``a game ball that has entered the starting ball entry means can be detected. Under the configuration provided with a "starting ball detection means", "when a game ball is detected by the starting ball detection means" or "a predetermined start lottery based on the ball detection by the start ball detection means" and a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the starting lottery."

Conventional problem F. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a game area. For example, a variable ball entry means that opens when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means is provided, and a game ball entering an internal area of the variable ball entry means is provided in the internal area. A pachinko machine is known in which a special game state advantageous to the player is generated when a ball enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

Among such pachinko machines, some have a movable body that changes the behavior of a game ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

However, since the conventional variable ball entry means has a plurality of winning openings (specific areas) such as left and right sides, game balls may enter the variable ball entry means from multiple directions at the same time. there were.

Therefore, even if a plurality of game balls enter the variable ball entry means at a timing advantageous to the player, depending on the ball entry timing of the game balls, they interfere with each other, and even one ball enters the game as a special entry. If the game ball does not go to the ball means, the game ball does not flow down to the route desired by the player, and the interest of the player may decrease.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a game machine capable of dramatically improving amusement.

Means F1. a launching means for launching a game ball;
a game area in which the launched game ball is guided;
An opening/closing member capable of changing its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter the internal area and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area, variable ball entry means that allows only game balls that have passed through the specific area to enter the internal area;
a special ball entry means that allows a game ball that has entered the internal area to enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine comprising special game state imparting means capable of imparting a special game state advantageous to a player when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
a trigger ball entry means that allows a game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter (or pass through);
a first route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the special ball entry means;
a second route that allows game balls that do not flow down to the first route to flow to the trigger ball entry means;
route sorting means capable of sorting the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route;
A state changeable between an advantageous state (special state) that is at least advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is not more advantageous to the player than the advantageous state is provided, and the game ball that has flowed down to the first route is provided. a movable body that can cause a change in behavior (that can act on a game ball);
a movable body control means capable of executing control to bring the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform a predetermined action when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the trigger ball entry means; with
The specific area is provided only at one location through which game balls can pass one by one,
The gaming machine is characterized in that a ball passage capable of guiding game balls one by one to the specific area is provided only at one location.

In addition, when ``when a predetermined operating condition is established based on the entry of a game ball into the trigger ball entry means'', for example, ``a trigger ball entry capable of detecting the game ball that has entered the trigger ball entry means. detection means", "when a game ball is detected by said opportunity ball detection means" or "a predetermined operation lottery is performed based on the ball detection by said opportunity ball entry detection means, When a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operation lottery”.

According to the means F1, by providing the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to change the behavior of the game ball entering the internal area. For example, by putting the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game effect that heightens the player's expectation for the provision of the special game state, such as increasing the degree of expectation of the ball entering the special ball-entering means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In addition, in this means, by providing the trigger ball entry means for detecting the movement trigger of the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, the movable body is moved to the predetermined position based on the behavior of the game ball entering the internal area. Since it is determined whether or not it will be in an advantageous state, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

In particular, this means is provided with a route sorting means capable of sorting the destination of a game ball entering the internal area of the variable ball entering means to the first route or the second route.

As a result, for example, when two game balls continuously enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means at the same time, the preceding first game ball flows down either the first route or the second route. The movable body is provided because it is possible to direct the game ball to both the special ball entry means and the opportunity ball entry means, such as the following second game ball flowing down the other route. The action effect will be more effective.

As a result, it is possible to heighten the player's expectation that a plurality of game balls may be entered into the internal area of the variable ball entry means at the same time, thereby increasing the expectation of occurrence of the special game state.

In addition, in this means, the specific area is provided in only one place through which the game balls can pass one by one, and the ball passage through which the game balls can be guided one by one to the specific area is provided in only one place. Therefore, game balls can be properly guided to the route sorting means one by one. As a result, the above effects can be achieved more reliably.

Furthermore, when two game balls continuously enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means, which route the preceding first game ball and the second subsequent game ball flow respectively? Since the results will differ depending on the route, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game balls distributed by the route distribution means with a sense of anticipation. As a result, it is possible to further improve interest.

Means F2. A game machine according to means F1, wherein a game ball that does not pass through the ball passage cannot pass through the specific area.

If a game ball that does not pass through the ball passage is configured to be able to pass through the specific area, the game ball that does not pass through the ball passage passes through the ball passage and flows down toward the specific area. may interfere with On the other hand, according to the means F2, the game ball cannot pass through the specific area unless it passes through the ball passage. can.

Means F3. The game machine according to means F1 or F2, wherein the ball passage is provided on either the left side or the right side of the opening/closing member outside the variable ball entry means.

According to the means F3, the game balls can be guided to the opening/closing member one by one. As a result, it is possible to prevent a problem such as a plurality of game balls entering the opening/closing member at the same time and being bitten.

Means F4. The game machine according to any one of means F1 to F3, wherein the ball passage is provided so that only game balls fired with a predetermined intensity by the shooting means can pass through.

According to the means F4, the ball passage is provided only at a position (for example, the right side of the variable ball entry means) through which only the game ball fired with a predetermined strength (for example, right-handed) by the shooting means can pass. It is possible to further enhance the effects of the means F1 and the like.

Means F5. Means F1 to F4, characterized in that, in the specific area, while allowing the game ball to pass in a predetermined direction, it is provided with a restricting means for restricting the passage of the game ball in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the above means F5, for example, when two game balls pass through the ball passage continuously, due to the behavior of the preceding first game ball, the preceding first game ball and the following game ball It is possible to suppress the occurrence of troubles such as the collision of the second game ball and the like, which hinder each other. As a result, the operational effects of the means F1 and the like can be further enhanced. Here, the regulating means includes those that change the state from the first state to the second state by the force received from the game ball.

Means F6. A game according to any one of the means F1 to F5, characterized in that a game ball entering (or passing through) the trigger ball entering means cannot flow down to the special ball entering means (cannot be entered). machine.

If a game ball that has passed through the opportunity ball entry means flows down toward the special ball entry means, there is a risk that the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball will always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body is always the same, which may reduce the interest of the player. Furthermore, there is a risk that cheating, such as vibrating the gaming machine, is likely to occur in accordance with the movement timing of the movable body. In addition, there is a possibility that other game balls flowing down toward the special ball entering means may be disturbed without going through the opportunity ball entering means.

On the other hand, according to the means F6, the game ball that enters the opportunity ball entry means and the game ball that the movable body acts on are always different, so that the occurrence of the above various problems can be suppressed. can be done.

Means F7. When a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entering means, the movable body can act on the game ball that has passed through the specific area after the game ball enters the game ball. The game machine according to any one of means F1 to F6, characterized in that:

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which game balls are intermittently shot at predetermined intervals, during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in an open state, a plurality of A situation that is advantageous to the player, such as game balls entering the game continuously, is unlikely to occur frequently. In particular, in a situation where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the variable ball entry means due to the nail adjustment of the game board in the game hall, such a situation that is advantageous to the player may not occur at all. could be.

In other words, if a plurality of game balls do not continuously enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the variable ball entry means), they will receive the action (assist) of the movable body. Therefore, in a gaming machine configured so that a game ball does not enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability, at the stage where a plurality of game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means continuously at the same time, There is a risk that the player's sense of anticipation will fade and interest will decline.

On the other hand, according to the above means F7, a game ball other than a game ball entered (in a continuous ball state) at the same time as the game ball entered by the triggering ball entry means is special with a higher probability. A chance to enter the ball into the ball entry means is given.

In other words, even if a game ball entered the triggering ball-entering means does not enter the variable ball-entering means, or enters the variable ball-entering means together with the game ball entered the triggering ball-entering means. Even when other game balls do not enter the special ball entry means, the game balls that enter the variable ball entry means after that are given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability. It will happen.

As a result, even after confirming that the game ball has entered the triggering ball entering means, the player can actively play the game to enter the game ball into the variable ball entering means. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

For example, according to the means F7, two game balls enter the internal area during the predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, and the preceding first game ball (the game ball that first passed through the specific area ball) flows down either the first route or the second route, and the subsequent second game ball (the game ball that has passed through the specific area next) flows down the other route, and then to the second route. When the game ball that has flowed down enters the trigger ball entry means and the movable body is activated, when the game ball that has flowed down to the first route passes through the movable body, the movable body is not yet activated and the first route is activated. Even if the game ball that has flowed down to does not enter the special ball entry means, after that, the game ball that entered the internal area during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means It is also possible to construct a configuration in which the game ball that has been played flows down the first route and is given a chance to enter the special ball entry means by the action of the movable body.

Therefore, the means F7 is set to "open and close during the open state period following the open state period of the opening and closing member through which the game ball passes when the game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entering means." The game machine according to any one of means F1 to F6, characterized in that the movable body can act on a game ball that has passed through the member."

It should be noted that, under the configuration of each of the above means, the configuration related to the means F7 is the time from when the game ball enters the trigger ball entry means to the start of operation of the movable body, and By adjusting the operating period, etc., this can be easily achieved without having to enter a plurality of game balls into the variable ball entering means at the same time.

Means F8. When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the game ball enters the special ball entry means more than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. A game machine according to any one of means F1 to F7, characterized in that it is configured to facilitate.

According to the above means F8, if the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the degree of expectation of the ball entering the special ball-entering means is increased, so a game effect is performed to increase the player's expectation for the provision of the special game state. be able to.

As a result, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the inner area of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

Means F9. The special game state imparting means is configured to be capable of imparting a plurality of types of special game states having different game values to be imparted to the player,
A type determining means for determining one game value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the predetermined state among the plurality of types of special game states is higher than when the movable body is controlled so as not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among a plurality of types of special game states) is configured to be easily determined by the type determination means. The gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the means F9, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, it becomes a configuration that is likely to be determined to a predetermined type of special game state among a plurality of types of special game states. It is possible to perform a game effect that heightens the player's sense of anticipation for the provision of a special game state of a type with a high game value.

As a result, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the inner area of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

The "game value" includes, for example, the number of balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) performed during the special game state, and the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) provided after the special game state. is included.

Means F10. a starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
opening/closing control means capable of executing the opening/closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition (opening opportunity) is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means; The gaming machine according to any one of means F1 to F9, characterized by comprising:

It should be noted that when ``a predetermined starting condition (opening opportunity) is established based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means,'' for example, ``a game ball that has entered the starting ball entry means can be detected. Under the configuration provided with a "starting ball detection means", "when a game ball is detected by the starting ball detection means" or "a predetermined start lottery based on the ball detection by the start ball detection means" and a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the starting lottery."

Means F11. a starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
Opening/closing control capable of executing an open game state in which the variable ball entering means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening opportunity is established based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. means and
The movable body control means is
A game ball enters the starting ball entering means during the predetermined open game state in which the variable ball entering means is caused to execute a predetermined release at least based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. Any one of the means F1 to F10, characterized by being capable of executing control to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform the predetermined operation as a benefit that can be imparted when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above means F11, even during an open game state (during an open period of the variable ball entry means) in which an opening opportunity or the like cannot be obtained conventionally, the movable body can be generated based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. A situation can occur that is advantageous to a player who performs a predetermined action.

Conventionally, some players believe that when a game ball enters the start ball entry means, the game ball cannot enter the special ball entry means at the timing of opening the variable ball entry means related to the start ball entry. When it is known, the shooting of the game ball is temporarily stopped at that time so that the game ball does not wastefully enter the starting ball entering means during the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entering means). There are also players.

On the other hand, according to this means, after the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, even in such a situation, the player can renew the starting ball entering means in order to be assisted by the movable body. Since the game ball is required to enter the game ball and continuously shoots the game ball, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the operating rate of the game machine.

Furthermore, since the profit given to the player differs depending on whether or not the timing at which the game ball enters the starting ball entry means is in the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means), diversification of games is desired. can be planned.

As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Conventional problem G. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a game area. For example, a variable ball entry means that opens when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means is provided, and a game ball entering an internal area of the variable ball entry means is provided in the internal area. A pachinko machine is known in which a special game state advantageous to the player is generated when a ball enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

Among such pachinko machines, some have a movable body that changes the behavior of a game ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

However, in the conventional game machine, the performance related to the movable body is monotonous, such as the movable body performing a predetermined action every time the game ball enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means. As a result, the player's interest (excitement) in the movement of the movable body tends to fade. In this respect, further enhancement of interest has been desired.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest.

Means G1. a launching means for launching a game ball;
a game area in which the launched game ball is guided;
An opening/closing member capable of changing its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter the internal area and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area, variable ball entry means that allows only game balls that have passed through the specific area to enter the internal area;
a special ball entry means that allows a game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine comprising special game state imparting means capable of imparting a special game state advantageous to a player when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
a first trigger ball entry means that allows a game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter (or pass through);
a first opportunity ball-entering detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the first opportunity ball-entering means;
a second trigger ball entry means that allows a game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter (or pass through);
a second opportunity ball-entering detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the second opportunity ball-entering means;
a first flow-down route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the first trigger ball-entering means;
a second flow-down route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the second trigger ball-entering means;
Route distribution means (downstream route distribution means) capable of distributing the destination of the game ball that has passed through the specific area to at least the first flow route or the second flow route;
A movable body provided to be capable of changing between at least an advantageous state advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, and capable of causing a change in the behavior of the game ball passing through the specific area. When,
Predetermined advantageous state for causing the movable body to perform a predetermined operation when a predetermined operating condition is established based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball-entering means or the second ball-entering means. and a movable body control means capable of executing control to
In a specific state, the rate at which the predetermined advantageous state can occur is different between when the game ball flows down the first flow-down route and when the game ball flows down the second flow-down route. Characteristic game machine.

It should be noted that when ``when a predetermined operating condition is established based on the entry of a game ball into the first trigger ball-entering means or the second trigger ball-entering means'', for example, ``the first trigger ball-entering When a game ball is detected by the ball detection means or the second opportunity ball entry detection means" or "based on ball entry detection by the first opportunity ball entry detection means or the second opportunity ball entry detection means a predetermined operation lottery is performed, and a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operation lottery.

According to the means G1, by providing the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to change the behavior of the game ball entering the internal area. For example, by putting the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game effect that heightens the player's expectation for the provision of the special game state, such as increasing the degree of expectation of the ball entering the special ball-entering means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Further, in this means, by providing various trigger ball entry means (various trigger ball entry detection means) for detecting the movement trigger of the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, the game ball entering the internal area is detected. Since it is determined whether or not the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state based on the behavior, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Further, in this means, the rate at which a predetermined advantageous state can occur differs between when the game ball flows down the first flow-down route and when the game ball flows down the second flow-down route. there is As a result, the player can pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further improving the interest.

Means G2. The time or distance required for the game ball that has passed through the specific region to flow down the first flow route and reach the first trigger ball entry means, and the game ball that has passed through the specific region is the second The gaming machine according to means G1, characterized in that the time or distance required for flowing down the flow-down route to reach the second opportunity ball-entering means is different.

According to the means G2, the period until the movable body can be in a predetermined advantageous state is variable depending on whether the game ball flows down the first flow-down route or the game ball flows down the second flow-down route. can be

As a result, since the movable body does not always operate at a constant timing, it is possible to suppress the monotony of the game performance using the movable body. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player.

Means G3. The gaming machine according to means G1 or G2, further comprising delay means for delaying the flow of the game ball in the first flow route or the second flow route.

According to the means G3, even if the length of the first flow-down route or the length of the second flow-down route is relatively short, by providing the above-mentioned delay means, the time until the game ball reaches the predetermined position can be reduced. can be relatively long. As a result, the game space can be used effectively. Here, as the delay means, for example, a structure such as a stage or a rune, in which the game ball goes back and forth in the same place several times, or advances after going around, or a structure such as a rib that stops the momentum of the game ball and delays the time. One example is a configuration in which the game ball advances over the ball.

Means G4. a lottery process execution means capable of executing a predetermined operation lottery process based on ball entry detection by the first ball-entrance detection means or the second ball-entrance detection means;
At least when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operation lottery process, the predetermined operation condition is established,
In the specific state, the rate at which the predetermined lottery result is obtained in the case where the game ball is detected by the first triggered ball entry detection means and the case where the game ball is detected by the second triggered ball entry detection means. , are configured differently.

According to the above means G4, determination as to whether or not the movable body should be placed in a predetermined advantageous state is performed by means of software by the lottery process execution means (actuation lottery process).

As a result, since the action is not performed every time in accordance with a predetermined opportunity, monotony of presentation related to the movable body can be suppressed, and the player's expectation for the action of the movable body can be increased. As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Further, in this means, the ratio of obtaining a predetermined lottery result between the case where the game ball is detected by the first opportunity ball-entering detection means and the case where the game ball is detected by the second opportunity-entering ball detection means is Because of the different configuration, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, which can further improve interest.

Means G5. The route sorting means is
The state can be changed between a first state in which the game ball can flow down the first flow route and a second state in which the game ball can flow down the second flow route,
The gaming machine according to any one of means G1 to G4, wherein in the specific state, the ratio of the route sorting means to be in the first state and the ratio to be in the second state are different.

According to the above means G5, the behavior of the game ball can be diversified, and the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, so that the interest can be further improved. can. In addition, the ratio of the route sorting means to be in the first state and the ratio of the route to be in the second state may be changed periodically or randomly.

Means G6. a predetermined route that allows the game ball that has passed through the specific area to flow down to the special ball entry means;
route distribution means (upstream side route distribution means) capable of distributing the destination of the game ball to at least the predetermined route in the specific state;
The game machine according to any one of means G1 to G5, wherein the movable body can change the behavior of the game ball flowing down the predetermined route.

Under the configuration of each of the above means, if a plurality of (for example, two) game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (two game balls flow down continuously with almost no interval) The same applies hereinafter), etc.), even if a situation that is advantageous to the player occurs, if all of these game balls go toward the opportunity ball entry means, no matter how much the movable body Even if is in an advantageous state, there is a possibility that a problem such as not even one game ball entering the special ball entering means may occur.

On the other hand, according to the above means G6, for example, when two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means continuously at the same time, the preceding first game ball enters the predetermined route, or , the game ball flows down one of the first flow route or the second flow route, and the following second game ball flows down the other route. Since it is possible to direct both of them, the function and effect of providing the movable body are more effective.

Means G7. A game ball that has entered (or passed through) the trigger ball entry means (the first trigger ball entry means and/or the second trigger ball entry means) cannot flow down to the special ball entry means (ball cannot be entered) The game machine according to any one of means G1 to G6, characterized in that it is configured as follows.

If a game ball that has passed through the opportunity ball entry means flows down toward the special ball entry means, there is a risk that the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball will always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body is always the same, which may reduce the interest of the player. Furthermore, there is a risk that cheating, such as vibrating the gaming machine, is likely to occur in accordance with the movement timing of the movable body. In addition, there is a possibility that other game balls flowing down toward the special ball entering means may be disturbed without going through the opportunity ball entering means.

On the other hand, according to the above means G7, the game ball that enters the trigger ball entering means and the game ball that the movable body acts on are always different, so that the occurrence of the above various problems can be suppressed. can be done.

Means G8. When the game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means (the first trigger ball entry means or the second trigger ball entry means), after the game ball, The game machine according to any one of means G1 to G7, wherein the movable body can act on a game ball that has passed through the specific area.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which game balls are intermittently shot at predetermined intervals, during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in an open state, a plurality of A situation that is advantageous to the player, such as game balls entering the game continuously, is unlikely to occur frequently. In particular, in a situation where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the variable ball entry means due to the nail adjustment of the game board in the game hall, such a situation that is advantageous to the player may not occur at all. could be.

In other words, if a plurality of game balls do not continuously enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the variable ball entry means), they will receive the action (assist) of the movable body. Therefore, in a gaming machine configured so that a game ball does not enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability, at the stage where a plurality of game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means continuously at the same time, There is a risk that the player's sense of anticipation will fade and interest will decline.

On the other hand, according to the above means G8, a game ball other than a game ball entered (in a continuous ball state) at the same time as the game ball entered by the triggering ball entry means has a higher probability of being special. A chance to enter the ball into the ball entry means is given.

In other words, even if a game ball entered the triggering ball-entering means does not enter the variable ball-entering means, or enters the variable ball-entering means together with the game ball entered the triggering ball-entering means. Even when other game balls do not enter the special ball entry means, the game balls that enter the variable ball entry means after that are given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability. It will happen.

As a result, even after confirming that the game ball has entered the triggering ball entering means, the player can actively play the game to enter the game ball into the variable ball entering means. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

For example, according to the means G8, two game balls enter the internal area during the predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, and the preceding first game ball (the game ball that first passed through the specific area A ball) flows down a predetermined route, or either the first flow route or the second flow route, and the subsequent second game ball (the game ball that has passed through the specific area next) flows down the other route. Then, after that, the game ball that has flowed down to the first flow route or the second flow route enters the opportunity ball entry means (first opportunity ball entry means or second opportunity ball entry means) to form a movable body. is activated, at the time the game ball that has flowed down the predetermined route passes through the movable body, even if the movable body has not yet activated and the game ball that has flowed down the predetermined route has not entered the special ball entry means. After that, the game ball that entered the internal area during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means (the game ball that passed through the specific area after that) flows down to a predetermined route, and by the action of the movable body, a special It is also possible to provide a configuration in which a chance to enter the ball into the ball entering means is given.

Therefore, the means G8 is defined as "when the game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the opportunity ball entry means (the first opportunity ball entry means or the second opportunity ball entry means), the game Any one of the means G1 to G7 characterized in that the movable body can act on the game ball that has passed through the opening/closing member in the open state period subsequent to the open state period of the opening/closing member through which the ball has passed. The gaming machine described in 1." may be paraphrased.

In addition, under the configuration related to each of the above means, the configuration related to the means G8 is the time from when the game ball enters the trigger ball entry means to the start of operation of the movable body, and By adjusting the operating period, etc., this can be easily achieved without having to enter a plurality of game balls into the variable ball entering means at the same time.

Means G9. When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the game ball enters the special ball entry means more than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. The gaming machine according to any one of means G1 to G8, characterized in that it is configured to facilitate.

According to the above means G9, if the movable body becomes in a predetermined advantageous state, the degree of expectation of the ball entering the special ball-entering means increases, so a game effect is performed to increase the player's expectation for the provision of the special game state. be able to.

As a result, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the inner area of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

Means G10. The special game state imparting means is configured to be capable of imparting a plurality of types of special game states having different game values to be imparted to the player,
A type determining means for determining one game value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the predetermined state among the plurality of types of special game states is higher than when the movable body is controlled so as not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among a plurality of types of special game states) is configured to be easily determined by the type determination means. The gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the means G10, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, it becomes a configuration that is likely to be determined to a predetermined type of special game state among a plurality of types of special game states. It is possible to perform a game effect that heightens the player's sense of anticipation for the provision of a special game state of a type with a high game value.

As a result, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the inner area of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

The "game value" includes, for example, the number of balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) performed during the special game state, and the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) provided after the special game state. is included.

Means G11. a starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
opening/closing control means capable of executing the opening/closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition (opening opportunity) is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means; The gaming machine according to any one of means G1 to G10, characterized by comprising:

It should be noted that when ``a predetermined starting condition (opening opportunity) is established based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means,'' for example, ``a game ball that has entered the starting ball entry means can be detected. Under the configuration provided with a "starting ball detection means", "when a game ball is detected by the starting ball detection means" or "a predetermined start lottery based on the ball detection by the start ball detection means" and a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the starting lottery."

Means G12. a starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
Opening/closing control capable of executing an open game state in which the variable ball entering means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening opportunity is established based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. means and
The movable body control means is
A game ball enters the starting ball entering means during the predetermined open game state in which the variable ball entering means is caused to execute a predetermined release at least based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. Any one of the means G1 to G11, characterized by being capable of executing control to make the movable body perform the predetermined action as the benefit that can be imparted when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above means G12, even during the open game state (during the opening period of the variable ball entry means) in which the opening opportunity etc. cannot be obtained in the past, based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means, the movable body A situation can occur that is advantageous to a player who performs a predetermined action.

Conventionally, some players believe that when a game ball enters the start ball entry means, the game ball cannot enter the special ball entry means at the timing of opening the variable ball entry means related to the start ball entry. When it is known, the shooting of the game ball is temporarily stopped at that time so that the game ball does not wastefully enter the starting ball entering means during the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entering means). There are also players.

On the other hand, according to this means, after the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, even in such a situation, the player can renew the starting ball entering means in order to be assisted by the movable body. Since the game ball is required to enter the game ball and continuously shoots the game ball, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the operating rate of the game machine.

Furthermore, since the profit given to the player differs depending on whether or not the timing at which the game ball enters the starting ball entry means is in the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means), diversification of games is desired. can be planned.

As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Conventional problem H. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a game area. For example, a variable ball entry means that opens when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means is provided, and a game ball entering an internal area of the variable ball entry means is provided in the internal area. A pachinko machine is known in which a special game state advantageous to the player is generated when a ball enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

Among such pachinko machines, some have a movable body that changes the behavior of a game ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, the movable body is configured to operate at a constant timing every time when a game ball enters the internal area of the variable ball entering means.

For this reason, conventionally, there is a possibility that the player will grasp the timing of the movement of the movable body, and commit fraud such as vibrating the gaming machine in accordance with the timing.

In addition, the presentation related to the movable body tends to be monotonous, and in this respect, further enhancement of interest has been desired.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its object is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing cheating and improving interest.

Means H1. a launching means for launching a game ball;
a game area in which the launched game ball is guided;
An opening/closing member capable of changing its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter the internal area and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area, variable ball entry means that allows only game balls that have passed through the specific area to enter the internal area;
a special ball entry means that allows a game ball that has entered the internal area to enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine comprising special game state imparting means capable of imparting a special game state advantageous to a player when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
a trigger ball entry means that allows a game ball that has passed through the specific area to enter (or pass through);
Behavior of a game ball that has passed through the specific area is provided so as to be changeable between an advantageous state (special state) that is at least advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state. A movable body that can cause a change in (can act on the game ball),
a movable body control means capable of executing control to bring the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform a predetermined action when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the trigger ball entry means; ,
and opening/closing pattern determination means for determining which of a plurality of opening/closing patterns is to be executed when performing opening/closing control of the opening/closing member.

In addition, when ``when a predetermined operating condition is established based on the entry of a game ball into the trigger ball entry means'', for example, ``a trigger ball entry capable of detecting the game ball that has entered the trigger ball entry means. detection means", "when a game ball is detected by said opportunity ball detection means" or "a predetermined operation lottery is performed based on the ball detection by said opportunity ball entry detection means, When a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operation lottery”.

According to the means H1, by providing the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to change the behavior of the game ball entering the internal area. For example, by putting the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game effect that heightens the player's expectation for the provision of the special game state, such as increasing the degree of expectation of the ball entering the special ball-entering means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In addition, in this means, by providing the trigger ball entry means for detecting the movement trigger of the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, the movable body is moved to the predetermined position based on the behavior of the game ball entering the internal area. Since it is determined whether or not it will be in an advantageous state, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

In particular, in this means, by providing a plurality of opening and closing patterns of the variable ball entry means (opening and closing member), the timing at which the game ball enters the variable ball entry means changes. Even if it is configured to operate at a fixed timing, the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball that has entered the internal area of the variable ball entry means will differ. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk of cheating such as vibrating the game machine in accordance with the movement timing of the movable body.

When changing the rate of ball entry into the special means, for example, a method of providing a plurality of operation patterns of the movable body and changing the selection probability of the patterns to change the rate of ball entry into the special means. However, it is also possible to change the action mode of the movable body that changes the behavior of the game ball by performing a predetermined action, and adjust the ball entry rate to the special ball entry means to the desired ball entry rate. The work is very difficult and requires repeated trial and error. In this regard, according to this means, it is possible to more easily change the ball entry rate to the special ball entry means.

Means H2. When a predetermined opening/closing pattern among the plurality of opening/closing patterns is performed, the movable body is more likely to be in the predetermined advantageous state than when the predetermined opening/closing pattern is not performed. The game machine according to the means H1 characterized by the above.

According to the above means H2, for example, when a predetermined opening/closing pattern in which the opening/closing member is opened at a relatively high rate is performed, it is possible to enter more game balls into the variable ball entry means at the same time. Therefore, due to the synergistic effect with the structure in which the movable body is likely to be in a predetermined advantageous state, the degree of expectation for entering the ball into the special ball entering means is increased, and the player's expectation for the special game state etc. is increased. can perform. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Means H3. lottery process execution means capable of executing a predetermined operation lottery process based on the ball entering the opportunity ball entry means;
display means for starting a variable display based on the entry of a ball into the triggering ball entry means and performing stop display in a predetermined manner based on the lottery result of the operation lottery process;
holding means capable of holding the variable display on the display means for a predetermined number of times,
The gaming machine according to means H1 or H2, characterized in that the operation condition is satisfied at least when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operation lottery process.

According to the means H3, since the movable body does not move every time in accordance with a predetermined trigger, the effects of the means H1 and the like are enhanced, and the production related to the movable body is suppressed from becoming monotonous. It is possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation for body movements.

In addition, in this means, the frequency with which the movable body operates can be increased by providing the retaining means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Means H4. Any one of the means H1 to H3, characterized by comprising operation pattern determination means for determining which of a plurality of operation patterns is to be executed when the movable body is placed in the advantageous state. The game machine described.

According to the means H4, by providing a plurality of operation patterns of the movable body, it is possible to further enhance the effects of the means H1 and the like. Although it is very difficult to adjust the ball entry rate to the special ball entry means to the desired ball entry rate, on the other hand, the behavior of the game ball is diversified, and it is possible to improve the interest, as described above. fraudulent behavior can be curbed.

Means H5. The gaming machine according to any one of means H1 to H4, wherein at least one of the plurality of opening/closing patterns includes a plurality of opening/closing operations.

According to the means H5, the ratio of opening and closing members to be opened is relatively high, so that more game balls can be entered into the variable ball entry means at the same time. As a result, it is possible to perform a game effect that heightens the player's expectation for the provision of the special game state, such as increasing the degree of expectation for the ball entering the special ball-entering means.

Means H6. Means H5, characterized in that at least one opening/closing operation among the plurality of opening/closing operations has an opening time longer than the game ball shooting interval (for example, 0.6 seconds) by the shooting means. game machine.

According to the means H6, the effect of the means H5 can be further enhanced.

Means H7. a first route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the special ball entry means;
a second route that allows the game ball that has passed through the specific area to flow down to the trigger ball entry means;
a route sorting means capable of sorting the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route in a specific state;
The game machine according to any one of means H1 to H6, wherein the movable body can change the behavior of the game ball flowing down the first route.

Under the configuration of each of the above means, if a plurality of (for example, two) game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (two game balls flow down continuously with almost no interval) The same applies hereinafter), etc.), even if a situation that is advantageous to the player occurs, if all of these game balls go toward the opportunity ball entry means, no matter how much the movable body Even if is in an advantageous state, there is a possibility that a problem such as not even one game ball entering the special ball entering means may occur.

On the other hand, according to the means H7, for example, when two game balls continuously enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means at the same time, the preceding first game ball is the first route or It is possible to direct the game ball to both the special ball entry means and the opportunity ball entry means such that the game ball flows down one of the second routes and the subsequent second game ball flows down the other route. Therefore, the function and effect of providing the movable body are more effective.

Furthermore, when two game balls continuously enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means, which route the preceding first game ball and the second subsequent game ball flow respectively? Since the results will differ depending on the route, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game balls distributed by the route distribution means with a sense of anticipation. As a result, it is possible to further improve interest.

Means H8. A game according to any one of the means H1 to H7, characterized in that a game ball entering (or passing through) the trigger ball entering means cannot flow down to the special ball entering means (cannot be entered). machine.

If a game ball that has passed through the opportunity ball entry means flows down toward the special ball entry means, there is a risk that the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball will always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body is always the same, which may reduce the interest of the player. Furthermore, there is a risk that cheating, such as vibrating the gaming machine, is likely to occur in accordance with the movement timing of the movable body. In addition, there is a possibility that other game balls flowing down toward the special ball entering means may be disturbed without going through the opportunity ball entering means.

On the other hand, according to the means H8, the game ball that enters the opportunity ball entry means and the game ball that the movable body acts on are always different, so that the occurrence of the above various problems can be suppressed. can be done.

Means H9. When a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entering means, the movable body can act on the game ball that has passed through the specific area after the game ball enters the game ball. The game machine according to any one of means H1 to H8, characterized in that:

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which game balls are intermittently shot at predetermined intervals, during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in an open state, a plurality of A situation that is advantageous to the player, such as game balls entering the game continuously, is unlikely to occur frequently. In particular, in a situation where it is difficult for a game ball to enter the variable ball entry means due to the nail adjustment of the game board in the game hall, such a situation that is advantageous to the player may not occur at all. could be.

In other words, if a plurality of game balls do not continuously enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the variable ball entry means), they will receive the action (assist) of the movable body. Therefore, in a gaming machine configured so that a game ball does not enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability, at the stage where a plurality of game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means continuously at the same time, There is a risk that the player's sense of anticipation will fade and interest will decline.

On the other hand, according to the above means H9, a game ball other than a game ball entered at the same time as the game ball entered by the triggering ball entry means (in a continuous ball state) is also special with a higher probability. A chance to enter the ball into the ball entry means is given.

In other words, even if a game ball entered the triggering ball-entering means does not enter the variable ball-entering means, or enters the variable ball-entering means together with the game ball entered the triggering ball-entering means. Even when other game balls do not enter the special ball entry means, the game balls that enter the variable ball entry means after that are given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability. It will happen.

As a result, even after confirming that the game ball has entered the triggering ball entering means, the player can actively play the game to enter the game ball into the variable ball entering means. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

For example, according to the means H9, two game balls enter the internal area during the predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, and the preceding first game ball (the game ball that first passed through the specific area ball) flows down either the first route or the second route, and the subsequent second game ball (the game ball that has passed through the specific area next) flows down the other route, and then to the second route. When the game ball that has flowed down enters the trigger ball entry means and the movable body is activated, when the game ball that has flowed down to the first route passes through the movable body, the movable body is not yet activated and the first route is activated. Even if the game ball that has flowed down to does not enter the special ball entry means, after that, the game ball that entered the internal area during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means It is also possible to construct a configuration in which the game ball that has been played flows down the first route and is given a chance to enter the special ball entry means by the action of the movable body.

Therefore, the means H9 is set so that "when a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the trigger ball entry means, it is opened and closed in the open state period after the open state period of the opening and closing member through which the game ball passed. The game machine according to any one of the means H1 to H8, characterized in that the movable body can act on a game ball that has passed through the member."

In addition, under the configuration of each of the above means, the configuration related to the means H9 is the time from when the game ball enters the trigger ball entry means to the start of operation of the movable body, and By adjusting the operating period, etc., this can be easily achieved without having to enter a plurality of game balls into the variable ball entering means at the same time.

Means H10. When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the game ball enters the special ball entry means more than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. A game machine according to any one of means H1 to H9, characterized in that it is configured to facilitate.

According to the means H10, when the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the degree of expectation for the ball entering the special ball-entering means is increased, so a game effect is performed to increase the player's expectation for the provision of the special game state. be able to.

As a result, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the inner area of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

Means H11. The special game state imparting means is configured to be capable of imparting a plurality of types of special game states having different game values to be imparted to the player,
A type determining means for determining one game value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the predetermined state among the plurality of types of special game states is higher than when the movable body is controlled so as not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among a plurality of types of special game states) is configured to be easily determined by the type determination means. The gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the means H11, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, it becomes a configuration that is likely to be determined to a predetermined type of special game state among a plurality of types of special game states. It is possible to perform a game effect that heightens the player's sense of anticipation for the provision of a special game state of a type with a high game value.

As a result, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the inner area of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

The "game value" includes, for example, the number of balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) performed during the special game state, and the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) provided after the special game state. is included.

Means H12. a starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
opening/closing control means capable of executing the opening/closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition (opening opportunity) is satisfied based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means; The game machine according to any one of means H1 to H11, characterized by comprising:

It should be noted that when ``a predetermined starting condition (opening opportunity) is established based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means,'' for example, ``a game ball that has entered the starting ball entry means can be detected. Under the configuration provided with a "starting ball detection means", "when a game ball is detected by the starting ball detection means" or "a predetermined start lottery based on the ball detection by the start ball detection means" and a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the starting lottery."

Means H13. a starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
Opening/closing control capable of executing an open game state in which the variable ball entering means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening opportunity is established based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. means and
The movable body control means is
A game ball enters the starting ball entering means during the predetermined open game state in which the variable ball entering means is caused to execute a predetermined release at least based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. Any one of the means H1 to H12, characterized by being capable of executing control to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform the predetermined operation as a benefit that can be granted when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above-described means H13, even during an open game state (during an open period of the variable ball entry means) in which an opening opportunity or the like cannot be obtained conventionally, the movable body can be generated based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. A situation can occur that is advantageous to a player who performs a predetermined action.

Conventionally, some players believe that when a game ball enters the start ball entry means, the game ball cannot enter the special ball entry means at the timing of opening the variable ball entry means related to the start ball entry. When it is known, the shooting of the game ball is temporarily stopped at that time so that the game ball does not wastefully enter the starting ball entering means during the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entering means). There are also players.

On the other hand, according to this means, after the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, even in such a situation, the player can renew the starting ball entering means in order to be assisted by the movable body. Since the game ball is required to enter the game ball and continuously shoots the game ball, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the operating rate of the game machine.

Furthermore, since the profit given to the player differs depending on whether or not the timing at which the game ball enters the starting ball entry means is in the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means), diversification of games is desired. can be planned.

As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Conventional problem I. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a game area. For example, a variable ball entry means that opens when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means is provided, and a game ball entering an internal area of the variable ball entry means is provided in the internal area. A pachinko machine is known in which a special game state advantageous to the player is generated when a ball enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

However, in such a pachinko machine, since the game ball is entered into the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is necessary to continue shooting the game ball into the game area even after the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. be. In such a case, conventionally, since the variable ball entry means has already been opened, even if a game ball newly enters the starting ball entry means at this timing, the opening opportunity etc. are not obtained, and the prize ball is awarded. was only Therefore, there is a risk that the interest of the player will decline, and further improvement of the interest has been desired.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its object is to provide a gaming machine capable of dramatically improving the interest of players.

Means I1. a launching means for launching a game ball;
a game area in which the launched game ball is guided;
An opening/closing member capable of changing its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter the internal area and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area, variable ball entry means that allows only game balls that have passed through the specific area to enter the internal area;
a special ball entry means that allows a game ball that has entered the internal area to enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine comprising special game state imparting means capable of imparting a special game state advantageous to a player when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
a starting ball entry means capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
Opening/closing control capable of executing an open game state in which the variable ball entering means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening opportunity is established based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. means and
In the internal region of the variable ball entry means, the state can be changed between at least an advantageous state (special state) that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, a movable body that can change the behavior of the game ball (can act on the game ball);
A game ball enters the starting ball entering means during the predetermined open game state in which the variable ball entering means is caused to execute a predetermined release at least based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. A gaming machine comprising movable body control means capable of executing control to make the movable body perform a predetermined action as a benefit that can be imparted when a predetermined condition is satisfied, thereby making the movable body in a predetermined advantageous state.

In addition, when "a predetermined opening opportunity is established based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means", for example, "a start ball that can detect the game ball entering the starting ball entry means detection means", "when a game ball is detected by the starting ball detection means" or "a predetermined start lottery is performed based on the ball detection by the start ball detection means, When a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the starting lottery”.

According to the means I1, by providing the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to change the behavior of the game ball entering the internal area. For example, by putting the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game effect that heightens the player's expectation for the provision of the special game state, such as increasing the degree of expectation of the ball entering the special ball-entering means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In addition, in this means, a game ball is newly introduced into the starting ball entering means during a predetermined open game state in which the variable ball entering means is caused to execute a predetermined release based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. When the ball hits the ball and satisfies a predetermined condition, the movable body is made to perform a predetermined action as an advantage that can be given, and control can be executed to set it in a predetermined advantageous state.

As a result, even during an open game state (during the period in which the variable ball entry means is open) in which an opening opportunity or the like cannot be obtained in the conventional art, the movable body performs a predetermined action based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. Advantageous conditions can occur for players who play.

Conventionally, some players believe that when a game ball enters the start ball entry means, the game ball cannot enter the special ball entry means at the timing of opening the variable ball entry means related to the start ball entry. When it is known, the shooting of the game ball is temporarily stopped at that time so that the game ball does not wastefully enter the starting ball entering means during the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entering means). There are also players.

On the other hand, according to this means, after the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, even in such a situation, the player can renew the starting ball entering means in order to be assisted by the movable body. Since the game ball is required to enter the game ball and continuously shoots the game ball, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the operating rate of the game machine.

Furthermore, since the profit given to the player differs depending on whether or not the timing at which the game ball enters the starting ball entry means is in the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means), diversification of games is desired. can be planned.

As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Means I2. The movable body control means causes the movable body to perform the predetermined action when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means during a predetermined period after the end of the predetermined open game state and a predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine according to means I1, characterized in that it is constructed so as to be capable of executing the control to make the predetermined advantageous state.

Conventionally, in a pachinko machine, within a predetermined time from the time when the variable ball entry means is opened (or when the game ball enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means which is in the open state), the variable ball entry It is set as a standby time (remaining ball monitoring period) for waiting for a game ball (remaining ball) that has entered the internal area of the means but has not yet been discharged to be detected by a predetermined detection switch.

Conventionally, however, when a game ball newly enters the starting ball entry means during this remaining ball monitoring period, prize balls are paid out, but a lottery or the like based on the entered ball is not conducted. , the variable ball entry means is configured so as not to be in an open state.

On the other hand, according to the above-described means I2, even during a predetermined period after the end of the predetermined open gaming state (during the remaining ball monitoring period), the movable body is moved based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. A situation can occur that is advantageous to a player who performs a predetermined action. As a result, the effect of the means I1 can be further enhanced.

Means I3. It is characterized in that the time from when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means to when the variable ball entering means (opening/closing member) starts opening can be changed in a plurality of ways. The gaming machine according to means I1 or I2.

If the time from when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means to when the opening of the variable ball entering means is started is always constant, the game ball enters the starting ball entering means. At that time, the player easily grasps that the game ball cannot enter the special ball entry means at the opening timing of the variable ball entry means related to the start ball entry, and at that time, the game ball is released. There is a risk that some players will temporarily stop playing.

Further, when the time from when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means to when the opening of the variable ball entering means is always constant, the opening timing of the variable ball entering means is determined by the player. There is a risk that such actions as shooting a game ball can be easily performed in accordance with the timing.

On the other hand, according to the above means I3, the opening timing of the variable ball-entering means changes, and the variable ball-entering means does not always open at a constant timing, so that the game presentation related to the variable ball-entering means becomes monotonous. It is possible to suppress As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player.

In addition, according to this means, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the release timing of the variable ball-entering means. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that an action such as shooting a game ball is performed in accordance with the opening timing of the variable ball entry means. In addition, since the player continues to shoot game balls, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operation rate of the gaming machine.

Means I4. a first display means for starting a variable display based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means and performing a stop display in a predetermined mode based on a lottery result of a predetermined open lottery process;
a first fluctuation pattern storage means for storing a plurality of fluctuation patterns with different fluctuation display times according to the first display means;
a first variation pattern selection means capable of selecting one of the plurality of variation patterns stored in the first variation pattern storage means based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means; ,
A first display control means for controlling the first display means based on the variation pattern selected by the first variation pattern selection means,
The opening/closing control means is
The game machine according to means I3, wherein the open game state in which the variable ball entering means (opening/closing member) is opened after the stop display is made on the first display means can be executed.

According to the means I4, the fluctuation time from the start of the fluctuation display to the stop display on the first display means can be made variable. By utilizing this, it is possible to make the time from when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means until the opening of the variable ball entering means is started to be variable.

As a result, the configuration related to the means I3 can be realized with relatively simple processing, and simplification of control can be achieved.

Means I5. A lottery process execution means capable of executing a predetermined operation lottery process based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means during the predetermined open game state (and/or during a predetermined period after the end thereof). with
The game machine according to any one of means I1 to I4, wherein the predetermined condition can be satisfied at least when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operation lottery process.

If the movable body is configured to operate each time a game ball enters the starting ball entry means during a predetermined open game state (and/or during a predetermined period after the game ends), When the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, the player easily understands that the game ball cannot enter the special ball entering means at the operation timing of the movable body related to the starting ball entering means. At that point, there is a risk that some players will temporarily stop shooting game balls.

According to the above means I5, every time a game ball enters the starting ball entering means during a predetermined open game state (and/or during a predetermined period after the end thereof), the movable body does not operate. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the monotony of the presentation related to the movable body and increase the player's expectation for the movement of the movable body. As a result, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Means I6. The time from when a game ball enters the starting ball entering means during the predetermined open game state (and/or during a predetermined period after the end thereof) until the predetermined motion of the movable body is started. The game machine according to any one of means I1 to I3, wherein (the time required for the movable body to reach the predetermined advantageous state) can be changed in a plurality of ways.

If the game ball is entered into the starting ball entry means during a predetermined open game state (and/or during a predetermined period after the end thereof), the time from when the predetermined movement of the movable body is started is always constant. In this case, when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, the game ball cannot enter the special ball entering means at the operation timing of the movable body related to the starting ball entering means. There is a risk that some players will stop shooting the game balls at that point.

In addition, during a predetermined open game state (and/or during a predetermined period after the end thereof), the time from when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means to when the predetermined operation of the movable body is started is always If it is fixed, the player will easily grasp the movement timing of the movable body, and there is a risk that an action such as shooting a game ball will be easily performed in accordance with the timing.

On the other hand, according to the means I6, since the movement timing of the movable body changes and the movable body does not always move at a fixed timing, the monotony of the game performance using the movable body is suppressed. be able to. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player.

In addition, according to this means, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the movement timing of the movable body. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that an action such as shooting a game ball will be performed in accordance with the operation timing of the movable body. In addition, since the player continues to shoot game balls, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operation rate of the gaming machine.

Means I7. The time from when a game ball enters the starting ball entering means during the predetermined open game state (and/or during a predetermined period after the end thereof) until the predetermined motion of the movable body is started. out of a plurality of set times set in advance based on the game ball entering the starting ball entering means during the predetermined open game state (and/or during a predetermined period after the end) A gaming machine according to means I6, characterized by comprising set time selection means capable of selecting any one.

According to the means I7, the configuration related to the means I6 can be realized by relatively simple processing, and the control can be simplified.

Means I8. During the predetermined open game state (and/or during a predetermined period after the end), a variable display is started based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means, and the lottery result of the predetermined operation lottery process. a second display means for performing stop display in a predetermined manner based on
a second fluctuation pattern storage means for storing a plurality of fluctuation patterns with different fluctuation display times according to the second display means;
A plurality of patterns stored in the second variation pattern storage means based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry means during the predetermined open game state (and/or during a predetermined period after the end thereof) A second variation pattern selection means capable of selecting one of the variation patterns of
A second display control means for controlling the second display means based on the variation pattern selected by the second variation pattern selection means,
The movable body control means is
A gaming machine according to means I6, wherein control is executable to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state after the stop display is made on the second display means.

According to the means I8, by providing the second display means, the player can be made to recognize in advance that the movable body may enter a predetermined advantageous state.

Furthermore, the player, while not knowing whether or not the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state, has a sense of anticipation that it will be in an advantageous state, and watches the movement of the game ball and the variable display. As a result, it is possible to further improve interest.

As a result, it is possible to increase the attention level of the game presentation related to the movable body, and to further improve the interest of the player.

In addition, according to the means I8, the fluctuation time from the start of the fluctuation display to the stop display on the second display means can be made variable. Utilizing this, during a predetermined open game state (and/or during a predetermined period after the end), from the game ball entering the starting ball entering means until the predetermined operation of the movable body is started can be made variable.

As a result, the configuration related to the means I6 can be realized with relatively simple processing, and simplification of control can be achieved.

Means I9. It is characterized in that the movable body can act on the game ball that has passed through the specific area after the predetermined open game state (and/or the predetermined period after the end) is completed. A gaming machine according to any one of means I1 to I8.

In a game machine configured so that a game ball can enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability by receiving the action (assist) of the movable body, during (and/or after) a predetermined open game state, At the time when the game ball enters the start ball entry means (during the operation assist lottery) during a predetermined period), the player's expectation may be lost and the interest may be reduced when the game ball does not exist in the internal area. There is

On the other hand, according to the means I9, when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means during the predetermined open game state (and/or during the predetermined period after the end), the game ball enters the internal area. Even if is not present, a game ball entering the variable ball entering means opened at a predetermined timing is given a chance of entering the special ball entering means with a higher probability.

As a result, the player can confirm that the game ball has entered the starting ball entering means during a predetermined open game state (and/or during a predetermined period after the end). It is possible to positively play the game to enter the game ball into the ball entering means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Means I10. When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the game ball enters the special ball entry means more than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. A game machine according to any one of the means I1 to I9, characterized in that it is configured to facilitate.

According to the above means I10, if the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the degree of expectation of the ball entering the special ball-entering means increases, so a game effect is performed to increase the player's expectation for the provision of the special game state or the like. be able to.

As a result, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the inner area of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

Means I11. The special game state imparting means is configured to be capable of imparting a plurality of types of special game states having different game values to be imparted to the player,
A type determining means for determining one game value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the predetermined state among the plurality of types of special game states is higher than when the movable body is controlled so as not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among a plurality of types of special game states) is configured to be easily determined by the type determination means. The gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the above means I11, the determination of the type of the special game state is performed based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, it becomes a configuration that is likely to be determined to a predetermined type of special game state among a plurality of types of special game states. It is possible to perform a game effect that heightens the player's sense of anticipation for the provision of a special game state of a type with a high game value.

As a result, the player will pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the inner area of the variable ball entry means, and the interest can be further improved.

The "game value" includes, for example, the number of balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) performed during the special game state, and the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) provided after the special game state. is included.

In addition, for a game machine having a part or all of the above means A1 to A11, a part or all of the above means A1 to A11 and the above means B1 to B13 Configuration of any part or all, configuration of any part or all of the means C1 to means C12, configuration of any part or all of the means D1 to means D15, or means E1 to means E12 configuration of any part or all of, configuration of any part or all of the means F1 to means F11, configuration of any part or all of the means G1 to means G12, the means H1 to means Any part or all of the configuration of H13 and at least one of the configurations of part or all of the above means I1 to I11 may be implemented in any combination.

Similarly, for a game machine having a configuration of any part or all of the above means B1 to B13, a configuration of any part or all of the means A1 to means A11, the means B1 to B13 configuration of any part or all of, configuration of any part or all of the means C1 to means C12, configuration of any part or all of the means D1 to means D15, the means E1 to means any part or all of the configuration of E12, any part or all of the means F1 to F11, any part or all of the means G1 to G12, the means H1 to At least one of the configuration of any part or all of means H13 and the configuration of part or all of any of means I1 to I11 may be arbitrarily combined and implemented. .

Similarly, for a game machine having a configuration of any part or all of the means C1 to C12, any part or all of the means A1 to A11, the means B1 to B13 configuration of any part or all of, configuration of any part or all of the means C1 to means C12, configuration of any part or all of the means D1 to means D15, the means E1 to means any part or all of the configuration of E12, any part or all of the means F1 to F11, any part or all of the means G1 to G12, the means H1 to At least one of the configuration of any part or all of means H13 and the configuration of part or all of any of means I1 to I11 may be arbitrarily combined and implemented. .

Similarly, for a game machine having a configuration of any part or all of the means D1 to D15, any part or all of the means A1 to A11, the means B1 to B13 configuration of any part or all of, configuration of any part or all of the means C1 to means C12, configuration of any part or all of the means D1 to means D15, the means E1 to means any part or all of the configuration of E12, any part or all of the means F1 to F11, any part or all of the means G1 to G12, the means H1 to At least one of the configuration of any part or all of means H13 and the configuration of part or all of any of means I1 to I11 may be arbitrarily combined and implemented. .

Similarly, for a gaming machine having a configuration of any part or all of the above means E1 to E12, a configuration of any part or all of the above means A1 to means A11 and the above means B1 to B13 configuration of any part or all of, configuration of any part or all of the means C1 to means C12, configuration of any part or all of the means D1 to means D15, the means E1 to means any part or all of the configuration of E12, any part or all of the means F1 to F11, any part or all of the means G1 to G12, the means H1 to At least one of the configuration of any part or all of means H13 and the configuration of part or all of any of means I1 to I11 may be arbitrarily combined and implemented. .

Similarly, for a game machine having a configuration of any part or all of the means F1 to F11, any part or all of the means A1 to A11, the means B1 to B13 configuration of any part or all of, configuration of any part or all of the means C1 to means C12, configuration of any part or all of the means D1 to means D15, the means E1 to means any part or all of the configuration of E12, any part or all of the means F1 to F11, any part or all of the means G1 to G12, the means H1 to At least one of the configuration of any part or all of means H13 and the configuration of part or all of any of means I1 to I11 may be arbitrarily combined and implemented. .

Similarly, for a game machine having a configuration of any part or all of the means G1 to G12, any part or all of the means A1 to A11, the means B1 to B13 configuration of any part or all of, configuration of any part or all of the means C1 to means C12, configuration of any part or all of the means D1 to means D15, the means E1 to means any part or all of the configuration of E12, any part or all of the means F1 to F11, any part or all of the means G1 to G12, the means H1 to At least one of the configuration of any part or all of means H13 and the configuration of part or all of any of means I1 to I11 may be arbitrarily combined and implemented. .

Similarly, for a game machine having a configuration of any part or all of the means H1 to H13, any part or all of the means A1 to A11, the means B1 to B13 configuration of any part or all of, configuration of any part or all of the means C1 to means C12, configuration of any part or all of the means D1 to means D15, the means E1 to means any part or all of the configuration of E12, any part or all of the means F1 to F11, any part or all of the means G1 to G12, the means H1 to At least one of the configuration of any part or all of means H13 and the configuration of part or all of any of means I1 to I11 may be arbitrarily combined and implemented. .

Similarly, for a game machine having a configuration of any part or all of the above means I1 to I11, a configuration of any part or all of the means A1 to A11 and the means B1 to B13 configuration of any part or all of, configuration of any part or all of the means C1 to means C12, configuration of any part or all of the means D1 to means D15, the means E1 to means any part or all of the configuration of E12, any part or all of the means F1 to F11, any part or all of the means G1 to G12, the means H1 to At least one of the configuration of any part or all of means H13 and the configuration of part or all of any of means I1 to I11 may be arbitrarily combined and implemented. .

The basic configuration of various gaming machines to which the above means are applied is shown below.

(b) The game machine in each of the above means is a pinball game machine. As a more detailed example of a mode, "an operating means (game ball shooting handle) operated by a player, a shooting means (shooting motor, etc.) for flipping and shooting a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, and the shooting means. A pinball game machine provided with a game area in which a game ball is guided and each ball entry means (general winning opening, variable winning device, operation opening, etc.) arranged in the game area.

(b) The game machine in each of the above means is a pinball game machine having a game area extending in a substantially vertical direction. As a more detailed example of a mode, "an operating means (game ball shooting handle) operated by a player, a shooting means (shooting motor, etc.) for flipping and shooting a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, and the shooting means. A predetermined game area (for example, the game area is composed of a game board surface, etc.) that guides the game balls and extends along a substantially vertical direction, and each ball entry means (general winning opening, variable winning device, operation port, etc.), and configured to enable visual recognition of the behavior of the game ball flowing down the game area.

(c) The game machine in each of the above means or each pinball game machine is a pachinko machine or a game machine conforming to a pachinko machine.

[Second embodiment]
Hereinafter, a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 according to the second embodiment will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. However, portions (same components, same processing contents, etc.) that overlap with the first embodiment described above will be described using the same member names and the same reference numerals. The gaming machine according to the present invention (the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment) is provided with a "rotating body" as the "rotating means" of the present invention.

50 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 51 is a perspective view, and FIG. 52 is a perspective view showing a state in which the inner frame 12 and the front frame set 14 are opened. FIG. 53 is a front view showing the structure of the inner frame 12, the game board 30, and the like. 54 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 55 is a perspective view showing a state in which the inner frame 12, the back pack unit 203 and the like are opened. However, for the sake of convenience, FIG. 52 omits the nails and various accessories provided on the game board 30 as path changing means, the glass unit 137 attached to the front frame set 14, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 52, etc., the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that constitutes the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10. An inner frame 12 is supported on one side of the outer frame 11 so as to be openable and closable. .

As shown in FIG. 55 and the like, the outer frame 11 has an upper frame-constituting portion 11a and a lower frame-constituting portion 11b made of wooden plate material, and a left frame-constituting portion 11c and a right side frame-constituting portion 11d made of aluminum alloy by extrusion molding. These frame-constituting parts 11a to 11d are assembled into a rectangular frame as a whole by detachable fasteners such as screws.

An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left side frame-constituting portion 11c (see FIG. 50). The upper and lower parts of the inner frame 12 are rotatably supported by the upper hinge 81 and the lower hinge 82, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed. A space formed inside the outer frame 11 accommodates the inner frame 12 and the like.

An extension wall portion 83 that protrudes toward the inner side of the outer frame 11 from the vicinity of the rear end in the width direction is formed on the right side frame-constituting portion 11d. The extending wall portion 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see FIG. 54) provided on the right side rear side of the inner frame 12 from the rear side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 54). In addition, as shown in FIG. 52 , a pair of upper and lower receiving portions 84 and 85 to which the locking member of the locking device 600 is locked is provided on the front side of the extending wall portion 83 . A pressing portion 86 that abuts on an inner frame open detection switch 92 (to be described later) projects toward the inside of the outer frame 11 from the lower receiving portion 85 .

Further, a resin-made curtain plate decoration 87 is attached to the lower side frame-constituting portion 11b. A rib 88 protruding upward is integrally formed in the inner part of the upper surface of the curtain plate decoration 87 . This makes it difficult for a gap to be formed with the inner frame 12 .

As shown in FIG. 52, the opening/closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set vertically along the left side of the pachinko machine 10 when viewed from the front, and the inner frame 12 can be opened forward with this opening/closing axis as the axis. It has become. The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 38 having a rectangular outer shape, and a substantially elliptical window hole 39 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 38 .

A front frame set 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so that it can be opened and closed. As with the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 can be opened forward with an opening/closing axis set along the top and bottom on the left side of the pachinko machine 10 as viewed from the front.

The front frame set 14 has a rectangular outer shape like the inner frame 12, and covers substantially the entire front side of the inner frame 12 in the closed state. A substantially elliptical window portion 101 is formed in the central portion of the front frame set 14 . Thereby, the game board 30 (game area) attached to the rear surface of the inner frame 12 can be visually recognized from the outside through the window portion 101 of the front frame set 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12 . A detailed configuration of the game board 30 will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 50, the front side of the front frame set 14 is provided with a lower tray 15 as a ball receiving tray at the center of the lower portion thereof, and the game balls discharged from the outlet 16 are stored in the lower tray 15. It is possible. Further, on the front side of the lower tray 15, a ball extracting lever 25 for ejecting game balls from the inside of the lower tray 15 is provided.

In addition, on the left side of the lower plate 15, a performance button 125 is provided as an operating means that can be operated by the player. The effect button 125 is configured to be capable of being pressed (operated downward) by the player. Further, inside the lower plate 15, an operation detection switch (not shown) is provided as operation detection means for detecting a pressing operation of the effect button 125. As shown in FIG. When the performance button 125 is pressed, an operation detection signal is output from the operation detection switch to the sub-controller 262, which will be described later. As a result, when the player presses the effect button 125, a predetermined effect is performed on the effect display device 42 or the like, or the content of the effect is changed, as will be described later.

On the right side of the lower plate 15, there is provided a game ball shooting handle (hereinafter simply referred to as "handle") 18 protruding forward. It should be noted that the handle 18 as an operating means that can be operated by the player is, for example, a base portion fixed to the front frame set 14, and a rotation operating portion as a first operating portion rotatably assembled to the base portion. , a variable resistor as an operation amount detection means for detecting the operation amount of the rotary operation part, and a shooting stop switch as a second operation part that can select whether or not to shoot the game ball to the game area. .

An upper plate 19 is provided above the lower plate 15 . The upper tray 19 is a ball receiver that once stores game balls and guides them toward a game ball launching device (hereinafter simply referred to as "shooting device") 60 as shooting means to be described later while aligning them in a row. When the upper tray 19 is filled with game balls, the game balls to be paid out are guided to the lower tray 15 via a lower tray communication passage 71 and a discharge port 16, which will be described later.

The upper plate 19 is provided with a ball lending button 121 and a returning button 122 as operating means that can be operated by the player. As a result, when the ball lending button 121 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like, the ball lending button 121 is operated. A rented ball is supplied to the upper tray 19 . In addition, in order to clarify the ownership of the game balls used in the game hall, predetermined information that can identify the game hall is described by stamping, etc., and game balls brought in from other game halls Prevents fraudulent use. A return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. However, the ball lending button 121 and return button 122 are unnecessary in a pachinko machine in which game balls are directly lent to the upper tray 19 from a ball lending device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine.

Further, the upper plate 19 is provided with a ball-removing button 123 as an operation means that can be operated by the player. By pressing the ball removal button 123, a communication hole (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the ball guide path of the upper tray 19 and communicating with the lower tray 15 is opened and stored in the upper tray 19. The game ball is guided (dropped) to the lower tray 15. - 特許庁That is, the player can move the game ball on the upper tray 19 to the lower tray 15 at any time by operating the ball removal button 123 .

Further, the front face of the front frame set 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it. These light emitting means play a role of increasing the effect during the game by changing and controlling the light emitting mode such as lighting and blinking in accordance with the change of the game state such as at the time of a big win or a predetermined ready-to-win state. For example, a frame lamp 102 containing a light emitting means such as an LED is provided on the periphery of the window portion 101 . Also, on both sides of the frame lamp 102, there are provided error display lamps 104 which light up when a predetermined error occurs. A large number of fine through holes are formed in the frame lamps 102 above the error display lamps 104 so as to correspond to the speakers SP (see FIG. 52) provided on the rear surface of the front frame set 14 .

A glass unit 137 is attached to the rear side of the front frame set 14 . The glass unit 137 is not a conventional front and rear pair of rectangular plate glasses that are attached separately as a front and rear pair, but is formed in a round shape as a whole and attached after being assembled.

Further, as shown in FIG. 52 , a ball passage unit 70 is provided on the back side of the front frame set 14 below the window portion 101 . The ball passage unit 70 includes a lower tray communication path 71 that connects the payout mechanism 352 to the outlet 16 of the lower tray 15 and an upper tray communication path 73 that connects the payout mechanism 352 to the upper tray 19 .

In addition, the ball passage unit 70 is provided with a full detection switch (not shown) for detecting game balls positioned in the lower tray communication passage 71 . Due to the presence of the full detection switch, it is grasped that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls (that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls and that the game balls are staying in the lower tray communication passage 71). be able to.

Next, the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to FIG. At the lower front portion of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), that is, below the window hole 39 (game board 30), there is a shooting device 60 and a shooting rail 61 for guiding game balls immediately after being shot from the shooting device 60. installed. In this embodiment, as the launching device 60, a solenoid type launching device having a plunger as a movable member is adopted.

In this embodiment, control is performed such that launching of the launching device 60 is prohibited based on the game ball being continuously detected for a predetermined period of time by the full detection switch. On the other hand, when the stagnation of the game balls in the lower tray communication passage 71 is eliminated and the game balls are no longer detected by the full detection switch (when the game balls are no longer detected continuously for a predetermined time), the launching of the shooting device 60 is permitted.

A ball feeder 63 is provided above the launcher 60 . The ball feeding device 63 guides the game balls guided from the upper tray 19 one by one to the shooting position of the shooting device 60 by driving means such as a solenoid.

Reference numeral 67 in FIGS. 52 and 53 denotes a payout passage for guiding game balls paid out by a payout mechanism 352 (to be described later) to the front of the inner frame 12, and an upper tray communication passage 73 (upper tray 19 ) and a passage leading to the lower tray communication passage 71 (lower tray 15).

Further, a shutter 68 is provided below the payout passage 67, and when the front frame set 14 is opened, the shutter 68 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring or the like so as to close the outlet of the payout passage 67. It has become.

On the other hand, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the shutter 68 is pushed open by the entrance-side rear ends of the lower tray communicating path 71 and the upper tray communicating path 73 . In the closed state of the front frame set 14, the inlets of the lower tray communicating path 71 and the upper tray communicating path 73 are adjacent to the dispensing path 67 with a predetermined distance therebetween, and the gap between them is filled with a game ball. can pass through.

In addition, since the entrance portion of the lower tray communication passage 71 and the entrance portion of the upper tray communication passage 73 are provided adjacent to each other, when the upper tray 19 and the upper tray communication passage 73 are filled with game balls, the game balls are paid out. The game balls flow toward the lower tray communication path 71 (overflow to the inlet side of the lower tray communication path 71) and are paid out to the lower tray 15 through the lower tray communication path 71. - 特許庁

As described above, the game board 30 is attached behind the window hole 39 to the inner frame 12 (resin base 38). The game board 30 is attached with its peripheral portion in contact with the back side of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38). Therefore, a substantially central portion of the front surface of the game board 30, which serves as a game area, is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39 of the resin base 38. As shown in FIG.

Here, the configuration of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 30 in the present embodiment is based on a transparent plate which is a light-transmitting member formed in a flat plate shape from a resin material having light-transmitting properties (light-transmitting properties) such as polycarbonate, acrylic resin, and ABS resin. (game board main body). Here, "transparent" does not only mean that an object existing in the rear area of the game board 30 can be visually recognized in a completely transparent state, but at least a part of the light is transmitted so that the existence of the object can be recognized. It may also include a so-called translucent state of some degree.

With this configuration, the player can visually recognize various objects such as lamps and display devices arranged in the rear region of the game board 30 from the front of the game board 30 through the game board 30 . For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53, LED boards 48A, 48B, and 48C mounted with a plurality of LEDs are arranged as light emitting means behind a predetermined area of the game area. , the light emitted from the LED can be visually recognized from the front of the game board 30 through the game board 30 . Incidentally, the LED board 48A and the like are controlled to light up and blink in a predetermined light emission mode corresponding to various game effects, and serve to enhance the effect of the game during the game.

In addition, the game board 30 includes an inner rail component 51 and an outer rail component 52 formed of strip-shaped metal plates, and guide means for guiding the game ball fired from the shooting device 60 to the upper part of the game board 30. A rail 50 is attached. As a result, the game ball shot with the rotating operation of the handle 18 is guided into the game area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137 through the shooting rails 61 and 50 .

A return ball prevention member 53 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion in FIG. 53) of the inner rail-constituting portion 51 . As a result, the game ball once guided from the rail 50 to the game area is prevented from returning into the rail 50 again. Further, a return rubber 54 is attached to substantially the tip portion (upper right portion in FIG. 53) of the outer rail constituting portion 52 . As a result, the game ball shot with more than a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 54 as movement restricting means and is returned to the substantially central portion side of the game board 30 .

In this embodiment, the outer rail component 52 ends at the upper right portion of the game board 30 , and the inner rail component 51 ends at the lower right portion of the game board 30 . Therefore, the play area is defined by the rails 50 and the inner peripheral surfaces of the window holes 39 of the resin base 38 . However, until the game ball hit by the launching device 60 passes through the return ball preventing member 53 as a return restricting means, there is a case where the rail 50 is reversed. is removed from the play area.

In addition, there is a gap of a predetermined distance between the launch rail 61 provided on the inner frame 12 and the rail 50 (outer rail constituting portion 52), and the ball passage unit 70 receives a game ball dropped from the gap. A foul ball passage 72 is formed leading to the plate 15 . As a result, if a game ball shot from the shooting device 60 does not reach the return-ball prevention member 53 and travels back along the rail 50 as a foul ball, the foul ball passes through the foul ball passage 72 to the lower tray 15. Ejected.

The game board 30 includes a general winning port (general winning portion) 31, a variable winning device (large winning device) 32, an upper starting winning port 33YA, a lower starting winning port 33YB, a through gate 34, a variable display device unit 35, a first The special display device 43L, the second special display device 43R, and the like are arranged so as to be fitted into mounting holes formed through the transparent plate.

Furthermore, in the front area of the game board 30, that is, in the game area formed on the front side of the game board 30, in order to distribute the falling direction of the game ball in a predetermined area and to guide the game ball to a predetermined position, A large number of nails 49, windmills 57 and the like are arranged. The windmill 57 is a rotating body that rotates when a game ball that moves relatively to itself comes into contact with it and acts on the flow of the game ball, and changes state between a rotating state and a stopped state. For example, the windmill 57 includes a shaft member whose rear end side is directly or indirectly fixed to the game board 30, a central tubular portion through which the front end side of the shaft member is inserted, and a radial direction outward from the central tubular portion. It has a plurality of extended contact pieces as operated portions, and a decorative disk portion which is circular in a front view and is provided at the front end of the central cylindrical portion, and a game ball contacts the contact pieces. By receiving an external force, it rotates with the front-rear direction as its axial direction due to the external force. Of course, the configuration of the windmill 57 is not limited to this, and other configurations may be adopted.

The game balls guided to the game area flow down along various routes while being changed in the direction of flow and the direction of rotation by the nails 49 and the like. Some of the plurality of game balls guided to the game area are guided to the windmill 57 while relatively moving through various paths, and the windmill 57 distributes the falling routes to the left and right. Here, when the game ball is in the first mode passing on the left side of the windmill 57 and the game ball acts on the contact piece in the first proximity state, the windmill 57 moves in the counterclockwise direction, which is the first operation mode. Perform a rotation motion to On the other hand, when the game ball is in the second mode passing on the right side of the pinwheel 57 and the game ball acts on the contact piece in the second proximity state, the pinwheel 57 moves clockwise, which is the second motion mode. Make a rotating motion.

Under such a configuration, the game balls distributed to the right side by the windmill 57 (hereinafter referred to as the left windmill 57) provided in the left side area of the variable display device unit 35, for example, are distributed to the left side by the left windmill 57. Compared with the game ball, it becomes easier to be guided toward the upper start winning opening 33YA by the nail 49 or the like. On the other hand, the game balls distributed to the right side by the windmill 57 (hereinafter referred to as the right windmill 57) provided in the right side region of the variable display unit 35 are compared to the game balls distributed to the left by the right windmill 57. , it becomes easier to be guided to the variable winning device 32.

Further, in this embodiment, the left windmill 57 rotates clockwise and the game ball passes through the left windmill 57 more than the case where the left windmill 57 rotates counterclockwise and the game ball passes through the left side of the left windmill 57 . While the percentage of game balls guided to the upper start winning opening 33YA is greater when passing through the right side of the left windmill 57, the left windmill 57 rotates clockwise and the game ball passes through the right side of the left windmill 57. When the left windmill 57 rotates counterclockwise and the game balls pass through the left side of the left windmill 57, the ratio of the game balls guided to the general prize winning opening 31 increases.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the game area is expanded in the left-right direction, by providing the windmill 57, etc., the game ball can be moved from the top start winning opening 33YA, the variable winning device 32, etc. It is configured so that it can be easily guided in the direction. In addition, the nail 49 and the like are adjusted in advance on the game board 30 so that the winning to the upper start winning opening 33YA, the variable winning device 32 and the like occurs with an appropriate probability.

In this embodiment, the windmills 57 are provided in the left side area and the right side area of the variable display device unit 35, respectively. It is good also as a structure provided. Further, when the game board 30 is configured based on a transparent plate as in the present embodiment, at least a part of the windmill 57 such as the decorative disc portion is configured as a light transmitting portion by a light transmitting resin material or the like. You may The relative positional relationship between the windmill 57 and the game ball includes a first positional relationship in which at least a portion of the windmill 57 and at least a portion of the game ball do not overlap, and a first positional relationship in which at least a portion of the windmill 57 and the game ball do not overlap. and a second positional relationship, which is a close proximity state in which at least a portion overlaps with the second positional relationship. Therefore, when the light transmitting portion is provided, the light transmitted through the game board 30 is visible to the player through the light transmitting portion of the windmill 57 in the first positional relationship in which the game ball does not pass through the windmill 57. It will happen. On the other hand, in the second positional relationship in which the game ball passes through the pinwheel 57, part of the game ball overlapping the transparent portion of the pinwheel 57 blocks part of the light transmitted through the game board 30, A portion of the game ball is irradiated with light such as external light from the front through the portion.

In addition, the game board 30 is provided with winning detection switches as detecting means for detecting game balls that have entered the various winning ports corresponding to the various winning ports (ball entering means) such as the general winning port 31. there is Specifically, as shown in FIG. 53 , a general prize winning switch 221 is provided at a position corresponding to the general prize winning port 31 , and a count switch 223 is provided to the variable prize winning device 32 . In addition, the upper start prize winning port 33YA is provided with a first start prize winning switch 224A, and the lower start prize winning port 33YB is provided with a second start prize winning switch 224B. Furthermore, a through gate switch 225 is provided at a position corresponding to the through gate 34 .

As is well known, when a game ball enters various winning ports such as the general winning port 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper starting winning port 33YA, and the lower starting winning port 33YB, it is detected by various detection switches, and the upper tray 19 (or lower plate 15), a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. For example, when there is a prize in the upper start prize-winning port 33YA, 3 pieces, when there is a prize in the lower start prize-winning port 33YB, 1 prize, and when there is a prize in the general prize-winning port 31, 10 15 game balls are paid out to the upper tray 19 (lower tray 15) when there is a prize to the variable prize winning device 32.例文帳に追加Here, the upper starting winning opening 33YA may constitute the first starting winning means, the lower starting winning opening 33YB may constitute the second starting winning means, and the variable winning device 32 may constitute the specific winning means. . In addition, the state in which the game ball wins in a predetermined winning opening such as the upper starting winning opening 33YA may be regarded as an advantageous state. For example, a state in which a game ball enters the upper starting prize winning port 33YA and three prize balls are paid out is defined as a first advantageous state, and a state in which a game ball enters the general winning prize port 31 and ten prize balls are paid out is defined as a first advantageous state. 2 advantageous state. In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an out port 36, and game balls that do not enter various prize winning ports such as the general winning port 31 are discharged out of the game area through the out port 36. .

The variable winning device 32 includes a large winning opening (reference numerals omitted) in which a game ball can win a prize, a rectangular plate-shaped opening and closing plate (large winning opening opening and closing member) 32a as an opening and closing member for opening and closing the large winning opening, and the opening and closing plate. It is provided with a large winning opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing the 32a.

The variable winning device 32 is in a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the big winning opening during normal times when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, and when a big win or a small win described later occurs, the predetermined condition is satisfied. In this case, the opening/closing plate 32a tilts forward with its lower side as the pivot axis by energizing the solenoid for the large winning opening, and the game ball enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the large winning opening.

A game ball can always win a prize in the upper starting prize-winning opening 33YA. On the other hand, the lower start winning opening 33YB is provided with an opening/closing accessory 37Y as an opening/closing type winning auxiliary device.

The opening/closing accessory 37Y includes a pair of left and right movable blades 37Ya as an opening/closing member that rotates in the left-right direction about the lower end side, and a starting prize opening solenoid (not shown) that drives the movable blades 37Ya to open and close. , the movable vane 37Ya opens and closes in response to the establishment of a predetermined condition, so that the game ball flowing down the game area can enter the lower starting winning opening 33YB, and the game ball enters the lower starting winning opening 33YB. It is configured so that the state can be changed between the disabled closed state.

As described above, the upper starting winning opening 33YA and the lower starting winning opening 33YB are provided with a first starting winning switch 224A and a second starting winning switch 224B as detection means for detecting winning game balls, respectively. Then, when a game ball is detected by the starting prize-winning switches 224A and 224B, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a big win state, etc., and special display devices 43L and 43R and an effect display device 42 to be described later are performed. , it is configured to perform variable display and predetermined effects. Here, when winning a lottery, a jackpot state or the like is provided.

Hereinafter, the jackpot type in this embodiment will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 86, in this embodiment, as the jackpot types, "16R probability variable jackpot A", "16R probability variable jackpot B", "4R probability variable jackpot A", "4R probability variable jackpot B", "16R normal jackpot A" , “16R normal jackpot B”, “4R normal jackpot A”, “4R normal jackpot B” and “JUB (Jump Up Bonus) jackpot”.

In the jackpot state of "16R probability variable jackpot A", "long open" is set as one special prize state, and this is repeated 16 times (16 rounds).

In the present embodiment, "long open" means that a specified time of 30 seconds has elapsed after the opening/closing plate 32a of the variable winning device 32 was switched from a closed state to an open state, or a specified number of It refers to one opening and closing operation until it becomes a closed state on the condition that 10 game balls win a prize.

In the jackpot state of "16R probability variable jackpot B", "long open" is set as one special prize state, and after this is repeated four times (4 rounds), "short open" is set as one special prize state, This is repeated 12 times (12 rounds).

In this embodiment, "short opening" means that the specified time of 0.4 seconds has elapsed after the opening/closing plate 32a of the variable winning device 32 was switched from the closed state to the open state, or It refers to one opening and closing operation until the closed state is reached on the condition that three game balls of the number win a prize.

In the present embodiment, game balls are shot toward the game area from the shooting device 60 at a rate of one every "0.6 seconds" based on the operation of the handle 18 by the player. On the other hand, in the above "short opening", the specified opening time of the opening/closing plate 32a is 0.4 seconds. That is, in the case of "short opening", the opening time of the opening/closing plate 32a once is shorter than the shooting cycle of the game ball. Therefore, even one game ball may not win a prize with only one "short release". For this reason, the opening/closing plate 32a is rarely closed based on the condition related to the number of winning prizes (the number of winning prizes is 3) among the above two closing conditions corresponding to the "short opening", and once the opening/closing plate 32a is opened. will normally be closed based on the lapse of a specified time (0.4 seconds). This avoids changing the execution period each time during the "short open" execution period.

In the jackpot states of "4R probability variable jackpot A" and "4R probability variable jackpot B", "long open" is set as one prize state, and this is repeated four times (four rounds).

In the jackpot state of "16R normal jackpot A", "long open" is set as one special prize state, and after this is repeated eight times (8 rounds), "short open" is set as one special prize state, This is repeated 8 times (8 rounds).

In the jackpot state of "16R normal jackpot B", "long open" is set as one special prize state, and after this is repeated four times (four rounds), "short open" is set as one special prize state, This is repeated 12 times (12 rounds).

In the jackpot states of "4R normal jackpot A" and "4R normal jackpot B", "long open" is set as one special prize state, and this is repeated four times (four rounds).

In the jackpot state of 'JUB jackpot', 'short opening' is set as one special prize state, which is repeated 5 times, and then 'long opening' is set as one special prize state, and this is repeated 15 times. . In other words, five "short releases" are performed in the first round, and "long releases" are performed in each of the second to sixteenth rounds.

In addition, when the various "probability variable jackpots" and "JUB jackpots" occur, a "high probability mode (high probability state)" is given as a lottery mode after the jackpot state. On the other hand, when various "normal jackpots" occur, a "low probability mode (low probability state)" is given after the jackpot state ends.

"High-probability mode" refers to a state in which the jackpot probability is increased compared to the "low-probability mode" normally set. The "high probability mode" set after the end of the big win continues until the next big win state occurs.

After the end of the various jackpots, a winning support mode related to the opening/closing accessory 37Y is performed while the special display devices 43L and 43R are performing variable display for a predetermined number of times or until the next jackpot state occurs. As a "high support mode (high ball state)" is given.

"High support mode" means that the ratio of the open state to the closed state per unit time in the opening and closing accessory 37Y of the lower start winning opening 33YB is higher than the "low support mode (low ball entry state)" set at normal times. It refers to the state where there are many.

For example, as the "high support mode", (1) a state in which the fluctuation display time in the normal symbol display device 41 described later is shorter than in the "low support mode", (2) the movable wings 37Ya of the opening/closing accessory 37Y A state in which the opening time (prescribed time) is longer than in the "low support mode", and (3) a state in which the prescribed number of game balls that can win prizes per opening of the movable blade 37Ya is greater than in the "low support mode". , (4) When a winning result is obtained by the opening lottery of the opening and closing accessory 37Y caused by the game ball passing through the through gate 34, the number of execution times of the opening and closing processing of the movable feather 37Ya performed per time is "low support mode (5) a state in which the winning probability in the open lottery for the opening/closing accessory 37Y is higher than that in the "low support mode". The high support mode in this embodiment employs the configurations (1), (2), and (5) above. Of course, without being limited to this, any one of the configurations (1) to (5) or any combination of the configurations (1) to (5) may be adopted as the “high support mode”. As a result, game balls are likely to frequently win prizes in the lower starting prize-winning port 33YB, the number of times the big winning lottery is executed increases, and the state of holding the balls becomes good.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the "high support mode" is provided, by changing the variation pattern table to a table for the "high support mode" as described later, the first and second special display devices 43L , 43R (effect display device 42) are configured to be shorter than in the "low support mode".

In this embodiment, after the end of the "16R probability variable jackpot A" and "4R probability variable jackpot A", the "high support mode" is provided until the next jackpot state occurs. The "high support mode" is hereinafter referred to as "until the next time/high support mode".

After the end of "16R probability variable jackpot B" and "4R probability variable jackpot B", "20 times", "30 times", "40 times" or "50 times" are displayed on the special display devices 43L and 43R. "High Support Mode" is granted while The "high support mode" is hereinafter referred to as "20 times/high support mode", "30 times/high support mode", "40 times/high support mode" or "50 times/high support mode", respectively.

After the end of the "16R normal jackpot A" and "4R normal jackpot A", the "high support mode" is provided while the special display devices 43L and 43R perform "30 times" variable display. The "high support mode" is hereinafter referred to as "30 times/high support mode S".

After the end of "16R normal jackpot B" and "4R normal jackpot B", "20 times/high support mode", "30 times/high support mode", "40 times/high support mode" or "50 times/high support mode" Support mode" is given.

After the end of the "JUB jackpot", "until next time/high support mode" is provided.

In this embodiment, various game states occur by combining the various modes described above.

For example, if "high probability mode" and "high support mode" are given, it becomes a so-called "probability change state (probability change state)".

When the state in which the "low probability mode" and the "low support mode" are provided, it becomes a so-called "normal state".

If "low probability mode" and "high support mode" are given, it will be a so-called "time reduction state (time reduction state)".

When the "high-probability mode" and the "low-support mode" are added, a so-called "latent certainty state (variable latent certainty state)" occurs. In other words, when it comes to the "latent certainty state", the probability of hitting the jackpot is simply increased, and on the surface it is the same as the "normal state", so the state where the "high probability mode" is given It becomes difficult for the player to recognize it.

Further, in the present embodiment, apart from the various "big wins", a "small win" is generated when a predetermined result is obtained in the winning lottery. In the small prize state, "short opening" is set as one special prize state, and this is repeated five times (five rounds). However, the lottery mode and winning support mode provided after the end of the small winning state are the original modes before the occurrence of the small winning state. For example, if the lottery mode before the occurrence of the small winning state is the "high probability mode", the "high probability mode" is maintained even after the small winning state ends.

In addition, although it will be described later in detail, in this embodiment, when the game ball wins the upper starting winning opening 33YA and when winning the lower starting winning opening 33YB, it is awarded when winning by lottery. The distribution of the jackpot types is different. When winning the winning lottery triggered by the winning of the game ball to the upper start winning opening 33YA, "16R probability variable jackpot A", "16R probability variable jackpot B", "4R probability variable jackpot A", "4R probability variable jackpot B , ``16R normal jackpot A'', ``16R normal jackpot B'', and ``4R normal jackpot B'', and wins the winning lottery triggered by the winning of the game ball to the lower start prize winning opening 33YB. , it is distributed to one of "16R probability variable jackpot A", "4R probability variable jackpot A", "4R normal jackpot A" and "JUB jackpot". In addition, regarding the "small hit", it is configured to occur only when winning the winning lottery triggered by the winning of the game ball to the lower start winning opening 33YB.

The first and second special display devices 43L and 43R are each composed of two segment display devices and installed below the game board 30 . Each segment display device is provided with eight display segments. Each display segment has an individual light source composed of LEDs, and by controlling the on/off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light only one display segment, and any combination display segment can be illuminated. As a result, predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers) are individually displayed on each segment display device.

Then, when the game ball enters the upper starting prize-winning port 33YA, the first special display device 43L performs a variable display, and when the game ball enters the lower starting prize-winning port 33YB, the second special display device 43R. The variable display is performed at . The display contents of the special display devices 43L and 43R are directly controlled by the main control device 261, which will be described later.

Further, after the variable display is performed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, whether or not the jackpot lottery is won is definitely displayed by the display mode when the variable display is stopped. be. For example, when a game ball wins in the upper starting prize-winning opening 33YA, the corresponding first special display device 43L displays a variable display at high speed, and when a predetermined time elapses, one of the display modes is stopped and displayed (for example, stopped for several seconds )do. Then, when the jackpot lottery is won, numerical values corresponding to various jackpots (see FIG. 86) are displayed when fluctuation stops, and a jackpot state occurs.

As shown in FIG. 86, for example, when "16R probability variable jackpot A" is won, "9-" is stopped and displayed on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, and "50 times/high support mode". When winning the "16R probability variable jackpot B" with "84" is stop-displayed on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R. Further, when the "JUB jackpot" is won, "1.-" is stopped and displayed on the first or second special display devices 43L and 43R, and when the "small win" is won, the first or second 2 "1-" is stopped and displayed on the special display devices 43L and 43R. Here, like the stop mode “1.-” related to the “JUB big win” and the stop mode “1-” related to the “small win”, in order to enhance the production effect of the “JUB big win”, both stop modes It is preferable that the configuration is confusing.

Of course, the mode of stopping the special display devices 43L and 43R corresponding to various wins is not limited to the mode described above. For example, there may be a plurality of stop modes of the first or second special display devices 43L and 43R indicating one winning type, instead of one. For example, when "16R probability variable jackpot A" is won, one of "91", "92", "93", . It may be configured to be

Even when there are a plurality of stop modes of the first or second special display devices 43L and 43R indicating one type of win, a plurality of stop modes related to the "JUB big win" and a plurality of stop modes related to the "small win" It is preferable that a plurality of stop modes be confusing. For example, any one of ``-1.'', ``-2'', ``-3.'', ``-4'', . Any one of "-1", "-2.", "-3", "-4.", . In such a configuration, a pair of specific symbols ("1", "2", "3", . One of them is included in a plurality of stop modes related to "JUB big win" and the other is included in a plurality of stop modes related to "small win", and they are alternately interleaved.

In addition, the configuration may be such that the colors displayed in any or all of the display segments can be changed as appropriate.

Further, when a game ball newly wins the starting winning opening 33YA, 33YB during the variable display of the first or second special display devices 43L, 43R, the variable display for that amount is performed at that time. It is configured to be performed after the end of the variable display. That is, the variable display is put on standby (suspended). The maximum number of times the variable display is suspended is determined for each pachinko machine model. , up to 4 variable displays (a total of 8 variable displays) are reserved. In addition, the number of times of suspension is displayed by the first suspension lamp 46a and the second suspension lamp 46b. In addition, when a game ball newly wins the starting prize-winning openings 33YA and 33YB during the jackpot state, the variable display for that amount is also suspended.

Basically, the variable display triggered by the winning of the upper start winning opening 33YA is memorized in the order in which the corresponding game balls have won in the upper starting winning opening 33YA, and is digested in the order of winning. The variable display triggered by the winning to the 33YB is stored in the order in which the corresponding game balls have entered the lower start winning port 33YB and is completed in the order in which they have won. However, when both the variable display triggered by the winning to the upper starting winning port 33YA and the variable display triggered by winning to the lower starting winning port 33YB are suspended (the first suspension lamp 46a and the second When one or more of the pending lamps 46b are lit), the variable display triggered by the winning to the lower start winning opening 33YB is preferentially extinguished. That is, unless the variable display triggered by the winning to the lower start winning opening 33YB is completely extinguished, the variable display triggered by winning to the upper starting winning opening 33YA is not performed. For example, in a state where one first holding lamp 46a is lit, the game ball wins in the lower starting winning prize port 33YB, and one second holding lamp 46b lights up, the winning to the upper starting winning prize port 33YA The variable display triggered by the winning is postponed, and the variable display triggered by the winning to the lower start winning opening 33YB is performed first. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the variable display triggered by winning the upper start prize-winning port 33YA will be referred to as "first variable display", and the variable display triggered by winning the lower start prize-winning port 33YB will be referred to as "second variable display". ” is also called.

In addition, the through gate 34 is configured so that game balls flowing down the game area can pass one by one. Although the details will be described later, the through gate 34 includes a through gate switch 225 capable of detecting a game ball passing through the through gate 34, and when a game ball is detected by the through gate switch 225, the switch is opened or closed. An open lottery is performed to determine whether or not the accessory 37Y (lower start winning opening 33YB) is to be opened, and the normal symbol display device 41 is configured to perform variable display. Then, when the lottery is won in the open lottery, the opening/closing accessory 37Y is kept open for a specified time.

The variable display device unit 35 includes a normal pattern display device 41 that variably displays when the through gate 34 is passed, and an effect display device 42 that variably displays according to the variable display by the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. and are provided.

Further, in the variable display device unit 35, the variable display performed by the effect display device 42 is a variable specification indicating which of the upper starting winning opening 33YA and the lower starting winning opening 33YB corresponds to winning. A lamp 40 is provided.

The normal symbol display device 41 is configured to be able to light up and display "○" or "X" as a normal symbol. The display is changed at high speed such as "○"→. Then, when the variable display stops at the "O" symbol (winning symbol) for several seconds, the opening/closing accessory 37Y of the lower start winning opening 33YB is opened for a predetermined time. Display contents of the normal symbol display device 41 are directly controlled by a main control device 261 which will be described later.

In addition, when a game ball newly passes through the through gate 34 during the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41, the variable display for that amount is performed after the variable display being performed at that time is completed. It has become. That is, the variable display is put on standby (suspended). The maximum number of times of the variable display to be held is determined for each pachinko machine model, but in this embodiment, it is held up to four times, and the number of times of holding is displayed by the holding lamp 44. there is

The effect display device 42 is composed of a liquid crystal display device, and display contents are controlled by a sub-control device 262 and a display control device 45, which will be described later. That is, in the effect display device 42, based on the command from the main control device 261, the sub-control device 262 performs auxiliary control so as to correspond to the results displayed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. The content to be displayed is determined and displayed by the display control device 45, which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 92, the effect display device 42 is provided with, for example, upper, middle, and lower three pattern display areas. ), and thereafter, the symbols are stopped and displayed in order for each symbol display area (for example, in the order of upper symbol display area→lower symbol display area→middle symbol display area). For example, when the various "probability variable jackpots" or various "normal jackpots" are determined by the main controller 261, the first or second special display devices 43L and 43R display corresponding to the jackpots, and the effect display device. At 42, symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination corresponding to the big win (for example, the symbols stopped and displayed in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas are the same), and the big win state is started. be. Incidentally, in the case of a "JUB big win" or a "small win", the combination of symbols stop-displayed on the effect display device 42 does not correspond to the big win, as will be described later.

Further, when the symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination corresponding to a big hit, as a preliminary step, for example, the same symbols are stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area. The ready-to-win state is the state in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area and the variable display is still performed in the middle symbol display area.

Even if the ready-to-win state occurs, if the jackpot state does not occur, a symbol different from the symbols stop-displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area. Also, in the case of various types of "probability variable jackpots" or various types of "normal jackpots", the double number is stopped and displayed on the effect display device 42 as described above, but in this embodiment, it is stopped and displayed. Depending on the type of symbol, it is impossible to determine the game state ("high probability mode" or not) given after the end of the jackpot.

Also, in the case of a "JUB big win" or a "minor win", a combination of predetermined specific numbers (hereinafter referred to as chance symbols) is stop-displayed instead of double eyes. For example, in this embodiment, "3", "4", and "1" are stop-displayed in the upper, middle, and lower pattern display areas. As a result, when the chance symbols are stopped and displayed, the player cannot distinguish between the "JUB jackpot" which is more advantageous to the player and the "small win" which is not so advantageous. , it is possible to suppress the decline in interest of the player.

Of course, different combinations of specific numbers to be stopped and displayed in the upper/middle/lower pattern display areas may be used depending on whether the "JUB big win" or the "minor win". Also, in the case of "JUB big hit" or "small hit", instead of a combination of predetermined specific numbers, it seems that random combinations of odds are stopped and displayed, just like when they are lost. can be

Further, the performance display device 42 is configured to display the pending number of the variable display on the special display devices 43L and 43R corresponding to the above pending lamps 46a and 46b (see FIG. 92, etc.).

In the present embodiment, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the special display devices 43L, 43R and the holding lamps 46a, 46b are covered by the front frame set 14, making them invisible to the player. . Therefore, the player can grasp the game state, lottery result, etc., solely by the display contents (symbol display, hold display, etc.) of the effect display device 42 .

Of course, the configurations of the special display devices 43L, 43R and the reserve lamps 46L, 46R are not limited to such configurations, and other configurations may be employed. For example, the special display devices 43L and 43R may be configured to be visible. However, the special display devices 43L and 43R are provided in inconspicuous places such as the lower corners of the game area as described above, and the size of the display portion is small, and characters for identification are displayed stopped. relatively short time. Therefore, it is practically impossible to grasp the given game state unless one carefully observes the special display devices 43L and 43R.

The variable specific lamp 40 has an LED with a blue emission color and an LED with a red emission color, and the effect display device 42 performs a variable display triggered by winning the upper start winning opening 33YA. When the variable display triggered by the winning to the lower start winning opening 33YB is performed, the light is emitted in red.

Next, the configuration of the variable display device unit 35 will be described in detail. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the center frame 47 is fixed to the front side of the game board 30, and the frame cover 213 is fixed to the back side of the game board 30, thereby forming the variable display unit 35. It has an integrated configuration.

A rectangular opening 213a (see FIG. 55) is formed in the center of the frame cover 213, and an effect display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device, is detachably attached to the back side thereof. The liquid crystal display section 42a of the effect display device 42 is a known one in which a liquid crystal panel formed by laminating various translucent members is arranged on the front side of a backlight as light emitting means.

The center frame 47 has a frame shape with a substantially circular opening 751 formed in the center thereof, and the liquid crystal display section 42a of the effect display device 42 can be visually recognized through the opening 751 .

Note that the center frame 47 is not composed of a single member. For example, the base member is plated with various decorative members, or a lens member made of transparent resin that transmits light such as an LED. is assembled.

A stage portion 770 is provided on the upper surface of the lower side portion 47b of the center frame 47 along the left-right direction. Gentle undulations are formed on the stage portion 770 along the left-right direction.

A drop hole 774 is formed in the central portion of the rear wall portion 772 of the stage portion 770 so as to open forward and allow the game ball to drop. A communicating passage 775 leading to the drop hole 774 is provided below (inside) the central portion of the stage portion 770 . The other side of the communication path 775 is opened to the front side of the lower side portion 47b of the center frame 47 and serves as a discharge port 776 for discharging the game ball that has fallen into the drop hole 774 onto the game board 30 surface. Incidentally, when the center frame 47 is arranged on the game board 30, as shown in FIG.

A guide groove 778 is formed in the central portion of the stage portion 770 at a position in front of the drop hole 774 and gently sloped downward toward the inner side. As a result, the game ball can drop from the stage portion 770 to the drop hole 774 .

The left side portion 47c of the center frame 47 is formed therein with a ball passage (warp passage) 764 through which game balls pass. An entrance portion 764a of the ball passage 764 opens at the substantially central portion in the vertical direction of the left side portion 47c of the center frame 47, while an exit portion 764b faces the upper surface (stage portion 770) of the lower side portion 47b of the center frame 47. It is open. This ball passage 764 can guide a game ball flowing down on the surface of the game board 30 onto a stage portion 770 within the center frame 47 .

The game ball guided onto the stage portion 770 rolls on the stage portion 770 and then falls from the front onto the surface of the game board 30 or into the drop hole 774 described above. Of these, the game ball that has fallen into the drop hole 774 is guided onto the game board 30 surface via the communication path 775 . A game ball discharged from the discharge port 776 enters the upper start prize winning port 33YA with a relatively high probability.

Also, in the variable display device unit 35 , an upper performance accessory unit 761 and a lower performance accessory unit 762 are arranged between the center frame 47 and the frame cover 213 .

Specifically, the upper performance accessory unit 761 is disposed on the back side of the upper side portion 47a of the center frame 47, and is almost entirely covered by the upper side portion 47a and the like during normal operation (see FIG. 56). Only part of it is visible to the player.

In addition, the lower performance accessory unit 762 is disposed on the back side of the lower side portion 47b of the center frame 47, and in normal operation (see FIG. 56), the lower side portion 47b and the like cover almost the entirety thereof, and partially cover the lower side portion 47b. is visible to the player.

Here, the configuration of the upper production accessory unit 761 and the lower production accessory unit 762 will be described in detail. First, the upper production accessory unit 761 will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

As shown in FIGS. 56 to 58, the upper performance accessory unit 761 is provided on the back side of the upper side portion 47a of the center frame 47. As shown in FIGS.

The upper performance accessory unit 761 includes a unit base portion 810 arranged on the front upper portion of the frame cover 213, an upper movable accessory 811 provided swingably with respect to the unit base portion 810, and the upper movable role. and a swing drive mechanism 812 for swinging the object 811 .

The swing drive mechanism 812 includes a support arm 814 that supports the upper movable accessory 811 and a swing motor 815 that serves as a drive source for driving the support arm 814 .

When the support arm 814 is rotated and displaced based on the drive of the swing motor 815, the upper movable accessory 811 is mostly positioned behind the upper side 47a of the center frame 47 and is difficult for the player to visually recognize. A standby state (see FIG. 56) and an exposed state (see FIG. 58) in which most of it is located on the front side of the display section 42a of the effect display device 42 and is easily visually recognized by the player can be swung and displaced. . A front area of the liquid crystal display section 42a of the effect display device 42 constitutes an effect area (predetermined area) in the present embodiment.

The swinging motor 815 is a stepping motor whose rotation is controlled by an applied drive pulse signal, and by adjusting the drive pulse signal, the rotational displacement amount of the upper movable accessory 811 (support arm 814) can be controlled. . At the same time, by monitoring the number of input drive pulse signals, it is possible to grasp the rotational displacement amount of the upper movable accessory 811 (support arm 814) from the reference position. Although illustration is omitted, the swing drive mechanism 812 is provided with a position detection sensor and the like for detecting the rotation position of the support arm 814 .

Here, the upper movable accessory 811 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 101 to 105. FIG. The upper movable accessory 811 includes a base portion 817 fixed to the tip of the support arm 814 and an upper rotating body 820 rotatably supported on the front side of the base portion 817 . The upper rotating body 820 is a rotating body for presentation, and constitutes a first rotating body as a first rotating means.

The base portion 817 has a substantially circular shape when viewed from the front, and a support shaft portion 818 is formed at the center thereof so as to protrude forward. The support shaft portion 818 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape with a closed front side and an open rear side.

An upper rotating body drive motor 821 is attached and fixed to the back side of the base portion 817 . A pinion gear 821b is attached and fixed to the front end portion of the rotating shaft 821a of the drive motor 821 for the upper rotating body. Then, the driving force of the upper rotor drive motor 821 is transmitted to the upper rotor 820 via the pinion gear 821b.

An annular cover body 822 is attached and fixed to the front portion of the base portion 817 . A circular opening 822 a is formed in the central portion of the cover body 822 .

The upper rotating body 820 mainly consists of a rotating base plate 823 and six movable pieces 825 annularly arranged on the front side thereof.

The rotary base plate 823 has a cylindrical portion 826 extending in the front-rear direction and six extending pieces 827 radially extending from the outer peripheral wall portion of the cylindrical portion 826 toward the outside in the radial direction. The six extending pieces 827 are provided at equal intervals (at intervals of 60°) in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 826 .

The cylindrical portion 826 is fitted onto the support shaft portion 818 of the base portion 817 . As a result, the rotary base plate 823 is rotatably supported on the base portion 817 . Although illustration is omitted, the cylindrical portion 826 or the support shaft portion 818 is provided with restricting means for preventing the rotation base plate 823 (cylindrical portion 826) from falling off from the base portion 817 (support shaft portion 818). ing.

Each extension piece 827 is formed with a slit 829 that penetrates in the front-rear direction and is formed along the radial direction of the rotary base plate 823 . A cylindrical pinion support shaft 830 is formed so as to protrude rearward from the rear surface of each extension piece 827 near the tip.

An annular central gear member 831 is fitted onto the cylindrical portion 826 of the rotary base 823 from behind.

The central gear member 831 is integrally formed with a large-diameter gear portion 831a provided on the front side and a small-diameter gear portion 831b provided on the rear side so as to form steps in the front-rear direction.

A pinion gear 832 is fitted on each of the pinion support shafts 830 and meshes with a large-diameter gear portion 831 a of a central gear member 831 .

Further, an annular holding plate 835 is attached to the back side of the rotary base plate 823 (see FIG. 105). The circular opening 835a of the pressing plate 835 is slightly larger in diameter than the small-diameter gear portion 831b of the central gear member 831 so that the small-diameter gear portion 831b can be inserted therethrough, and has a smaller diameter than the large-diameter gear portion 831a.

Thereby, the holding plate 835 covers the six pinion gears 832 and the large-diameter gear portion 831a from behind, and is fixed to the tip of the pinion support shaft 830 while inserting the small-diameter gear portion 831b. As a result, the central gear member 831 is rotatably held around the cylindrical portion 826 of the rotary base 823 .

The small diameter gear portion 831b of the central gear member 831 is meshed with the pinion gear 821b of the drive motor 821 for the upper rotating body. As a result, the rotation of the upper rotor drive motor 821 is transmitted to the central gear member 831 .

In other words, the pinion gear 821b, the central gear member 831, the pinion gear 832, etc. transmit the power of the upper rotor driving motor 821 to the upper rotor 820 to slide the movable piece 825 and rotate the rotary base 823. A main power transmission mechanism is configured to drive in the following manner.

Furthermore, a second driving gear 841 is attached and fixed to the rear end of the cylindrical portion 826 of the rotary base plate 823 . As shown in FIG. 105, the second drive gear 841 is meshed with the second transmission gear 842 . The second transmission gear 842 is connected to the oil damper 843 . A support member 844 is fitted to the oil damper 843 from behind, and the support member 844 is attached and fixed to the base portion 817 .

As a result, the rotation board 823 is braked so as not to rotate at a low torque of a predetermined level or less. Here, the second driving gear 841, the second transmission gear 842, and the like constitute a regulating power transmission mechanism that transmits the force of the oil damper 843 to the upper rotating body 820 to restrict the operation of the upper rotating body 820. FIG.

The regulating power transmission mechanism is not connected to the main power transmission mechanism, and power is directly transmitted between the upper rotor drive motor 821 and the oil damper 843 without the rotation base plate 823 intervening. is configured so that it is not transmitted.

As can be seen from FIG. 101 and the like, the upper rotating body 820 is formed with a motif of one flower, and each movable piece 825 is formed to imitate one petal.

Each movable piece 825 is made of a translucent transparent resin material. However, on the surface of the general portion of each movable piece 825 (the portion other than the magnifying lens portion 828, which will be described later), fine uneven portions (not shown) are formed. As a result, the general portion of the movable piece 825 diffuses and transmits the light emitted from the display portion (liquid crystal display portion) 42a of the effect display device 42 located behind, and the entire portion uniformly emits surface light. It is difficult to identify the display object (object) displayed on the display unit 42a through the general portion of the movable piece 825. As shown in FIG.

On the other hand, a magnifying lens portion 828 is formed on one movable piece 825 among the six movable pieces 825 . Hereinafter, when distinguishing the movable piece 825 having the magnifying lens portion 828 from the other movable pieces 825, it may be referred to as a "specific movable piece 825A". The movable piece 825 and the magnifying lens portion 828 constitute the translucent portion in this embodiment.

The magnifying lens portion 828 of the specific movable piece 825A can magnify and display an object located behind so that the player can visually recognize it. For example, the player can magnify and visually recognize display objects such as characters and characters displayed on the display section 42 a of the effect display device 42 through the magnifying lens section 828 .

A linearly extending rack portion 838 is integrally formed on the rear surface of the movable piece 825 . The rack portion 838 is inserted into the slit 829 of the extension piece 827 of the rotary board 823 . This allows the movable piece 825 to slide along the radial direction of the rotary substrate 823 (extending direction of the extending piece 827). Although not shown, the rack portion 838 or the slit 829 is provided with restricting means for preventing the movable piece 825 from falling off from the rotary substrate 823 .

The rack portion 838 of the movable piece 825 meshes with the pinion gear 832 on the rear surface of the extension piece 827 . As a result, the movable piece 825 is moved along the slit 829 of the extension piece 827, that is, in the radial direction of the rotary base 823 by transmitting the power of the upper rotor drive motor 821 through the main power transmission mechanism. It becomes possible to slide and displace along.

With such a configuration, the upper rotating body 820 is in a diameter-reduced state in which the movable pieces 825 of the six extending pieces 827 arranged radially are each slid to the innermost side in the radial direction during a normal standby state. (See FIGS. 101 and 102).

In the diameter-reduced state of the upper rotating body 820, the base ends of the six movable pieces 825 are in contact with the outer circumference of the cylindrical portion 826 of the rotary base plate 823. are substantially in contact with the proximal side edges of the adjacent movable pieces 825 .

On the other hand, when a predetermined effect is executed, the upper rotating body 820 expands in diameter by simultaneously displacing the movable pieces 825 of the six radially arranged extending pieces 827 radially outward in the radial direction. (See Figures 103 and 104).

A motor control board (motor driver) 845 is mounted on the rear side of the base portion 817 to receive instructions from the sub-controller 262 and control the upper rotor drive motor 821 .

The upper rotor drive motor 821 is a stepping motor whose rotation is controlled by a drive pulse signal applied via the motor control board 845, and the rotation angle changes according to the number of input pulses. That is, by adjusting the driving pulse signal, the rotational displacement amount and the rotational speed of the upper rotating body 820 can be controlled. At the same time, by monitoring the number of input driving pulse signals, the rotational displacement amount of the upper rotating body 820 from the reference position can be grasped.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 105, a position detection sensor 846 is attached to the front surface of the base portion 817 to detect the rotational position of the upper rotating body 820 (rotary base plate 823). In this embodiment, as the position detection sensor 846, a known photosensor in which a light-emitting element and a light-receiving element are spaced apart and opposed to each other is employed.

Correspondingly, a light shielding piece 847 is formed to protrude from the rear side of the rotary substrate 823 (the second drive gear 841 in this embodiment). By detecting the light shielding piece 847 by the position detection sensor 846, it is recognized that the upper rotating body 820 is at the reference position.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 101, the reference position is the position where the specific movable piece 825A is arranged on the right side in the horizontal direction when the upper rotating body 820 is viewed from the front.

Although not shown, the base part 817 is provided with an upper accessory control board that receives instructions from the sub-control device 262 and performs monitoring control of the position detection sensor 846 and the like.

Under such a configuration, assuming that the upper rotating body drive motor 821 rotates once with 360 pulses of the excitation signal (drive pulse signal), the angle change (angle change per step) based on the excitation signal of 1 pulse is 1. °. That is, since the timer interrupt is set to 2 msec in this embodiment, it takes 720 msec (=2 msec×360 pulses) at the shortest for one rotation of the upper rotor driving motor 821 .

Furthermore, assuming that the gear ratio (gear ratio) between the pinion gear 821b of the upper rotor drive motor 821 and the small diameter gear portion 831b of the central gear member 831 is 1:4, the upper rotor drive motor Under the configuration in which the 821 rotates once with the excitation signal of 360 pulses, the upper rotating body 820 rotates once in 2880 msec (=2 msec×360 pulses×4) at the shortest.

However, the amount of change in angle based on the excitation signal of one pulse, the gear ratio between the pinion gear 821b and the small diameter gear portion 831b, etc. are not limited to the values exemplified above, and different configurations may be adopted.

As shown in FIG. 103 and the like, when the rotation of the upper rotor 820 is stopped, the six movable pieces 825 are set at six positions in the rotation direction of the upper rotor 820 (clockwise direction in this embodiment). Predetermined stop positions EA1 to EA6 (specifically, the first stop position EA1 located on the right side of the upper rotating body 820, the second stop position EA2 located on the diagonally lower right side, the third stop position EA2 located on the diagonally lower left side) It is configured to stop at any one of a stop position EA3, a fourth stop position EA4 located on the left side, a fifth stop position EA5 located diagonally above the left, or a sixth stop position EA6 located diagonally above the right. ing.

Here, the operation mode of the upper rotating body 820 configured as described above will be described. As shown in FIGS. 101, 102, etc., during normal times when the character object presentation is not performed, the six movable pieces 825 are positioned at the radially inner slide limit positions of the upper rotor 820, respectively. That is, the upper rotating body 820 is in a state of contracting the diameter the most.

In this state, when the upper rotor drive motor 821 is rotated forward, the central gear member 831 first starts to rotate clockwise in front view via the pinion gear 821b.

At the beginning of the rotation, the braking force of the oil damper 843 is applied to the rotary base 823 via the regulating power transmission mechanism, so the rotary base 823 remains stationary and does not move.

On the other hand, when the central gear member 831 rotates clockwise in a front view, the six pinion gears 832 meshed with the large-diameter gear portion 831a rotate. Power is transmitted to the six movable pieces 825 via the rack portion 838 meshed with each of the pinion gears 832, and the six movable pieces 825 move along the slits 829 of the extension pieces 827. , radially slidably displaced toward the radially outer side of the upper rotating body 820 . That is, the upper rotating body 820 expands in diameter.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 103, 104, etc., when the six movable pieces 825 each reach the radial outer slide limit position of the upper rotor 820 and the upper rotor 820 expands to the maximum diameter, the rotating base plate Rotational power is transmitted to 823 . Then, when the torque exceeds a predetermined level, the rotary board 823 starts to rotate clockwise when viewed from the front.

After that, when the upper rotor drive motor 821 stops, the upper rotor 820 stops, and the six movable pieces 825 stop at any of the stop positions EA1 to EA6.

In addition, when the performance of the character is finished and the normal operation is to be performed, the upper rotating body drive motor 821 is first rotated in the reverse direction, and the central gear member 831 is rotated counterclockwise in front view via the pinion gear 821b. Let

Even in this case, at the beginning of the rotation of the central gear member 831, the braking force of the oil damper 843 is applied to the rotary base 823 via the regulating power transmission mechanism, so that the rotary base 823 stops. It remains stationary, and only the movable piece 825 operates.

As a result, the six pinion gears 832 meshed with the large-diameter gear portion 831a of the central gear member 831 rotate. Power is transmitted to the six movable pieces 825 via the rack portion 838 meshed with each of the pinion gears 832, and the six movable pieces 825 move along the slits 829 of the extension pieces 827. , the upper rotating body 820 is slid radially inward, and the diameter of the upper rotating body 820 is reduced.

After that, when the six movable pieces 825 slide to the radially inner slide limit position of the upper rotor 820, the upper rotor drive motor 821 is stopped. As a result, the upper rotating body 820 returns to its normal diameter-reduced state.

Next, the lower production accessory unit 762 will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIGS. 56 to 58, the lower performance accessory unit 762 is provided on the back side of the lower side portion 47b of the center frame 47. As shown in FIGS.

The lower performance accessory unit 762 includes a unit base portion 850 arranged to cover the front lower portion of the frame cover 213, and a lower movable accessory 851 provided vertically movable on the back side of the unit base portion 850. , and a vertical driving mechanism 852 for vertically moving the lower movable accessory 851 .

The lower movable accessory 851 includes a slide base portion 853 that is displaceable along the vertical direction, a pair of left and right strut portions 854A and 854B projecting upward from the slide base portion 853, and the strut portions. Lower rotating body drive motors 855A and 855B (see FIG. 107) provided at the upper ends of the drive motors 854A and 854B, respectively; It has lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B and motor control boards (motor drivers) 857A and 857B (see FIG. 107) provided on the rear side of the driving motors 855A and 855B. The lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B are rotating bodies for presentation, respectively, and constitute a second rotating body as second rotating means.

As shown in FIG. 106, a left lower rotating body 856A (hereinafter referred to as a "left lower rotating body 856A") is provided with a first information writing portion 856Aa circular in front view at one longitudinal end thereof. A second information writing portion 856Ab having a circular shape when viewed from the front is provided on the other end in the longitudinal direction. The information writing portions 856Aa and 856Ab constitute the operated portion in this embodiment.

Both of the information writing portions 856Aa and 856Ab are made of a translucent material, and can transmit light emitted from the display portion (liquid crystal display portion) 42a of the effect display device 42 located behind with a predetermined transmittance. is configured to

In the first information writing portion 856Aa of the present embodiment, “SMALL” is written in clear characters against a background forming portion of a relatively high light transmittance and colorful and transparent (for example, a rainbow pattern) (hereinafter referred to as “SMALL”). Such a description may be referred to as “strong/SMALL” in some cases.) In the second information description portion 856Ab, “SMALL” is described in dull characters against a dark translucent background component having a relatively low light transmittance. (This description may be hereinafter referred to as “weak/SMALL”).

On the other hand, the general portion of the lower left rotating body 856A, excluding both information writing portions 856Aa and 856Ab, is covered with a material that does not have translucency, and is a light shield that does not transmit the light emitted from the display portion 42a of the effect display device 42. Department.

Similarly to the left lower rotating body 856A, the right lower rotating body 856B (hereinafter referred to as the "lower right rotating body 856B") has a circular shape in front view at one end in the longitudinal direction, as shown in FIG. A first information writing portion 856Ba is provided, and a second information writing portion 856Bb having a circular shape when viewed from the front is provided on the other end in the longitudinal direction. The information writing portions 856Ba and 856Bb constitute the operated portion in this embodiment.

Similar to both information writing portions 856Aa and 856Ab related to the lower left rotating body 856A, both information writing portions 856Ba and 856Bb related to the lower right rotating body 856B are made of a material having translucency, and are positioned behind. It is configured to transmit light emitted from a display section (liquid crystal display section) 42a of the display device 42 with a predetermined transmittance.

In the first information writing portion 856Ba of the present embodiment, “BIG” is written in clear letters against a background constituting portion of a relatively high light transmittance and colorful and transparent (for example, a rainbow pattern) (hereinafter referred to as “BIG”). Such a description may be referred to as “strong/BIG” in some cases.) In the second information description portion 856Bb, “BIG” is described in dull characters against a dark translucent background component having a relatively low light transmittance. (Such description may be referred to as “weak/BIG” hereinafter).

On the other hand, the general portion of the lower right rotator 856B, excluding the two information writing portions 856Ba and 856Bb, is covered with a non-translucent material so that the light emitted from the display portion 42a of the effect display device 42 does not pass through. It is a light shielding part.

The lower rotating body drive motors 855A and 855B are stepping motors whose rotation is controlled by drive pulse signals applied thereto, and the amounts of rotation of the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B are controlled by adjusting the drive pulse signals. can. At the same time, by monitoring the number of input drive pulse signals, the amount of rotational displacement of the lower rotors 856A, 856B from the reference position can be grasped.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 107, position detection sensors 858A and 858B for detecting the rotational positions of the lower rotors 856A and 856B are attached to the lower surfaces of the lower rotor drive motors 855A and 855B. . In this embodiment, as the position detection sensors 858A and 858B, known photosensors in which a light-emitting element and a light-receiving element are spaced apart and opposed to each other are employed.

Correspondingly, light shielding pieces 859A and 859B are formed protruding from the rear side (near the side edges) of the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B. When the light shielding pieces 859A and 859B are detected by the position detection sensors 858A and 858B, it is recognized that the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B are at the reference positions.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 106, the longitudinal direction of the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B is along the vertical direction, and the first information writing portions 856Aa and 856Ba are higher than the second information writing portions 856Ab and 856Bb. is the reference position.

The vertical driving mechanism 852 is composed of a vertical driving motor 860 provided on the unit base portion 850 and a rack portion 861 provided on the right edge portion of the slide base portion 853 . A pinion gear 860a attached and fixed to the rotating shaft of the vertical driving motor 860 is meshed with the rack portion 861 of the slide base portion 853. As shown in FIG.

Although not shown, the unit base portion 850 is formed with a guide groove portion extending in the vertical direction, and the slide base portion 853 is formed with a ridge portion to be assembled with the guide groove portion. This restricts positional deviation in the left-right direction when the slide base portion 853 moves up and down. That is, the guide groove portion and the ridge portion constitute guide means for guiding the lower movable accessory 851 (lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B).

With such a configuration, the vertical drive motor 860 rotates, so that the lower movable accessory 851 can be slidably displaced in the vertical direction.

Normally, most of the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B of the lower movable accessory 851 are positioned at the standby position behind the lower side 47b of the center frame 47, and are in a standby state (see FIG. 56) that is difficult for the player to visually recognize. there is Then, the vertical drive motor 860 rotates forward, and the slide base portion 853 slides upward, so that the lower movable accessory 851 moves the entire lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B into the effect display device 42. It is positioned on the front side of the display section 42a and becomes an exposed state (see FIG. 58) that is easily visually recognized by the player.

Further, from this state, the vertical drive motor 860 rotates in the reverse direction, and the slide base portion 853 slides downward, whereby the lower movable accessory 851 returns to the normal standby state.

The vertical drive motor 860 is a stepping motor whose rotation is controlled by an applied drive pulse signal. By adjusting the drive pulse signal, the lower movable accessory 851 (lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B) can be moved vertically. You can control the amount. At the same time, by monitoring the number of input drive pulse signals, it is possible to grasp the amount of vertical displacement of the lower movable accessory 851 from the reference position.

More specifically, a position detection sensor 863 for detecting the vertical position of the lower movable accessory 851 is attached to the unit base portion 850 . In this embodiment, as the position detection sensor 863, a known photosensor in which a light-emitting element and a light-receiving element are spaced apart and opposed to each other is employed.

Correspondingly, the slide base portion 853 is formed with a light shielding piece 864 projecting from the lower end portion of the rack portion 861 . By detecting the light shielding piece 864 by the position detection sensor 863, it is grasped that the lower movable accessory 851 (slide base portion 853) is at the reference position. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, the position where the lower movable accessory 851 is in the standby state is the reference position (standby position).

Here, although illustration is omitted, it is also possible to provide a movement restricting means such as a stopper capable of restricting movement of the lower movable accessory 851 (lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B) beyond a predetermined amount.

Although not shown, the unit base portion 850 includes a lower accessory control board that receives instructions from the sub-control device 262 and performs drive control of the vertical drive motor 860 and monitoring control of the position detection sensor 863. are arranged.

With this configuration, in the present embodiment, the positional relationship between the upper rotating body 820 and the lower left rotating body 856A or the lower right rotating body 856B is maintained while the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B are rotating or stopped. However, a first positional relationship (non-adjacent state) in which at least a portion of the upper rotating body 820 and at least a portion of the lower left rotating body 856A or the lower right rotating body 856B do not overlap, and at least a portion of the upper rotating body 820 and the lower left It is configured to change to a second positional relationship (proximity state) in which at least a portion of the rotating body 856A or the lower right rotating body 856B overlaps. As will be described later, when the predetermined condition is satisfied (when the high support mode continues), the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B are in a second positional relationship (closer state) than when the predetermined condition is not satisfied. It is configured so that the ratio of

Specifically, when the rotation of the lower left rotating body 856A is stopped, the first information writing portion 856Aa (strong/SMALL) and the second information writing portion 856Ab (weak/SMALL) indicate the rotation direction of the lower left rotating body 856A (this embodiment (Specifically, as shown in FIG. 106, the first stop position EB1 is located above the left lower rotating body 856A, and the first stop position EB1 is located on the right side of the lower left rotating body 856A. 2nd stop position EB2 located on the lower side, 3rd stop position EB3 located on the lower side, or 4th stop position EB4 located on the left side.

Then, the first information writing portion 856Aa (strong/SMALL) or the second information writing portion 856Ab (weak/SMALL) stops at the first stop position EB1, and the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotating body 820 stops at the fourth stop. When it stops at the position EA4, the first information writing portion 856Aa (strong/SMALL) or the second information writing portion 856Ab ( Weak/SMALL) is enlarged and displayed so that the player can see it (see FIGS. 110 and 111).

Such a relative positional relationship between the upper rotating body 820 and the lower left rotating body 856A corresponds to the first second positional relationship in this embodiment. In addition, the aspect in which the magnifying lens portion 828 enlarges and displays the first information writing portion 856Aa (strong/SMALL) or the second information writing portion 856Ab (weak/SMALL) corresponds to the first aspect of the present embodiment, and is rotated upward. The operation mode of the upper rotating body 820 that stops the specific movable piece 825A of the body 820 at the fourth stop position EA4 corresponds to the first operation mode in this embodiment.

Further, when the right lower rotating body 856B stops rotating, the first information writing portion 856Ba (strong/BIG) and the second information writing portion 856Bb (weak/BIG) indicate the rotation direction of the right lower rotating body 856B (this embodiment Four predetermined stop positions EC1 to EC4 (counterclockwise direction in the form) (specifically, as shown in FIG. 106, the first stop position EC1 located above the lower right rotating body 856B, the left side , the third stop position EC3 located on the lower side, or the fourth stop position EC4 located on the right side.

Then, the first information writing portion 856Ba (strong/BIG) or the second information writing portion 856Bb (weak/BIG) stops at the first stop position EC1, and the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotating body 820 stops at the first stop. When it stops at the position EA1, the first information writing portion 856Ba (strong/BIG) or the second information writing portion 856Bb ( Weak/BIG) is enlarged and displayed so that the player can see it (see FIGS. 112 and 113).

Such a relative positional relationship between the upper rotating body 820 and the lower right rotating body 856B corresponds to a second second positional relationship in this embodiment. Further, the aspect in which the magnifying lens portion 828 enlarges and displays the first information writing portion 856Ba (strong/BIG) or the second information writing portion 856Bb (weak/BIG) corresponds to the second aspect of the present embodiment. The operation mode of the upper rotating body 820 that stops the specific movable piece 825A of the body 820 at the first stop position EA1 corresponds to the second operation mode in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, due to various table configurations, the first information writing portion 856Aa (strong/SMALL) or the second information writing portion 856Ab (weak/SMALL) stops at the first stop position EB1, and the upper rotating body When the specific movable piece 825A of 820 stops at the fourth stop position EA4, that is, through the magnifying lens portion 828 of the specific movable piece 825A, the first information writing portion 856Aa stops at the first stop position EB1 (strong/SMALL). Alternatively, the first information description portion 856Ba (strong/BIG) or the second information description portion 856Bb (weak/BIG) is at the first stop position EC1 than when the second information description portion 856Ab (weak/SMALL) is enlarged and displayed. , and the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotating body 820 stops at the first stop position EA1, that is, when the specific movable piece 825A stops at the first stop position EC1 via the magnifying lens portion 828 of the specific movable piece 825A. When the information description portion 856Ba (strong/BIG) or the second information description portion 856Bb (weak/BIG) is enlarged and displayed, as will be described later, a predetermined advantage advantageous to the player, such as continuation of the high support mode, is displayed. It is configured so that the ratio of being in the state increases. Furthermore, the second advantageous state (high support mode) more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state (high support mode “+10 times” continuation) advantageous to the player. It is configured so that the ratio of “continue until next time”) increases.

Next, the rear configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 54, 55 and the like. On the back of the pachinko machine 10, various control boards are arranged vertically and horizontally, and some of them are arranged so as to be overlapped in the front and back, and a game ball supply device (payout mechanism) for supplying game balls. and a resin protective cover, etc. are attached. Since the dispensing mechanism and the protective cover are integrated as one unit, and the resin portion is generally called the back pack, the unit is called "back pack unit 203" here.

First, the rear configuration of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. 55 and the like. As described above, the resin frame cover 213 covering the center frame 47 from behind is provided on the rear side of the variable display device unit 35 (see FIG. 53) disposed corresponding to the through hole in the center of the game board 30. It protrudes backward. In addition, on the rear side of the frame cover 213, the effect display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device facing forward from the opening of the frame cover 213, the display control device 45, and the sub-control device 262 are detachably stacked in the front-rear direction. installed.

The performance display device 42 is housed in a storage box (reference numerals omitted) having an opening for exposing the display portion (liquid crystal screen) of the performance display device 42 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and is attached to the frame cover 213. It is fixed on the back side. The display control device 45 is housed in a substrate box 45a and fixed to the back side of the effect display device 42 (storage box). The sub-controller 262 is accommodated in a substrate box 262a and fixed to the rear side of the display control device 45 (substrate box 45a). The board boxes 45a and 262a are made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the inside can be visually recognized. An LED control board or the like for driving the LED or the like built in the center frame 47 is arranged inside the frame cover 213 .

Below the frame cover 213, a back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 so as to cover the general winning port 31, the variable winning device 32, the start winning ports 33YA, 33YB and the like from behind. The back frame set 215 is provided with a ball recovery mechanism for recovering game balls that have moved from the front side to the back side of the game board 30 through different paths such as the above-mentioned various prize winning ports and the out port 36 (not shown). . The game balls collected by this ball collecting mechanism are guided to a discharge passage portion 217 which will be described later, and discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 from a discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217 .

Also, although not shown, the back frame set 215 is provided with a first board relay board that is electrically connected to the general winning switch 221, the count switch 223, and the through gate switch 225 via cable connectors. . This first board relay board relays the general winning switch 221 and the like and the main controller 261, and is electrically connected to the main controller 261 via a cable connector.

On the other hand, the starting winning switches 224A and 224B for detecting winning to the starting winning ports 33YA and 33YB are directly connected to the main controller 261 via connector cables without passing through the relay board.

The detection results detected by various winning detection switches are taken into the main controller 261 . Then, a payout command (the number of game balls to be paid out) according to the winning situation of each time is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the payout control device 311, and based on the output signal from the payout control device 311, a predetermined number of game balls is sent. is paid out (except when detected by the through gate switch 225).
Also, in this embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the main controller 261 . More specifically, a substrate box 263 in which a main controller 261 is mounted is rotatably pivoted to the back frame set 215 and can be opened rearward.

The main controller 261 is housed in a substrate box 263 made of transparent resin material or the like. The board box 263 includes a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and these box base and box cover are connected by a sealing member. The board box 263 connected by the sealing member is configured so that it cannot be opened unless a predetermined trace is left. As a result, it is possible to easily discover that the board box 263 has been illegally opened.

Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in FIG. 54, the back pack unit 203 is formed by integrating a resin-molded back pack 351 and a game ball payout mechanism 352 . The back pack unit 203 is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the left side (the right side in FIG. 54) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened rearward about the opening/closing axis extending along the vertical direction. ing. In addition, an external relay terminal plate 240 is provided on the upper left portion of the back pack unit 203 (upper right portion in FIG. 54).

The external relay terminal board 240 is for relaying transmission of various information to a game hall computer or the like, and is provided with a plurality of external connection terminals. For the sake of convenience, no reference numerals are attached, but for example, terminals for outputting information about the current game state (jackpot state, high probability mode, etc.), front frame set 14 detected by open detection switches 91 and 92 described later, and inner A terminal for outputting information about the opening of the frame 12, a terminal for outputting information about various error states such as winning error, lower tray full error, no ball error, payout error, and prizes paid out from the payout control device 311 A terminal for outputting information about the number of balls is provided.

However, in the present embodiment, a terminal for outputting information about the "small win" is not provided, and the "small win" occurrence information is not output. In this embodiment, during the "high support mode", "small win" is likely to occur relatively frequently, so every time a "small win" occurs, the occurrence information should not always be output. , can lead to a significant increase in the output signal. Therefore, when such a problem is relatively unlikely to occur, for example, during the "low support mode", it may be configured to output the occurrence information of the "small win".

In addition, the output of the occurrence information of the "JUB jackpot" is, for example, after five "short openings" related to the "JUB jackpot" are completed, that is, after the situation in which it is impossible to distinguish from the case of the "small hit" is resolved. At the timing of outputting the opening command (jackpot notification effect), etc., it is preferable to output the "JUB jackpot" when the occurrence of the "JUB jackpot" is confirmed. In a situation where it is not yet possible to distinguish from the case of "small win", if only the occurrence information of "JUB big win" is output first, the information display device etc. installed on the island facility of the hall corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 , the player may grasp the occurrence of the "JUB jackpot" in advance, and the effect of the "JUB jackpot" may be diminished.

The back pack 351 is integrally formed of, for example, ABS resin, and has a protective cover portion 354 that protrudes rearward from the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 354 has a shape in which left and right side surfaces and an upper surface are closed and only a lower surface is opened, and has a size sufficient to cover at least the frame cover 213 . However, in this embodiment, the protective cover portion 354 is configured to cover the upper portion and the right portion (the left portion in FIG. 54) of the board box 263 as well. As a result, in the closed state of the back pack unit 203, the sealing member provided on the right side of the board box 263 and the terminal section (board side connector) provided along the upper edge of the main controller 261 are covered. It will happen.

The dispensing mechanism section 352 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover section 354 . Namely, above the protective cover portion 354, a tank 355 which opens upward is provided, and the tank 355 is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall. Below the tank 355, for example, a tank rail 356 having two rows of ball passages for causing game balls to flow sideways and gently sloping toward the downstream side is connected. A case rail 357 for vertically flowing down is connected. A payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 357, and payout of the required number of game balls is appropriately performed by a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor. The game balls paid out from the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper tray 19 and the like.

In the payout mechanism section 352, a payout relay board 381 for relaying a payout command signal from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358 is installed, and a power switch board 382 for taking in the main power supply from the outside is installed. there is The power switch board 382 is supplied with a main power supply of, for example, 24 V AC via a voltage converter, and is turned on or off by a switching operation of the power switch 382a.

Below the back pack unit 203 (board box 263), a bottom frame set 251 that is pivotally supported by the left side (the right side in FIG. 54) of the inner frame 12 and that can be opened rearward is provided. As shown in FIG. 55, the lower frame set 251 is formed with a discharge passage portion 217 serving as a backward guide means into which the game balls collected by the ball collection mechanism described above flow in, and the most downstream portion of the discharge passage portion 217. A discharge chute (not shown) for discharging game balls to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is formed in the . The game ball is a rotating body flowing down the game area. The game ball rotates and flows down while contacting and being affected by the nail 49, the pinwheel 57, etc. in the game area. The game balls that have won the prize-winning openings such as the general prize-winning opening 31 are gathered through the ball recovery mechanism of the back frame set 215 and discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217 . Incidentally, the out port 36 is similarly connected to the discharge passage portion 217, and the game balls that do not win in any of the prize winning ports are also discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute. In this embodiment, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are configured as separate bodies and can be opened and closed independently, but the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are integrally formed. It is also possible to

Also, as shown in FIG. 54, on the back side of the lower frame set 251, a payout control device 311, a firing control device 312, a power supply device 313, and a card unit connection board 314 as payout control means are stacked in front and behind. is detachably attached.

The firing control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are housed in a board box 313 a and fixed to the back side of the lower frame set 251 . For the sake of convenience, the launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are described as independent control devices, but they are actually configured by one substrate (printed circuit board).

Also, the payout control device 311 is housed in the board box 311a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (the firing control device 312 and the power supply device 313). The board box 311a housing the payout control device 311 is provided with a sealing member in the same manner as the board box 263 housing the above-described main control device 261 so that a trace of the opening of the board box 311a remains. It's becoming

In addition, the card unit connection board 314 is housed in a board box 314a and fixed to the rear side of the board box 313a (the firing control device 312 and the power supply device 313).

The board boxes 311a, 313a, and 314a are made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the inside can be visually recognized.

Also, the payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 321 projecting outward from the substrate box 311a. For example, when the state recovery switch 321 is pressed when a payout error such as a ball clogging occurs in the payout motor, the payout motor is rotated forward or reverse to clear the ball jam (return to normal state).

Further, the power supply device 313 is provided with a RAM erase switch 323 projecting outward from the board box 313a. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, and even in the event of a power failure, it can retain the state at the time of the power failure, and can be restored to the state at the time of the power failure when recovering from the power failure (recovery of power). can. Therefore, when the power is turned off in a normal procedure (for example, when the game hall is closed), the state before the power is turned off is stored. to put in.

Further, as shown in FIG. 55, a locking device 600 is provided on the rear side of the right side portion of the inner frame 12 . The locking device 600 is provided with a cylinder lock 600a (see FIG. 50, etc.) exposed on the front side of the front frame set 14. A key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 600a and turned to one side to open the lock. The frame 12 can be unlocked, and the front frame set 14 can be unlocked by rotating it in the other direction. In this embodiment, inner frame 12 is locked to outer frame 11 and front frame set 14 is locked to inner frame 12 .

As described above, the right-side frame-constituting portion 11d of the outer frame 11 is formed with the extending wall portion 83 that covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the rear side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 54). reference). As a result, it becomes difficult to insert a wire or the like from the back side of the outer frame 11 and operate the locking device 600 with the wire or the like. As a result, the defense performance can be improved. Furthermore, the extending wall portion 83 is configured to cover the right end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 54) of the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 from the back side, and in the closed state of the inner frame 12, The rear pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 cannot be opened.

In addition, in the present embodiment, various conductive members made of a conductive metal material, such as the reinforcing frame of the front frame set 14, the locking device 600, the rail-constituting portions 51 and 52, the left and right frame-constituting portions 11c and 11d, are used. First, various conductive members such as the tank 355, the tank rail 356, and the case rail 357, which are made of a conductive resin material or the like, are electrically connected to a predetermined ground terminal (not shown). Generally, game balls are made of a metal material, the surface of which is polished or plated, and has a luster that reflects light as well as electrical conductivity. Therefore, when the game ball comes into contact with the various conductive members, the static electricity charged on the game ball can be released.

Further, as shown in FIG. 53, a front frame open detection switch 91 for detecting the opening of the front frame set 14 is provided at the lower right portion of the front side of the inner frame 12 (the right side of the firing device 60), and FIG. 54, an inner frame open detection switch 92 for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12 is provided at the lower right portion of the back side of the inner frame 12 (lower left in FIG. 54). The front frame open detection switch 91 and the inner frame open detection switch 92 each have a detection part that can appear and disappear with respect to the switch body, and the front frame open detection switch 91 is provided so that the detection part faces forward, The inner frame open detection switch 92 is provided so that the detection portion faces rearward. When the detector is in a state of protruding from the switch body, an ON signal is output to the main controller 261, and when the detector is pushed toward the switch body and retracted into the switch body, an OFF signal is output. It is configured to output to the main controller 261 . That is, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the detection part of the front frame open detection switch 91 is pressed by the back surface of the front frame set 14 and is turned off. It turns on. Similarly, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the inner frame open detection switch 92 is turned off by pressing the pressing portion 86 integrally formed with the receiving portion 85 of the outer frame 11. When the inner frame 12 is opened, the switch 92 is turned off. The part returns to the protruding state and is turned on.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 59 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The main controller 261 (main substrate) is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The CPU 501 includes a ROM 502 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 501, and a RAM 503 that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 502. Also, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. However, the CPU, ROM, and RAM may not be integrated into one chip, but may be integrated into chips for each function.

The RAM 503 includes a stack area that stores the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 501 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 501, and a work area (work area) that stores various flags, counters, I/O values, and the like. ) and a backup area 503a.

The RAM 503 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. All data stored in the

The backup area 503a is designed to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power cut when the power is turned off when the power is turned off due to a power cut or the like. (similarly)) and the values of each register, I/O, etc. are stored. Writing to the backup area 503a is executed by the main processing when the power is turned off, and conversely, each value written to the backup area 503a is restored when the power is turned on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation; the same applies hereinafter). is executed in The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 is configured to receive a power failure signal SK1 output from a power failure monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, when the power supply is interrupted due to a power failure or the like. Upon occurrence, power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing) is immediately executed.

If at least the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a are backed up, it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

An input/output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 containing the ROM 502 and RAM 503 via a bus line 504 including an address bus, a data bus, and the like. Connected to the input/output port 505 are a RAM erasing switch circuit 543, payout control device 311, sub-control device 262, first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, normal symbol display device 41, etc., which will be described later. With this configuration, the special display devices 43L, 43R and the normal symbol display device 41 are directly controlled by the main control device 261. FIG. On the other hand, the effect display device 42 as display means is controlled via the sub-control device 262 . The sub control device 262 constitutes light emission control means in this embodiment.

In addition, although illustration of various relay boards and the like is omitted for convenience, the input/output port 505 includes various detection switches such as the general winning switch 221, the count switch 223, the start winning unit switches 224A and 224B, the through gate switch 225, Various electric parts such as various substrates are connected. In other words, the main controller 261 is provided with a plurality of terminal portions (board-side connectors) for connecting connectors of various cable connectors.

The sub-control device 262 (sub-control board) includes a CPU 551 that is an arithmetic device, a ROM 552 that stores various control programs and fixed value data that are executed by the CPU 551, and various control programs that are stored in the ROM 552. It has a RAM 553 which is a memory for temporarily storing data, etc., an input/output port 554, a bus line 555, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit (not shown). The RAM 553 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when various programs are executed by the CPU 551 .

The input/output port 554 is connected to the CPU 551 , the ROM 552 and the RAM 553 via a bus line 555 and also to the display control device 45 . Furthermore, the input/output port 554 is connected with the speaker SP, the effect button 125, the effect accessory units 761 and 762, various illumination parts and the lamps 102 and 104. FIG.

The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 causes the display control device 45 to execute display control based on commands (for example, variation pattern commands) transmitted from the main control device 261, for example, and causes the effect display device 42 to display. As described above, in this embodiment, the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R controlled by the main control device 261 are adapted to display whether or not there is a big hit. In the performance display device 42 controlled by , a display is performed in accordance with the display of the special display devices 43L and 43R. In addition, the sub-control device 262 performs drive control of the upper production accessory unit 761 and the lower production accessory unit 762 .

The payout control device 311 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 358 . A CPU 511, which is an arithmetic device, includes a ROM 512 storing control programs executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 513 used as a work memory and the like.

Similar to the RAM 503 of the main controller 261, the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 includes a stack area for storing the contents of the internal register of the CPU 511 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 511, various flags and counters, It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored, and a backup area 513a.

The RAM 513 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 313 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. data is backed up. If at least the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a are backed up, it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

Backup area 513a, when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power cut when the power is turned on again, the stack pointer at the time of power cut, each register, This is an area for storing values such as I/O. Writing to the backup area 513a is executed by the main process when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the backup area 513a is executed by the main process when the power is turned on. As with the CPU 501 of the main controller 261, the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SK1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 when the power supply is interrupted due to a power failure or the like. When input to the CPU 511, NMI interrupt processing is immediately executed as power failure processing.

In the work area, a payout permission flag set to allow the payout of prize balls by the payout control device 311, a command reception flag set when a command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received, and a main control device 261 A command buffer is provided in which commands sent from are stored.

The payout permission flag is a flag for setting the payout permission of prize balls, and is turned on when a specific command permitting the payout of prize balls is transmitted from the main controller 261 and the specific command is received. or when it returns to the state before power-off. In this embodiment, the specific commands are a payout initialization command that instructs the initialization process of the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, a prize ball command that instructs the payout of prize balls, and a There are three payout return commands sent in the case.

The command reception flag is a flag for confirming whether or not the payout control device 311 has received a command, and is turned on when any command is received. It is turned off when returning to the previous state, and is turned off when the received command is determined by the command determination process.

The command buffer consists of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main controller 261 .

An input/output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 containing the ROM 512 and RAM 513 via a bus line 514 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 515 is connected to the RAM erasing switch circuit 543, the main controller 261, the firing controller 312, the dispensing device 358, and the like.

The card unit connection board 314 includes a ball rental operation unit (ball rental button 121 and return button 122) on the front of the pachinko machine 10, and a card unit (ball rental unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like. and are electrically connected to each other, take in the command of the player's ball lending operation, and output it to the card unit. Note that the card unit connection board 314 may be omitted in a cash machine in which game balls are directly lent to the upper tray 19 from a ball lending device or the like without going through the card unit.

The shooting control device 312 permits or prohibits shooting of game balls by the shooting device 60, and the shooting device 60 is allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, a firing permission signal is output from the payout control device 311, a sensor signal detects that the player is touching the handle 18, and a firing stop switch for stopping firing is operated. On the condition that the shooting device 60 is not set, the shooting device 60 is driven, and the game ball is shot with an intensity corresponding to the amount of operation of the handle 18.例文帳に追加As a result, the player can change the amount of movement and motion mode of the game ball guided to the game area.

The display control device 45 follows the instruction from the sub-control device 262 and executes the variable display of the decorative symbols on the effect display device 42 . The display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, a video display processor (VDP) 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, and bus lines 530, 531. and An input/output port 554 of the sub-controller 262 is connected to the input port 527 . Also, the CPU 521 , program ROM 522 , work RAM 523 and VDP 526 are connected to the input port 527 via the bus line 530 . An output port 529 is connected to the VDP 526 via a bus line 531, and the effect display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device, is connected to the output port 529. FIG.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the display command transmitted from the sub-control device 262 via the input port 527, analyzes the received command or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received command, and controls the VDP 526. (specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 526). Thereby, display control in the effect display device 42 is performed.

A program ROM 522 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 521, and a work RAM 523 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various programs are executed by the CPU 521. is.

The video RAM 524 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the effect display device 42. By rewriting the contents of the video RAM 524, the display contents of the effect display device 42 are changed. The character ROM 525 is a memory for storing character data such as patterns displayed on the effect display device 42 .

The VDP 526 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an LCD driver (liquid crystal driving circuit) incorporated in the effect display device 42 . Since the VDP 526 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 526 adjusts the timing of each of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524, etc., and intervenes in the reading and writing of data.

In addition, the power supply device 313 includes a power supply unit 541 that supplies power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM deletion switch circuit 543 that is connected to the RAM deletion switch 323. and

The power supply unit 541 supplies necessary operating power to each of the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 541 takes in an AC 24V power supply supplied from the outside, and generates +12V power supply for driving various switches and motors, +5V power supply for logic, backup power supply for RAM backup, etc. These +12V power supply, +5V power supply and backup power supply are supplied to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like. An operating power source (+12V power source, +5V power source, etc.) is supplied to the launch control device 312 via the payout control device 311 . Similarly, various switches, motors, and the like are supplied with operating power through the control device to which they are connected.

The power failure monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power failure signal SK1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 and the CPU 511 of the payout controller 311 when the power is shut off due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 542 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and determines that a power failure (power failure) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. A power failure signal SK1 is output to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. By the output of this power failure signal SK1, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 recognize the occurrence of power failure and execute power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing).

Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 541 normally outputs 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the power failure processing. configured to maintain value. Therefore, the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311 can normally execute and complete the power failure process.

The RAM erase switch circuit 543 is a circuit that takes in the switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323 and clears the backup data of the RAM 503 of the main controller 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout controller 311 according to the state of the switch 323 . When the RAM erasing switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erasing switch circuit 543 outputs a RAM erasing signal SK2 to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the RAM erasing switch 323 is pressed (including power-on due to power failure cancellation), the data in the RAMs 503 and 513 of the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311 are cleared. be.

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

In this embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 performs lottery using various counter information during the game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60, a jackpot random number counter CB1 used for a jackpot lottery (win/fail lottery) to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot state, a jackpot type determination counter CB2 used to determine the jackpot type, It is used to determine whether or not to generate a ready-to-win state when the performance display device 42 is deviated and fluctuated, and to set the initial values of the ready-to-win selection counter CB3 used for determining the type of ready-to-win to be generated, etc., and the jackpot random number counter CB1. Initial value random number counter CINI, fluctuations used for determining the variable display time of the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R (effect display device 42), and determining the variation pattern (effect pattern) in the effect display device 42, etc. The type counters CS1 and CS2 and the normal symbol random number counter CB4 used for the lottery of the normal symbol display device 41 (open lottery for whether or not to open the opening/closing accessory 37Y of the lower start winning prize port 33YB) are used. there is

Each of the counters CB1, CB2, CB3, CINI, CS1, CS2, and CB4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 as the lower limit after reaching the upper limit. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 (except for the random number initial value counter CINI).

The RAM 503 has a special variation holding area in which the values of the jackpot random number counter CB1, the jackpot type determination counter CB2, and the reach selection counter CB3 are stored, and a normal fluctuation holding area in which the value of the normal symbol random number counter CB4 is stored. is provided. The normal variable holding area comprises one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area).

In addition, the special variable reservation area comprises a first special variable reservation area and a second special variable reservation area each having four reservation areas (first reservation to fourth reservation area), and one execution area.

In each reservation area of the first special variable reservation area, each value of the jackpot random number counter CB1, the jackpot type determination counter CB2, and the reach selection counter CB3 is set according to the winning history of the game ball to the upper start winning opening 33YA. Stored sequentially.

In each holding area of the second special variable holding area, each value of the jackpot random number counter CB1, jackpot type determination counter CB2, and reach selection counter CB3 is set according to the winning history of the game ball to the lower start winning port 33YB. Stored sequentially.

In each holding area of the normal fluctuation holding area, the values of the normal symbol random number counter CB4 are stored chronologically according to the passage history of the game ball to the through gate 34.例文帳に追加

By adopting such a configuration, as described above, the variable display on the special display devices 43L, 43R and the normal symbol display device 41 can be suspended up to four times.

To explain each counter in detail, the jackpot random number counter CB1 is, for example, incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 599, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 599) as the closing value, 0, which is the lower limit value as the opening value It is configured to return to Usually, when the jackpot random number counter CB1 makes one cycle, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the jackpot random number counter CB1. The initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter CB1 (value = 0 to 599), and is updated once for each timer interrupt and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of normal processing. On the other hand, the jackpot random number counter CB1 is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 is stored in the jackpot random number counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball enters the upper starting winning opening 33YA or the lower starting winning opening 33YB, the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 stored in the jackpot random number counter buffer is changed to the first special fluctuation holding area or the second special fluctuation. Stored in the holding area. Therefore, such processing constitutes a part of various lotteries.

The value of the random number that becomes a jackpot is set to two types, a "low probability mode" and a "high probability mode". There are two, and the value is "7, 307", and the number of random number values that will be a big win in the "high probability mode" is 20, and the value is "7 to 16, 307 to 316". That is, in the "low-probability mode", the lottery is won with a probability of 1/300 (a big win state occurs), and in the "high-probability mode", the lottery is won with a probability of 1/30.

In this embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with a success/fail determination table that is referred to when determining whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 corresponds to a jackpot. In this embodiment, there are two right/wrong determination tables. be.

In addition, in this embodiment, the value of the big hit random number counter CB1 is also used when determining the "small hit". There are 50 random number values that are "small hits", and the values are "101 to 125, 401 to 425". That is, the winning lottery is won (a small winning state occurs) with a probability of 1/12.

The jackpot type determination counter CB2 is, for example, incremented by one within the range of 0 to 19, and after reaching the upper limit (that is, 19), it returns to 0, which is the lower limit. In this embodiment, the jackpot type determination counter CB2 determines the jackpot types, that is, "16R probability variable jackpot A", "16R probability variable jackpot B", "4R probability variable jackpot A", "4R probability variable jackpot B", and "16R normal jackpot A". , "16R normal jackpot B", "4R normal jackpot A", "4R normal jackpot B" or "JUB jackpot" is determined.

The ROM 502 is provided with a jackpot type determination table that is referred to when determining which jackpot the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 corresponds to. Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the upper starting winning opening 33YA and when entering the lower starting winning opening 33YB, the sorting of the jackpot types is different. That is, in this embodiment, there are two jackpot type determination tables, the first jackpot type determination table that is considered when the game ball enters the upper start winning opening 33YA, and the game ball enters the lower starting winning opening 33YB. There is a second jackpot type determination table that is taken into consideration when winning a prize.

Specifically, when the game ball wins to the upper start winning opening 33YA, the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 is "0, 1" by referring to the first jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 87) Granting of "16R probability variable jackpot A" is determined.

Also, if the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 is "2", the grant of "16R probability variable jackpot B" with "20 times/high support mode" is determined, and if it is "3", "30 times/high support The grant of "16R probability variable jackpot B" with mode" is decided, and if it is "4", the grant of "16R probability variable jackpot B" with "40 times / high support mode" is decided, and if it is "5", "50 The grant of “16R probability variable jackpot B” with “times / high support mode” is decided.

If the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 is "6", the grant of "4R probability variable jackpot A" is determined.

If the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 is "7", it is determined to give "4R probability variable jackpot B" with "20 times/high support mode", and if it is "8", "30 times/high support mode". Granting of "4R probability variable jackpot B" with is determined, and if "9", granting of "4R probability variable jackpot B" with "40 times/high support mode" is determined, and if "10", "50 times/ Giving of “4R probability variable jackpot B” with “high support mode” is determined.

If the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 is "11", the grant of "16R normal jackpot A" is determined.

If the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 is "12", it is determined that "16R normal jackpot B" with "20 times/high support mode" is given, and if it is "13", "30 times/high support mode" is given. The grant of "16R normal jackpot B" is decided, and if "14", the grant of "16R normal jackpot B" with "40 times/high support mode" is decided, and if "15", "50 times/ Giving of “16R normal jackpot B” with “high support mode” is determined.

If the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 is "16", it is determined to give "4R normal jackpot B" with "20 times/high support mode", and if it is "17", "30 times/high support mode". The grant of "4R normal jackpot B" is decided, and if it is "18", the grant of "4R normal jackpot B" with "40 times/high support mode" is decided, and if it is "19", "50 times/ Giving of “4R normal jackpot B” with “high support mode” is determined.

That is, when winning the winning lottery triggered by winning the upper starting prize opening 33YA, it becomes "16R probability variable jackpot A" with a probability of 10%, "16R probability variable jackpot B" with a probability of 20%, and 5 ``4R probability variable jackpot A'' with a probability of 20%, ``4R probability variable jackpot B'' with a probability of 20%, ``16R normal jackpot A'' with a probability of 5%, and ``16R normal jackpot B'' with a probability of 20%. , "4R normal jackpot B" with a probability of 20%.

On the other hand, when the game ball enters the lower start winning opening 33YB, the second jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 88) is taken into consideration, and if the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 is "0 to 9", " Giving of 16R probability variable jackpot A" is determined, if it is "10, 11", grant of "4R probability variable jackpot A" is determined, and if it is "12, 13", grant of "4R normal jackpot A" is determined. , If it is "14", it is decided to give "4R normal jackpot B" with "20 times/high support mode", and if it is "15", "4R normal jackpot B" with "30 times/high support mode" is decided. is determined, and if it is "16", the grant of "4R normal jackpot B" with "40 times / high support mode" is determined, and if it is "17", "4R with "50 times / high support mode" If the number is "18, 19", the award of the "JUB jackpot" is determined.

That is, if you win the winning lottery triggered by winning the lower start winning opening 33YB, there is a 50% probability that it will be "16R probability variable jackpot A", and a 10% probability will be "4R probability variable jackpot A". 10% probability of "4R normal jackpot A", 20% probability of "4R normal jackpot B", and 10% probability of "JUB jackpot".

Incidentally, the jackpot type determination counter CB2 is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 is stored in the jackpot type determination counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball enters the upper start winning opening 33YA or the lower starting winning opening 33YB, the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 stored in the jackpot type determination counter buffer is the special variation holding area (first special stored in the variable reservation area or the second special variable reservation area).

Further, the reach selection counter CB3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 as the lower limit after reaching the upper limit (that is, 238). In the present embodiment, the ready-to-win selection counter CB3 is used to determine the final stop pattern in which after the ready-to-win occurs with respect to the decorative pattern, the final stop pattern is shifted forward and backward by one before and after the ready-to-win pattern and stops. A lottery is drawn for "reach other than front and back out" in which the symbol stops outside the reach symbol and "complete out" in which the reach does not occur. In this embodiment, a reach determination table is stored in the ROM 502 and is referred to when determining whether the value of the reach selection counter CB3 corresponds to the occurrence of a reach state and to which reach. is provided. The value of "0 to 238" is stored in the reach determination table, CB3 = 0, 1 corresponds to front and rear out reach, CB3 = 2 to 21 corresponds to reach other than front and rear out, CB3 = 22 to 238 is perfect It has a configuration that corresponds to the outside.

The reach selection counter CB3 is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the reach selection counter CB3 is stored in the reach selection counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball enters the upper starting winning opening 33YA or the lower starting winning opening 33YB, the value of the reach selection counter CB3 stored in the reach selection counter buffer is changed to the special fluctuation holding area of the RAM 503 (first special fluctuation holding area or second special variable reservation area).

Also, one of the two fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and after reaching the upper limit (that is, 198), it is the lower limit. It is configured to return to 0, and the other fluctuation type counter CS2 is, for example, incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 240, and after reaching the upper limit (that is, 240), it returns to 0, which is the lower limit. It has become. In the following description, CS1 is also referred to as "first variation type counter" and CS2 as "second variation type counter". This is also shown in FIG. 60 .

For example, in the probability variable jackpot time/variation pattern table (see FIG. 90) related to the normal state, the reach type of decorative symbols such as so-called normal reach, super reach, premium reach, etc. and other rough fluctuation modes are determined by the first change type counter CS1. A second variation type counter CS2 determines a more detailed variation mode such as a variation time. Therefore, by combining these fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2, it is possible to easily realize diversification of fluctuation patterns. Of course, it is also possible to determine the variation mode only by the first variation type counter CS1.

Incidentally, the normal reach pattern is a reach pattern in which no special effect display is performed other than the variation of the decorative pattern. Super ready-to-win is a ready-to-win pattern in which a character or the like is displayed on the effect display device 42 in addition to the decorative symbols during the variable display of the decorative symbols (after establishment of the ready-to-win state), thereby giving the player a sense of anticipation. . Premium reach is a production mode that can be derived only when the jackpot state occurs, and during the variable display of decorative patterns (after the reach state is established), characters with patterns different from super reach are displayed in addition to decorative patterns. It is a reach pattern that is performed in a manner that is expected to give the player a sense of expectation.

Further, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once each time the normal processing described later is executed, and are repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal processing. Then, the buffer values of CS1 and CS2 are acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation of the decorative symbols by the effect display device 42.例文帳に追加

Note that the size and range of each counter is merely an example and can be changed arbitrarily. However, it is desirable that the magnitudes of the jackpot random number counter CB1, the reach selection counter CB3, and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are all different prime numbers and are not synchronized in any case.

In addition, the normal symbol random number counter CB4 is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 9, for example, and returns to the lower limit value of 0 after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 9). The random number counter CB4 is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and when the game ball passes through the through gate 34, the value of the normal symbol random number counter CB4 is acquired.

Then, when the value of the winning normal symbol random number counter CB4 is acquired, the normal symbol display device 41 performs variable display for a predetermined time, and then the symbol corresponding to the winning (“○” in this example) is stopped and displayed. Then, the opening/closing accessory 37Y of the lower start winning opening 33YB is in an open state for a predetermined time.

In this embodiment, in the "low support mode", the two random numbers "0 and 1" are selected. On the other hand, in the "high support mode", the winning random number values are eight "0 to 7". That is, in the "low support mode", the opening and closing accessory 37Y is in the open state with a probability of 1/5, and in the "high support mode", the opening and closing accessory 37Y is in the open state with a probability of 4/5.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 will be described with reference to flowcharts. The processing of the CPU 501 can be broadly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 2 msec in this embodiment), and a stop signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt processing and the NMI interrupt processing will be explained first, and then the main processing will be explained.

The NMI interrupt process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt, the state of the main controller 261 at the time of power failure is stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. FIG.

That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like, a power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main controller 261. FIG. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control being executed, starts NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information as power-off occurrence information setting in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503, and ends the NMI interrupt processing.

Incidentally, the above NMI interrupt processing is similarly executed in the payout control device 311, and information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 by such NMI interrupt. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 interrupts the control being executed. to start NMI interrupt processing. The contents are as described above.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing, which is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 every 2 msec, for example.

In FIG. 63, first, at step SB301, various winning detection switches are read. Here, the states of various winning detection switches (general winning switch 221, count switch 223, starting winning switches 224A and 224B, through gate switch 225) connected to the main controller 261 are read, and the state of the switches is determined. to save the detection information.

At step SB302, random number initial value update processing is executed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the upper limit (599 in this example).

Also, in step SB303, random number update processing is executed. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter CB1, the jackpot type determination counter CB2, the ready-to-win selection counter CB3, and the normal symbol random number counter CB4 are each incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the upper limit. Then, the updated values of the respective counters CB1, CB2, CB3 and CB4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 503. FIG.

After that, in step SB304, the starting winning process associated with winning to the starting winning openings 33YA and 33YB is executed, and in step SB305, the through gate passing process accompanying the passage of the game ball to the through gate 34 is executed. After that, the timer interrupt processing is once terminated.

Here, the starting winning process of step SB304 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In addition, the execution area and each reservation area of the special change reservation area include a jackpot random number storage area that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1, a jackpot type random number storage area that stores the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2, and a reach selection counter CB3. A reach random number storage area for storing the value of is provided.

First, in step SB501, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the lower start prize winning port 33YB based on the detection information of the second start prize winning switch 224B. When an affirmative determination is made in step SB501, in step SB502, the value of the lower hold counter Nb that counts the number of holdings of the variable display triggered by the winning of the lower start prize winning opening 33YB is the upper limit value (in this embodiment, "4 ”). If a negative determination is made in step SB502, the process proceeds to step SB509. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step SB502, the process proceeds to step SB503, and the lower reservation counter Nb is incremented by one.

In the following step SB504, each value of the jackpot random number counter CB1, jackpot type determination counter CB2, and reach selection counter CB3 updated in the random number update process of step SB303, out of the vacant reservation area of the second special fluctuation reservation area Store in the first area. After step SB504, the process proceeds to step SB505.

In step SB505, a jackpot determination process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 newly stored in the second special change reservation area is a value corresponding to a jackpot. Details of the big hit determination process will be described later.

In the following step SB506, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot in step SB505, based on the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 newly stored in the second special change reservation area Then, a second jackpot type determination process for determining the jackpot type is performed.

Here, it is determined whether or not the jackpot winning flag has been set in the jackpot determination process performed immediately before. On the other hand, when the affirmative determination is made, the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 newly stored in the second special variable reservation area corresponds to "16R probability variable jackpot A" by referring to the second jackpot type determination table. If it was any of the values ``0 to 9'', turn on the ``16R probability variable jackpot A flag'' and the value ``10, 11'' corresponding to the ``4R probability variable jackpot A'' If it was either , turn on the "4R probability variable jackpot A flag", and if the value is either "12, 13" corresponding to the "4R normal jackpot A", turn on the "4R normal jackpot A flag", If it is one of the values ``14 to 17'' corresponding to the ``4R normal jackpot B'', turn on the ``4R normal jackpot B flag'' and either of the values ``18, 19'' corresponding to the ``JUB jackpot'' If so, the "JUB jackpot flag" is turned on.

In addition, if you win "16R probability variable jackpot A", "4R probability variable jackpot A" or "JUB jackpot" here, that is, if "until the next time / high support mode" is given after the jackpot ends, after the jackpot For a predetermined period of time (20 times of variable display in this embodiment), an effect lottery for whether or not to perform a non-notification effect that does not notify that the given "high support mode" is "until the next time / high support mode" is performed. It is performed with a lottery probability of about 1/100. Then, when it is determined as a result of the lottery that the non-informative effect is performed, the non-informative effect execution flag is turned on.

In the following step SB507, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 is not a value corresponding to the jackpot in step SB505, based on the value of the reach selection counter CB3 newly stored in the second special change reservation area , perform reach determination processing for determining the type of reach. Details of the reach determination process will be described later.

In step SB508, which follows, processing for setting a hold control command is performed. The hold control command is a command for notifying the sub-controller 262 in advance of various hold information (information used to determine the content of the variable display) held and stored in the second special variable hold area. be. The hold control command set in this process is output to the sub-controller 262 in the next external output process (see step SB201). The hold control command includes, for example, as hold information, information indicating the results of the jackpot determination process and the jackpot type determination process, and information indicating whether the variable display is triggered by the winning of the start winning port 33YA or 33YB. be

Here, the details of the jackpot determination process in step SB505 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step SB5101, the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 newly stored in the second special change reservation area is either the value "7" or "307" corresponding to the jackpot stored in the first success/failure determination table. Determine whether or not they match. In addition, in FIG. 65, the processing of the step SB5101 is described in a simplified manner for convenience, but in reality, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 is "7", and the determination is negative. If it is determined, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 is "307", and if the determination is affirmative in either of these determinations, the determination is affirmative in the step SB5101, which determination If a negative determination is also made in step SB5101, a negative determination is made in step SB5101.

When the affirmative determination is made in step SB5101, that is, when it is determined that the big win state occurs, after turning on the big win winning flag in step SB5102, the process proceeds to step SB5105. In step SB5102, the function of the main control device 261 that generates a jackpot state corresponding to the first game value (first special game state) causes the first game value giving means (first special game state generation) in this embodiment. means) are configured.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SB5101, it is determined in step SB5103 whether or not it is in the "high probability mode" based on the value of the lottery mode flag, which will be described later.

If the affirmative determination is made in step SB5103, that is, if it is in the "high probability mode", in step SB5104, the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 newly stored in the second special change reservation area is the second propriety determination It is determined whether the values corresponding to the jackpots stored in the table are any of "8 to 16, 308 to 316" excluding "7" and "307". Incidentally, in the determination process, it is actually determined one by one whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 and each value corresponding to the jackpot match as described above.

If the determination at step SB5104 is affirmative, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot state occurs during the "high probability mode", the jackpot winning flag is turned on at step SB5102, and then this processing ends.

The determination processing in steps SB5101 and SB5104 constitutes the first lottery in this embodiment, and the function of the main controller 261 that executes this constitutes the first lottery means.

If a negative determination is made in step SB5103 or step SB5104, that is, if it is not a "jackpot", the process proceeds to step SB5105.

Also, in step SB5105, the value of the big hit random number counter CB1 newly stored in the second special change reservation area determines whether it matches the value "101 to 125, 401 to 425" corresponding to the small hit. .

When the affirmative determination is made in step SB5105, that is, when it is determined that the small hit state occurs, after turning on the small hit winning flag in step SB5106, this processing ends. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SB5105, this processing ends.

The determination processing of step SB5105 constitutes the second lottery in this embodiment, and the function of the main controller 261 for executing this constitutes the second lottery means. In addition, in step SB5106, the function of the main controller 261 to generate a small win state corresponding to the second game value (second special game state) is used as the second game value giving means (second special game state) in this embodiment. game state generating means) is configured.

Next, the reach determination processing in step SB507 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step SB5301, it is determined whether or not the winning flag (big winning winning flag or small winning winning flag) has been set in the previous big winning determination process. When the affirmative determination is made in step SB5301, that is, when the big hit state or the small hit state occurs, this processing is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step SB5301, that is, if the hit state does not occur, in step SB5302, the reach determination table is taken into consideration, and the value of the reach selection counter CB3 newly stored in the second special change reservation area matches one of the values "0, 1" corresponding to the "outside reach". If the determination in step SB5302 is affirmative, in step SB5303, the front-rear deviating flag indicating the occurrence of front-rear deviating reach is turned on, and then this process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SB5302, in step SB5304, the value of the reach selection counter CB3 newly stored in the second special change reservation area is "reach other than front and rear out" by referring to the reach determination table. It is determined whether it matches any of the values "2 to 21" corresponding to . If the determination in step SB5304 is affirmative, the process ends after turning on the flag other than front-rear deviation in step SB5305.

If a negative determination is made in step SB5304, that is, if the result is "completely out of line", this process ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 64, after the processing of step SB508, or when a negative determination is made in step SB501, in step SB509, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the upper start winning opening 33YA. The determination is made based on the detection information of the switch 224A. If a negative determination is made in step SB509, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination is affirmative, in step SB510, the value of the upper suspension counter Na that counts the number of suspensions of the variable display triggered by the winning of the upper start winning opening 33YA is the upper limit value (in this embodiment, "4 ”). If a negative determination is made at step SB510, this process ends. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step SB510, the process proceeds to step SB511, and the upper reservation counter Na is incremented by one.

In the following step SB512, the values of the jackpot random number counter CB1, the jackpot type determination counter CB2, and the reach selection counter CB3 are stored in the first area among the vacant reservation areas of the first special change reservation area. After step SB512, the process proceeds to step SB513.

In step SB513, a jackpot determination process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 newly stored in the first special change reservation area is a value corresponding to a jackpot. The big win determination process in step SB513 is the same as the big win determination process in step SB505 except for the small win determination, and the information regarding the variable display to be processed is based on the winning to the upper start winning opening 33YA. , and detailed description thereof is omitted for the sake of convenience.

In the subsequent step SB514, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot in step SB513, based on the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 newly stored in the first special change reservation area Then, a first jackpot type determination process for determining the jackpot type is performed.

Here, it is determined whether or not the jackpot winning flag has been set in the jackpot determination process performed immediately before. On the other hand, when the affirmative determination is made, the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 newly stored in the first special variable reservation area corresponds to "16R probability variable jackpot A" by referring to the first jackpot type determination table. If it was either of the values “0, 1”, turn on the “16R probability variable jackpot A flag”, and the value corresponding to “16R probability variable jackpot B” “2 to 5” If it was either turns on the "16R probability variable jackpot B flag", and if the value corresponding to "4R probability variable jackpot A" is "6", turns on the "4R probability variable jackpot A flag" and corresponds to "4R probability variable jackpot B" If it is one of the values ``7 to 10'', turn on the ``4R probability variable jackpot B flag'', and if the value ``11'' corresponding to the ``16R normal jackpot A'' is ``16R normal jackpot A flag" is turned on, and if it is one of the values "12 to 15" corresponding to "16R normal jackpot B", turn on "16R normal jackpot B flag" and correspond to "4R normal jackpot B" If it is one of the values ``16 to 19'', turn on the ``4R normal jackpot B flag''.

It should be noted that here, if "16R probability variable jackpot A" or "4R probability variable jackpot A" is won, that is, if "until the next time, high support mode" is given after the jackpot ends, the above non-notification as in step SB506 A performance lottery is performed to decide whether or not to perform a performance. Then, when it is determined as a result of the lottery that the non-informative effect is performed, the non-informative effect execution flag is turned on.

In the following step SB515, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 is not a value corresponding to the jackpot in step SB513, based on the value of the reach selection counter CB3 newly stored in the first special change reservation area , perform reach determination processing for determining the type of reach. It should be noted that the reach determination process of step SB515 is the same as the reach determination process of step SB507, and differs in that the information regarding the variable display to be processed is based on the ball to the upper start winning opening 33YA. For the sake of convenience, detailed description is omitted.

In step SB516, which follows, processing for setting a hold control command is performed. After that, this process is terminated. It should be noted that the setting processing of the pending control command in step SB516 is the same as the setting processing of the pending control command in step SB508, and the information regarding the variable display to be processed is based on the ball to the upper start winning opening 33YA. , and detailed description thereof is omitted for the sake of convenience.

Next, the through gate passage processing of step SB305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

At step SB601, whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 is determined based on the detection information of the through gate switch 225. FIG.

If a negative determination is made in step SB601, the processing ends. On the other hand, when the determination is affirmative at step SB601, ie, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, at step SB602, the number of suspensions of variable display performed by the normal symbol display device 41 is counted. It is determined whether or not the value of the normal reservation counter Nc is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made here, the processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB602, that is, if the passage of the game ball to the through gate 34 is confirmed, and the value of the normal reservation counter Nc is <4, the process proceeds to step SB603 and the normal reservation counter Increment Nc by one.

In addition, in the following step SB604, a random number relating to whether or not it is correct is obtained. Specifically, the value of the normal symbol random number counter CB4 updated in the random number update process of step SB303 is stored in the first area of the free storage areas of the normal fluctuation holding area of the RAM503. After that, the through gate passage processing ends. Therefore, the process of step SB604 constitutes a part of the third lottery.

Next, the flow of main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This main process is activated upon resetting when the power is turned on.

First, in step SB101, initial setting processing is executed upon power-on. Specifically, in order to set a predetermined value in the stack pointer and wait for the sub-side control devices (sub-control device 262, payout control device 311, etc.) to become operable, for example, 1 Executes wait processing for about a second. In the following step SB102, RAM access is permitted.

After that, data backup processing is executed for the RAM 503 in the CPU 501 . That is, in step SB103, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply device 313 is pressed (ON). do. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 has not been pressed, it is determined in the next step SB104 whether or not the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 or not. Here, if it is not set, backup data is not stored, so in this case also, the process proceeds to step SB112. If power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a, the RAM determination value is calculated in step SB105, and in subsequent step SB106, it is determined whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value saved at the time of power failure. , that is, determine the validity of the backup. If the RAM determination value calculated here does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power failure, the backed-up data is destroyed, and in this case also the process proceeds to step SB112.

In the process of step SB112, an initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the sub-control device 262 and the payout control device 311, etc., which are sub-side control devices. In addition, the sub-control device 262 that has received the initialization command executes its own initialization processing as described later, and sets the game state determination value Xj corresponding to the initial setting “normal state” to “0”. Store in the state storage area.

Thereafter, the process proceeds to RAM initialization processing (step SB113, etc.). Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 503 . Instead of using this RAM determination value, it is also possible to determine the validity of the backup based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 503 is correctly saved.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is powered on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323 when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 323 is ON, the process proceeds to RAM initialization processing (step SB113, etc.). Also, when power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process of the RAM 503 (step SB113, etc.) is similarly performed. That is, in step SB113, the used area of RAM 503 is cleared to 0, and in subsequent step SB114, the initial value of RAM 503 is set. After that, at step SB115, the interrupt permission is set, and the process shifts to normal processing, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed (step SB103: NO), the condition is that power failure occurrence information is set and that the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. Then, the power recovery process (power recovery process) is executed. That is, at step SB107, the stack pointer before power-off is restored, and at step SB108, power-off occurrence information is cleared.

At step SB109, a game state check process for grasping the game state at the time of power failure stored in the RAM 503 is executed.

In the subsequent step SB110, a return command is transmitted to return the sub-control device 262, payout control device 311, etc., to the game state at the time of power interruption. The return command transmitted to the sub-controller 262 includes information (game state determination value Xj, which will be described later) relating to the game state at the time of power failure specified in the game state check process.

At step SB111, the used register is restored from the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. FIG. After that, at step SB115, the interrupt permission is set, and the process shifts to normal processing, which will be described later.

Here, the game state check processing of step SB109 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the game state check process, and FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence relationship between a lottery mode flag, a support mode flag, a game state specifying counter Kj and a game state determination value Xj, which will be described later. The game state check process is also executed in the later-described variable display setting process (step SB807) and winning end setting process (step SB1216).

As shown in FIG. 68, at step SB1901, a process of reading various information related to the game state at the time of power failure, backed up in the RAM 503, is executed. Specifically, the value of the lottery mode flag, the value of the support mode flag, and the value of the game state identification counter Kj are read from the RAM 503, respectively.

The lottery mode flag is state determination information for determining whether the lottery mode is the "low probability mode" or the "high probability mode". "50 (H)" is set in the case of "high probability mode", and "53 (H)" is set in the case of "high probability mode". The upper 4-bit value "5" in the lottery mode flag is uniformly added for noise countermeasures, and is not used for determining the game state.

The support mode flag is state determination information for determining what kind of state the winning support mode is in. The flag value is "A0 ( H)” is set. The upper 4-bit value "A" in the support mode flag is uniformly added for noise countermeasures, and is not used for determining the game state.

In addition, when the winning support mode is "20 times/high support mode", "30 times/high support mode", "40 times/high support mode" or "50 times/high support mode", the flag value is "A1(H)" is set.

Further, when the winning support mode is "30 times/high support mode S", "A2(H)" is set as the flag value, and when it is "until the next time/high support mode", the flag value is "A3(H)" is set.

The game state identification counter Kj is state determination information for counting the number of times the variable display is executed after the end of the big win and specifying the timing of switching the game state. is subtracted by 1 each time is performed. For example, as will be described later, "50" is set as the initial value of the game state specifying counter Kj, and if the value of the counter Kj is "31" after that, the variation display at that time is, after the big win, It can be identified as the 20th variable display.

In this embodiment, when "16R probability variable jackpot B", "4R probability variable jackpot B", "16R normal jackpot B" or "4R normal jackpot B" is won, that is, after the jackpot ends "20 times/high support mode", When "30 times/high support mode", "40 times/high support mode" or "50 times/high support mode" is given, "50" is set as an initial value.

In addition, when "16R normal jackpot A" or "4R normal jackpot A" is won, that is, when "30 times/high support mode S" is given after the jackpot ends, "30" is set as the initial value. be.

Also, if you win the "16R probability variable jackpot A", "4R probability variable jackpot A" or "JUB jackpot", that is, if "until the next time / high support mode" is given after the jackpot ends, the initial value is "0 ” is set. However, when the non-informative effect execution flag is turned on and the non-informative effect is executed, "30" is set as the initial value. The non-notification effect execution flag is turned off after setting the initial value.

Returning to the description of FIG. 68, at step SB1902, the value of the lottery mode flag read at step SB1901 and the value of the support mode flag are added.

In the following step SB1903, the addition value calculated in step SB1902 and a predetermined mask value ("07(H)" in this embodiment) are ANDed, and the lower 3-bit data is extracted. It is set in the area as the gaming state determination value Xj.

At step SB1904, it is determined whether or not the gaming state determination value Xj is "1". That is, the lottery mode is "low probability mode" and the winning support mode is "20 times/high support mode", "30 times/high support mode", "40 times/high support mode" or "50 times/high support mode". mode” is determined.

If a negative determination is made here, the process moves to step SB1905 to determine whether or not the gaming state determination value Xj is "4". That is, the lottery mode is "high probability mode" and the winning support mode is "20 times/high support mode", "30 times/high support mode", "40 times/high support mode" or "50 times/high support mode". mode” is determined.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SB1904 or step SB1905, the process proceeds to step SB1909. On the other hand, if the determination in step SB1905 is negative, the process proceeds to step SB1906.

At step SB1906, it is determined whether or not the gaming state determination value Xj is "2". That is, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the "low probability mode" and the winning support mode is the "30 times/high support mode S".

If a negative determination is made here, the process proceeds to step SB1907 to determine whether or not the gaming state determination value Xj is "5". That is, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the "high probability mode" and the winning support mode is the "30 times/high support mode S".

If an affirmative determination is made in step SB1906 or SB1907, the process proceeds to step SB1912. On the other hand, if the determination in step SB1907 is negative, the process proceeds to step SB1908.

At step SB1908, it is determined whether or not the gaming state determination value Xj is "6". That is, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the "high probability mode" and the winning support mode is the "until next time/high support mode".

If the determination here is affirmative, the process proceeds to step SB1914. On the other hand, if the determination is negative, the process proceeds to step SB1916, stores the value "6" of the gaming state determination value Xj in a predetermined area of the RAM 503, and terminates this processing.

Now, in step SB1909 to which an affirmative determination is made in step SB1904 or step SB1905, it is determined whether or not the value of the game state identification counter Kj is "31". That is, it is determined whether or not the variation display after the end of the jackpot is the 20th time. If the determination here is affirmative, the process proceeds to step SB1913, and if the determination is negative, the process proceeds to step SB1910.

At step SB1910, it is determined whether or not the value of the game state identification counter Kj is "21". That is, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation display after the end of the jackpot is the 30th time. If the determination here is affirmative, the process proceeds to step SB1913, and if the determination is negative, the process proceeds to step SB1911.

At step SB1911, it is determined whether or not the value of the game state identification counter Kj is "11". That is, it is determined whether or not the variation display after the end of the jackpot is the 40th time. If the determination here is affirmative, the process proceeds to step SB1913, and if the determination is negative, the process proceeds to step SB1912.

At step SB1912, it is determined whether or not the value of the game state identification counter Kj is "1". That is, it is determined whether it is the “50th time (in the case of the initial value “50”)” or the “30th time (in the case of the initial value “30”)”.

If a negative determination is made here, the process proceeds to step SB1916, and the game state determination value Xj (“1”, “4”, “2” or “5”) is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 503, and this End the process.

On the other hand, if the determination at step SB1912 is affirmative, that is, if the value of the game state identification counter Kj is "1", the process proceeds to step SB1913, and the value of the game state determination value Xj is changed to "7". . Thereafter, the process proceeds to step SB1916, stores the value "7" of the game state determination value Xj in a predetermined area of the RAM 503, and ends this process.

Now, in step SB1914 to which an affirmative determination is made in step SB1908, it is determined whether or not the value of the game state specifying counter Kj is "0". That is, it is determined whether or not the winning support mode is the "until next time/high support mode" in which the non-notification effect is not performed. If an affirmative determination is made here, the value "6" of the gaming state determination value Xj is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 503, and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made at step SB1914, that is, if it is the "until next time/high support mode" in which the non-notification effect is performed, the process proceeds to step SB1915, and the game state determination value Xj is set to "5". change to Thereafter, the process proceeds to step SB1916, stores the value "5" of the gaming state determination value Xj in a predetermined area of the RAM 503, and terminates this process. As a result, even in the state of "until the next time, high support mode", the lottery mode is "high probability mode" and the winning support mode is "30 times" for a predetermined number of times (20 times in this embodiment).・The same effect as in the state of "high support mode S" will be performed.

Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. Main processing of the game is executed in this normal processing. As an overview, the processing of steps SB201 to SB210 is executed as regular processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps SB211 and SB212 is executed during the remaining time.

First, in step SB201, a control signal based on the control contents of the special display devices 43L, 43R and the opening and closing accessory 37Y updated in the previous process is transmitted to each device, and output data such as commands are sent to each of the sub-sides. Execute external output processing such as sending to the control device. Some more detailed examples are given below.

For example, based on the detection information of the various detection switches, it is determined whether or not game balls have entered various prize-winning ports such as the general prize-winning port 31. If there is a prize, the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize is determined A payout command is transmitted to the payout control device 311 .

Also, when a command or the like for blinking the error display lamp 104 is set, the command is output to the sub-controller 262 .

In addition, in the external output process, information for grasping the game state is externally output to the hall computer of the game hall by taking into consideration various information such as the lottery mode flag and the jackpot medium flag to be described later. Furthermore, the output of error information and the like to the hall computer is also executed in this output process.

For example, when a prize winning error is detected, an ON signal (pulse signal) is output to the hall computer of the game hall via a predetermined terminal of the external relay terminal board 240, and if there is no prize winning error, an ON signal (pulse signal) is output. A signal is output.

In addition, when the effect display device 42 performs a variable display of decorative patterns, a variable pattern command, a pattern command, and the like are transmitted to the sub-control device 262 . On the other hand, the sub-control device 262, which has input a variation pattern command, a pattern command, etc., determines the variation mode of the effect display device 42 based on such various commands, and displays the variation mode on the effect display device 42 (variation display) is issued to the display control device 45.

At step SB202, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated. More specifically, like the other counters, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach the upper limit values (198 and 240 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0. do. Then, the updated values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 503. FIG.

In the following step SB203, the prize ball count signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, at step SB204, the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

After that, in step SB205, the first display control process is executed. In this process, the control contents of the special display devices 43L and 43R are set as to what kind of control is to be performed in the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, and the judgment of the big hit and the decoration pattern in the effect display device 42 are performed. setting of the fluctuation pattern of . Details of the first display control process will be described later.

At step SB206, a variable winning device control process is executed. In this processing, setting of the control content of the variable winning device 32 is performed as to what kind of control is performed in the variable winning device 32 . As a result, when a big win state or a small win state occurs, the opening/closing process of the opening/closing plate 32a of the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times. The details of the variable winning device control process will be described later.

At step SB207, a second display control process is executed. In this processing, the setting of the control contents of the normal design display device 41 and the like are performed as to what kind of control is performed in the normal design display device 41 . The details of this second display control process will be described later.

At step SB208, an open/close accessory control process is executed. In this process, the control contents of the opening/closing role 37Y are set as to what kind of control is performed in the opening/closing role 37Y. The details of this opening/closing accessory control process will be described later.

After that, in step SB209, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 or not. Here, if power-off occurrence information is not set in the backup area 503a, in step SB210, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the previous normal process. Then, it is determined whether or not 4 msec) has elapsed. Then, if the predetermined time has already passed, the process proceeds to step SB201, and the processes after step SB201 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not passed since the start of the previous normal processing, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal processing. Repeat execution (step SB211, step SB212).

That is, at step SB211, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the upper limit (599 in this example).

Also, in step SB212, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated (similar to step SB202). Specifically, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the upper limits (198 and 240 in this example). Then, the changed values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM503.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps SB201 to SB209 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter CB1) can be randomly updated and similarly fluctuated. The type counters CS1 and CS2 can also be randomly updated.

Now, if the power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step SB209: YES), it means that the power has been shut down, so the processes from step SB213 onward are executed as power failure processing at the time of power failure. will be In the power failure process, first, in step SB213, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited. In step SB214, the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 are saved in the stack area. memorize to After that, in step SB216, a power cutoff notification command indicating that the power has been cut off is transmitted to other control devices (payout control device 311, etc.). Then, in step SB217, the RAM judgment value is calculated and stored in the backup area 503a. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of RAM 503 . After that, RAM access is prohibited at step SB218, and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed.

It should be noted that the process of step SB209 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state changes performed at steps SB201 to SB208, or at the end of one cycle of the processes at steps SB211 and SB212 performed within the remaining time. It is executed at different times. Therefore, in the normal processing of the main controller 261, since information on occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the end of each processing, the amount of data to be stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is smaller than when each processing is in progress. and can be easily memorized. In addition, when returning to the state before the power shutdown, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, it can be easily restored, and the processing load on the main controller 261 can be reduced. . Furthermore, since the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited before data is stored (step SB213), it is possible to prevent the data from being changed when the power is cut off, so that the state before the power cut-off can be reliably stored. .

Next, the first display control processing of step SB205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In FIG. 70, in step SB801, with reference to various hit medium flags (big hit medium flag and small hit medium flag) described later in detail, it is currently hitting (during the big hit state or small hit state) Whether or not judge. The winning state (big win state and small winning state) includes the middle of the winning state and a predetermined time after the winning state ends. Here, the predetermined time after the end of the winning state is the time from the end of the winning state to the start of the normal game (variation display on the special display devices 43L and 43R). At 42, the end of the winning state, various game states given after winning, and various modes are displayed. In addition, the period from when the variable display is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to winning on the special display devices 43L, 43R and the effect display device 42 until the variable winning device 32 is opened (generally this time zone is The effect display device 42 displays the start of the winning state) is also included in the winning.

If the determination in step SB801 is affirmative, that is, if the hit state is in progress, this processing is terminated as it is. By looking at the setting state of the middle flag, it is determined whether or not the first or second special display device 43L, 43R (effect display device 42) is performing a variable display. Specifically, when the first display flag is set (in the ON state), it is considered that the variable display is in progress, and when the first display flag is cleared (in the OFF state), the variable It is considered that the display is stopped, which corresponds to a state in which the display is stopped. Although details will be described later, the first display flag is turned on when starting the variable display of the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R (see step SB920 and step SB807). It is turned off when the variable display of the second special display devices 43L and 43R is stopped (see step SB814).

Then, if a negative determination is made in step SB802, that is, if it is not in the winning state and not in the variable display, the process proceeds to step SB803, and the variable display (second variable It is determined whether or not the value of the lower suspension counter Nb that counts the number of suspensions displayed) is greater than zero.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SB803, that is, if even one second variable display is retained and stored, 1 is subtracted from the lower retention counter Nb in step SB804. Incidentally, in this embodiment, if the second variable display is reserved and stored as a result of the determination processing in step SB803, the second variable display is executed without executing the first variable display. That is, even if the first variable display is retained and stored earlier than the second variable display, the second variable display is given priority (the first variable display is postponed). ing.

At subsequent step SB805, a process of shifting the data stored in the second special change reservation area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth reservation areas of the second special variable reservation area to the execution area side. The data in each area is shifted in the following order: area→reserved first area, reserved third area→reserved second area, reserved fourth area→reserved third area, and so on. After step SB805, in step SB806, the process of turning on/off the second reservation lamp 46b and the process of causing the change specific lamp 40 to emit red light are performed, and then the process proceeds to step SB807.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step SB803, that is, if no second variable display is retained and stored, in step SB808, variable display (first It is determined whether or not an upper suspension counter Na that counts the number of suspensions for variable display) is greater than 0. If a negative determination is made at step SB808, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step SB808, 1 is subtracted from the upper reservation counter Na in step SB809. At subsequent Step SB810, a process of shifting the data stored in the first special change reservation area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth reservation areas of the first special variable reservation area to the execution area side. The data in each area is shifted in the following order: area→reserved first area, reserved third area→reserved second area, reserved fourth area→reserved third area, and so on. After step SB810, in step SB811, the process of turning on/off the first reservation lamp 46a and the process of making the change specific lamp 40 emit blue light are performed, and then the process proceeds to step SB807. In the present embodiment, there is only one execution area for the special change reservation area, and the data stored in the first special change reservation area and the second special change reservation area are used when performing a change display based on the data. will be shifted to the common execution area.

In step SB807, variable display setting processing is performed. Details of the variable display setting process will now be described with reference to FIG.

First, at step SB900, a game state check process is executed. Since the game state check process is the same as the game state check process (see FIG. 68) in step SB109, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Subsequently, in step SB901, it is determined whether or not the variable display corresponds to a small hit by determining whether or not the small hit winning flag is ON.

Here, when it is determined that it corresponds to a small hit, the process proceeds to step SB910. On the other hand, if it is determined that the win is not a small hit, the process proceeds to step SB902.

At step SB902, it is determined whether or not the variable display corresponds to a big win by determining whether or not the big win winning flag is ON.

Here, when it is determined that the game corresponds to a big hit, the process proceeds to step SB903. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is neither a big win nor a small win, that is, if it is a loss, the process moves to step SB912.

In step SB903, any of the various probability variable jackpot flags ("16R probability variable jackpot A flag", "16R probability variable jackpot B flag", "4R probability variable jackpot A flag", "4R probability variable jackpot B flag") is on By determining whether or not, it is determined whether or not the variable display corresponds to the "probability variable jackpot".

If the affirmative determination is made in step SB903, that is, in the case of "probability variation jackpot", the variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern table corresponding to "probability variation jackpot" in step SB904, and set to the variation pattern command. . Subsequently, in step SB905, the symbol table corresponding to the "probability variation jackpot" is considered to determine the jackpot symbol (in this embodiment, whether it is an odd number symbol or an even number symbol), and the corresponding symbol command (this embodiment Then, set "BZ1" or "BZ2" to be described later. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step SB920.

If a negative determination is made in step SB903, the process proceeds to step SB906, and the various normal jackpot flags (“16R normal jackpot A flag”, “16R normal jackpot B flag”, “4R normal jackpot A flag”, “4R normal It is determined whether or not the variable display corresponds to the "normal jackpot" by determining whether or not any of the "jackpot B flags") is on. If the determination at step SB906 is affirmative, that is, if it is a "normal jackpot", the fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "normal jackpot" at step SB907, and set as a fluctuation pattern command do. Subsequently, in step SB908, the symbol table corresponding to the "normal jackpot" is considered to determine the jackpot symbol (in this embodiment, whether it is an odd numbered symbol or an even numbered symbol), and the corresponding symbol command (this embodiment Then, set "BZ1" or "BZ2" to be described later. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step SB920.

However, in the present embodiment, depending on the type of symbols stopped and displayed on the effect display device 42 as described above, it is impossible to determine the game state such as the lottery mode provided after the end of the big win. In other words, if it is a "probability variable jackpot", the "odd number pattern" will be stopped and displayed, and if it is a "normal jackpot", the "even number pattern" will be stopped and displayed. is not clearly associated, but in the present embodiment, according to the above various tables, for example, if it is a "probable variable jackpot", it is easy to stop and display with an "odd number pattern". They are simply divided into tables so that patterns and designs appear at different rates. Therefore, for example, at the time of the big win, regardless of the kind of the big win such as "probable variable big win" or "normal big win", the variation pattern or the stop symbol may be selected based on one big win table.

If a negative determination is made in step SB906, the process proceeds to step SB909, and it is determined whether or not the JUB jackpot flag is on, thereby determining whether the variation display corresponds to the "JUB jackpot". determine whether If the determination in step SB909 is affirmative, that is, if the result is a "JUB jackpot", the process proceeds to step SB910.

In step SB910, the variation pattern table corresponding to the "JUB jackpot" and "minor win" is taken into account to determine the variation pattern and set it as the variation pattern command. Thereafter, at Step SB911, a symbol command (in this embodiment, "BZ6" to be described later) corresponding to the chance symbol is set, and the process proceeds to Step SB920.

If a negative determination is made in step SB902, that is, if the vehicle is "out", it is determined in step SB912 whether or not the front-rear deviation flag is ON.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SB912, that is, if it is "front-rear out reach", in step SB913 the variation pattern table corresponding to "front-rear out reach" is taken into consideration to determine the variation pattern, and the variation pattern command and turn off the anteroposterior deviation flag. Subsequently, at Step SB914, a symbol command (in this embodiment, "BZ3" to be described later) corresponding to the front and back off symbol is set. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step SB920.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step 912, it is determined in step SB915 whether or not the flag other than front-rear deviation is on. If the affirmative determination is made in the step SB915, that is, if it is "reach other than front and rear deviation", the variation pattern table corresponding to "reach other than front and rear deviation" is taken into consideration in step SB916 to determine the variation pattern, Set it to the fluctuation pattern command and turn off the flag other than the front and back deviation. Subsequently, at step SB917, a symbol command (in this embodiment, "BZ4" to be described later) corresponding to a symbol other than front and rear deviation is set. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step SB920.

Further, if the negative determination is made in step SB915, that is, if it is "completely out", step SB918 considers the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "completely out" to determine the outlier fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern command set to Subsequently, at step SB919, a symbol command (in this embodiment, "BZ5" to be described later) corresponding to the completely missing symbol is set. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step SB920.

Here, for convenience, the variation pattern table and variation pattern commands will be described. In the present embodiment, a variation pattern table corresponding to the above-described "probability variable jackpot" (hereinafter referred to as "probability variable jackpot/variation pattern table"), a variation pattern table corresponding to "normal jackpot", "JUB jackpot" and "small hit" Fluctuation pattern table corresponding to , Fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "Reach off front and back", Variation pattern table corresponding to "Reach other than front and back off", and Variation pattern table corresponding to "Complete off" (hereinafter referred to as when completely off A plurality of variation pattern tables are provided according to the respective game states (values "0" to "7" of the game state determination value Xj).

For example, regarding the probability variable jackpot/variation pattern table, as shown in FIG. 89(a), at "100 address" which is the reference address, the value of the game state determination value Xj corresponds to "0" and "normal state". A probability variable jackpot time/fluctuation pattern table is stored.

Similarly, at "address 101", a probability variable jackpot/fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the value of game state determination value Xj being "1" is stored, and at "address 102", the value of game state determination value Xj is "2". A probability variable jackpot time/variation pattern table corresponding to is stored at "103 address", and a probability variable jackpot time/variation pattern table corresponding to the game state determination value Xj value of "3" is stored at "104 address" , when the game state determination value Xj corresponds to "4", the variation pattern table is stored, and at "105 address", when the probability variable jackpot corresponds to the game state determination value Xj of "5" A fluctuation pattern table is stored, and at "106 address", a variable jackpot time/variation pattern table corresponding to the value of the game state determination value Xj corresponding to "6" is stored, and at "107 address", the game state determination value Xj is stored. A probability variable jackpot/variation pattern table corresponding to the value "7" is stored.

Further, regarding the completely out of line/fluctuation pattern table, as shown in FIG. 89(b), at "700 address" which is the reference address, the value of the gaming state determination value Xj corresponds to "normal state" of "0". A complete deviation/fluctuation pattern table is stored.

Similarly, at "address 701", a completely out-of-office/fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the value of game state determination value Xj being "1" is stored, and at "address 702", the value of game state determination value Xj is "2". is stored at "address 703", and at "address 704" is stored a change pattern table at "complete failure" corresponding to the gaming state determination value Xj of "3", and at "address 704" , When the game state determination value Xj is completely out of line corresponding to "4" ・The fluctuation pattern table is stored, and at "705 address", when the game state determination value Xj is completely out of line corresponding to "5" A variation pattern table is stored, and at "address 706", a completely out-of-state/variation pattern table corresponding to the game state determination value Xj value of "6" is stored, and at "address 707", the game state determination value Xj A complete deviation/variation pattern table corresponding to the value "7" is stored.

Although not shown, the variation pattern table corresponding to the above-mentioned "normal jackpot", the variation pattern table corresponding to "JUB jackpot" and "small hit", the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "front and back reach", and Regarding the variation pattern table corresponding to "Reach other than front and back failure", the value of the game state determination value Xj "0" to A plurality of table groups corresponding to "7" are stored with serial numbers from a predetermined reference address.

Therefore, when determining the variation pattern in step SB904, step SB907, step SB910, step SB913, step SB916, and step SB918, first, based on the game state determination value Xj specified in the game state check process (step SB900) Then, a process of selecting a table corresponding to a predetermined game state (values "0" to "7" of the game state determination value Xj) from among a plurality of table groups is performed. At this time, by adding the value of the game state determination value Xj to the reference address (for example, "100 address" in the case of the probability variable jackpot/variation pattern table), the address where the table to be selected is stored is specified. can do. That is, the game state determination value Xj plays the role of the offset value as it is.

Then, the variation pattern is determined based on the selected variation pattern table (for example, the probability variable jackpot time variation pattern table corresponding to "normal state (Xj = 0)" stored in "100 address": see Fig. 90) and set the corresponding variation pattern command.

The variation pattern command in this embodiment consists of 2 bytes, and the upper 4 bits in the upper byte consist of information specifying the gaming state. In this embodiment, the gaming state determination value Xj is set as it is. In addition, the lower 4 bits of the upper byte are configured by information specifying the jackpot type, etc., and the 8 bits of the lower byte are configured by information specifying the variation pattern (variation time, reach type, etc.).

For example, as can be seen by referring to the variable probability jackpot/variation pattern table for the normal state (Xj=0) [see FIG. "0", which is the value of the gaming state determination value Xj, is set in 4 bits, and "F" indicating "probability variable jackpot" is set in the following 4 bits. Then, a value specifying a variation pattern corresponding to the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503 is set to the remaining 8 bits of the lower byte. In the sub-control device 262, the relationship between these variation pattern commands and the variation mode (effect pattern) of the decorative pattern is stored in a table, and when the variation pattern command is received, the variation corresponding to the variation pattern command is stored. A pattern (effect pattern) becomes executable.

Next, the design command will be described in detail. The symbol command is a command for causing the sub-control device 262 to determine a stop symbol. In this embodiment, there are 6 categories: combination of odd-numbered jackpot symbols, combination of even-numbered jackpot symbols, combination of front and rear missing symbols, combination of symbols other than front and back missing symbols, combination of completely missing symbols, and combination of chance symbols. is specified. These divisions are indicated by, for example, "BZ1", "BZ2", "BZ3", "BZ4", "BZ5", and "BZ6", any one of which is set as a symbol command. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between these commands and the stop symbols in a table. Then, the sub-control device 262 displays the stop symbol corresponding to the symbol command.

The combination of odd-numbered jackpot symbols is a combination of symbols consisting of numbers 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9, and "BZ1" is set as the symbol command corresponding to the combination of odd-numbered jackpot symbols. be. Then, when the symbol command is set to "BZ1" indicating an odd jackpot symbol, the sub-control device 262 selects one of the symbol combinations consisting of double numbers 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9. One symbol is determined as the stop symbol.

The combination of even-numbered jackpot symbols is a combination of symbols consisting of numbers 0, 2, 4, 6, and 8, and "BZ2" is set as the symbol command corresponding to the combination of even-numbered jackpot symbols. be. Then, when the symbol command is set to "BZ2" indicating an even-numbered jackpot symbol, the sub-control device 262 selects one of symbol combinations consisting of 0, 2, 4, 6, and 8 numbers. One symbol is determined as the stop symbol.

The combination of front-rear deviating symbols corresponds to "front-rear deviating reach" in which the final stop symbol deviates from the ready-to-win pattern by one before and after the occurrence of the ready-to-win pattern and stops. "BZ3" is set in the symbol command.

The combination of symbols other than front and back off corresponds to "Reach other than front and back off" in which the final stop symbol stops at a place other than the front and rear of the reach symbol after the occurrence of reach, and the symbol corresponding to the combination of symbols other than front and back off. "BZ4" is set in the command.

The combination of completely missing symbols corresponds to "completely missing" in which reach does not occur, and "BZ5" is set to the symbol command corresponding to the combination of completely missing symbols.

Also, "BZ6" is set as the symbol command corresponding to the combination of chance symbols. Incidentally, there is only one type of chance symbol, and in this example, as described above, the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in each symbol display area are "3", "4", and "1" from the top.

Although details will be described later, when "BZ3" to "BZ5" are set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 stops symbol combinations stored in the counter buffer of the corresponding RAM 553. Determined as Specifically, when "BZ3" indicating a combination of front and rear deviating symbols is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 that has received the symbol command outputs the front and rear deviating reach symbol buffer stored in the RAM 553. A combination of symbols corresponding to the out-reach is determined as a stop symbol. When "BZ4" indicating a combination of symbols other than front-rear deviance is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols corresponding to reach other than front-rear detachment stored in the reach pattern buffer other than front-rear detachment of RAM 553 is transmitted to the sub-control device. 262 is determined as the stop symbol. When "BZ5" indicating a combination of completely lost symbols is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 uses the symbol combination corresponding to the completely lost stored in the completely lost symbol buffer of the RAM 553 as a stop symbol. decide.

Also, when "BZ6" is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 selects a chance symbol as a combination of decorative symbols.

Incidentally, the variation pattern command and the symbol command set as described above are output in the external output process (step SB201) to be described later. Then, the sub-control device 262 that has input these commands determines the variation mode of the effect display device 42 based on the command, and controls the display so that the variation mode is displayed (variation display) on the effect display device 42. A command is issued to the device 45 .

Now, in step SB920, start setting processing is performed to indicate that the conditions for performing variable display in the special display devices 43L and 43R have been met. In this start setting process, a first display flag indicating whether or not the special display devices 43L and 43R are performing variable display is turned on, and a first display timer setting process is performed.

The first display timer is means for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time of the fluctuation display) in the special display devices 43L and 43R, and is taken into consideration when determining whether a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation display. .

The variable display times of the special display devices 43L and 43R in this embodiment are set to values corresponding to the variation patterns of the decorative symbols selected by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2. Based on such setting of the first display timer, when a control signal for starting variable display is output to the special display devices 43L and 43R in the next external output processing of the normal processing, the special display device A variable display is started at 43L and 43R. Then, after step SB920 ends, the variable display setting process ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 70, if the determination in step SB802 is affirmative, that is, if the variable display is in progress, the process proceeds to step SB812 to perform first display timer subtraction processing. Each time this process is performed, the value of the first display timer is decremented by 4 msec. For example, if the variable time is 10 seconds (10000 msec), "2500" is set for the first display timer, and 1 is subtracted every 4 msec.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to Step SB813, and it is determined whether or not the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed by considering the value of the first display timer after the above subtraction. At this time, an affirmative determination is made in step SB813 when the predetermined fluctuation time has passed, that is, when the value of the first display timer becomes "0".

If a negative determination is made in step SB813, in step SB817, switching display setting is performed to continue the variable display of the special display devices 43L and 43R, and this process ends. In addition, based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, a control signal for switching display is output to the special display devices 43L and 43R in the external output processing in the next normal processing. As a result, switching display (variable display) of the special display devices 43L and 43R is realized at the timing of the first display control process, that is, every 4 ms.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB813, the first display flag is cleared (turned off) in step SB814, and stop display setting for performing stop display on the special display devices 43L and 43R is performed in step SB815. .

In addition, based on the setting contents of the stop display setting, a control signal for performing stop display is output to the special display devices 43L and 42R in the next external output process in the normal process. For example, in the case of "16R probability variable jackpot A", "9-" is stopped and displayed (for example, lit for several seconds).

Subsequently, in step SB816, after the fluctuation end time setting process is performed, this process is terminated. Here, the fluctuation end time setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step SB1001, it is determined whether or not the stop display corresponds to the big hit or the small hit by considering the big hit winning flag and the small hitting winning flag. Here, when corresponding to a big hit or a small hit, the process moves to step SB1002, and hit setting is performed. Concretely, setting processing such as big hit middle flag, small hit middle flag, first variable flag, first variable timer, opening number counter and prize winning counter Vx is performed. Then, after step SB1002 is finished, the fluctuation end time setting process is finished.

The jackpot flag is state determination information for determining whether or not the jackpot state is in progress. Here, "1" indicating the occurrence of the jackpot state is set (turned on) as a flag value.

The flag during the small hit is state determination information for determining whether or not the state is in the small hit state, and here, like the flag during the big hit, "1" indicating the occurrence of the small hit state is set as the flag value. (turned on).

The first variable flag is state determination information for determining whether or not the variable winning device 32 is in the open state.

The first variable timer is a measuring means for measuring the opening time of the variable prize winning device 32 (time of occurrence of the special prize state), the interval between each special prize state, etc., and is defined from the opening start or end of the opening and closing plate 32a. This is taken into consideration when determining whether or not time has passed. In the win setting process of step SB1002, predetermined values corresponding to various wins are set with reference to the opening/closing pattern control table (see FIG. 91). For example, when the first time is the "long open" like "16R probability variable jackpot A", the first variable timer is set to "7500", and the first time is the "short open" like "JUB jackpot" In this case, "100" is set to the first variable timer. As a result, the maximum opening time (specified time) per opening/closing operation of the opening/closing plate 32a is set to "30 seconds" or "0.4 seconds".

As shown in FIG. 91, the opening/closing pattern control table contains the number of occurrences of the special prize state (the number of rounds) in each winning state, the opening time of the opening/closing plate 32a in each special prize state (each round), and the interval between each special prize state. Interval time and the like are set in advance.

The number-of-opening counter is used to determine the number of occurrences of the special prize state executed during the big win state or the small win state, that is, the number of execution times of the opening/closing process (“long opening” or “short opening”) of the variable prize winning device 32. state determination information. In the win setting process of step SB1002, an opening/closing pattern control table is taken into account to set initial values corresponding to various wins. For example, in the case of "16R probability variable jackpot A", "16" indicating 16 times is set, and in the case of "JUB jackpot", the sum of 5 times of "short opening" and 15 times of "long opening" "20" indicating 20 times is set as an initial value.

The winning counter Vx is winning counting means for counting the number of game balls that have won the variable winning device 32 . In this embodiment, in the switch reading process (see FIG. 63) of the timer interrupt process, it is determined whether or not there is a winning to the variable winning device 32 based on the detection information of the count switch 223, and the winning to the variable winning device 32 is determined. If it is determined that there is, 1 is added to the value of the winning counter Vx.

In addition, in the win setting process of step SB1002, the opening/closing pattern control table is taken into consideration, and the prescribed number K1, which is the maximum expected winning number to the variable winning device 32 per one opening/closing operation (one special prize state) of the opening/closing plate 32a, is performed. settings. As described above, the specified number K1 is predetermined for each open type (operation mode of the opening/closing member in one opening/closing operation) such as "long opening" or "short opening". For example, the specified number K1 is set to "10" for "long open", and "3" is set for the specified number K1 to be "short open".

In the winning setting process of step SB1002, setting of an opening command for telling the start of a big win or a small win is also performed. However, in the case of a "JUB jackpot", an opening command is set after five "short openings" (such as a special prize state start process in step SB1217, which will be described later). As a result, in the case of a "JUB big win", a big win notification performance or the like is performed after five "short openings" are completed, and so far it is not possible to distinguish it from the case of a small win.

Now, in step SB1001, when it is determined that the big hit or the small hit is not supported, that is, the big hit flag and the small hit flag are off, the process moves to step SB1003.

In step SB1003, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the support number counter is "0". The support number counter is a means to measure the duration of the "high support mode" (how many times the variable display), and as described later, after the jackpot ends, the value corresponding to each jackpot is set as the counter value. be.

Here, if the counter value of the support number counter is "0", this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the support number counter is set (when the counter value is other than "0"), it is assumed that the high support mode is being set, and in step SB1004, the value of the support number counter is decremented by 1. . At step SB1004, a process of subtracting 1 from the game state identification counter Kj is also performed. After that, the process moves to step SB1005.

At step SB1005, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the support number counter is "0". That is, it is determined whether or not the current variation display is the predetermined number of variation displays after the end of the big win (after the high support mode is given). Here, if the value of the support number counter is "0", the value of the support mode flag is changed to "A0(H)" indicating "low support mode" in step SB1006, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step SB1005 that the counter value of the support number counter is not "0", this processing ends.

Next, the variable winning device control processing of step SB206 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step SB1201, it is determined whether or not the flag during the big hit or the flag during the small hit is on. If a negative determination is made here, this processing is terminated as it is.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SB1202, the count value of the first variable timer is decremented by one in subsequent step SB1202.

In subsequent step SB1203, it is determined whether or not the first variable flag is ON. If the determination here is affirmative, that is, if the variable winning device 32 is in the open state, the process proceeds to step SB1204 to determine whether the count value of the first variable timer is "0", that is, if the open/close plate 32a is 1. It is determined whether or not the opening time (specified time "30 seconds" or "0.4 seconds") per opening/closing operation ("long opening" or "short opening") remains.

If a negative determination is made in step SB1204, the process proceeds to step SB1205, and whether or not the value of the winning counter Vx is equal to or greater than the specified number K1, that is, the number of game balls that have won the variable winning device 32 in one special prize state It is determined whether or not the number of balls has reached the maximum number of prizes to be won (the prescribed number of "10" or "3"). If a negative determination is made in step SB1205, that is, if the timing for closing the variable prize winning device 32 (the timing for ending the special prize state) has not yet arrived, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the determination in step SB1204 or step SB1205 is affirmative, the process advances to step SB1206 to set the first variable timer.

Here, the first variable timer indicates whether a predetermined time has passed since the end of the special prize state (for example, whether a predetermined time has passed since the end of the big win or small win, or whether the next time has passed since the end of the predetermined special prize state). In order to determine whether the interval until the start of the special prize state has elapsed, etc.), the opening/closing pattern control table is taken into consideration, and a predetermined value (for example, a value "750" corresponding to "3 seconds", or "250" corresponding to "1 second") is set.

After that, the process advances to step SB1207 to check whether or not the counter value of the number-of-opening counter is "0", that is, whether or not the number of executions of the prize state ("long opening" or "short opening") has reached a specified number of times. judge.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SB1207, open end setting processing is performed in step SB1210, and this processing ends. In the end setting process of step SB1210, the first variable flag is turned off and the winning end flag is turned on.

If a negative determination is made in step SB1207, that is, if the number of executions of the special prize state (“long open” or “short open”) has not reached the prescribed number of times, then in step SB1211, special prize transfer processing is performed, and this processing is executed. finish.

In the special prize transfer process of step SB1211, 1 is subtracted from the value of the open number counter, and the first variable flag is turned off. As a result, the opening/closing process is repeated until the number of executions of the special prize state reaches the specified number of times.

Now, if a negative determination is made in step SB1203, that is, if it is within a predetermined time after the end of the special prize state (within a predetermined time after the end of winning, or during the interval between special prize states), the process proceeds to step SB1212. , determines whether the value of the first variable timer is "0".

If the determination in step SB1212 is affirmative, that is, when the predetermined time has passed since the end of the special prize state, and the timing of moving to the next process (start of the next special prize state, or start of normal game) is reached , to step SB1215. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SB1212, this process ends.

In step SB1215, it is determined whether or not to end the big win state or the small win state by referring to the above winning end flag.

When an affirmative determination is made in step SB1215, this process is terminated after a winning end setting process is performed in step SB1216.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SB1215, this process ends after the special prize state start process is performed in step SB1217.

In the per end setting process of step SB1216, while turning off the flag during the big hit or the small hit, the switching process of the lottery mode flag, the switching process of the support mode flag, the setting process of the support number counter, the setting process of the game state notification command , setting processing of an ending command that announces the end of a big hit or a small hit, etc. are performed.

In the lottery mode flag switching process, the lottery mode flag switching setting is performed based on the various jackpot flags described above. As a result, when the "high probability mode" is set after the jackpot ends (various "probability variable jackpot flags" or "JUB jackpot flags" are on), "53 (H)" indicating the occurrence of the "high probability mode" is set as the flag value. On the other hand, when the "low probability mode" is set (various "normal jackpot flags" are on), "50 (H)" indicating the occurrence of the "low probability mode" is set as the flag value.

However, when the small hit winning flag is ON, the switching process of the lottery mode flag is not performed, and the flag value related to the original mode is set as it is. For example, if the "high probability mode" is set before the occurrence of the small hit state (flag value "53 (H)" of the lottery mode flag), the "high probability mode (lottery mode)" A flag value "53 (H)") of the flag is set.

In the support mode flag switching process, the support mode flag switching setting is performed based on the various jackpot flags described above. As a result, when "20 times/high support mode", "30 times/high support mode", "40 times/high support mode" or "50 times/high support mode" is given after the end of the jackpot, the flag value "A1 (H)" is set as the flag value, and in the case of "30 times/high support mode S", "A2 (H)" is set as the flag value, and in the case of "until the next time/high support mode" "A3(H)" is set as the flag value.

In the support number counter setting process, the support number counter switching setting is performed based on the various jackpot flags described above. As a result, if "20 times/high support mode", "30 times/high support mode", "40 times/high support mode" or "50 times/high support mode" is given after the jackpot ends, support As the value of the number counter, "20" corresponds to 20 times of variable display, "30" corresponds to 30 times of variable display, "40" corresponds to 40 times of variable display, or "50" corresponds to 50 times of variable display. set. Further, when "30 times/high support mode S" is provided, "30" corresponding to 30 times of variable display is set as the value of the support number counter. When "until the next time, high support mode" is given, the value of the support number counter is set to a value that cannot be practically reached (for example, "99999" corresponding to 99999 fluctuation displays).

The game state notification command is a command for notifying the sub-control device 262 of the game state set after the end of the jackpot. In setting the command, first, a game state check process is performed. Since the game state check process is the same as the game state check process (see FIG. 68) in step SB109, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

The game state notification command includes the game state determination value Xj related to the new game state grasped by the game state check process. As will be described later, the sub-control device 262 that has received this switches the game state (game state determination value Xj) that it has grasped to a new game state (game state determination value Xj). It should be noted that the game state notification command may be omitted, and instead of this, the game state determination value Xj may be included in an ending command or the like for announcing the end of the jackpot state.

It should be noted that the big hit flag, the small hit flag, and various "big hit flags" are turned off after completion of various processes such as the process of switching the lottery mode flag. Also, when the winning setting (step SB1002) is performed in the setting process at the end of fluctuation in FIG. 71, the lottery mode flag is reset once (set to "50 (H)"), A configuration in which the “high-probability mode” is interrupted may be employed.

In the special prize state start processing of step SB1217, the first variable flag is turned on, and the opening time ("7500" or "100") for the next special prize state is set to the first variable by referring to the opening/closing pattern control table. In addition to setting the timer, the stipulated number K1 for the next special prize state is also set. Furthermore, the value of the winning counter Vx is reset to "0".

Various control signals are output to the variable winning device 32 in the external output process of the next normal process based on the on/off state of the first variable flag. When the first variable flag is ON, a control signal for opening the opening/closing plate 32a is output to the variable winning device 32, and the big winning opening is opened. On the other hand, when the first variable flag is off, a control signal for closing the opening/closing plate 32a is output to the variable winning device 32, and the big winning opening is closed.

Next, the second display control processing of step SB207 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In FIG. 74, at step SB2101, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol display device 41 is performing variable display by looking at the setting status of the second display flag indicating whether or not the normal symbol display device 41 is performing variable display. judge. Specifically, when the second display flag is on, it is considered that the normal symbol display device 41 is in the process of variable display, and when the second display flag is off, the normal symbol display device 41 varies. It is considered that the display is stopped, which corresponds to a state in which the display is stopped.

If the determination in step SB2101 is negative, the process advances to step SB2102 to determine whether or not the value of normal hold counter Nc is greater than zero. At this time, if the value of the normal reservation counter Nc is 0, the process is terminated.

If the variable display is not in progress and the value of the normal hold counter Nc>0, the process proceeds to step SB2103. At step SB2103, 1 is subtracted from the normal hold counter Nc. At step SB2104, a process of shifting the data stored in the normal variation reservation area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth reserve areas of the normal variable reserve area to the execution area side. The data in each area is shifted in the order of reserved first area, reserved third area→reserved second area, reserved fourth area→reserved third area, and so on.

Thereafter, in step SB2105, start setting processing is executed. In this process, a process is performed to indicate that the condition for performing variable display in the normal symbol display device 41 has been established. Specifically, the setting process of the second display timer is performed while turning on the second display flag. The second display timer is a means for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time) of the fluctuation display performed by the normal symbol display device 41, and is taken into consideration when determining whether a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation display. be done.

In this embodiment, during the "low support mode", since the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed by the normal symbol display device 41 is set to 2 seconds, the second display timer is set to "500". . Further, during the "high support mode", since the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed by the normal symbol display device 41 is set to 0.4 seconds, the second display timer is set to "100".

Based on the setting in the start setting process, in the next normal process external output process, when a control signal to the effect of starting the variable display is output to the normal symbol display device 41, the normal symbol display device 41 fluctuates Display starts. As described above, the normal symbol display device 41 is configured to light up and display "o" or "x" as a normal symbol. , the display is switched to "○". Then, after step SB2105 ends, the second display control process ends.

Now, when the affirmative determination is made in step SB2101, that is, when the variable display is being performed on the normal symbol display device 41, the process proceeds to step SB2106, and the second display timer subtraction process is performed. Each time this process is performed, the count value of the second display timer is decremented by one.

Subsequently, proceeding to Step SB2107, it is determined whether or not the count value of the second display timer is "0", that is, whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed. When an affirmative determination is made in step SB2107, the flag during the second display is turned off in step SB2108, and normal symbol stop display setting for performing stop display by the normal symbol display device 41 is performed in step SB2109. Then, based on the setting contents of the normal symbol stop display setting, a control signal to the effect that the normal symbol display device 41 performs the stop display is output in the external output process in the next normal process. That is, if the winning pattern is selected, the "O" symbol (the winning symbol) is stopped and displayed (for example, it lights up only for several seconds), and if the winning pattern is lost, the "X" symbol is stopped and displayed.

In addition, as described above, it is determined whether or not winning is based on the value of the normal symbol random number counter CB4 stored in the execution area of the normal variation reservation area.

Specifically, among the numerical values 0 to 9 of the normal symbol random number counter CB4, the winning value is two of "0, 1" in "low support mode", and "0 to 7" in "high support mode". 8 pieces.

Subsequently, the flow advances to step SB2110 to perform fluctuation end time setting processing, and terminates this processing. In this process, if the stop display corresponds to winning, a setting process for opening/closing the opening/closing accessory 37Y is performed. Specifically, the second variable flag is turned on and the open time is set in the second variable timer.

The second variable flag is state determination information for determining whether or not the opening/closing accessory 37Y is in the open state.

The second variable timer is a means for measuring the opening time (remaining time) of the opening/closing accessory 37Y, and is taken into consideration when determining whether or not a specified time has elapsed from the start of opening. In this embodiment, the opening time of the opening and closing accessory 37Y differs between the "high support mode" and the "low support mode", and in the "high support mode", the second variable timer is set to "1000". In the "low support mode", "100" is set for the second variable timer.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step SB2107, in step SB2111, switching display setting is performed to continue the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41, and this processing ends. Then, based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, a control signal for performing switching display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the external output processing in the next normal processing. Specifically, if the current lighting is "o", the display is switched to "x", and if it is "x", the display is switched to "o". As a result, the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41 is realized at the timing of the second display control process, that is, every 4 ms.

Next, the opening/closing accessory control processing in step SB208 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step SB2201, it is determined whether or not the second variable flag indicating whether or not the opening/closing accessory 37Y is in the open state is ON. Here, when it is determined that the second variable flag is not ON (the opening/closing accessory 37Y is in the closed state), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step SB2201, that is, if the second variable flag is ON, it is assumed that the opening/closing accessory 37Y is in the open state, and the second variable timer subtraction process is performed in step SB2202. Each time this process is performed, the value of the second variable timer is decremented by one.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to Step SB2203, and it is determined whether or not the specified open time has elapsed, taking into consideration the value of the second variable timer after the subtraction. Here, an affirmative determination is made in step SB2203 when the specified opening time has passed, that is, when the value of the second variable timer becomes "0". If a negative determination is made here, the processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB2203, the process moves to step SB2204, performs end setting processing in step SB2204, and then ends this processing. In the end setting process of step SB2204, a process of turning off the second variable flag is performed.

In addition, based on the ON/OFF state of the second variable flag, various control signals are output to the opening/closing accessory 37Y in the external output process of the next normal process. When the second variable flag is ON, a control signal for opening the movable blade 37Ya is output to the opening/closing accessory 37Y, and the opening/closing accessory 37Y is in an open state. On the other hand, when the second variable flag is off, a control signal for closing the movable blade 37Ya is output to the opening/closing accessory 37Y, and the opening/closing accessory 37Y is closed. This makes it impossible for the game ball to enter the lower start winning opening 33YB.

Next, the payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. For convenience of explanation, reception interrupt processing will be described first with reference to FIG. 76, and then main processing will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing reception interrupt processing executed by the payout control device 311. FIG. The reception interrupt process is a process that is executed by interrupting when the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261 . When the payout control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, other processing executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 is put on standby for a while, and reception interrupt processing is executed. When the reception interrupt process is executed, the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is first stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513 at step SB3001, and the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is stored at step SB3002. Turns on the command reception flag and terminates this reception interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referenced and stored in a predetermined storage area, and the storage pointer is used to store the next received command in the next storage area. is updated.

In this embodiment, the reception processing of a command transmitted from the main controller 261 is performed by interrupt processing executed when the command is received. In timer interrupt processing, it is checked whether a command has been received before command determination processing (step SB3201) is performed. The command reception flag may be turned on, and if the command has not been received, the process may proceed to the command determination process. In such a case, whether or not the command has been received is checked by checking the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port at predetermined intervals.

Next, the main processing of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 77 is a flow chart showing the main processing of the payout control device 311, and this main processing is activated upon resetting when the power is turned on.

First, in step SB3101, initial setting processing is executed upon power-on. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. Then, RAM access is permitted at step SB3103, and an external interrupt vector is set at step SB3104.

After that, in step SB3106, it is determined whether information on the occurrence of power failure is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 or not. If power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a, the RAM determination value is calculated in step SB3107, and in subsequent step SB3108, whether the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value saved at the time of power failure. No, that is, the validity of the backup is determined. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of RAM 513 . It is also possible to determine the effectiveness of the backup by checking whether the keywords written in a predetermined area of the RAM 513 are correctly saved.

If the power failure occurrence information is not set in step SB3106, or if the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) in step SB3108, the process proceeds to the initialization processing of the RAM 513 after step SB3115. Transition.

At step SB3115, the entire area of RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and at step SB3116, the initial value of RAM 513 is set. After that, in step SB3117, the CPU peripheral device is initialized, and the process proceeds to step SB3114 to permit interrupts.

On the other hand, on the condition that power failure occurrence information is set in step SB3106, and that the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal in step SB3108, processing at power recovery process). That is, at step SB3109, the stack pointer before the power interruption is restored, at step SB3110, the power interruption occurrence information is cleared, and at step SB3111, the payout permission flag for permitting the payout of prize balls is cleared. At step SB3112, the CPU peripheral device is initialized, and at step SB3113, the used register is restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. FIG. Furthermore, in step SB3114, interrupts are permitted.

After the interrupt is permitted in step SB3114, in the process of step SB3122, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a. Here, if information on the occurrence of power failure is set, it means that the power has been shut down, so the processing from step SB3123 onwards is performed as power failure processing at the time of power failure. In the power failure process, first, in step SB3123, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited, and in the next step SB3124, command determination processing, which will be described later, is executed. After that, in step SB3125, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 are saved in the stack area, in step SB3126 the value of the stack pointer is stored in the backup area 513a, and in step SB3127 the RAM judgment value is calculated and stored in the backup area 513a. , and the RAM access is prohibited in step SB3128, and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area backed up in the RAM 513 .

Since the processing of step SB3122 confirms the occurrence information of the power failure after the completion of the processing performed when the power is turned on, the amount of data to be stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 is reduced compared to when each processing is in progress. less and can be easily memorized. In addition, when returning to the state before the power shutdown, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, the return can be easily performed, and the processing load of the payout control device 311 can be reduced. .

Next, timer interrupt processing of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This timer interrupt process is started periodically (with a cycle of 2 msec in this embodiment).

In the timer interrupt processing, first, a command is acquired from the main controller 261, and determination processing of the command is performed (step SB3201). This command determination processing will be described below with reference to FIG.

FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing command determination processing performed by the payout control device 311. FIG. In the command determination process (steps SB3124, SB3201), first, it is determined whether or not the command reception flag is turned on in step SB3301. The command reception flag is turned on when a command transmitted from main controller 261 is received in the above-described reception interrupt processing (see FIG. 76).

If it is determined at step SB3301 that the command reception flag is off, no new command has been received from main controller 261, so this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command reception flag is ON at step SB3301, the received command is read from the RAM 513 at step SB3302, and the command reception flag is turned OFF at step SB3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step SB3303, the processing of steps SB3302 to SB3311 can be skipped until a new command is received, so the control of the payout control device 311 can be reduced.

The type of command read from the RAM 513 is determined in the processing of steps SB3304 to SB3306. At step SB3304 it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout initialization command, at step SB3305 it is determined whether or not it is a payout return command, at step SB3306 whether it is a prize ball command No is determined.

If the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a payout initialization command, it is determined at step SB3307 whether or not the payout permission flag has already been turned on. Since the controller 261 has instructed the RAM 513 to be initialized, the working area (area) of the RAM 513 other than the stack area is cleared to 0 at step SB3308, and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set at step SB3309. Thereafter, at step SB3311, the payout permission flag is turned on to set the payout permission of prize balls.

As described above, the main controller 261 performs the initialization process of the RAM 503 after transmitting the payout initialization command, and the payout control device 311 initializes the RAM 513 after receiving the payout initialization command. is performed, the timing at which the RAM 503 is initialized and the timing at which the RAM 513 is initialized are substantially the same. Therefore, even if the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261, the RAM 513 is initialized due to the timing of initialization being shifted, and control corresponding to the received command cannot be performed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of the harmful effects of Also, since the payout permission flag is turned on after the RAM 513 is initialized, the payout permission of prize balls can be reliably set.

On the other hand, if the payout permission flag is already turned on at step SB3307, this command determination process is terminated without clearing the work area of the RAM 513 and initializing the RAM 513. FIG. That is, the process of step SB3307 prohibits the RAM 513 from being initialized while the payout permission flag is set. Since the payout initialization command is a command that is transmitted only when the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on when the power is turned on, it will not be received with the payout permission flag turned on. It is conceivable that the payout control device 311 has recognized it as a payout initialization command due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, when the payout permission flag is turned on, clearing the work area of the RAM 513 (step SB3308) and setting the initial value of the RAM 513 (step SB3309) may cause problems such as not paying out prize balls remaining. A bad effect occurs and a loss is given to the player, but since the RAM 513 is prevented from being initialized while the payout permission flag is turned on, the loss to the player can be prevented.

Also, if the command sent from the main control device 261 is a payout return command (step SB3304: NO, step SB3305: YES), the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power shutdown, In order to permit the payout of prize balls, the payout permission flag is turned on at step SB3311. That is, when there is power-off occurrence information and the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power-off, payout of prize balls is permitted. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step SB3311, it means that the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so the read pointer is set to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

Furthermore, if the command sent from the main controller 261 is a prize ball command (step SB3305: NO, step SB3306: YES), in step SB3310, the received number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls and stored. , the payout permission flag is turned on at step SB3311 to allow the payout of prize balls. At this time, the payout control device 311 sequentially reads the prize ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer), and adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the commands to the total number of prize balls stored in a predetermined buffer area. and memorize it. Since the payout of prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls is performed based on the prize ball command transmitted from the main controller 261, the prize ball command is a payout instruction command for instructing the payout of prize balls. . In addition, when the prize ball command is received, the payout permission is set immediately, so the prize balls can be paid out early for the win. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step SB3311, it means that the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so the read pointer is set to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

It should be noted that the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is neither a payout initialization command (step SB3304: NO), nor a payout return command (step SB3305: NO), nor a prize ball command (step SB3306: NO), The command determination process is ended without turning on the payout permission flag.

Here, returning to the flowchart of FIG. 78, description will be made. When the command determination process ends, it is determined in step SB3202 whether or not the payout permission flag has been turned on in the command determination process. Here, if the payout permission flag is not turned on, this processing is terminated as it is. In other words, it is possible to prevent the prize balls from being paid out before the command is transmitted from the main controller 261 .

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB3202, the firing control device 312 is set to permit firing in step SB3203, and the state return switch 321 is checked in step SB3204. Execute the return operation. By this process, when the state recovery switch 321 is pressed when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging occurs in the dispensing motor, the dispensing motor is rotated forward and reverse, and the ball clogging is resolved (returned to a normal state). .

After that, in step SB3205, the setting of the lower tray full state or the lower tray full state canceled state is executed according to the change in the state of the lower tray 15. FIG. That is, the full state of the lower tray 15 is determined by the detection signal of the lower tray full switch. , execute the setting of the lower tray full state release state. Further, at Step SB3206, the setting of the no-ball-in-tank state (out-of-ball state) or no-ball-in-tank state (with-ball state) is executed according to the change in the state of the ball in the tank. That is, the no-ball-in-tank state is determined by the detection signal of the no-tank-ball switch, the no-ball-in-tank state is set, the no-ball-in-tank state is set, and the no-ball-in-tank state is canceled. Run the settings.

After that, in step SB3207, it is determined whether or not there is a state to be notified, such as an error state, and if there is a state to be notified, it is notified.

Subsequently, a prize ball and rental ball payout control process is executed. Specifically, payout number setting processing is performed at step SB3208, motor control state acquisition processing is performed at step SB3209, and motor drive processing is performed at step SB3210.

At step SB3211, the state return switch 321 is checked, and on the condition that the ball removal is not possible and the ball removal operation is not started, the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the ball removal process. In subsequent Step SB3212, control of vibrator 360 (vibration motor control) is executed on the condition that the balls are clogged. After that, it returns to the beginning of this timer interrupt processing.

Next, normal processing of the sub-controller 262 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that this normal processing is a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this embodiment).

In this normal process, first, at step SB3901, the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port 554 is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main controller 261 has been received.

If a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of RAM 553 at step SB3902. A command buffer of the RAM 553 is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main controller 261 .

The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area. It is configured to update the Return to Beginning command. Therefore, when a command is stored and read, the store pointer and read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

In subsequent Step SB3903, command determination processing is performed. Here, command determination processing will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step SB4101, the received command is read from the command buffer of RAM553. It is determined in step SB4102 whether or not the command is an initialization command, in step SB4103 it is determined whether or not it is a return command, in step SB4104 it is determined whether or not it is a hold control command, and step SB4110. In step SB4111, it is determined whether or not it is a game state notification command, whether or not it is a variation pattern command is determined, and in step SB4112 it is determined whether or not it is a design command.

If the command sent from the main controller 261 is an initialization command, it means that the initialization of the RAM 553 is instructed by the main controller 261 when the power is turned on. Set the initial value of the RAM 553 . As a result, the game state information storage area of the RAM 553 stores the value “0” of the game state determination value Xj corresponding to the initial setting “normal state”. After that, this process is terminated.

If the command sent from the main controller 261 is a return command (step SB4102: NO, step SB4103: YES), the main controller 261 returns to the state before the power shutdown. At step SB4107, the control device 262 reads the game state determination value Xj (one of "0" to "7") included in the return command, and stores it in the game state information storage area of the RAM553. After that, this process is terminated.

Furthermore, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a hold control command (step SB4103: NO, step SB4104: YES), in step SB4108, various information included in the hold control command (jackpot determination information and jackpot type information, information indicating whether the variable display is triggered by the winning of the start winning port 33YA or 33YB, etc.) is stored in the sub-variation reservation area, and this processing ends.

The sub-variation reservation area is provided corresponding to the special variation reservation area of main controller 261 . That is, the sub-variation reservation area includes a first sub-variation reservation area corresponding to the upper start winning opening 33YA, a second sub-variation reservation area corresponding to the lower starting opening winning opening 33YB, and one sub execution area. Each of the two sub-variable reservation areas has four reservation areas (reservation first to reservation fourth areas).

In each reservation area, according to the reception history (receiving order) of the reservation control command and the winning history of the game ball included in the reservation control command (whether it is based on the winning of the start winning opening 33YA or 33YB, etc.) Information (jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, etc.) related to the variable display executed by the effect display device 42 is stored in chronological order. Thereby, the sub-control device 262 can grasp the number of suspensions of the variable display and the contents thereof.

If the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a game state notification command (step SB4104: NO, step SB4110: YES), at step SB4107, the value of the game state determination value Xj included in the game state notification command ( Any one of "0" to "7") is read out and stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM553. After that, this process is terminated.

If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a variation pattern command (step SB4110: NO, step SB4111: YES), it is the timing to start the variation display in the effect display device 42, so the start setting is performed in step SB4113. process and proceed to step SB4114.

In the start setting process of step SB4113, various settings related to the variable display performed by the effect display device 42 are performed.

In this start setting process, first, as in the case of the special variation reservation area of the main controller 261, the data stored in the sub-variation reservation area is sequentially shifted to the sub-execution area side. Subsequently, the variation time corresponding to the received variation pattern command is set in the variation display timer. The variable display timer is means for measuring the variable time (remaining time of variable display) in the effect display device 42, and is taken into account when determining whether or not a predetermined time has passed since the start of variable display.

In addition, in the start setting process, a variable display flag is turned on, which is taken into consideration when determining whether or not the effect display device 42 is performing variable display.

In this embodiment, based on the variation pattern information stored in the variation pattern command, the effect pattern related to the variation display of the decorative pattern is selected, and based on the hit type information (including "loss"), stop display after the variation time has elapsed Determine the stop symbol (combination of stop symbols) to be played. Information about the effect pattern and the stop symbol determined here is added to the sub-execution area of the sub-variation reservation area. It should be noted that the correspondence between the variable time information and the performance pattern and the correspondence between the jackpot type information and the stop symbols are stored in the ROM 552 of the sub-controller 262 as a table.

In addition, in the sub-controller 262, similarly to the main controller 261, the variation pattern corresponding to the "probability variable jackpot", the variation pattern corresponding to the "normal jackpot", the variation pattern corresponding to the "JUB jackpot" and the "small hit" , with respect to the variation pattern corresponding to the “outside reach”, the variation pattern corresponding to the “reach other than the outside”, and the variation pattern corresponding to the “complete loss”, the value of the game state determination value Xj is “0” to “ 7”, a plurality of corresponding table groups are stored with serial numbers from a predetermined reference address.

That is, when determining the display mode of the effect display device 42, the sub-control device 262 selects a predetermined game state (game state determination value A table corresponding to the values of Xj (“0” to “7”) is selected. At this time, by adding the value of the gaming state determination value Xj to the reference address, specifying the address where the table to be selected is stored is the same as when selecting the variation pattern table.

If the command transmitted from main controller 261 is a design command (step SB4111: NO, step SB4112: YES), design setting processing is performed in step SB4116, and this processing ends.

In the design setting process of step SB4116, based on the winning type information stored in the reservation area of the sub-variation reservation area, the design stored in the counter buffer (see FIG. 81) of the RAM 553 described later is displayed on the effect display device 42. It is set in the sub-execution area as a stop symbol to be stopped and displayed.

More specifically, when "BZ1" is set in the symbol command, any one of the 1st, 3rd, 5th, 7th and 9th symbol combinations is determined as the stop symbol. On the other hand, when "BZ2" is set in the symbol command, a combination of any of the 0, 2, 4, 6 and 8 symbols is determined as the stop symbol. Further, when "BZ3" is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols stored in the front-rear out-of-reach ready-to-win symbol buffer is determined as the stop symbol. When "BZ4" is set in the symbol command, a combination of symbols stored in the ready-to-win symbol buffer other than front and rear out is determined as a stop symbol. When "BZ5" is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols stored in the completely lost symbol buffer is determined as the stop symbol. When "BZ6" is set in the symbol command, a combination of symbols "3", "4" and "1" corresponding to the upper, middle and lower symbol display areas of the effect display device 42 is used as the stop symbol. decide.

Now, in step SB4114, it is determined whether or not the value of the game state determination value Xj included in the variation pattern command and the value of the game state determination value Xj stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 553 match. Here, if the two values match, the process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the two values are different, the state error flag is turned on at step SB4115, and at step SB4117, the game state determination value Xj included in the newly received variation pattern command is regarded as an appropriate value. , the value of the game state determination value Xj is stored in the game state information storage area. After that, this process is terminated. By turning on the state error flag, if the two values are different, the error display lamp 104 or the like informs the difference. Of course, the error notification means is not limited to the error display lamp 104, and the effect display device 42, the speaker SP, or the like may be used for error notification.

In recent years, game machines have a backup function in the main control unit, etc., so even if the power supply is cut off due to a power failure, etc., various data such as the game mode (game state) at that time can be stored. Since it can be held, even if the power is cut off during the high probability mode, the player can resume the game in the high probability mode when the power is restored.

However, if the backup function is used, it becomes possible to set the game machine to the high-probability mode from the start of business in the game hall, which is commonly called "morning". Such acts are performed in order to increase the power of attracting customers at the opening of the game hall, but there is a risk that the gambling spirit of the players will be seen as a prank. Various methods are conceivable as the setting method of the above action, but one example is a method of not resetting the gaming machine whose game mode was the high-probability mode at the end of business on the previous day. Further, as in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine is powered on or the like, in the configuration in which the main control device transmits the information regarding the game mode (game state determination value Xj) to the sub control device by a return command or the like, If the cable connector that connects the main control device and the sub control device is removed when the power is turned on, the sub control device cannot grasp the actual game mode set by the main control device, and the default game mode That is, the control related to the "normal mode" is performed.

In a general game machine, when performing effects on display effects means such as a liquid crystal display device, the display mode (for example, background color) is made different between the normal mode and the high probability mode so that the player, etc. This makes it easy to grasp the current game mode.

Also, in general, the sub-controller that controls the liquid crystal display device and the like does not have a backup function, so when the power is turned off, the default game mode ("normal mode") will be controlled.

Therefore, by using this, it is possible to change the display mode of the liquid crystal display device to that of the normal mode even though the actual game mode set by the main controller is the high probability mode. In that case, the current game mode cannot be easily determined just by looking at the liquid crystal display device, etc., and it becomes substantially difficult to confirm this action by a predetermined investigation or the like.

In particular, in a game machine in which a high-probability mode that is difficult to distinguish from a "normal mode" is set, such as the "variable latent probability state" of the present embodiment, the high-probability mode is set to open the game hall by the above action. If it is set from time to time, the actual game mode cannot be determined from the display mode of the liquid crystal display device.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the value of the game state determination value Xj included in the variation pattern command and the value of the game state determination value Xj stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 553 are different. If so, an error notification is given to that effect, and the value of the game state determination value Xj included in the newly received variation pattern command is stored in the game state information storage area. That is, the sub-control device 262 can grasp the appropriate game mode at that time. As a result, even if the action such as "Morning" is performed and the actual game mode set by the main controller 261 is the high probability mode, the presentation mode in the sub-controller 262 is the mode in the normal mode. Even if it is, when the variation pattern command is received, it is notified that the game mode is different, and the effect mode corresponding to the game state determination value Xj included in the variation pattern command is provided. As a result, actions such as the above-mentioned "morning" by the game hall can be suppressed.

Returning to the description of FIG. 80, after step SB3903 or when a negative determination is made in step SB3901, the process proceeds to step SB3904, and whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, the start of the previous normal process is performed. It is determined whether or not a predetermined period of time (1 msec in this example) has passed since. If the predetermined time has already passed, the process proceeds to step SB3905. On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the previous normal process, the process proceeds to step SB3912.

In step SB3905, various counter update processing is executed. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 uses various counter information when displaying decorative symbols. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 81, it is used to set the decorative pattern counter CB5 at the time of the big hit, the character effect counter CB8, and the outlier patterns of the upper pattern display area, the middle pattern display area, and the lower pattern display area. The upper, middle, and lower outlier symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are used.

The out-of-symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured such that register values are added using an R register (refresh register) in the CPU 551, and as a result, numerical values change randomly. The values of these counters are appropriately stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 553 .

The jackpot decoration pattern counter CB5 is for determining a pattern (jackpot pattern) to be stop-displayed on the effect display device 42 when a jackpot ("probability variable jackpot" or "normal jackpot") is won. In this embodiment, 5 odd-numbered symbols and 5 even-numbered symbols are set as the jackpot symbols. Therefore, five counter values (0 to 4) are prepared as the jackpot decoration symbol counter CB5. That is, the jackpot decoration symbol counter CB5 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 4, and returns to 0 after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 4). Then, when the symbol command transmitted from the main controller 261 is "BZ1" indicating a combination of odd-numbered jackpot symbols, based on a table (not shown) (a table that associates counter values with decorative symbols), for example, the counter value If is 0, it is ``1'', if it is 1, it is ``3'', if it is 2, it is ``5'', if it is 3, it is ``7''. ), and if it is 4, it is "9" (double eyes), and so on.

Further, when the symbol command is "BZ2" indicating a combination of even-numbered jackpot symbols, based on a table (not shown) (a table that associates counter values with decorative symbols), for example, if the counter value is 0, "0" (Vertical), if 1, "2" (Vertical), if 2, "4" (Vertical), if 3, "6" (Vertical), if 4, " A combination of even-numbered jackpot symbols is determined in such a manner as "8" (double order of).

The jackpot decoration symbol counter CB5 is periodically updated in the counter update process of step SB3905, and is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 553 at the timing when the sub-controller 262 receives the symbol command as described above. In this embodiment, the jackpot decorative pattern counter CB5 is stored in the jackpot decorative pattern counter buffer of the RAM 553, but the counter value is referred to at the timing of receiving the pattern command, etc., instead of being stored in the buffer. can be

The role product effect counter CB8 is for determining whether or not to execute a role product effect (additional effect), which will be described later, and the type thereof. 400 counter values (0 to 399) are prepared for the role product effect counter CB8. That is, the role product effect counter CB8 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 399, and returns to 0 after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 399).

The role product effect counter CB8 is periodically updated in the counter update process of step SB3905 and stored in the role product effect counter buffer of the RAM553. Then, it is taken into account in the role product effect setting process of step SB3910 to be described later.

The upper, middle, and lower losing pattern counters CL, CM, and CR determine each stop pattern (combination of losing patterns) in the upper, middle, and lower pattern display areas when the jackpot lottery results in "losing". Since one of ten decorative patterns is displayed in each row, ten counter values (0 to 9) are prepared for each row. A stopped pattern in the upper symbol display area is determined by the upper/missing symbol counter CL, a stopped symbol in the middle symbol display area is determined by the middle/missing symbol counter CM, and a stopped symbol in the lower symbol display area is determined by the lower/missing symbol counter CR. is determined.

In this embodiment, the values of the counters CL, CM, and CR are randomly updated by using the numerical value of the R register built into the CPU 551 . That is, when each outlier symbol counter CL, CM, CR is updated, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous value, and when the addition result exceeds the upper limit value, 10 is subtracted to determine the current value. be. The outlier symbol counters CL, CM, CR are updated so that the update times do not overlap, and the combinations of the outlier symbol counters CL, CM, CR are the front and back off reach symbol buffers of the RAM 553, the front and back non-outlier reach symbol buffers, and the It is stored in any of the complete missing design buffers.

Here, update processing of each outlier symbol counter CL, CM, CR will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 82, in step SB4001, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the top/outside symbol counter CL, and in step SB4002, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the inside/outside symbol counter CM. It should be noted that the upper, middle, and lower outlier symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured to be updated one by one in one update process. Therefore, when the bottom/outside symbol counter CR has been updated in the previous update process, the determination at step SB4001 is affirmative. Further, when the top/outside symbol counter CL has been updated in the previous update process, the determination at step SB4002 is affirmative. Then, if it is time to update the top/off symbol counter CL (YES at step SB4001), the process proceeds to step SB4003 to update the top/off symbol counter CL. If it is time to update the inside/outside symbol counter CM (YES at step SB4002), the process advances to step SB4004 to update the inside/outside symbol counter CM. Further, if it is time to update the bottom/missing symbol counter CR (NO in both steps SB4001 and SB4002), the process advances to step SB4005 to update the bottom/missing symbol counter CR. In steps SB4003 to SB4005, the outlier pattern counters CL, CM, and CR are updated by adding the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register to the previous counter value and subtracting 10 when the addition result exceeds the upper limit. , the calculation result is used as the current value of the outlier symbol counters CL, CM, CR.

According to the updating process of CL, CM, and CR, the upper, middle, and lower outlier symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated one by one in one update process, and the updating timing of each counter value overlaps. never. As a result, one set of the lost symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is updated each time the updating process is executed three times.

After that, in step SB4006, the combination of the updated outlier symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is the combination of the ready-to-win symbols (the symbol in the upper symbol display area and the symbol in the lower symbol display area are the same, and the upper and lower symbol display areas The pattern and the pattern in the middle pattern display area are different). It is determined whether or not. If the outlier pattern counters CL, CM, and CR are a combination of the front and rear outlier reach (the front and rear outlier pattern) (YES at step SB4007), the process proceeds to step SB4008, and the combination of the outlier pattern counters CL, CM, and CR at that time is determined. It is stored in the front-rear deviating reach pattern buffer of the RAM 553 . When the losing pattern counters CL, CM, CR are a combination of reach (symbols other than front and rear losing) (step SB4007 is NO), the process proceeds to step SB4009, and the losing pattern counters CL, CM, CR at that time. The combination of is stored in the reach pattern buffer of the RAM 553 except for the front and back deviation.

Also, if the combination is other than the ready-to-win pattern (step SB4006 is NO), proceed to step SB4010, determine whether or not the combination of the outlier pattern counters CL, CM, CR is a combination of outlier patterns, If the combination of outliers (completely outliers) is selected (YES at step SB4010), the process proceeds to step SB4011, and the combination of outliers counters CL, CM, and CR at that time is stored in the completely outliers design buffer of RAM 553. do. It should be noted that if both step SB4006 and step SB4010 are NO, the top, middle, and bottom symbols are aligned, that is, it corresponds to a combination of jackpot symbols. This processing ends without storing in the .

In the present embodiment, the chance symbols to be stop-displayed in the case of a "JUB jackpot" have a combination of decorative symbols of one pattern ("3", "4", "1"). There is no need to use counter information for display.

Returning to the description of FIG. 80, at step SB3907, display setting processing for performing various displays on the effect display device 42 is performed. In the display setting process, a variable display setting process for performing variable display of decorative symbols and the like on the effect display device 42, a pending display setting process for performing a pending display, and the like are mainly performed.

First, the variable display setting process will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 84, at step SB4301, it is determined whether or not the effect display device 42 is performing variable display by looking at the setting status of the variable display flag. Specifically, when the variable display flag is set (when it is ON), it is considered that the variable display is being performed, and when the variable display flag is canceled (when it is OFF), the variable display is performed. It is considered to be in a stop display corresponding to a stopped state. Note that the variable display flag is turned on when the variable display of the effect display device 42 is started (step SB4113 start setting processing) as described above, and when the variable display of the effect display device 42 is stopped and displayed (step SB4305) is turned off.

If the determination here is affirmative, that is, if it is at the start of fluctuation or during fluctuation, the process proceeds to step SB4302, and if the determination is negative, this processing ends.

In step SB4302, a change display timer subtraction process is performed. Each time this process is performed, the value of the display timer is decremented by 4 msec. For example, if the variable time is 10 seconds (10000 msec), "2500" is set for the variable display timer, and 1 is subtracted every 4 msec.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step SB4303, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed by considering the value of the fluctuation display timer after the above subtraction. At this time, an affirmative determination is made in step SB4303 when the predetermined fluctuation time has passed, that is, when the value of the fluctuation display timer becomes "0".

When a negative determination is made in step SB4303, in step SB4304, a variable execution process for executing variable display of the effect display device 42 is performed, and this process ends.

In this variation execution process, for example, based on various information stored in the execution area of the sub-variation reservation area of the RAM 553, various calculation processes such as generating a display command to be output to the display control device 45 and output setting of the command are performed. .

As a result, the display control device 45 performs the drawing process according to the command from the sub-control device 262 and starts the variable display of the pattern on the effect display device 42 . Then, once the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 261, until the variation time of the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern command elapses (the value of the variation display timer set in the start setting process of step SB4113 is Until it becomes "0"), the variable display of the pattern is continued under the cooperation of the sub-control device 262 and the display control device 45 .

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB4303, that is, if it is determined that the value of the variable display timer is "0", in step SB4305 stop display setting for performing stop display on effect display device 42 is performed. and terminate this process. In the stop display setting, the variable display flag is cleared (turned off), and a stop command for instructing the display control device 45 to stop the variable display in the effect display device 42 is set.

In addition, in the variation execution process of step SB4304, the effect mode switching setting process for performing the display mode in the effect display device 42 in the mode (performance mode) corresponding to the type of the game state is also performed.

Production mode in the present embodiment, depending on the game state (value of the game state determination value Xj), "normal mode" in which the "high support mode" is not provided, "high support mode" is provided. ``Chance mode'' and ``Until the next time/high support mode'', whose duration is unknown, and ``Gold mode'' that explicitly informs the player set to switch between

More specifically, when the game state determination value Xj stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 553 is "0", that is, when the "low probability mode" and the "low support mode" are provided, The effect mode in the effect display device 42 is set to "normal mode" (see FIG. 92).

In addition, when the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "3", that is, after the "high support mode" for a predetermined period ends, the state in which the "high probability mode" and the "low support mode" are given is a so-called Since it is in the "potential state", even in such a case, the effect mode in the effect display device 42 is set to the "normal mode" in order to make the state superficially the same as in the case of the "normal state".

When the game state determination value Xj stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 553 is "1", "2", "4", "5" or "7", that is, "20 times/high support mode" , “30 times, high support mode”, “40 times, high support mode”, “50 times, high support mode”, “30 times, high support mode S”, “until the next time, high support mode” non-notification production Alternatively, during the period of the "continuous support effect" to be described later, the effect mode in the effect display device 42 is set to the "chance mode" (see FIG. 94).

When the value of the game state determination value Xj stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 553 is "6", that is, in the state where "until the next time, high support mode" is given (excluding the non-notification effect period) , the effect mode in the effect display device 42 is set to "gold mode" (see FIG. 95).

Next, the pending display setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. First, in step SB4501, among the sub-fluctuation reservation areas, information (small hit information).

If a negative determination is made here, that is, if the small winning information is not included, normal pending display update processing is performed in step SB4502. As shown in FIG. 92, in the normal hold display, in the first hold display region W3a and the second hold display region W3b, hold images TA1- TA4, TB1 to TB4 are displayed. Normally, as each of the holding images TA1 to TA4 and TB1 to TB4, a "holding lamp image" imitating a circular holding lamp is displayed.

Then, in the normal pending display update process of step SB4502, display update to increase or decrease the number of pending images TA1 to TA4, TB1 to TB4 displayed in the lighting mode or the extinguished mode according to the increase or decrease of the pending number in the sub-variation pending area processing will be performed.

On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step SB4501, that is, if the small hit information is included in any of the first to fourth holding areas of the second sub-variation holding area, in step SB4503, the holding display change process and then terminate this process.

By performing the pending display change process of step SB4503, among the four pending images TB1 to TB4 displayed in the second pending display area W3b, of the pending images TB1 to TB4 corresponding to the pending area containing the small hit information One of them replaces the "holding lamp image" in the normal holding display with the "star image". For example, in the example shown in FIG. 97, the third reserved image TB3 is changed to a "star-shaped image".

Returning to the description of FIG. 80, in the lamp setting process of step SB3908, the lighting pattern of lamps/electrical decorations is set in order to synchronize with the display effect performed by the effect display device .

In the sound setting process of step SB3909, the output pattern of the speaker SP is set in order to synchronize with the display effect performed by the effect display device 42. FIG. Also, when a command related to sound such as notification of error occurrence is transmitted from the main controller 261, settings for performing these controls are also performed at step SB3909.

At step SB3910, a role product effect setting process is executed. In the role product performance setting process, various settings regarding the role product performance using the upper performance role product unit 761 and the lower performance role product unit 762 are performed. Note that the character object effect setting process is a process that is performed as an additional effect when a support continuation effect (roulette effect), which will be described later, is performed, and is executed only when the support continuation effect (roulette effect) is executed. processing. Details of the role product effect setting process in step SB3910 will be described later.

At step SB3911, other processing such as control setting of the customer waiting effect (for example, a demo screen display set to be displayed after a predetermined period of time has passed while the variable display of the effect display device 42 is not performed) is performed. .

In step 3912, an external output process is executed to transmit control signals to each device based on the settings in steps SB3905 to SB3911. For example, a display command is transmitted to the display control device 45 when the effect display device 42 performs a variable display of decorative symbols. Also, when executing the role product production, it outputs various control signals such as a motor control signal (driving pulse signal) to the production role product units 761, 762 and the like.

After the processing of steps SB3905 to SB3912, which is performed every 1 msec, is executed, or if the determination in step SB3904 is negative, the process proceeds to step SB3913 to determine whether the RAM 553 stores power-off occurrence information. determine whether Note that the power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 261 .

If the power-off occurrence information is not stored, the process advances to step SB3914 to determine whether or not the RAM 553 has been destroyed. If the RAM 553 is not destroyed here, the process returns to step SB3901 and the normal process is repeated. On the other hand, if the RAM 553 has been destroyed, the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step SB3913 that information on occurrence of power failure is stored, power failure processing is executed in step SB3915. In the power-off processing, generation of interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased. After executing the power-off process, the process loops infinitely.

Next, the display mode and the like on the display section 42a of the effect display device 42 will be described together with the flow of the game played by the player.

In the display section 42a of the effect display device 42, in the normal state (when the value of the game state determination value Xj is "0"), a variable display area W1 consisting of upper, middle and lower three pattern display areas is set. (See FIG. 92). In addition, an instruction display area W2 for instructing (recommending) the shooting mode of the game ball to the player is set below the variable display area W1, and the pending number of the variable display is displayed further below it. A reserved display area W3 is set.

The reservation display area W3 is set corresponding to the sub-variation reservation area. That is, the reservation display area W3 is divided into a first reservation display area W3a and a second reservation display area W3b corresponding to the first sub-variation reservation area and the second sub-variation reservation area. The reserved images TA1 to TA4 and TB1 to TB4 corresponding to the four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area) are displayed in the reserved display areas W3a and W3b (see FIG. 92).

The reserved images TA1 to TA4 and TB1 to TB4 are normally displayed in a light-off state (see the hatched portion) at the normal time (when not on hold), and when the variable display is held in a predetermined reserved area, the Reservation images TA1 to TA4 and TB1 to TB4 corresponding to the reservation area are switched and displayed in the lighting mode (see the white portion).

In the example shown in FIG. 92, the first reserved image TA1 and the second reserved image TA2 of the first reserved display area W3a are displayed in a lighting mode, and the remaining reserved images TA3, TA4, TB1 to TB4 are displayed in a lighting mode. state is shown. That is, the variable display is reserved in the first reserved area and the second reserved area of the first sub-variation reserved area, and the number of reservations of the current variable display is "2" related to the upper start winning opening 33YA. It is shown.

In the normal state, the instruction display area W2 displays "←" to encourage the player to shoot a game ball toward the left side area of the variable display unit 35 (this action is hereinafter referred to as "left hitting"). left-handed” is displayed. In accordance with this, the player plays the game by "playing left".

When left-handed, most of the game balls are guided toward the upper start winning opening 33YA located below the variable display device unit 35 by the nail or the like. Among them, how many game balls will enter the upper start winning opening 33YA.

In this embodiment, the through gate 34 that triggers the opening of the lower start winning opening 33YB (opening/closing accessory 37Y) flows down the right side area of the variable display unit 35, that is, the left side area of the variable display unit 35. Since the game ball is placed at a position where it cannot be reached, when the player continues to "hit left", the opening/closing accessory 37Y is not opened, and the game ball enters the lower start winning opening 33YB. never.

In other words, in the normal state, the game is set so that the game can be played with a greater advantage if the game is played with a "left shot".

When the game ball enters the upper start winning opening 33YA, in the variable display area W1 of the effect display device 42, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are variably displayed for each of the symbol display areas. In this embodiment, decorative patterns Z with numbers "1" to "9" are displayed. Various decorative patterns Z are scrolled and variably displayed from right to left with periodicity in ascending or descending numerical order, thereby forming a series of pattern rows.

In this case, in the upper design display area, various decorative designs Z are displayed in descending order (in decreasing order of attached numbers), and in the middle design display area and lower design display area, various decorative designs Z are similarly displayed in ascending order (applied displayed in ascending order). Then, when a predetermined time has passed, the variable display stops in the order of the upper design display area→the lower design display area→the middle design display area, and the decorative design Z is stopped and displayed in each design display area.

When a big winning lottery is won based on the winning of the game ball into the upper start winning opening 33YA, the decoration pattern Z of the big winning combination is stop-displayed on the predetermined big winning line through the ready-to-win state. In the normal state of the present embodiment, the jackpot line is composed of left, middle and right vertical lines and two diagonal lines (referred to as 5 lines). Therefore, in the upper, middle, and lower pattern display areas, when three decorative patterns Z of a combination of big wins are stopped and displayed side by side on any one of the five lines, the occurrence of a big win state is determined.

When a jackpot state occurs, the opening/closing plate 32a of the variable prize winning device 32 is opened to allow game balls to enter the jackpot, and a predetermined jackpot effect is displayed on the display section 42a of the effect display device 42. be started. Here, the number of jackpot rounds may be displayed.

However, in this embodiment, since the variable winning device 32 is arranged in the right side area of the variable display unit 35 (the position where the game ball flowing down the left side area of the variable display unit 35 cannot reach), If the player continues to "hit left", the variable winning device 32 cannot win the game ball. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 93, when the big win effect is started, an action of the player shooting a game ball toward the right side area of the variable display device unit 35 (this action will be hereinafter referred to as , "Right-handed") is displayed as "Right-handed →". Accordingly, the player performs a jackpot game by switching from ``left hitting'' to ``right hitting'' so that the game ball passes above the variable display device unit 35 and heads toward the right side area of the variable display device unit 35. .

Here, when the game ball is "right-handed", most of the game balls are guided toward the variable winning device 32 by the nail or the like, and win the variable winning device 32.例文帳に追加This allows the player to acquire more game balls.

On the other hand, game balls that do not enter the variable winning device 32 and pass through the variable winning device 32 flow down toward the upper starting winning port 33YA or the lower starting winning port 33YB by the nail or the like.

In addition, in the right side area of the variable display device unit 35, a through gate 34 is provided that triggers the opening of the lower starting prize opening 33YB (opening/closing accessory 37Y) on the way down to the variable prize winning device 32. of game balls pass through the through gate 34 .

Here, when the game ball wins the open lottery that is performed due to passing through the through gate 34, the opening/closing accessory 37Y is opened, and the game ball can enter the lower start winning opening 33YB. It becomes possible.

After the end of the jackpot, during the period when the special display devices 43L and 43R (the performance display device 42) perform the variable display for a predetermined number of times, or until the next jackpot state occurs, the winning support related to the opening/closing accessory 37Y. "High support mode" is given as a mode.

Along with this, in the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42, a predetermined support effect (a "chance mode" effect or a "gold mode" effect) relating to the "high support mode" is performed, and the variable display area W1 is reduced. Is displayed. In the reduced variable display area W1, the upper, middle, and lower pattern display areas are switched to the left, middle, and right pattern display areas, and the number of jackpot lines is one.

Further, during the support effect, a support count display area W4 is set in the display section 42a of the effect display device 42 (see FIGS. 94 and 95). The support number display area W4 displays the number of support that is apparently determined to be given. Therefore, for example, even if the number of support times of "50 times" has been confirmed in the internal lottery, "20 times" is initially displayed for presentation.

More specifically, winning "16R normal jackpot B" or "4R normal jackpot B", "20 times high support mode", "30 times high support mode", "40 times high support mode" or When "50 times/high support mode" is provided, that is, when the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "1", "20 times" is initially displayed in the support times display area W4. Each time the variable display is performed, the value is decremented by one.

Similarly, winning "16R probability variable jackpot B" or "4R probability variable jackpot B", "20 times / high support mode", "30 times / high support mode", "40 times / high support mode" or "50 times When "high support mode" is provided, that is, when the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "4", "20 times" is initially displayed in the number of times of support display area W4. Each time the variable display is performed, the value is decremented by one.

On the other hand, when "16R normal jackpot A" or "4R normal jackpot A" is won and "30 times/high support mode S" is given, that is, the game state determination value Xj is "2" or "5". (except Xj=“5” in the case of the non-notification effect), “30 times” is initially displayed in the support number display area W4. Each time the variable display is performed, the value is decremented by one.

Also, if you win the "16R probability variable jackpot A", "4R probability variable jackpot A" or "JUB jackpot" and the "until the next time / high support mode" is given, that is, the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is " 6”, “Until the next time” is displayed in the support count display area W4 from the beginning. However, when the non-notification effect is performed, "30 times" is initially displayed in the support number display area W4. Each time the variable display is performed, the value is decremented by one.

As described above, while the "high support mode" is provided, the game ball is likely to enter the lower start winning port 33YB. In order to obtain an opportunity to release the object 37Y, it is preferable to continuously perform the “right stroke”. In other words, during the "high support mode", it is set so that the game can be played more advantageously by playing the game with the "right hand". Therefore, in the instruction display area W2 of the effect display device 42 in the "high support mode", "Right Hit" is displayed to recommend "Right Hit" to the player.

In the present embodiment, when the "high support mode" changes in general times (when the number of times display in the support times display area W4 does not become the end value "1 time"), that is, the value of the game state determination value Xj is "1", "2", "4", and "5", the variation time is set to "1 second" by the variation pattern table selected based on each gaming state determination value Xj (at the time of the jackpot except for). Then, in the display section 42a of the effect display device 42 during the support effect, a display effect corresponding to this is determined by the sub-control device 262 and executed.

Also, when the "high support mode" fluctuates for a specific number of times (when the number of times display in the support number display area W4 changes to the end value "1 time", that is, after the jackpot ends, "20th time", "30th time" , "40th time" or "50th time"), that is, when the value of the game state determination value Xj is "7", is selected based on the value "7" of the game state determination value Xj. It is set to "25 seconds" by the fluctuation pattern table (excluding the time of the big hit). Then, in the display section 42a of the effect display device 42 during the support effect, a display effect corresponding to this is determined by the sub-control device 262 and executed.

In the display section 42a of the effect display device 42 at the time of the specific times fluctuation (variation of 25 seconds), there is a continuous support effect that excites the player's interest, such as determining by lottery whether or not the "high support mode" is to be continued. done.

For example, in the present embodiment, a roulette effect is performed as the display effect (support continuation effect) at the time when the specific times change. In the roulette effect, a roulette pattern TR is displayed as shown in FIG. The roulette pattern TR includes "end" indicating that the number of supports ends here, "+10 times" indicating that the number of supports will be added by 10 times, and "next time" indicating that the number of supports will continue until the next big win. "until" is described.

In the roulette effect, the roulette pattern TR rotates and stops at the position indicated by the arrow TY to determine the subsequent game state.

Here, which item to stop depends on the number of grants of "high support mode" determined at the time of the jackpot lottery ("20 times", "30 times", "40 times", "50 times" or "until the next time ”) and the number of support grants (the value of the support number counter) at that time. Then, the determined item is displayed in the support count display area W4.

For example, if you win "16R normal jackpot B" with "50 times/high support mode", and after initially displaying "20 times" in the support count display area W4, the roulette effect is reached, the upper limit is not "until the next time", and the number of times support is left is "30 times", so the item "+10 times" is selected.

Also, for example, if you win the "4R normal jackpot A" with "30 times/high support mode" and after "30 times" is initially displayed in the support number display area W4, the roulette effect is reached, Since the upper limit is not "until the next time" and there is no remaining number of support grants, the item "end" is selected.

Also, for example, "16R probability variable jackpot A" with "until next time/high support mode" is won, non-notification effect is performed (game state determination value Xj becomes "5"), and support number display area W4 After "30 times" is initially displayed, when the roulette effect is reached, the upper limit is "until the next time", so the item "until the next time" is selected.

Now, when the "high support mode" ends and returns to the "low support mode", the display mode on the display section 42a of the effect display device 42 returns to the same state as the normal state (see FIG. 92). Therefore, the instruction display area W2 of the display section 42a displays "←left strike".

However, in this embodiment, if a small hit is won during the "high support mode" and the small hit information is stored in one of the reserved areas of the second sub-fluctuation reserved area related to the lower start winning opening 33YB , among the reserved images TB1 to TB4 displayed in the second reserved display area W3b, the display mode of the reserved images TB1 to TB4 corresponding to the reserved area storing the small winning information is an image of a form different from the normal form. changed (see FIG. 97). In the example shown in FIG. 97, the third reserved image TB3 is changed to a "star-shaped image". In the present embodiment, along with this, "Right hit →" is displayed in the instruction display area W2.

For this reason, even when the "high support mode" ends and the "low support mode" is returned to, if the small win information is stored in the holding area, the above display is performed and the small win is given to the player. It is suggested that it occurs.

As described above, since the opening time of the variable winning device 32 in the small winning state is extremely short, switching from the "left hitting" state to the "right hitting" after the occurrence of the small winning will not be in time, and the variable winning device In order to win the game ball to 32, it is necessary to "right hit" in advance. In this regard, in the present embodiment, the player can grasp that a small win will occur based on the suggestion of the small win, so that the player can prepare in advance and the chances of missing a small win are reduced.

Incidentally, as described above, when the support continuation effect (roulette effect) is performed, there is a case where the accessory effect using the upper effect accessory unit 761 and the lower effect accessory unit 762 is performed as an additional effect. .

Here, the role product effect setting process of step SB3910 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

First, in step SB6001, it is determined whether or not the current variable round is the round for execution of the roulette effect (support continuation effect), taking into account the value of the gaming state determination value Xj.

Here, if a negative determination is made, that is, if the roulette effect is not executed, in step SB6002, the value of the effect state flag JF, which will be described later, is reset to "0", and this processing ends.

The effect state flag JF is determination information for determining the effect state of the additional effect (mainly the effect using the effect accessory units 761 and 762).

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB6001, that is, if the current variable round is a roulette performance execution round, the process proceeds to step SB6003.

At step SB6003, the value of the effect state flag JF is taken into consideration, and it is determined whether or not it is currently in the pre-start stage (JF=0) of the additional effect. Here, when a negative determination is made, that is, after the start of the additional effect (JF≧1), the process proceeds to step SB6006.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB6003, that is, if the stage is before the start of the additional effect, the process proceeds to step SB6004.

At step SB6004, based on the value of the character product effect counter CB8 stored in the character product effect counter buffer of the RAM 553, effect determination processing for determining whether or not to execute the character product effect and its type is performed.

The correspondence relationship between the value of the role product effect counter CB8 and whether or not the role product effect is executed and its type is stored in the ROM 552 of the sub-control device 262 as a role product effect pattern determination table.

In the present embodiment, in the roulette effect of the effect display device 42, a plurality of accessory effect pattern determination tables are set corresponding to the confirmed display item of the roulette pattern TR that finally stops at the position indicated by the arrow TY. .

Specifically, "End" indicates that the support count ends here, "+10 times" indicates that the support count will be added to the next 10 times, and "Until the next time" indicates that the support count will continue until the next jackpot. corresponding to the three fixed display items such as "end" time, character effect pattern determination table, "+10 times" time, character effect pattern determination table, "until next time" time, character effect pattern determination table. There are 3 tables available.

In each table, the rate at which various performance patterns are selected differs depending on whether it corresponds to "end", "+10 times" or "until the next time". Then, if the number of times of support is continued, and if it corresponds to "until the next time", the presence or absence of the execution of the character production, and furthermore the development production pattern described later, than the case of "end" Various tables are configured so that the rate at which the

For example, when the fixed display item in the roulette effect is "end", the "at the time of 'end'/accessory effect pattern determination table" as shown in FIG. 100(a) is referred to. In this case, when the value of the character effect counter CB8 is 0 to 249, "no character effect" is selected and no character effect is performed as an additional effect.

On the other hand, when the value of the character object effect counter CB8 is 250 to 399, "with character effect" is selected, and the character effect is executed as an additional effect. Of these, when CB8=250 to 299, the "non-development pattern" character effect is executed, and when CB8=300 to 329, the "first development pattern" character effect is executed, and CB8= In the case of 330-359, the "second development pattern" performance is executed, in the case of CB8=360-379, the "third development pattern" performance is executed, and in the case of CB8=380-389. If CB8=390 to 399, the "fifth development pattern" character effect is executed. The details of the character object presentations of the first to fifth development patterns will be described later.

In addition, when the fixed display item in the roulette effect is "until the next time", the "until the next time" time/accessory effect pattern determination table as shown in FIG. 100(b) is referred to. In this case, when the value of the character effect counter CB8 is 0 to 9, "no character effect" is selected and no character effect is performed as an additional effect.

On the other hand, when the value of the character effect counter CB8 is 10 to 399, "with character effect" is selected, and the character effect is executed as an additional effect. Of these, when CB8=10 to 99, the "non-development pattern" character effect is performed, and when CB8=100 to 199, the "first development pattern" character effect is performed. In the case of 200 to 249, the "second development pattern" performance is executed, in the case of CB8 = 250 to 299, the "third development pattern" performance is executed, and in the case of CB8 = 300 to 349. If CB8=350 to 399, the "fifth development pattern" performance is performed.

It should be noted that the specific contents of the "+10 times" character effect pattern determination table" referred to when the fixed display item in the roulette effect is "+10 times" are not shown in the drawings, but are described above. Tables having contents different from those of the 'end' time/accessory effect pattern determination table' and the 'until the next time' time/accessory effect pattern determination table' are set.

Here, when the above "no character effect" is selected, the value of the character effect pattern flag PF is set to "0". The role product effect pattern flag PF is discrimination information for discriminating the role product effect pattern.

Similarly, when the "no development pattern" character effect is selected, the value of the character effect pattern flag PF is set to "1". When the "first developed pattern" character effect is selected, the value of the character effect pattern flag PF is set to "2". When the "second development pattern" character effect is selected, the value of the character effect pattern flag PF is set to "3". When the "third developed pattern" character effect is selected, the value of the character effect pattern flag PF is set to "4". When the "fourth development pattern" character effect is selected, the value of the character effect pattern flag PF is set to "5". When the "fifth development pattern" character effect is selected, the value of the character effect pattern flag PF is set to "6".

Therefore, when performing the effect determination process in step SB6004, the sub-control device 262 first selects a predetermined display item from the plurality of accessory effect pattern determination tables based on the information related to the confirmed display items in the roulette effect. A role product production pattern determination table corresponding to the confirmed display item is selected, and a role product production pattern is determined based on the selected table. At this time, the determined result is stored in a predetermined storage area within the RAM 553 .

After the start request setting process is performed in subsequent step SB6005, this process ends.

In the start request setting process of step SB6005, as the value of the production state flag JF, "1" indicating that it is in the start request period of the character production is set, and the value of the operation valid timer ST is set to a predetermined value (this 5 seconds in the embodiment).

The operation valid timer ST is a timer for measuring the operation valid period of the effect button 125. FIG.

Further, in this start request setting process, the display setting process for performing the start request display effect on the display section 42a of the effect display device 42 is performed.

By performing such display setting processing, in addition to the roulette effect, characters such as "press the button" are displayed on the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42. A display effect prompting an operation is executed.

Now, in step SB6006 to which the negative determination is made in step SB6003, the value of the effect state flag JF is considered, and whether or not it is currently in the request period for starting the character effect effect (JF=1) is determined. discriminate. Here, if a negative determination is made, that is, if it is not during the period for requesting the start of the performance of the character object (JF≧2), the process proceeds to step SB6012.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB6006, that is, if it is currently in the request period for starting the performance of a character, it is determined in step SB6007 whether or not the value of the operation valid timer ST is "0". do.

Here, if the determination is affirmative, that is, if the value of the operation valid timer ST is "0", the player does not press the production button 125 during the start request period of the character production, and the operation valid period has passed, the process moves to step SB6008.

At step SB6008, the value of the effect state flag JF is set to "9", which means that the character effect will not progress any further, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SB6007, that is, if the value of the operation validity timer ST is not "0", the process proceeds to step SB6009.

At step SB6009, the value of the button operation flag BF is taken into account to determine whether or not the player presses the production button 125 (BF=1) during the start request period of the role product production (during the operation valid period). discriminate.

The button operation flag BF is determination information for determining whether or not the effect button 125 has been pressed during the valid period of operation. , and the value is maintained at "0" while no pressing operation is performed.

If a negative determination is made in step SB6009, that is, if the production button 125 is not pressed, the processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination is affirmative, that is, if the effect button 125 is pressed, effect pattern setting processing is performed in step SB6010.

In the effect pattern setting process of step SB6010, a value corresponding to the effect pattern selected in the effect determination process of step SB6004 is set as the value of the effect state flag JF.

Specifically, in consideration of the value of the character effect pattern flag PF, when "no character effect" is selected, the value of the effect state flag JF is set to "2". On the other hand, when "with character effect (no development pattern, first development pattern, second development pattern, third development pattern, fourth development pattern, or fifth development pattern)" is selected, the performance state flag JF set the value of to "3".

After that, in step SB6011, the value of the button operation flag BF is reset to "0", and this processing ends.

Now, in step SB6012 to which a negative determination is made in step SB6006, the value of the effect state flag JF is considered, and whether or not the effect pattern of the additional effect is "no character effect (JF=2)". determine.

Here, if the determination is affirmative, that is, if the effect pattern is "no character effect", notification setting processing is performed in step SB6013.

By performing the notification setting process, the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 displays characters such as "Unfortunately it doesn't move", for example, to notify that the character effect will not be performed. executed.

After that, at step SB6014, the value of the effect state flag JF is set to "9", which means that the character effect will not progress any further, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SB6012, the process proceeds to step SB6015 and determines whether or not the value of the effect state flag JF is "3".

If the affirmative determination is made here, the effect pattern is "with character effect (JF=3)", but it is considered that it is currently in the stage before the start of the character drive effect, and in step SB6016 the upper character is driven. Setting processing is performed, and this processing ends.

In step SB6016, the sub-control device 262 first reads the superior performance control data that defines the operation progression process of the superior performance from the ROM 552, and stores it in a predetermined area of the RAM 553. .

After that, each time this process is performed, the sub-control device 262 sequentially reads a plurality of motion process data included in the superior performance control data according to the timetable, and the motion process data specified by the motion process data The operation time is set in a predetermined process timer, and the operation time is managed based on the value of the process timer, and the process corresponding to the operation process data is executed.

The plurality of motion process data include, for example, driving control of the swing drive mechanism 812 (swing motor 815) of the upper performance accessory unit 761 to lower, raise, or stop the upper movable accessory 811. and data defining an operation process such as driving and controlling the upper rotating body drive motor 821 to rotate and stop the upper rotating body 820 . .

As a result, in this embodiment, when the effect pattern is "with character object effect", the player presses the effect button 125 so that the upper movable accessory 811 first moves to the standby position (upper side of the center frame 47). 47a (back side) to the lower performance position (see FIGS. 56 and 58).

Then, after the upper movable accessory 811 descends to the performance position and stops so as to cover part of the display section 42a of the performance display device 42, the upper rotating body 820 starts rotating. In this embodiment, the upper rotating body 820 is set to rotate clockwise at a constant speed.

At the same time, the roulette pattern TR (see FIG. 96) is displayed in a reduced size on the display section 42a, hidden behind the upper rotating body 820, and difficult for the player to see.

Further, as shown in FIG. 108, various display objects are displayed on the display section 42a around the roulette pattern TR along the turning orbit EF of the magnifying lens section 828 of the specific movable piece 825A. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 108, a plurality of star-shaped luminous points EG are displayed blinking along the turning orbit EF of the magnifying lens portion 828 . As a result, the display object (for example, the star-shaped luminous point EG) located at the position through which the magnifying lens portion 828 passes is enlarged and displayed through the magnifying lens portion 828 and visually recognized by the player. Of course, the display object displayed here is not limited to the star-shaped light emitting point EG illustrated in FIG.

Here, when the upper rotating body 820 starts rotating, a predetermined value based on the above-described various effect patterns (operation process data) is set as the value of the predetermined process timer. Once the upper rotating body 820 starts rotating, it continues rotating until the value of the process timer becomes "0". Note that the subtraction process of the process timer is performed separately in other processes (step SB3911) in the normal process.

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the upper rotating body 820 entered the constant-speed rotation state (after a series of rotation start operations are completed), the sub-control device 262 sets the value of the effect state flag JF to "4" is set to indicate that there is, and a predetermined value (5 seconds in this embodiment) is set to the value of the operation validity timer ST.

At the same time, display setting processing for performing the development request display effect on the display section 42a of the effect display device 42 is performed.

By performing such a display setting process, in addition to the above-mentioned display objects, characters such as "Please press the button" are displayed on the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42. A display effect prompting the operation of 125 is executed.

Now, in step SB6017 to which a negative determination was made in step SB6015, the value of the production state flag JF is taken into consideration, and the current production initial state (JF=4 ).

In the present embodiment, the presentation mode in the initial stage of presentation after the execution of the performance of the character is started and before the presentation is developed. It is the same regardless of whether "fourth development pattern" or "fifth development pattern" is set.

Here, if a negative determination is made, that is, if it is not the initial state of performance of the character object performance (JF≧5), the process proceeds to step SB6030.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB6017, that is, if it is the initial state of the performance of the character object (single rotation state of the upper rotating body 820), then in step SB6018 the value of the operation valid timer ST is "0". determine whether there is

Here, if the determination is affirmative, that is, if the value of the operation valid timer ST is "0", the player does not press the effect button 125 during the initial state of the character object effect, and the operation valid period is Assuming that it has passed, the process moves to step SB6019.

At step SB6019, the value of the effect state flag JF is set to "9", which means that the character effect will not progress any further, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SB6018, that is, if the value of operation valid timer ST is not "0", the process proceeds to step SB6020.

At step SB6020, the value of the button operation flag BF is taken into consideration, and it is determined whether or not the player presses the production button 125 (BF=1) during the initial state of the role product production (during the operation valid period). do.

If a negative determination is made in step SB6020, that is, if the production button 125 is not pressed, the process ends. On the other hand, if the determination is affirmative, that is, if the effect button 125 is pressed, the value of the character object effect pattern flag PF corresponds to the "non-development pattern (lower character effect non-pattern)" in step SB6021. It is determined whether or not it is "1".

If the determination here is affirmative, that is, if the effect pattern is a "non-development pattern", a non-development effect setting process is performed at step SB6022.

By performing the non-development effect setting process, the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 displays, for example, characters such as "Unexpectedly undeveloped", for example, to notify that the development effect will not be performed. A performance is performed.

After that, at step SB6023, the value of the effect state flag JF is set to "9", which means that the character effect will not progress any further, and this processing is terminated.

Now, if a negative determination is made in step SB6021, the process proceeds to step SB6024 to determine whether or not the value of the character product effect pattern flag PF is "2" corresponding to the "first development pattern (non-enlargement stop pattern)". determine whether

If the determination here is affirmative, that is, if the development effect pattern is the "first development pattern", a first development effect setting process is performed in step SB6025, and this process ends.

In the first development effect setting process, the sub-control device 262 first sets the value of the effect state flag JF to "7", which means that the character object effect has been developed.

Subsequently, the sub-control device 262 reads from the ROM 552 the operation progress process of the upper movable accessory 811 (upper rotating body 820) and the lower movable accessory 851 (left and right lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B) corresponding to the first development pattern. is read out and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 553 .

After that, each time this process is performed, the sub-control device 262 sequentially reads a plurality of motion process data included in the first development effect control data according to the timetable, and the motion process data specified by the motion process data The operation time is set in a predetermined process timer, and the operation time is managed based on the value of the process timer, and the process corresponding to the operation process data is executed.

It should be noted that, although the same applies to the following various development effect patterns, the plurality of operation process data may include, for example, drive control of the upper rotating body drive motor 821 to rotate or stop the upper rotating body 820, and the like. Data that defines the operation process of , and drive control of the vertical drive mechanism 852 (vertical drive motor 860) of the lower production accessory unit 762 to raise, lower, and stop the lower movable accessory 851. and data defining an operation process such as driving and controlling the lower rotor drive motors 855A and 855B to rotate and stop the lower rotors 856A and 856B. is

That is, the sub-control device 262, based on the first development effect control data, the rotational position information of the upper rotating body 820 and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B (rotational displacement amount based on the number of drive pulse signals) and the process timer , etc., the operation control of the upper movable accessory 811 and the lower movable accessory 851 corresponding to the first development pattern is executed.

It should be noted that the subtraction process of the process timer is performed separately in the other process (step SB3911) in the normal process, although the same applies to the following various development effect patterns. In addition, based on the contents of various setting processes performed in this process, in the next external output process (step 3912), control signals are sequentially output to the upper movable accessory 811 and the lower movable accessory 851, and the upper movable accessory Various controls relating to the accessory 811 and the lower movable accessory 851 are performed. Then, when the operation control of the upper movable accessory 811 and the lower movable accessory 851 corresponding to various development production patterns is started, the operation control continues until the value of the process timer becomes "0". It will be done.

Under this configuration, when the first development effect pattern is executed in the present embodiment (similarly when the following various development effect patterns are executed), first, the magnifying lens portion 828 of the specific movable piece 825A is visually recognized. Control is performed to reduce the rotation speed of the upper rotating body 820 to the extent possible. At the same time, a setting process for outputting a predetermined sound (for example, a sound shouting "big or small" etc.) from the speaker SP is performed as an advanced notification effect. Based on this setting process, the output control process of the speaker SP is performed by the audio setting process of step SB3909.

Subsequently, control is performed to rotate the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B while raising the lower movable accessory 851 from the standby position (see FIG. 56) on the back side of the lower side portion 47b of the center frame 47.

Here, the lower left rotator 856A rotates clockwise at a constant speed, and the lower right rotator 856B rotates counterclockwise at a constant speed. In addition, the rotation speed of the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B is set so that the player can visually recognize characters such as "SMALL" and "BIG" described in the information description portions 856Aa, 856Ab, 856Ba and 856Bb. is set to a moderately low speed.

After that, when the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B reach a predetermined rendering position in front of the display section 42a of the rendering display device 42, the lower movable accessory 851 rises while maintaining the rotating motion of the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B. Stop only the movement. As a result, the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B are rotating at positions behind the turning orbit of the movable piece 825 of the rotating upper rotating body 820 (see FIG. 58, etc.).

In this state, while the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B are rotating, the positional relationship between the upper rotating body 820 and the lower left rotating body 856A or the lower right rotating body 856B is at least part of the upper rotating body 820. and at least a portion of the lower left rotating body 856A or the lower right rotating body 856B do not overlap; change to

In the first development effect pattern, as shown in FIG. 109, the stop position of the magnifying lens portion 828 of the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotating body 820 is finally the first information writing portion 856Aa of the lower left rotating body 856A ( strong/SMALL) and the second information writing portion 856Ab (weak/SMALL), and the first information writing portion 856Ba (strong/BIG) and the second information writing of the lower right rotator 856B. The upper rotator 820 and the left and right lower rotators 856A and 856B are adjusted so as not to coincide with any of the stop positions of the portion 856Bb (weak/big) (hereinafter, such a state is referred to as a "non-enlarged display stop state"). stops and the performance ends.

However, the combination of the stop modes of the upper rotating body 820 and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B in the "stopped state without enlarged display" is not limited to the combination illustrated in FIG. , the upper rotating body 820 and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B may be stopped. At this time, the combination pattern of these stop modes may be determined based on the value of the accessory effect counter CB8.

Now, if a negative determination is made in step SB6024, the process proceeds to step SB6026, and the value of the character product effect pattern flag PF is "3" corresponding to the "second development pattern (weak/SMALL expansion stop pattern)". or not.

If the determination here is affirmative, that is, if the development effect pattern is the "second development pattern", a second development effect setting process is performed in step SB6027, and this process ends.

In the second development effect setting process, the sub-control device 262 first sets the value of the effect state flag JF to "7", which means that the character object effect has been developed.

Subsequently, the sub-control device 262 reads from the ROM 552 the operation progress process of the upper movable accessory 811 (upper rotating body 820) and the lower movable accessory 851 (left and right lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B) corresponding to the second development pattern. is read out and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 553 .

After that, each time this process is performed, the sub-control device 262 sequentially reads a plurality of motion process data included in the second development effect control data according to the timetable, and the motion process data specified by the motion process data The operation time is set in a predetermined process timer, and the operation time is managed based on the value of the process timer, and the process corresponding to the operation process data is executed.

That is, the sub-control device 262, based on the second development effect control data, the rotational position information of the upper rotating body 820 and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B (rotational displacement amount based on the number of drive pulse signals) and the process timer , etc., the operation control of the upper movable accessory 811 and the lower movable accessory 851 corresponding to the second development pattern is executed.

Under this configuration, when the second developed motion pattern is executed in the present embodiment, the same motion control as when the first developed effect pattern is executed is performed, and then as shown in FIG. , the state in which the stop position of the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotating body 820 and the stop position of the second information writing portion 856Ab (weak/SMALL) of the lower left rotating body 856A finally match, that is, the upper rotating body 820 is specified. A state in which the movable piece 825A is stopped at the fourth stop position EA4 and the second information writing portion 856Ab (weak/SMALL) of the lower left rotating body 856A is stopped at the first stop position EB1 (hereinafter, such a state is referred to as "weak/ The upper rotating body 820 and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B are stopped so as to be in a SMALL expansion stop state, and the effect is finished.

However, the stopping mode of the lower right rotor 856B in the "weak/SMALL expansion stop state" is not limited to the mode illustrated in FIG. It is good also as a structure which stops. At this time, this stop mode may be determined based on the value of the accessory effect counter CB8.

Now, if a negative determination is made in step SB6026, the process proceeds to step SB6028, and the value of the character product effect pattern flag PF is "4" corresponding to the "third development pattern (strong/SMALL expansion stop pattern)". or not.

If the determination here is affirmative, that is, if the development effect pattern is the "third development pattern", a third development effect setting process is performed in step SB6029, and this process ends.

In the third development effect setting process, the sub-control device 262 first sets the value of the effect state flag JF to "7", which means that the character object effect has been developed.

Subsequently, the sub-control device 262 reads from the ROM 552 the operation progress process of the upper movable accessory 811 (upper rotating body 820) and the lower movable accessory 851 (left and right lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B) corresponding to the third development pattern. is read out and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 553 .

After that, each time this process is performed, the sub-control device 262 sequentially reads a plurality of motion process data included in the third development effect control data according to the timetable, and the motion process data specified by the motion process data The operation time is set in a predetermined process timer, and the operation time is managed based on the value of the process timer, and the process corresponding to the operation process data is executed.

That is, the sub-control device 262, based on the third development effect control data, the rotational position information of the upper rotating body 820 and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B (rotational displacement amount based on the number of drive pulse signals) and the process timer , etc., the operation control of the upper movable accessory 811 and the lower movable accessory 851 corresponding to the third development pattern is executed.

Under this configuration, when the third development motion pattern is executed in this embodiment, the same motion control as when the first development effect pattern is executed is performed, and then, as shown in FIG. Finally, the stop position of the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotating body 820 and the stop position of the first information writing portion 856Aa (strong/SMALL) of the lower left rotating body 856A match, that is, the upper rotating body 820 is specified. A state in which the movable piece 825A is stopped at the fourth stop position EA4 and the first information writing portion 856Aa (strong/SMALL) of the lower left rotating body 856A is stopped at the first stop position EB1 (this state is hereinafter referred to as “strong/small”). The upper rotating body 820 and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B are stopped so as to be in a SMALL expansion stop state, and the effect is finished.

However, the stopping mode of the lower right rotor 856B in the case of the "strong/SMALL expansion stop state" is not limited to the mode illustrated in FIG. It is good also as a structure which stops. At this time, this stop mode may be determined based on the value of the accessory effect counter CB8.

Now, if a negative determination is made in step SB6028, the process proceeds to step SB6030, and the value of the character product effect pattern flag PF is "5" corresponding to the "fourth development pattern (weak/BIG expansion stop pattern)". or not.

If the determination here is affirmative, that is, if the development effect pattern is the "fourth development pattern", a fourth development effect setting process is performed in step SB6031, and this process ends.

In the fourth development effect setting process, the sub-control device 262 first sets the value of the effect state flag JF to "7", which means that the character object effect has been developed.

Subsequently, the sub-control device 262 reads from the ROM 552 the operation progress process of the upper movable accessory 811 (upper rotating body 820) and the lower movable accessory 851 (left and right lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B) corresponding to the fourth development pattern. is read out and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 553 .

After that, each time this process is performed, the sub-control device 262 sequentially reads a plurality of motion process data included in the fourth development effect control data according to the timetable, and the motion process data specified by the motion process data The operation time is set in a predetermined process timer, and the operation time is managed based on the value of the process timer, and the process corresponding to the operation process data is executed.

That is, the sub-control device 262, based on the fourth development effect control data, the rotational position information of the upper rotating body 820 and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B (rotational displacement amount based on the number of drive pulse signals) and the process timer , etc., the operation control of the upper movable accessory 811 and the lower movable accessory 851 corresponding to the fourth development pattern is executed.

Under this configuration, when the fourth development motion pattern is executed in the present embodiment, the same motion control as when the first development effect pattern is executed is performed, and then as shown in FIG. , the state in which the stop position of the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotating body 820 and the stop position of the second information writing portion 856Bb (weak/big) of the lower right rotating body 856B finally match, that is, the upper rotating body 820 A state in which the specific movable piece 825A is stopped at the first stop position EA1, and the second information writing portion 856Bb (weak/BIG) of the lower right rotating body 856B is stopped at the first stop position EC1 (hereinafter, such a state is referred to as " The upper rotating body 820 and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B stop so as to be in a "weak/big enlargement stop state", and the effect is completed.

However, the stopping mode of the lower left rotating body 856A in the case of the "weak/big enlargement stop state" is not limited to the mode illustrated in FIG. 112, and the lower left rotating body 856A stops in a different mode may be configured. At this time, this stop mode may be determined based on the value of the accessory effect counter CB8.

Now, if a negative determination is made in step SB6030, the process proceeds to step SB6032, and the value of the character product effect pattern flag PF is "6" corresponding to the "fifth development pattern (strong/BIG expansion stop pattern)". or not.

If the determination here is affirmative, that is, if the development effect pattern is the "fifth development pattern", fifth development effect setting processing is performed in step SB6033, and this processing ends.

In the fifth development effect setting process, the sub-control device 262 first sets the value of the effect state flag JF to "7", which means that the character object effect has been developed.

Subsequently, the sub-control device 262 reads from the ROM 552 the operation progress process of the upper movable accessory 811 (upper rotating body 820) and the lower movable accessory 851 (left and right lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B) corresponding to the fifth development pattern. is read out and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 553 .

After that, each time this process is performed, the sub-control device 262 sequentially reads a plurality of motion process data included in the fifth development effect control data according to the timetable, and The operation time is set in a predetermined process timer, and the operation time is managed based on the value of the process timer, and the process corresponding to the operation process data is executed.

That is, the sub-control device 262, based on the fifth development effect control data, the rotational position information of the upper rotating body 820 and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B (rotational displacement amount based on the number of drive pulse signals) and the process timer , etc., the operation control of the upper movable accessory 811 and the lower movable accessory 851 corresponding to the fifth development pattern is executed.

With this configuration, when the fifth development motion pattern is executed in this embodiment, the same motion control as when the first development effect pattern is executed is performed, and then, as shown in FIG. , the state in which the stop position of the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotating body 820 and the stop position of the first information writing portion 856Ba (strong/BIG) of the lower right rotating body 856B finally match, that is, the upper rotating body 820 A state in which the specific movable piece 825A is stopped at the first stop position EA1, and the first information writing portion 856Ba (strong/BIG) of the lower right rotating body 856B is stopped at the first stop position EC1 (hereafter, such a state is referred to as " The upper rotator 820 and the left and right lower rotators 856A and 856B are stopped so as to be in a "strong/BIG expansion stop state", and the effect is finished.

However, the stopping mode of the lower left rotating body 856A in the case of the "strong/BIG expansion stopped state" is not limited to the mode illustrated in FIG. 113, and the lower left rotating body 856A stops in a different mode. may be configured. At this time, this stop mode may be determined based on the value of the accessory effect counter CB8.

Now, in step SB6035 to which a negative determination is made in step SB6017, the value of the effect state flag JF is considered, and it is determined whether or not the character object effect is currently in the developing state (JF=5). . If a negative determination is made here, the processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB6035, that is, if the character object presentation is in progress (upper rotator 820 and left and right lower rotators 856A and 856B are in operation), the process proceeds to step SB6036.

At step SB6036, it is determined whether or not the value of the process timer is "0". If a negative determination is made here, the processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB6036, that is, if it is time to end the performance of the character, end setting processing is performed in step SB6037, and this processing ends.

In the end setting process of step SB6037, the sub-control device 262 first sets "9" as the value of the effect state flag JF, which means that the character effect will not progress any further.

Subsequently, the sub-control device 262 reads the character product presentation end control data defining the ending process of the character product presentation from the ROM 552 and stores it in a predetermined area of the RAM 553 .

Based on this, the upper rotating body 820 (upper rotating body drive motor 821) is stopped, the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B (lower rotating body drive motors 855A and 855B) are stopped, and the upper movable accessory 811 is moved to the standby position. Operation setting processing for raising the lower movable accessory 851 to the standby position, and the like are sequentially performed, and the accessory production ends.

As described in detail above, according to this embodiment, the second rotating body that is movable in a predetermined area and rotatable in a predetermined manner is configured to be movable relative to the first rotating body, and the predetermined area is viewed from the front. The relative positional relationship between the first rotating body and the second rotating body in the above is a first positional relationship in which at least a portion of the first rotating body and at least a portion of the second rotating body do not overlap, and at least the first rotating body Under a configuration that can be changed to a second positional relationship in which a part and at least a part of the second rotating body overlap, in the first positional relationship, light emitted from the light emitting means through the light-transmitting part of the first rotating body is visible, and in the second positional relationship, at least part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be shielded by at least part of the second rotating body that overlaps the light transmitting portion of the first rotating body. is configured to be

In this way, the two rotating bodies (the first rotating body and the second rotating body) whose relative positional relationship changes are superimposed or separated from each other, thereby executing a more lively game effect. becomes possible.

Particularly in this embodiment, at least part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be transmitted or blocked by changing the relative positional relationship between the first rotating body and the second rotating body. That is, it is possible to change the visual recognition mode of the light emitted from the light emitting means without performing control for lighting/blinking the light emitting means.

This makes it possible to produce an effect using light together with the action effect of the first rotating body and the second rotating body. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game presentation and to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in the above-described embodiment, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Here, each of the following configurations may be applied to the above embodiment individually, or may be applied to the above embodiment by combining a part or all of them. Moreover, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments.

(a) The pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described embodiment is the first type in which the variable winning device 32 opens and closes in a jackpot state when a jackpot win is won in a winning lottery based on the ball entering the starting prize-winning openings 33YA and 33YB. is a gaming machine.

Not limited to this, it may be implemented as another type of pachinko machine that provides a predetermined game value. The game value includes, for example, game media such as prize balls paid out to the player, a special prize state (round) given during the big win, and a game mode such as a high-probability mode given after the big win. . In addition to the pachinko machine, it can also be implemented as various game machines such as an arrangement ball machine and a mammoth ball.

For example, a variable prize winning device is provided that opens when a small hit is won in a winning lottery based on a ball entering a predetermined starting prize winning portion, and a game ball that enters the variable prize winning device enters a predetermined special prize winning portion ( It may be implemented as a second type gaming machine in which a ball enters the V winning slot) and a jackpot state occurs. Here, without performing a predetermined lottery process when a game ball enters the starting winning part (or a lottery process with a winning probability of 100% may be performed), based on the ball entering the starting winning part, A variable winning device may be in an open state, and a game ball entering the variable winning device may enter a V winning port or the like to generate a big win state.

Further, it may be implemented as a third type gaming machine (for example, a so-called 1 type 2 type mixing machine) that combines the functions of the first type gaming machine and the functions of the second type gaming machine.

Incidentally, the winning probabilities related to various lotteries related to pachinko machines (soft lottery processing, mechanical lottery, etc.) are appropriately set for each model, and any value can be adopted. Further, as will be described later, it goes without saying that the configuration of the board surface of the game board 30 can also be changed as appropriate.

Also, the game machine may be implemented as a type of game machine that circulates game balls in the game machine and does not directly pay out the game balls to the player, that is, a so-called enclosed pachinko machine.

(b) The types of jackpots (the number of rounds, the content of the configuration, etc.) are not limited to the above embodiment, and different configurations may be adopted.

For example, in the above embodiment, a 16R jackpot in which 16 special prize states (rounds) are performed, a 4R jackpot in which 4 special prize states (rounds) are performed, etc. are set, but not limited to this, the number of rounds A configuration in which other different jackpot states occur is also possible.

Of course, the gaming machine may be implemented as a gaming machine in which only one type of jackpot state (for example, 15R jackpot) occurs instead of a gaming machine in which multiple types of jackpot states can occur.

(c) The configuration of the game mode to be awarded after the end of the jackpot state (granting period, configuration content, etc.) is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and a different configuration may be adopted.

For example, in the above embodiment, regardless of the type of jackpot, "high support mode" is always given after the end of the jackpot. good too.

In addition, it is implemented as a pachinko machine that does not switch the lottery mode (“high probability mode” or “low probability mode”), but only switches the winning support mode (“high support mode” or “low support mode”). may Alternatively, or in addition to the payout of prize balls, a pachinko machine may be implemented in which points corresponding to the prize balls won by the player are given to a storage medium such as a magnetic card. A specific game mode such as a high support mode or a high probability mode may be set as a special game state.

(d) The configuration related to the game board is not limited to the above embodiment. For example, the game board 30 according to the above-described embodiment is configured using a transparent plate as a translucent member as a base, but is not limited to this. good.

(d-1) In the above embodiment, the LED boards 48A, 48B, and 48C mounted with a plurality of LEDs are arranged at the rear position of the predetermined area of the game area so that various light emitting effects can be executed. there is Not limited to this, a configuration in which other light emitting means such as a lamp or a liquid crystal display device is arranged at the rear position of the game board 30 instead of or in addition to the LED board 48A or the like may be employed.

(d-2) In place of or in addition to the above embodiment, at least one of the top, bottom, left, and right end faces of the game board 30 is provided with a light emitting means such as a lamp or an LED so as to face the end face. The light emitted from the light emitting means is incident on the game board 30, and a part of the light is emitted from a predetermined position on the front surface of the game board 30 so that the player can see the light. good too. That is, the game board 30 may be configured to function as a light emitting member or a light guiding member. Of course, part of the light incident from the front view first position on the front part (or rear part) of the game board 30 is emitted from the front view second position on the front part of the game board 30, and is visible to the player. It is good also as a structure.

(d-3) Instead of the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 according to the above embodiment, a display screen having a size covering substantially the entire back side of the game area or substantially the entire back side of the game board 30 at the rear position of the game board 30 may be provided with a display device having

Alternatively, the game board 30 may be arranged so as to cover the front side of the display portion 42a of the effect display device 42 without providing an opening for mounting the effect display device 42 thereon. At this time, a nail or the like may be placed on the front surface of the game board 30, which is the area in front of the effect display device 42, so that this area can be used as the area where the game ball can flow down. Of course, this may be set as an area where game balls cannot flow down.

(e) The configuration of the first rotating means is not limited to the upper rotating body 820 as the first rotating body in the above embodiment.

(e-1) For example, in the above embodiment, the upper rotating body 820, which is the first rotating means (first rotating body), is the rendering area (predetermined area) of the display section (liquid crystal display section) 42a of the rendering display device 42. Although it is configured to rotate on the front side, the area in which the first rotating means rotates is not limited to this.

For example, in the front area of the center frame 47, a configuration may be adopted in which the first rotating means rotates. Here, a configuration in which the rotating shaft of the first rotating means is fixed may be employed, or a configuration in which the position of the rotating shaft of the first rotating means is displaceable may be employed.

Also, a configuration may be adopted in which the first rotating means rotates in the internal region of various prize winning devices such as the variable prize winning device 32 . Here, a configuration in which the rotating shaft of the first rotating means is fixed may be employed, or a configuration in which the position of the rotating shaft of the first rotating means is displaceable may be employed.

Also, in the front area (game area) of the game board 30, a configuration in which the first rotating means rotates may be adopted. Here, a configuration in which the rotating shaft of the first rotating means is fixed may be employed, or a configuration in which the position of the rotating shaft of the first rotating means is displaceable may be employed.

(e-2) The moving mechanism of the first rotating means (first rotating body) is not limited to the above embodiment. For example, in the above-described embodiment, when the support arm 814 swings and displaces, the upper rotating body 820 (the upper movable accessory 811) moves to the standby position behind the upper side portion 47a of the center frame 47 and the display portion of the effect display device 42. It is configured to be displaced to the performance position on the front side of 42a.

Not limited to this, for example, the position of the upper rotating body 820 (upper movable accessory 811) may be linearly displaced between the standby position and the production position such as in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction. A plurality of movements such as curvilinear movements may be combined to move between the standby position and the performance position. Of course, the first rotating means may be rotatably supported (fixed) at a predetermined position without moving.

(e-3) The shape of the first rotating means (first rotating body) and the configuration of the translucent portion are not limited to those of the above embodiments. For example, in the above-described embodiment, the upper rotating body 820 is configured to have six movable pieces 825 imitating petals as the translucent portions. It is not limited and other configurations may be adopted. A configuration including only one translucent portion may be employed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the movable piece 825, which is the translucent portion, is slid in the radial direction of the upper rotor 820 so that the upper rotor 820 expands or contracts in diameter. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and a configuration in which the translucent portion is not displaced in the radial direction of the first rotating means, that is, a configuration in which the size of the first rotating means does not change may be employed. For example, the first rotating means may be a circular disc body when viewed from the front.

In the above-described embodiment, the general portion of each movable piece 825 is made of a translucent member that makes it difficult to identify the display target displayed on the display section 42a. The display object may be configured by a transparent member that can be identified.

Also, the movable piece 825 need not be made of a translucent material, and may be made of a light-shielding material. In such a case, each specific movable piece 825 may be configured to have a through hole or a notch through which light can be transmitted (visually recognized). Alternatively, a first rotating means may be employed in which a predetermined number of through-holes or the like serving as light-transmitting portions are formed at regular intervals in the circumferential direction of a disk body that is circular in front view. In other words, the first rotating means may have portions with different light transmittances.

(e-4) In the above embodiment, it acts on the acted portions (information writing portions 856Aa, 856Ab, 856Ba, 856Bb) of the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B, which are the second rotating means (second rotating bodies). As an action portion, a magnifying lens portion 828 is formed in one of the six movable pieces 825 (specific movable piece 825A).

The configuration is not limited to this, and a configuration in which the magnifying lens portion 828 is omitted may be employed. Further, instead of or in addition to the magnifying lens portion 828, a configuration having a reducing lens portion as an action portion may be employed. By using this, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the affected portions (information writing portions 856Aa, 856Ab, 856Ba, 856Bb) of the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B are displayed in reduced size.

(e-5) The rotational driving source of the first rotating means (first rotating body) is not limited to the above embodiment. For example, in the above-described embodiment, the upper rotor 820 is configured to rotate using the upper rotor drive motor 821 as a drive source. may

Moreover, you may employ|adopt the structure which rotates using the game ball driven into the game area. For example, a rotary drive member such as a water wheel is arranged in the out port 36, and a drive transmission mechanism is arranged to transmit the force of the rotary drive member to the first rotating means. A ball may be used to rotationally drive the first rotating means. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which a 1st rotation means rotates using the game ball which flows down the predetermined position of a game area. In short, any configuration may be used as long as the first rotating means can be rotated using the game ball launched into the game area by the launching means.

(f) The configuration of the second rotating means is not limited to the lower left rotating body 856A and the lower right rotating body 856B as the second rotating body in the above embodiment.

(f-1) For example, in the above embodiment, the plate-like lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B, which are substantially rectangular in front view, are employed as the second rotating means (second rotating bodies). , the shape, and the configuration of the information writing portion are not limited to those of the above embodiment.

For example, either one of the lower left rotating body 856A or the lower right rotating body 856B may be omitted, and only one second rotating means may be provided. Moreover, it is good also as a structure provided with the 2nd rotation means three or more.

As the second rotating means, for example, a rotating body having a circular shape in a front view and capable of rotating about the longitudinal direction as an axial direction may be provided, and the rotating body may be provided with one or three or more information writing portions.

(f-2) A rotating body having a different shape such as a spherical shape may be employed as the second rotating means.

For example, as shown in FIG. 114, as a movable accessory related to the second rotating means (second rotating body), a predetermined support pillar 880 provided to be movable by a moving driving means (not shown), and the support 880 An accommodating portion 881 provided at the upper end, a spherical member 882 as a spherical second rotating means (spherical body) accommodated in the accommodating portion 881, and for controlling the attitude and orientation of the spherical member 882. It is also possible to adopt a movable accessory provided with a rotating drive means composed of a plurality of actuators (not shown).

In the movable accessory illustrated in FIG. 114, information writing portions 884 are provided at a plurality of locations (for example, four locations) on the surface of the spherical member 882 through openings 883 formed in the front surface of the containing body 881. becomes visible. The information description portion 884 may describe character information such as "atari" or "missing", for example.

Here, the spherical member 882 may be made of a translucent member. Light emitted from a predetermined light emitting means arranged behind the housing portion 881 enters the ball member 882 through a rear opening (not shown) of the housing portion 881, and passes through the opening 883 to play the game. You may make it visible to a person.

Alternatively, the ball member 882 may be made of a metal material, or the surface of the ball member 882 may be plated or the like. Light emitted from a predetermined light emitting means (including light incident from the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the window 101) is irradiated from the front through the opening 883 to the spherical member 882, where A configuration may be adopted in which the player can visually recognize the light reflected by the .

(f-3) In the above embodiment, the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B are configured to be rotatable with the longitudinal direction as the axial direction, but the rotating shaft direction of the second rotating means is not limited to this. .

For example, the spherical member 882 as the second rotating means illustrated in FIG. 114 may be configured to rotate with the vertical direction, horizontal direction, or oblique direction as the rotation axis direction. Furthermore, it may be configured such that the rotation axis direction (posture) of the second rotating means can be changed. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 114, ball receiving members (not shown) capable of supporting the ball members 882 are provided at eight corners of the accommodating portion 881, and the ball receiving members are controlled by controlling the ball receiving members. A configuration may be adopted in which three-dimensional attitude control of the ball member 882 is performed via the ball member 882 .

(f-4) The information writing portions 856Aa, 856Ab, 856Ba, and 856Bb of the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B in the above embodiment are made of translucent material, and the display portion 42a of the effect display device 42 positioned behind. It is configured to be able to transmit light emitted from the device with a predetermined transmittance.

Not limited to this, at least the information writing portion 856Aa and the like (or the entire lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B may be used) may be made of an opaque material (for example, a metal material) that does not transmit light. Further, the information writing portion 856Aa and the like may be polished, plated, or the like to form a reflecting portion capable of reflecting light.

Light emitted from predetermined light emitting means (including light incident from the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the window portion 101) passes through the movable piece 825 of the upper rotating body 820 from the front to the information writing portion. 856Aa or the like may be irradiated.

Further, the information described in the information description part 856Aa or the like may be visually recognized by the player through the magnifying lens part 828 .

Further, the information writing portion 856Aa and the like may be curved in a spherical shape so as to protrude outward. With such a configuration, not only the light incident from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 but also the light emitted from various directions such as the sides of the game board 30 can be reflected to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 .

(f-5) The moving mechanism of the second rotating means (second rotating body) is not limited to the above embodiment. For example, in the above-described embodiment, the vertical drive mechanism 852 for vertically moving the lower movable accessory 851 is provided, and the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B move to the standby position behind the lower side 47b of the center frame 47 and the display section of the effect display device 42. It is configured to be displaced in the vertical direction between the effect position on the front side of 42a.

Not limited to this, for example, the positions of the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B (lower movable accessory 851) may be configured to be movable not only in the vertical direction but also in the horizontal direction and the front-rear direction.

In addition, under the structure that can move in the front-rear direction, for example, the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B (the lower movable accessory 851) may be configured to move from the front region to the rear region of the game board 30. Further, the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B (lower movable accessory 851) may be configured to be movable in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction in the rear area of the game board 30. At this time, a guide member may be provided as a rear guide means capable of guiding the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B that have moved to the rear area of the game board 30 to a predetermined position.

Further, the lower left rotating body 856A and the lower right rotating body 856B may be configured to be independently movable and relatively movable. Of course, each of them may be configured to be individually movable in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, the front-rear direction, and the like. Also, each of them may be configured to be individually movable from the front region to the rear region of the game board 30 , or each may be configured to be individually movable in the rear region of the game board 30 .

In addition, a plurality of patterns of movement paths, movement speeds, rotation speeds, etc., of the lower rotors 856A, 856B are set, and the movement paths, movement speeds, rotation speeds, etc. of the lower rotors 856A, 856B are changed as appropriate. good too. In addition, the configuration may include a route changing means capable of executing processing for changing the route along which the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B move. For example, a predetermined lottery may be held to change the movement path, and the movement paths of the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B may be determined based on the lottery results.

(f-6) The rotational driving source of the second rotating means (second rotating body) is not limited to the above embodiment. For example, in the above-described embodiment, the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B are configured to rotate using the lower rotating body drive motors 855A and 855B as the driving sources. An actuator may be employed.

Further, a predetermined movable member is provided which can come into contact with the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B and can change the movement of the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B. may be configured.

For example, by colliding a predetermined movable member (for example, a hammer-shaped accessory) against the stopped lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B, the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B start moving and rotating. may be

(f-7) In the above embodiment, the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B, which are the second rotating means, rotate on the front side of the display portion (liquid crystal display portion) 42a of the effect display device 42, which is the effect area (predetermined area). However, as with the first rotating means, the area in which the second rotating means rotates is not limited to this.

For example, in the front area of the center frame 47, the inner area of various winning devices such as the variable winning device 32, and the front area (game area) of the game board 30, the second rotating means is rotatable and movable. good too. Further, in the rear region of the game board 30, the second rotating means may rotate.

(g) The configuration related to the rotating body effect, such as when the rotating body effect using the first rotating means and the second rotating means (the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B) is performed, is limited to the above embodiment. However, other configurations may be adopted.

(g-1) In the above embodiment, as an additional effect when the continuous support effect (roulette effect) is performed, a rotating effect using the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which, for example, a rotating body effect using the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B is performed in different scenes, such as an additional effect of a ready-to-win effect.

For example, the no-development pattern (the rotation effect of only the upper rotating body 820 without the lower role object effect) may be used for a one-shot announcement effect for notifying the player of winning the jackpot lottery.

(g-2) In the above-described embodiment, a lottery effect of a lottery (number of times of support) to determine whether or not to continue the support mode after the end of the big win is performed. , a type lottery for determining the type (number of rounds) of the jackpot state is performed based on the entry of a ball into a predetermined ball entry means, and as an effect for teaching the result of the lottery, for example, A configuration may be adopted in which rotating body effects such as the various developmental effect patterns described above (effects using the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B) are performed.

In addition, in the case where the rotating body effect is performed during or at the end of the jackpot state, for example, if the lottery result suspended when the ball is entered into the predetermined ball entry means during the jackpot state includes the jackpot winning result (so-called pending consecutive occurs), out of both the information description portions 856Aa and 856Ab of the lower left rotating body 856A (or both the information describing portions 856Ba and 856Bb of the lower right rotating body 856B), the first information description portion 856Aa of “strong/SMALL ” (or “strong/BIG” in the first information description portion 856Ba) may be enlarged and stopped, or may be easily enlarged and displayed. On the other hand, when the jackpot winning result is not included in the withheld lottery result (when no so-called reserved series occurs), the second information description part 856Ab "weak / SMALL" (or the second information description part 856Bb " "Weak/BIG") may be enlarged and stopped, or may be easily enlarged and displayed.

(g-3) In the above embodiment, depending on the degree of expectation that the high support mode will continue to be given (the degree of expectation that the game value can be given), the role production and further development production (upper rotating body 820 and lower It is configured such that the rate at which the rotating body effect using the rotating bodies 856A and 856B is performed changes.

Not limited to this, for example, if a winning result is obtained by a predetermined lottery process (a result of giving a game value such as a big hit or a small hit, a high probability mode, a high support mode, etc.) , the ratio of the character performance and further development performance (the rotating body performance using the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B) is greater than when no winning result is obtained.

Also, only when the high support mode is continued (when the game value is given), or when the winning result is obtained by the predetermined lottery process (jackpot or small win, high probability mode, high support mode Only when a result of giving a game value such as a game value) is obtained, the role production or its development production (rotating body production using the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B) is a fixed production. It is good also as a structure performed.

(h) In the above embodiment, the upper rotating body, which is the first rotating means, is applied to the acted portions (information writing parts 856Aa, 856Ab, 856Ba, 856Bb) of the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B, which are the second rotating means. Although the action portion (magnifying lens portion 828) of 820 is configured to act, the configuration in which the first rotating means and the second rotating means act on each other is not limited to this, and other configurations are possible. may be adopted.

(h-1) For example, the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B, which are the second rotating means, may act on the affected portion of the upper rotating body 820, which is the first rotating means. As a specific configuration, for example, in the upper rotating body 820, instead of the "magnifying lens part 828", a "specific information writing part (for example, characters such as "win")" is provided as an acted part, and in the lower left rotating body 856A, A "reduction lens section" is provided as a first working section in place of the "first information writing section 856Aa", and a "magnifying lens section" is provided as a second working section in place of the "second information writing section 856Ab". Under this configuration, the lower left rotating body 856A is configured to rotate and stop at a position forward of the upper rotating body 820, and when the upper rotating body 820 and the lower left rotating body 856A are stopped, the specific information description part ("hit , etc.) may be magnified and displayed by the 'magnifying lens unit' or reduced and displayed by the 'reducing lens unit'.

Furthermore, here, when acting in the second mode (when enlarged by the "magnifying lens section") than when acting in the first mode (when displayed in reduced size by the "reduction lens section") It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the ratio of the predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player increases. Alternatively, the ratio of the second advantageous state, which is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state, is higher in the case of acting in the second mode than in the case of acting in the first mode. may be configured.

(h-2) Although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, the upper rotating body 820 as the first rotating means and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B as the second rotating means are mutually close to each other. configured to remain spaced apart.

For example, the upper rotating body 820, which is the first rotating means, and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B, which are the second rotating means, may contact each other when they are close to each other.

For example, when the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B are stopped, the peripheral edge of the acting portion (magnifying lens portion 828) of the upper rotating body 820 is larger than the peripheral edge of the information writing portion 856Aa of the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B. It is good also as a structure which a part contacts. As a result, gaps are less likely to occur between the peripheral edge portions of the information writing portions 856Aa and the like of the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B and the peripheral edge portions of the action portions (magnifying lens portions 828) of the upper rotating body 820. FIG. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems such as light leaking through the gaps, making it difficult to see the information writing portion 856Aa or the like due to the leaked light, or lowering the brightness of the information writing portion 856Aa or the like.

(i) In the above embodiment, the effect button 125 that can be pressed by the player is provided as an operation means for effect. The configuration of the operating means and the effect using this are not limited to the above embodiments.

(i-1) In the above embodiment, when the player operates the effect button 125, the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B, which are the second rotating means, start operating, and the development effect (the upper rotating body 820 and a rotating body effect using the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B). The configuration is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the development effect is started in accordance with a predetermined effect program without being triggered by the operation of the operating means.

(i-2) The operation mode of the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B may be changed according to the operation mode of the operation means operated by the player.

For example, a slide lever is provided as a first operation unit capable of adjusting the amount of lateral movement of the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B, and a second operating section capable of determining the start timing and stop timing of the upward movement of the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B is provided. A production button 125 may be provided as an operation unit, and the coordinate positions at which the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B rotate may be two-dimensionally adjustable up, down, left, and right.

Further, in the stage of performing the development effect, the lower rotors 856A and 856B are pushed downward while the character is displayed on the display unit 42a in connection with the upward movement of the lower rotors 856A and 856B to execute the development effect. A display effect to block is performed, and in response to this, the player repeatedly hits the effect button 125 to stop the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B which are about to be pushed downward. may be configured to perform

(i-3) A configuration may be provided with a return regulating means (for example, a ratchet mechanism) capable of regulating the return of the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B guided to the rendering area to the outside of the predetermined area (standby position). This allows the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B to operate more stably in the rendering area.

(j) In the above-described embodiment, various effects related to rotating body effects are performed by controlling the operation (motor control, etc.) of the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B in accordance with a predetermined effect program. It is configured to be done.

Not limited to this, provided with a detection means capable of detecting the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B passing through a predetermined position in the rendering area (predetermined area), based on the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B being detected by the detecting means, The configuration may be such that various effects related to the rotating body effect can be executed.

For example, in the case where the player can two-dimensionally determine the coordinate positions at which the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B rotate as described above, the position of the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B determined by the player is determined by the player. A coordinate position may be specified by a plurality of detection means, and the rotation mode of the upper rotating body 820 and the stop position of the magnifying lens portion 828 may be changed according to the specified coordinate position.

Any type of detection means can be used as long as it can detect the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B. Preferably, it is of a type capable of detecting the presence or absence of the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B in a non-contact manner, such as a distance measuring sensor.

(k) Although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, rotating bodies such as the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B may be charged with static electricity due to friction or the like during rotation. In view of this, it is also possible to adopt a configuration having a ground structure for releasing static electricity charged in the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B.

For example, in the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B, a conductive portion having conductivity is provided, and a predetermined conductive member having conductivity is provided outside the production region (predetermined region) such as the center frame 47. The conductive portions of the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B may contact conductive members such as the center frame 47 when the rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B are in a standby state or the like. By electrically connecting the conductive member such as the center frame 47 to a predetermined ground terminal (not shown), static electricity charged on the upper rotor 820 and the lower rotors 856A and 856B can be removed.

Here, the lower rotors 856A and 856B, which are relatively simply configured, may be configured such that at least a portion or the entirety thereof is made of a conductive metal material. Alternatively or additionally, the surfaces of the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B may be plated or the like.

In addition, along a part of the route along which the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B move from the predetermined standby position to the effect area (predetermined area), an elongated conductive member made of a conductive material is arranged. may be

Furthermore, at least the conductive portions of the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B that come into contact with the conductive member may be curved in a spherical shape so as to protrude outward. In other words, a configuration including a hemispherically convex conductive portion may be employed.

[Appendix]
Technical ideas that can be grasped from the above embodiments will be described below together with their effects.

Conventional problem VA. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a game area. For example, a pachinko machine is known in which a lottery is performed based on the entry of a game ball into a predetermined ball-entering means, and when a predetermined result is obtained by the lottery, a game state advantageous to the player is generated. .

Among such pachinko machines, there are those that produce a production effect by rotating the rotating means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-100385).

However, in the conventional game machine, for example, only one rotating means is provided, and the light emitting means mounted on the rotating means only lights up and flashes in accordance with the rotation of the rotating means, and the effect of the rotating means is monotonous. It is easy to become, and further improvement of interest was desired.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest.

Means VA1. a game board having a game area on the front side;
Lottery means for performing a lottery based on a predetermined opportunity;
A gaming machine comprising game value imparting means capable of imparting a predetermined game value when a winning result is obtained by the lottery,
In a predetermined area, it is rotatable with the front-rear direction (the player's line of sight direction) as its axial direction, is configured to be able to change state between at least a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state, and has a light-transmissive portion. 1 rotation means;
and a light emitting means capable of emitting predetermined light,
a second rotating means that is movable in the predetermined area and rotatable in a predetermined manner is configured to be movable relative to the first rotating means;
The relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means in a front view of a predetermined area is
a first positional relationship (non-proximity state) in which at least part of the first rotating means and at least part of the second rotating means do not overlap; configured to be changeable to a second positional relationship (proximity state) in which at least a portion overlaps,
In the first positional relationship,
At least part of the light emitted from the light emitting means is visible through the light transmitting portion of the first rotating means,
In the second positional relationship,
A game machine characterized in that at least a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be shielded by at least a part of the second rotating means that overlaps the translucent part of the first rotating means. .

Incidentally, examples of the above-mentioned "predetermined opportunity" include, for example, "entering a game ball into a predetermined ball entry means provided in the game area" (the same applies to various means below). .

In addition, giving "game value" includes, for example, paying out game media such as prize balls, and giving a special game state (win state, game mode, etc.) that is advantageous to the player. (The same applies to the various means below).

Further, the configuration in which the second rotating means is "rotatable in a predetermined manner" includes, for example, a configuration in which the second rotating means is rotatable with the front-rear direction as the axial direction, similar to the first rotating means. but same). Of course, the second rotating means may be configured to be rotatable in a manner different from this (the same applies to various means below). For example, the second rotating means may be configured to be rotatable with the left-right direction as its axial direction.

Further, the configuration in which "the second rotating means is relatively movable with respect to the first rotating means" means, for example, the center position (rotation It means a configuration in which the center position (position of the rotation axis) of the second rotating means can move in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, etc. with reference to the position of the shaft (the same applies to the following various means). Therefore, when viewed from the front in a predetermined area, the positional relationship between the center position of the first rotating means and the center position of the second rotating means does not change, that is, the centers of the two rotating means are arranged on the same longitudinal axis. However, a configuration in which the positional relationship in a front view is fixed and the relative positional relationship between the two rotating means varies only in the circumferential direction is not included.

According to the above means VA1, the two rotating means (the first rotating means and the second rotating means) whose relative positional relationship changes are superimposed or separated from each other, thereby providing a more lively game effect. can be executed.

Particularly, in this means, at least part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be transmitted or blocked by changing the relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means. That is, it is possible to change the visual recognition mode of the light emitted from the light emitting means without performing control for lighting/blinking the light emitting means.

This makes it possible to perform an effect using light together with the motion effect of the first rotating means and the second rotating means. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game presentation and to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Incidentally, as one of the effect devices that use the rotating means to produce a game effect, the rotating means is equipped with a plurality of light emitting means, and while the rotating means is rotated, the light emitting means blinks in a predetermined pattern, resulting in an afterimage. Versawriter and the like for displaying characters, figures, etc. are known as such.

However, in a configuration in which a plurality of light emitting means are mounted on a rotating means, such as a Versalighter, the rotating means may become large and heavy, and the operability of the rotating means may deteriorate.

Furthermore, when a plurality of light-emitting means are mounted on the rotationally driven rotating means, a signal line connecting between the light-emitting means mounted on the rotating means and a control device installed outside the rotating means is usually used. and power lines must be electrically connected via a slip ring or the like, which may complicate wiring and control.

Therefore, in such an effect device, the operability of the rotating means is low, and the motion effect of the rotating means tends to be monotonous.

On the other hand, according to the present means, since it is possible to change the viewing mode of the light emitted from the light emitting means by changing the relative positional relationship between the two rotating means, the light emitting means is not mounted on the rotating means. , the increase in size and weight of the rotating means can be suppressed, and the operability of each rotating means can be enhanced.

Incidentally, if one rotating means is used and the diameter of the rotating means is increased in order to increase the switching speed of the light viewing mode (the speed of the outer peripheral portion of the rotating means), the effect of inertia and the like will cause the rotation There is a risk that the load on the means, the motor, etc., will increase.

On the other hand, according to this means, by stacking the two rotating means, it is possible to increase the switching speed of the light viewing mode without increasing the load on the rotating means, the motor, or the like. As a result, it is possible to improve the durability of the rotating means, the motor, and the like.

Means VA2. than when the first rotating means and the second rotating means are in the first second positional relationship (proximity state),
When the first rotating means and the second rotating means are in the second positional relationship (proximity state),
A game machine according to means VA1, characterized in that the game machine is constructed so as to increase the ratio of a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player.

According to the means VA2, it is possible to perform a game effect such that the ratio of a predetermined advantageous state changes depending on the difference in the positional relationship (proximity state) between the two rotating means.

As a result, the player will watch the operation of the second rotating means with anticipation, and the player's interest can be improved.

Means VA3. A first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state can be generated,
than when the first rotating means and the second rotating means are in the first second positional relationship (proximity state),
When the first rotating means and the second rotating means are in the second positional relationship (proximity state),
A game machine according to means VA1, characterized in that the ratio of said second advantageous state is higher than said first advantageous state.

According to the means VA3, the same effect as the means VA2 can be obtained.

Means VA4. When the predetermined condition is met, compared to when it is not met,
Any one of the means VA1 to VA3, wherein the ratio (frequency) of the first rotation means and the second rotation means to be in the second positional relationship (proximity state) increases. The game machine described.

According to the above means VA4, when a predetermined condition is met (for example, when a winning result is obtained by a predetermined lottery process), compared to when it is not met (for example, when a winning result is not obtained by a predetermined lottery process) , the ratio of the second positional relationship (close state) between the first rotating means and the second rotating means increases.

That is, the ratio of the second positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means changes according to the game situation. As a result, the game can be varied, and the interest of the player can be improved.

Means VA5. wherein the plurality of second rotating means are individually movable in the predetermined area and the plurality of second rotating means are configured to be relatively movable;
The plurality of second rotating means are configured to be individually operable with respect to the first rotating means (at least part of the first rotating means and at least part of the second rotating means can approach individually). The gaming machine according to any one of means VA1 to VA4, characterized by:

According to the means VA5, a plurality of second rotating means are provided which are relatively movable with respect to each other, and these are configured to be individually operable with respect to the first rotating means, thereby further diversifying the game effects. be able to. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player.

Here, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined second rotating means among the plurality of second rotating means can act on other second rotating means. As a result, further diversification of game effects can be achieved.

Means VA6. In the first rotating means, a predetermined number N (N is an integer of 1 or more) of the light-transmitting portions are arranged at equal intervals (for example, at predetermined intervals around the rotation axis) in the circumferential direction of the first rotating means. arranged at an angle of 360°/N equiangular intervals),
A light emission control means capable of controlling the light emission means,
The game machine according to any one of the means VA1 to VA5, wherein the light emission control means is configured to be capable of controlling blinking of the light emission means.

According to the above means VA6, by adjusting (changing) the rotation period of the first rotation means and the blinking period of the light emitting means, it is possible to perform a rotation means presentation using a strobe phenomenon (wagon wheel effect), etc. It is possible to change the apparent operation mode of the rotating means (translucent portion). As a result, it is possible to diversify the game presentation and improve the interest of the player.

Here, the "blinking control" refers to control in which the light emitting means cyclically repeats a lighting state and a lighting-out state.

For example, flashing control in which the flashing period of the light emitting means is shorter than the light transmitting portion movement period (period in which the light transmitting portions move by one formation pitch interval) in which the N light transmitting portions move a distance corresponding to the predetermined interval. is executed, the light-transmitting part which is visually recognized by the player when the light-emitting means is turned on at a predetermined timing has not yet reached the distance of one formation pitch interval at the next timing when the light-emitting means is turned on. It will be visually recognized at the front side position where there is no.

With such a configuration, it is possible to produce a strobe phenomenon (wagon wheel effect) in which the rotating means (translucent portion) appears to be rotating in a direction opposite to the actual rotating direction. As a result, it is possible to produce a visual effect that gives the player the illusion that the rotating means, which is rotating in the forward direction, has suddenly reversed, for example.

There is a mechanical limit to the rotational drive control of the rotating means using a motor or the like. For this reason, depending on the mode of action, etc., the action may appear sluggish, which may reduce the interest of the player.

For example, it is extremely difficult to perform drive control for rapidly reversing the rotation direction of a rotating means (motor) rotating in the forward direction to the opposite direction without providing a deceleration period due to the influence of inertia and the like. In addition, if the direction of rotation of the rotating means (motor) is suddenly reversed, the load on the rotating means, the motor, etc. may increase significantly. As a result, there is a risk that durability will be reduced, for example, rattling will occur in the assembled state of the rotating means and the motor.

On the other hand, according to the above configuration, it is possible to perform an effect as if the rotating means rotating in the normal direction suddenly reversed direction without increasing the load on the rotating means, the motor, or the like. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game presentation and improve the interest of the player.

Means VA7. The gaming machine according to any one of means VA1 to VA6, wherein the diameter of the second rotating means in a front view of the predetermined area is at least smaller than the diameter of the first rotating means.

If the diameter of the second rotating means that moves within the predetermined area is relatively large, the load on the driving mechanism, etc., may increase due to the influence of inertia, etc., and it may become difficult to control the movement of the second rotating means. be.

In this respect, according to the means VA7, it is possible to improve the braking performance and suppress the occurrence of the above problems.

Means VA8. The second rotating means has at least a part of a reflecting part capable of reflecting irradiated light (at least a part of the second rotating means is configured to be able to reflect light),
In the second positional relationship,
Light from the front (including light irradiated from the outside of the game machine) through the light-transmitting portion of the first rotating means is applied to at least a part of the reflecting portion of the second rotating means that overlaps the light-transmitting portion of the first rotating means. ) is configured to be able to irradiate.

According to the means VA8, the same effect as the means VB1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VA8, similarly to the means VB3, ``the first rotating means is provided rotatably on the front side of a predetermined translucent member capable of transmitting light''. good. Thereby, the same effect as that of the means VB3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to means VA8, as in means VB4, "at least the reflecting section (at least part of the second rotating means) may be made of a metal material". This provides the same effect as the means VB4.

Here, under the configuration according to means VA8, similarly to means VB5, "at least the reflecting portion (at least part of the second rotating means) may be subjected to a polishing process". Thereby, the same effect as the means VB5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VA8, similarly to the means VB6, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is plated (for example, chromium plating)." good too. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB6 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VA8, as in the means VB7, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is curved (in a spherical shape convex outward). ” may be used. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB7 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to means VA8, as in means VB8, "at least the reflecting part (at least a part of the second rotating means) has an information writing part in which predetermined information (characters, etc.) is written. It may be said that Thereby, the same effect as the means VB8 can be obtained.

Means VA9. Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
The game machine according to any one of the means VA1 to VA8, wherein the operation mode of the second rotating means can be changed according to the operation mode of the operation means operated by the player.

According to the means VA9, the same effect as the means VC1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VA9, as in the case of the means VC2, "the second rotation means starts a predetermined operation based on the operation of the operation means by the player". Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VC2 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration of the means VA9, similarly to the means VC3, "based on at least the operation displacement amount of the operation means, the amount of movement of the second rotating means (the amount of movement in the vertical direction and the amount of movement in the horizontal direction ) is configured to be changeable”. This provides the same effect as the means VC3.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VA9, like the means VC4, it may be possible to "provide a movement restricting means capable of restricting the movement of the second rotating means by a predetermined amount or more". Thereby, the same effect as that of the means VC4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VA9, like the means VC5, it may be possible to "provide a guide means for guiding the second rotating means to the predetermined area". Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VC5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VA9, similarly to the means VC6, "return restricting means capable of restricting the second rotating means guided to the predetermined area from returning to the outside of the predetermined area (standby position) is provided. It may be said that This provides the same effect as the means VC6.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VA9, similarly to the means VC7, "the operation means includes at least a first operation section capable of changing the amount of movement of the second rotation means, and a predetermined movement of the second rotation means. and a second operation unit that can select whether or not to execute an action." This provides the same effect as the means VC7.

Means VA10. In the predetermined area,
A detecting means capable of detecting the second rotating means that has passed through a predetermined position,
A gaming machine according to any one of the means VA1 to VA9, characterized in that a predetermined effect can be executed based on the second rotating means being detected by the detecting means.

According to the means VA10, the same effect as the means VD1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VA10, similarly to the means VD2, "a light emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light is provided, and based on the detection of the second rotating means by the detecting means, the light emitting means It is also possible to say that the light emitting mode is made changeable. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD2 can be obtained.

In addition, as in the means VD3, it is possible to "provide a predetermined display means as the light emitting means, and to change the display mode of the display means as the light emitting mode of the light emitting means". Thereby, the same effect as the means VD3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VA10, similarly to the means VD5, "the detection means are provided at a plurality of locations in the predetermined area, and depending on which of the detection means at the plurality of locations the second rotation means is detected, It may be "configured to be able to execute different effects". Thereby, the same effect as the means VD5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VA10, similarly to the means VD6, it is assumed that "in the predetermined area, the plurality of second rotating means are configured to be individually movable and individually passable through the predetermined position." good too. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD6 can be obtained.

Means VA11. The second rotating means has at least a portion thereof having a conductive portion (at least a portion of the second rotating means is made of a conductive material),
In the second positional relationship (proximity state), at least part of the first rotating means and at least part of the second rotating means are configured to be able to contact or approach each other,
Any one of the means VA1 to VA10, wherein in the first positional relationship (non-proximity state), the conductive portion of the second rotating means is configured to be in contact with a predetermined conductive member having conductivity. The gaming machine described in .

According to the means VA11, the same effect as the means VE1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VA11, as in the means VE2, "the conductive member may be provided in a region different from the predetermined region (outside the predetermined region)". As a result, the same effect as the means VE2 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VA11, as with the means VE3, "the conductive member is arranged along a part of the route along which the second rotating means moves from the predetermined standby position to the predetermined area." It is also possible to say "to be". Thereby, the same effect as the means VE3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VA11, as in the means VE4, "the conductive member is an elongated member arranged along at least a predetermined section of the path along which the second rotating means moves." may be As a result, the same effect as the means VE4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VA11, as in the means VE5, "at least the conductive portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is curved (in a spherical shape convex outward). ” may be used. Thereby, the same effect as the means VE5 can be obtained.

Means VA12. one of the first rotating means and the second rotating means has at least one acted portion that receives an action from the other rotating means;
When the other rotating means acts on the affected portion of the one rotating means in a predetermined manner, the one rotating means can perform a predetermined operation in an operation mode corresponding to the predetermined manner. The gaming machine according to any one of means VA1 to VA11, wherein

According to the means VA12, the same effect as the means VF1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VA12, as in the case of the means VF2, "when the one rotating means acts on the acted portion in the first mode, the first rotating means When the other rotating means acts on the operated portion in the second mode, the second motion in accordance with the second mode is performed. configured to operate in a manner". Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VF2 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VA12, as in the case of the means VF3, "the one rotating means operates in the second operation mode more than the one rotating means operates in the first operation mode." It may be configured such that the proportion of a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player is higher when the action is performed. Thereby, the same effect as that of the means VF3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to means VA12, as with means VF4, "a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state are generated." and when the one rotating means operates in the second operation mode, the first rotation is more likely than when the one rotating means operates in the first operation mode. It may be configured such that the ratio of being in the second advantageous state is higher than in the advantageous state. Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VF4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VA12, as in the case of the means VF5, "the other rotating means may be configured to be able to come into contact with the affected portion of the one rotating means". Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VF5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VA12, similarly to the means VF6, it is also possible to say that "a predetermined movable member is provided which can come into contact with the second rotating means and can change the movement of the second rotating means". good. Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VF6 can be obtained.

Means VA13. The game board is composed of a translucent member, and at least a part of the rear area thereof is configured to be visible from the front,
The first rotating means is configured to be rotatable in a front area of the game board,
Any one of the means VA1 to VA12, wherein the second rotating means is movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board and is movable in the rear area of the game board. The game machine described.

According to the means VA13, the same effect as the means VG1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VA13, as in the means VG2, "in the predetermined area, the plurality of the second rotating means are individually movable and the plurality of the second rotating means are configured to be relatively movable, The plurality of second rotating means may individually be configured to be movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board and to be movable in the rear area of the game board. Thereby, the same effect as the means VG2 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VA13, like the means VG3, ``a plurality of paths are provided so that the second rotating means can move from the front area to the rear area of the game board''. Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VG3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VA13, like the means VG4, "in the front area of the game board, a path changing means capable of changing the path along which the second rotating means moves" may be provided. Thereby, the same effect as the means VG4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VA13, as with the means VG5, it may be possible to provide "rear guide means capable of guiding the second rotating means moved to the rear area of the game board to a predetermined position". . Thereby, the same effect as the means VG5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VA13, like the means VG6, "the direction of the rotation axis of the second rotating means may be configured to be variable". Thereby, the same effect as the means VG6 can be obtained.

Conventional problem VB. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a game area. For example, a pachinko machine is known in which a lottery is performed based on the entry of a game ball into a predetermined ball-entering means, and when a predetermined result is obtained by the lottery, a game state advantageous to the player is generated. .

Among such pachinko machines, there are those that produce a production effect by rotating the rotating means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-100385). For example, while the rotating means is being rotated, there is an effect such as lighting and blinking of the light emitting means mounted on the rotating means.

Instead of this, for example, it is conceivable to provide a rotating means and a light emitting means separately and rotate the rotating means at a position in front of the light emitting means to perform various game effects.

However, under such a configuration, if at least part of the rotating means is made of a light-shielding material that does not allow light to pass through, the front-side design surface of that part appears dark to the player's eyes, and the design surface is dark. may become difficult to see.

As a result, there is a risk that the design of the rotating means will be degraded, and that players will find it less interesting.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest.

Means VB1. a game board having a game area on the front side;
Lottery means for performing a lottery based on a predetermined opportunity;
A gaming machine comprising game value imparting means capable of imparting a predetermined game value when a winning result is obtained by the lottery,
In a predetermined area, it is rotatable with the front-rear direction (the player's line of sight direction) as its axial direction, is configured to be able to change state between at least a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state, and has a light-transmissive portion. 1 rotating means,
a second rotating means that is movable in the predetermined area and rotatable in a predetermined manner is configured to be movable relative to the first rotating means;
The relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means in a predetermined area front view (game board front view) is
a first positional relationship (non-proximity state) in which at least part of the first rotating means and at least part of the second rotating means do not overlap; configured to be changeable to a second positional relationship (proximity state) in which at least a portion overlaps,
The second rotating means has at least a part of a reflecting part capable of reflecting irradiated light (at least a part of the second rotating means is configured to be able to reflect light),
In the second positional relationship,
Light from the front (including light irradiated from the outside of the game machine) through the light-transmitting portion of the first rotating means is applied to at least a part of the reflecting portion of the second rotating means that overlaps the light-transmitting portion of the first rotating means. ) is configured to be able to irradiate.

According to the above means VB1, the two rotating means (the first rotating means and the second rotating means) whose relative positional relationship changes are superimposed or separated from each other, thereby providing a more lively game effect. can be executed.

Furthermore, according to this means, in the second positional relationship (close state) where at least a part of the first rotating means and at least a part of the second rotating means overlap, the second rotating means overlapping the translucent portion of the first rotating means Light (including light emitted from the outside of the game machine) is irradiated from the front through the translucent portion of the first rotating means to at least part of the reflecting portion of the second rotating means.

As a result, even if at least part of the second rotating means is made of a light-blocking material, the front side design surface of that part appears dark to the eyes of the player, and the design is not visible to the player. The problem that the surface becomes difficult to see becomes less likely to occur.

As a result, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the design, and thereby improve the interest of the player.

Means VB2. Equipped with a light emitting means capable of emitting predetermined light,
In the first positional relationship (non-proximity state),
At least part of the light emitted from the light emitting means is visible through the light transmitting portion of the first rotating means,
In the second positional relationship (proximity state),
The means VB1 is characterized in that at least part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be shielded by at least part of the second rotating means that overlaps the translucent portion of the first rotating means. The gaming machine described in .

According to the means VB2, at least part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be transmitted or blocked by changing the relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means. That is, it is possible to change the visual recognition mode of the light emitted from the light emitting means without performing control for lighting/blinking the light emitting means.

This makes it possible to perform an effect using light together with the motion effect of the first rotating means and the second rotating means. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game presentation and to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB2, as in the case of the means VA2, "the above-mentioned When the first rotating means and the second rotating means are in the second positional relationship (proximity state), the ratio of the predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player increases. It is also possible to say that Thereby, the same effect as the means VA2 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB2, as with the means VA3, "a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state are generated." and the first rotating means and the second rotating means are more likely to move than when the first rotating means and the second rotating means are in the first second positional relationship (proximity state). The second positional relationship (proximity state) is configured so that the ratio of the second advantageous state is higher than the first advantageous state. good. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB2, similarly to the means VA4, "when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first rotating means and the second rotating means are in the second positional relationship (proximity state) as compared to when the predetermined condition is not satisfied." It may be configured so that the ratio (frequency) of Thereby, the same effect as the means VA4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VB2, similarly to the means VA5, "in the predetermined area, the plurality of the second rotating means are configured to be individually movable and the plurality of the second rotating means to be relatively movable, The plurality of second rotating means are configured to be individually operable with respect to the first rotating means (at least part of the first rotating means and at least part of the second rotating means can approach individually). ” may be used. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB2, as in the case of the means VA6, "the first rotating means has a predetermined number N (N is an integer equal to or greater than 1) of the light-transmitting parts arranged around the circumference of the first rotating means. light emission control means arranged at regular intervals in a direction (e.g., equal angular intervals of 360°/N equal angles around a rotation axis) and capable of controlling the light emission means, wherein the light emission control means is and being configured to be able to execute blinking control of the light emitting means. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA6 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VB2, as in the case of the means VA7, "the diameter of the second rotating means when viewed from the front in a predetermined area may be at least smaller than the diameter of the first rotating means". Thereby, the same effect as the means VA7 can be obtained.

Means VB3. The gaming machine according to means VB1 or VB2, wherein the first rotating means is rotatably provided on the front side of a predetermined translucent member capable of transmitting light.

When a light-transmitting member is arranged between the light-emitting means and the first rotating means, the brightness of the light emitted from the light-emitting means is reduced by passing through the light-transmitting member.

For example, in a configuration such as an illumination device in which a translucent member such as a cover member is disposed on the front side of an LED or the like as a light emitting means, the brightness of light emitted from the LED or the like is determined by the cover member or the like. decrease by passing through

Similarly, in a configuration such as a liquid crystal display device in which a liquid crystal panel formed by laminating various translucent members is arranged in front of a backlight as a light emitting means, the light emitted from the backlight is Luminance is reduced by passing through various translucent members.

Therefore, under the configuration according to this means VB3, the effects of the means VB1 and the like are more effective.

Means VB4. The gaming machine according to any one of means VB1 to VB3, wherein at least the reflecting portion (at least part of the second rotating means) is made of a metal material.

According to the means VB4, the rigidity of the second rotating means can be increased, and durability and wear resistance can be improved. Furthermore, the reflecting portion can be formed only by polishing a predetermined portion of the second rotating means, and the manufacturing process can be simplified. Further, the reflecting portion (at least a portion of the second rotating means) may be configured to be subjected to antirust treatment or the like.

Means VB5. The gaming machine according to any one of means VB1 to VB4, wherein at least the reflecting portion (at least part of the second rotating means) is polished.

According to the means VB5, polishing (mirror finish) is performed to form a more glossy reflecting portion. As a result, the effects of the means VB1 and the like can be further enhanced.

Means VB6. The gaming machine according to any one of means VB1 to VB5, wherein at least the reflecting portion (at least part of the second rotating means) is plated (for example, chrome plating).

According to the means VB6, the reflectance of light in the reflecting portion can be increased, and the effects of the means VB1 and the like can be further enhanced.

Means VB7. The gaming machine according to any one of means VB1 to VB6, wherein at least the reflecting portion (at least part of the second rotating means) is curved (in a spherical shape convex outward).

According to the means VB7, not only the light emitted from the front side of the game machine (outside the game machine), but also the light emitted from various directions such as the sides of the game board can be reflected to the front side of the game machine. As a result, the effects of the means VB1 and the like can be further enhanced.

Means VB8. The method according to any one of means VB1 to VB7, wherein at least the reflecting part (at least part of the second rotating means) has an information writing part on which predetermined information (characters, etc.) is written. game machine.

According to the above means VB8, the player can visually recognize the predetermined information written in the information writing section of the reflecting section through the translucent section of the first rotating section.

As a result, it is possible to further diversify the game effects using the two rotating means (the first rotating means and the second rotating means), and to further enhance the effects of the means VB1.

Means VB9. Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
The game machine according to any one of the means VB1 to VB8, wherein the operation mode of the second rotating means can be changed according to the operation mode of the operation means operated by the player.

According to the means VB9, the same effect as the means VC1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB9, as in the case of the means VC2, "the second rotation means starts a predetermined operation based on the player's operation of the operation means". Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VC2 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB9, similarly to the means VC3, "based on at least the operation displacement amount of the operation means, the amount of movement of the second rotating means (the amount of movement in the vertical direction and the amount of movement in the horizontal direction ) is configured to be changeable”. This provides the same effect as the means VC3.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB9, as with the means VC4, it may be possible to "provide a movement restricting means capable of restricting the movement of the second rotating means by a predetermined amount or more". Thereby, the same effect as that of the means VC4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB9, like the means VC5, it may be possible to ``provide a guide means for guiding the second rotating means to the predetermined area''. Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VC5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB9, similarly to the means VC6, "return restricting means capable of restricting the second rotating means guided to the predetermined area from returning to the outside of the predetermined area (standby position) is provided. It may be said that This provides the same effect as the means VC6.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB9, similarly to the means VC7, "the operation means includes at least a first operation section capable of changing the amount of movement of the second rotation means, and a predetermined movement of the second rotation means. and a second operation unit that can select whether or not to execute an action." This provides the same effect as the means VC7.

Means VB10. In the predetermined area,
A detecting means capable of detecting the second rotating means that has passed through a predetermined position,
A game machine according to any one of means VB1 to VB9, characterized in that a predetermined effect can be executed based on the detection of the second rotation means by the detection means.

According to the means VB10, the same effect as the means VD1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB10, similarly to the means VD2, "a light emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light is provided, and based on the detection of the second rotating means by the detecting means, the light emitting means It is also possible to say that the light emitting mode is made changeable. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD2 can be obtained.

In addition, as in the means VD3, it is possible to "provide a predetermined display means as the light emitting means, and to change the display mode of the display means as the light emitting mode of the light emitting means". Thereby, the same effect as the means VD3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB10, similarly to the means VD5, "the detection means are provided at a plurality of locations in the predetermined area, and depending on which of the detection means at the plurality of locations the second rotation means is detected, It may be "configured to be able to execute different effects". Thereby, the same effect as the means VD5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB10, similarly to the means VD6, it is assumed that "in the predetermined area, the plurality of second rotating means are configured to be individually movable and individually pass through the predetermined position." good too. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD6 can be obtained.

Means VB11. The second rotating means has at least a portion thereof having a conductive portion (at least a portion of the second rotating means is made of a conductive material),
In the second positional relationship (proximity state), at least part of the first rotating means and at least part of the second rotating means are configured to be able to contact or approach each other,
Any one of the means VB1 to VB10, wherein in the first positional relationship (non-proximity state), the conductive portion of the second rotating means is configured to be in contact with a predetermined conductive member having conductivity. The gaming machine described in .

According to the means VB11, effects similar to those of the means VE1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VB11, as in the case of the means VE2, "the conductive member may be provided in an area different from the predetermined area (outside the predetermined area)". As a result, the same effect as the means VE2 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB11, as in the case of the means VE3, "the conductive member is arranged along a part of the route along which the second rotating means moves from the predetermined standby position to the predetermined area." It is also possible to say "to be". Thereby, the same effect as the means VE3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VB11, as in the means VE4, ``the conductive member is an elongated member arranged along at least a predetermined section of the path along which the second rotating means moves.'' may be As a result, the same effect as the means VE4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VB11, as in the means VE5, "at least the conductive portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is curved (in a spherical shape convex outward). ” may be used. Thereby, the same effect as the means VE5 can be obtained.

Means VB12. one of the first rotating means and the second rotating means has at least one acted portion that receives an action from the other rotating means;
When the other rotating means acts on the affected portion of the one rotating means in a predetermined manner, the one rotating means can perform a predetermined operation in an operation mode corresponding to the predetermined manner. The game machine according to any one of means VB1 to VB11, wherein the game machine is configured as follows.

According to the means VB12, the same effect as the means VF1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB12, as in the case of the means VF2, "when the one rotating means acts on the acted portion in the first mode, the first rotating means When the other rotating means acts on the operated portion in the second mode, the second motion in accordance with the second mode is performed. configured to operate in a manner". Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VF2 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB12, as in the case of the means VF3, "the one rotating means operates in the second operating mode more than the one rotating means operates in the first operating mode." It may be configured such that the proportion of a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player is higher when the action is performed. Thereby, the same effect as that of the means VF3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB12, as with the means VF4, "a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state are generated." and when the one rotating means operates in the second operation mode, the first rotation is more likely than when the one rotating means operates in the first operation mode. It may be configured such that the ratio of being in the second advantageous state is higher than in the advantageous state. Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VF4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB12, as in the case of the means VF5, "the other rotating means may be configured to be able to come into contact with the affected portion of the one rotating means". Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VF5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB12, as in the case of the means VF6, it is also possible to ``provide a predetermined movable member capable of contacting the second rotating means and causing a change in the movement of the second rotating means''. good. Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VF6 can be obtained.

Means VB13. The game board is composed of a translucent member, and at least a part of the rear area thereof is configured to be visible from the front,
The first rotating means is configured to be rotatable in a front area of the game board,
Any one of the means VB1 to VB12, wherein the second rotating means is movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board and is movable in the rear area of the game board. The game machine described.

According to the means VB13, the same effect as the means VG1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB13, similarly to the means VG2, "in the predetermined area, the plurality of the second rotating means are configured to be individually movable and the plurality of the second rotating means to be relatively movable, The plurality of second rotating means may individually be configured to be movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board and to be movable in the rear area of the game board. Thereby, the same effect as the means VG2 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB13, like the means VG3, ``a plurality of paths are provided so that the second rotating means can move from the front area to the rear area of the game board''. Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VG3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB13, like the means VG4, "in the front region of the game board, a path changing means capable of changing the path of movement of the second rotating means" may be provided. Thereby, the same effect as the means VG4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB13, like the means VG5, it may be possible to ``provide a rear guide means capable of guiding the second rotating means moved to the rear area of the game board to a predetermined position''. . Thereby, the same effect as the means VG5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB13, like the means VG6, "the rotation axis direction of the second rotating means may be configured to be variable". Thereby, the same effect as the means VG6 can be obtained.

Conventional problem VC. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a game area. For example, a pachinko machine is known in which a lottery is performed based on the entry of a game ball into a predetermined ball-entering means, and when a predetermined result is obtained by the lottery, a game state advantageous to the player is generated. .

Among such pachinko machines, there are those that produce a production effect by rotating the rotating means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-100385).

However, in the conventional game machine, for example, when a predetermined performance condition is satisfied, the rotating means rotates in a preset motion. For this reason, the presentation of the rotating means tends to be monotonous, and the player tends to lose interest in the operation of the rotating means. In this respect, further enhancement of interest has been desired.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest.

Means VC1. a game board having a game area on the front side;
Lottery means for performing a lottery based on a predetermined opportunity;
A gaming machine comprising game value imparting means capable of imparting a predetermined game value when a winning result is obtained by the lottery,
a first rotating means configured to be rotatable in a predetermined area with the front-rear direction (the line-of-sight direction of the player) as an axial direction and capable of changing the state between at least a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state;
a second rotating means that is movable in the predetermined area and rotatable in a predetermined manner is configured to be movable relative to the first rotating means;
The relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means in a predetermined area front view (game board front view) is
a first positional relationship (non-proximity state) in which at least part of the first rotating means and at least part of the second rotating means do not overlap; configured to be changeable to a second positional relationship (proximity state) in which at least a portion overlaps,
Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
A gaming machine, wherein the operation mode of the second rotating means can be changed according to the operation mode of the operation means operated by the player.

According to the above means VC1, the two rotating means (the first rotating means and the second rotating means) whose relative positional relationship changes are superimposed or separated from each other, thereby providing a more lively game effect. can be executed.

Further, according to this means, the operation mode of the second rotating means is changed according to the operation mode of the operation means operated by the player. As a result, the relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means can be changed. As a result, the player is more aware of his/her active participation in the game, and can improve interest in the game.

Here, the "operation mode of the operation means" includes, for example, the number of operations and the amount of operation displacement. For example, it includes the number of times a button-type operating means has been pressed, and the amount of operation displacement of a movable operating means such as a jog dial or a slide lever.

Means VC2. The gaming machine according to means VC1, wherein the second rotating means starts a predetermined movement based on the operation of the operating means by the player.

According to the above means VC2, the player himself/herself can determine the operation start timing of the second rotating means which has been in the standby state until then. As a result, the player can become more aware of his/her active participation in the game, and can further improve his or her amusement.

Means VC3. The means VC1 or VC1 characterized in that the amount of movement of the second rotating means (the amount of movement in the vertical direction and the amount of movement in the horizontal direction) of the second rotating means can be changed based on at least the amount of operation displacement of the operation means. A gaming machine described in VC2.

According to the means VC3, the player can change the movement amount of the second rotation means based on the operation displacement amount of the operation means. As a result, the player can become more aware of his/her active participation in the game, and can further improve his or her amusement.

Means VC4. A gaming machine according to any one of the means VC1 to VC3, further comprising a movement restricting means capable of restricting movement of the second rotating means by a predetermined amount or more.

Under the configuration related to the means VC1 and the like, if a configuration is adopted in which the amount of movement of the second rotating means can be changed as the player desires, the amount of movement of the second rotation means may be larger than the amount of movement planned by the developer. There is a risk that a player will try to move the two rotating means. If an attempt is made to move the second rotating means by a predetermined amount or more, the second rotating means may collide with a predetermined portion and the second rotating means or the predetermined portion may be damaged.

On the other hand, according to the means VC4, by providing the movement restricting means, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of the problems as described above.

Means VC5. The gaming machine according to any one of means VC1 to VC4, further comprising guide means for guiding said second rotating means to said predetermined area.

Under the configuration related to the above means VC1 and the like, if a configuration is adopted in which the amount of movement of the second rotating means can be changed as desired by the player, then the predetermined area, which is the rendering area of the first rotating means, will be displayed. There is a risk that the second rotating means will not be properly guided.

On the other hand, according to the means VC5, by providing the guide means, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of the problems as described above.

Means VC6. The means VC3 to VC5 according to any one of the means VC3 to VC5, further comprising a return restricting means capable of restricting the second rotating means guided to the predetermined area from returning to the outside of the predetermined area (standby position). game machine.

Under the configuration related to the means VC1 and the like, if the second rotating means can be operated as desired by the player, the second rotating means once guided to the predetermined area can be moved again. There is a risk that the player will return to the outside of the predetermined area (standby position), and the rotating means effect will not be performed appropriately.

On the other hand, according to the means VC6, by providing the return restricting means, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of the problems as described above.

Means VC7. The operation means includes a first operation section capable of changing at least the amount of movement of the second rotation means, and a second operation section capable of selecting whether or not to cause the second rotation means to execute a predetermined operation. The gaming machine according to any one of means VC1 to VC6, characterized by comprising:

According to the above-mentioned means VC7, the player can decide many actions by himself/herself, further strengthen the awareness that the player is actively participating in the game, and further improve interest. can.

Means VC8. Equipped with a light emitting means capable of emitting predetermined light,
The first rotating means includes a light transmitting portion capable of transmitting light,
In the first positional relationship (non-proximity state),
At least part of the light emitted from the light emitting means is visible through the light transmitting portion of the first rotating means,
In the second positional relationship (proximity state),
Means VC1 characterized in that at least a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be shielded by at least a part of the second rotating means that overlaps the translucent part of the first rotating means. The game machine according to any one of VC7.

According to the means VC8, at least part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be transmitted or blocked by changing the relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means. That is, it is possible to change the visual recognition mode of the light emitted from the light emitting means without performing control for lighting/blinking the light emitting means.

This makes it possible to perform an effect using light together with the motion effect of the first rotating means and the second rotating means. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game presentation and to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VC8, as in the case of the means VA2, "the above-mentioned When the first rotating means and the second rotating means are in the second positional relationship (proximity state), the ratio of the predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player increases. It is also possible to say that Thereby, the same effect as the means VA2 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VC8, as with the means VA3, "a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state are generated." and the first rotating means and the second rotating means are more likely to move than when the first rotating means and the second rotating means are in the first second positional relationship (proximity state). The second positional relationship (proximity state) is configured so that the ratio of the second advantageous state is higher than the first advantageous state. good. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VC8, similarly to the means VA4, "when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first rotating means and the second rotating means are in the second positional relationship (proximity state) as compared to when the predetermined condition is not satisfied." It may be configured so that the ratio (frequency) of Thereby, the same effect as the means VA4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VC8, similarly to the means VA5, "in the predetermined area, the plurality of the second rotating means are individually movable and the plurality of the second rotating means are configured to be relatively movable, The plurality of second rotating means are configured to be individually operable with respect to the first rotating means (at least part of the first rotating means and at least part of the second rotating means can approach individually). ” may be used. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VC8, similarly to the means VA6, "the first rotating means has a predetermined number N (N is an integer of 1 or more) of the light-transmitting parts arranged around the circumference of the first rotating means. light emission control means arranged at regular intervals in a direction (e.g., equal angular intervals of 360°/N equal angles around a rotation axis) and capable of controlling the light emission means, wherein the light emission control means is and being configured to be able to execute blinking control of the light emitting means. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA6 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VC8, as in the case of the means VA7, "the diameter of the second rotating means in a predetermined area viewed from the front may be at least smaller than the diameter of the first rotating means". Thereby, the same effect as the means VA7 can be obtained.

Means VC9. The first rotating means includes a light transmitting portion capable of transmitting light,
The second rotating means has at least a part of a reflecting part capable of reflecting irradiated light (at least a part of the second rotating means is configured to be able to reflect light),
In the second positional relationship,
Light from the front (including light irradiated from the outside of the game machine) through the light-transmitting portion of the first rotating means is applied to at least a part of the reflecting portion of the second rotating means that overlaps the light-transmitting portion of the first rotating means. ) is configured to be able to irradiate.

According to the means VC9, the same effect as the means VB1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VC9, similarly to the means VB3, ``the first rotating means is provided rotatably on the front side of a predetermined translucent member capable of transmitting light''. good. Thereby, the same effect as that of the means VB3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VC9, "at least the reflecting portion (at least part of the second rotating means) may be made of a metal material" as in the means VB4. This provides the same effect as the means VB4.

Here, under the configuration according to means VC9, similarly to means VB5, "at least the reflecting portion (at least part of the second rotating means) may be subjected to a polishing process". Thereby, the same effect as the means VB5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VC9, similarly to the means VB6, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is plated (for example, chromium plating)." good too. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB6 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VC9, as in the means VB7, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is curved (in a spherical shape convex outward). ” may be used. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB7 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VC9, as in the means VB8, "at least the reflecting part (at least a part of the second rotating means) has an information writing part on which predetermined information (characters, etc.) is written. It may be said that Thereby, the same effect as the means VB8 can be obtained.

Means VC10. In the predetermined area,
A detecting means capable of detecting the second rotating means that has passed through a predetermined position,
A game machine according to any one of means VC1 to VC9, characterized in that a predetermined effect can be executed based on the detection of the second rotation means by the detection means.

According to the means VC10, the same effect as the means VD1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VC10, similarly to the means VD2, "a light emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light is provided, and based on the detection of the second rotating means by the detecting means, the light emitting means It is also possible to say that the light emitting mode is made changeable. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD2 can be obtained.

In addition, as in the means VD3, it is possible to "provide a predetermined display means as the light emitting means, and to change the display mode of the display means as the light emitting mode of the light emitting means". Thereby, the same effect as the means VD3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VC10, similarly to the means VD5, "the detection means are provided at a plurality of locations in the predetermined area, and depending on which of the detection means at the plurality of locations the second rotation means is detected, It may be "configured to be able to execute different effects". Thereby, the same effect as the means VD5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VC10, similarly to the means VD6, it is assumed that "in the predetermined area, the plurality of second rotating means are configured to be individually movable and individually passable through the predetermined position." good too. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD6 can be obtained.

Means VC11. The second rotating means has at least a portion thereof having a conductive portion (at least a portion of the second rotating means is made of a conductive material),
In the second positional relationship (proximity state), at least part of the first rotating means and at least part of the second rotating means are configured to be able to contact or approach each other,
Any one of the means VC1 to VC10, wherein in the first positional relationship (non-proximity state), the conductive portion of the second rotating means is configured to be in contact with a predetermined conductive member having conductivity. The gaming machine described in .

According to the means VC11, the same effect as the means VE1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VC11, as in the means VE2, "the conductive member may be provided in a region different from the predetermined region (outside the predetermined region)". As a result, the same effect as the means VE2 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VC11, as with the means VE3, "the conductive member is arranged along a part of the route along which the second rotating means moves from the predetermined standby position to the predetermined area." It is also possible to say "to be". Thereby, the same effect as the means VE3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VC11, as in the means VE4, "the conductive member is an elongated member arranged along at least a predetermined section of the path along which the second rotating means moves." may be As a result, the same effect as the means VE4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VC11, as in the means VE5, "at least the conductive portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is curved (in a spherical shape convex outward). ” may be used. Thereby, the same effect as the means VE5 can be obtained.

Means VC12. one of the first rotating means and the second rotating means has at least one acted portion that receives an action from the other rotating means;
When the other rotating means acts on the affected portion of the one rotating means in a predetermined manner, the one rotating means can perform a predetermined operation in an operation mode corresponding to the predetermined manner. The game machine according to any one of means VC1 to VC11, characterized in that:

According to the means VC12, the same effect as the means VF1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VC12, as in the case of the means VF2, "when the one rotating means acts on the acted portion in the first mode, the first rotating means When the other rotating means acts on the operated portion in the second mode, the second motion in accordance with the second mode is performed. configured to operate in a manner". Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VF2 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VC12, as in the case of the means VF3, "the one rotating means operates in the second operation mode more than the one rotating means operates in the first operation mode." It may be configured such that the proportion of a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player is higher when the action is performed. Thereby, the same effect as that of the means VF3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VC12, as with the means VF4, "a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state are generated." and when the one rotating means operates in the second operation mode, the first rotation is more likely than when the one rotating means operates in the first operation mode. It may be configured such that the ratio of being in the second advantageous state is higher than in the advantageous state. Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VF4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VC12, as in the case of the means VF5, "the other rotating means may be configured to be able to come into contact with the affected portion of the one rotating means". Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VF5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VC12, similarly to the means VF6, it is also possible to say that "a predetermined movable member is provided which can come into contact with the second rotating means and can change the movement of the second rotating means". good. Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VF6 can be obtained.

Means VC13. The game board is composed of a translucent member, and at least a part of the rear area thereof is configured to be visible from the front,
The first rotating means is configured to be rotatable in a front area of the game board,
Any one of the means VC1 to VC12, wherein the second rotating means is movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board and is movable in the rear area of the game board. The game machine described.

According to the means VC13, the same effect as the means VG1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VC13, as in the means VG2, "in the predetermined area, the plurality of the second rotating means are individually movable and the plurality of the second rotating means are configured to be relatively movable, The plurality of second rotating means may individually be configured to be movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board and to be movable in the rear area of the game board. Thereby, the same effect as the means VG2 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VC13, as with the means VG3, ``a plurality of paths are provided so that the second rotating means can move from the front area to the rear area of the game board''. Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VG3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VC13, like the means VG4, ``in the front area of the game board, a path changing means capable of changing the path along which the second rotating means moves'' may be provided. Thereby, the same effect as the means VG4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VC13, similarly to the means VG5, it may be possible to ``provide a rear guide means capable of guiding the second rotating means moved to the rear area of the game board to a predetermined position''. . Thereby, the same effect as the means VG5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VC13, like the means VG6, "the direction of the rotation axis of the second rotating means may be configured to be variable". Thereby, the same effect as the means VG6 can be obtained.

Conventional problem VD. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a game area. For example, a pachinko machine is known in which a lottery is performed based on the entry of a game ball into a predetermined ball-entering means, and when a predetermined result is obtained by the lottery, a game state advantageous to the player is generated. .

Among such pachinko machines, there are those that produce a production effect by rotating the rotating means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-100385).

However, in the conventional game machine, for example, only one rotating means is provided, and the rotating means performs a predetermined rotating operation, or the light-emitting means mounted on the rotating means only lights or blinks. For this reason, the presentation of the rotating means tends to become monotonous, and further enhancement of interest has been desired.

In view of this, for example, it is conceivable to perform an effect in which a plurality of movable bodies including rotating means are interlocked. , there is a possibility that a state may arise in which it is not possible to interlock or stop in the effect mode desired to be visually recognized by the player. If such a state occurs, there is a risk that the interest of the player will be significantly reduced.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest.

Means VD1. a game board having a game area on the front side;
Lottery means for performing a lottery based on a predetermined opportunity;
A gaming machine comprising game value imparting means capable of imparting a predetermined game value when a winning result is obtained by the lottery,
a first rotating means configured to be rotatable in a predetermined area with the front-rear direction (the line-of-sight direction of the player) as an axial direction and capable of changing the state between at least a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state;
a second rotating means that is movable in the predetermined area and rotatable in a predetermined manner is configured to be movable relative to the first rotating means;
The relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means in a predetermined area front view (game board front view) is
a first positional relationship (non-proximity state) in which at least part of the first rotating means and at least part of the second rotating means do not overlap; configured to be changeable to a second positional relationship (proximity state) in which at least a portion overlaps,
In the predetermined area,
A detecting means capable of detecting the second rotating means that has passed through a predetermined position,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute a predetermined effect based on the detection of the second rotation means by the detection means.

According to the above means VD1, the two rotating means (the first rotating means and the second rotating means) whose relative positional relationship changes are superimposed or separated from each other, thereby providing a more lively game effect. can be executed.

However, under the configuration in which the second rotating means moves in a predetermined area, there is a possibility that the second rotating means may be displaced due to an assembly error, aged deterioration, or the like. If such a positional deviation occurs, the relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means will not be appropriate, and there is a risk that the above-described effect will not be produced appropriately.

Conventionally, detection means for detecting the movable body at the standby position (reference position) is often provided in order to grasp the position of the movable body. However, with such a configuration alone, the position of the movable body in the rendering area (predetermined area) where the rendering is actually performed cannot be grasped, so there is a possibility that the problem described above may occur.

On the other hand, according to the means VD1, a detection means capable of detecting the second rotation means passing through the predetermined position is provided in the predetermined area serving as the rendering area, and the second rotation means is detected by the detection means. Based on, it has a configuration that can execute a predetermined effect.

As a result, when the effect is executed in the predetermined area, a time lag is less likely to occur between the operation mode of the rotating means and the start timing of the predetermined effect, and the occurrence of the above problems can be suppressed.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest of the player.

Means VD2. Equipped with a light emitting means capable of emitting predetermined light,
The game machine according to means VC1, wherein the light emission mode of the light emitting means can be changed based on the detection of the second rotating means by the detecting means.

According to the means VD2, it is possible to execute, at appropriate timing, an effect that produces a visual effect such as changing the light emitting mode of the light emitting means.

Means VD3. Predetermined display means is provided as the light emitting means,
The game machine according to means VD2 is characterized in that the display mode of the display means can be changed as the light emission mode of the light emission means.

According to the above means VD3, it is possible to execute, at an appropriate timing, an effect that produces a visual effect such as changing the display mode of the display means.

Means VD4. The first rotating means includes a light transmitting portion capable of transmitting light,
In the first positional relationship (non-proximity state),
At least part of the light emitted from the light emitting means is visible through the light transmitting portion of the first rotating means,
In the second positional relationship (proximity state),
Means VD2 characterized in that at least part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be shielded by at least part of the second rotating means that overlaps the translucent portion of the first rotating means. or VD3.

According to the means VD4, at least part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be transmitted or blocked by changing the relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means. That is, it is possible to change the visual recognition mode of the light emitted from the light emitting means without performing control for lighting/blinking the light emitting means.

This makes it possible to perform an effect using light together with the motion effect of the first rotating means and the second rotating means. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game presentation and to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VD4, as in the case of the means VA2, "the above-mentioned When the first rotating means and the second rotating means are in the second positional relationship (proximity state), the ratio of the predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player increases. It is also possible to say that Thereby, the same effect as the means VA2 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD4, similarly to the means VA3, "a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state occur. and the first rotating means and the second rotating means are more likely to move than when the first rotating means and the second rotating means are in the first second positional relationship (proximity state). The second positional relationship (proximity state) is configured so that the ratio of the second advantageous state is higher than the first advantageous state. good. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD4, similarly to the means VA4, "when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first rotating means and the second rotating means are in the second positional relationship (proximity state) as compared to when the predetermined condition is not satisfied." It may be configured so that the ratio (frequency) of Thereby, the same effect as the means VA4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VD4, similarly to the means VA5, "in the predetermined area, the plurality of the second rotating means are individually movable and the plurality of the second rotating means are configured to be relatively movable, The plurality of second rotating means are configured to be individually operable with respect to the first rotating means (at least part of the first rotating means and at least part of the second rotating means can approach individually). ” may be used. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD4, as in the means VA6, "the first rotating means has a predetermined number N (N is an integer of 1 or more) of the light-transmitting parts arranged around the first rotating means. light emission control means arranged at regular intervals in a direction (e.g., equal angular intervals of 360°/N equal angles around a rotation axis) and capable of controlling the light emission means, wherein the light emission control means is and being configured to be able to execute blinking control of the light emitting means. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA6 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VD4, as in the case of the means VA7, "the diameter of the second rotating means in a predetermined area viewed from the front may be at least smaller than the diameter of the first rotating means". Thereby, the same effect as the means VA7 can be obtained.

Means VD5. The detection means are provided at a plurality of locations in the predetermined area,
The gaming machine according to any one of the means VD1 to VD4, characterized in that different effects can be executed depending on which of the plurality of detecting means detects the second rotating means.

According to the above means VD5, it is possible to diversify the game presentation and further improve the interest.

Means VD6. A gaming machine according to any one of means VD1 to VD5, wherein the plurality of second rotating means are individually movable in the predetermined area and individually pass through the predetermined position.

According to the above means VD6, it is possible to diversify the game presentation and further improve the interest.

Means VD7. The first rotating means includes a light transmitting portion capable of transmitting light,
The second rotating means has at least a part of a reflecting part capable of reflecting irradiated light (at least a part of the second rotating means is configured to be able to reflect light),
In the second positional relationship,
Light from the front (including light irradiated from the outside of the game machine) through the light-transmitting portion of the first rotating means is applied to at least a part of the reflecting portion of the second rotating means that overlaps the light-transmitting portion of the first rotating means. ) is configured to be able to emit light.

According to the means VD7, the same effect as the means VB1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VD7, similarly to the means VB3, ``the first rotating means is rotatably provided on the front side of a predetermined translucent member capable of transmitting light''. good. Thereby, the same effect as that of the means VB3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VD7, as in the means VB4, "at least the reflecting portion (at least part of the second rotating means) may be made of a metal material". This provides the same effect as the means VB4.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VD7, as in the means VB5, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be polished". Thereby, the same effect as the means VB5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VD7, similarly to the means VB6, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is plated (for example, chromium plating)" good too. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB6 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VD7, as in the means VB7, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is curved (in a spherical shape convex outward). ” may be used. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB7 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VD7, as in the means VB8, "at least the reflecting part (at least a part of the second rotating means) has an information writing part in which predetermined information (characters, etc.) is written. It may be said that Thereby, the same effect as the means VB8 can be obtained.

Means VD8. Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
The gaming machine according to any one of the means VD1 to VD7, wherein the operation mode of the second rotating means can be changed according to the operation mode of the operation means operated by the player.

According to the means VD8, the same effect as the means VC1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD8, as in the case of the means VC2, "the second rotation means starts a predetermined operation based on the operation of the operation means by the player". Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VC2 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD8, similarly to the means VC3, "based on at least the operation displacement amount of the operation means, the amount of movement of the second rotating means (the amount of movement in the vertical direction and the amount of movement in the horizontal direction ) is configured to be changeable”. This provides the same effect as the means VC3.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD8, like the means VC4, it may be possible to "provide a movement restricting means capable of restricting the movement of the second rotating means by a predetermined amount or more". Thereby, the same effect as that of the means VC4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD8, like the means VC5, "the guide means for guiding the second rotating means to the predetermined area may be provided". Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VC5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD8, similarly to the means VC6, "return restricting means capable of restricting the second rotating means guided to the predetermined area from returning to the outside of the predetermined area (standby position) is provided. It may be said that This provides the same effect as the means VC6.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD8, similarly to the means VC7, "the operation means includes at least a first operation section capable of changing the amount of movement of the second rotation means, and a predetermined movement of the second rotation means. and a second operation unit that can select whether or not to execute an action." This provides the same effect as the means VC7.

Means VD9. The second rotating means has at least a portion thereof having a conductive portion (at least a portion of the second rotating means is made of a conductive material),
In the second positional relationship (proximity state), at least part of the first rotating means and at least part of the second rotating means are configured to be able to contact or approach each other,
Any one of the means VD1 to VD8, wherein in the first positional relationship (non-proximity state), the conductive portion of the second rotating means is configured to be in contact with a predetermined conductive member having conductivity. The gaming machine described in .

According to the means VD9, the same effect as the means VE1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VD9, "the conductive member may be provided in an area different from the predetermined area (outside the predetermined area)" as in the case of the means VE2. As a result, the same effect as the means VE2 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD9, as in the means VE3, "the conductive member is arranged along a part of the path along which the second rotating means moves from the predetermined standby position to the predetermined area." It is also possible to say "to be". Thereby, the same effect as the means VE3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VD9, as in the means VE4, "the conductive member is an elongated member arranged along at least a predetermined section of the path along which the second rotating means moves." may be As a result, the same effect as the means VE4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VD9, as in the means VE5, "at least the conductive portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is curved (in a spherical shape convex outward). ” may be used. Thereby, the same effect as the means VE5 can be obtained.

Means VD10. one of the first rotating means and the second rotating means has at least one acted portion that receives an action from the other rotating means;
When the other rotating means acts on the affected portion of the one rotating means in a predetermined manner, the one rotating means can perform a predetermined operation in an operation mode corresponding to the predetermined manner. The gaming machine according to any one of the means VD1 to VD9, wherein the gaming machine is configured as follows.

According to the means VD10, the same effect as the means VF1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD10, as in the case of the means VF2, "when the one rotating means acts on the acted portion in the first mode, the first rotating means When the other rotating means acts on the operated portion in the second mode, the second motion in accordance with the second mode is performed. configured to operate in a manner". Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VF2 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD10, similarly to the means VF3, "the one rotating means operates in the second operation mode more than the one rotating means operates in the first operation mode." It may be configured such that the proportion of a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player is higher when the action is performed. Thereby, the same effect as that of the means VF3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD10, as with the means VF4, "a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state occur. and when the one rotating means operates in the second operation mode, the first rotation is more likely than when the one rotating means operates in the first operation mode. It may be configured such that the ratio of being in the second advantageous state is higher than in the advantageous state. Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VF4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD10, as in the case of the means VF5, "the other rotating means may be configured to be able to come into contact with the affected portion of the one rotating means". Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VF5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD10, similarly to the means VF6, it is also possible to say that "predetermined movable members capable of coming into contact with the second rotating means and capable of causing changes in the movement of the second rotating means" are provided. good. Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VF6 can be obtained.

Means VD11. The game board is composed of a translucent member, and at least a part of the rear area thereof is configured to be visible from the front,
The first rotating means is configured to be rotatable in a front area of the game board,
Any one of the means VD1 to VD10, wherein the second rotating means is movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board and is movable in the rear area of the game board. The game machine described.

According to the means VD11, the same effect as the means VG1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD11, similarly to the means VG2, "in the predetermined area, the plurality of the second rotating means are individually movable and the plurality of the second rotating means are configured to be relatively movable, The plurality of second rotating means may individually be configured to be movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board and to be movable in the rear area of the game board. Thereby, the same effect as the means VG2 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration relating to the means VD11, as in the case of the means VG3, "a plurality of paths are provided so that the second rotating means can move from the front area to the rear area of the game board". Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VG3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD11, as with the means VG4, it may be possible to provide ``in the front area of the game board, a path changing means capable of changing the path along which the second rotating means moves''. Thereby, the same effect as the means VG4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD11, similarly to the means VG5, it may be possible to provide ``rear guide means capable of guiding the second rotating means moved to the rear area of the game board to a predetermined position''. . Thereby, the same effect as the means VG5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD11, like the means VG6, "the direction of the rotation axis of the second rotating means may be configured to be variable". Thereby, the same effect as the means VG6 can be obtained.

Conventional problem VE. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a game area. For example, a pachinko machine is known in which a lottery is performed based on the entry of a game ball into a predetermined ball-entering means, and when a predetermined result is obtained by the lottery, a game state advantageous to the player is generated. .

Among such pachinko machines, there are those that produce a production effect by rotating the rotating means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-100385).

However, the rotating means may be charged with static electricity due to friction or the like during rotation. In the case where the rotating means is configured to be movable, static electricity flows to the electrical equipment when the rotating means contacts or approaches other electrical equipment (including other rotating means), There is a possibility that the electronic device itself, as well as the game machine, may be greatly affected.

For example, there are concerns such as disturbance of the screen of the display device, noise mixing in the control signal, etc., and in severe cases, various problems such as damage to the electrical equipment and malfunction of the electrical equipment may occur. There is

As a result, the game presentation may not be performed appropriately, and the interest of the player may decrease.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest.

Means VE1. a game board having a game area on the front side;
Lottery means for performing a lottery based on a predetermined opportunity;
A gaming machine comprising game value imparting means capable of imparting a predetermined game value when a winning result is obtained by the lottery,
a first rotating means configured to be rotatable in a predetermined area with the front-rear direction (the line-of-sight direction of the player) as an axial direction and capable of changing the state between at least a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state;
a second rotating means that is movable in the predetermined area and rotatable in a predetermined manner is configured to be movable relative to the first rotating means;
The relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means in a predetermined area front view (game board front view) is
a first positional relationship (non-proximity state) in which at least part of the first rotating means and at least part of the second rotating means do not overlap; configured to be changeable to a second positional relationship (proximity state) in which at least a portion overlaps,
The second rotating means has at least a portion thereof having a conductive portion (at least a portion of the second rotating means is made of a conductive material),
In the second positional relationship (proximity state), at least part of the first rotating means and at least part of the second rotating means are configured to be able to contact or approach each other,
A gaming machine, wherein in the first positional relationship (non-proximity state), the conductive portion of the second rotating means is configured to be in contact with a predetermined conductive member having conductivity.

According to the above means VE1, the two rotating means (the first rotating means and the second rotating means) whose relative positional relationship changes are superimposed on each other or separated from each other, thereby producing a more lively game effect. can be executed.

Further, according to this means, the second rotating means has a conductive portion at least in part thereof, and is provided with a conductive member (earth member) capable of contacting the conductive portion of the second rotating means.

As a result, the static electricity charged on the second rotating means can be released via the conductive member, and the occurrence of the various troubles caused by the static electricity can be suppressed.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the malfunction of various production devices such as movable accessories and display devices, and to suppress the decrease in interest of the player.

Means VE2. A gaming machine according to means VE1, wherein the conductive member is provided in an area (outside the predetermined area) different from the predetermined area.

If the conductive member were to be placed in the predetermined area that would be the rendering area, the conductive member would be visible to the player, and the design might be degraded.

In contrast, according to the means VE2, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of such problems.

Means VE3. The gaming machine according to means VE1 or VE2, wherein the conductive member is arranged along a part of the path along which the second rotating means moves from the predetermined standby position to the predetermined area.

According to the means VE3, the static electricity charged in the second rotating means can be released during the movement of the stage prior to contact with the first rotating means, etc., and the effects of the means VE1 and the like can be further enhanced. .

Means VE4. The game machine according to any one of means VE1 to VE3, wherein the conductive member is an elongated member arranged along at least a predetermined section of the path along which the second rotating means moves.

According to the means VE4, the second rotating means can easily come into contact with the conductive member, and static electricity can be released more reliably.

Means VE5. The gaming machine according to any one of means VE1 to VE4, wherein at least the conductive portion (at least part of the second rotating means) is curved (in a spherical shape convex outward).

According to the means VE5, it is possible to reduce the contact area between the conductive portion of the second rotating means and the predetermined conductive member, thereby reducing the frictional resistance during movement of the second rotating means. As a result, it is possible to smoothly move the second rotating means, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Means VE6. Equipped with a light emitting means capable of emitting predetermined light,
The first rotating means includes a light transmitting portion capable of transmitting light,
In the first positional relationship (non-proximity state),
At least part of the light emitted from the light emitting means is visible through the light transmitting portion of the first rotating means,
In the second positional relationship (proximity state),
The means VE1 is characterized in that at least a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be shielded by at least a part of the second rotating means that overlaps the translucent part of the first rotating means. The game machine according to any one of VE5.

According to the means VE6, at least part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be transmitted or blocked by changing the relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means. That is, it is possible to change the visual recognition mode of the light emitted from the light emitting means without performing control for lighting/blinking the light emitting means.

This makes it possible to perform an effect using light together with the motion effect of the first rotating means and the second rotating means. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game presentation and to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VE6, as in the case of the means VA2, "the above-mentioned When the first rotating means and the second rotating means are in the second positional relationship (proximity state), the ratio of the predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player increases. It is also possible to say that Thereby, the same effect as the means VA2 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to means VE6, as with means VA3, "a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state are generated. and the first rotating means and the second rotating means are more likely to move than when the first rotating means and the second rotating means are in the first second positional relationship (proximity state). The second positional relationship (proximity state) is configured so that the ratio of the second advantageous state is higher than the first advantageous state. good. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VE6, similarly to the means VA4, "when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first rotating means and the second rotating means are in the second positional relationship (proximity state) as compared to when the predetermined condition is not satisfied." It may be configured so that the ratio (frequency) of Thereby, the same effect as the means VA4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VE6, as in the means VA5, "in the predetermined area, the plurality of the second rotating means are individually movable and the plurality of the second rotating means are configured to be relatively movable, The plurality of second rotating means are configured to be individually operable with respect to the first rotating means (at least part of the first rotating means and at least part of the second rotating means can approach individually). ” may be used. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VE6, as in the means VA6, "the first rotating means has a predetermined number N (N is an integer of 1 or more) of the light-transmitting parts arranged around the first rotating means. light emission control means arranged at regular intervals in a direction (e.g., equal angular intervals of 360°/N equal angles around a rotation axis) and capable of controlling the light emission means, wherein the light emission control means is and being configured to be able to execute blinking control of the light emitting means. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA6 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VE6, it may be possible that ``the diameter of the second rotating means in a predetermined area viewed from the front is at least smaller than the diameter of the first rotating means'', as in the case of the means VA7. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA7 can be obtained.

Means VE7. The first rotating means includes a light transmitting portion capable of transmitting light,
The second rotating means has at least a part of a reflecting part capable of reflecting irradiated light (at least a part of the second rotating means is configured to be able to reflect light),
In the second positional relationship,
Light from the front (including light irradiated from the outside of the game machine) through the light-transmitting portion of the first rotating means is applied to at least a part of the reflecting portion of the second rotating means that overlaps the light-transmitting portion of the first rotating means. ) is configured to be able to irradiate.

According to the means VE7, the same effect as the means VB1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VE7, similarly to the means VB3, ``the first rotating means is provided rotatably on the front side of a predetermined translucent member capable of transmitting light''. good. Thereby, the same effect as that of the means VB3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VE7, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be made of a metal material" as in the case of the means VB4. This provides the same effect as the means VB4.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VE7, similarly to the means VB5, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be polished." Thereby, the same effect as the means VB5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VE7, similarly to the means VB6, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is plated (for example, chromium plating)." good too. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB6 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VE7, as in the means VB7, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is curved (in a spherical shape convex outward). ” may be used. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB7 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VE7, as in the means VB8, "at least the reflecting part (at least a part of the second rotating means) has an information writing part in which predetermined information (characters, etc.) is written. It may be said that Thereby, the same effect as the means VB8 can be obtained.

Means VE8. Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
The game machine according to any one of the means VE1 to VE7, wherein the operation mode of the second rotating means can be changed according to the operation mode of the operation means operated by the player.

According to the means VE8, the same effect as the means VC1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VE8, as in the case of the means VC2, "the second rotation means starts a predetermined operation based on the operation of the operation means by the player". Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VC2 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration of the means VE8, similarly to the means VC3, "based on at least the operation displacement amount of the operation means, the amount of movement of the second rotating means (the amount of movement in the vertical direction and the amount of movement in the horizontal direction ) is configured to be changeable”. This provides the same effect as the means VC3.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VE8, like the means VC4, it may be possible to "provide a movement restricting means capable of restricting the movement of the second rotating means by a predetermined amount or more". Thereby, the same effect as that of the means VC4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VE8, like the means VC5, "the guide means for guiding the second rotating means to the predetermined area may be provided". Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VC5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VE8, similarly to the means VC6, "return restricting means capable of restricting the second rotating means guided to the predetermined area from returning to the outside of the predetermined area (standby position) is provided. It may be said that This provides the same effect as the means VC6.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VE8, similarly to the means VC7, "the operation means includes at least a first operation section capable of changing the amount of movement of the second rotation means, and a predetermined movement of the second rotation means. and a second operation unit that can select whether or not to execute an action." This provides the same effect as the means VC7.

Means VE9. In the predetermined area,
A detecting means capable of detecting the second rotating means that has passed through a predetermined position,
A game machine according to any one of means VE1 to VE8, characterized in that a predetermined effect can be executed based on the detection of the second rotation means by the detection means.

According to the means VE9, the same effect as the means VD1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VE9, similarly to the means VD2, "a light emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light is provided, and based on the detection of the second rotating means by the detecting means, the light emitting means It is also possible to say that the light emitting mode is made changeable. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD2 can be obtained.

In addition, as in the means VD3, it is possible to "provide a predetermined display means as the light emitting means, and to change the display mode of the display means as the light emitting mode of the light emitting means". Thereby, the same effect as the means VD3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VE9, similarly to the means VD5, "the detection means are provided at a plurality of locations in the predetermined area, and depending on which of the detection means at the plurality of locations the second rotation means is detected, It may be "configured to be able to execute different effects". Thereby, the same effect as the means VD5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VE9, similarly to the means VD6, it is assumed that "a plurality of the second rotating means are configured to be individually movable in the predetermined area and individually pass through the predetermined positions". good too. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD6 can be obtained.

Means VE10. one of the first rotating means and the second rotating means has at least one acted portion that receives an action from the other rotating means;
When the other rotating means acts on the affected portion of the one rotating means in a predetermined manner, the one rotating means can perform a predetermined operation in an operation mode corresponding to the predetermined manner. The gaming machine according to any one of the means VE1 to VE9, wherein the gaming machine is configured as follows.

According to the means VE10, the same effects as those of the means VF1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VE10, similarly to the means VF2, "when the one rotating means acts on the acted portion in the first mode, the first rotating means When the other rotating means acts on the operated portion in the second mode, the second motion in accordance with the second mode is performed. configured to operate in a manner". Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VF2 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VE10, as in the case of the means VF3, "the one rotating means operates in the second operation mode more than the one rotating means operates in the first operation mode." It may be configured such that the proportion of a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player is higher when the action is performed. Thereby, the same effect as that of the means VF3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VE10, as with the means VF4, "a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state are generated." and when the one rotating means operates in the second operation mode, the first rotation is more likely than when the one rotating means operates in the first operation mode. It may be configured such that the ratio of being in the second advantageous state is higher than in the advantageous state. Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VF4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VE10, as in the case of the means VF5, "the other rotating means may be configured to be able to come into contact with the affected portion of the one rotating means". Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VF5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VE10, similarly to the means VF6, it is also possible to say that "a predetermined movable member is provided which can come into contact with the second rotating means and can change the movement of the second rotating means". good. Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VF6 can be obtained.

Means VE11. The game board is composed of a translucent member, and at least a part of the rear area thereof is configured to be visible from the front,
The first rotating means is configured to be rotatable in a front area of the game board,
Any one of the means VE1 to VE10, wherein the second rotating means is movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board and is movable in the rear area of the game board. The game machine described.

According to the means VE11, the same effect as the means VG1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VE11, similarly to the means VG2, "in the predetermined area, the plurality of the second rotating means are individually movable and the plurality of the second rotating means are configured to be relatively movable, The plurality of second rotating means may individually be configured to be movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board and to be movable in the rear area of the game board. Thereby, the same effect as the means VG2 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VE11, as with the means VG3, "a plurality of paths are provided so that the second rotating means can move from the front area to the rear area of the game board". Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VG3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VE11, like the means VG4, "in the front area of the game board, a path changing means capable of changing the path along which the second rotating means moves" may be provided. Thereby, the same effect as the means VG4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VE11, similarly to the means VG5, it may be possible to provide "rear guide means capable of guiding the second rotating means moved to the rear area of the game board to a predetermined position". . Thereby, the same effect as the means VG5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VE11, like the means VG6, "the rotation axis direction of the second rotating means may be configured to be variable". Thereby, the same effect as the means VG6 can be obtained.

Conventional problem VF. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a game area. For example, a pachinko machine is known in which a lottery is performed based on the entry of a game ball into a predetermined ball-entering means, and when a predetermined result is obtained by the lottery, a game state advantageous to the player is generated. .

Among such pachinko machines, there are those that produce a production effect by rotating the rotating means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-100385).

However, in the conventional game machine, for example, only one rotating means is provided, and the light emitting means mounted on the rotating means only lights up and flashes in accordance with the rotation of the rotating means, and the effect of the rotating means is monotonous. It is easy to become, and further improvement of interest was desired.

On the other hand, it is conceivable to provide a plurality of rotating means. improvement was desired.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest.

Means VF1. a game board having a game area on the front side;
Lottery means for performing a lottery based on a predetermined opportunity;
A gaming machine comprising game value imparting means capable of imparting a predetermined game value when a winning result is obtained by the lottery,
a first rotating means configured to be rotatable in a predetermined area with the front-rear direction (the line-of-sight direction of the player) as an axial direction and capable of changing the state between at least a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state;
a second rotating means that is movable in the predetermined area and rotatable in a predetermined manner is configured to be movable relative to the first rotating means;
The relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means in a predetermined area front view (game board front view) is
a first positional relationship (non-proximity state) in which at least part of the first rotating means and at least part of the second rotating means do not overlap; configured to be changeable to a second positional relationship (proximity state) in which at least a portion overlaps,
one of the first rotating means and the second rotating means has at least one acted portion that receives an action from the other rotating means;
When the other rotating means acts on the affected portion of the one rotating means in a predetermined manner, the one rotating means can perform a predetermined operation in an operation mode corresponding to the predetermined manner. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above means VF1, the two rotating means (the first rotating means and the second rotating means) whose relative positional relationship changes are superimposed or separated from each other, thereby providing a more lively game effect. can be executed.

Furthermore, according to the present means VF1, when the other rotating means (for example, the first rotating means) acts in a predetermined manner on the affected portion of one rotating means (for example, the second rotating means), the The one rotating means is configured to be able to perform a predetermined operation in an operation mode according to a predetermined mode.

That is, one of the rotating means operates in a different manner due to a difference in the manner in which the other rotating means acts on the affected portion of the one rotating means.

As a result, it is possible to diversify the operation modes of the two rotating means (the first rotating means and the second rotating means), thereby enhancing the interest of the player.

Means VF2. The one rotating means is
When the other rotating means acts on the operated portion in the first mode, it operates in the first mode of operation corresponding to the first mode,
It is characterized in that, when the other rotating means acts on the operated portion in a second mode, it is configured to operate in a second operation mode corresponding to the second mode. The gaming machine described in means VF1.

According to the means VF2, the effect of the means VF1 can be further enhanced.

Means VF3. When the one rotating means operates in the second operation mode, more than when the one rotating means operates in the first operation mode,
A gaming machine according to means VF2, characterized in that the gaming machine is constructed so as to increase the ratio of a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player.

According to the above-mentioned means VF3, it is possible to perform a game effect such that the rate at which a predetermined advantageous state occurs changes depending on the difference in the operation mode of the rotating means. As a result, the player will watch the operation of the rotating means with anticipation, and the player's interest can be improved.

Means VF4. A first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state can be generated,
When the one rotating means operates in the second operation mode, more than when the one rotating means operates in the first operation mode,
A game machine according to means VF2, characterized in that the ratio of the second advantageous state is higher than that of the first advantageous state.

According to the means VF4, the same effects as those of the means VF3 are obtained.

Means VF5. The gaming machine according to any one of the means VF1 to VF4, wherein the other rotating means is configured to be able to come into contact with the operated portion of the one rotating means.

If a gap is formed between the other rotating means and the affected part of the one rotating means in the case where the affected part is configured as a translucent part capable of transmitting light, the light will pass through the gap. The leaked light may make it difficult to see the operated portion or reduce the luminance of the operated portion itself.

In contrast, according to the means VF5, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a problem.

Means VF6. A gaming machine according to any one of means VF1 to VF5, characterized by comprising a predetermined movable member capable of coming into contact with said second rotating means and capable of causing a change in movement of said second rotating means.

According to the means VF6, when the movable body comes into contact with the second rotating means, the operation mode of the second rotating means is changed. As a result, it is possible to diversify the operation modes of the rotating means and the like, and to improve the interest of the player.

For example, the second rotating means may start operating when a predetermined movable member (for example, a hammer-shaped accessory) acts on the second rotating means in a stopped state.

Means VF7. Equipped with a light emitting means capable of emitting predetermined light,
The first rotating means includes a light transmitting portion capable of transmitting light,
In the first positional relationship (non-proximity state),
At least part of the light emitted from the light emitting means is visible through the light transmitting portion of the first rotating means,
In the second positional relationship (proximity state),
Means VF1 characterized in that at least a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be shielded by at least a part of the second rotating means that overlaps the translucent part of the first rotating means. The game machine according to any one of VF6.

According to the means VF7, at least part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be transmitted or blocked by changing the relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means. That is, it is possible to change the visual recognition mode of the light emitted from the light emitting means without performing control for lighting/blinking the light emitting means.

This makes it possible to perform an effect using light together with the motion effect of the first rotating means and the second rotating means. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game presentation and to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VF7, as in the case of the means VA2, "the above-mentioned When the first rotating means and the second rotating means are in the second positional relationship (proximity state), the ratio of the predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player increases. It is also possible to say that Thereby, the same effect as the means VA2 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VF7, as with the means VA3, "a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state occur. and the first rotating means and the second rotating means are more likely to move than when the first rotating means and the second rotating means are in the first second positional relationship (proximity state). The second positional relationship (proximity state) is configured so that the ratio of the second advantageous state is higher than the first advantageous state. good. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VF7, similarly to the means VA4, "when the predetermined condition is met, the first rotating means and the second rotating means are in the second positional relationship (proximity state) compared to when the predetermined condition is not met." It may be configured so that the ratio (frequency) of Thereby, the same effect as the means VA4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VF7, similarly to the means VA5, "in the predetermined area, the plurality of the second rotating means are configured to be individually movable and the plurality of the second rotating means to be relatively movable, The plurality of second rotating means are configured to be individually operable with respect to the first rotating means (at least part of the first rotating means and at least part of the second rotating means can approach individually). ” may be used. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VF7, as in the means VA6, "the first rotating means has a predetermined number N (N is an integer of 1 or more) of the light-transmitting parts arranged around the first rotating means. light emission control means arranged at regular intervals in a direction (e.g., equal angular intervals of 360°/N equal angles around a rotation axis) and capable of controlling the light emission means, wherein the light emission control means is and being configured to be able to execute blinking control of the light emitting means. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA6 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VF7, as in the case of the means VA7, "the diameter of the second rotating means in a predetermined area viewed from the front may be at least smaller than the diameter of the first rotating means". Thereby, the same effect as the means VA7 can be obtained.

Means VF8. The first rotating means includes a light transmitting portion capable of transmitting light,
The second rotating means has at least a part of a reflecting part capable of reflecting irradiated light (at least a part of the second rotating means is configured to be able to reflect light),
In the second positional relationship,
Light from the front (including light irradiated from the outside of the game machine) through the light-transmitting portion of the first rotating means is applied to at least a part of the reflecting portion of the second rotating means that overlaps the light-transmitting portion of the first rotating means. ) is configured to be able to irradiate.

According to the means VF8, the same effect as the means VB1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VF8, similarly to the means VB3, ``the first rotating means is rotatably provided on the front side of a predetermined translucent member capable of transmitting light''. good. Thereby, the same effect as that of the means VB3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VF8, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be made of a metal material" as in the case of the means VB4. This provides the same effect as the means VB4.

Here, under the configuration according to means VF8, similarly to means VB5, "at least the reflecting portion (at least part of the second rotating means) may be subjected to a polishing process". Thereby, the same effect as the means VB5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VF8, similarly to the means VB6, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is plated (for example, chromium plating)." good too. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB6 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VF8, as in the means VB7, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is curved (in a spherical shape convex outward). ” may be used. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB7 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VF8, as in the means VB8, "at least the reflecting part (at least a part of the second rotating means) has an information writing part in which predetermined information (characters, etc.) is written. It may be said that Thereby, the same effect as the means VB8 can be obtained.

Means VF9. Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
The gaming machine according to any one of the means VF1 to VF8, wherein the operation mode of the second rotating means can be changed according to the operation mode of the operation means operated by the player.

According to the means VF9, effects similar to those of the means VC1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VF9, as in the case of the means VC2, "the second rotation means starts a predetermined operation based on the operation of the operation means by the player". Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VC2 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VF9, similarly to the means VC3, "based on at least the operation displacement amount of the operation means, the amount of movement of the second rotating means (the amount of movement in the vertical direction and the amount of movement in the horizontal direction ) is configured to be changeable”. This provides the same effect as the means VC3.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VF9, as with the means VC4, it may be possible to "provide a movement restricting means capable of restricting movement of the second rotating means by a predetermined amount or more". Thereby, the same effect as that of the means VC4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VF9, like the means VC5, "the guide means for guiding the second rotating means to the predetermined area may be provided". Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VC5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VF9, similarly to the means VC6, "return restricting means capable of restricting the second rotating means guided to the predetermined area from returning to the outside of the predetermined area (standby position) is provided. It may be said that This provides the same effect as the means VC6.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VF9, similarly to the means VC7, "the operation means includes at least a first operation section capable of changing the amount of movement of the second rotation means, and a predetermined movement of the second rotation means. and a second operation unit that can select whether or not to execute an action." This provides the same effect as the means VC7.

Means VF10. In the predetermined area,
A detecting means capable of detecting the second rotating means that has passed through a predetermined position,
A game machine according to any one of the means VF1 to VF9, characterized in that a predetermined effect can be executed based on the detection of the second rotation means by the detection means.

According to the means VF10, the same effect as the means VD1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VF10, similarly to the means VD2, "a light emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light is provided, and based on the detection of the second rotating means by the detecting means, the light emitting means It is also possible to say that the light emitting mode is made changeable. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD2 can be obtained.

In addition, as in the means VD3, it is possible to "provide a predetermined display means as the light emitting means, and to change the display mode of the display means as the light emitting mode of the light emitting means". Thereby, the same effect as the means VD3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VF10, similarly to the means VD5, "the detection means are provided at a plurality of locations in the predetermined area, and depending on which of the detection means at the plurality of locations the second rotating means is detected, It may be "configured to be able to execute different effects". Thereby, the same effect as the means VD5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VF10, similarly to the means VD6, it is assumed that "in the predetermined area, the plurality of second rotating means are configured to be individually movable and individually passable through the predetermined position." good too. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD6 can be obtained.

Means VF11. The second rotating means has at least a portion thereof having a conductive portion (at least a portion of the second rotating means is made of a conductive material),
In the second positional relationship (proximity state), at least part of the first rotating means and at least part of the second rotating means are configured to be able to contact or approach each other,
Any one of the means VF1 to VF10, wherein in the first positional relationship (non-proximity state), the conductive portion of the second rotating means is configured to be in contact with a predetermined conductive member having conductivity. The gaming machine described in .

According to the means VF11, effects similar to those of the means VE1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VF11, as in the means VE2, "the conductive member may be provided in a region different from the predetermined region (outside the predetermined region)". As a result, the same effect as the means VE2 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VF11, as with the means VE3, "the conductive member is arranged along a part of the route along which the second rotating means moves from the predetermined standby position to the predetermined area." It is also possible to say "to be". Thereby, the same effect as the means VE3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VF11, as in the means VE4, ``the conductive member is an elongated member arranged along at least a predetermined section of the path along which the second rotating means moves.'' may be As a result, the same effect as the means VE4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VF11, as in the means VE5, "at least the conductive portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is curved (in a spherical shape convex outward). ” may be used. Thereby, the same effect as the means VE5 can be obtained.

Means VF12. The game board is composed of a translucent member, and at least a part of the rear area thereof is configured to be visible from the front,
The first rotating means is configured to be rotatable in a front area of the game board,
Any one of the means VF1 to VF11, wherein the second rotating means is movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board and is movable in the rear area of the game board. The game machine described.

According to the means VF12, the same effect as the means VG1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VF12, similarly to the means VG2, "in the predetermined area, the plurality of the second rotating means are individually movable and the plurality of the second rotating means are configured to be relatively movable, The plurality of second rotating means may individually be configured to be movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board and to be movable in the rear area of the game board. Thereby, the same effect as the means VG2 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VF12, like the means VG3, "a plurality of paths are provided so that the second rotating means can move from the front area to the rear area of the game board". Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VG3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VF12, like the means VG4, "in the front area of the game board, a path changing means capable of changing the moving path of the second rotating means" may be provided. Thereby, the same effect as the means VG4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VF12, similarly to the means VG5, it may be possible to provide "rear guide means capable of guiding the second rotating means moved to the rear area of the game board to a predetermined position". . Thereby, the same effect as the means VG5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VF12, like the means VG6, "the direction of the rotation axis of the second rotating means may be configured to be variable". Thereby, the same effect as the means VG6 can be obtained.

Conventional problem VG. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as one type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a game area. For example, a pachinko machine is known in which a lottery is performed based on the entry of a game ball into a predetermined ball-entering means, and when a predetermined result is obtained by the lottery, a game state advantageous to the player is generated. .

Among such pachinko machines, there are those that produce a production effect by rotating the rotating means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-100385).

However, in the conventional game machine, for example, only one rotating means is provided, and the rotating means performs a predetermined rotating operation, or the light-emitting means mounted on the rotating means only lights or blinks. For this reason, the presentation of the rotating means tends to become monotonous, and further enhancement of interest has been desired.

In view of this, it is conceivable to perform an effect using a plurality of relatively displaceable rotating means. is limited, and it may become difficult to perform dynamic production.

As a result, the presentation using the rotating means tends to become monotonous, and further enhancement of interest has been desired.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest.

Means VG1. a game board having a game area on the front side;
Lottery means for performing a lottery based on a predetermined opportunity;
A gaming machine comprising game value imparting means capable of imparting a predetermined game value when a winning result is obtained by the lottery,
a first rotating means configured to be rotatable in a predetermined area with the front-rear direction (the line-of-sight direction of the player) as an axial direction and capable of changing the state between at least a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state;
a second rotating means that is movable in the predetermined area and rotatable in a predetermined manner is configured to be movable relative to the first rotating means;
The relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means in a front view of a predetermined area is
a first positional relationship (non-proximity state) in which at least part of the first rotating means and at least part of the second rotating means do not overlap; configured to be changeable to a second positional relationship (proximity state) in which at least a portion overlaps,
The game board is composed of a translucent member, and at least a part of the rear area thereof is configured to be visible from the front,
The first rotating means is rotatable in a front region of the game board,
A gaming machine, wherein the second rotating means is movable from a front area to a rear area of the game board and is movable in the rear area of the game board.

According to the above means VG1, the two rotating means (the first rotating means and the second rotating means) whose relative positional relationship changes are superimposed or separated from each other, thereby providing a more lively game effect. can be executed.

Incidentally, if both the first rotating means and the second rotating means are collectively arranged in the front area (or the rear area) of the game board, it is possible for the two rotating means to pass each other due to the relationship between the front and rear spaces. There is a risk that the operation of both rotating means will be restricted, such as not being able to rotate.

In this regard, according to this means VG1, the second rotating means is configured to be movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board and to be movable in the rear area of the game board. The second rotating means can be freely operated at the rear position of the game board without being restricted by the first rotating means arranged in the area.

In addition, the player can visually recognize the operation of the second rotating means through the game board made of the translucent member.

As a result, it is possible to perform a more dynamic and diverse game presentation, and to further improve the interest of the player.

Means VG2. wherein the plurality of second rotating means are individually movable in the predetermined area and the plurality of second rotating means are configured to be relatively movable;
The means VG1 is characterized in that the plurality of second rotating means are individually movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board and are movable in the rear area of the game board. game machine.

According to the means VG2, a plurality of second rotating means are provided which are relatively movable relative to each other, and these are configured to be individually movable to the rear area of the game board, thereby further diversifying the game performance. be able to. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player.

Means VG3. A game machine according to means VG1 or VG2, wherein a plurality of paths are provided so that the second rotating means can move from the front area to the rear area of the game board.

According to the means VG3, the operation mode of the second rotating means is diversified, and it is possible to further improve interest.

Means VG4. The gaming machine according to any one of means VG1 to VG3, further comprising path changing means capable of changing the path along which the second rotating means moves in the front region of the game board.

According to the above means VG4, it is possible to further diversify the operation mode of the second rotating means, and to further improve interest.

Means VG5. The game machine according to any one of means VG1 to VG4, further comprising rear guide means capable of guiding the second rotating means moved to the rear area of the game board to a predetermined position.

Since many devices such as display devices and production devices are arranged in the rear area of the game board, the space for moving the movable body is limited compared to the front area of the game board. It is required to move two rotating means.

On the other hand, according to the means VG5, the second rotating means can be accurately guided to a predetermined position by providing the rear guiding means.

Means VG6. A game machine according to any one of the means VG1 to VG5, wherein the direction of the rotation axis of the second rotation means is variable.

If the direction of the axis of rotation is fixed and an effect of simply changing the direction of rotation is performed, the game effect may become monotonous.

On the other hand, according to the means VG6, since the direction of the rotation axis can be changed, it becomes possible to execute more diverse presentations, and it is possible to further improve the entertainment.

Means VG7. Equipped with a light emitting means capable of emitting predetermined light,
The first rotating means includes a light transmitting portion capable of transmitting light,
In the first positional relationship (non-proximity state),
At least part of the light emitted from the light emitting means is visible through the light transmitting portion of the first rotating means,
In the second positional relationship (proximity state),
Means VG1 characterized in that at least part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be shielded by at least part of the second rotating means that overlaps the translucent part of the first rotating means. The gaming machine according to any one of VG6.

According to the means VG7, at least part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be transmitted or blocked by changing the relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means. That is, it is possible to change the visual recognition mode of the light emitted from the light emitting means without performing control for lighting/blinking the light emitting means.

This makes it possible to perform an effect using light together with the motion effect of the first rotating means and the second rotating means. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game presentation and to dramatically improve the interest of the player.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VG7, as in the case of the means VA2, "the above-mentioned When the first rotating means and the second rotating means are in the second positional relationship (proximity state), the ratio of the predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player increases. It is also possible to say that Thereby, the same effect as the means VA2 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VG7, as with the means VA3, "a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state occur. and the first rotating means and the second rotating means are more likely to move than when the first rotating means and the second rotating means are in the first second positional relationship (proximity state). The second positional relationship (proximity state) is configured so that the ratio of the second advantageous state is higher than the first advantageous state. good. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VG7, similarly to the means VA4, "when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first rotating means and the second rotating means are in the second positional relationship (proximity state) as compared to when the predetermined condition is not satisfied." It may be configured so that the ratio (frequency) of Thereby, the same effect as the means VA4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VG7, similarly to the means VA5, "in the predetermined area, the plurality of the second rotating means are individually movable and the plurality of the second rotating means are configured to be relatively movable, The plurality of second rotating means are configured to be individually operable with respect to the first rotating means (at least part of the first rotating means and at least part of the second rotating means can approach individually). ” may be used. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VG7, similarly to the means VA6, "the first rotating means has a predetermined number N (N is an integer equal to or greater than 1) of the light-transmitting parts arranged around the circumference of the first rotating means. light emission control means arranged at regular intervals in a direction (e.g., equal angular intervals of 360°/N equal angles around a rotation axis) and capable of controlling the light emission means, wherein the light emission control means is and being configured to be able to execute blinking control of the light emitting means. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA6 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VG7, it may be possible that ``the diameter of the second rotating means in a predetermined area viewed from the front is at least smaller than the diameter of the first rotating means'', as in the case of the means VA7. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA7 can be obtained.

Means VG8. The first rotating means includes a light transmitting portion capable of transmitting light,
The second rotating means has at least a part of a reflecting part capable of reflecting irradiated light (at least a part of the second rotating means is configured to be able to reflect light),
In the second positional relationship,
Light from the front (including light irradiated from the outside of the game machine) through the light-transmitting portion of the first rotating means is applied to at least a part of the reflecting portion of the second rotating means that overlaps the light-transmitting portion of the first rotating means. ) is configured to be able to emit light.

According to the means VG8, the same effect as the means VB1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VG8, similarly to the means VB3, ``the first rotating means is rotatably provided on the front side of a predetermined translucent member capable of transmitting light''. good. Thereby, the same effect as that of the means VB3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VG8, as in the case of the means VB4, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be made of a metal material". This provides the same effect as the means VB4.

Here, under the configuration according to means VG8, similarly to means VB5, "at least the reflecting portion (at least part of the second rotating means) may be subjected to a polishing process". Thereby, the same effect as the means VB5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VG8, similarly to the means VB6, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is plated (for example, chromium plating)." good too. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB6 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VG8, as in the means VB7, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is curved (in a spherical shape convex outward). ” may be used. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB7 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VG8, as in the means VB8, "at least the reflecting part (at least a part of the second rotating means) has an information writing part in which predetermined information (characters, etc.) is written. It may be said that Thereby, the same effect as the means VB8 can be obtained.

Means VG9. Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
The gaming machine according to any one of the means VG1 to VG8, wherein the operation mode of the second rotating means can be changed according to the operation mode of the operation means operated by the player.

According to the means VG9, the same effect as the means VC1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VG9, as in the case of the means VC2, "the second rotation means starts a predetermined operation based on the operation of the operation means by the player". Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VC2 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VG9, similarly to the means VC3, "based on at least the operation displacement amount of the operation means, the amount of movement of the second rotating means (the amount of movement in the vertical direction and the amount of movement in the horizontal direction ) is configured to be changeable”. This provides the same effect as the means VC3.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VG9, like the means VC4, it may be possible to "provide a movement restricting means capable of restricting the movement of the second rotating means by a predetermined amount or more". Thereby, the same effect as that of the means VC4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VG9, it may be possible to ``provide a guide means for guiding the second rotating means to the predetermined area'' as in the case of the means VC5. Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VC5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VG9, similarly to the means VC6, "return restricting means capable of restricting the second rotating means guided to the predetermined area from returning to the outside of the predetermined area (standby position) is provided. It may be said that This provides the same effect as the means VC6.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VG9, similarly to the means VC7, "the operation means includes at least a first operation section capable of changing the amount of movement of the second rotation means, and a predetermined movement of the second rotation means. and a second operation unit that can select whether or not to execute an action." This provides the same effect as the means VC7.

Means VG10. In the predetermined area,
A detecting means capable of detecting the second rotating means that has passed through a predetermined position,
A game machine according to any one of means VG1 to VG9, characterized in that a predetermined effect can be executed based on the detection of the second rotation means by the detection means.

According to the means VG10, effects similar to those of the means VD1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VG10, similarly to the means VD2, "a light emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light is provided, and based on the detection of the second rotating means by the detecting means, the light emitting means It is also possible to say that the light emitting mode is made changeable. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD2 can be obtained.

In addition, as in the means VD3, it is possible to "provide a predetermined display means as the light emitting means, and to change the display mode of the display means as the light emitting mode of the light emitting means". Thereby, the same effect as the means VD3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VG10, similarly to the means VD5, "the detection means are provided at a plurality of locations in the predetermined area, and depending on which of the detection means at the plurality of locations the second rotation means is detected, It may be "configured to be able to execute different effects". Thereby, the same effect as the means VD5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VG10, similarly to the means VD6, it is assumed that "the plurality of second rotating means are configured to be individually movable in the predetermined area and individually pass through the predetermined position". good too. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD6 can be obtained.

Means VG11. The second rotating means has at least a portion thereof having a conductive portion (at least a portion of the second rotating means is made of a conductive material),
In the second positional relationship (proximity state), at least part of the first rotating means and at least part of the second rotating means are configured to be able to contact or approach each other,
Any one of the means VG1 to VG10, wherein in the first positional relationship (non-proximity state), the conductive portion of the second rotating means is configured to be in contact with a predetermined conductive member having conductivity. The gaming machine described in .

According to the means VG11, the same effect as the means VE1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VG11, as in the means VE2, "the conductive member may be provided in an area different from the predetermined area (outside the predetermined area)". As a result, the same effect as the means VE2 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VG11, as in the case of the means VE3, "the conductive member is disposed along a part of the route along which the second rotating means moves from the predetermined standby position to the predetermined area." It is also possible to say "to be". Thereby, the same effect as the means VE3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VG11, as in the means VE4, "the conductive member is an elongated member arranged along at least a predetermined section of the path along which the second rotating means moves." may be As a result, the same effect as the means VE4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VG11, as in the means VE5, "at least the conductive portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is curved (in a spherical shape convex outward). ” may be used. Thereby, the same effect as the means VE5 can be obtained.

Means VG12. one of the first rotating means and the second rotating means has at least one acted portion that receives an action from the other rotating means;
When the other rotating means acts on the affected portion of the one rotating means in a predetermined manner, the one rotating means can perform a predetermined operation in an operation mode corresponding to the predetermined manner. The gaming machine according to any one of means VG1 to VG11, wherein the gaming machine is configured as follows.

According to the means VG12, effects similar to those of the means VF1 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VG12, as in the case of the means VF2, "when the one rotating means acts on the acted portion in the first mode, the first rotating means When the other rotating means acts on the operated portion in the second mode, the second motion in accordance with the second mode is performed. configured to operate in a manner". Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VF2 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VG12, as in the case of the means VF3, "the one rotating means operates in the second operation mode more than the one rotating means operates in the first operation mode." It may be configured such that the proportion of a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player is higher when the action is performed. Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VF3 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VG12, as with the means VF4, "a first advantageous state advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state are generated." and when the one rotating means operates in the second operation mode, the first rotation is more likely than when the one rotating means operates in the first operation mode. It may be configured such that the ratio of being in the second advantageous state is higher than in the advantageous state. Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VF4 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VG12, as in the case of the means VF5, "the other rotating means may be configured to be able to come into contact with the affected portion of the one rotating means". Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VF5 can be obtained.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VG12, similarly to the means VF6, it is also possible to ``provide a predetermined movable member capable of coming into contact with the second rotating means and causing a change in the movement of the second rotating means''. good. Thereby, the same effects as those of the means VF6 can be obtained.

In addition, for a gaming machine having a configuration of any part or all of the above means VA1 to VA13, a configuration of any part or all of the means VA1 to VA13 and the configuration of the means VB1 to VB13 Configuration of any part or all, configuration of any part or all of the means VC1 to means VC13, configuration of any part or all of the means VD1 to means VD11, or means VE1 to VE11 any part or all of the above, any part or all of the means VF1 to VF12, and any part or all of the means VG1 to VG12 or at least one configuration may be implemented in any combination.

Similarly, for a game machine having a part or all of the configuration of any one of the means VB1 to VB13, a part or all of the configuration of any one of the means VA1 to VA13, the means VB1 to VB13 configuration of any part or all of, configuration of any part or all of the means VC1 to means VC13, configuration of any part or all of the means VD1 to means VD11, the means VE1 to means any part or all of the configuration of VE11, any part or all of the means VF1 to VF12, and any part or all of the means VG1 to VG12 Any combination of at least one configuration may be implemented.

Similarly, for a game machine having a configuration of any part or all of the means VC1 to VC13, any part or all of the means VA1 to VA13, the means VB1 to VB13 configuration of any part or all of, configuration of any part or all of the means VC1 to means VC13, configuration of any part or all of the means VD1 to means VD11, the means VE1 to means any part or all of the configuration of VE11, any part or all of the means VF1 to VF12, and any part or all of the means VG1 to VG12 Any combination of at least one configuration may be implemented.

Similarly, for a game machine having a part or all of the configuration of any one of the means VD1 to VD11, a part or all of the configuration of any one of the means VA1 to VA13, the means VB1 to VB13 configuration of any part or all of, configuration of any part or all of the means VC1 to means VC13, configuration of any part or all of the means VD1 to means VD11, the means VE1 to means any part or all of the configuration of VE11, any part or all of the means VF1 to VF12, and any part or all of the means VG1 to VG12 Any combination of at least one configuration may be implemented.

Similarly, for a game machine having a configuration of any part or all of the means VE1 to VE11, any part or all of the means VA1 to VA13, the means VB1 to VB13 configuration of any part or all of, configuration of any part or all of the means VC1 to means VC13, configuration of any part or all of the means VD1 to means VD11, the means VE1 to means any part or all of the configuration of VE11, any part or all of the means VF1 to VF12, and any part or all of the means VG1 to VG12 Any combination of at least one configuration may be implemented.

Similarly, for a game machine having a part or all of the means VF1 to VF12, any part or all of the means VA1 to VA13, the means VB1 to VB13 configuration of any part or all of, configuration of any part or all of the means VC1 to means VC13, configuration of any part or all of the means VD1 to means VD11, the means VE1 to means any part or all of the configuration of VE11, any part or all of the means VF1 to VF12, and any part or all of the means VG1 to VG12 Any combination of at least one configuration may be implemented.

Similarly, for a game machine having a part or all of the configuration of any one of the means VG1 to VG12, a part or all of the configuration of any one of the means VA1 to VA13, the means VB1 to VB13 configuration of any part or all of, configuration of any part or all of the means VC1 to means VC13, configuration of any part or all of the means VD1 to means VD11, the means VE1 to means any part or all of the configuration of VE11, any part or all of the means VF1 to VF12, and any part or all of the means VG1 to VG12 Any combination of at least one configuration may be implemented.

The basic configuration of various gaming machines to which the above means are applied is shown below.

(b) The game machine in each of the above means is a pinball game machine. As a more detailed example of a mode, "an operation means (shooting handle, etc.) operated by a player, a shooting means (shooting device, etc.) for flipping and shooting a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, and the shot A game area (game board, etc.) to which game balls are guided, and predetermined ball entry means (general winning opening, variable winning device, A pinball game machine configured so that a game ball flowing down the game area can be visually recognized.

(b) The game machine in each of the above means or each pinball game machine is a pachinko machine or a game machine conforming to a pachinko machine.

[Third Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 according to the third embodiment will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. However, portions (same components, same processing contents, etc.) that overlap with the above-described first and second embodiments will be described using the same member names and the same reference numerals.

The game machine according to the present invention (pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment) includes a first counting function unit as the first counting means of the present invention, and a second counting function unit as the second counting means of the present invention. , a subtraction function unit as the subtraction means of the present invention, an information setting function unit as the information setting means of the present invention, an effect execution function unit as the effect execution means of the present invention, an update function unit as the update means of the present invention, the present It has a continuation function part as the continuation means of the invention and a specific correspondence display execution function part as the specific correspondence display execution means of the invention.

The "predetermined game state" may be a game state in which the second game rotation operation can be performed, and if the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, a normal state, a small winning state advantageous to the player, or a predetermined state in between Based on the right to perform a predetermined lottery with an upper limit of a number, a normal state for a predetermined period that can be executed after the end of the period, a jackpot state advantageous to the player, or a predetermined lottery with an upper limit of a predetermined number during that period. A normal state for a predetermined period that can be executed after the end based on the right, a time shortened state with ball entry support in which the variable display time is shorter than the normal state and a game ball can or easily enters a predetermined ball entry means Or a normal state for a predetermined period that can be executed based on the right to perform a predetermined lottery held with a predetermined number as the upper limit during that period, the variable display time is shorter than the normal state, and the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means A normal state for a predetermined period that can be executed after the end of the time-reduced state or the right to perform a predetermined lottery that is reserved up to a predetermined number as an upper limit, and the lottery probability is A high-probability state that is higher than the normal state, or a normal state or time-reduced state for a predetermined period that can be executed based on the right to perform a predetermined lottery that is reserved up to a predetermined number during that period. good too.

The ``first counting means'' may be anything as long as it can count based on the numerical value set corresponding to the second game rotation operation. RAM as an area, a counter set in a buffer or the like, an area consisting of a plurality of addresses, a pointer, a mechanical counter, etc., may be used.

Of course, the "subtraction means" may be anything as long as it can subtract the numerical information set in them, as long as it can realize the gist of the present invention.

The "subtraction condition" may be any condition as long as it causes the numerical value set in the first counting means to be subtracted based on the establishment of the condition. is stopped, the stop of the second game rotation operation is confirmed, and a predetermined period of time elapses after the second game rotation operation is stopped.

The "specific condition" may be anything as long as it causes a corresponding specific game state to occur when the condition is satisfied, and may be anything as long as the gist of the present invention can be realized. In addition, the conditions are that the game ball enters a predetermined winning area, that a lottery is held with a predetermined probability based on the ball entering, and that a predetermined result is obtained, and the right to perform the lottery is limited to a predetermined number. a predetermined result in the reserved right, a player performs a predetermined operation on a predetermined operation means, a lottery is drawn with a predetermined probability based on the operation, and a predetermined result is obtained; A plurality of game balls enter the ball entry area, a predetermined game rotation operation is performed, a predetermined period of time elapses, a predetermined effect is performed a predetermined number of times, a predetermined count value reaches the upper limit It can be anything, such as reaching.

The "second counting means" may be anything as long as it can count based on the set numerical value. A counter, an area consisting of a plurality of addresses, a pointer, a mechanical counting device, or the like may be used. Numerical information stored therein includes numerical information corresponding to the number of games played multiple times, numerical information corresponding to the number of executions of loss variation, numerical information corresponding to the number of times of reach variation performed, and game conditions for multiple times. Numerical information corresponding to establishment of, Numerical information corresponding to time information for a predetermined period, Numerical information corresponding to a predetermined number of game balls used in the game, Numerical information corresponding to the number of game balls entered by a predetermined ball entry means Numerical information, numerical information corresponding to the number of operations of predetermined operating means, numerical information corresponding to the number of game balls paid out, etc. may be used.

Of course, the 'information setting means' and 'update means' may be anything as long as they can set or update these numerical information, as long as they can realize the gist of the present invention. Further, the ``specific correspondence display executing means'' may be anything as long as it can execute the specific correspondence display corresponding to these numerical information. Any display, still image display, or the like may be used.

The "update condition" may be anything as long as it updates the numerical value set in the second counting means based on the establishment of the condition. to confirm the stop of the game rotation operation, the elapse of a predetermined period after the stop of the game rotation operation, the end of the game rotation operation, the start of the game rotation operation, and the establishment of the conditions for starting the game rotation operation elapse of a predetermined period of time; a predetermined number of game balls are shot or paid out; a predetermined number of game balls enter a predetermined ball-entering means; and so on.

As shown in FIG. 117 and the like, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that constitutes the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10. An inner frame 12 is supported on one side of the outer frame 11 so as to be openable and closable. ing. However, in FIG. 117, for the sake of convenience, game members (such as nails and accessories) arranged on the surface of the game board 30 and the glass unit 137 attached to the front frame 14 are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 120 and the like, the outer frame 11 includes an upper frame-constituting portion 11a and a lower frame-constituting portion 11b made of a wooden board, and a left side frame-constituting portion 11c and a right side frame-constituting portion 11d made of aluminum alloy by extrusion molding. These frame-constituting parts 11a to 11d are assembled into a rectangular frame as a whole by detachable fasteners such as screws.

An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left side frame-constituting portion 11c (see FIG. 115). The upper and lower parts of the inner frame 12 are rotatably supported by the upper hinge 81 and the lower hinge 82, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed. A space formed inside the outer frame 11 accommodates the inner frame 12 and the like.

The right side frame-constituting portion 11d is formed with an extending wall portion 83 projecting toward the inner side of the outer frame 11 from the vicinity of the widthwise rear end thereof. The extending wall portion 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see FIG. 120) provided on the right side back side of the inner frame 12 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 119). In addition, as shown in FIG. 117, a pair of upper and lower receiving portions 84 and 85 to which the locking member of the locking device 600 is locked is provided on the front side of the extending wall portion 83 . A pressing portion 86 that abuts on an inner frame open detection switch 92 (to be described later) protrudes toward the inside of the outer frame 11 from the lower receiving portion 85 .

A curtain plate decoration 87 made of resin is attached to the lower side frame constituting portion 11b. A rib 88 protruding upward is integrally formed in the inner part of the upper surface of the curtain plate decoration 87 . This makes it difficult for a gap to be formed with the inner frame 12 .

As shown in FIG. 117, the opening/closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set vertically along the left side of the pachinko machine 10 when viewed from the front, and the inner frame 12 can be opened forward with this opening/closing axis as the axis. It has become. The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 38 having a rectangular outer shape, and a substantially elliptical window hole 39 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 38 .

A front frame 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so that it can be opened and closed. As with the inner frame 12, the front frame 14 can be opened forward about an opening/closing axis set vertically on the left side of the pachinko machine 10 when viewed from the front. Note that the front frame 14 may be configured to be supported directly by the outer frame 11 instead of via the inner frame 12 so as to be openable.

The front frame 14 has a rectangular outer shape like the inner frame 12, and covers substantially the entire front side of the inner frame 12 in the closed state. A substantially elliptical window portion 101 is formed in the central portion of the front frame 14 . Thereby, the game board 30 (game area) attached to the rear surface of the inner frame 12 can be visually recognized from the outside through the window portion 101 of the front frame 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12 . Details of the game board 30 will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 115 and the like, on the front side of the front frame 14, a lower tray 15 as a ball receiving tray is provided at the center of the lower portion thereof. Storage is possible. Further, on the front side of the lower tray 15, a ball extracting lever 25 for ejecting game balls from the inside of the lower tray 15 is provided.

On the right side of the lower plate 15, a game ball shooting handle (hereinafter simply referred to as "handle") 18 is provided as an operating means projecting forward. The handle 18 includes a rotation operation portion 18a that can be rotated by the player, a touch sensor (not shown) that can detect that the handle 18 is touched by a human hand, and a sensor that detects the amount of operation of the rotation operation portion 18a. A variable resistor (not shown) or the like is provided for this purpose. Under such a configuration, when the rotation operation portion 18a is operated to rotate clockwise, a game ball is shot by the shooting device 60, which will be described later, with a force corresponding to the amount of rotation operation.

Further, the handle 18 is provided with a stop lever 18b that can be pressed with the thumb of the right hand holding the rotary operation portion 18a. When the stop lever 18b is pressed, even if the handle 18 is held, the shooting device 60 is prohibited from shooting game balls. Therefore, it is possible to rotate the rotary operation part 18a while prohibiting the shooting of game balls, or temporarily stop shooting the game balls while gripping the handle 18. - 特許庁

As shown in FIG. 116, above the lower tray 15, an upper tray 19 capable of storing game balls is provided. The upper plate 19 is a ball tray that temporarily stores the game balls paid out from the upper payout port 17 and guides them toward the shooting device 60 while aligning them in a line. Game balls paid out in a state where the upper tray 19 is filled with game balls are guided to the lower tray 15 via a lower tray communication passage 71 and a lower payout port 16, which will be described later.

A lending switch 121 , a return switch 122 , and a balance display section 124 are provided on the upper surface of the front edge portion of the upper plate 19 . Usually, in a game hall or the like, a CR unit (not shown) is arranged on the left side of the pachinko machine 10 . When the lending switch 121 is operated while a game card with a balance is inserted into the CR unit, the lending balls are supplied to the upper tray 19 according to the operation. On the other hand, the return switch 122 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the CR unit. Also, the balance display section 124 displays how much the card inserted in the CR unit has in its balance.

Further, a ball release button 123 is provided on the upper surface of the front edge portion of the upper plate 19 . The ball removal button 123 is configured to be retractable, and is normally biased upward by a biasing means (not shown). Under such a configuration, when the ball removal button 123 is pressed, the space between the upper tray 19 and the lower tray 15 is opened, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 19 are guided to the lower tray 15. It's like That is, the player can move the game ball on the upper tray 19 to the lower tray 15 at any time by operating the ball removal button 123 .

In addition, an effect button 125 and a cross button 126 are provided on the upper surface of the front edge portion of the upper plate 19 . By operating the effect button 125 or the cross button 126, a predetermined effect is performed or the display contents are changed in the effect display device 42 or the like, which will be described later.

Light emitting means such as various lamps are provided on the front surface of the front frame 14 . These light emitting means play a role of increasing the performance effect during the game by changing and controlling the light emitting mode in accordance with the change of the game state or the like. For example, the peripheral edge of the window 101 is provided with an illumination section 102 containing a light emitting means such as an LED. In addition, error display lamps 104 are provided on both sides of the illumination portion 102 and are lit when a predetermined error occurs. In addition, a large number of fine through-holes corresponding to the speaker SP (see FIG. 117) provided on the rear surface of the front frame 14 are formed in the upper part of the electric decoration part 102 .

A glass unit 137 is attached to the rear side of the front frame 14 . The glass unit 137 is not a conventional front and rear pair of rectangular plate glasses that are attached separately as a front and rear pair, but is formed in a round shape as a whole and attached after being assembled.

Next, the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the game board 30 is attached to the inner frame 12 on the rear side of the window hole 39 . The game board 30 is attached with its peripheral portion in contact with the back side of the resin base 38 . Therefore, a substantially central portion of the front surface of the game board 30, which serves as a game area, is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39 of the resin base 38. As shown in FIG.

Also, in the lower front portion of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), i.e., below the window hole 39, a shooting device 60 as shooting means and a shooting device for guiding the game ball just after being shot by the shooting device 60 are provided. A rail 61 is attached. In this embodiment, a solenoid type launcher is adopted as the launcher 60 . Further, above the shooting device 60, a ball feeding device 63 is provided for guiding the game balls guided from the upper tray 19 to the shooting position of the shooting device 60 one by one.

Next, the configuration of the game board 30 (game area) will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 30 is provided with a rail 50 for guiding the game ball shot from the shooting device 60 to the upper part of the game board 30. - 特許庁As a result, the game ball shot with the rotating operation of the handle 18 is guided into the game area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137 through the shooting rails 61 and 50 . The rail 50 is composed of an inner rail constituent portion 51 and an outer rail constituent portion 52 .

A return ball prevention member 53 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion in FIG. 118) of the inner rail constituting portion 51 . As a result, the game ball once guided from the rail 50 to the game area is prevented from returning into the rail 50 again. Further, a return rubber 54 is attached to substantially the leading end portion (upper right portion in FIG. 118) of the outer rail constituting portion 52 . As a result, the game ball that has been shot with more than a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 54 and is returned to, for example, the substantially central portion of the game board 30 .

In this embodiment, the outer rail component 52 ends at the upper right portion of the game board 30 , and the inner rail component 51 ends at the lower right portion of the game board 30 . Therefore, the play area is defined by the rails 50 and the inner peripheral surfaces of the window holes 39 of the resin base 38 . However, since the game ball hit by the shooting device 60 may flow backward on the rail 50 until it passes the return ball prevention member 53, the parallel parts of the inner and outer rail constituent parts 51 and 52 are excluded from the game area. be killed.

The game area includes a left general winning section 31A, a right general winning section 31B, a first variable winning device (jackpot variable winning device) 32A as a first special variable winning means, and a second variable winning device as a second special variable winning means. Variable winning device (small hit variable winning device) 32B, first start winning part 33WA as first start ball entering means, second start winning part 33WB as second start ball entering means, through gate as opportunity ball entering means 34, a variable display device unit 35, etc. are arranged. A detailed description will be given below.

A variable display device unit 35 is arranged in a substantially central part of the game area, and a first starting winning part 33WA is arranged in a lower position thereof.

The variable display device unit 35 is provided with an effect display device 42 as effect display means for performing various display effects, and a center frame 47 is provided so as to surround the effect display device 42 . The center frame 47 has a frame shape with an opening formed in the center thereof, and the display portion of the effect display device 42 can be visually recognized through the opening.

A stage portion 770 on which a game ball can roll is provided on the upper surface of the lower side portion of the center frame 47 . A guide groove 774 gently sloping downward toward the front is formed in the center of the stage portion 770 . As shown in FIG. 118, in the state where the center frame 47 is arranged on the game board 30, the guide groove 774 is located directly above the first start winning portion 33WA.

A ball passage (warp passage) 775 through which game balls pass is formed in the left side portion of the center frame 47 . The entrance of the ball passage 775 is formed on the left side of the center of the left side of the center frame 47 (on the side of the game board 30). On the other hand, the exit portion of the ball passage 775 is formed to open on the right side of the lower end of the left side portion of the center frame 47 (stage portion 770 side). The ball passage 775 can guide a game ball flowing down on the surface of the game board 30 onto the stage portion 770 within the center frame 47 .

A game ball guided onto the stage portion 770 through the ball passage 775 or the like rolls on the stage portion 770, and then falls from the front edge of the stage portion 770 onto the game board 30 surface, or falls into the guide groove. It is ejected onto the game board 30 via 774. Of these, the game ball ejected through the guide groove 774 can enter the first start winning portion 33WA with a relatively high probability.

The first starting winning part 33WA is provided so as to protrude forward from the front part of the game board 30, and a winning opening (first starting winning opening) into which game balls can always enter is opened on the upper side thereof. Also, at a position corresponding to the first start winning part 33WA, a first start winning switch 224a capable of detecting a game ball entered from the first start winning opening is provided.

Under this configuration, when a game ball enters the first start prize winning part 33WA and the game ball is detected by the first start prize winning switch 224a, a first winning lottery ( A jackpot lottery) and the like are performed, and a variable display is performed on the first special symbol display device 43A, which will be described later.

In this embodiment, the fact that the game ball enters the first start prize winning portion 33WA and the game ball is detected by the first start prize winning switch 224a corresponds to "establishment of the first start condition". The variable display performed by the special symbol display device 43A corresponds to the "first game rotation operation", and the function of the main controller 261, which will be described later, which performs these controls constitutes the "first execution means".

A first variable winning device 32A is arranged below the first starting winning part 33WA. The first variable winning device 32A includes a large winning opening 32Aa into which a game ball can enter, a large winning opening shutter 32Ab for opening and closing the large winning opening 32Aa, and a large winning opening shutter 32Ab for opening and closing the large winning opening shutter 32Ab. It has a solenoid (not shown) and a big winning hole count switch 222 capable of detecting a game ball entering the big winning hole 32Aa.

Under such a configuration, the first variable winning device 32A normally closes the large winning opening shutter 32Ab along the top and bottom of the large winning opening 32Aa, and the game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the large winning opening 32Aa. closed. Also, in such a closed state, game balls can flow down in front of the big winning opening shutter 32Ab.

On the other hand, when a big win state occurs, the first variable winning device 32A tilts forward with the lower side of the big winning opening shutter 32Ab as the rotation axis, and the game ball flowing down the game area goes to the big winning opening 32Aa. It will be in an open state where you can enter the ball. In this embodiment, the function of the main control device 261 for controlling the opening and closing of the first variable prize winning device 32A when the jackpot state occurs constitutes the "first opening/closing control means".

A plurality of left general winning portions 31A are arranged along the periphery of the game area in the left area of the game area (lower left of the variable display unit 35). The left general winning portion 31A is provided so as to protrude forward from the front portion of the game board 30, and a winning opening (general winning opening) into which game balls can enter at all times is opened on the upper side thereof. In addition, at a position corresponding to the left general winning part 31A, a left general winning switch 221a capable of detecting a game ball entered from a general winning opening is provided.

A through gate 34 is provided in the right area of the game area (on the right side of the variable display unit 35), through which game balls flowing down the area can pass one by one. The through gate 34 is provided with a through gate switch 225 capable of detecting a game ball passing through it. In this embodiment, the left area of the game area constitutes the first area, and the right area of the game area constitutes the second area.

Then, when the game ball passes through the through gate 34 (when the game ball is detected by the through gate switch 225), the start ball support lottery for whether or not to open the second start winning part 33WB is performed, a variable display for teaching the result of the starting ball support lottery is performed on the normal symbol display device 41, which will be described later. Here, when winning the start-up ball support lottery, the second start-up winning section 33WB is opened for a specified time after the end of the variable display.

Further, a right general winning portion 31B is arranged in a region downstream of the through gate 34 in the right region of the game region (right side of the variable display unit 35). The right general winning section 31B is provided so as to protrude forward from the front surface of the game board 30, and a winning opening (general winning opening) into which game balls can always enter is opened on the upper side thereof. A right general prize winning switch 221b capable of detecting a game ball entered from a general prize winning opening is provided at a position corresponding to the right general prize winning portion 31B.

In addition, a second starting prize winning section 33WB is disposed downstream of the right general prize winning section 31B in the lower right area of the game area (lower right of the variable display unit 35). The second starting winning section 33WB in this embodiment is a variable winning device that changes between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter.

Specifically, the second start prize winning portion 33WB includes a second start prize winning port 33WBa into which a game ball can enter, and a pair of left and right blade members as opening and closing members provided on both left and right sides of the second start prize winning port 33WBa. 33WBb, a starting winning opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing the pair of blade members 33WBb, and a second starting winning opening switch 224b capable of detecting a game ball entering the second starting winning opening 33WBa. ing.

The pair of blade members 33WBb are rotatably supported, and normally maintained in a closed position (closed state) close to each other. In addition, an entry prevention member 145 for preventing entry of game balls between the pair of blade members 33WBb in the closed state is provided at a position directly above the second starting prize winning portion 33WB. As a result, normally, the second starting winning portion 33WB is in a closed state in which the game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the second starting winning port 33WBa.

On the other hand, when a predetermined opening condition is satisfied as described later, the pair of blade members 33WBb are rotationally displaced so that the tip portions thereof are separated from each other to be in the open position (open state). As a result, a gap through which the game ball can pass is formed between the entry prevention member 145 and the tip of each blade member 33WBb. It becomes an open state in which a ball can be entered into the mouth 33WBa.

Under this configuration, when a game ball enters the second start prize winning portion 33WB which is in the open state and the game ball is detected by the second start prize winning switch 224b, it is determined whether or not to generate a jackpot state. The first winning lottery (big hit lottery) and the second winning lottery (small winning lottery) of whether or not to generate a small hit state are performed, and the fluctuation display is performed on the second special symbol display device 43B described later. will be In other words, the second win/fail lottery (small hit lottery) is performed only when the game ball enters the second start winning portion 33WB.

In this embodiment, the fact that a game ball enters the second start prize winning portion 33WB and the game ball is detected by the second start prize winning switch 224b corresponds to "establishment of the second start condition". The variable display performed by the special symbol display device 43B corresponds to the "second game rotation operation", and the function of the main controller 261, which will be described later, which performs these controls constitutes the "second executing means".

In addition, the function of the main control device 261 that generates the jackpot state as the first special game state constitutes the "first special game state generating means", and the main control device that generates the small win state as the second special game state. The function of H.261 constitutes the "second special game state generating means". Of these, the function of the main controller 261 that generates a jackpot when a game ball enters the specific ball entry portion 320c described later constitutes the "specific ball entry part first special game state generating means".

Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, a big hit triggered by a ball entering the first starting prize winning section 33WA or the second starting prize winning section 33WB may be referred to as a "direct hit big win". In addition, the variable display triggered by the entry of the ball into the first start prize winning section 33WA is also referred to as the "first fluctuation display", and the variable display triggered by the entry of the ball into the second start prize winning section 33WB is referred to as the "second fluctuation display." ” is also called. Also, the variation time of the first variation display is referred to as "first variation time", and the variation time of the second variation display is referred to as "second variation time".

A second variable winning device 32B is arranged downstream of the second starting winning section 33WB in the lower right area of the game area (lower right of the variable display unit 35).

A part of the second variable winning device 32B is provided so as to project forward from the front surface of the game board 30, and the upper surface of the projecting part is for entering a game ball into the internal area 320a. An opening 320b is formed. A front cover member (reference numerals omitted) of the second variable prize winning device 32B in this embodiment is made of a transparent member so that the player can visually recognize the inner region 320a.

In addition, the second variable prize winning device 32B includes an opening/closing member 318 that opens and closes the entrance opening 320b, and a solenoid (not shown) that opens and closes the opening/closing member 318. By opening and closing, the state can be changed between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter the internal area 320a and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area 320a. It is

In the present embodiment, the second variable prize winning device 32B is normally kept in the closed state, and can be changed to the open state when a small winning state, which will be described later, occurs. In the present embodiment, the function of the main control device 261 for controlling the opening and closing of the second variable winning device 32B when a small winning state occurs constitutes the "second opening/closing control means".

The opening/closing member 318 is provided so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction. The upper surface of the opening/closing member 318 is downwardly inclined from right to left, and when the opening/closing member 318 is in the closed position and the ball entry opening 320b is closed, the upper surface of the opening/closing member 318 is positioned over the game ball. to the left (the center side of the game board 30).

Here, a decelerating means for decelerating the game ball rolling on the guideway (for example, a configuration in which a plurality of protrusions are alternately formed on the front and rear wall portions sandwiching the guideway) may be provided. . As a result, when a small hit occurs, more game balls can enter the inner area 320a.

When the opening/closing member 318 is normally in the closed position, the game ball rolls from right to left on the upper surface (guideway) of the opening/closing member 318 and falls onto the game board 32 from the left end, thereby forming the first variable winning device. Run down towards 32A.

On the other hand, when the opening/closing member 318 is retracted to the open position and the ball entry opening 320b is in an open state, a game ball flowing down the game area or a game ball rolling on the guideway enters the internal area 320a. It becomes possible to enter the ball.

In the internal area 320a of the second variable winning device 32B, along a predetermined flow path, an incoming ball count switch 223a capable of detecting all game balls that have entered the internal area 320a, and the incoming ball count switch 223a A specific ball entry portion (V winning area) 320c into which the detected game ball can enter, a specific ball entry detection switch (V winning switch) 223b for detecting a game ball that has entered the specific ball entry portion 320c, and a specific An on-off valve 319 capable of opening and closing the ball-entering portion 320c, a solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing the on-off valve 319, and a non-specific ball-entering portion 320d to which game balls that have not entered the specific ball-entering portion 320c are guided. and a non-specific ball entry detection switch 223c for detecting a game ball that has entered the non-specific ball entry section 320d.

The on-off valve 319 is rotatably pivoted and configured to be displaceable between a closed position that restricts the ball from entering the specific ball-entering portion 320c and an open position that allows the ball to enter the specific ball-entering portion 320c. ing.

Under this configuration, when the game ball entering the internal region 320a flows down to the position of the specific ball entering portion 320c, if the on-off valve 319 is in the open position and the specific ball entering portion 320c is in the open state, The game ball falls into the specific ball entering portion 320c.

On the other hand, when the game ball entering the internal region 320a flows down to the position of the specific ball entering portion 320c, if the on-off valve 319 is in the closed position and the specific ball entering portion 320c is in the closed state, the game ball passes over the on-off valve 319 and is guided to the non-specific ball-entering portion 320d without falling into the specific ball-entering portion 320c.

Then, when a small hit state occurs, if the game ball entering the internal area 320a of the second variable winning device 32B enters the specific ball entering portion 320c, the first variable winning device 32A is in an open state. A jackpot state is generated. Hereinafter, a jackpot triggered by a game ball winning (V winning) to a specific ball winning portion (V winning area) 320c may be referred to as a "V winning jackpot".

In this embodiment, the specific ball entry portion 320c of the second variable prize winning device 32B is basically in an open state, and the small winning state in which the ball entry opening portion 320b of the second variable prize winning device 32B is opened. , when one game ball enters the specific ball entry portion 320c and the game ball is detected by the specific ball entry detection switch 223b, the on-off valve 319 is drive-controlled to the closed state, and thereafter the specific The game ball guided onto the ball-entering section 320c is guided to the non-specific ball-entering section 320d. A game ball entering the non-specific ball entering portion 320d is detected by a non-specific ball entering detection switch 223c provided in the non-specific ball entering portion 320d.

The second variable winning device 32B, which is opened in the small winning state, enters a ball by the opening/closing member 318 when the total number of balls detected by the specific ball-entering detection switch 223b and the non-specific ball-entering detection switch 223c reaches four. The opening 320b is closed, and a closed state in which a game ball cannot be entered is established. The specific ball entry portion 320c and the non-specific ball entry portion 320d are configured to merge in the lower part, and the game ball that flows into the internal area 320a of the second variable winning device 32B through the merged discharge passage is , is discharged to the back side of the game board 30 .

In addition, in this embodiment, during the period in which the small winning state occurs and the ball entry opening 320b of the second variable winning device 32B is opened, an average of about four game balls are placed in the second variable winning device 32B. designed to allow access to And, when a game ball can enter the second variable prize winning device 32B, it is designed so that the game ball always (almost 100%) enters the specific ball entry portion 320c. Therefore, except when the player does not shoot the game ball and when the player does not hit the right hand, there is almost a 100% probability that the game ball will enter the specific ball entry section 320c and a big hit will occur if the player hits to the right. will occur.

As is well known, when a game ball enters (wins a prize) in various prize-winning parts such as general prize-winning parts 31A and 31B, variable prize-winning devices 32A and 32B, starting prize-winning parts 33WA and 33WB, it is detected by various prize-winning switches, and the upper tray 19 (or lower plate 15), a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out.

In this embodiment, 10 balls enter the left general prize winning section 31A, 3 balls enter the right general prize winning section 31B, and 3 balls enter the first variable prize winning device 32A (large prize winning opening 32Aa). 15 in the case of entering, 5 in the case of entering the second variable winning device 32B (specified entering part 320c or non-specific entering part 320d), 5 in the case of entering in the first start winning part 33WA When three balls enter the second start winning part 33WB, three game balls (prize balls) are paid out.

In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an out port 36 corresponding to the lowest part of the game area. 36 to the outside of the game area (the back side of the game board 30). Also, the game board 30 is provided with various members such as a large number of nails and windmills in order to disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls.

Here, various game states in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. First, the types of jackpots in this embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, "15-round jackpot", "8-round jackpot", and "4-round jackpot" are set as the jackpot types.

Hereinafter, the "15 round jackpot" will be referred to as the "15R jackpot", and in the drawings it will be simply written as "15RS". Similarly, the "8-round jackpot" is called the "8R jackpot" and is abbreviated as "8RS" in the drawings. Also, the "4-round jackpot" is called a "4R jackpot" and is simply written as "4RS" in the drawings.

In the "15R jackpot" jackpot state, the jackpot opening operation is repeated 15 times (15 rounds). It should be noted that the "jackpot opening operation" means, for example, that the first variable winning device 32A, after the big winning opening shutter 32Ab is switched from the closed state to the open state, elapses of the specified time of 30 seconds or the first variable winning device It refers to one opening and closing operation until it becomes a closed state on the condition that 8 game balls of the prescribed number are won in 32A (the same applies hereinafter).

In the "8R jackpot" jackpot state, the jackpot opening action is repeated eight times (8 rounds), and in the "4R jackpot" jackpot state, the jackpot opening action is repeated four times (4 rounds).

However, although it will be described in detail later, regarding the "V winning big win" according to the present embodiment, the small winning state in which the second variable winning device 32B is open corresponds to the first round, so the above "big winning opening operation (Opening of the first variable winning device 32A)” is reduced by one round. That is, when the "15R jackpot" is generated by the "V winning jackpot", the above "jackpot opening action" is set to "14 times", and when the "8R jackpot" occurs, the above "jackpot opening action" is set to "7". When the "4R jackpot" occurs, the above "jackpot opening operation" is set to "three times".

In addition, in this embodiment, when the game ball wins the first start prize winning section 33WA and when the second start prize winning section 33WB wins, the jackpot type distribution given when winning by lottery is different. When winning the lottery triggered by the entry of the ball into the first start winning part 33WA, it is distributed to either ``15R jackpot'' or ``4R jackpot'' (except during time-saving B mode, which will be described later). In addition, when winning the lottery triggered by the entry of the ball into the second starting prize winning section 33WB, it is distributed to any one of "15R big win", "8R big win" or "4R big win".

Next, the start-entering support state related to the second start-up winning section 33WB will be described. The starting ball entry support state in the present embodiment is a "high ball entry state ( high support state)”, and a “low ball entry state (low support)” in which the rate at which the blade member 33WBb is opened is smaller than that in the “high ball entry state”, making it difficult for the game ball to enter the second start winning portion 33WB. state)”.

In addition, as the "high ball entry state", (1) a state in which the fluctuation display time in the normal symbol display device 41 is shorter than that in the "low ball entry state", (2) one opening of the second start winning section 33WB. A state in which the time (prescribed time) is longer than in the "low ball entry state", and (3) the prescribed number of game balls that can be entered per opening of the second start winning section 33WB is "low ball entry state". (4) A state in which the number of openings of the second start-up winning section 33WB per win in the starting ball entry support lottery is greater than in the "low ball entry state", (5) the start-up ball entry support lottery The probability of winning is set to be higher than in the "low ball entry state". The "high ball entry state" in the present embodiment employs the above configurations (1), (2), and (5). Of course, not limited to this, any one of the configurations (1) to (5), or any combination of the configurations (1) to (5) may be adopted as the "high ball entry state". .

Specifically, in the present embodiment, the opening of the second start winning portion 33WB when winning the start-up ball support lottery is 0.2 seconds × 2 times in the “low ball-in state”, state” is 1.8 seconds×2 times. As a result, in the "high ball entry state", the game ball tends to frequently win the second starting prize winning portion 33WB.

In this embodiment, the "high ball entry state" corresponds to the "first auxiliary state that facilitates establishment of the second starting condition", and the "low ball entry state" corresponds to "difficult to establish the second starting condition". The function of the blade member 33WBb of the second start-up winning section 33WB and the main controller 261 that drives and controls them constitutes the "auxiliary means".

Next, various game states (various game modes) when the variable display of the special symbol display devices 43a and 43b is performed will be described.

In this embodiment, the game modes in the predetermined game state are "normal mode", "variation time reduction mode with start-up ball support (hereinafter referred to as "time-saving A mode")", and "no start-up ball support". Three game modes of variable time reduction mode (hereinafter referred to as "time reduction B mode") are switched and set.

In the "normal mode", the variable display of the special symbol display devices 43A and 43B becomes "normal variable state" in which the variable display is performed in normal time, and the starting ball entering support state becomes "low ball entering state".

In the "time-saving A mode", the variable display of the special symbol display devices 43A and 43B is in a "variation time reduction state" in which the variable display is performed in a shorter time than the normal time, and the starting ball entry support state is a "high ball entry state". Become. Further, the "normal fluctuation state" and the "variation time reduction state" can be switched by changing the fluctuation time determination table as described later.

"Time-saving A mode" is a game mode provided after the end of the jackpot state, and the variable display in the special symbol display devices 43A and 43B (mainly the second variable display in the second special symbol display device 43B) is set in advance. When it is performed a predetermined number of times, it ends and then shifts to "normal mode".

In addition, in this embodiment, even if any of the "15R jackpot", "8R jackpot" or "4R jackpot" occurs, after the jackpot state ends, the "time saving A mode" is given a predetermined number of times. It is configured to be Specifically, after the end of the “15R jackpot” or “8R jackpot”, a “time-saving A mode” with a duration of 7 times of variable display is given, and after the “4R jackpot”, the duration is displayed with a variable display. One “time saving A mode” is given.

In the "time saving B mode", the variable display of the special symbol display devices 43A and 43B is in a "variation time shortened state" in which the variable display is performed in a shorter time than the normal time, and the starting ball entry support state is a "low ball entry state". Become. In this embodiment, the state set to the "time saving B mode" corresponds to the specific game state.

"Time-saving B mode" is a game mode that is granted when winning the third winning lottery (time-saving winning lottery) performed during the "normal mode" based on the ball entering the second start winning part 33WB. When the variable display on the symbol display devices 43A and 43B (mainly the first variable display on the first special symbol display device 43A) is performed a predetermined number of times, the game ends, and then shifts to the "normal mode".

However, as described above, in the "normal mode" and the "time saving B mode", the start-up ball support state related to the second start-up prize part 33WB does not become the "high ball-in state", and the game ball is the second start-up prize. Since it becomes a "low ball entry state" in which it is difficult to enter the part 33WB, the small winning state based on the result of the second winning lottery (small winning lottery) does not substantially occur. Even if a small winning state occurs, the small winning opening operation of the second variable winning device 32B in the "normal mode" and the "time saving B mode" as described later is performed twice for 0.1 seconds. Therefore, it is practically difficult for the game ball to enter the second variable winning device 32B.

Further, although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, various display effects corresponding to the current game state (game mode) are performed in the effect display device 42 . For example, in the "normal mode", the "normal stage production" is performed based on the ball entering the first start winning part 33WA, and the "battle" is performed when the "time reduction A mode" with a duration of one time of variable display is given. "Stage production", "Rush stage production" that is performed when "Time reduction A mode" with a duration of 7 times of variable display is given, "Time reduction A mode (battle stage production or rush stage production)" There are a "continuous chance stage effect" that can be played, a "lucky stage effect" that is performed based on the ball entering the first start prize winning part 33WA when the "time saving B mode" is given, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 118, on the upper right outside of the game area, a normal symbol display as normal display means for teaching the result of the starting ball support lottery performed based on the passage of the game ball to the through gate 34. A device 41, a first special symbol display device 43A as a first special display means for teaching the result of a first win/fail lottery (jackpot lottery) triggered by a ball entering the first starting prize winning portion 33WA, For teaching the results of the first winning lottery (jackpot lottery), the second winning lottery (small winning lottery) and the third winning lottery (time-saving winning lottery) performed with the entry of the ball into the second start winning part 33WB. A second special symbol display device 43B as second special display means is provided so as to be visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁

The normal symbol display device 41 is composed of two LEDs (normal symbol lamps). In the normal symbol display device 41, when the game ball passes through the through gate 34, for example, the normal symbol lamp on the right side blinks (changes). Then, after the variable display is performed for a predetermined time on the normal symbol display device 41, the variable display is stopped based on the result of the starting entry support lottery. In other words, the lighting mode when the variable display stops (the combination of the normal map lamps that are lit) and the various results of the start ball support lottery are associated, and the lighting mode when the variable display stops , the result of the start ball support lottery is displayed definitively. For example, by lighting both the left and right general pattern lamps, it indicates "winning", and by lighting only the left general pattern lamp, it indicates "off".

The first special symbol display device 43A is composed of four LEDs (first special symbol lamps). In the first special symbol display device 43A, switching display (first variable display) of the first special symbol lamp is performed with the entry of the ball into the first start winning portion 33WA as a trigger.

Then, after a specific game state in which the first variation display, which is a specific game, is performed for a predetermined time on the first special symbol display device 43A, the first variation display is performed based on the result of the first winning lottery (jackpot lottery). will be stopped. That is, the lighting mode (combination of the special lamps that are lit) when the first variable display is stopped is associated with various results of the first winning lottery (jackpot lottery), and the first variable display The result of the first win/fail lottery (big win lottery), ie, "big win" or "lost", is definitely displayed according to the lighting mode when is stopped.

The second special symbol display device 43B is composed of four LEDs (second special symbol lamps). In the second special symbol display device 43B, switching display (second variable display) of the second special symbol lamp is performed with the entry of the ball into the second start winning portion 33WB as a trigger.

Then, after the specific game state in which the second variation display, which is the specific game, is performed for a predetermined time on the second special symbol display device 43B, the first winning lottery (jackpot lottery) and the second winning lottery (small winning lottery). Alternatively, the second variable display is stopped based on the result of the third win/fail lottery (time-saving winning lottery). That is, the lighting mode (combination of the special lamps that are lit) when the second variable display is stopped is associated with various results of the first to third lottery, and the second variable display is The results of the first to third lotteries, that is, "big win", "small win", "time-saving win" or "loss" are definitely displayed according to the lighting mode when the game is stopped. In the present embodiment, the stopping of the second variable display corresponds to establishment of the predetermined update condition, and the winning of the "time saving win" corresponds to the establishment of the specific condition.

Furthermore, in the first special symbol display device 43A and the second special symbol display device 43B, depending on the lighting mode (stop mode) to be stopped, the jackpot type ("15R jackpot", "8R jackpot", and "4R jackpot") which one of them) is also taught. In addition, in the second special symbol display device 43B, depending on the lighting mode (stop mode) to be stopped, the time saving hit type ("30 times time saving hit", "40 times time saving hit", and "50 times time saving hit" which one) is also taught. In addition, there are not one but a plurality of stop modes of the special symbol display devices 43A and 43B that teach various big hits, small hits, various time-saving hits, and misses, and one of them is selected and stopped. be.

In addition, the stop display in the first special symbol display device 43A and the second special symbol display device 43B is maintained for a specified time, and after the period (variation interval) elapses, the next variation display can be started.

Further, after the stop display in the first special symbol display device 43A or the second special symbol display device 43B, even if the specified time passes, when the next variable display is not performed, the first special symbol display device 43A Or, in the second special symbol display device 43B, it is configured to be switched from the lighting mode showing the result of the winning lottery to the lighting mode showing that it is in the standby state where the variable display is not performed. Without being limited to this, a configuration may be adopted in which the lighting mode indicating the result of the lottery is maintained as it is.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, during the execution of the first variable display, if there is a game ball entering the first start winning part 33WA, which is a specific condition or an update condition, the number corresponding to the entering ball One variable display is retained and stored, and after the first variable display being executed is stopped and displayed, the retained and stored first variable display is started. Similarly, during execution of the second variable display, if there is a game ball entering the second start winning section 33WB, which is a specific condition or an update condition, the second variable display corresponding to the entering ball is displayed. After the suspended and stored second variable display being executed is stopped and displayed, the suspended and stored second variable display is started.

In addition, when the game ball passes through the through gate 34 during the variable display on the normal symbol display device 41, the variable display corresponding to the passage is retained and stored, and after the variable display being executed is stopped and displayed. , the suspended and stored variable display is started.

In addition, in this embodiment, the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41 is retained and stored so as to be adjacent to the normal symbol display device 41, the first special symbol display device 43A, and the second special symbol display device 43B. a normal pending display device 44 indicating that the A first suspension display device 46A and a second suspension as a second suspension display means capable of notifying or suggesting that the second variable display is stored in suspension (that the right to execute the second variable display has been obtained) A display device 46B is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display device 43A, the second special symbol display device 43B, the first reservation display device 46A, the second reservation display device 46B, the normal design display device 41, and the normal reservation display device 44, The display is directly controlled by a main controller 261 as main control means, which will be described later.

The normal hold display device 44 is composed of two LEDs (normal hold lamps). In this embodiment, up to four variable displays of the normal symbol display device 41 performed based on the passage of the game ball to the through gate 34 can be retained and stored. For example, when the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41 is suspended once, the left normal suspension lamp lights up, and when the variation display is suspended twice, the left and right normal suspension lamps light up, and 3 When a batch is reserved, the left normal reserve lamp blinks and the right normal reserve lamp lights up, and when the four times are reserved, the left and right normal reserve lamps blink. Incidentally, when a game ball newly passes through the through gate 34 during the jackpot state, the variation display for that amount can also be suspended.

The first suspension display device 46A is composed of two LEDs (first suspension lamps). In this embodiment, the first variable display based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting prize winning section 33WA can be retained and stored up to four times. For example, when the first variable display is held once, the left first holding lamp lights up, and when the first variable display is held twice, the left and right first holding lamps light up. However, when the first variable display is suspended for three times, the first suspended lamp on the left blinks and the first suspended lamp on the right lights up, and when the first variable display is suspended for four times , the left and right first holding lamps blink. When a plurality of first variable displays are reserved and stored, the first variable displays are sequentially digested in the order in which they are reserved and stored (from the first reserved one).

The second suspension display device 46B is composed of two LEDs (second suspension lamps). In this embodiment, the second variable display based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting prize winning section 33WB can be retained and stored up to four times. For example, when the second variable display is held once, the left second holding lamp lights up, and when the second variable display is held twice, the left and right second holding lamps light up. However, when the second variable display is suspended for three times, the second suspended lamp on the left blinks and the second suspended lamp on the right lights up, and when the second variable display is suspended for four times , the left and right second hold lamps blink. When a plurality of second variable displays are reserved and stored, the second variable displays are sequentially digested in the order in which they are reserved and stored (from the first reserved one).

In addition, when the game ball newly wins the starting winning portion 33Wa, 33Wb during the jackpot state, the variation display for that amount is also suspended. However, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, in the jackpot state, "right hitting" is performed, and the game ball relatively enters the second start winning part 33WB provided at the right side area lower position of the game area. Therefore, basically, after the end of the jackpot state, the second variation display is retained and stored.

As described above, basically, the first variable display triggered by the ball entering the first starting prize winning section 33WA is stored in the order in which the corresponding game ball wins the first starting prize winning section 33WA and wins a prize. The second variable display triggered by the entry of the ball into the second starting prize winning section 33WB is stored in the order in which the corresponding game balls enter the second starting prize winning section 33WB and is digested in the order of winning. . However, if both the first variable display triggered by the ball entering the first start prize winning section 33WA and the second variable display triggered by the ball entering the second start prize winning section 33WB are suspended ( When one or more of the first holding lamp and the second holding lamp are lit), the second variable display triggered by the ball entering the second start winning portion 33WB is preferentially extinguished. In other words, if the second variable display triggered by the ball entering the second start prize winning section 33WB is not completely executed, the first variable display triggered by the ball entering the first start prize winning section 33WA is performed. It has a structure that cannot be broken. For example, in a state in which one first holding lamp of the first holding display device 46A is lit, the game ball wins the second start winning part 33WB, and one second holding lamp of the second holding display device 46B When lit, the first variable display triggered by the ball entering the first start prize winning section 33WA is postponed, and the second variable display triggered by the ball entering the second start prize winning section 33WB is performed first. It will happen.

The effect display device 42 of the variable display device unit 35 is composed of a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display section, and display contents are controlled by a sub-controller 262 and a display control device 45, which will be described later. That is, in the effect display device 42, auxiliary display contents are displayed by the sub-control device 262 based on the command from the main control device 261 so as to correspond to the results displayed by the special symbol display devices 43A, 43B, etc. It is determined and displayed by the display control device 45, which will be described later. In this embodiment, the effect display device 42 and the sub-control device 262 and the display control device 45 that control the effect display device 42 constitute a "specific display execution function unit".

The effect display device 42 is configured to be able to execute effect variable display (decorative pattern variable display) as a variable corresponding effect display in accordance with the variable display by the first special symbol display device 43A and the second special symbol display device 43B. there is

For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 159, the effect display device 42 is provided with three upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas (upper symbol display area, middle symbol display area, and lower symbol display area). , in each pattern display area, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (designs with numbers 1 to 9) are sequentially displayed (variably displayed), and then sequentially for each design display area (for example, upper design display area → lower The decorative patterns are stopped and displayed in the order of the pattern display area → the middle pattern display area.

When the main controller 261 confirms the occurrence of the big win, the first or second special symbol display devices 43A and 43B display corresponding to the big win, and the performance display device 42 shows the big win. (for example, in the upper pattern display area, the middle pattern display area, and the lower pattern display area, the same decorative patterns are stopped and displayed so as to line up on a predetermined effective line), and the jackpot state is started.

In addition, when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination corresponding to a big win, as a preliminary step, for example, the same decorative symbols are stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area. It will be done. In this way, the state in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area and the variable display is still performed in the middle symbol display area is the ready-to-win state. Of course, even if the ready-to-win state occurs, it does not necessarily mean that the jackpot state will occur, and there are cases where the winning state is lost.

In this embodiment, after the ready-to-win state occurs, in the middle symbol display area, the same decorative symbol (ready-to-win symbol) stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area is stopped and displayed on the same active line. When it is done (when the decorative pattern of the same number is stopped and displayed), a jackpot state is given. However, in this embodiment, the type of the jackpot cannot be determined depending on the type of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the case of a "small win" or a "time saving win", the combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the effect display device 42 is different from that corresponding to the big win (same number doubles). For example, the numbers of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in each symbol display area are "3, 4, 1", etc., which are combinations that look like outlier symbols. As a result, the combination of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed cannot be discriminated as a "small win" or a "time saving win". Of course, not limited to this, in the case of a "small win" or a "time saving win", the combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the effect display device 42 may be double eyes of the same number.

As shown in FIG. 117 , a ball passage unit 70 is provided on the back side of the front frame 14 below the window portion 101 . The ball passage unit 70 includes a lower tray communication path 71 that connects from a later-described payout mechanism 352 to the lower outlet 16 of the lower tray 15 and an upper tray communication path 73 that connects the payout mechanism 352 to the upper tray 19 . In addition, there is a gap of a predetermined distance between the launch rail 61 provided on the front side of the inner frame 12 and the rail 50 (outer rail constituting portion 52), and the ball passage unit 70 of the front frame 14 has the gap A foul ball passage 72 is formed to guide the game ball that has fallen further to the lower tray 15.例文帳に追加As a result, if a game ball shot from the shooting device 60 does not reach the return ball preventing member 53 and travels back along the rail 50 as a foul ball, the foul ball is discharged to the lower tray 15 through the foul ball passage 72. be done.

Furthermore, a shot ball passage 74 is provided for communicating between the upper tray 19 and the ball feeding device 63 and for guiding the game balls stored in the upper tray 19 to the ball feeding device 63 . In addition, the shot ball passage 74 is formed with a communication hole (not shown) that communicates with the lower tray communication passage 71, and is provided with a first shutter (not shown) that opens and closes the communication hole. The first shutter is normally urged toward the closed position, which closes the communication hole, by an urging means (not shown). Further, the first shutter is interlocked with the ball removal button 123, and is configured to be displaced to the open position for opening the communication hole when the ball removal button 123 is pressed.

As shown in FIG. 116, the lower tray 15 is formed with a discharge port 15a through which game balls stored in the lower tray 15 can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10, and the discharge port 15a is opened and closed. A second shutter 15b is provided. The second shutter 15b is normally urged toward the closed position to close the discharge port 15a by an urging means (not shown). Further, the second shutter 15b is configured to be interlocked with the ball extracting lever 25. For example, when the ball extracting lever 25 is slid leftward, it is displaced to the open position where the discharge port 15a is opened. is configured to

Reference numeral 67 in FIGS. 117 and 118 denotes a payout passage for guiding game balls paid out by a payout mechanism 352, which will be described later, to the front of the inner frame 12, and communicates with the upper tray communication passage 73 (upper tray 19). It is divided into a passageway and a passageway leading to the lower plate communication passage 71 (lower plate 15).

Further, a shutter 68 is provided below the payout passage 67, and when the front frame 14 is opened, the shutter 68 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring or the like so as to close the exit of the payout passage 67. It's becoming

On the other hand, when the front frame 14 is closed, the shutter 68 is pushed open by the inlet-side rear end of the lower tray communication passage 71 . In addition, the inlet portion (ball inlet portion) of the lower tray communicating passage 71 and the inlet portion (ball inlet portion) of the upper tray communicating passage 73 are provided adjacent to each other. Furthermore, when the front frame 14 is closed, the entrances and the payout passage 67 are separated by a predetermined distance, and game balls can pass through the gap between them. Therefore, when the upper tray 19 and the upper tray communication path 73 are filled with game balls, the game balls to be paid out flow toward the lower tray communication path 71 (overflow to the inlet side of the lower tray communication path 71), and the lower tray is connected. It will be dispensed to the lower tray 15 through the passage 71 .

In addition, the ball passage unit 70 is provided with a full detection switch (not shown) for detecting game balls positioned in the lower tray communication passage 71 . Due to the presence of the full detection switch, it is grasped that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls (that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls and that the game balls are staying in the lower tray communication passage 71). be able to. In this embodiment, based on the game balls being continuously detected by the full detection switch for a predetermined period of time, the effect display device 42 uses the display, sound, etc., to notify that the lower tray 15 is full. control is performed. In addition, when the retention of the game ball in the lower tray communication passage 71 is eliminated and the game ball is no longer detected by the full detection switch (when the game ball is no longer detected continuously for a predetermined time), the error notification state is canceled.

Next, the rear configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 119, 120 and the like. On the back of the pachinko machine 10, various control boards are arranged vertically and horizontally, and some of them are arranged so as to be overlapped in the front and back, and a game ball supply device (payout mechanism) for supplying game balls. and a resin protective cover, etc. are attached. Since the dispensing mechanism and the protective cover are integrated as one unit, and the resin portion is generally called the back pack, the unit is called "back pack unit 203" here.

First, the rear configuration of the game board 30 will be described. As shown in FIG. 120, on the rear side of the variable display unit 35 (see FIG. 118) disposed corresponding to the through hole in the center of the game board 30, a resin frame cover covering the center frame 47 from behind is provided. 213 is provided so as to protrude rearward. In addition, on the rear side of the frame cover 213, the effect display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device facing forward from the opening of the frame cover 213, the display control device 45, and the sub-control device 262 are detachably stacked in the front-rear direction. installed.

The performance display device 42 is housed in a storage box 42a having an opening for exposing the liquid crystal display portion of the performance display device 42 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and is fixed to the rear side of the frame cover 213. there is The display control device 45 is housed in a substrate box 45a and fixed to the back side of the effect display device 42 (storage box 42a). The sub-controller 262 is accommodated in a substrate box 262a and fixed to the rear side of the display control device 45 (substrate box 45a). An LED control board or the like for driving the LED or the like built in the center frame 47 is arranged inside the frame cover 213 . The storage box 42a and the substrate boxes 45a and 262a are made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the inside can be visually recognized.

Below the frame cover 213, a back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 so as to cover the general winning sections 31A and 31B, the variable winning devices 32A and 32B, and the start winning sections 33WA and 33WB from behind. there is The back frame set 215 includes a ball recovery mechanism (not shown) for recovering game balls that have won prizes in various prize-winning sections. The game balls collected by this ball collecting mechanism are guided to a discharge passage portion 217 which will be described later, and discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 from a discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217 .

Also, in this embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the main controller 261 . More specifically, a substrate box 263 in which a main controller 261 is mounted is rotatably pivoted to the back frame set 215 and can be opened rearward.

The main controller 261 is housed in a substrate box 263 made of transparent resin material or the like. The board box 263 includes a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and these box base and box cover are connected by a sealing member. The board box 263 connected by the sealing member is configured so that it cannot be opened unless a predetermined trace is left. As a result, it is possible to easily discover that the board box 263 has been illegally opened.

Although not shown, the back frame set 215 includes general winning switches 221a and 221b, a large winning opening count switch 222, a winning ball counting switch 223a, a specific winning ball detection switch 223b, a non-specific winning ball detection switch 223c, A first board relay board is provided which is electrically connected to the start winning switches 224a and 224b and the through gate switch 225 via cable connectors. This first board relay board relays the general winning switches 221a, 221b, etc., and the main controller 261, and is electrically connected to the main controller 261 via a cable connector. On the other hand, the starting winning switches 224a, 224b for detecting winning to the starting winning portions 33WA, WB are directly connected to the main controller 261 via connector cables without passing through the relay board.

The detection results detected by the various incoming ball detection switches are taken into the main controller 261 . Then, a payout command (the number of game balls to be paid out) according to the winning situation of each time is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the payout control device 311, and based on the output signal from the payout control device 311, a predetermined number of game balls is sent. is paid out (unless detected by through gate switch 225).

In addition, although not shown, the back surface of the game board 30 is provided with a second board surface relay board for relaying various motors and solenoids and the main control device 261 .

Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in FIG. 119, the back pack unit 203 is formed by integrating a resin-molded back pack 351 and a game ball payout mechanism 352 . The back pack unit 203 is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the left side (the right side in FIG. 119) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened rearward about the opening/closing axis extending in the vertical direction. ing. In addition, an external terminal plate 240 is provided on the upper left portion of the back pack unit 203 (upper right portion in FIG. 119).

The external terminal board 240 is for relaying transmission of various kinds of information to a game hall computer or the like, and is provided with a plurality of external connection terminals. Terminals for outputting various information about the current game state such as the occurrence of a jackpot state, for example, the opening of the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 detected by the opening detection switches 91 and 92 described later. A terminal for outputting information about various error states such as ball entry error, bottom tray full error, tank no ball error, payout error, terminal for outputting information about various error states, payout control device 311 Terminals and the like for outputting information are provided.

The back pack 351 is integrally formed of, for example, ABS resin, and has a protective cover portion 354 that protrudes rearward from the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 354 has a shape in which left and right side surfaces and an upper surface are closed and only a lower surface is opened, and has a size sufficient to cover at least the frame cover 213 . However, in this embodiment, the protective cover portion 354 is configured to cover the upper portion and the right portion (the left portion in FIG. 119) of the board box 263 as well. As a result, in the closed state of the back pack unit 203, the sealing member provided on the right side of the board box 263 and the terminal section (board side connector) provided along the upper edge of the main controller 261 are covered. It will happen.

The dispensing mechanism section 352 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover section 354 . Namely, above the protective cover portion 354, a tank 355 which opens upward is provided, and the tank 355 is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall. Below the tank 355, a tank rail 356 having, for example, two rows of ball passages in the horizontal direction and gently sloping toward the downstream side is connected. It is A payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 357, and payout of the required number of game balls is appropriately performed by a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor. The game balls paid out from the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper tray 19 and the like.

In the payout mechanism section 352, a payout relay board 381 for relaying a payout command signal from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358 is installed, and a power switch board 382 for taking in the main power supply from the outside is installed. there is The power switch board 382 is supplied with a main power supply of, for example, 24 V AC via a voltage converter, and is turned on or off by a switching operation of the power switch 382a.

Below the back pack unit 203 (board box 263), a bottom frame set 251 that is pivotally supported by the left side (the right side in FIG. 119) of the inner frame 12 and that can be opened rearward is provided. As shown in FIG. 120, the lower frame set 251 is formed with a discharge passage portion 217 into which the game balls collected by the ball collection mechanism described above flow in. A discharge chute (not shown) is formed for discharging to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 . In other words, the game balls that have won prizes in each prize winning section such as the general prize winning section 31 a are collected via the ball recovery mechanism of the back frame set 215 and discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute of the discharge passage section 217 . The out port 36 is similarly connected to the discharge passage portion 217, and the game balls that have not won any of the winning portions are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute. In this embodiment, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are configured as separate bodies and can be opened and closed independently, but the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are integrally formed. It is also possible to

In addition, as shown in FIG. 119, on the back side of the lower frame set 251, the power supply / launch control device 310, the payout control device 311, and the CR unit connection board 314 are detachably attached in a state of being stacked back and forth. It is The power/launch control device 310 includes a launch control circuit 312 and a power circuit 313 , is housed in a board box 313 a and is fixed to the back side of the lower frame set 251 .

In addition, the payout control device 311 is housed in a board box 311a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (the power supply and firing control device 310). The board box 311a housing the payout control device 311 is provided with a sealing member in the same manner as the board box 263 housing the above-described main control device 261, so that a trace of the opening of the board box 311a remains. there is

In addition, the CR unit connection board 314 is housed in a board box 314a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (power supply/launch control device 310). The board boxes 311a, 313a, and 314a are made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the inside can be visually recognized.

Also, the payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 321 projecting outward from the substrate box 311a. For example, when the state recovery switch 321 is pressed when a payout error such as a ball clogging occurs in the payout motor, the payout motor rotates forward or reverse to clear the ball jam (return to normal state).

Further, the power supply circuit 313 is provided with a RAM erase switch 323 projecting outward from the board box 313a. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, and even in the event of a power failure, it can retain the state at the time of the power failure, and can be restored to the state at the time of the power failure when recovering from the power failure (recovery of power). can. Therefore, when the power is turned off in a normal procedure (for example, when the game hall is closed), the state before the power is turned off is stored. to put in.

Further, as shown in FIG. 120, a locking device 600 is provided on the back side of the right side portion of the inner frame 12 . The locking device 600 has a cylinder lock 600a (see FIG. 115, etc.) exposed on the front side of the front frame 14. A key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 600a and rotated to one side to open the inner frame. 12 can be unlocked, and the front frame 14 can be unlocked by rotating to the other side. In this embodiment, the inner frame 12 is locked to the outer frame 11 and the front frame 14 is locked to the inner frame 12 .

Incidentally, as described above, the right-side frame forming portion 11d of the outer frame 11 is formed with the extending wall portion 83 that covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the rear side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 119). reference). As a result, it becomes difficult to insert a wire or the like from the back side of the outer frame 11 and operate the locking device 600 with the wire or the like. As a result, the defense performance can be improved. Furthermore, the extending wall portion 83 is configured to cover the right end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 119) of the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 from the back side, and in the closed state of the inner frame 12, The rear pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 cannot be opened.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 118, a front frame open detection switch 91 for detecting the opening of the front frame 14 is provided at the lower right portion of the front side of the inner frame 12 (on the right side of the launching device 60). As shown, an inner frame open detection switch 92 for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12 is provided on the lower right portion of the back side of the inner frame 12 (lower left in FIG. 119). The front frame open detection switch 91 and the inner frame open detection switch 92 each have a detection part that can appear and disappear with respect to the switch body, and the front frame open detection switch 91 is provided so that the detection part faces forward, The inner frame open detection switch 92 is provided so that the detection portion faces rearward. When the detector is in a state of protruding from the switch body, an ON signal is output to the main controller 261, and when the detector is pushed toward the switch body and retracted into the switch body, an OFF signal is output. It is configured to output to the main controller 261 . That is, when the front frame 14 is closed, the front frame open detection switch 91 is turned off when the detection portion is pressed by the back surface of the front frame 14, and when the front frame 14 is opened, the detection portion returns to the protruding state and is turned on. Become. Similarly, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the inner frame open detection switch 92 is turned off by pressing the pressing portion 86 integrally formed with the receiving portion 85 of the outer frame 11. When the inner frame 12 is opened, the switch 92 is turned off. The part returns to the protruding state and is turned on.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 121 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The main controller 261 is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The CPU 501 includes a ROM 502 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 501, and a RAM 503 that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 502. Also, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. However, the CPU, ROM, and RAM may not be integrated into one chip, but may be integrated into chips for each function.

The RAM 503 includes a stack area that stores the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 501 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 501, and a work area (work area) that stores various flags, counters, I/O values, and the like. ) and a backup area 503a.

The RAM 503 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply circuit 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. All data that is stored is backed up.

The backup area 503a is designed to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power cut when the power is turned off when the power is turned off due to a power cut or the like. (similarly)) and the values of each register, I/O, etc. are stored. Writing to the backup area 503a is executed by the main processing when the power is turned off, and conversely, each value written to the backup area 503a is restored when the power is turned on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation; the same applies hereinafter). is executed in The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 is configured to receive a power failure signal SK1 output from a power failure monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, when the power supply is interrupted due to a power failure or the like. Upon occurrence, power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing) is immediately executed.

If at least the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a are backed up, it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

An input/output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 containing the ROM 502 and RAM 503 via a bus line 504 including an address bus, a data bus, and the like. Connected to the input/output port 505 are a RAM erasing switch circuit 543, payout control device 311, sub-control device 262, special symbol display devices 43A and 43B, normal symbol display device 41, and the like, which will be described later. With this configuration, the above-described special symbol display devices 43A and 43B and the normal symbol display device 41 are directly controlled by the main controller 261. On the other hand, the effect display device 42 is controlled via the sub-control device 262 .

In addition, although illustration of various relay boards and the like is omitted for convenience, the input/output port 505 includes general winning switches 221a and 221b, a big winning opening count switch 222, a winning ball counting switch 223a, a specific winning ball detection switch 223b, a non Various detection switches such as specific ball entry detection switch 223c, start winning switches 224a and 224b, through gate switch 225, various boards such as power supply / launch control device 310, payout control device 311, sub control device 262, etc., holding display device 46A, 46B, information display devices such as the normal holding display device 44, various solenoids provided in the variable winning devices 32A and 32B, and various electrical components such as solenoids for operating the second starting winning section 33WB are connected. In other words, the main controller 261 is provided with a plurality of terminal portions (board-side connectors) for connecting connectors of various cable connectors.

The sub-control device 262 (sub-control board) as a sub-control means includes a CPU 551 which is an arithmetic device, a ROM 552 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 551, and a control program stored in the ROM 552. It includes a RAM 553, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data, etc., an input/output port 554, a bus line 555, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit (not shown). It has The RAM 553 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when various programs are executed by the CPU 551 .

The input/output port 554 is connected to the CPU 551 , the ROM 552 and the RAM 553 via a bus line 555 and also to the display control device 45 . Further, the input/output port 554 is connected with the speaker SP, the effect button 125, the cross button 126, the illumination section 102, the error display lamp 104, and the like.

The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 causes the display control device 45 to perform display control based on, for example, a command signal (for example, a variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control device 261, and causes the effect display device 42 to display. As described above, in the present embodiment, the special symbol display devices 43A and 43B controlled by the main control device 261 are designed to teach that the jackpot has been won, and the effect controlled by the sub-control device 262 In the display device 42, in accordance with the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol display devices 43A and 43B, the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed as the effect display.

The payout control device 311 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 358 . A CPU 511, which is an arithmetic device, includes a ROM 512 storing control programs executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 513 used as a work memory and the like.

Similar to the RAM 503 of the main controller 261, the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 includes a stack area for storing the contents of the internal register of the CPU 511 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 511, various flags and counters, It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored, and a backup area 513a.

The RAM 513 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply circuit 313 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. data is backed up. If at least the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a are backed up, it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

Backup area 513a, when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power cut when the power is turned on again, the stack pointer at the time of power cut, each register, This is an area for storing values such as I/O. Writing to the backup area 513a is executed by the main process when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the backup area 513a is executed by the main process when the power is turned on. As with the CPU 501 of the main controller 261, the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SK1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 when the power supply is interrupted due to a power failure or the like. When input to the CPU 511, NMI interrupt processing is immediately executed as power failure processing.

In the work area, a payout permission flag set to allow the payout of prize balls by the payout control device 311, a command reception flag set when a command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received, and a main control device 261 A command buffer is provided in which commands sent from are stored.

The payout permission flag is a flag for setting the payout permission of prize balls, and is turned on when a specific command permitting the payout of prize balls is transmitted from the main controller 261 and the specific command is received. or when it returns to the state before power-off. In this embodiment, the specific commands are a payout initialization command that instructs the initialization process of the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, a prize ball command that instructs the payout of prize balls, and a There are three payout return commands sent in the case.

The command reception flag is a flag for confirming whether or not the payout control device 311 has received a command, and is turned on when any command is received. It is turned off when returning to the previous state, and is turned off when the received command is determined by the command determination process.

The command buffer consists of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main controller 261 . The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when a command is stored and read, the store pointer and read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

An input/output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 containing the ROM 512 and RAM 513 via a bus line 514 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 515 is connected to the RAM erase switch circuit 543, the main controller 261, the power supply/fire control device 310 (fire control circuit 312), the dispensing device 358, the CR unit connection board 314, and the like.

The CR unit connection board 314 includes a ball rental operation unit (rental switch 121 and return switch 122) on the front of the pachinko machine 10, and a CR unit (card reader unit, ball rental unit) and the payout control device 311 are electrically connected to each other. Information relating to the ball lending operation section by the player or the ball lending operation to the CR unit is input to the CR unit, and the balance of the game value is stored in the card which is a recording medium inserted in the CR unit. If so, the balance of the card is subtracted, and a payout request signal for the number of game balls corresponding to the subtraction is output to the payout control device 311 . Note that the recording medium of the CR unit is not limited to the card type, and may be of the coin type or stick type.

In addition, the payout control device 311 periodically sends a CR unit connection signal indicating that the CR unit connection board 314 and the CR unit are electrically connected to the firing control circuit 312 of the power supply and firing control device 310. It is configured to output every 2 msec, for example.

A launch control circuit 312 of the power supply and launch control device 310 permits or prohibits launching of game balls by the launcher 60 . The firing control circuit 312 is electrically connected to the handle 18 , the dispensing control device 311 and the main control device 261 . In addition, the shooting control circuit 312 receives a dial position signal from a variable resistor that indicates the rotation operation amount (rotation angle) of the rotation operation portion 18a from the handle 18, and indicates that the player is touching the handle 18. A touch signal from the touch sensor and a launch switch signal indicating that the player is not operating the stop lever 18b can be input. Further, the firing control circuit 312 is configured to receive a CR unit connection signal from the payout control device 311, which indicates that the CR unit connection board 314 and the CR unit are electrically connected.

Then, the firing control circuit 312 outputs a firing state signal to the main controller 261 on condition that the touch signal, the firing switch signal, and the CR unit connection signal are input, and the main controller 261 outputs the firing state signal to the main controller 261. A launch permission signal and a ball feed signal are output to the launch control circuit 312 on condition that the state signal is input. The main controller 261 outputs a launch permission signal at intervals of 0.6 seconds while the launch status signal is being input.

Further, the shooting control circuit 312 is configured to drive the ball sending device 63 and send the game ball to the shooting position when the ball sending signal is input. It should be noted that, in a state in which it is detected that a game ball already exists at the shooting position by the preparation ball detection sensor provided in the ball feeding device 63 and capable of detecting whether or not the game ball exists at the shooting position, the ball feeding device 63 is not driven (even if a ball sending signal is received, the game ball is not sent to the launch position).

Furthermore, the firing control circuit 312 drives the firing device 60 (firing solenoid) on condition that the touch signal, the firing switch signal, the CR unit connection signal, the dial position signal, and the firing permission signal are input. is configured to As a result, the game ball set at the shooting position is shot by the shooting device 60 with strength based on the dial position signal.

In addition, the power supply circuit 313 includes a power supply unit 541 that supplies power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power failure due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM deletion switch circuit 543 that is connected to the RAM deletion switch 323. and

The power supply unit 541 supplies necessary operating power to each of the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 541 takes in an AC 24V power supply supplied from the outside, and generates +12V power supply for driving various switches and motors, +5V power supply for logic, backup power supply for RAM backup, etc. These +12V power supply, +5V power supply and backup power supply are supplied to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like. Operating power is supplied to various switches, motors, and the like via a control device to which these are connected.

The power failure monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power failure signal SK1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 and the CPU 511 of the payout controller 311 when the power is shut off due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 542 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and determines that a power failure (power failure) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. A power failure signal SK1 is output to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. By the output of this power failure signal SK1, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 recognize the occurrence of power failure and execute power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing).

Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 541 normally outputs 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the power failure processing. configured to maintain value. Therefore, the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311 can normally execute and complete the power failure process.

The RAM erase switch circuit 543 is a circuit that takes in the switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323 and clears the backup data of the RAM 503 of the main controller 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout controller 311 according to the state of the switch 323 . When the RAM erasing switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erasing switch circuit 543 outputs a RAM erasing signal SK2 to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the RAM erasing switch 323 is pressed (including power-on due to power failure cancellation), the data in the RAMs 503 and 513 of the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311 are cleared. be.

The display control device 45 follows the instruction from the sub-control device 262 and executes the variable display of the decorative symbols on the effect display device 42 . The display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, a video display processor (VDP) 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, and bus lines 530, 531. and An input/output port 554 of the sub-controller 262 is connected to the input port 527 . Also, the CPU 521 , program ROM 522 , work RAM 523 and VDP 526 are connected to the input port 527 via the bus line 530 . An output port 529 is connected to the VDP 526 via a bus line 531, and the effect display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device, is connected to the output port 529. FIG.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the display command transmitted from the sub-control device 262 via the input port 527, analyzes the received command or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received command, and controls the VDP 526. (generate internal command for VDP 526). Thereby, display control in the effect display device 42 is performed.

A program ROM 522 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 521, and a work RAM 523 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various programs are executed by the CPU 521. is.

The video RAM 524 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the effect display device 42. By rewriting the contents of the video RAM 524, the display contents of the effect display device 42 are changed. The character ROM 525 is a memory for storing character data such as patterns displayed on the effect display device 42 .

The VDP 526 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an LCD driver (liquid crystal driving circuit) incorporated in the effect display device 42 . Since the VDP 526 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 526 adjusts the timing of each of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524, etc., and intervenes in the reading and writing of data.

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described. In this embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 performs lottery using various counter information during the game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 122, a success/failure random number counter CC1 as a success/failure random number generating means used for a success/failure lottery for determining whether or not to generate a big win state, etc., and a hit/fail random number counter CC1 used for determining the type of the big win (type lottery). A type determination counter CC2, a variation selection counter CC3 used to determine whether or not to generate a ready-to-win state in the effect display device 42, an initial value random number counter CINI used to set the initial value of the success or failure random number counter CC1, and a special Whether to open the first variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2 used for determining the variation display time of the symbol display devices 43A and 43B (effect display device 42) and the second start winning section 33WB A normal symbol random number counter CC4 used for the start ball support lottery is used. Incidentally, the variation selection counter CC3 is also used for a lottery for a ready-to-win pattern when the decoration pattern of the performance display device 42 is deviated and varied. In addition, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are also used for effect pattern selection in the effect display device 42 (variation pattern selection of decorative symbols, etc.).

Each of the counters CC1, CC2, CC3, CINI, CS1, CS2, and CC4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 as the lower limit after reaching the upper limit. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 (except for the random number initial value counter CINI).

The RAM 503 stores the values of the success/failure random number counter CC1, the type determination counter CC2, and the variation selection counter CC3, as a special variation holding area as holding storage means, and the normal pattern random number counter CC4. A variable holding area is provided.

The special variable reservation area comprises a first special variable reservation area and a second special variable reservation area each having four reservation areas (first reservation to fourth reservation area), and one execution area.

In each reservation area of the first special variable reservation area, each value of the win/fail random number counter CC1, the type determination counter CC2, and the variation selection counter CC3 is chronologically displayed in accordance with the winning history of the first start winning section 33WA. Stored. In this embodiment, the first special variation holding area provided in the RAM 503 of the main controller 261 is "a first storage means (first holding means)”.

In each reservation area of the second special variable reservation area, each value of the win/fail random number counter CC1, the type determination counter CC2, and the variation selection counter CC3 is chronologically displayed in accordance with the winning history of the second start winning section 33WB. Stored. In this embodiment, the second special variation holding area provided in the RAM 503 of the main controller 261 is "second storage means (second holding means)”.

In the present embodiment, there is only one execution area for the special change reservation area, and the data stored in the first special change reservation area and the second special change reservation area are used when performing a change display based on the data. will be shifted to the common execution area.

The normal variable holding area comprises four holding areas (holding first to holding fourth areas) and one execution area. In each holding area of the normal fluctuation holding area, the value of the normal symbol random number counter CC4 is stored chronologically according to the passage history of the game ball to the through gate 34.例文帳に追加

By adopting such a configuration, the first variable display in the first special symbol display device 43A, the second variable display in the second special symbol display device 43B, and the variable display in the normal symbol display device 41 are held up to four times respectively. It is possible.

To explain each counter in detail, the hit/fail random number counter CC1 is, for example, incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 599. It is configured to return to Normally, when the yes/no random number counter CC1 completes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the corresponding no random number counter CC1. The initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter (value=0 to 599) similar to the success/failure random number counter CC1, and is updated once for each timer interrupt and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of normal processing. On the other hand, the success/failure random number counter CC1 is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the success/failure random number counter CC1 is stored in the success/failure random number counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first start prize winning portion 33WA or the second start prize winning portion 33WB, the value of the hit/fail random number counter CC1 stored in the hit/fail random number counter buffer is changed to a special fluctuation holding area (first special fluctuation holding area or second special variable reservation area).

In this embodiment, the winning probability of the first winning lottery (jackpot lottery) changes according to the game mode (any game mode of "normal mode", "time saving A mode" and "time saving B mode") The number of the values of the hit/fail random number counter CC1 that is in the jackpot state is three, and the values are "7, 207, 407". That is, the player wins the first lottery (big win lottery) with a probability of 1/200, which is the first winning probability, and a big win state occurs. In this embodiment, the function of the main controller 261 that performs the first lottery (jackpot lottery) constitutes the "first lottery means".

Similarly, the winning probability of the second winning lottery (small winning lottery) changes according to the game mode (any game mode of "normal mode", "time saving A mode" and "time saving B mode") There are 84 values of the success/failure random number counter CC1 that are small hits, and the values are "9 to 50, 409 to 450". That is, the second lottery (small winning lottery) is won with a probability of 84/600 (approximately 1/7), which is the second winning probability, and a small winning state occurs. In this embodiment, the function of the main controller 261 that performs the second lottery (small winning lottery) constitutes the "second lottery means".

In addition, the third lottery (time saving lottery) is performed only during the "normal mode" based on the entry of the game ball into the second start prize winning section 33WB. In other words, the third success or failure lottery (time-saving lottery) is substantially performed only during the execution of the remaining second fluctuation display that is retained and stored at the end of the "time-saving A mode" (during the remaining retention digestion). . Therefore, in the present embodiment, after the end of the "time-saving A mode (battle stage production or rush stage production)", the state in which the "remaining hold digestion of the second variation display (continuous chance stage production)" is performed is the "predetermined game state.

The number of values of the success/failure random number counter CC1, which is a time saving hit, is 60, and the values are "211 to 230, 311 to 330, 511 to 530". That is, with a probability of 1/10, the third success or failure lottery (time-saving lottery) is won, and the right to generate the "time-saving B mode" is obtained.

More specifically, if the value of the success/failure random number counter CC1 is "211 to 230", "30 time-saving hits" will occur, and if the value of the success/failure random number counter CC1 is "311 to 330", "40" will occur. If the value of the success/failure random number counter CC1 is "511 to 530", the "50 time reduction hit" occurs.

In addition, as will be described later, the third winning lottery (time saving lottery) is the first winning lottery (jackpot lottery) and the second winning lottery (small winning lottery) performed based on the ball entering the second start winning part 33WB. ) is executed if you do not win.

The ROM 502 is provided with a win/fail determination table that is referred to when determining whether or not the value of the hit/fail random number counter CC1 corresponds to any win. In the present embodiment, the first right or wrong determination table corresponding to the ball entering the first start winning portion 33WA (first right or wrong determination table common to "normal mode", "time saving A mode" and "time saving B mode"), Second right or wrong determination table corresponding to the ball entering the second start winning part 33WB (second right or wrong determination table including small hit determination common to "time saving A mode" and "time saving B mode", and for "normal mode" There is a second hit/fail judgment table) that includes a small hit judgment and a time saving hit judgment.

The type determination counter CC2 is configured such that it is incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 19, for example, and returns to 0 as the lower limit after reaching the upper limit (that is, 19).

The ROM 502 is provided with a type determination table that is referred to when determining which jackpot type the value of the type determination counter CC2 corresponds to. In this embodiment, a first type determination table corresponding to the ball entering the first start prize winning section 33WA and a second type determination table corresponding to the ball entering the second start prize winning section 33WB are provided.

Then, when a big win is won in the winning lottery, the type of the big win state to be given is determined based on the value of the type determination counter CC2 (a type lottery is performed), and the determined type of big win state is given. The Rukoto.

In this embodiment, in the "normal mode (same for time saving A mode)", when the direct hit jackpot is elected in the first winning lottery (jackpot lottery) triggered by the ball entering the first start winning part 33WA , 5% will result in a “15R jackpot”, and 95% will result in a “4R jackpot”.

On the other hand, in the "time-saving B mode", if a direct hit jackpot is won in the first winning lottery (jackpot lottery) triggered by the ball entering the first start winning part 33WA, the rate of 100% is "15R jackpot". (The percentage of “4R jackpot” is 0%).

On the other hand, regardless of the game mode, when a direct hit jackpot is won in the first winning lottery (jackpot lottery) triggered by the entry of the ball into the second start prize winning portion 33WB, and when the second winning prize is won via a small hit When a V winning jackpot occurs based on the ball entering the specific ball winning portion (V winning area) 320c of the variable winning device 32B, the rate of 40% is "15R jackpot", and the rate of 10% is "8R". It becomes a "jackpot", and at a rate of 50%, it becomes a "4R jackpot".

The type determination counter CC2 is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the type determination counter CC2 is stored in the type determination counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting winning part 33WA or the second starting winning part 33WB, the value of the type determination counter CC2 stored in the type determination counter buffer is changed to the special change reservation area (first special stored in the variable reservation area or the second special variable reservation area).

The variable selection counter CC3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 as the lower limit after reaching the upper limit (that is, 238). In the present embodiment, after the ready-to-win state occurs with respect to the decorative pattern, the final stop pattern is shifted forward or backward by one before and after the ready-to-win pattern by the fluctuation selection counter CC3, and the same ready-to-win state occurs. After that, a lottery is drawn for "reach other than front and rear out" in which the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the front and back of the reach symbol, and "out (complete failure)" in which the reach state does not occur.

The ROM 502 is provided with a reach determination table that stores the correspondence between the value of the variation selection counter CC3 and various reach patterns.

The variation selection counter CC3 is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the variation selection counter CC3 is stored in the variation selection counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first start winning part 33WA or the second starting winning part 33WB, the value of the variation selection counter CC3 stored in the variation selection counter buffer is changed to the special variation holding area (first special stored in the variable reservation area or the second special variable reservation area).

In addition, one of the two fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 255, for example, and reaches the upper limit (that is, 255), and then the lower limit. It is configured to return to 0, and the other fluctuation type counter CS2 is, for example, incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 31, and after reaching the upper limit (that is, 31), it returns to 0, which is the lower limit. It has become.

In addition, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the special symbol display devices 43A and 43B and the rough fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display on the effect display device 42 (reach patterns such as normal reach, super reach, and premium reach) are corresponded by a fluctuation pattern table. If the fluctuation time of the special symbol display devices 43A and 43B is determined, the fluctuation pattern of the effect display device 42 is also determined.

For example, the variation time may be determined based on the first variation type counter CS1, and the stop display mode in the special symbol display devices 43A and 43B may be determined by the second variation type counter CS2. For example, when it corresponds to the "15R jackpot", one of the stop display modes corresponding to the "15R jackpot" is determined. Note that the counters and the like used to determine the variation time and variation pattern are not limited to the above configuration, and can be changed as appropriate for each model.

Further, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once each time the normal processing described later is executed, and are repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal processing. In this embodiment, the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are also stored in the variation type counter buffer of the RAM 503 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start prize winning section 33WA or the second start prize winning section 33WB. The values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the special fluctuation holding area of the RAM503.

In this way, by acquiring the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 at the timing of the start winning, the first variation time of the first variation display and the second variation of the second variation display retained and stored The time can be grasped (read ahead) before the fluctuation starts, and various effects can be performed using the information. In addition, when it is not necessary to read the variation time in advance and perform the effect, the buffer values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation of the decorative pattern by the effect display device 42. You can do it.

Note that the size and range of each counter is merely an example and can be changed arbitrarily. However, it is desirable that the random number counter CC1, the type determination counter CC2, the variation selection counter CC3, and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are all different prime numbers and are not synchronized in any case.

Also, the normal symbol random number counter CC4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29, for example, and returns to 0 as the lower limit after reaching the upper limit (that is, 29). The normal symbol random number counter CC4 is periodically updated (once per timer interruption in this embodiment), and when the game ball passes through the through gate 34, the value of the normal symbol random number counter CC4 is obtained.

Then, when the value of the normal design random number counter CC4 to be elected is acquired, after the fluctuation display is performed for a predetermined time in the normal design display device 41 (the normal design lamps constituting the normal design display device 41 blink alternately After), it is stop-displayed in a mode (lighting pattern) corresponding to winning, and the second start winning part 33WB is opened in a pattern corresponding to the game mode at that time.

In this embodiment, in the "low ball entry state", there are two random numbers "0 and 1" that will win the prize. On the other hand, in the "high ball entry state", there are 28 random numbers from "0 to 27". That is, in the "low ball entry state", the second start prize winning section 33WB is opened with a probability of 1/15, and in the "high ball entry state", the second start prize winning section 33WB is opened with a probability of 14/15. .

The ROM 502 is provided with a support determination table that is referred to when determining whether or not the value of the normal symbol random number counter CC4 corresponds to winning. In this embodiment, a first support determination table corresponding to the "low ball entry state" and a second support determination table corresponding to the "high ball entry state" are set.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 will be described with reference to flowcharts. The processing of the CPU 501 can be broadly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 2 msec in this embodiment), and a stop signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt processing and the NMI interrupt processing will be explained first, and then the main processing will be explained.

FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing, which is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 every 2 msec, for example. First, at step SC301, various prize winning switches are read. That is, it reads the states of various switches (except for the RAM erase switch 323) connected to the main controller 261, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information). On the other hand, if there is no detection information, the process proceeds to the next process.

In addition, when there is detection information of various winning switches, the value of the corresponding winning ball counter is added. In addition, in the external output processing of the normal processing to be described later, a prize ball command based on the value of each prize ball counter is output to the payout control device 311, and prize balls are provided based on the prize ball command (game balls are paid out). ). Furthermore, when this prize ball command is output, the value of each prize ball counter is reset.

At step SC302, random number initial value update processing is executed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

Also, in step SC303, random number update processing is executed. Specifically, the hit/fail random number counter CC1, the type determination counter CC2, the variation selection counter CC3, and the normal symbol random number counter CC4 are each incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated values of the respective counters CC1, CC2, CC3 and CC4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM503.

After that, in step SC304, the starting winning process accompanying the entry (winning) of the game ball to the first starting winning part 33WA or the second starting winning part 33WB is executed, and in step SC305, the game ball to the through gate 34 Execute through gate passage processing associated with passage. In the following step SC306, a firing permission command setting process for transmitting a firing permission signal to the firing control circuit 312 of the power/fire control device 310 is performed. Further, in step SC307, a remaining ball monitoring process for checking whether or not game balls remain in the internal area 320a of the second variable winning device 32B is performed. After that, the timer interrupt processing is temporarily terminated.

Here, the starting winning process of step SC304 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In addition, the RAM 503 includes a first holding counter Na that counts the number of holdings of the first variable display triggered by the ball entering the first start winning part 33WA, and a ball entering the second start winning part 33WB. A second suspension counter Nb is provided for counting the number of suspensions of the second variable display.

In addition, in the execution area and each reservation area of the special variation reservation area, the success/failure random number storage area that stores the value of the success/failure random number counter CC1, the winning type random number storage area that stores the value of the type determination counter CC2, and the variation selection counter CC3 A reach random number storage area for storing values, a first variation type random number storage area for storing the value of the first variation type counter CS1, a second variation type random number storage area for storing the value of the second variation type counter CS2, and variation Various storage areas such as a mode storage area for storing game mode information for specifying the game mode at the start of display are provided.

First, in step SC501, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the second start prize winning section 33WB based on the detection information of the second start prize winning switch 224b. If an affirmative determination is made in step SC501, it is determined in step SC502 whether or not the value of the second holding counter Nb, which is the first counting function unit, is less than the upper limit value ("4" in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made at step SC501 or SC502, the process proceeds to step SC510. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step SC502, the process proceeds to step SC503, and the second suspension counter Nb is incremented by one.

In subsequent step SC504, addition display processing of the second suspension display device 46B (second suspension lamp) corresponding to the number of suspensions of the second variable display being increased by one is performed. In other words, if the second reservation lamp is in the off state, processing is performed to turn it on.

After step SC504, in the processing of step SC505, which is the information setting function unit, the values of the success/failure random number counter CC1, the type determination counter CC2, the variation selection counter CC3, and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 (the success/failure random number counter buffer, the type Each value stored in the determination counter buffer, the variation selection counter buffer, and each variation type counter buffer) is stored in the first reservation area (the hit/fail random number storage area, winning type random number storage area, reach random number storage area, and first and second variation type random number storage areas). At the same time, the game mode in which the second variable display is started is specified, and the game mode information is stored in the mode storage area. After step SC505, the process proceeds to step SC506.

In step SC506, the value of the success/failure random number counter CC1 newly stored in the second special change reservation area is a value corresponding to various hits (jackpot, small hit, time saving hit). process.

Here, the details of the second right/wrong determination process in step SC506 will be described with reference to FIG. 128(b).

First, in step SC5111, the value of the success/failure random number counter CC1 newly stored in the second special change holding area is the value "7" corresponding to the jackpot, with reference to the second success/failure determination table corresponding to the game mode. It is determined whether or not it matches with either "207" or "407". When an affirmative determination is made in step SC5111, in step SC5112, after turning on the jackpot schedule flag of the corresponding reservation area in the second special change reservation area, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step SC5111, in step SC5113, the value of the success/failure random number counter CC1 newly stored in the second special variation holding area by referring to the second success/failure determination table corresponding to the game mode. matches one of the values "9 to 50, 409 to 450" corresponding to the small win. When the affirmative determination is made in step SC5113, in step SC5114, after turning on the small hit schedule flag of the corresponding reservation area among the second special change reservation areas, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SC5113, this process is terminated after executing the time reduction adequacy determination process in step SC5115.

Here, the details of the time-saving adequacy determination process of step SC5115 are demonstrated with reference to FIG.128(c).

First, in step SC5121, it is determined whether or not the change information newly stored in the second special change reservation area is the change display performed in the "normal mode". If a negative determination is made in step SC5121, this process ends.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SC5121, that is, if the second variable display is performed in the "normal mode", the process proceeds to step SC5122.

In step SC5122, the value of the success/failure random number counter CC1, which is newly stored in the second special variation holding area, corresponds to the "30 times shorter working hours" by referring to the second success/failure determination table corresponding to the "normal mode". It is determined whether or not it matches any of the values "211 to 230".

When the affirmative determination is made in step SC5122, in step SC5123, after turning on the 30-times time saving schedule flag of the corresponding reservation area among the second special change reservation areas, this process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step SC5122, in step SC5124, the value of the success/failure random number counter CC1 newly stored in the second special change reservation area by referring to the second success/failure determination table corresponding to the "normal mode". matches any one of the values "311 to 330" corresponding to "40 times shorter working hours".

When the affirmative determination is made in step SC5124, in step SC5125, after turning on the 40-time time saving schedule flag of the corresponding reservation area among the second special change reservation areas, this process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step SC5124, in step SC5126, the value of the success/failure random number counter CC1 newly stored in the second special change reservation area by referring to the second success/failure determination table corresponding to the "normal mode". matches any one of the values "511 to 530" corresponding to "50 times shorter working hours".

When the affirmative determination is made in step SC5126, in step SC5127, after turning on the 50-time time saving schedule flag of the corresponding reservation area of the second special change reservation area, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SC5126, this process ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 127, in step SC507 following step SC506, when it is determined that the value of the success/failure random number counter CC1 is a value corresponding to the big hit in step SC506, it is newly stored in the second special change reservation area. Based on the value of the type determination counter CC2, a second type determination process for determining the jackpot type is performed.

Here, the second type determination processing in step SC507 will be described with reference to FIG. 129(b). In the second type determination process, first, in step SC5300, it is determined whether or not the big hit schedule flag is set to ON in the second propriety determination process performed immediately before. If a negative determination is made at step SC5300, this process ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC5300, in step SC5301, the second type determination table is taken into consideration, and the value of the type determination counter CC2 newly stored in the second special change reservation area is "15R jackpot ” matches the value “0 to 7” corresponding to “. When the affirmative determination is made in step SC5301, in step SC5302, after turning on the 15R jackpot flag of the corresponding reservation area among the second special variation reservation areas, this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SC5301, in step SC5303, the second type determination table is taken into account, and the value of the type determination counter CC2 newly stored in the second special change reservation area is "8R jackpot It is determined whether or not it is "8 to 17" corresponding to ". When the affirmative determination is made in step SC5303, in step SC5304, after turning on the 8R jackpot flag of the corresponding reservation area among the second special variation reservation areas, this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SC5303, that is, if the value of the type determination counter CC2 is "18, 19", in step SC5305, the second type determination table is taken into consideration, and a new second special After turning on the 4R jackpot flag of the corresponding reservation area in the second special variable reservation area stored in the variable reservation area, this processing is terminated.

Returning to the description of FIG. 127, in step SC508 subsequent to step SC507, second variation time determination processing for determining the second variation time of the second variation display is performed. Here, when the game mode at the start of the second fluctuation fluctuation display is "normal mode", the second normal fluctuation time determination table for "normal mode" is referred to, and the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 The second variation time is grasped based on. When the game mode at the start of the second variation variation display is "time reduction A mode", the second reduction variation time determination table for "time reduction A mode" is referred to, and the value of the first variation type counter CS1 Based on this, the second fluctuation time is grasped. Further, when the game mode at the start of the second fluctuation fluctuation display is "time saving B mode", the second shortened fluctuation time determination table for "time saving B mode" is referred to, and the first fluctuation type counter CS1 A second variation time is determined based on the value. The variable time grasped here is stored in the corresponding reservation area of the second special variable reservation area. However, the value of the first variation type counter CS1 in the same reservation area is not erased here.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the second normal variable time determination table for the "normal mode" described above, the second shortened variable time determination table for the "time saving A mode", and the second for the "time saving B mode" As the shortened fluctuation time determination tables, there are provided tables for "big win", "small win", "time saving win" and "losing", respectively.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the RAM 503 of the main controller 261 is provided with a mode storage area that is referred to when determining the game mode. In the mode storage area, any value of "11" corresponding to "normal mode", "21" corresponding to "time saving A mode", and "31" corresponding to "time saving B mode" is stored.

Correspondingly, the RAM 553 of the sub-controller 262 is also provided with a mode storage area that the sub-controller 262 refers to when determining the game mode. The game mode information set in the main controller 261 is output to the sub-controller 262 in the next external output process (see step SC201) each time the game mode is switched and set.

At Step SC509 subsequent to Step SC508, a preceding command setting process is performed. Note that this leading command includes variation information (information used to determine the content of the variation display) indicating the results of the second correctness determination process, the second type determination process, and the second variation time determination process. , information indicating whether the variation information is triggered by entering the first start prize winning portion 33WA or the second start prize winning portion 33WB, game mode information for specifying the game mode at the start of the second variable display etc., and is output to the sub-controller 262 in the next external output process (see step SC201).

After the processing of step SC509, or when step SC501 or step SC502 makes a negative determination, in step SC510, the first start winning switch determines whether or not the game ball has won the first start winning section 33WA. 224a is used for determination. If a negative determination is made at step SC510, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step SC510, in step SC511, the first counting function unit, which is a second counting function unit that counts the number of holdings of the first variable display triggered by the entry of the ball into the first start winning unit 33WA. It is determined whether or not the value of the pending counter Na is less than the upper limit ("4" in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made at step SC511, this process is terminated. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step SC511, the process proceeds to step SC512, and the first suspension counter Na is incremented by one.

In the following step SC513, addition display processing of the first holding display device 46A (first holding lamp) corresponding to the increase by one in the holding number of the first variable display, which is numerical information (specific numerical information), is performed. That is, when both the left and right first reservation lamps are in the off state, the left first reservation lamp is turned on, the left first reservation lamp is in the on state, and the right first reservation lamp is in the off state. If it is, both the left and right first reservation lamps are lit, and if both the left and right first reservation lamps are in the lighting state, the left first reservation lamp is lit while the right first reservation lamp is lit. is blinked, and when the first reservation lamp on the left side is in a blinking state and the first reservation lamp on the right side is in a lighting state, processing for blinking both the first reservation lamps on the left and right is performed.

After step SC513, in the processing of step SC514, which is the information setting function unit, the values of the hit/fail random number counter CC1, the type determination counter CC2, the variation selection counter CC3, and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are set to the first special variation hold. Store in the empty reserved areas (win/fail random number storage area, winning type random number storage area, reach random number storage area, and first and second variation type random number storage areas). At the same time, based on the current values of the variation number counters A and B, etc., the game mode when this first variation display is started is specified, and the game mode information is stored in the mode storage area. After step SC514, the process proceeds to step SC515.

In step SC515, a first success/failure determination process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the success/failure random number counter CC1 newly stored in the first special change reservation area is a value corresponding to a big hit.

Here, the details of the first suitability determination process in step SC515 will be described with reference to FIG. 128(a).

First, in step SC5101, the value of the success/failure random number counter CC1 newly stored in the first special change holding area is changed to values corresponding to the big hits "7", "207", " 407”. When an affirmative determination is made in step SC5101, in step SC5102, after turning on the jackpot schedule flag of the corresponding reservation area among the first special change reservation areas, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SC5101, this processing ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 127, in step SC516 following step SC515, when it is determined that the value of the success/failure random number counter CC1 is a value corresponding to the big hit in step SC515, it is newly stored in the first special change reservation area. A first type determination process for determining the jackpot type is performed based on the value of the type determination counter CC2.

Here, the first type determination processing in step SC516 will be described with reference to FIG. 129(a). First, in step SC5201, it is determined whether or not the big hit schedule flag is set to ON in the first propriety determination process performed immediately before. If a negative determination is made in step SC5201, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the determination in step SC5201 is affirmative, in step SC5202, the first type determination table is considered, and the value of the type determination counter CC2 newly stored in the first special change reservation area is "15R jackpot". matches the value "0" corresponding to . When an affirmative determination is made in step SC5202, after turning on the 15R jackpot flag in step SC5203, this process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SC5202, the 4R jackpot flag is turned on in step SC5204, and this process ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 127, in step SC517 following step SC516, when it is determined that the value of the success/failure random number counter CC1 is not a value corresponding to the jackpot in step SC515 (is out), a new first special variation Based on the value of the variation selection counter CC3 stored in the reservation area, reach determination processing for determining the type of reach is performed.

Here, the reach determination processing of step SC517 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step SC5401, it is determined whether or not the big hit schedule flag is set in the first propriety determination process performed immediately before. If an affirmative determination is made in step SC5401, this process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SC5401, that is, if it is out, in step SC5402, the reach determination table is considered, and the value of the variation selection counter CC3 newly stored in the special variation reservation area is " It is determined whether or not it matches with either of the values "0, 1" corresponding to the front-rear out-of-reach reach. If the determination in step SC5402 is affirmative, in step SC5403 the front-rear flag indicating the occurrence of front-rear deviating reach is turned on, and then this process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SC5402, in step SC5404, the reach determination table is taken into account, and the value of the variation selection counter CC3 newly stored in the special variation reservation area corresponds to "reach other than front and rear deviation". It determines whether or not it matches any of the values "2 to 21". If an affirmative determination is made at Step SC5404, the flag other than before and after is turned on at Step SC5405, after which this process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step SC5404, that is, if the variable display ends without going through the reach state, that is, "completely out", this process ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 127, in step SC518 subsequent to step SC517, first variation time determination processing for determining the first variation time of the first variation display is performed. That is, when the game mode at the start of the first fluctuation fluctuation display is the "normal mode", the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 is determined by referring to the first normal fluctuation time determination table for the "normal mode". The first variation time is grasped based on. When the game mode at the start of the first fluctuation fluctuation display is "time reduction A mode", the first reduction fluctuation time determination table for "time reduction A mode" is referred to, and the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 Based on this, the first fluctuation time is grasped. When the game mode at the start of the first fluctuation fluctuation display is "time saving B mode", the first shortened fluctuation time determination table for "time saving B mode" is referred to, and the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 Based on this, the first fluctuation time is grasped. The variable time grasped here is stored in the corresponding reservation area of the first special variable reservation area. However, the value of the first variation type counter CS1 in the same reservation area is not erased here.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first normal variable time determination table for the above-described "normal mode", the first shortened variable time determination table for "time saving A mode", and the first for "time saving B mode" As the shortened fluctuation time determination tables, there are provided tables for "big win", "front and back out reach", "out and back reach", and "complete loss", respectively. Also, for example, regarding the variable time determination table for "for complete failure", "for 1 and 2 holds (normal variable time)", "for 3 holds (shortened variable time)", "for 4 holds" (Shortened variable time)”, etc., and changes the variable time determination table (variable time) to be referred to according to the number of suspensions of the variable display stored in the first special variable storage area. good too. As a result, in a state in which the reserved and stored first variable displays are being sequentially executed, the first variable display for the time of failure is displayed according to the number of the first variable displays scheduled to be executed, which are reserved and stored at that point in time. You can set the shortened time of Here, for example, in a situation in which a variable time determination table for "for 4 pending" is referred to when executing a predetermined variable display, if the variable display is a variable display corresponding to various hits such as a big win , may be configured to give priority to the variable time determination table for "for big win".

After step SC518, in step SC519, the preceding command is set, and this process ends. Note that this leading command includes variation information (used to determine the contents of the variation display) indicating the results of the first match determination process, the first type determination process, the reach determination process, and the first variation time determination process. information), information indicating whether the variation information is triggered by entering the first start prize winning portion 33WA or the second start prize winning portion 33WB, and to specify the game mode at the start of the first change display game mode information, etc., and is output to the sub-controller 262 in the next external output process (see step SC201).

In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start winning portion 33WA or the second start winning portion 33WB, the value of the success/failure random number counter CC1 is directly stored in the special change holding area, and then the success/failure determination is performed. Although it is configured to execute processing and the like, it is not particularly limited to such a configuration. For example, when the value of the success/failure random number counter CC1 is acquired, a temporary storage area is provided to temporarily store these counter values. You may adopt the structure which stores in the reservation area of the corresponding special variable reservation area.

Next, the through gate passage processing of step SC305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step SC601, whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 is determined based on the detection information of the through gate switch 225. FIG. If a negative determination is made in step SC601, this process ends.

On the other hand, if affirmative determination is made in step SC601, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, in step SC602, the number of suspensions of variable display performed by the normal symbol display device 41 is counted. It is determined whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made here, the processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC602, that is, if it is confirmed that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, and if the value of the normal reservation counter Nc is <4, the process proceeds to step SC603, and the normal reservation counter Increment Nc by one.

Further, in the following step SC604, addition display processing of the normal reservation display device 44 (normal reservation lamp) corresponding to the increase by one in the number of suspensions of variable display in the normal symbol display device 41 is performed. In other words, if both the left and right normal holding lamps are off, the left normal holding lamp is turned on, and if the left normal holding lamp is on and the right normal holding lamp is off. When both the left and right normal hold lamps are lit, the left normal hold lamp is blinked while the right normal hold lamp is lit, and the left normal hold lamp is lit. When the lamp is in a flashing state and the right normal holding lamp is in a lighting state, a process for flashing both the left and right normal holding lamps is performed.

After step SC604, in step SC605, a random number related to the success or failure is obtained. Specifically, the value of the normal symbol random number counter CC4 updated in the random number update process of step SC303 is stored in the first area of the free storage areas of the normal fluctuation reservation area of the RAM503. After that, the through gate passage processing ends.

Next, the firing permission command setting process of step SC306 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step SC701, it is determined whether or not the firing permission flag indicating that the firing status signal is being received from the firing control circuit 312 is set to ON. The firing state signal is the firing control circuit 312 when the firing control circuit 312 receives the touch signal from the handle 18, the firing switch signal, and the CR unit connection signal from the dispensing control device 311. to the main controller 261.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SC701, it is determined in step SC702 whether or not a firing status signal has been received. If a negative determination is made in step SC702, the firing permission flag is turned off in step SC703, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC702, it is determined in step SC704 whether or not the value of the shooting timer used to measure the game ball shooting interval is "0". If a negative determination is made in step SC704, the value of the firing timer is decremented by 1 in step SC707, and then this process ends.

On the other hand, if the determination in step SC704 is affirmative, the main controller 261 transmits a launch permission signal to the launch control circuit 312 in step SC705. In subsequent Step SC706, the launch permission flag is turned off. After step SC706, this processing ends.

If a negative determination is made in step SC701, it is determined in step SC708 whether or not a firing status signal has been received. If a negative determination is made in step SC708, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC708, the firing permission flag is set to ON in step SC709.

In the subsequent step SC710, a ball feed signal is transmitted to the launch control circuit 312. Further, in Step SC711, the firing timer is set to "300" corresponding to 0.6 seconds. As a result, after the game ball is surely set at the shooting position by the ball feeding device 63, the game ball is shot by the shooting device 60, and the main controller 261 is sent from the shooting control circuit 312 to the shooting state. While the signal is being received, the main controller 261 transmits a launch permission signal at intervals of 0.6 seconds, and game balls are launched from the launcher 60 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. After step SC711, this processing ends.

In addition, when the firing control circuit 312 receives a firing permission signal from the main controller 261, it receives all of the touch signal, the firing switch signal, and the CR unit connection signal from the handle 18 and the dispensing control device 311. It is determined whether or not the game ball is being played, and if the determination is affirmative, the shooting device 60 (shooting solenoid) is driven and shooting processing for shooting the game ball is performed. In addition, the shooting control circuit 312 performs adjustment control of the shooting device 60 regarding the shooting strength (shooting speed) of the game ball based on the dial position signal. As a result, the game ball is launched by the shooting device 60 with the adjusted strength.

Further, when the shooting control circuit 312 receives a ball feed signal from the main controller 261, the game ball is set at the shooting position where the game ball is shot by the shooting device 60 of the shooting rail 61. When it is confirmed that the game ball is not set at the shooting position, the ball feeding device 63 is driven to set the game ball at the shooting position. Carry out ball feed processing.

FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing, and this processing is executed by the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt, the state of the main controller 261 at the time of power failure is stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. FIG.

That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like, a power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main controller 261. FIG. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control being executed and starts NMI interrupt processing, and in step SC401 stores the power-off occurrence information in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 as power-off occurrence information setting, and starts the NMI interrupt processing. finish.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 311 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the backup area 513 a of the RAM 513 by such NMI interrupt. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 interrupts the control being executed. to start NMI interrupt processing. The contents are as described above.

Next, the flow of main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This main process is activated upon resetting when the power is turned on.

First, in step SC101, initial setting processing is executed upon power-on. Specifically, in order to set a predetermined value in the stack pointer and wait for the sub-side control devices (sub-control device 262, payout control device 311, etc.) to become operable, for example, 1 Execute wait processing for about a second. In the following step SC102, RAM access is permitted.

After that, data backup processing is executed for the RAM 503 in the CPU 501 . That is, in step SC103, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply circuit 313 of the power/launch control device 310 is pressed (ON), and if it is pressed, the backup data is cleared (deleted). Therefore, the process proceeds to step SC112. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 has not been pressed, it is determined in the next step SC104 whether or not power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 or not. Here, if it is not set, backup data is not stored, so the process proceeds to step SC112 in this case as well. If power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a, the RAM determination value is calculated in step SC105, and in subsequent step SC106, it is determined whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value saved at the time of power failure. , that is, determine the validity of the backup. If the RAM determination value calculated here does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power was turned off, the backed-up data is destroyed, and in this case also the process proceeds to step SC112.

In the processing of step SC112, an initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the sub-controller 262, the payout controller 311, and the like. Thereafter, the process proceeds to RAM initialization processing (step SC113, etc.). Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 503 . Instead of using this RAM determination value, it is also possible to determine the validity of the backup based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 503 is correctly saved.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is powered on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323 when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is ON, the process proceeds to the RAM initialization process (step SC113, etc.). Similarly, when power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process of the RAM 503 (step SC113, etc.) is similarly performed. That is, in step SC113, the used area of RAM 503 is cleared to 0, and in subsequent step SC114, the initial value of RAM 503 is set. After that, at step SC111, the interrupt permission is set, and the process proceeds to normal processing, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed (step SC103: NO), the condition is that power failure occurrence information is set and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. Then, the power recovery process (power recovery process) is executed. That is, at step SC107, the stack pointer before power-off is restored, and at step SC108, the power-off occurrence information is cleared.

In step SC109, a command is transmitted to return the sub-side control device to the gaming state at the time of power-off. At step SC110, the used register is restored from the backup area 503a of the RAM503. After that, at step SC111, the interrupt permission is set, and the process proceeds to normal processing, which will be described later.

Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Main processing of the game is executed in this normal processing. As an overview, the processing of steps SC201 to SC211 is executed as periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter updating processing of steps SC212 and SC213 is executed during the remaining time.

First, in step SC201, a control signal based on the setting contents of the special symbol display devices 43A, 43B, the second start winning section 33WB, etc., which have been updated in the previous normal processing, is transmitted to each device, or output data such as a command is transmitted. Execute external output processing such as sending to each control device on the sub side.

For example, when starting the variable display on the special symbol display devices 43A and 43B, a variation pattern command is transmitted to the sub-control device 262 in order to start the effect by the variable display of the decorative symbols on the effect display device 42 or the like. The sub-control device 262 that has input the variation pattern command determines the display mode (variation time, effect pattern, etc.) of the effect display device 42 based on such various commands, and displays the display mode on the effect display device 42. to the display control device 45.

The variation pattern command includes information specifying variation patterns of decorative symbols such as normal reach, super reach, and premium reach. On the other hand, the sub-controller 262 stores the relationship between these variation pattern commands and the variation patterns of the decorative symbols in the form of a table. Then, the sub-control device 262 determines the variation pattern of the decorative pattern and the like based on the variation pattern command, and controls the display control device 45, voice, and the like.

Here, the variation pattern of the decorative design will be described. "Normal reach" is a reach pattern in which no special effects are displayed other than the variable display of decorative patterns. "Super ready-to-win" is a ready-to-win pattern in which a character or the like is displayed on the effect display device 42 in addition to the decorative patterns while the decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner (after the ready-to-win state is established), thereby giving the player a sense of expectation. is. "Premium reach" is a production mode that can be derived only when the jackpot state occurs, and during the variable display of the decorative pattern (after the reach state is established), in addition to the decorative pattern, a character with a pattern different from the super reach is displayed, and this is a reach pattern that gives the player a sense of expectation. In addition, "Completely out" is a variation pattern in which the variation display of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed without reaching any of the ready-to-win states.

In addition, the sub-control device 262 determines the stop pattern (combination of stop patterns) of the variable display of the decorative patterns in the effect display device 42 based on the variation pattern and the variation time information included in the variation pattern command. , stop display after the fluctuation time has elapsed. In other words, if you win a jackpot (“15R jackpot”, “8R jackpot”, “4R jackpot”), a combination of decorative patterns consisting of double eyes of the same number from 1 to 9 (a combination of jackpot patterns ) to stop the variable display.

The combination of front-rear out-of-order symbols corresponds to "front-rear out-of-rear reach" in which the final stop symbol is shifted forward and backward from the ready-to-win symbol by one and stops after the occurrence of ready-to-win. The combination of symbols other than front-rear deviation corresponds to "reach other than front-rear deviation" in which the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the front and back of the ready-to-win pattern after the occurrence of the ready-to-win. A combination of completely missing symbols corresponds to "completely missing" in which even reach does not occur.

In addition, in the main controller 261, a pattern command designating any one of a combination of jackpot symbols, a combination of front and rear missing symbols, a combination of symbols other than front and rear missing symbols, and a combination of completely missing symbols is set and varied. It may be configured to output to the sub-controller 262 together with the pattern command.

Returning to the description of FIG. 124, at step SC202, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated. More specifically, like the other counters, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach the upper limit values (255 and 31 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0. do. Then, the updated values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 503. FIG.

In the following step SC203, the prize ball count signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, at step SC204, the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

After that, in step SC205, a second special display control process is executed. In this process, control of the second special symbol display device 43B is performed, determination of various hits (jackpot, small hit, time saving hit), and setting of variable display in the second special symbol display device 43B and effect display device 42. etc. The details of this second special display control process will be described later.

Furthermore, in step SC206, a first special display control process is executed. In this process, the control related to the first special symbol display device 43A is performed, and the determination of the big hit and the variation display in the first special symbol display device 43A and the effect display device 42 (the variation pattern of the decorative symbol in the effect display device 42). settings, etc. Details of the first special display control process will be described later.

At step SC207, a variable winning device control process is executed. In this process, control regarding the first variable winning device 32A and the second variable winning device 32B is performed. The details of the variable winning device control process will be described later.

At step SC208, normal display control processing is executed. In this process, control relating to the normal symbol display device 41 is performed. The details of this normal display control process will be described later.

At step SC209, a starting winning section control process is executed. In this process, the control relating to the second starting winning section 33WB having the blade member 33WBb that opens and closes is performed. The details of this starting winning section control process will be described later.

After that, in step SC210, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 or not. Here, if power failure occurrence information is not set in the backup area 503a, it is checked in step SC211 whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has come, that is, a predetermined time (4 msec in this example) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal process. ) has passed. Then, if the predetermined time has already passed, the process proceeds to step SC201, and the processes after step SC201 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not passed since the start of the previous normal processing, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal processing. Repeat execution (step SC212, step SC213).

That is, in step SC212, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (599 in this example).

Further, in step SC213, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated (similar to step SC202). Specifically, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum values (255 and 31 in this example). Then, the changed values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM503.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps SC201 to SC210 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the success/failure random number counter CC1) can be randomly updated, and similarly fluctuates. The type counters CS1 and CS2 can also be randomly updated.

Also, if the power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step SC210: YES), it means that the power has been shut off, so the processes from step SC214 onward are executed as power failure processing at the time of power failure. will be In the power failure process, first, in step SC214, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited. In step SC215, the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 are saved in the stack area. memorize to

After that, in step SC217, a power cutoff notification command indicating that the power has been cut off is transmitted to other control devices (payout control device 311, etc.). Then, in step SC218, the RAM judgment value is calculated and stored in the backup area 503a. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of RAM 503 . After that, RAM access is prohibited in step SC219, and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed.

It should be noted that the process of step SC210 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed at steps SC201 to SC209, or at the end of one cycle of the processes at steps SC212 and SC213 performed within the remaining time. It is executed at different times. Therefore, in the normal processing of the main controller 261, since information on occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the end of each processing, the amount of data to be stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is smaller than when each processing is in progress. and can be easily memorized. In addition, when returning to the state before the power shutdown, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, it can be easily restored, and the processing load on the main controller 261 can be reduced. . Furthermore, since the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited before data is stored (step SC214), it is possible to prevent the data from being changed when the power is cut off, and the state before the power cut-off can be reliably stored. .

Next, the first special display control processing of step SC206 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step SC800, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable interval timer for measuring the remaining time of the variable interval set after the first variable display of the first special symbol display device 43A is "0". .

If the determination in step SC800 is negative, that is, if it is within the period of the variable interval, in step SC819 the value of the variable interval timer is decremented, and then this process ends. That is, for example, if the variable interval is set to 1 second (1000 msec) and the variable interval timer is set to "249 ("250" in the case of a configuration in which step SC819 is performed before step SC800)", In this process, the value of the variable interval timer is decremented by "1" every 4 msec, and becomes "0" after 1 second.

On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step SC800, that is, if it is not a variable interval, in step SC801, the hit situation storage area, which will be described later in detail, is referred to, and the state other than the big hit state and the small hit state is currently selected. determine whether there is

It should be noted that during the jackpot state, the first special symbol display device 43A or the second special symbol display device 43B stop displaying the display mode corresponding to the jackpot until the first variable winning device 32A is opened. an opening period between, a round period in which the first variable winning device 32A is open, an interval period in which the first variable winning device 32A is closed between the round periods, and after the final round , an ending period until the first special symbol display device 43A or the second special symbol display device 43B can start the variable display.

In addition, the small win state includes a round period in which the second variable prize winning device 32B is open and an interval period in which the second variable prize winning device 32B is closed between the round periods. be

In the winning state storage area of the present embodiment, "0" is stored in states other than the big win state and the small win state, and in the big win state, "1" is stored during the opening period and the interval period, and "1" is stored during the round period. "2" is stored when it is the ending period, and "3" is stored when it is the ending period. In the small win state, "4" is stored in the first round, "5" is stored in the interval period after the first round, and "6" is stored in the second round. That is, in the step SC801, it is determined whether or not "0" is stored in the win situation storage area, and it is determined whether or not the game is in a big win state or a small win state.

If a negative determination is made in step SC801, that is, if the game is in the big hit state or the small hit state, the process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step SC801, in step SC802, whether or not the special figure 2 displaying flag indicating that the second variation display is being performed in the second special symbol display device 43B is set on. determine. If an affirmative determination is made in step SC802, this process is terminated.

When a negative determination is made in step SC802, the process proceeds to step SC803, and a second suspension counter Nb that counts the number of suspensions of the second variable display triggered by the ball entering the second start prize winning section 33WB is greater than 0. or not.

When the negative determination is made in step SC803, in step SC804, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 displaying flag indicating that the first variable display is being performed in the first special symbol display device 43A is set to ON. do.

If a negative determination is made in step SC804, i.e., it is not in the jackpot state or the small hit state, nor is it in the first fluctuation display or the second fluctuation display, and if no second fluctuation display is retained and stored, step Proceeding to SC805, it is determined whether or not the first suspension counter Na that counts the number of suspensions of the first variable display triggered by the entry of the ball into the first starting prize winning section 33WA is greater than zero.

In other words, when the second special symbol display device 43B is in the middle of the second variation display, or when even one second variation display is retained and stored, the first special symbol display device 43A newly displays the second It is configured so that the 1-variation display cannot be started.

Then, when an affirmative determination is made in step SC805, 1 is decremented from the first suspension counter Na in the processing of step SC806 serving as an update function unit or a subtraction function unit. In subsequent step SC807, a process of shifting the data stored in the first special change reservation area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth reservation areas of the first special variable reservation area to the execution area side. The data in each area is shifted in the following order: area→reserved first area, reserved third area→reserved second area, reserved fourth area→reserved third area, and so on.

After step SC807, in step SC808, subtraction display processing of the first suspension display device 46A (first suspension lamp) corresponding to the number of suspensions of the first variable display being decreased by one is performed. That is, when both the left and right first reservation lamps are in a blinking state, the right first reservation lamp is turned on while the left first reservation lamp is kept blinking, and the left first reservation lamp is in a blinking state. When the right first reservation lamp is lit, both the left and right first reservation lamps are lit, and when both the left and right first reservation lamps are lit, the left first reservation lamp is lit. The first reservation lamp on the right side is turned off while the is lit, and when the first reservation lamp on the left side is on and the first reservation lamp on the right side is off, both the first reservation lamps on the left and right are turned off. process to make it work. After step SC808, the first variable display setting process is performed in step SC809, and then this process ends.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step SC805, in step SC811, both the first special symbol display device 43A and the second special symbol display device 43B are in a variable standby state in which variable display is not performed. Standby display setting (sub control device 262, etc.), this processing ends.

In other words, the first special symbol display device 43A and the second special symbol display device 43B of the present embodiment are maintained after the fluctuation is stopped (in a manner indicating the result of the winning lottery) during the fluctuation interval. However, when the variable interval ends, the display mode is switched to indicate the variable standby state.

It should be noted that there are a first standby display mode and a second standby display mode in the display mode indicating that the effect display device 42 is in the variable standby state. A first standby display mode in which the stop display mode of the variable display of decorative patterns is maintained almost as it is while the brightness of the effect display device 42 is maintained, and a time elapses after the first standby display mode is derived. A value corresponding to a predetermined time (for example, a value corresponding to 30 seconds) may be set for the standby time measurement timer to be measured. Furthermore, when the value of the standby time measurement timer is subtracted every predetermined time and becomes "0", the brightness of the effect display device 42 is dimmed and the display mode is simplified (for example, a decorative pattern is displayed). or not) may be configured to be the second standby display mode.

Details of the first variable display setting process in step SC809 will now be described with reference to FIG.

First, at step SC900, it is determined whether or not the value of the hit/fail random number counter CC1 stored in the execution area of the special change reservation area is "7" corresponding to a big win. In addition, in step SC900, by determining whether or not the big hit schedule flag in the execution area of the special variation reservation area is set to ON, it is also possible to determine whether or not the first variation display corresponding to the big win is performed. good.

When an affirmative determination is made in step SC900, it is determined in step SC901 whether or not "31" corresponding to "time saving B mode" is stored in the mode storage area.

If the determination in step SC901 is affirmative, in step SC902, the 15R jackpot flag is turned on in the execution area of the special variation holding area, and then the process proceeds to step SC903.

When a negative determination is made in step SC901, the process proceeds to step SC904, and it is determined whether or not the 15R jackpot flag has already been set to ON in the execution area of the special variation reservation area. At step SC904, if the determination is affirmative, the process proceeds to step SC903.

In step SC903, a 15R jackpot pattern setting process is performed. The 15R big hit pattern setting process is a process for executing the variation display and the effect display corresponding to the variation information stored in the execution area in the first special symbol display device 43A and the effect display device 42 (various patterns described later The same applies to the setting process). Here, with reference to the variation pattern table corresponding to the 15R jackpot, the variation pattern of the first special symbol display device 43A and the effect display device 42 (variation display time, stop mode, effect pattern, etc.) is determined, and the variation pattern command settings, etc.

Specifically, in the 15R jackpot pattern setting process of step SC903 (the same applies to various pattern setting processes of steps SC905, SC907, SC909, and SC910 to be described later), first, the mode storage area is checked to grasp the game mode. Here, when "11" corresponding to "normal mode" is stored in the mode storage area, the first variable time determination table referred to when setting the first variable time corresponds to the pattern setting process. The first normal fluctuation time determination table for the "normal mode" is selected. Further, when "21" corresponding to "time saving A mode" is stored, the first shortened variable time determination table for "time saving A mode" corresponding to the pattern setting process is selected. When "31" corresponding to "time saving B mode" is stored, the first shortened variable time determination table for "time saving B mode" corresponding to the pattern setting process is selected.

Then, referring to the selected first variation time determination table, the first variation time is determined based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the special variation reservation area. The determined first variation time is stored in association with the execution area of the special variation reservation area.

Further, a reach pattern is determined based on the first fluctuation time and the fluctuation pattern. For example, the first normal variation time determination table for the jackpot is referenced, and when the first variation time is determined to be 22 seconds, normal reach is set, and when it is determined to be 30 seconds or 35 seconds, super reach is set. If set and determined to be 40 seconds then premium reach is set.

Then, various information including the first variation display, the 15R jackpot, the determined reach pattern, game mode information, and variation time are set in the variation pattern command. Also, in the 15R jackpot pattern setting process, the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag indicating that the first fluctuation display corresponding to the jackpot is being performed is set to ON.

Further, in this embodiment, the reach pattern of the effect display device 42 is determined by the main controller 261 side, but in order to reduce the load on the main controller 261, the reach pattern is not determined by the main controller 261, Information on whether the variation pattern command is the first variation display or the second variation display, information indicating the variation pattern (15R jackpot, 8R jackpot, 4R jackpot, small hit, front and rear out reach, front and back out reach, It may be configured to include information indicating whether it is completely out of line, information indicating the fluctuation time, etc., and the reach pattern of the effect display device 42 may be determined on the sub-controller 262 side.

After step SC903, in step SC911, the special figure 1 displaying flag indicating that the first variation display is being performed in the first special symbol display device 43A is set to ON, and in step SC912, the remaining time of the first variation display is measured. After setting the value corresponding to the first variable time for the special figure 1 display timer, this process is terminated.

Moreover, when a negative determination is made in step SC904, 4R jackpot pattern setting processing is performed in step SC905. Here, with reference to the variation pattern table corresponding to the 4R jackpot, the variation pattern of the first special symbol display device 43A and the effect display device 42 (variation display time, stop mode, effect pattern, etc.) is determined, and the variation pattern command settings, etc. Also, in the 4R jackpot pattern setting process, the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag indicating that the first fluctuation display corresponding to the jackpot is being performed is set to ON.

After step SC905, in step SC911, the special figure 1 displaying flag is set to ON, and in step SC912, the value corresponding to the first variable time is set for the special figure 1 display timer, and this process ends .

Also, if a negative determination is made in step SC900, then in step SC906, the execution area of the special variation holding area is taken into consideration, and it is determined whether or not the front/rear flag (see reach determination processing in FIG. 130) is on. If an affirmative determination is made in step SC906, that is, if it is "front-back reach", step SC907 performs front-back reach pattern setting processing (variation pattern command setting, etc.), then step SC911 and step SC912. After that, the process ends.

Also, if a negative determination is made in step SC906, then in step SC908, the execution area of the special change reservation area is taken into consideration, and it is determined whether or not the flag other than before and after is on. If the affirmative determination is made in step SC908, that is, if it is "reach other than front and rear out", reach pattern setting processing other than front and rear in step SC909 (setting of variation pattern command, etc.) After performing step SC911, step After passing through SC912, this process ends.

In addition, if the determination in step SC908 is negative, that is, if it is "completely out", in step SC910 the deviation variation pattern setting process (variation pattern command setting, etc.) is performed, and then steps SC911 and SC912 are performed. After that, the process ends.

In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, based on the ball entering the first starting prize winning section 33WA, the first winning lottery (big winning lottery) is performed to determine whether or not the jackpot will be won. The second winning lottery (small winning lottery) for determining whether or not and the third winning lottery (reducing working hours winning lottery) for determining whether or not to win a time saving lottery are not performed.

Returning to the description of FIG. 133, when the affirmative determination is made in step SC804, that is, when the first variable display is in progress, the process proceeds to step SC812 to perform subtraction processing of the special figure 1 display timer. Every time this process is performed once, the value of the special figure 1 display timer is subtracted by 4 msec. For example, if the variation time is 6 seconds (6000msec), "1500" is set for the special figure 1 display timer, and 1 is subtracted every 4msec.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step SC813, and it is determined whether or not the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed by taking into consideration the value of the special figure 1 display timer after the above subtraction. At this time, step SC813 is affirmatively determined when the value of the special figure 1 display timer becomes "0" when the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed.

When a negative determination is made in step SC813, in step SC818, switching display setting is performed to continue switching display (variation display) of the first special symbol display device 43A. In addition, based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, in the external output processing in the next normal processing, a control signal for switching display is output to the first special symbol display device 43A. Thereby, the timing of the first special display control process, that is, switching display (variation display) of the first special symbol display device 43A is realized every 4 ms. After step SC818, the process ends.

On the other hand, when the affirmative determination is made in step SC813, the special figure 1 displaying flag is turned off in step SC814, and the special figure 1 stop display setting for performing stop display in the first special symbol display device 43A in step SC815 I do. Based on the setting contents of this special figure 1 stop display setting, in the external output process in the next normal process, a control signal for performing stop display is output to the first special symbol display device 43A. That is, in the first special symbol display device 43A, the mode corresponding to each jackpot type, loss, etc. set in the first variable display setting process is stopped and displayed.

Further, after step SC815, in step SC816, the sub-control device 262, to perform the stop display of the effect display device 42 special figure 1 stop command is set. As a result, the stop timings of the first special symbol display device 43A and the effect display device 42 are reliably synchronized. However, since the stop mode of the effect display device 42 has already been determined by the sub-controller 262 according to the variation pattern command output at the start of the variable display, there is no need to add information about the stop mode of the effect display device 42 again. do not have. Also, although it will be repeated, the main display is the stop display by the special design display devices 43A and 43B, and the display of the decorative design by the effect display device 42 is only an auxiliary one (for effect).

Subsequently, in step SC817, after performing the special figure 1 discrimination information setting process for performing the initial setting of the state and the switching setting of the game mode, this process is terminated.

Here, the special figure 1 discrimination information setting process of step SC817 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step SC1001, with reference to the execution area of the special variation reservation area, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot variation flag is set to ON.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SC1001, the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is turned off in step SC1002, and the jackpot medium flag (stored in the first special fluctuation holding area Turn on the special figure 1 jackpot medium flag) that indicates that the jackpot has been hit in the first variation display.

Furthermore, in step SC1004, various A value corresponding to the jackpot flag ("15" corresponding to the 15R jackpot or "4" corresponding to the 4R jackpot) is set.

In the following step SC1005, "1" is set in the win situation storage area. Furthermore, in step SC1006, a predetermined value (in this embodiment, the value "2000" corresponding to the opening period of 8 seconds is set for the special variable timer used for control during the winning state (opening/closing control of the first variable prize winning device 32A). ). Subsequently, in step SC1007, "8" indicating the maximum number of winning balls per round is set to the first winning counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the first variable winning device 32A. ”.

It should be noted that the value of the first winning counter determines whether or not a ball has entered the first variable winning device 32A during the switch read processing (see FIG. 125) of the timer interrupt processing, based on the detection information of the big winning opening count switch 222. Then, when it is determined that the ball has entered the first variable winning device 32A, 1 is subtracted.

Then, in step SC1008, after setting an opening command for notifying the start of the winning state to the sub-controller 262, this processing ends. The opening command includes information on the type of win, and the sub-control device 262 can grasp the total number of rounds in the win state.

If a negative determination is made in step SC1001, a value corresponding to a variable interval (for example, 1 second) is set in the variable interval timer in step SC1013. In addition, in the effect display device 42, basically, the variable display of the decorative design is stopped and displayed at the timing of the stop display of the variable display of the special design display devices 43A and 43B, and until the fluctuation interval ends (the next special design display device Until the variable display of 43A and 43B is started), the decorative symbols that are stopped are continuously displayed. Then, when the variable interval is over and the variable display is reserved and stored, the variable display on the special symbol display devices 43A and 43B and the variable display on the effect display device 42 are started at the same time. On the other hand, when the variable display is not retained and stored even after the variable interval is over, the stop pattern in the performance display device 42 continues to be derived for a while, and then switched to a game standby display (demonstration screen display).

After step SC1013, in step SC1014, it is determined whether or not "21" is stored in the mode storage area, that is, whether or not the "time saving A mode" is in progress.

If the determination in step SC1014 is affirmative, the value of the first variation counter A is subtracted by 1 in step SC1015. The first fluctuation counter A is for measuring the duration of the "time saving A mode" (the number of fluctuations remaining until reaching the upper limit).

In addition, in this embodiment, as will be described later, after the end of all types of jackpots, the "time saving A mode" is given for a period of one or seven times of fluctuation display, so at the end of the jackpot, the first fluctuation counter "1" or "7" is set for A.

In subsequent step SC1016, it is determined whether or not the value of the first variation counter A is "0". If a negative determination is made in step SC1016, the process ends. On the other hand, if the determination in step SC1016 is affirmative, in step SC1017, "11" indicating "normal mode" is set in the mode storage area. That is, when the total number of execution times of the first variation display and the second variation display performed in the first special symbol display device 43A and the second special symbol display device 43B becomes "1 time" or "7 times" "Time-saving A mode" ends, and the mode shifts to "Normal mode".

After step SC1017, in step SC1018, a time saving A mode end command is set to inform the sub-control device 262 of the transition to the "normal mode" (end of the "time saving A mode"). It is good also as a structure which continues and performs a rush stage production|presentation and a battle stage production|presentation during the period when "time saving A mode" is provided by the function of the sub-control device 262 which is a continuation function part. After that, this process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step SC1014, it is determined in step SC1019 whether or not "31" is stored in the mode storage area, that is, whether or not the "time saving B mode" is in progress.

If the determination in step SC1019 is affirmative, the value of the second variation counter B is decremented by 1 in step SC1020. The second fluctuation number counter B is for measuring the duration of the "time saving B mode" (the number of fluctuations remaining until reaching the upper limit).

In addition, in the present embodiment, when a time saving hit occurs, the “time saving B mode” is given for a period of “30 times”, “40 times” or “50 times” for the variable display, so the time saving per Sometimes, "30", "40" or "50" is set for the second variation counter B as specific numerical information. Such a function constitutes the information setting function part in this embodiment.

In subsequent Step SC1021, it is determined whether or not the value of the second variation counter B is "0". If a negative determination is made in step SC1021, this process ends. On the other hand, if the determination in step SC1021 is affirmative, in step SC1022, "11" indicating "normal mode" is set in the mode storage area. That is, the total number of executions of the first variation display and the second variation display performed in the first special symbol display device 43A and the second special symbol display device 43B is "30 times", "40 times" or "50 times". When it becomes, "time saving B mode" ends and it shifts to "normal mode".

After step SC1022, in step SC1023, to the sub-control device 262 after setting the time saving B mode end command notifying the transition to "normal mode" (end of "time saving B mode"), this process ends do.

Next, the second special display control process (step SC205) of the normal process (see FIG. 124) will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, in this embodiment, the second special symbol display device 43B is configured so that the variation interval of the second variation display is not set. Of course, the configuration may be such that the variation interval of the second variation display is set.

First, in step SC1601, it is determined whether or not the value of the hit status storage area is "0", that is, whether or not the state is other than the big win state and the small win state. If a negative determination is made in step SC1601, that is, if the game is in the big hit state or the small hit state, the process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step SC1601, in step SC1603, whether the special figure 2 displaying flag indicating that the second variation display is being performed in the second special symbol display device 43B is set to ON. determine.

When a negative determination is made in step SC1603, that is, when it is not in the big win state or the small win state, and when it is not in the second fluctuation display, the process proceeds to step SC1604, and is triggered by the ball entering the second start prize winning section 33WB. It is determined whether or not a second suspension counter Nb that counts the number of suspensions of the second variable display is greater than zero. In other words, the display effect related to the second variable display is continuously performed during the predetermined state until the value of the second suspension counter Nb is decremented and becomes "0". If a negative determination is made at step SC1604, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the determination in step SC1604 is affirmative, 1 is subtracted from the second suspension counter Nb in the processing of step SC1605, which serves as an update function unit or a subtraction function unit. In subsequent step SC1606, a process of shifting the data stored in the second special change reservation area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth reservation areas of the second special variable reservation area to the execution area side. The data in each area is shifted in the following order: area→reserved first area, reserved third area→reserved second area, reserved fourth area→reserved third area, and so on.

After step SC1606, in step SC1607, subtraction display processing of the second suspension display device 46B (second suspension lamp) corresponding to the number of suspensions of the second variable display being decreased by one is performed. In other words, a process for extinguishing the second reservation lamp is performed. After step SC1607, the second variable display setting process is performed in step SC1608, and then this process ends.

Details of the second variable display setting process in step SC1608 will now be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step SC1701, it is determined whether or not the value of the hit/fail random number counter CC1 stored in the execution area of the special change reservation area is "7" corresponding to the big hit. In addition, in step SC1701, by determining whether or not the big hit schedule flag in the execution area of the special change reservation area is set to ON, it is possible to determine whether or not it is the second variation display corresponding to the big hit. good.

When the affirmative determination is made in step SC1701, in step SC1702, the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation flag indicating that the second fluctuation display corresponding to the jackpot is being performed is set to ON. In the following step SC1703, it is determined whether or not the 15R jackpot flag is set to ON in the execution area of the special change reservation area. When affirmative determination is made in step SC1703, 15R jackpot pattern setting processing is performed in step SC1704.

Moreover, when a negative determination is made in step SC1703, it is determined in step SC1705 whether or not the 8R jackpot flag is set to ON. When the determination at step SC1705 is affirmative, the 8R jackpot pattern setting process is performed at step SC1706, and when the determination at step SC1705 is negative, the 4R jackpot pattern setting process is performed at step SC1707.

As in the case of the first variable display setting process, various pattern setting processes execute variable display and effect display corresponding to the variable information stored in the execution area in the second special symbol display device 43B and the effect display device 42. Here, in consideration of the variation pattern table corresponding to various hits, the variation patterns of the second special symbol display device 43B and the effect display device 42 (variation display time, stop mode, effect pattern, etc.) and set the variation pattern command.

That is, in each pattern setting process in steps SC1704, SC1706, and SC1707, as the second variation time determination table referred to when setting the second variation time, "11" corresponding to "normal mode" is stored in the mode storage area. is stored, the second normal fluctuation time determination table for the "normal mode" corresponding to the pattern setting process is selected. Further, when "21" corresponding to "time saving A mode" is stored, the second shortened variable time determination table for "time saving A mode" corresponding to the pattern setting process is selected. When "31" corresponding to "time saving B mode" is stored, the second shortened variable time determination table for "time saving B mode" corresponding to the pattern setting process is selected.

Subsequently, the selected second variation time determination table is referred to, and the second variation time is determined based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the special variation reservation area. The determined second variable time is stored in association with the execution area of the special variable reservation area.

Then, various kinds of information including the fact that it is the second variation display, the jackpot type information, the game mode information, and the variation time are set in the variation pattern command.

In this embodiment, the effect display device 42 does not perform the ready-to-win effect corresponding to the second variable display. However, as described above, since the value of the variation selection counter CC3 is stored in each reservation area of the second special variation reservation area in accordance with the winning history of the second start prize winning section 33WB, it corresponds to the first variation display. In the same way as in the case of doing, the effect display device 42 may be configured to execute the ready-to-win effect or the like corresponding to the second variable display. For example, it may be configured such that whether or not the ready-to-win effect is executed is determined by the player's selection using the operating means.

After step SC1704, step SC1706, or step SC1707, in step SC1710, the special figure 2 displaying flag indicating that the second variable display is being performed in the second special symbol display device 43B is set to ON, and in step SC1711, the second After setting a value corresponding to the second variable time for the special figure 2 display timer that measures the remaining time of the 2 variable display, this process ends.

Also, if a negative determination is made in step SC1701, it is determined in step SC1712 whether the value of the hit/fail random number counter CC1 stored in the execution area of the special variation holding area is a value corresponding to a small hit. . In addition, in step SC1712, by determining whether or not the small hit schedule flag of the execution area of the special change reservation area is set to ON, it is possible to determine whether or not the second variation display corresponding to the small hit. may be

When affirmative determination is made in step SC1712, in step SC1713, a small hit fluctuation flag indicating that the second fluctuation display corresponding to the small hit is being performed is set to ON. Then, in the following step SC1709, after performing the small hit pattern setting process (variation pattern command setting, etc.), step SC1710, step SC1711, and finish this process In the small hit pattern setting process, the second fluctuation time When "11" corresponding to "normal mode" is stored in the mode storage area as the second variation time determination table referred to during setting, the "normal mode" corresponding to the small winning pattern setting process is stored. is selected. In addition, when "21" corresponding to "time saving A mode" is stored in the mode storage area, the second shortened variation time determination table for "time saving A mode" corresponding to the small winning pattern setting process is selected. When "31" corresponding to "time saving B mode" is stored in the mode storage area, the second shortened variation time determination table for "time saving B mode" corresponding to the small hit pattern setting process is selected. be.

Then, referring to the selected second variation time determination table, the second variation time is determined based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the special variation reservation area. The determined second variable time is stored in association with the execution area of the special variable reservation area. Furthermore, the second variation display, the information indicating the variation pattern (that it is a small hit), the game mode information, and the information including the variation time are set in the variation pattern command.

Also, if a negative determination is made in step SC1712, in step SC1717, it is determined whether or not the value of the success/failure random number counter CC1 stored in the execution area of the special variation holding area is a value corresponding to time saving per. . In addition, in step SC1717, by determining whether or not the time saving schedule flag of the execution area of the special change reservation area is set to ON, it is possible to determine whether or not the second variation display corresponding to the time saving hit may be

When affirmative determination is made in step SC1717, in step SC1718, a time saving per fluctuation flag indicating that the second fluctuation display corresponding to the time saving per is being performed is set to ON. Then, in subsequent step SC1719, after performing pattern setting processing per time saving (setting of variation pattern command, etc.), through step SC1710 and step SC1711, this processing ends.

In the time saving pattern setting process, when "11" corresponding to "normal mode" is stored in the mode storage area as the second variation time determination table referred to when setting the second variation time, the time saving A second normal variation time determination table for "normal mode" corresponding to the winning pattern setting process is selected. In addition, when "21" corresponding to "time saving A mode" is stored in the mode storage area, the second shortened variable time determination table for "time saving A mode" corresponding to the time saving pattern setting process is selected. When "31" corresponding to "time saving B mode" is stored in the mode storage area, the second shortened variable time determination table for "time saving B mode" corresponding to the time saving per pattern setting process is selected. be.

Then, referring to the selected second variation time determination table, the second variation time is determined based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the special variation reservation area. The determined second variable time is stored in association with the execution area of the special variable reservation area. Furthermore, the second variation display, the information indicating the variation pattern (time saving hit), the game mode information, and the information including the variation time are set in the variation pattern command.

Returning to the description of FIG. 136, when the affirmative determination is made in step SC1603, that is, when the second fluctuation display is in progress, the process proceeds to step SC1609 and the special figure 2 display timer is subtracted.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step SC1610, and it is determined whether or not the predetermined fluctuation time has passed by taking into account the value of the special figure 2 display timer after the above subtraction. At this time, step SC1610 is affirmatively determined when the value of the special figure 2 display timer becomes "0" when the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed.

When a negative determination is made in step SC1610, in step SC1615, switching display setting is performed to continue switching display (second variable display) of the second special symbol display device 43B. In addition, based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, in the external output processing in the next normal processing, a control signal for switching display is output to the second special symbol display device 43B. Thereby, the switching display (variable display) of the second special symbol display device 43B is realized at the timing of the second special display control process, that is, every 4 ms. After step SC1615, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step SC1610, the special figure 2 display flag is turned off in step SC1611, and the special figure 2 stop display setting for performing stop display in the second special symbol display device 43B in step SC1612 I do. Based on the setting contents of this special figure 2 stop display setting, in the external output process in the next normal process, a control signal for performing stop display is output to the second special symbol display device 43B. That is, in the second special symbol display device 43B, the modes corresponding to various big hits, small hits, various time-saving hits, misses, etc. set in the second variation display setting process are stopped and displayed.

In addition, after step SC1612, in step SC1613, to the sub-control device 262, to set the special figure 2 stop command to perform the stop display of the effect display device 42. As a result, the synchronization of the stop timings of the second special symbol display device 43B and the effect display device 42 is ensured.

Subsequently, in step SC1614, after performing the special figure 2 determination information setting process for performing the initial setting of the state and the switching setting of the game mode, this process is terminated.

Here, the special figure 2 determination information setting process of step SC1614 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step SC1801, with reference to the execution area of the special variation reservation area, it is determined whether or not the small hit variation flag is set to ON. When affirmative determination is made in step SC1801, the small hit variation flag is turned off in step SC1802, and the small hit middle flag indicating that the small hit state is in progress is turned on in step SC1803. Furthermore, in step SC1804, "2" is set to a round number counter for determining the number of rounds (the number of times the second variable winning device 32B is opened) to be executed during the small winning state.

In the following step SC1805, "4" is set in the hit status storage area to indicate that the first round of the small hit state is in progress. Furthermore, at Step SC1806, it is determined whether or not the value stored in the mode storage area is "21". If an affirmative determination is made in step SC1806, that is, if it is in the "time saving A mode" (if it is in a high ball entry state), in step SC1807, control during the winning state (opening and closing control of the variable winning devices 32A and 32B ) is set to the value "400", corresponding to an open period of 1.6 seconds. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SC1806 (low ball entry state), in step SC1808 the value "25" corresponding to the open time of 0.1 seconds is set for the special variable timer.

After step SC1807 or step SC1808, in step SC1809, the second winning counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the second variable winning device 32B, 4 which is the maximum number of winning balls per round. Set "4" to indicate the number of pieces.

It should be noted that the value of the second winning counter determines whether or not a ball has entered the second variable winning device 32B during the switch reading process (see FIG. 125) of the timer interrupt process, based on the detection information of the ball count switch 223a. , is subtracted by 1 when it is determined that a ball has entered the second variable winning device 32B.

In subsequent step SC1810, a second opening process for opening the second variable winning device 32B is performed.

Furthermore, in step SC1811, subtraction processing of the change number counter is performed. In this embodiment, since there is no change in the game mode just by winning a small hit, if "time saving A mode" or "time saving B mode" is set, this subtraction process will change the small hit Even at the stage when the display is completed, processing is performed to reduce the remaining number of times of continuation of the "time saving A mode" or "time saving B mode" by one.

It should be noted that this subtraction process of the fluctuation number counter is not performed when the current game mode is the "normal mode" (when "11" is stored in the mode storage area), but is configured to be skipped. there is

That is, in the subtraction process of the fluctuation number counter, first, whether "21" or "31" is stored in the mode storage area, that is, the current game mode is "time saving A mode" or "time saving B mode". Only when the determination is affirmative, the process of subtracting 1 from the value of the fluctuation number counter (first fluctuation number counter A or second fluctuation number counter B) is executed.

In the following step SC1812, a small winning start command for informing the sub-control device 262 of the start of the small winning state is set. After that, this process is terminated. This small winning start command includes various information related to the small winning (for example, the type of big winning when the V big winning state occurs), etc., and the sub control device 262 can also grasp the progress of the small winning state. there is

When the negative determination is made in step SC1801, in step SC1813, the execution area of the special variation reservation area is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 big hit variation flag is set to ON.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SC1813, the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation flag is turned off in step SC1814, and the jackpot flag indicating that the jackpot state is in progress in step SC1815 (stored in the second special fluctuation holding area Turn on the special figure 2 jackpot medium flag) that indicates that the jackpot has been hit in the second variation display.

In subsequent step SC1816, by referring to various jackpot flags set in the execution area of the special variable reservation area, the number of rounds executed during the jackpot state (the number of times the first variable winning device 32A is opened) is determined. A value corresponding to each jackpot is set in the round number counter.

For example, when the 15R jackpot flag is set to ON, "15" is set to the round number counter. When the 8R jackpot flag is set to ON, "8" is set to the round number counter. When the 4R jackpot flag is set to ON, "4" is set to the round number counter.

After that, in step SC1817, "1" is set in the win situation storage area. Furthermore, in Step SC1818, the value "2000" corresponding to the opening period of 8 seconds, for example, is set for the special variable timer. Subsequently, in step SC1819, "8" is set to the first winning counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the first variable winning device 32A. Then, in step SC1820, an opening command is set, and this process ends.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step SC1813, in step SC1821, the execution area of the special variation reservation area is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the time reduction per variation flag is set to ON.

If the determination in step SC1821 is affirmative, the time saving variation flag is turned off in step SC1822, and the value "31" corresponding to "time saving B mode" is set in the mode storage area in step SC1823. As a result, the game mode is internally switched from the "normal mode" to the "time saving B mode".

In the following step SC1824, for the second variation counter B used to measure the duration of the "time saving B mode" (remaining number of variations until reaching the upper limit), set a value corresponding to the winning time saving per type .

For details, considering the various time-saving hit schedule flags set in the execution area of the special change reservation area, if you win the "30 times time-saving hit", the value of the second variation counter B is set to "30" If you win the ``40 times shorter time hit'', set the value of the second variation counter B to ``40'', and if you win the ``50 times shorter time hit'', the second variation counter Set the value of B to "50".

After that, this process is terminated. In addition, in this embodiment, at this stage, the sub-control device 262 is configured not to transmit a command or the like for generating the "time saving B mode". That is, at this stage, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the "time saving B mode" has been given without performing the effect related to the "time saving B mode" on the effect display device 42 or the like.

In addition, if a negative determination is made in step SC1821, in step SC1827, it is determined whether or not "21" is stored in the mode storage area, that is, whether or not the current game mode is "time-saving A mode". do.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SC1827, in step SC1828, the value of the first fluctuation counter A used for measuring the duration of the "time saving A mode" (the number of fluctuations remaining until reaching the upper limit) is subtracted by 1. do.

In addition, the first variation counter A in this embodiment also measures the remaining second variation display execution period (remaining retention digestion period, maximum 4 times) that is retained and stored at the end of the "time saving A mode". Used.

In subsequent Step SC1829, it is determined whether or not the value of the first variation counter A is "0". If a negative determination is made in step SC1829, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the determination in step SC1829 is affirmative, in step SC1830, "11" indicating "normal mode" is set in the mode storage area. That is, when the total number of executions of the first variation display and the second variation display performed by the first special symbol display device 43A and the second special symbol display device 43B becomes "1 time" or "7 times" "Time-saving A mode" ends and the mode shifts to "Normal mode".

After step SC1830, in step SC1831, it is determined whether or not the value of the second suspension counter Nb is greater than "0". That is, it is determined whether or not the second variable display is reserved and stored in the second special variable reserved area.

If a negative determination is made in step SC1831, that is, if the second variation display is not reserved in the second special variation reservation area, in step SC1832, the sub-control device 262 is shifted to the "normal mode" (" After setting the "time saving A mode" end command that informs the end of the "time saving A mode", this process is ended.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC1831, that is, if the second variation display is reserved in the second special variation reservation area, the process proceeds to step SC1833, and the first variation number counter A is 2 Set the value of the pending counter Nb (currently pending number of the second variable display stored in the second special variable pending area, maximum "4"). As a result, a period (variation display count) during which the “continuous chance stage effect” is continuously executed is set.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the "continuous chance stage effect" corresponds to the "specific effect", and the function of the sub-control device 262 that executes the "continuous chance stage effect" constitutes the "effect executing function section". Further, in the present embodiment, the remaining holding consumption period until the value of the first variation counter A is subtracted and becomes the specific value "0" corresponds to "predetermined state", and during this period "continuation chance The function of the sub-control device 262 that continuously executes the "stage production" constitutes the "continuation function unit".

In the following step SC1834, the effect start setting processing related to the "continued chance stage effect" (for example, the setting of the effect start command for causing the sub-control device 262 to execute the "continued chance stage effect") is performed. End the process.

Also, if a negative determination is made in step SC1827, it is determined in step SC1835 whether or not "31" is stored in the mode storage area, that is, whether or not the current game mode is the "time-saving B mode". do.

When an affirmative determination is made in step SC1835, in step SC1836, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second variation counter B (after internally updating the duration of the time saving B mode), the process proceeds to step SC1837. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in Step SC1835, the process directly proceeds to Step SC1837. In the present embodiment, the processing function for subtracting the second variation counter B constitutes an “update function unit”.

In step SC1837, regardless of whether the value of the first variation counter A is greater than 0, that is, regardless of whether the current game mode is "normal mode" or "time saving B mode", "Continuous chance stage production ” determines whether or not it is inside. If a negative determination is made here, the processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the determination in step SC1837 is affirmative, in step SC1838, 1 is subtracted from the value of the first variation counter A, and then the process proceeds to step SC1839.

At step SC1839, it is determined whether or not the value of the first variation counter A is "0". If a negative determination is made in step SC1839, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC1839, that is, if it is the end timing of the "continued chance stage effect", the effect end setting process related to the "continued chance stage effect" (for example, if the sub-control device 262 After performing the setting of the production end command for ending the "chance stage production", etc., this processing is terminated.

In this embodiment, the first variation counter A and related functions constitute a first counting function unit, and the second variation counter B and related functions constitute a second counting function unit.

Further, in the present embodiment, the end of the second variation display of the second special symbol display device 43B corresponds to establishment of a predetermined subtraction condition, and the subtraction function unit is configured by the processing function of subtracting the first variation counter A. be.

Next, the variable winning device control processing of step SC207 for opening and closing the first variable winning device 32A and the second variable winning device 32B will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step SC1201, it is determined whether or not the value set in the winning state storage area is "0", thereby determining whether or not the state is other than the winning state. If the determination in step SC1201 is affirmative, that is, if the game is not in the winning state, the process ends. By the way, at the start of the jackpot state or the small hit state, "1" or "4" is set in the hit situation storage area in the above special figure 1 discrimination information setting process and special figure 2 discrimination information setting process there is

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SC1201, that is, if it is in the winning state (if one of "1" to "6" is set in the winning situation storage area), the process proceeds to step SC1202, Decrease the value of the special variable timer by one. In subsequent Step SC1203, it is determined whether or not the value of the special variable timer is "0". When an affirmative determination is made in step SC1203, it is determined in step SC1204 whether or not "1" is set in the win situation storage area.

If the determination in step SC1204 is affirmative, in step SC1205, "2" is set in the win situation storage area. In subsequent step SC1206, a value "7500" corresponding to the time (30 seconds) for maintaining the open state of the first variable winning device 32A is set to the special variable timer.

After step SC1206, in step SC1207, a first opening process is performed to open the first variable prize winning device 32A, and in step SC1208, a round command is sent to the sub-control device 262 to inform the round start information. set. After that, this process is terminated.

Also, if the determination in step SC1204 is negative, it is determined in step SC1209 whether or not "5" is set in the win situation storage area. In this embodiment, "5" is set in the winning state storage area in the interval period between the first round in the small winning state and the second round.

If a negative determination is made in step SC1209, it is determined in step SC1210 whether or not "3" is set in the win situation storage area. Although details will be described later, "3" is set in the winning state storage area when all the rounds in the jackpot state are completed and the ending period is started. If the determination in step SC1210 is negative, that is, if it is not yet time to end the jackpot state, it is determined in step SC1211 whether or not "6" is set in the winning status storage area. In this embodiment, "6" is set in the winning situation storage area in the second round in the small winning state.

If a negative determination is made in step SC1211, 1 is subtracted from the value of the round number counter in step SC1212. In subsequent Step SC1213, it is determined whether or not the value of the round number counter is "0". If a negative determination is made in step SC1213, that is, if there are still rounds to be executed, it is determined in step SC1214 whether or not "4" is set in the win situation storage area. In this embodiment, "4" is set in the winning situation storage area in the first round in the small winning state.

If a negative determination is made in Step SC1214, that is, if "2" is set in the win situation storage area, the process proceeds to Step SC1215 and "1" is set in the win situation storage area. Thereafter, in Step SC1216, a value "250" corresponding to the interval time (1 second) is set for the special variable timer.

In the following step SC1217, "8" is set for the first winning counter. Further, in step SC1218, the first closing process for closing the first variable prize winning device 32A is performed, and in step SC1219, an interval command is set to convey information to the sub-controller 262 to start the interval. After that, this process is terminated.

Also, if the determination in step SC1214 is affirmative, that is, if the first round of the small win state is completed, in step SC1220, "5" is set in the win situation storage area. Thereafter, in Step SC1221, a value "25" corresponding to the interval time (0.1 second) is set for the special variable timer.

In subsequent Step SC1222, "4" is set for the second winning counter. Further, in step SC1223, the second closing process for closing the second variable winning device 32B is performed, and then this process is terminated.

Also, if a negative determination is made in step SC1203, that is, if the time (open time or closed time) to maintain the open state or closed state of the first variable winning device 32A or the second variable winning device 32B remains , the process proceeds to step SC1224, and it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the specific ball entering portion 320c provided in the internal area 320a of the second variable winning device 32B. Although details will be described later, in this process, a specific winning flag is set to ON when detection is performed by a specific ball entry detection switch 223b for detecting a game ball that has entered the specific ball entry portion 320c. It is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the specific ball entry portion 320c by determining whether or not it has been entered.

If a negative determination is made in step SC1224, in step SC1225, the winning counter corresponding to the variable winning devices 32A and 32B in the current winning state (the first winning counter if in the big win state, the small win state In this case, it is determined whether or not the value of the second winning counter) is "0". As described above, each winning counter has an upper limit of the number of winnings per round (the prescribed number of "8" or "4") at the start of the win state or the start of the interval. set. Then, 1 is subtracted each time one game ball enters the variable winning devices 32A and 32B.

If a negative determination is made in step SC1225, this processing ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in Step SC1225, that is, if the round end opportunity has arrived without waiting for the set period of the round to elapse, the process proceeds to Step SC1211. As a result, when the game ball hits the upper limit (8 or 4) to the first variable winning device 32A or the second variable winning device 32B during one round, the upper limit of the open period (30 seconds, 1.6 seconds, or 0.1 seconds), the round will end immediately at that point.

In addition, if the determination in step SC1224 is affirmative, that is, in the small winning state, if the game ball enters the specific ball entrance portion 320c and a V winning big win occurs, then in step SC1226, the big win After performing a specific winning process for continuing the state, this process is terminated. Details of the specific winning process will be described later.

Also, if the determination in step SC1213 is affirmative, that is, if all the rounds in the jackpot state have been completed, the process proceeds to step SC1227, and "3" is set in the win situation storage area. Thereafter, in Step SC1228, a value "2500" corresponding to the ending time (10 seconds) is set for the special variable timer.

After step SC1228, in step SC1229, "7" is set for the first winning counter. In addition, when the processing for setting the ending from step SC1227 onward is performed in the flow after the affirmative determination is made in step SC1225, the value of the first winning counter is "0". Then, if the value of the first winning counter is set to "0" as it is at the start of the ending period, in the variable winning device control process after 4 msec, affirmative determination is made in step SC1225, and the ending period cannot be completed. Can not. Therefore, by setting a provisional value other than "0" ("7" in this example) to the first winning counter in step SC1229, the ending period is completed. Of course, another method may be used to complete the ending period.

After step SC1229, in step SC1230, the first closing process for closing the first variable winning device 32A is performed, and in subsequent step SC1231, an ending command to convey information to start the ending to the sub-control device 262. set. After that, this process is terminated.

Also, if the determination in step SC1210 is affirmative, that is, if the ending period has ended and the time to end the jackpot state has arrived, the process proceeds to step SC1232 to perform end setting processing.

Here, the termination setting process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step SC1401, it is determined whether or not the jackpot medium flag (either the special figure 1 jackpot medium flag, the special figure 2 jackpot medium flag, or the later-described V prize jackpot medium flag) is set to ON. When an affirmative determination is made in step SC1401, in step SC1403, the value "21" corresponding to "time saving A mode" is stored in the mode storage area. As a result, the "time saving A mode" is given after the end of the jackpot state.

In subsequent step SC1404, a time-saving A mode start command is set to tell the sub-control device 262 to start the "time-saving A mode" (shift to "rush stage effect" or "battle stage effect"). A rush stage effect or a battle stage effect may be executed as the specific effect by the effect execution processing of the sub-control device 262 as the effect execution function unit. After step SC1404, in step SC1407, the flag during the jackpot that is set to ON (either the flag during the special figure 1 jackpot, the flag during the special figure 2 or the flag during the V prize jackpot) is turned off.

In the following step SC1408, a value "0" is set in the winning state storage area to indicate a state other than the winning state. Furthermore, in step SC1409, a jackpot end command is set to notify the sub-control device 262 of the end of the jackpot state. After that, in step SC1410, for the first variation counter A, after setting the variation number value "1" or "7" as the upper limit of the "time saving A mode" corresponding to the jackpot type, this process ends do.

In addition, when the negative determination is made in step SC1401, that is, when it is in a small winning state, in step SC1411, a ball entry counter that counts the number of game balls present in the internal area 320a of the second variable winning device 32B. is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the number of game balls present in the internal area 320a is "0".

When the affirmative determination is made in step SC1411, in step SC1412, the small hit medium flag is turned off, in step SC1413, "0" is set to the hit situation storage area, and in step SC1414, to the sub control device 262 A small winning end command is set to inform that the small winning state ends.

Thereafter, in step SC1415, it is determined whether or not the value of the first variation counter A is "0". In addition, the duration of the "time saving A mode" is until the first fluctuation display and the second fluctuation display are performed "1 time" or "7 times" in total, or until the jackpot state occurs. , the value of the first variation counter A is decremented by 1 when the second variation display corresponding to the small win is completed and the small win is started (see step SC1811). In step SC1415, it is determined whether or not the upper limit of the number of fluctuations in the "time saving A mode" has been reached ("1 time" or "7 times" has been completed).

If the determination in step SC1415 is affirmative, in step SC1416, set the value "11" corresponding to the "normal mode" to the mode storage area, set the time-saving A mode end command in step SC1417, End this process.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SC1415, it is determined in step SC1420 whether or not the value of the second variation counter B is "0". In addition, the duration of the "time saving B mode" is until the first variable display and the second variable display are performed "30 times", "40" or "50 times" in total, or until the jackpot state occurs. Therefore, when the second variation display corresponding to the small win ends and the small win starts, the value of the second variation counter B is decremented by 1 (see step SC1811). In step SC1420, it is determined whether or not the upper limit of the number of fluctuations in the "time saving B mode" has been reached ("30 times", "40 times" or "50 times" has been completed).

If an affirmative determination is made in step SC1420, in step SC1421 the value "11" corresponding to "normal mode" is set in the mode storage area, and in step SC1422 the time saving B mode end command is set, End this process.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step SC1411, in step SC1418, the remaining ball monitoring flag for continuing to monitor the game balls in the internal area 320a of the second variable winning device 32B is turned on, and then this processing is performed. exit. In other words, when the game ball remains in the internal area 320a, the small winning state does not end even when the small winning state (the second round of the small winning state) ends.

Here, the remaining ball monitoring process (step SC307) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 125) will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step SC1301, whether or not a game ball has entered the internal area 320a of the second variable winning device 32B is detected by the ball entry count switch 223a installed near the ball entry opening 320b of the internal area 320a. Make an informed decision. When an affirmative determination is made in step SC1301, in step SC1302, 1 is added to the value of the ball entry counter that counts game balls existing in the internal area 320a.

In the following step SC1303, the monitoring timer used for the remaining ball monitoring process is set to a predetermined time period during which the game ball detected by the entering ball count switch 223a should be ejected from the internal area 320a. Set the value corresponding to . In this embodiment, it is configured so that the game ball entering the internal area 320a does not exceed 2 seconds unless there is a problem before it is discharged from the internal area 320a. "750" corresponding to seconds is set.

After step SC1303, or when a negative determination is made in step SC1301, in step SC1304, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the specific ball entry portion 320c based on the detection information of the specific ball entry detection switch 223b. to discriminate. If the determination at step SC1304 is affirmative, at step SC1305 the specific winning flag is set to ON. In the following step SC1306, 1 is subtracted from the value of the incoming ball counter.

After step SC1306, or when a negative determination is made in step SC1304, in step SC1307, whether or not a game ball has entered the non-specific ball entering portion 320d is detected as detection information of the non-specific ball entering detection switch 223c. Determine based on. If the determination in step SC1307 is affirmative, the value of the incoming ball counter is decremented by 1 in step SC1308.

After Step SC1308, or when a negative determination is made in Step SC1307, it is determined in Step SC1309 whether or not the value of the incoming ball counter is "0". If the determination in step SC1309 is negative, it is determined in step SC1310 whether or not the value of the watchdog timer is "0". If the determination in step SC1310 is negative, in step SC1311 the value of the watchdog timer is decremented by 1, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC1310, that is, even at the timing when all game balls should have been ejected from the internal area 320a of the second variable winning device 32B, game balls still remain. If so, error processing (for example, turning on the error display lamp 104, displaying an error on the data lamp, notifying the hall computer, etc.) is performed in step SC1312, and then this processing ends.

Also, if the determination in step SC1309 is affirmative, in step SC1313 it is determined whether or not the remaining ball monitoring flag that may be set when ending the small hit state is turned on. If a negative determination is made in step SC1313, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the determination in step SC1313 is affirmative, in step SC1314 the flag for monitoring remaining balls is turned off. In the subsequent step SC1315, it is determined whether or not the flag during the big hit (flag during the V prize big hit) is set to ON. If the determination in step SC1315 is affirmative, that is, if a game ball enters the specific ball entering portion 320c in the small win state and a V winning big win occurs, this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SC1315, since the process of ending the small hit state has not been performed yet, the small hit medium flag is turned off in step SC1316, and in step SC1317 the hit status storage area "0" is stored, and a small hit end command is set in step SC1318.

Thereafter, in step SC1319, it is determined whether or not the value of the first variation counter A is "0". If the determination in step SC1319 is affirmative, in step SC1320, set the value "11" corresponding to the "normal mode" to the mode storage area, set the time-saving A mode end command in step SC1321, End this process.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SC1319, it is determined in step SC1325 whether or not the value of the second variation counter B is "0". If an affirmative determination is made in step SC1325, in step SC1326 the value "11" corresponding to "normal mode" is set in the mode storage area, and in step SC1327 the time saving B mode end command is set, End this process. If a negative determination is made in step SC1325, this process ends.

Returning to the description of the variable winning device control process in FIG. 139, if the determination is affirmative in step SC1209, that is, if the interval period after the end of the first round of the small winning state has ended, in step SC1233, the winning situation is stored. A value "6" corresponding to the second round in the small winning state is set for the area, and a value corresponding to the opening time of the second variable winning device 32B is set for the special variable timer in step SC1234. Here, when the game mode is the "time saving A mode", the value "400" corresponding to the opening time "1.6 seconds" is set, and the game mode is the "normal mode" or the "time saving B mode". In this case, the value "25" corresponding to the open time "0.1 second" is set. Furthermore, in step SC1235, after performing the second opening process for opening the second variable prize winning device 32B, this process ends.

In addition, when the affirmative determination is made in step SC1211, that is, when the second round (final round) of the small hit state is completed, in step SC1236, the second closing process for closing the second variable winning device 32B. I do. After that, in step SC1232, end setting processing is performed, and this processing ends.

Next, in step SC1224 of the variable winning device control process (FIG. 139), a specific winning flag indicating that a ball has entered the specific ball entering section 320c is set to ON. The winning process (step SC1226) will be described with reference to FIG.

First, at step SC1901, the specific winning flag is turned off. In the following step SC1902, whether or not the flag during the big hit is set to ON (in this example, if two game balls enter the specific ball entry part 320c during the small win state, etc., the flag during the V prize big hit may be turned on). If an affirmative determination is made in step SC1902, this processing ends.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step SC1902, a second closing process for closing the second variable winning device 32B is performed in step SC1903. Furthermore, in step SC1904, the flag during the small hit is turned off, and in step SC1905, the flag during the big hit (V prize during the big prize) is turned on. In other words, when a game ball enters the specific ball entry portion 320c during the small winning state, the small winning state is immediately ended and the big winning state is started.

After that, in step SC1906, a round number counter setting process for setting a value corresponding to the jackpot type to the round number counter is performed. In this process, first, a jackpot type determination process is performed. In the jackpot type determination process, the second type determination table used in the second type determination process of step SC507 is taken into account, and is acquired based on the ball entering the specific ball part 320c of the second variable winning device 32B. The value of the type determination counter CC2 is any of the values ``0 to 7'' corresponding to the ``15R jackpot'', ``8 to 17'' corresponding to the ``8R jackpot'', and ``18, 19'' corresponding to the ``4R jackpot'' It is determined whether it is, and the jackpot type is determined.

Then, the round number corresponding to the determined jackpot type is set in the round number counter. However, in this embodiment, since the small winning state corresponds to the first round, the number of remaining rounds is set for the round number counter here.

For example, when the determined jackpot type is "15R jackpot", the round number counter is set to "14", and when it is "8R jackpot", the round number counter is set to "7", and "4R jackpot" is set. In the case of a "jackpot", "3" is set in the round number counter.

In the present embodiment, the game ball entering the second variable winning device 32B, which is in the open state after winning the small hit, enters the specific ball entering portion 320c, thereby causing the first variable game in the second and subsequent rounds. Since the winning device 32A is configured to continue to the jackpot state in which it is open, when the small hit state ends without the game ball entering the specific ball entering portion 320c, the jackpot state is provided. Also, the game mode is not changed after the jackpot state.

After step SC1906, in step SC1909, "1" is set in the win situation storage area. Furthermore, in step SC1910, "500" corresponding to the opening period for teaching the occurrence of the big win state is set to the special variable timer. After that, in step SC1911, the first winning counter is set to "8", and in step SC1912, the sub-control device 262 is notified that the game ball has entered the specific ball entering section 320c, thereby generating a V-winning big hit state. After setting a specific prize winning command to tell that the game is to be played, this process is terminated.

Next, the normal display control process of step SC208 of the normal process (see FIG. 124) will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step SC2101, it is determined whether the value of the normal pattern interval timer for measuring the remaining time of the interval (normal pattern interval) set after the variable display of the normal pattern display device 41 is "0". do. When a negative determination is made in step SC2101, that is, when it is the normal interval, in step SC2116, the value of the normal interval timer is subtracted, and then this processing is terminated. That is, for example, when the general pattern interval is set to 1 second (1000 msec), and the general pattern interval timer is set to "249 ("250" in the case where step SC2116 is performed before step SC2101)" is set In this process, the value of the general pattern interval timer is subtracted by "1" every 4 msec, and becomes "0" after 1 second.

On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step SC2101, that is, if it is not the normal figure interval period, in step SC2102, support indicating that the opening and closing control of the second starting winning portion 33WB (wing member 33WBb) is in progress It is determined whether or not the during-period flag is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step SC2102, this processing ends.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step SC2102, in step SC2103, it is determined whether or not the normal pattern display flag indicating whether or not the normal pattern display device 41 is performing variable display is on. In addition, when the normal pattern display flag is ON, it is considered that the normal pattern display device 41 is in the process of variable display.

If the determination in step SC2103 is negative, the process advances to step SC2104 to determine whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is greater than zero. When a negative determination is made in step SC2104, that is, when no variable display of the normal symbol display device 41 is suspended, this processing is terminated as it is. In addition, for example, when a negative determination is made in step SC2104, the normal symbol display device 41 performs standby display setting for deriving a display mode corresponding to a variable standby state in which variable display is not performed. may be In other words, the normal design display device 41, after the fluctuation stop, its stop mode is maintained during the normal pattern interval period (in a mode showing the result of the starting ball support lottery), but the normal pattern interval period is It may be configured such that, when finished, the display mode is switched to indicate the variable standby state.

On the other hand, if the determination in step SC2104 is affirmative, 1 is subtracted from the normal hold counter Nc in the processing of step SC2105, which serves as an update function unit or a subtraction function unit. At subsequent step SC2106, a process of shifting the data stored in the normal variation reservation area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth reserve areas of the normal variable reserve area to the execution area side. The data in each area is shifted in the order of reserved first area, reserved third area→reserved second area, reserved fourth area→reserved third area, and so on.

After that, in step SC2107, a normal pattern fluctuation setting process for setting and starting the fluctuation display of the normal pattern display device 41 is executed.

Here, normal figure fluctuation setting processing will be described with reference to FIG. 144 . First, in step SC2301, the general pattern displaying flag indicating that the normal pattern display device 41 is normally displaying the variable pattern is turned on. In the following step SC2302, the win state storage area is referenced to determine whether or not "0" is stored, that is, whether or not the current state is other than the win state. If an affirmative determination is made in step SC2302, that is, if it is not in the hit state, in step SC2303, whether or not the value of "21" is stored in the mode storage area, that is, "time saving A mode (high ball entry state) ” is determined.

When the affirmative determination is made in step SC2303, in step SC2304, for the normal pattern display timer for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time) of the fluctuation display performed by the normal pattern display device 41, the normal pattern fluctuation display time Set to "100" for 0.4 seconds.

On the other hand, if step SC2302 or step SC2303 is determined to be negative, that is, if it is in a hit state or if it is not in a high ball entry state, in step SC2307, the normal pattern display timer is set for the normal pattern fluctuation display time. Set to "1500" to get 6 seconds.

After that, in step SC2305, the normal symbol random number counter CC4 in the execution area of the normal fluctuation reservation area is the winning value ("0, 1" in the case of "low ball state", "high ball state" in the case of " 0 to 27”). If a negative determination is made in step SC2305, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC2305, that is, if the start-up ball support lottery for whether or not to open the second start-up prize winning section 33WB is won, in step SC2306, the start-up ball support lottery is won. Set the entry support flag to indicate that it has been done. After step SC2306, this processing ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 143, after step SC2107, in step SC2108, the subtraction display processing of the normal reservation display device 44 (normal reservation lamp) corresponding to the fact that the number of suspensions of the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41 is reduced by one. I do. In other words, when both the left and right normal holding lamps are in a blinking state, the right normal holding lamp is lit while the left normal holding lamp is blinking, and the left normal holding lamp is in a blinking state and the right normal holding lamp is in a blinking state. When the normal hold lamp is lit, both the left and right normal hold lamps are lit, and when both the left and right normal hold lamps are lit, the right normal hold lamp is lit while the left normal hold lamp is lit. The reservation lamps are extinguished, and when the left normal reservation lamp is lit and the right normal reservation lamp is extinguished, processing for extinguishing both the left and right normal reservation lamps is performed. After step SC2108, this processing ends.

In addition, when the affirmative determination is made in step SC2103, that is, when the variable display is being performed on the normal symbol display device 41, the process proceeds to step SC2109 to perform processing for subtracting the normal symbol display timer. Each time this process is performed, the count value of the normal diagram display timer is decremented by 1.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step SC2110 to determine whether or not the count value of the normal diagram display timer is "0", that is, whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed. When affirmative determination is made in step SC2110, the normal pattern display flag is turned off in step SC2111, and normal pattern stop display setting for performing stop display on the normal pattern display device 41 is performed in step SC2112. That is, when winning the start ball support lottery (when the ball support flag is set to ON), both the left and right pair of normal pattern lamps of the normal design display device 41 are lit, and if it is out turns on only the left normal map lamp.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step SC2113, and normal figure determination information setting processing is performed. Here, normal figure discrimination information setting processing will be described with reference to FIG. 145 .

First, at Step SC2401, it is determined whether or not the ball entry support flag is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step SC2401, this processing ends. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step SC2401, in step SC2402, a normal variable flag for determining whether or not the second start winning section 33WB is in the open state is set to ON.

In subsequent step SC2403, it is determined whether or not "21" is stored in the mode storage area, that is, whether or not it is "time-saving A mode (high ball entry state)". When an affirmative determination is made in step SC2403, in step SC2404, the opening time of the second start winning section 33WB is set to 1 for the normal variable timer for measuring the opening time (remaining time) of the second start winning section 33WB. Set to '450' for .8 seconds.

Further, in step SC2405, an opening number counter for counting the number of times (remaining number of times) to open the second start prize winning section 33WB is set to "2" so as to open the second start prize winning section 33WB twice.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SC2403, that is, if it is not "time-saving A mode (high ball entry state)", in step SC2406, the opening time of the second start winning section 33WB is set to 0.00 for the normal variable timer. Set to '50' for 2 seconds. Subsequently, in step SC2407, the number-of-opening counter is set to "2" so as to open the second start winning section 33WB twice.

After Step SC2405 or after Step SC2407, in Step SC2408, the entry support flag is turned off, and in Step SC2409, the support period flag is turned on. Further, in step SC2410, after setting the second starting prize winning section 33WB to the open state, this process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 143, after step SC2113, in step SC2114, after setting a value corresponding to the normal pattern interval period (for example, 1 second) to the normal pattern interval timer, this process ends.

In addition, when the negative determination is made in step SC2110, in step SC2115, the switching display setting for continuing the variable display of the normal pattern display device 41 (switching display for alternately lighting the left and right normal pattern lamps). I do. In addition, based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, in the external output processing in the next normal processing, a control signal to the effect that the switching display is normally performed to the symbol display device 41 is output. As a result, switching display (variation display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is realized at the timing of the normal display control process, that is, every 4 ms. After step SC2115, this processing ends.

Next, the starting winning portion control processing of step SC209 of the normal processing (see FIG. 124) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step SC2201, it is determined whether or not the support period flag is ON. If a negative determination is made in step SC2201, this processing ends. On the other hand, if the determination in step SC2201 is affirmative, the value of the normal variable timer is subtracted by 1 in step SC2202.

In subsequent Step SC2203, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal variable timer is "0". If a negative determination is made in step SC2203, that is, if it is the period in which the open/closed state of the second starting prize winning section 33WB is maintained, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the determination in step SC2203 is affirmative, it is determined in step SC2204 whether or not the normal variable flag is ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step SC2204, that is, if the second starting prize winning section 33WB is currently in the open state and the timing to close it has arrived, the normal variable flag is turned off in step SC2205. At subsequent step SC2206, the value of the opening number counter is decremented by 1, and at step SC2207, setting is made to close the second starting prize winning section 33WB.

After that, in step SC2208, it is determined whether or not the value of the open number counter is "0". If an affirmative determination is made in step SC2208, the support period flag is turned off in step SC2209, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SC2208, that is, if there is a remaining number of times the second starting prize winning section 33WB is opened a plurality of times, a value corresponding to the interval time for the normal variable timer is set in step SC2210. (for example, "250") is set, and then this processing ends.

Also, if the determination in step SC2204 is negative, that is, in the interval period during which the second start prize winning section 33WB is opened multiple times (the second start prize winning section 33WB is in a closed state), the timing for ending the interval period is When it arrives, the normal variable flag is set to ON at step SC2211. Furthermore, in step SC2212, it is determined whether or not "21" is stored in the mode storage area. If the determination in step SC2212 is affirmative, in step SC2213 a value "450" corresponding to an open time of 1.8 seconds is set for the normal variable timer. On the other hand, if the determination in step SC2212 is negative, in step SC2214 the normal variable timer is set to the value "50" corresponding to the open time of 0.2 seconds.

After step SC2213 or step SC2214, in step SC2215, the second starting prize winning section 33WB is set to be open. After that, this process is terminated. In addition, when the second starting winning part 33WB is in the open state, when the game balls enter the second starting winning part 33WB in a specified number (for example, four), the second starting winning part 33WB may be immediately closed.

Next, the payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. For convenience of explanation, reception interrupt processing will be described first with reference to FIG. 147, and then main processing will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing reception interrupt processing executed by the payout control device 311. FIG. The reception interrupt process is a process that is executed by interrupting when the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261 . When the payout control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, other processing executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 is put on standby for a while, and reception interrupt processing is executed.

When the reception interrupt process is executed, the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is first stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513 at step SC3001, and the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is stored at step SC3002. Turns on the command reception flag and terminates this reception interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referenced and stored in a predetermined storage area, and the storage pointer is used to store the next received command in the next storage area. is updated.

In this embodiment, the reception processing of a command transmitted from the main controller 261 is performed by interrupt processing executed when the command is received. In timer interrupt processing, it is checked whether a command has been received before command determination processing (step SC3201) is performed, and if a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of RAM 513 The command reception flag may be turned on, and if the command has not been received, the process may proceed to the command determination process. In such a case, whether or not the command has been received is checked by checking the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port at predetermined intervals.

Next, the main processing of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 148 is a flow chart showing the main processing of the payout control device 311, and this main processing is activated upon resetting when the power is turned on.

First, in step SC3101, initial setting processing is executed upon power-on. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. Then, RAM access is permitted at Step SC3103, and an external interrupt vector is set at Step SC3104.

After that, in step SC3106, it is determined whether information on the occurrence of power failure is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 or not. If power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a, the RAM determination value is calculated in step SC3107, and in subsequent step SC3108, whether the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value saved at the time of power failure. No, that is, the validity of the backup is determined. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of RAM 513 . It is also possible to determine the effectiveness of the backup by checking whether the keywords written in a predetermined area of the RAM 513 are correctly saved.

If the power failure occurrence information is not set in Step SC3106, or if the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) in Step SC3108, the process proceeds to the initialization processing of the RAM 513 after Step SC3115. Transition.

At step SC3115, the entire area of RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and at step SC3116, the initial value of RAM 513 is set. Thereafter, at Step SC3117, the CPU peripheral device is initialized, and the process proceeds to Step SC3114 to permit interrupts.

On the other hand, on the condition that power failure occurrence information is set in step SC3106, and that the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal in step SC3108, the processing at the time of power recovery process). That is, at step SC3109, the stack pointer before the power cutoff is restored, at step SC3110, the occurrence information of power cutoff is cleared, and at step SC3111, the payout permission flag for permitting the payout of prize balls is cleared. At step SC3112, the CPU peripheral device is initialized, and at step SC3113, the used register is restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM513. Furthermore, at step SC3114, interrupts are permitted.

After the interruption is permitted in step SC3114, in the processing of step SC3122, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a. Here, if the information on the occurrence of power failure is set, it means that the power has been shut down, so the processing from step SC3123 onwards is performed as power failure processing at the time of power failure. In the power failure process, first, in step SC3123, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited, and in the next step SC3124, command determination processing, which will be described later, is executed. After that, at Step SC3125, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 are saved in the stack area, at Step SC3126 the value of the stack pointer is stored in the backup area 513a, and at Step SC3127 the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the backup area 513a. , the RAM access is prohibited in step SC3128, and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area backed up in the RAM 513 .

In the process of step SC3122, the power failure occurrence information is confirmed after the process that is performed when the power is turned on is completed. less and can be easily memorized. In addition, when returning to the state before the power shutdown, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, the return can be easily performed, and the processing load of the payout control device 311 can be reduced. .

Next, timer interrupt processing of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This timer interrupt process is started periodically (with a cycle of 2 msec in this embodiment).

In the timer interrupt processing, first, a command is acquired from the main controller 261, and determination processing of the command is performed (step SC3201). This command determination processing will be described below with reference to FIG.

FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing command determination processing performed by the payout control device 311. FIG. In the command determination process (steps SC3124, SC3201), first, it is determined whether or not the command reception flag is turned on in step SC3301. The command reception flag is turned on when a command transmitted from main controller 261 is received in the above-described reception interrupt processing (see FIG. 147).

If it is determined at step SC3301 that the command reception flag is off, no new command has been received from main controller 261, so this process ends. On the other hand, if the command reception flag is determined to be ON at Step SC3301, the received command is read from the RAM 513 at Step SC3302, and the command reception flag is turned OFF at Step SC3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step SC3303, the processing of steps SC3302 to SC3311 can be skipped until a new command is received, so the control of the payout control device 311 can be reduced.

The type of command read out from the RAM 513 is discriminated in the processing of steps SC3304 to SC3306. At step SC3304, it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a payout initialization command, at step SC3305 it is determined whether or not it is a payout return command, and at step SC3306 whether it is a prize ball command. It is determined whether or not

If the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a payout initialization command, it is determined in step SC3307 whether or not the payout permission flag is already turned on. Since the control device 261 has instructed the RAM 513 to be initialized, the working area (area) of the RAM 513 other than the stack area is cleared to 0 at step SC3308, and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set at step SC3309. After that, at step SC3311, the payout permission flag is turned on, and the payout permission of prize balls is set.

As described above, the main controller 261 performs the initialization process of the RAM 503 after transmitting the payout initialization command, and the payout control device 311 initializes the RAM 513 after receiving the payout initialization command. is performed, the timing at which the RAM 503 is initialized and the timing at which the RAM 513 is initialized are substantially the same. Therefore, even if the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261, the RAM 513 is initialized due to the timing of initialization being shifted, and control corresponding to the received command cannot be performed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of harmful effects. Also, since the payout permission flag is turned on after the RAM 513 is initialized, the payout permission of prize balls can be reliably set.

On the other hand, if the payout permission flag is already turned on in step SC3307, this command determination process is terminated without clearing the work area of RAM513 and without performing the initialization process of RAM513. That is, the processing of step SC3307 prohibits the RAM 513 from being initialized while the payout permission flag is set. Since the payout initialization command is a command that is transmitted only when the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on when the power is turned on, it will not be received with the payout permission flag turned on. It is conceivable that the payout control device 311 has recognized it as a payout initialization command due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, when the payout permission flag is turned on, clearing the work area of the RAM 513 (step SC3308) and setting the initial value of the RAM 513 (step SC3309) may cause problems such as not paying out prize balls remaining. A bad effect occurs and a loss is given to the player, but since the RAM 513 is prevented from being initialized while the payout permission flag is turned on, the loss to the player can be prevented.

Also, if the command sent from the main control device 261 is a payout return command (step SC3304: NO, step SC3305: YES), the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power shutdown, In order to permit the payout of prize balls, the payout permission flag is turned on at step SC3311. That is, when there is power-off occurrence information and the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power-off, payout of prize balls is permitted. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step SC3311, it means that the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so the read pointer is set to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

Furthermore, if the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a prize ball command (step SC3305: NO, step SC3306: YES), in step SC3310, the received number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls and stored. , the payout permission flag is turned on in step SC3311 to allow the payout of prize balls. At this time, the payout control device 311 sequentially reads the prize ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer), and adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the commands to the total number of prize balls stored in a predetermined buffer area. and memorize it. Since the payout of prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls is performed based on the prize ball command transmitted from the main controller 261, the prize ball command is a payout instruction command for instructing the payout of prize balls. . In addition, when the prize ball command is received, the payout permission is set immediately, so the prize balls can be paid out early for the win. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step SC3311, it means that the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so the read pointer is set to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

It should be noted that the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is neither a payout initialization command (step SC3304: NO), nor a payout return command (step SC3305: NO), nor a prize ball command (step SC3306: NO), The command determination process is ended without turning on the payout permission flag.

Here, returning to the flowchart of FIG. 149, description will be made. After completion of the command determination process, it is determined in step SC3202 whether or not a CR unit connection signal indicating electrical connection with the CR unit has been received from the CR unit connection board 314. FIG. If the determination in step SC3202 is affirmative, in step SC3203 a CR unit connection signal indicating that the CR unit is electrically connected is transmitted to the firing control circuit 312 of the power source/emission control device 310.

After step SC3203, or when a negative determination is made in step SC3202, it is determined in step SC3204 whether or not the payout permission flag is turned on in the command determination process. Here, if the payout permission flag is not turned on, this processing is terminated as it is. In other words, it is possible to prevent the prize balls from being paid out before the command is transmitted from the main controller 261 .

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC3204, the state recovery switch 321 is checked in step SC3205, and if it is determined that the state recovery operation has started, the state recovery operation is executed. By this process, when the state recovery switch 321 is pressed when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging occurs in the dispensing motor, the dispensing motor is rotated forward and reverse, and the ball clogging is resolved (returned to a normal state). .

After that, in step SC3206, the setting of the lower tray full state or the lower tray full state canceled state is executed according to the change in the state of the lower tray 15. FIG. That is, the full state of the lower tray 15 is determined by the detection signal of the full detection switch. Execute the setting of the full-dish release state. Further, in Step SC3207, setting of the no-ball-in-tank state (out-of-ball state) or no-ball-in-tank state (with-ball state) is executed according to the change in the state of the ball in the tank. That is, the no-ball-in-tank state is determined by the detection signal of the no-tank-ball switch, the no-ball-in-tank state, the no-ball-in-tank state are set, the no-ball-in-tank state, and the no-tank-ball canceled state are executed. Run the settings.

After that, in Step SC3208, it is determined whether or not there is a state to be notified, such as an error state, and if there is a state to be notified, it is notified.

Subsequently, a prize ball and rental ball payout control process is executed. Specifically, payout number setting processing is performed in step SC3209, motor control state acquisition processing is performed in step SC3210, and motor drive processing is performed in step SC3211.

At Step SC3212, the state return switch 321 is checked, and on the condition that the ball removal impossible state is not set and the ball removal operation is not started, the payout motor is driven and the ball removal processing is executed. In subsequent Step SC3213, vibrator control (vibration motor control) is executed on the condition that the balls are clogged. After that, it returns to the beginning of this timer interrupt processing.

Next, normal processing of the sub-controller 262 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step SC3901, the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port 554 is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main controller 261 has been received.

If a command has been received, that command is stored in the command buffer of RAM 553 at step SC3902. A command buffer of the RAM 553 is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main controller 261 .

The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area. It is configured to update the Return to Beginning command. Therefore, when a command is stored and read, the store pointer and read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

In the following step SC3903, pending information storage processing is performed to store the information of the preceding command output from the main controller 261 in the pending information storage area provided in the RAM 553 of the sub-controller 262. FIG. In addition, as described above, the starting command includes information indicating which of the first start winning section 33WA or the second start winning section 33WB is triggered by the ball entry, and information corresponding to the big win or the small win. Information indicating whether it is fluctuation information, information indicating the type of jackpot, information indicating the type of reach, game mode information for specifying the game mode at the start of the fluctuation display, information indicating the fluctuation time, etc. are included.

The holding information storage area of the sub-controller 262 has four holding areas (first holding to holding 4th area), a first pending information storage area and a second pending information storage area, and one execution area.

In the first pending information storage area, in accordance with the reception history of the starting command based on the first variable display (information stored in the first special variable pending area), information on whether or not the jackpot, jackpot type, reach pattern, Game mode information and information (variation information) relating to variation display such as variation time are stored in chronological order. In addition, in the second pending information storage area, in accordance with the reception history of the starting command based on the second variable display (information stored in the second special variable pending area), information on whether or not the jackpot, jackpot type, small Information (variation information) regarding variation display such as information on whether or not the win, information on whether or not the time saving win, game mode information, and variation time are stored in chronological order. By adopting such a configuration, the variation information related to the first variable display triggered by the ball entering the first start prize winning section 33WA and the second variable display triggered by the ball entering the second start prize winning section 33WB. can each be stored in a reserved storage. As a result, not only the execution area of the special fluctuation reservation area of the main controller 261, but also the fluctuation information stored in each reservation area of the first and second special fluctuation reservation areas can be grasped by the sub-controller 262. is possible.

Here, the pending information storage process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step SC4101, it is determined whether or not the leading command for the first variable display has been received (whether or not the leading command for the first variable display has been stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553).

When an affirmative determination is made in step SC4101, in step SC4102, the first variation pending counter Nd, which counts the pending number of variable information stored in the first pending information storage area, is incremented by one.

In the following step SC4103, information on whether or not the jackpot contained in the starting command, information on the type of jackpot, reach pattern, game mode information, information on the first variation time, etc. are stored in the vacant reservation area of the first reservation information storage area. stored in the first area.

Further, in the following step SC4104, the advance notice information storage processing is performed. That is, in the present embodiment, there is a case where mutually related effect displays are intentionally derived in a plurality of continuous variable displays (so-called "continuous advance notice" is performed). Here, the value of the continuous notice counter for determining whether or not to perform the continuous notice and the value of the notice type counter for determining the type of continuous notice are acquired, and the counter value is stored in the first reservation information In the area, the change information is stored in the newly stored reservation area in step SC4103.

The continuous notice counter is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one within a range of 0 to 49, for example, and returns to 0, which is the lower limit, after reaching the upper limit (that is, 49). The continuous announcement counter is updated periodically, and each time, the value of the continuous announcement counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (continuous announcement counter buffer).

The advance notice type counter is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 9, for example, and returns to 0 as the lower limit after reaching the upper limit (that is, 9). The notice type counter is updated periodically, and each time, the value of the notice type counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (notice type counter buffer).

Then, in the advance notice information storage process, when the change information is stored in the reserved information storage area, the value of the continuous advance notice counter and the value of the advance notice type counter stored in the continuous advance notice counter buffer and the advance notice type counter buffer are acquired. The Rukoto. Furthermore, each pending area and execution area of the pending information storage area is provided with a continuous announcement flag that is turned on when it is determined that the continuous announcement is derived.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the ROM 552 is provided with a notice propriety determination table that is taken into consideration when determining whether or not to perform continuous notices, and a notice table that is taken into account when deciding the form of continuous notices. A plurality of notice adequacy determination tables and notice tables are provided, respectively, and the notice adequacy determination tables and notice tables to be considered are selected according to the variation information.

After step SC4104, in step SC4105, continuous announcement lottery processing for determining whether or not to execute continuous announcement is performed. In the continuous announcement lottery process of step SC4105, it is confirmed whether or not there is a reservation area in which the continuous announcement flag is already set to ON. Therefore, if the existence of the holding area in which the continuous notice flag is set is not confirmed, and furthermore, in the holding first area, when only the variation information corresponding to the complete deviation (the deviation in which the reach state does not occur) is stored , It is designed to draw lots for continuous notices. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that there is a reserved area in which the continuous notice flag is set, the continuous notice lottery is not performed.

In addition, in the continuous notice lottery process of step SC4105, when the value of the first variable suspension counter Nd is "2" or more, based on the value of the continuous notice counter newly stored in the first suspension information storage area, Refer to the announcement success/failure determination table corresponding to the jackpot type, reach pattern, and game mode (the one corresponding to the jackpot is easier to win than the one corresponding to the loss), and determines whether or not to execute the continuous notice. . Furthermore, when it is decided to execute the continuous notice, based on the value of the notice type counter newly stored in the first reservation information storage area, the notice table corresponding to the jackpot type, reach pattern and game mode to determine whether or not to execute continuous advance notice. In addition, the continuous notice flags of all the reservation areas in which the variation information is stored are turned on among the reservation areas of the first reservation information storage area. However, the continuous notice flag of the execution area is not turned on.

After step SC4105, in step SC4106, a hold icon setting process is performed for additionally displaying one hold icon, which is a display corresponding to specific indication indicating that the first variable display is held and stored in the effect display device 42. FIG. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a pending icon H461 (see FIG. 159 and the like) imitating a “floating ring” is displayed on the effect display device 42 . On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the pending icon corresponding to the second variable display is not displayed.

In addition, the pending icon H461 may be derived in a manner suggesting the degree of expectation for a big win of the corresponding first variation display. Hereinafter, the suspension icon H461 of such a mode is also referred to as "prefetching suspension icon H463". The look-ahead suspension icon H463 (see FIG. 159, etc.) of the present embodiment is derived in a mode in which the character uses a "floating ring". Furthermore, a plurality of types of characters of the look-ahead suspension icon H463 are prepared, and the pattern of the look-ahead suspension icon H463 is associated with the winning expectation level (jackpot expectation level) for the occurrence of the big win state. As a result, the look-ahead suspension icon H463 is ranked with respect to the degree of expectation for the big win according to its aspect, and by deriving the look-ahead suspension icon H463, the degree of expectation for the big win is suggested (performs a look-ahead suspension notice effect). It is configured.

Further, when the prefetching pending icon H463 is derived, the pattern of the prefetching pending icon H463 changes until the first variable display corresponding to the prefetching pending icon H463 is completed (the pending change effect is derived). That is, in the hold icon setting process of step SC4106, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the prefetch hold icon H463 is to be derived, and in the case of no winning, the pattern of the hold icon H461 is determined to be the default (floating ring only). be done. On the other hand, in the case of winning, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to perform the holding change effect.In the case of winning, the holding change flag of the corresponding holding area is set to ON, and the pattern of the look-ahead holding icon H463 is as follows. An upper limit pattern that can be finally displayed and a provisional pattern that has a lower (lower rank) degree of expectation for a big win than the upper limit pattern and is to be displayed first are determined. The provisional pattern may be configured so that there is an option to initially display the default pending icon H461. On the other hand, in the case of no winning, one pattern is determined as the pattern of the look-ahead suspension icon H463.

Then, basically, among the pending icons H461 displayed in the pending display area HW3 of the effect display device 42, the pending icon H461 of the determined pattern is displayed so as to be arranged on the right side of the rightmost one. Such processing is performed. Further, in the present embodiment, in step SC4106, when the prefetching pending icon H463 is derived to the pending display area HW3, the prefetching pending effect flag is set to ON.

After step SC4106, or if a negative determination is made at step SC4101, at step SC4107 it is determined whether or not the leading command for the second variable display has been received (the leading command for the second variable display is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). or not). If a negative determination is made in step SC4107, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the determination in step SC4107 is affirmative, in step SC4108, the second variation pending counter Ne that counts the number of pending second variable information stored in the second pending information storage area is incremented by one.

After that, in step SC4109, information on whether or not the jackpot contained in the starting command, information on the type of jackpot, information on whether or not it is a small hit, information on whether or not it is a time saving hit, game mode information, and second variation time Information, etc., is stored in the first area among the vacant reserved areas of the second reserved information storage area. After step SC4109, this processing ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 151, after step SC3903 or when a negative determination is made in step SC3901, the process proceeds to step SC3904 to determine whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, the start of the previous normal process. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (2 msec in this example) has elapsed since. If the predetermined time has already passed, the process proceeds to Step SC3905. On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the previous normal processing, the process proceeds to Step SC3913.

In step SC3905, update processing of various counters is executed. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 uses various counter information when displaying decorative symbols. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 152, the top, middle, and bottom used to set the decorative symbol counter CO at the time of the big hit, and the outlier symbols of the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area. Symbol counters CL, CM and CR are used. The symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured such that register values are added using an R register (refresh register) in the CPU 551, and as a result, numerical values change randomly. The values of these counters are appropriately stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 553 .

The jackpot decoration pattern counter CO is for determining the pattern (jackpot pattern) to be stop-displayed on the effect display device 42 when the jackpot state occurs. In this embodiment, nine counter values (0 to 8) are prepared as the jackpot decoration symbol counter CO. That is, the jackpot decoration pattern counter CO is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 8, and returns to 0 after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 8).

Then, when a variation pattern command corresponding to a big hit is received from the main control device 261, based on a table that associates the counter value and the decorative pattern, for example, if the counter value is 0, "1" (double), 1 If so, a combination of jackpot symbols is determined, such as "2" (double).

This jackpot decorative pattern counter CO is periodically updated in the counter updating process of step SC3905, and is read from the counter buffer of RAM 553 at the timing when the sub-controller 262 receives a variation pattern command as described later. In this embodiment, the jackpot decoration pattern counter CO is stored in the jackpot decoration pattern counter buffer of the RAM 553, but the counter value is referred to at the timing of receiving the variation pattern command, etc., without storing in the buffer. You may do so.

The upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR determine the combinations of the stop symbols in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas when the lottery is lost. Since one of the nine decorative patterns is displayed in the row, nine counter values (0 to 8) are prepared for each row. A stopped pattern in the upper pattern display area is determined by the upper pattern counter CL, a stopped pattern in the middle pattern display area is determined by the medium pattern counter CM, and a stopped pattern in the lower pattern display area is determined by the lower pattern counter CR.

In this embodiment, the values of the counters CL, CM, and CR are randomly updated by using the numerical value of the R register built into the CPU 551 . That is, when each symbol counter CL, CM, CR is updated, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous value, and when the addition result exceeds the upper limit value, 8 is subtracted to determine the current value. The pattern counters CL, CM, CR are updated so that the update times do not overlap, and the combinations of the pattern counters CL, CM, CR are the front-rear off reach pattern buffer of the RAM 553, the non-front-rear off reach pattern buffer, and the complete It is stored in any of the outlier pattern buffers.

Here, updating processing of each symbol counter CL, CM, CR will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 153, at step SC4001, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the upper symbol counter CL, and at step SC4002, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the middle symbol counter CM. The top, middle, and bottom pattern counters CL, CM, and CR are updated one by one in one update process. Therefore, if the lower symbol counter CR has been updated in the previous update process, the determination at step SC4001 is affirmative. Also, if the upper symbol counter CL has been updated in the previous update process, the determination at step SC4002 is affirmative. If it is time to update the upper symbol counter CL (YES at step SC4001), the process proceeds to step SC4003 to update the upper symbol counter CL. If it is time to update the medium design counter CM (YES at step SC4002), the process proceeds to step SC4004 to update the medium design counter CM. Furthermore, if it is time to update the lower design counter CR (NO in both steps SC4001 and S4002), the process proceeds to step SC4005 to update the lower design counter CR. In updating the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in steps SC4003 to SC4005, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous counter value, and when the addition result exceeds the upper limit, 8 is subtracted, The calculation result is used as the current value of the pattern counters CL, CM, and CR.

According to the CL, CM, and CR updating process, the upper, middle, and lower pattern counters CL, CM, and CR are updated one by one in one update process, and the update timings of the respective counter values overlap. no. As a result, one set of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is updated each time the updating process is executed three times.

After that, in Step SC4006, the combination of the updated symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is the combination of the winning symbols (the combination of the jackpot symbols in which the symbols in the upper and lower symbol display areas and the symbols in the middle symbol display area are the same). It is determined whether it is a combination, a combination of predetermined small winning patterns, a combination of predetermined time saving winning patterns. If an affirmative determination is made in step SC4006, this processing is terminated without storing the combination of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in RAM553.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SC4006, in step SC4007, the combination of the updated symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of ready-to-win symbols (a symbol in the upper symbol display area and a symbol in the lower symbol display area). are the same, and the patterns in the upper and lower pattern display areas are different from the patterns in the middle pattern display area). determines in step SC4008 whether or not the combination of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of front-rear deviating symbols (rear-rear deviating reach). If the pattern counters CL, CM, and CR are a combination of front and rear deviating patterns (YES at step SC4008), the process proceeds to step SC4009, and the combination of the pattern counters CL, CM, and CR at that time is stored in the front and rear deviating reach pattern buffer of RAM553. , and terminate this process. If the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are a combination of symbols other than front-rear deviation (Reach other than front-rear deviation) (step SC4008 is NO), proceed to step SC4010, and the combination of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at that time. The combination is stored in the ready-to-win pattern buffer of the RAM 553 except for the front and back deviation, and this process is terminated.

Also, if the combination is other than the ready-to-win pattern (NO at step SC4007), the combination of the pattern counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of lost patterns (completely lost patterns), so in step SC4011 , the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at that time is stored in the complete missing symbol buffer of the RAM 553, and the processing is terminated.

Returning to the description of FIG. 151, at step SC3906, suspension processing is performed. The suspension process will be described below with reference to FIG.

First, in step SC4201, it is determined whether or not a variation pattern command for the first variation display has been received (whether or not the variation pattern command for the first variation display has been stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). If the determination in step SC4201 is affirmative, 1 is subtracted from the value of the first variation holding counter Nd, which is the second counting function, in the processing of step SC4202, which is the updating function unit or the subtraction function unit.

In subsequent step SC4203, a process of shifting the data stored in the first pending information storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data (including the continuous notice flag) stored in the first to fourth reserved areas of the first reserved information storage area to the execution area side. The data in each area is shifted in the order of →execution area, second reserved area→first reserved area, third reserved area→second reserved area, fourth reserved area→third reserved area.

After step SC4203, in step SC4204, an advance notice setting process is performed to determine the type of display effect used for continuous advance notice. In the notice setting process of step SC4204, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice flag (see the continuous notice lottery process of step SC4105) in the execution area of the hold information storage area is ON. is not performed, this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if affirmative determination is made, based on the variation information of the variation pattern command, whether it is a big hit or not, if it is a big hit, what is the type, if it is not a big hit, what is the reach pattern, and what is the game mode? It discriminates something or the like, refers to the table corresponding to each, and determines the type of continuous notice. The continuous announcement of the type determined here is derived at the desired timing for the corresponding variable display.

After step SC4204, in step SC4205, pending icon shift processing for shifting the pending icon H461 displayed on the effect display device 42 is performed. Each pending area and execution area of the pending information storage area is provided with a pending icon storage area for storing the type of the pending icon H461. It is shifted by area data shift processing.

The pending icon shift process is a process for redrawing the pending icon H461 in accordance with the data shift. The leftmost pending icon H461 is deleted, and the pending icon H461 located on the right side thereof is shifted to the left by one (the display location is moved).

In this embodiment, in step SC4205, prior to the process of redrawing the hold icon H461, if there is a hold area in which the hold change flag is set to ON, the hold change effect of the look-ahead hold icon H463 is displayed. A lottery is held to decide whether or not to perform the process, and if a lottery is won, the pattern of the look-ahead pending icon H463 is changed to a higher-ranked one (however, the rank of the upper limit pattern is not exceeded). In addition, when it is determined that there is no pending area in which the pending change flag is set to ON, the prefetch pending effect flag is turned OFF. Furthermore, by changing the pattern of the prefetch pending icon H463, when the prefetch pending icon H463 reaches the upper limit pattern, the prefetch pending effect flag is turned off and the pending change flag is turned off. ing.

After step SC4205, or if a negative determination is made at step SC4201, at step SC4206 it is determined whether or not the variation pattern command for the second variation display has been received (the variation pattern command for the second variation display is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). stored in the memory). If a negative determination is made in step SC4206, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC4206, 1 is subtracted from the value of the second variable holding counter Ne, which is the first counting function section, in the processing of step SC4207, which is the updating function section or the subtraction function section. In subsequent step SC4208, a process of shifting the data stored in the second pending information storage area is executed. This data shift process shifts the data stored in the first reserved area of the second reserved information storage area to the execution area. After step SC4208, this processing ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 151, display setting processing is performed at step SC3907. Here, based on the information stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553, various arithmetic processing such as generation of display commands to be output to the display control device 45 and command output settings are performed. In other words, the display mode to be displayed on the effect display device 42 is determined here. For example, when a variation pattern command is received, the sub-control device 262 refers to the corresponding table based on the variation type, variation time, stop design, etc., and determines the display pattern, etc. of the variation display of decorative symbols. Then, it performs control such as outputting the determined item to the display control device 45 as a display command.

The display control device 45 performs drawing processing according to a command from the sub-control device 262, and starts variable display of decorative symbols on the effect display device 42, and the like. Also, once a variation pattern command is received from the main controller 261, decoration is performed in cooperation with the sub-controller 262 and the display controller 45 until the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern elapses. Variation display of symbols (effect variation display) and the like are continued.

In addition, when starting the effect variation display corresponding to the first variation display, if the continuous notice flag in the execution area of the pending information storage area is on, it corresponds to each situation based on the variation information of the variation pattern command. By referring to the table, the type of continuous notice to be derived to the effect variable display corresponding to the first variable display is determined, the derivation of the notice effect different from the continuous notice is determined, and the effect button 125 or the like is operated. display corresponding to Furthermore, in the display setting process of step SC3907, the process (hit display process) for performing effect control during the big hit is also performed.

Here, the variable display setting process performed in the display setting process of step SC3907 will be described with reference to FIG. In the effect display device 42 of the present embodiment, basically, the first effect variable display (first variable corresponding effect display) corresponding to the first variable display of the first special symbol display device 43A, or the second special symbol display A second effect variation display (second variation corresponding effect display) corresponding to the second variation display of the device 43B is performed.

First, at Step SC4501, it is determined whether or not a variation pattern command corresponding to the second variation display (hereinafter referred to as a second variation pattern command) has been received. Various variation information included in the first variation pattern command and the second variation pattern command may be configured to be stored in the execution area of the corresponding pending information storage area, or may be stored in a separate storage area. It may be configured as Further, for example, when the processing corresponding to the reception of the second variation pattern command in the pending processing (see FIG. 155) is performed, the second variation reception flag is turned on, and if the affirmative determination is made in step SC4501, the second The configuration may be such that the variation reception flag is turned off, and in step SC4501, by checking the second variation reception flag, it may be determined whether or not the second variation pattern command has been received.

If the determination in step SC4501 is affirmative, in step SC4502, whether or not "21" is stored in the mode storage area, that is, whether the current game mode (at the start of fluctuation) is "time saving A mode" determine whether

When the affirmative determination is made in step SC4502, in step SC4503, various information included in the second variation pattern command (for example, information on whether it is a jackpot, information on whether it is a small hit, jackpot type, game mode information, and , second variable time, etc.), special second effect variable display setting processing for determining the effect pattern (second effect variable display pattern) is performed, and the process proceeds to step SC4506. In the special second effect variation display setting process, display setting processes corresponding to "rush stage effect" and "battle stage effect" shown in FIGS. 161 and 162 are performed.

Moreover, when a negative determination is made in step SC4502, it is determined in step SC4504 whether or not the continuous effect flag is set to ON. The continuation production flag is set to ON when the sub-controller 262 receives a production start command for the "continuous chance stage production" from the main control device 261, and receives an production end command for the "continuous chance stage production". is set to off.

If a negative determination is made in step SC4504, the process directly proceeds to step SC4506.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC4504, that is, if the "continuous chance stage effect" is being executed (including at the start), in step SC4505 various information included in the second variation pattern command (for example, the jackpot Information on whether or not, jackpot type, information on whether or not it is a small hit, information on whether or not it is a time saving hit, time saving hit type, game mode information, and second fluctuation time, etc. Based on the production pattern (second A normal second effect variation display setting process for determining a pattern of effect variation display is performed, and the process proceeds to step SC4506. In the normal second effect variation display setting process, the display setting process corresponding to the "continuous chance stage effect" shown in FIG. 163 is performed. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, when the second variable display is performed in the "normal mode", the "normal stage effect" is performed in the effect display device 42. FIG.

Thereafter, in step SC4506, it is determined whether or not a variation pattern command corresponding to the first variation display (hereinafter referred to as the first variation pattern command) has been received. If a negative determination is made in step SC4506, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC4506, in step SC4507, whether or not "31" is stored in the mode storage area, that is, the current game mode (at the start of fluctuation) is "time saving B mode". or not.

If the affirmative determination is made in step SC4507, in step SC4508, various information included in the first variation pattern command (for example, information on whether or not the jackpot, jackpot type, game mode information, and first variation time, etc.) Based on this, a special first effect variable display setting process for determining the pattern of the first effect variable display is performed, and this process ends. In the special first effect variation display setting process, a display setting process corresponding to the "lucky stage effect" shown in FIG. 164 is performed. In the present embodiment, the "lucky stage effect" corresponds to the "specific correspondence display", and the game performed in the "time saving B mode" in the "lucky stage effect" constitutes the "specific game".

Also, if a negative determination is made in step SC4507, in step SC4510, various information included in the first variation pattern command (for example, information on whether or not the jackpot, jackpot type, game mode information, and first variation time etc. ), the normal first effect variable display setting process for determining the pattern of the first effect variable display is performed, and the present process is finished as it is. In the normal first effect variation display setting process, a display setting process corresponding to the "normal stage effect" shown in FIG. 159 is performed.

In the present embodiment, when the first variation display is performed in the "time saving A mode", internal processing such as subtraction processing of the first variation counter A is performed, but the effect display device 42 "rush stage "Production" and "Battle stage production" will not be performed, and "Normal stage production" will be performed.

Next, the winning display processing performed in the display setting processing of step SC3907 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step SC4701, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received from the main controller 261 to announce the start of the jackpot state. If an affirmative determination is made in step SC4701, in step SC4702, for the round grasp counter for grasping the number of remaining rounds, based on the jackpot type information included in the opening command, if "15R jackpot", " "15" is set, "8" is set for "8R jackpot", and "4" is set for "4R jackpot".

After that, in step SC4703, the setting of the opening effect (setting of the image of the effect display device 42, the sound of the speaker SP, and the lighting mode of various lamps) is performed, and then this processing is finished. In this embodiment, when the value of the round comprehension counter is "15", "8" or "4", the opening effect is performed for 8 seconds. The sub-control device 262 is provided with a table or the like that stores the correspondence between the jackpot type, the number of remaining rounds, and various effects during the jackpot state. Choose and do it.

Also, if a negative determination is made at step SC4701, it is determined at step SC4704 whether or not a specific winning command has been received. If affirmative determination is made in step SC4704, that is, if a jackpot state occurs based on the ball entering the specific ball entering portion 320c of the second variable winning device 32B, in step SC4702, the specific winning counter is set to the round grasping counter. Based on the jackpot type information included in the command, "14" is set for "15R jackpot", "7" is set for "8R jackpot", and "3" is set for "4R jackpot". set.

After that, in step SC4703, the opening effect is set, and then this processing ends. In this embodiment, when the value of the round comprehension counter is "14", "7" or "3", the opening effect is performed for 2 seconds.

If a negative determination is made in step SC4704, it is determined in step SC4705 whether or not a round command has been received. When an affirmative determination is made in step SC4705, in step SC4706, the effect during the round, which is 30 seconds at maximum, is set, and then this processing is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step SC4705, it is determined in step SC4707 whether or not an interval command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step SC4707, the round grasp counter is decremented by 1 in step SC4708, and after setting the effect during the interval of 4 seconds in step SC4709, this processing ends.

If the determination in step SC4707 is negative, it is determined in step SC4710 whether or not an ending command has been received. When an affirmative determination is made at Step SC4710, the round grasp counter is decremented by 1 at Step SC4711, and after setting the ending effect for 10 seconds at Step SC4712, this process ends.

When a negative determination is made in step SC4710, it is determined whether or not a jackpot end command is received in step SC4713. When an affirmative determination is made in step SC4713, in step SC4714, big hit display end processing is performed, and this processing ends.

In the jackpot display end processing, the ending display is immediately ended, and at this timing, the time saving A mode start command is received, so based on this command, the "rush stage production" corresponding to the "time saving A mode" or Start setting processing of the "battle stage effect" is performed.

Moreover, when a negative determination is made in step SC4713, in step SC4715, it is determined whether or not a small hit start command has been received. When an affirmative determination is made in step SC4715, in step SC4716, the small winning effect setting for deriving the effect display during the small winning state is performed, and then this processing ends.

When negative determination is made in step SC4715, in step SC4717, it is determined whether or not a small hit end command is received. If a negative determination is made at step SC4717, this process ends. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step SC4717, in step SC4718, small hit display end processing for immediately ending the small hit effect display is performed. After step SC4718, this process ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 151, at step SC3908, a change stop process for stopping the change display of the effect display device 42 is executed. Here, the fluctuation stop processing will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step SC4401, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 stop command is received. When an affirmative determination is made in step SC4401, it is determined in step SC4402 whether or not the second effect variation display is being derived. If the determination at step SC4402 is affirmative, at step SC4403, a process of stopping and displaying the second effect variation display is performed. After step SC4403, the process proceeds to step SC4407, which will be described later. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made at Step SC4402, the process directly proceeds to Step SC4407.

In addition, when the negative determination is made in step SC4401, in step SC4404, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 stop command has been received. When an affirmative determination is made in step SC4404, it is determined in step SC4405 whether or not the first effect variation display is being derived. When an affirmative determination is made at step SC4405, at step SC4406, processing for stopping the first effect variation display is performed. After step SC4406, the process proceeds to step SC4407. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made at Step SC4405, the process directly proceeds to Step SC4407.

After step SC4403 or step SC4406, or when a negative determination is made in step SC4404, in step SC4407, it is determined whether or not a time saving A mode end command or time saving B mode end command has been received. If a negative determination is made in step SC4407, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC4407, that is, if the total number of executions of the first variable display and the second variable display in "time saving A mode" or "time saving B mode" reaches a predetermined number, step SC4408 , a process of changing the display effect performed by the effect display device 42 to the "normal stage effect" corresponding to the normal mode is performed. After that, this process is terminated.

Next, changes in the effect display mode on the effect display device 42 as the game progresses will be described together with the flow of the game performed by the player. Various display effects corresponding to the current game state (game mode, etc.) are performed on the display screen of the effect display device 42 .

In the normal state (the game state in which the first variable display can be performed based on the ball entering the first start prize winning portion 33WA in the “normal mode”), the “normal stage effect” is performed in the effect display device 42 .

As shown in FIG. 159, in the “normal stage effect”, most of the display screen of the effect display device 42 is set with a variable display area HW1 in which decorative symbols are variably displayed.

As described above, in this embodiment, three upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas (upper symbol display area, middle symbol display area, and lower symbol display area) are set in the variable display area HW1. A plurality of types of decoration patterns (designs with numbers 1 to 9) are scrolled and variably displayed in the display area.

Above the variable display area HW1 is set an instruction display area HW2 for instructing (recommending) the shooting mode of the game ball to the player, and below the variable display area HW1 is set the pending number of the variable display. An explicit reserved display area HW3 is set.

In the normal state, the instruction display area HW2 displays "←" to encourage the player to shoot a game ball toward the left side area of the variable display unit 35 (this action is hereinafter referred to as "left hitting"). left-handed” is displayed. In accordance with this, the player plays the game by "playing left".

A suspension icon H461 imitating a "floating ring" is displayed in the suspension display area HW3. The pending display area HW3 of this embodiment includes an execution corresponding area H462a corresponding to the execution area of the pending information storage area and a pending corresponding area H462b corresponding to each pending area of the first pending information storage area. , five pending icons H461 can be displayed.

When the player hits left, most of the game balls are guided toward the first starting winning section 33WA located below the variable display device unit 35 by the nail or the like. Among them, some game balls will win the first start winning part 33WA.

In this embodiment, the through gate 34 that triggers the opening of the second start-up winning section 33WB and its pair of blade members 33WBb is arranged in the right area of the variable display device unit 35. As shown in FIG. In other words, since the second starting winning section 33WB and the through gate 34 are arranged at positions where the game balls flowing down the left area of the variable display device unit 35 cannot reach, when the player continues to "hit left", The pair of blade members 33WBb are never released, and the game ball never enters the second start winning section 33WB.

In addition, even if the player shoots the game ball toward the right side area of the variable display unit 35 in the normal state (this action is hereinafter referred to as "right-handed hitting"), the above-described present embodiment can be applied. Under such a configuration, there is almost no possibility that the game ball will win the second starting prize winning section 33WB. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured so that the game can be played more advantageously when the player plays the game with "left shot" in the normal state.

When the game ball wins the first starting prize winning section 33WA, in the variable display area HW1 of the effect display device 42, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are variably displayed in each of the symbol display areas. In this embodiment, decorative patterns with numbers "1" to "9" are displayed. Various decorative patterns are scrolled and variably displayed from right to left with periodicity in ascending or descending numerical order, thereby forming a series of pattern rows.

In the upper pattern display area, various decorative patterns are displayed in descending order (in decreasing order of the attached numbers), and in the middle and lower design display areas, various decorative patterns are displayed in ascending order (as the attached numbers order). Then, when a predetermined time has passed, the variable display stops in the order of the upper design display area, the lower design display area, and the middle design display area, and the decoration design is stopped and displayed in each design display area.

Then, when a big win lottery is won based on the ball entering the first start winning part 33WA, decoration patterns of the big win combination are stop-displayed on a predetermined big win line through a ready-to-win state. In the normal state of the present embodiment, the jackpot line is composed of left, middle and right vertical lines and two diagonal lines (referred to as 5 lines). Therefore, in the upper, middle, and lower pattern display areas, when three decorative patterns of a combination of big wins are stopped and displayed side by side on any one of the five lines, the occurrence of a big win state is determined.

When a jackpot state occurs, the jackpot shutter 32Ab of the first variable prize winning device 32A is opened to allow the game ball to enter the jackpot 32Aa, and the effect display device 42 displays a predetermined jackpot. An effect is started (see FIG. 160).

However, here, if the player continues to "hit left", although it is possible to make the game ball flow down toward the first variable winning device 32A and win a prize, it is awarded after the jackpot ends regardless of the jackpot type. At the start of the "time saving A mode", there is no pending memory of the second variable display based on the ball entering the second start prize winning part 33WB, and the first variable display is started after the big win.

As described above, in the present embodiment, winning a direct hit jackpot in the second variation display rather than winning a direct hit jackpot in the first variation display makes it easier for the player to be given a game state that is more advantageous for the player. Since the lottery in the small winning state that is easy to win the target and triggers the occurrence of the V winning big win is performed only by the second variable display based on the ball entering the second start winning part 33WB, after the big win If the first variable display is performed in the time-saving A mode, it is disadvantageous for the player.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 160, when the jackpot effect is started, the instruction display area HW2 displays "right hit" to recommend "right hit" to the player. be done. Accordingly, the player switches the shooting mode of the game ball from "left hitting" to "right hitting" so that the game ball passes above the variable display device unit 35 and heads toward the right side area of the variable display device unit 35. Play a jackpot game.

Here, when the player hits to the right, many game balls flow down toward the first variable winning device 32A while being guided by the nails or the like, and win the first variable winning device 32A. Become. This allows the player to acquire more game balls.

In addition, in the right area of the variable display device unit 35, in the middle of the flow path to the first variable winning device 32A, a through gate 34, a second start winning section 33WB, etc. are provided, and during the jackpot state, how many The game ball passes through the through gate 34 or enters the second starting prize winning section 33WB which is opened with the passage as a trigger.

In this embodiment, when the game ball wins the starting ball entry support lottery performed based on passing through the through gate 34, the pair of blade members 33WBb is opened, and the game ball enters the second start winning part 33WB. It becomes possible to enter the ball.

Thereby, the second variable display is retained and stored during the jackpot state, and the second variable display can be started immediately prior to the first variable display at the start of the ``time saving A mode'' after the jackpot is finished. state.

Here, in the present embodiment, if the "15R jackpot" is won by the lottery in the "normal mode" based on the ball entering the first start prize winning part 33WA, after the "15R jackpot" ends, the "fluctuation Time saving A mode for 7 displays is given. Then, when the "time saving A mode for seven variable displays" is given, the effect display device 42 performs a "rush stage effect" as shown in FIG.

On the other hand, if you win the "4R jackpot" by lottery in the "normal mode" based on the ball entering the first start prize winning part 33WA, after the "4R jackpot" ends, "Time saving for one time of variable display A mode is given. Then, when the “time saving A mode for one time of variable display” is provided, the “battle stage effect” is performed on the effect display device 42 as shown in FIG. 162 .

In the "rush stage effect" and the "battle stage effect", the variable display area HW1 is reduced and displayed downward. In the reduced variable display area HW1, the upper, middle, and lower pattern display areas are switched to the left, middle, and right pattern display areas, and the number of jackpot lines is one. On the background screen, various display effects related to the "rush stage effect" and the "battle stage effect" are performed, such as displaying various characters.

For example, in the "rush stage effect", as shown in FIG. 161, an animation (continuous effect) that continuously advances in the sea is derived during its duration (during the period during which seven times of variable display is performed). A "small win" is taught by a display mode such as a school of fish passing by or fluttering, and a "big win" is taught by a display mode such as the appearance of a large creature such as a whale or the discovery of a treasure chest.

In addition, in the "battle stage production", as shown in FIG. 162, an animation in which a humanoid character appears and fights an enemy is derived, and by winning or losing the battle, a "small win" is generated. ” or “jackpot”.

In addition, in the "rush stage effect" and "battle stage effect", since it is taught that the "small win" or "big win" is won by the above various effects, the reduced variable display area HW1 is also omitted. A configuration in which the decorative pattern is not variably displayed may be adopted. Further, in the "rush stage effect" and the "battle stage effect", a pattern effect mode in which decorative patterns are displayed and an animation effect mode in which decorative patterns are not displayed may be selected by the player.

In addition, in the "rush stage effect" and "battle stage effect", in order to win more game balls into the second start winning part 33WB and hold and store more second variable displays, the instruction display area HW2 is displayed as "Right-handed" to encourage the player to "Right-handed" as in the case of the big win.

In the "rush stage effect" and "battle stage effect", the pending display area HW3 is not set in the effect display device 42, and the pending display (holding icon of the pending icon) corresponding to the second pending display device 46B (second variable display). derivation) is not performed.

Here, even if there is a first variable display that is reserved and stored, the reserved icon corresponding to the first variable display is not displayed either. As described above, during the execution of the second variable display, if there is a game ball entering the first start winning portion 33WA as a specific condition, the first variable display corresponding to the entering ball is suspended. At the same time, the main controller 261 transmits a leading command related to the first variable display to the sub-controller 262, and the information related to the first variable display is stored in the first pending information storage area of the sub-controller 262. , “Rush stage effect”, etc., the pending icon corresponding to the first variable display is not displayed. However, although the hold icon corresponding to the first variable display is not displayed here, if there is a game ball entering the next first start winning section 33WA, which is the update condition, the first hold The update processing of the data in the information storage area is executed. Then, when the ``rush stage performance'' or the like is finished and the ``normal mode'' is returned to, the suspension icon related to the first variable display stored in the first suspension information storage area at that time is displayed.

In addition, during the execution of the "rush stage effect" and "battle stage effect", it is performed during the "time saving A mode" in which a small winning state can occur, and during that time, the second variable prize winning device 32B is specified. Basically, it suggests whether or not a big win has been won in the first winning lottery (big winning lottery) because of the game nature of aiming for the occurrence of a big win state by entering the game ball into the ball entering part 320c. Decorative patterns are not displayed. Instead, it is possible to teach the winning of the small prize by a simple display, and the teaching is performed by the lighting mode of the lamp or the voice mode. It is good also as only updating the count display of the remaining frequency|count of time saving A mode. In addition, when a direct hit jackpot is won in the second variable display, a decorative pattern may be displayed as the second effect variable display, and the combination of the jackpot patterns may be stop-displayed.

In the "time-saving A mode (rush stage production or battle stage production)", if the game ball enters the second start winning part 33WB, the first winning lottery (jackpot lottery) and the second winning lottery (small winning lottery) A lottery) is performed, and the result is displayed in the reduced variable display area HW1.

It should be noted that during the "time-saving A mode (rush stage production or battle stage production)", while the player is "right-handed", the game ball hardly enters the first start winning section 33WA. A large number of game balls are likely to enter the second start winning part 33WB in a high ball entry state within a short period of time, and the number of pending memories of the second variation display is likely to reach the upper limit soon. Therefore, when the second variable display with a relatively long effect time, such as a ready-to-win effect, is started in a state in which the number of pending memories of the second variable display has reached the upper limit, some players may find that the game ball does not move. Some players switch the shooting mode from "right-handed" to "left-handed" and enter the game ball into the first start prize-winning portion 33WA during that time. For this reason, during the "time-saving A mode" in which the player's degree of interest is high and the game value is high, a state in which the player's degree of interest is low and the game value is not so high, such as the pending memory of the first variable display, is also repeated. can occur. Of course, the first variable display is not started during the execution of the second variable display, but by suspending and storing the first variable display during this period, the display can be performed immediately after the "continuous chance stage effect" is completed. Since the suspended and stored first variable display is started, it is possible to prevent the performance from being interrupted.

Then, when winning a small winning state in which it is relatively easy to win, the ball entry opening 320b of the second variable prize winning device 32B is opened, and the game ball enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the internal area 320a. Furthermore, when the game ball entering the internal area 320a of the second variable winning device 32B enters the specific ball entering portion 320c, a V winning jackpot occurs and the first variable winning device 32A is opened. At the same time, similarly to the above, a predetermined jackpot effect is started on the effect display device 42 (see FIG. 160).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 165 (a), during the "time-saving A mode (rush stage production or battle stage production)", the "time-saving A mode" ends without the occurrence of a jackpot state, and the game mode changes to " When switching to "normal mode", the "rush stage effect" or "battle stage effect" ends in the effect display device 42, and the ball is put on hold based on the entry into the second start prize winning part 33WB during the "time saving A mode". A “continuous chance stage presentation” based on the stored second variable display is started (see FIG. 163).

Here, if at the end of the "time-saving A mode (rush stage production or battle stage production)", even one second variation display based on the ball entering the second start prize winning section 33WB is not retained and stored. , "continuous chance stage production" is not executed. Further, the duration of the "continuous chance stage effect" differs depending on the number of pending second variable displays stored at the end of the "time saving A mode (rush stage effect or battle stage effect)". Therefore, in the present embodiment, a maximum duration of four variable displays can be given.

For example, in the "continuous chance stage effect", as shown in FIG. 163, as in the "rush stage effect", during the duration (during the period during which the variable display is performed up to four times), the player continuously advances in the sea. Animation (continuous production) is derived, and a "small win" is taught by a display mode such as a school of fish passing by or fluttering, a large creature such as a whale appears, or a treasure chest is found. It is designed to teach "jackpot".

In addition, when the "continuous chance stage effect" is started, the "time-saving A mode (high ball entry state)" ends, so that the instruction display area HW2 displays " ←Left shot" is displayed. As a result, the player can change the game mode at the end of the "time-saving A mode (rush stage effect or battle stage effect)", thereby preventing problems such as wasteful consumption of game balls. can be suppressed.

As described above, when the "rush stage effect" is performed in the present embodiment, the "rush stage effect" for seven variable displays and the "continuous chance stage effect" for up to four pending times are executed. During the period, a maximum of 11 times of variable display (7 times + 4 times) will be held.

On the other hand, when the "battle stage effect" is performed, during the period in which the "battle stage effect" for one variable display and the "continuous chance stage effect" for up to four pending times are executed, a maximum of A small winning lottery for 5 times of variable display (1 time + 4 times) is performed.

In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, the small winning probability is set to about 1/7, a small winning state occurs during the "time saving A mode", and the second variable winning device 32B is in an open state. Then, with a probability of almost 100%, the game ball can enter the specific ball entry portion 320c. On the other hand, when the "battle stage production (4R jackpot)" is executed, it is less advantageous to players who have difficulty in consecutively obtaining the next jackpot. It is easy to be in a state where it is not.

However, in the present embodiment, neither the big winning lottery nor the small winning lottery is won during the execution period of the "continuous chance stage effect", that is, during the remaining hold of the second fluctuation display in the normal state. In the case, it is configured to perform a time saving lottery.

Here, if you win a time saving hit, the game mode is internally changed from the "normal mode" to the winning time saving type ("30 times time saving hit", "40 times time saving hit" or "50 times time saving hit" ) is switched to the “time saving B mode” for the number of times corresponding to.

However, the "time-saving B mode" is a game mode that does not result in a "high ball entry state", and is a game state in which the player is less interested than a big win or a small win. Therefore, even if the "time saving B mode" is won during the execution of the "continuous chance stage effect", the player's interest at this point is mainly whether or not the next big win state can be obtained. , Interrupting the "Continued chance stage production" or interrupting the "Continued chance stage production" gives priority to the "Continued chance stage production" to notify that the "time saving B mode" has been won. If the configuration is such that the game is played, there is a risk that the interest of the player will decrease.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 165 (b), during the execution of the “continuous chance stage production”, the “time saving B mode” is won, and the game mode is internally changed from the “normal mode” to the “time saving B Even if the mode is switched to "mode", the effect display device 42 does not inform the effect until the remaining hold of the second variable display is completely extinguished, and the "continuous chance stage effect" is continuously performed. .

However, according to the digestion of the remaining hold of the second variable display, the setting value of the "time saving B mode" of the number of times set corresponding to the time saving per type is subtracted (updated). For example, after the "time saving B mode" is set, when the second variable display is performed once, the set value becomes a value decremented by one.

Then, when the ``continuous chance stage performance'' ends without obtaining a big winning state, the ``normal stage performance'' is executed in the performance display device 42 if the game mode is the ``normal mode''.

On the other hand, when the "continuous chance stage effect" ends, if the game mode is the "time saving B mode", the effect display device 42 executes the "lucky stage effect" as shown in FIG.

In addition, in the present embodiment, after the end of the “continuous chance stage effect”, a sorting effect is performed to liven up the game, such as whether to shift to the “normal stage effect” or to the “lucky stage effect”. It is configured.

In addition, here, if you do not win in the time-saving lottery during the "continued chance stage production", and after the "continued chance stage production" ends, you will move to "normal mode (normal stage production)", and if you win in the time-saving lottery, After the end of the "continuous chance stage production", a different production is executed in the case of shifting to the "time saving B mode (lucky stage production)". For example, when the lottery for reducing working hours is won, an effect such as a transition to a "lucky stage effect" is performed through an effect such as a "resurrection mode" that excites the game.

With such a configuration, even if the "rush stage effect" or the like does not shift to an advantageous state for the player, it is possible to make the player have new hopes and improve the desire to play the game. As a result, it is possible to stepwisely perform an effect that gives the player a feeling of anticipation, thereby improving the interest of the player.

In the "lucky stage effect", the variable display area HW1 is set in the effect display device 42, and basically the same ornamental patterns as in the "normal mode" are variablely displayed, and only the background display is different. In other words, "left hit" is displayed in the instruction display area HW2 above the variable display area HW1.

In addition, in the pending display area HW3 below the variable display area HW1, the pending icons H461 corresponding in number to the number of pending in the first variable display are displayed. Incidentally, when the first variable display is retained and stored at the time when the "continuous chance stage effect" is completed, the display mode in the variable display area HW1 becomes a variable effect mode in which the decorative symbols are variably displayed, and the first variable display is performed. is not retained and stored, the display mode in the variable display area HW1 is a stop effect mode in which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed.

Also, in the "lucky stage effect", the number of times display area HW4 is set in the effect display device 42 (see FIG. 164). In the number display area HW4, the variable display number (the value of the second variable number counter B) corresponding to the remaining duration of the "lucky stage effect" at the present time is specified. Therefore, when the value of the second fluctuation number counter B is "28", "28 more times" is displayed in the number display area HW4.

As a result, the player can see the numerical value clearly indicated in the number display area HW4 in the "lucky stage effect", and the specific condition for generating the "time saving B mode" is satisfied in the second variable display at which timing. It is possible to grasp whether the As a result, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest of the player.

Each time the first variable display is performed, the value (the value of the second variable number counter B) is decremented by one. After that, when the set number of fluctuation display times (the numerical value of the second fluctuation number counter B) becomes 0, the ``lucky stage effect'' ends and the game returns to the ``normal mode (see FIG. 159)''.

On the other hand, in the "time saving B mode (lucky stage effect)", when a jackpot is won based on the winning of the game ball to the first start prize winning section 33WA, the "15R jackpot" is always awarded. As a result, after the end of the "15R jackpot", a "rush stage effect (a "time-saving A mode" for seven variable displays)" is provided.

Returning to the description of FIG. 151, in the lamp setting process of step SC3909, the lighting pattern of lamps/electrical decorations is set in order to synchronize with the display effect performed by the effect display device 42. FIG.

In the sound setting process of step SC3910, the output pattern of the speaker SP is set in order to synchronize with the effect display performed by the effect display device . Also, when a command related to sound such as notification of error occurrence is transmitted from main controller 261, settings for performing these controls are also performed in step SC3910.

At step SC3911, other processing such as control setting of customer waiting effect is performed. In other words, when the state in which the player is not playing continues for a specified time, it is configured to shift to the customer attracting mode or the energy saving mode, and the effect display device 42 does not display the decorative pattern as the customer waiting effect (instead, A series of moving images is displayed, or a still image is displayed), or a demonstration screen display is derived in which the screen becomes darker.

At step SC3912, an external output process is executed to transmit a control signal to each device based on the settings made at steps SC3905 to SC3911. For example, a display command is transmitted to the display control device 45 when the effect display device 42 performs a variable display of decorative symbols.

After the processing of steps SC3905 to SC3912 which is performed every 2 msec is executed, or when a negative determination is made in step SC3904, the process proceeds to step SC3913 to determine whether the RAM 553 stores power-off occurrence information. determine whether Note that the power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 261 .

If the power-off occurrence information is not stored, the process advances to step SC3914 to determine whether or not the RAM 553 has been destroyed. If the RAM 553 is not destroyed here, the process returns to step SC3901, and the normal process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 553 has been destroyed, the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step SC3913 that power-off occurrence information is stored, power-off processing is executed in step SC3915. In the power-off processing, generation of interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased. After executing the power-off process, the process loops infinitely.

As described in detail above, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there are a plurality of game states with different degrees of advantage for the player, and when they overlap, the player is suitably notified of it. is required.

As an example, in the pachinko machine 10 called a so-called 1 type 2 type mixing machine like this embodiment, the normal state (low ball entry state) in which it is difficult to enter the game ball to the second start winning part 33WB In , it is a game property that a game ball is hit to the left to enter the first start winning part 33WA and aim for a big hit state.

On the other hand, in the high ball entry state, which can be granted after the end of the big win state, and which makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start prize winning portion 33WB, the game ball is hit to the right to enter the second start prize winning portion 33WB. A small winning state is generated, a game ball is entered into the specific ball entering portion 320c in the opened second variable winning device 32B, and a big winning state is aimed at.

Under such a configuration, in the present embodiment, a predetermined effect (such as a rush stage effect) is executed in the effect display device 42 in a high-ball-entering state (time-saving A mode) after the end of the big win state, and the high-income state is executed. After the end of the ball state, during execution of the second variable display that entered the second start winning part 33WB during the high winning state and was held and stored (during the execution of the remaining hold of the second variable display), the effect display A continuous effect (continuous chance stage effect) is executed in the device 42 to improve the interest of the player.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in order to further improve interest, a specific game state (high It is configured to perform a lottery that generates a time-saving B mode that does not enter the ball state.

However, such a specific game state (time reduction B mode) is a game state in which the degree of interest for the player is low compared to the jackpot or small win, so if the specific game state (time reduction B mode) is temporarily executed during the execution of the continuous production Even if you win, you will be notified that you have won a specific game state (for example, by interrupting the continuous performance or interrupting the continuous performance) over the continuous performance (continuous chance stage performance). If a notification effect to notify is performed, there is a risk that the interest of the player will decrease.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, during the execution period of the "continuous chance stage production" after the end of the "rush stage production", when neither the big winning lottery nor the small winning lottery is won is configured to perform a time-saving lottery that can generate a “time-saving B mode”.

Then, in the "time saving B mode (lucky stage production)", when the jackpot is won based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning part 33WA, the "15R jackpot" is always given, and by extension, after the end It is configured to give a “rush stage effect (“time saving A mode” for 7 times of variable display)”.

As a result, even when a big win or a small win is not won, at least the ``time-saving B mode'' more advantageous to the player than the ``normal mode'' can be given to the player, thereby reducing the disappointment of the player and helping the player. It is possible to give new hope to the game and improve the desire to play. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, during the execution of the second variable display during the execution of the "continuous chance stage effect" (during the remaining reserved memory digestion of the second variable display, etc.), in the time reduction winning lottery of the "time reduction B mode" Even if you win, the ``time saving B mode'' is progressed internally, such as by subtracting the second variation counter B to measure the duration of the ``time saving B mode''. The corresponding notification display or the like is not executed on the performance display device 42, and after the end of the ``continuous chance stage performance'', the ``lucky stage performance'' corresponding to the remaining times of the ``time saving B mode'' at that time is executed. It has become.

As a result, it is possible to give priority to the "continuous chance stage presentation", which is more interesting to the player, and to prevent the player from losing interest.

In addition, in this embodiment, during the execution of the second variable display during execution of the "continued chance stage effect" (during the remaining reserved memory digestion of the second variable display, etc.), the time saving lottery is not won, and the "continued chance After the end of the "stage production", the game mode (shooting mode of the game ball: left-handed) when shifting to "normal mode (normal stage production)", and winning the time-saving lottery, after the "continuation chance stage production" ends The game mode (shooting mode of the game ball: left-handed hitting) is the same as in the case of shifting to the "time-saving B mode (lucky stage effect)". As a result, the player can determine (change) the game mode as soon as the ``continuous chance stage presentation'' ends, regardless of whether or not the player wins the time-saving prize, thus wasting the game balls. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of defects such as As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in the above-described embodiment, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Here, each of the following configurations may be applied to the above embodiment individually, or may be applied to the above embodiment by combining a part or all of them. Moreover, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments.

(a) It may be implemented as a pachinko machine of a type different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the above embodiment. In addition to the pachinko machine, it can also be implemented as various game machines such as an arrangement ball machine and a mammoth ball.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine switches between the starting ball-entering support state (high ball-entering state or low ball-entering state). Instead of or in addition to this, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine in which the lottery mode (high-probability mode or low-probability mode) is switched. Alternatively, or in addition to the payout of prize balls, a pachinko machine may be implemented in which points corresponding to the prize balls won by the player are given to a storage medium such as a magnetic card.

Also, the game machine may be implemented as a type of game machine that circulates game balls in the game machine and does not directly pay out the game balls to the player, that is, a so-called enclosed pachinko machine.

(b) The configuration on the board surface of the game board 30 (variable winning devices 32A, 32B, starting winning sections 33WA, 33WB, arrangement and number of through gates 34, etc.) is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and is different. configuration may be adopted.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, the through gate 34 and the second start-up winning section 33WB are arranged in the right area of the variable display unit 35 (the position where the game ball flowing down the left area of the variable display unit 35 cannot reach). However, the configuration is not limited to this, and for example, the second start-up prize winning portion 33WB may be disposed below the first start-up prize winning portion 33WA.

In addition, the first start winning part 33WA may be arranged at a position where the game ball that has flowed down the right side area of the variable display unit 35 cannot reach, or the game ball that has flowed down the left side area of the variable display unit 35 may be arranged. A configuration in which the first variable winning device 32A and the second variable winning device 32B are arranged in an unreachable position may be employed.

In addition, the vertical positional relationship of the through gate 34, the second starting prize winning section 33WB, the first variable prize winning device 32A, and the second variable prize winning device 32B is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and a different arrangement configuration may be adopted. good too. For example, the configuration may be such that the first variable winning device 32A is arranged on the upstream side of the second start-up winning section 33WB.

Also, the configuration may be such that the right general winning portion 31B provided in the right side area of the variable display unit 35 is omitted.

(c) The configuration of the second variable winning device 32B is not limited to the above embodiment, and other configurations may be adopted.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, when a small hit state occurs and the ball entry opening 320b of the second variable prize winning device 32B is opened, the game ball enters the specific ball entry portion 320c at a rate of almost 100%, resulting in a big hit. However, not limited to this, a predetermined distribution mechanism is provided inside the second variable winning device 32B, and even if a game ball enters the second variable winning device 32B, a predetermined ratio It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the ball does not enter the specific ball-entering portion 320c, and a deviation occurs.

(d) The configuration related to various hits (big hit, small hit, time saving hit) is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and other different configurations may be adopted.

For example, in the above embodiment, three types of jackpots, "15R jackpot", "8R jackpot" and "4R jackpot" are set, but not limited to this, the number of rounds, opening time, game mode given after completion It is good also as a structure in which other jackpot states with different etc. generate|occur|produce.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the game ball wins the first start prize winning portion 33WA and when the second start prize winning portion 33WB wins, the jackpot type distribution given when winning the winning lottery are configured differently, but the ratio is not limited to the above embodiment, and different distribution ratios may be used.

In addition, when the game ball wins the first start prize winning portion 33WA and when the game ball wins the second start prize winning portion 33WB, the distribution ratio of the jackpot type given when winning the lottery is the same. There may be.

Of course, the gaming machine may be implemented as a gaming machine in which only one type of jackpot state (for example, 15R jackpot) occurs instead of a gaming machine in which multiple types of jackpot states can occur.

In addition, regarding the small win, the game machine may be configured such that a plurality of types of small win states with different numbers of rounds, opening times, and the like can occur.

In addition, with respect to the time saving hit, in the above-described embodiment, three types of time saving hits, "30 time saving hit", "40 times saving time hit" and "50 times saving time hit" are set, but not limited to this, it is given. Other time saving hits different in the number of working time saving times, etc. may be set.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, when performing the time saving lottery, it is configured to use the success or failure random number counter CC1 used in the big winning lottery and the small winning lottery, but not limited to this, the random number counter for the time saving lottery It is also possible to provide a configuration in which a time-saving lottery is separately performed when a big winning lottery or a small winning lottery is not won. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which performs success-or-fail lottery per time saving, and classification lottery separately.

Incidentally, the winning probabilities associated with various lotteries (soft lottery processing, mechanical lottery, etc.) in pachinko machines are appropriately set for each model, and any value can be adopted.

(e) The configuration related to various game modes (normal mode, time saving A mode, time saving B mode) is not limited to the above embodiment, and other different configurations may be adopted.

For example, in the above embodiment, regardless of the jackpot type, after the end of the jackpot "time saving A mode (variation time reduction mode with start ball support)" is always given, but not limited to this, the jackpot type Depending on the situation, the "time saving A mode" may not be given, and the "normal mode" or "time saving B mode (starting ball support no fluctuation time reduction mode)" may be given.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, only the switching of the winning support mode ("high support mode" or "low support mode") is performed. mode” or “low-probability mode”) may be switched.

(f) Configurations related to various presentation displays (for example, normal stage presentation, battle stage presentation, rush stage presentation, continuous chance stage presentation, lucky stage presentation, etc.) are not limited to the above-described embodiments, and other different configurations. may be adopted.

For example, in the "lucky stage effect", a continuous effect may be executed over a plurality of times of variable display, like the "rush stage effect".

In addition, although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, in the case of executing a continuous effect over a plurality of variable displays, a series of continuous effects during the duration of the continuous effect is performed without performing a variation pattern lottery etc. for each time. A variation pattern table that defines variation patterns (for example, variation patterns for deviation variation for 30 variation displays) may be used to perform effect variation display.

More specifically, a variation pattern table that defines the operation time of each variation display during the duration of the continuous effect (for example, the variation time of the first variation time is "5 seconds", the variation time of the second variation time is "7 seconds", . . , a variation pattern table defining variation times for 30 times of variation display, such as variation time “10 seconds” for the 30th variation, may be used to perform a series of effect variation displays. In other words, a configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined variable display time (variation time for failure variation) is set according to the number of variable displays scheduled to be executed.

Then, when a jackpot is won in a predetermined number of fluctuation displays during the period in which the series of effect fluctuation displays are performed, a fluctuation pattern table that defines fluctuation patterns for loss fluctuation for 30 times of the above-mentioned fluctuation displays is generated. It is also possible to disregard it and execute the variation display with the variation pattern obtained by referring to the variation pattern table for big hits.

(g) In the above-described embodiment, after the end of the “continuous chance stage effect”, a distribution effect is performed to make the game livelier, such as whether to shift to the “normal stage effect” or to the “lucky stage effect”. However, it is not limited to this, and may be configured to omit the distribution effect.

Also, in the above embodiment, if you do not win in the time-saving lottery during the "continuous chance stage production" here, and shift to "normal mode (normal stage production)" after the "continuous chance stage production" ends, and the time-saving hit After winning the lottery and moving to the "time saving B mode (lucky stage production)" after the "continuation chance stage production" is completed, a different production is executed. The same production may be executed in the case of shifting to the "normal mode (normal stage production)" after the end of the "stage production" and in the case of shifting to the "time saving B mode (lucky stage production)".

(h) The configuration related to the specific effect is not limited to the above embodiment, and other configurations may be adopted. For example, in the "continuous chance stage effect" as a specific effect in the above embodiment, an animation (continuous effect) that continuously advances in the sea is derived for the duration (during the period in which the variable display is performed up to four times). It is configured to be

The specific effect is not limited to this, as long as the player can at least recognize that it is during that period.

In addition, the "lucky stage effect" performed based on the end of the specific effect may be executed immediately after the specific effect ends, or may be executed after executing various processes related to the end of the specific effect during a predetermined period. It may be configured to be

(i) The configuration of various counting means (first counting means, second counting means) is not limited to the above embodiment, and other configurations may be adopted.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, numerical data is set for each of the fluctuation counters A and B, and the number of remaining fluctuations is grasped by subtracting the numerical data. Any configuration may be adopted as long as it is a configuration that can be counted. For example, by setting a flag each time the variable display is performed and counting the number of flags, the number of various counting targets may be grasped.

In addition, the first variation counter A in the above embodiment measures the duration of the "time-saving A mode" (the remaining number of variations until reaching the upper limit), and is retained and stored at the end of the "time-saving A mode". Although it is configured to be used for measurement of the remaining execution period of the second variable display (remaining pending digestion period, maximum 4 times), separate counters may be provided for each.

In addition, in the above embodiment, in measuring the duration of the "time-saving B mode" (the remaining number of fluctuations until reaching the upper limit), the second fluctuation counter B is set to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 30 times). , By subtracting this, it is configured to grasp the remaining number of fluctuations. By comparing, it is good also as a structure which grasps the remaining number of times of a change. In such a case, the set value (upper limit value) stored in the predetermined storage area is updated (subtracted) each time the second variable display is performed. Then, if the set value is greater than 0 at the end of the “time-saving A mode”, the “lucky stage effect” is executed, and if it is less than 0, it is not executed.

(j) In addition to the above-described embodiment, a configuration may be provided in which, in addition to the effect display device 42, a means for informing or suggesting that effect is provided when the "time saving win" is won. For example, the frame lamp 102 or the like may be used to suggest that a "time saving win" will occur. As a result, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of expectation that it will develop into a "time-saving win", and to further improve the interest of the player. Alternatively, the suggestion may be made by using the speaker SP as the voice generating means.

[Appendix]
Technical ideas that can be grasped from the above embodiments will be described below together with their effects.

Conventional problem WA. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines have a plurality of game states with different degrees of advantage.

As a type of gaming machine, a game is played by shooting game balls into a game area, a lottery is conducted based on the game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means, and when a predetermined result is obtained by the lottery. , a pachinko machine that generates a game state advantageous to the player is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-31769).

Game states such as normal state, time saving state with electric sapo (electric chew support), time saving state without electric sapo, variable state with time saving, variable state without time saving are basically established independently, and in between When the condition is established, the game state is shifted to a higher game state or to a lower game state.

Further, depending on the gaming machine, a higher game state may occur in duplicate during execution of a predetermined game state.

In this case, it is desirable for the player that a higher game state occurs. It can provide great interest.

However, there is no precedent for a gaming machine in which lower-level game states are overlapped in the middle, and in such a gaming machine, it is necessary to make a suitable notification without reducing the player's interest.

For example, as one type of pachinko machine, a pachinko machine called a one-kind-two-kind machine is known. Such a pachinko machine includes, for example, first start ball entry means for aiming by shooting (left hitting) a game ball to the left side area of the game area, and first start ball entry means based on the entry of the game ball to the first start ball entry means. A first display device for performing a variable display, a first holding means capable of holding the first variable display for a predetermined number of times, and a second starting ball entry means for shooting (right hitting) a game ball to the right side area of the game area. a second display device for performing a second variable display based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting ball entry means; a second holding means capable of holding the second variable display for a predetermined number of times; An opening/closing member that changes between an open state in which a game ball can enter the starting ball entering means and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter is provided, and the game ball enters the first starting ball entering means or the second starting ball entering means. A jackpot lottery is performed based on the ball, and when a predetermined result is obtained by the lottery, a jackpot state advantageous to the player can be generated, and the game ball is entered into the second start ball entry means. A small winning lottery is performed based on the ball, and when a predetermined result is obtained by the lottery, a predetermined variable winning device is opened to generate a small winning state, and a ball enters the variable winning device. It is configured to be able to generate a big win state when a ball enters a specific ball entry means (V winning hole).

In general, in such a pachinko machine, in a normal state (low support state) in which it is difficult to enter a game ball into the second starting ball entering means, the game ball is hit left to the first starting ball entering means. It becomes a playability such as entering a ball and aiming for a jackpot state.

On the other hand, in the high support state that can be given after the end of the jackpot state, in which the game ball is likely to enter the second starting ball entering means, the game ball is entered into the second starting ball entering means by hitting rightward and small. A winning state is generated, a game ball is entered into a specific ball entering means (V winning port) in the opened variable winning device, and a big winning state is aimed at.

Under such a configuration, in recent years, in the high support state after the end of the jackpot state, a predetermined effect (rush effect, etc.) is executed on the variable display means, and after the end of the high support state, during the high support state. During the execution of the second variable display that has entered the second starting ball entry means and has been held and stored (during the execution of the remaining hold of the second variable display), continuous production (continuous chance production, etc.) is executed in the variable display means. In addition, there are gaming machines designed to increase the interest of players.

Furthermore, in order to further improve interest, while the continuous performance is being executed, a specific game state (for example, the time when the high support state does not occur) that is not more advantageous to the player than the jackpot, small win, high support state, etc. It is also conceivable to add a configuration that performs a lottery that generates a short mode, etc.

However, since such a specific game state is a game state in which the degree of interest for the player is low compared to the jackpot, small win, etc., even if the specific game state is won during the execution of the continuous effect, the corresponding game state Prioritizing the continuous performance (for example, by interrupting the continuous performance or interrupting the continuous performance), if a notification performance is performed to notify that the specific game state has been won, it will be difficult for the player. Interest may decline.

Therefore, the conventional pachinko machines are required to be more interesting for players.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in order to solve the problems exemplified above. To provide a game machine capable of improving interest.

Means WA1. a first executing means capable of executing a first game rotation operation when a first starting condition is satisfied;
a second executing means capable of executing a second game rotation operation upon establishment of a second starting condition different from the first starting condition;
a first storage means capable of storing the establishment of the first starting condition up to a predetermined upper limit;
a second storage means capable of storing the establishment of the second starting condition up to a predetermined upper limit;
A game machine comprising auxiliary means capable of switching a state between a first auxiliary state that facilitates establishment of the second starting condition and a second auxiliary state that makes establishment of the second starting condition difficult, wherein ,
a first counting means capable of executing a count corresponding to the second game rotation motion in a predetermined game state;
subtraction means capable of subtracting predetermined numerical information of the first counting means based on establishment of a predetermined subtraction condition;
effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect as a corresponding effect during execution of the second game rotation motion in the predetermined game state;
Counting corresponding to the specific game can be executed when a specific condition capable of generating a specific game state capable of executing the specific game is established during the execution of the second game rotation operation during execution of the specific effect. an information setting means capable of setting specific numerical information in the second counting means;
update means for updating the specific numerical information of the second counting means based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition;
During execution of the second game rotation operation during execution of the specific effect, when the specific condition is satisfied, at least the first counting means is subtracted and the specific effect is maintained during a predetermined state until it reaches a specific value. a continuation means capable of continuing the
Specific numerical information is set in the second counting means when the specific condition is satisfied during execution of the second game rotation operation during execution of the specific effect, and the set specific numerical value of the second counting means. The specific numerical information of the second counting means is updated when the update condition is established during the execution of the second game rotation operation during execution of the specific effect without executing the specific correspondence display corresponding to the information. The specific correspondence display corresponding to the updated specific numerical information of the second counting means is not executed, and the specific correspondence display corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time based on the end of the specific effect. and a specific correspondence display executing means for executing a.

According to the above means WA1, during execution of the second game rotation operation (during consumption of the remaining reserved memory of the second game rotation operation, etc.) during execution of the specific performance (continuous chance performance, etc.), the specific game can be specified. Even if a specific condition that can generate a game state (for example, a time reduction mode that does not result in a high support state) is established, such as starting to count the second game rotation operation related to the specific game state, internally Although the specific game state is advanced, the specific correspondence display such as the notification performance corresponding to this is not executed, and after the specific performance is finished, the specific correspondence display is executed for the remaining number of times at that point.

As a result, even when lower-level game states overlap in the middle, the player can preferentially carry out the specific performance with a higher degree of interest, which is preferable while suppressing the decline in interest of the player. can be notified.

Means WA2. a launching means for launching a game ball;
a game area in which the launched game ball is guided;
A game ball is provided so as to be able to enter a position where a game ball fired (for example, "left-handed") by the shooting means can reach at least a first area of the game area. a first starting ball entry means;
A game ball is provided so as to be able to enter at a position where the game ball fired (for example, "right-handed") by the shooting means can reach at least the second area in the game area. a second starting ball entry means;
A first lottery means for performing a first winning lottery (for example, a jackpot lottery) with a first winning probability due to the entry of a game ball into the first start ball entry means or the second start ball entry means;
a second lottery means for performing a second winning lottery (for example, a small winning lottery) with a second winning probability higher than the first winning probability due to the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entering means; ,
After performing the first variation display as the first game rotation operation, the lottery of the first win-or-fail lottery resulting from the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry means that satisfies the first start condition. a first special display means as the first execution means for performing stop display in a specific mode based on the result;
After performing the second variation display as the second game rotation operation, the first winning lottery or the a second special display means as the second execution means for performing a stop display in a specific mode based on the lottery result of the second lottery;
Generation of a first special game state for generating a first special game state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot state in which the player obtains a large number of game balls) when a winning result is obtained by the first lottery. means and
a second special game state generating means for generating a second special game state (for example, a small winning state) that is less advantageous to the player than the first special game state when a winning result is obtained by the second lottery; ,
an open state provided at a position where a game ball shot by the shooting means can reach at least to pass through the second area, and a game ball flowing down the second area can enter; a first special variable ball entry means (for example, a jackpot winning device) having at least one opening/closing member that can be displaced between a closed state in which a ball cannot be entered;
an open state provided at a position where a game ball shot by the shooting means can reach at least to pass through the second area, and a game ball flowing down the second area can enter; a second special variable ball entry means (for example, a small prize winning device) having at least one opening/closing member that can be displaced between a closed state in which a ball cannot be entered;
a first opening/closing control means for controlling opening/closing of the first special variable ball entry means when the first special game state occurs;
a second opening/closing control means for controlling opening/closing of the second special variable ball entry means when the second special game state occurs;
a specific ball-entering section into which the gaming ball entered by the second special variable ball-entering means can enter;
The game according to means WA1, further comprising specific ball-entering portion first special game state generating means for generating the first special game state when a game ball enters the specific ball-entering portion. machine.

According to the means WA2, normally, the player plays the game in the first shooting mode in which the game ball is shot toward the first area (first starting ball entry means), and the first special game state. After the is generated, the game is switched to the second shooting mode in which the game ball is shot toward the second area (second starting ball entry means), and the game is played, according to the game state. It is configured to change the mode.

As a result, the configuration related to the means WA1 can be realized with a simpler configuration, and the diversification of games can be achieved. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Means WA3. Trigger ball entry means (for example, a through gate) provided at a position where only game balls fired by the shooting means can reach so as to pass through the second area,
The auxiliary means is
When a predetermined release condition is satisfied due to the entry or passage of the game ball into the trigger ball entry means, the second auxiliary state (low support state) is set such that the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter. Means WA2 characterized by being at least one opening/closing member displaceable between a closed state and an open state in which a game ball can enter or is easily entered as the first auxiliary state (high support state). The gaming machine described in .

According to the means WA3, the opportunity ball entry means is provided at a position where only the game ball shot by the shooting means to pass through the second area can be reached, so that the action and effect of the means WA2 are more reliable. can be

Means WA4. The first special game state generating means is
A plurality of types of the first special game states having different game values (for example, high support state, number of support, number of rounds, etc.) to be given to the player can be generated,
The entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry means is more important than the first special game state generated based on the first lottery resulting from the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry means. The first special game state generated based on the first winning lottery, and the first special game state generated due to the entry of the game ball into the specific ball entry section are the player's A gaming machine according to means WA2 or WA3, characterized in that the gaming machine is constructed so as to increase the rate at which a more advantageous gaming value (for example, a high support state) is imparted.

According to the means WA4, the case where the game ball enters the second start ball entering means and the game ball enters the specific ball entering section is higher than the case where the game ball enters the first start ball entering means. In the case, the probability of winning the first special game state with higher game value (distribution probability) is higher.

As a result, when the predetermined opening condition is satisfied, a state is created in which more game balls are likely to enter the second start ball entry means, so that the player can obtain the first game ball having a more advantageous game value. It becomes possible to obtain more special game states.

Means WA5. As the first storage means, the lottery result of the first lottery resulting from the entry of the game ball into the first starting ball entry means is stored, and executed by the first special display means based on the lottery result. a first holding means for waiting the first variable display to be executed until after the end of the first variable display that has already been executed;
As the second storage means, the lottery result of the first lottery or the second lottery resulting from the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry means is stored, and the second lottery is stored based on the lottery result. a second holding means for waiting the second variable display executed by the special display means until after the already executed second variable display is completed;
Means WA2 to WA4, wherein when there is a variable display on standby by said first holding means and said second holding means, the variable display on standby by said second holding means is preferentially executed. The gaming machine according to any one of

According to the means WA5, when the game is played in the second shooting mode in which the game ball is shot toward the second area (second starting ball entry means), more game balls can be released in a shorter period of time. A ball can be entered into the second starting ball entry means, and more first win/fail lotteries and second win/fail lotteries can be executed in a shorter period of time. As a result, it is possible to further improve interest.

Means WA6. According to any one of the means WA1 to WA5, the specific correspondence display executing means, when executing the specific correspondence display, clearly indicates a numerical value corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time. game machine.

According to the means WA6, effects similar to those of the means WB1, which will be described later, are achieved.

Means WA7. A game mode after the end of the specific effect when the specific condition is met during execution of the second game rotating motion during execution of the specific effect, and the second game rotating motion during execution of the specific effect. is the same as the game mode after the end of the specific effect when the specific condition is not satisfied during the execution of .

According to the means WA7, effects similar to those of the means WC1, which will be described later, are exhibited.

Means WA8. During execution of the second game rotation operation during execution of the specific effect, the effect display mode after the end of the specific effect is different depending on whether the specific condition is satisfied or not satisfied. A gaming machine according to any one of means WA1 to WA7, characterized in that it is configured differently.

According to the means WA8, effects similar to those of means WD1, which will be described later, can be achieved.

Means WA9. The gaming machine according to any one of the means WA1 to WA8, characterized in that, during the specific game state, a predetermined time for game rotation motions is set according to the number of game rotation motions scheduled to be executed.

According to the stage WA9, effects similar to those of means WE1, which will be described later, are exhibited.

Means WA10. A means capable of notifying or suggesting that fact, in addition to the specific correspondence display, when the specific condition is satisfied during execution of the second game rotation operation during execution of the specific effect. A game machine according to any one of the means WA1 to WA9 characterized by the above.

According to WA10, the same effect as means WF1, which will be described later, can be achieved.

Conventional problem WB. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines have a plurality of game states with different degrees of advantage.

As a type of gaming machine, a game is played by shooting game balls into a game area, a lottery is conducted based on the game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means, and when a predetermined result is obtained by the lottery. , a pachinko machine that generates a game state advantageous to the player is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-31769).

Game states such as normal state, time saving state with electric sapo (electric chew support), time saving state without electric sapo, variable state with time saving, variable state without time saving are basically established independently, and in between When the condition is established, the game state is shifted to a higher game state or to a lower game state.

Further, depending on the gaming machine, a higher game state may occur in duplicate during execution of a predetermined game state.

In this case, it is desirable for the player that a higher game state occurs. It can provide great interest.

However, there is no precedent for a gaming machine in which lower-level game states are overlapped in the middle, and in such a gaming machine, it is necessary to make a suitable notification without reducing the player's interest.

For example, under the configuration related to the 1 type 2 type mixing machine described in the conventional problem WA, in recent years, in the high support state after the end of the jackpot state, a predetermined effect (such as a rush effect) is performed on the variable display means. At the same time, after the end of the high support state, during execution of the second variable display that was held and stored by entering the second start ball entry means during the high support state (while the remaining hold of the second variable display is being consumed) There are also gaming machines that aim to increase the interest of the player by executing continuous effects (continuous chance effects, etc.) on the variable display means.

Furthermore, in order to further improve interest, while the continuous performance is being executed, a specific game state (for example, the time when the high support state does not occur) that is not more advantageous to the player than the jackpot, small win, high support state, etc. It is also conceivable to add a configuration that performs a lottery that generates a short mode, etc.

However, since such a specific game state is a game state in which the degree of interest for the player is low compared to the jackpot, small win, etc., even if the specific game state is won during the execution of the continuous effect, the corresponding game state Prioritizing the continuous performance (for example, by interrupting the continuous performance or interrupting the continuous performance), if a notification performance is performed to notify that the specific game state has been won, it will be difficult for the player. Interest may decline.

On the other hand, for example, during the execution of the second variable display (during the consumption of the remaining reserved memory of the second variable display, etc.) during the execution of the continuous effect (continuous chance effect, etc.), the specific game state (for example, the high support state) When a specific condition that can generate a short mode, etc.) is established, the specific game state is progressed internally, such as starting the counting of the second variable display related to the specific game state, but the notification effect corresponding to this , etc. is not executed, and after the end of the continuous effect, the specific corresponding display is executed for the remaining number of times at that point, the specific corresponding display is suddenly started after the continuous effect is finished. configuration.

Also, in the specific correspondence display, it is assumed that an effect such as displaying a false value that is not a numerical value corresponding to the updated numerical information of the counting means (e.g. "29") (e.g. display effect such as "10 times remaining?") In the case of such a configuration, the player may not be able to grasp at what timing the second variable display the specific condition that caused the specific game state was established, and may have a sense of distrust.

Therefore, the conventional pachinko machines are required to be more interesting for players.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in order to solve the problems exemplified above. To provide a game machine capable of improving interest.

Means WB1. a first executing means capable of executing a first game rotation operation when a first starting condition is satisfied;
a second executing means capable of executing a second game rotation operation upon establishment of a second starting condition different from the first starting condition;
a first storage means capable of storing the establishment of the first starting condition up to a predetermined upper limit;
a second storage means capable of storing the establishment of the second starting condition up to a predetermined upper limit;
A game machine comprising auxiliary means capable of switching a state between a first auxiliary state that facilitates establishment of the second starting condition and a second auxiliary state that makes establishment of the second starting condition difficult, wherein ,
a first counting means capable of executing a count corresponding to the second game rotation motion in a predetermined game state;
subtraction means capable of subtracting predetermined numerical information of the first counting means based on establishment of a predetermined subtraction condition;
effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect as a corresponding effect during execution of the second game rotation motion in the predetermined game state;
Counting corresponding to the specific game can be executed when a specific condition capable of generating a specific game state capable of executing the specific game is established during the execution of the second game rotation operation during execution of the specific effect. an information setting means capable of setting specific numerical information in the second counting means;
update means for updating the specific numerical information of the second counting means based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition;
During execution of the second game rotation operation during execution of the specific effect, when the specific condition is satisfied, at least the first counting means is subtracted and the specific effect is maintained during a predetermined state until it reaches a specific value. a continuation means capable of continuing the
Specific numerical information is set in the second counting means when the specific condition is satisfied during execution of the second game rotation operation during execution of the specific effect, and the set specific numerical value of the second counting means. The specific numerical information of the second counting means is updated when the update condition is established during the execution of the second game rotation operation during execution of the specific effect without executing the specific correspondence display corresponding to the information. The specific correspondence display corresponding to the updated specific numerical information of the second counting means is not executed, and the specific correspondence display corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time based on the end of the specific effect. and a specific correspondence display execution means for executing
The specific correspondence display execution means is characterized in that, when executing the specific correspondence display, a numerical value corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time is indicated.

According to the means WB1, the same effect as the means WA1 can be obtained. In addition, in this means, when executing the specific correspondence display, the numerical value corresponding to the updated numerical value information of the second counting means (for example, "29") is indicated (for example, a display effect such as "remaining 29 times" perform) configuration.

As a result, the player can grasp, by backward calculation, which timing of the second game rotation operation the specific condition that caused the specific game state was established, by looking at the numerical value specified in the specific correspondence display. becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest of the player.

Means WB2. a launching means for launching a game ball;
a game area in which the launched game ball is guided;
A game ball is provided so as to be able to enter a position where a game ball fired (for example, "left-handed") by the shooting means can reach at least a first area of the game area. a first starting ball entry means;
A game ball is provided so as to be able to enter at a position where the game ball fired (for example, "right-handed") by the shooting means can reach at least the second area in the game area. a second starting ball entry means;
A first lottery means for performing a first winning lottery (for example, a jackpot lottery) with a first winning probability due to the entry of a game ball into the first start ball entry means or the second start ball entry means;
a second lottery means for performing a second winning lottery (for example, a small winning lottery) with a second winning probability higher than the first winning probability due to the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entering means; ,
After performing the first variation display as the first game rotation operation, the lottery of the first win-or-fail lottery resulting from the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry means that satisfies the first start condition. a first special display means as the first execution means for performing stop display in a specific mode based on the result;
After performing the second variation display as the second game rotation operation, the first winning lottery or the a second special display means as the second execution means for performing a stop display in a specific mode based on the lottery result of the second lottery;
Generation of a first special game state for generating a first special game state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot state in which the player obtains a large number of game balls) when a winning result is obtained by the first lottery. means and
a second special game state generating means for generating a second special game state (for example, a small winning state) that is less advantageous to the player than the first special game state when a winning result is obtained by the second lottery; ,
an open state provided at a position where a game ball shot by the shooting means can reach at least to pass through the second area, and a game ball flowing down the second area can enter; a first special variable ball entry means (for example, a jackpot winning device) having at least one opening/closing member that can be displaced between a closed state in which a ball cannot be entered;
an open state provided at a position where a game ball shot by the shooting means can reach at least to pass through the second area, and a game ball flowing down the second area can enter; a second special variable ball entry means (for example, a small prize winning device) having at least one opening/closing member that can be displaced between a closed state in which a ball cannot be entered;
a first opening/closing control means for controlling opening/closing of the first special variable ball entry means when the first special game state occurs;
a second opening/closing control means for controlling opening/closing of the second special variable ball entry means when the second special game state occurs;
a specific ball-entering section into which the gaming ball entered by the second special variable ball-entering means can enter;
The game according to means WA1, further comprising specific ball-entering portion first special game state generating means for generating the first special game state when a game ball enters the specific ball-entering portion. machine.

According to the means WB2, the same effects as those of the means WA2 can be obtained.

Means WB3. Trigger ball entry means (for example, a through gate) provided at a position where only game balls fired by the shooting means can reach so as to pass through the second area,
The auxiliary means is
When a predetermined release condition is satisfied due to the entry or passage of the game ball into the trigger ball entry means, the second auxiliary state (low support state) is set such that the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter. Means WB2 comprising at least one opening/closing member displaceable between a closed state and an open state in which a game ball can enter or is easily entered as the first auxiliary state (high support state). The gaming machine described in .

According to the means WB3, the same effect as that of the means WA3 can be obtained.

Means WB4. The first special game state generating means is
A plurality of types of the first special game states having different game values (for example, high support state, number of support, number of rounds, etc.) to be given to the player can be generated,
The entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry means is more important than the first special game state generated based on the first lottery resulting from the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry means. The first special game state generated based on the first winning lottery, and the first special game state generated due to the entry of the game ball into the specific ball entry section are the player's A gaming machine according to means WB2 or WB3, characterized in that the gaming machine is constructed so as to increase the rate at which a more advantageous gaming value (for example, a high support state) is given.

According to the means WB4, the same effect as that of the means WA4 can be obtained.

Means WB5. As the first storage means, the lottery result of the first lottery resulting from the entry of the game ball into the first starting ball entry means is stored, and executed by the first special display means based on the lottery result. a first holding means for waiting the first variable display to be executed until after the end of the first variable display that has already been executed;
As the second storage means, the lottery result of the first lottery or the second lottery resulting from the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry means is stored, and the second lottery is stored based on the lottery result. a second holding means for waiting the second variable display executed by the special display means until after the already executed second variable display is completed;
Means WB2 to Means WB4, wherein when there is a variable display waiting by the first holding means and the second holding means, the variable display waiting by the second holding means is preferentially executed. The gaming machine according to any one of

According to the means WB5, the same effect as that of the means WA5 can be obtained.

Means WB6. A game mode after the end of the specific effect when the specific condition is met during execution of the second game rotating motion during execution of the specific effect, and the second game rotating motion during execution of the specific effect. The gaming machine according to any one of the means WB1 to WB5, characterized in that the game mode after the end of the specific effect when the specific condition is not established during the execution of is the same as the game mode.

According to the means WB6, effects similar to those of means WC1, which will be described later, can be achieved.

Means WB7. During execution of the second game rotation operation during execution of the specific effect, the effect display mode after the end of the specific effect is different depending on whether the specific condition is satisfied or not satisfied. A game machine according to any one of means WB1 to WB6, characterized in that it is configured differently.

According to the means WB7, effects similar to those of means WD1, which will be described later, can be achieved.

Means WB8. The gaming machine according to any one of means WB1 to WB7, wherein, during the specific game state, a predetermined game rotation time is set according to the number of game rotations scheduled to be executed.

According to the stage WB8, effects similar to those of means WE1, which will be described later, are exhibited.

Means WB9. A means capable of notifying or suggesting that fact, in addition to the specific correspondence display, when the specific condition is satisfied during execution of the second game rotation operation during execution of the specific effect. A gaming machine according to any one of means WB1 to WB8 characterized by the above.

According to WB9, the same effects as those of means WF1, which will be described later, are achieved.

Conventional problem WC. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines have a plurality of game states with different degrees of advantage.

As a type of gaming machine, a game is played by shooting game balls into a game area, a lottery is conducted based on the game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means, and when a predetermined result is obtained by the lottery. , a pachinko machine that generates a game state advantageous to the player is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-31769).

Game states such as normal state, time saving state with electric sapo (electric chew support), time saving state without electric sapo, variable state with time saving, variable state without time saving are basically established independently, and in between When the condition is established, the game state is shifted to a higher game state or to a lower game state.

Further, depending on the gaming machine, a higher game state may occur in duplicate during execution of a predetermined game state.

In this case, it is desirable for the player that a higher game state occurs. It can provide great interest.

However, there is no precedent for a gaming machine in which lower-level game states are overlapped in the middle, and in such a gaming machine, it is necessary to make a suitable notification without reducing the player's interest.

For example, under the configuration related to the 1 type 2 type mixing machine described in the conventional problem WA, in recent years, in the high support state after the end of the jackpot state, a predetermined effect (such as a rush effect) is performed on the variable display means. At the same time, after the end of the high support state, during execution of the second variable display that was held and stored by entering the second start ball entry means during the high support state (while the remaining hold of the second variable display is being consumed) There are also gaming machines that aim to increase the interest of the player by executing continuous effects (continuous chance effects, etc.) on the variable display means.

Furthermore, in order to further improve interest, while the continuous performance is being executed, a specific game state (for example, the time when the high support state does not occur) that is not more advantageous to the player than the jackpot, small win, high support state, etc. It is also conceivable to add a configuration that performs a lottery that generates a short mode, etc.

However, since such a specific game state is a game state in which the degree of interest for the player is low compared to the jackpot, small win, etc., even if the specific game state is won during the execution of the continuous effect, the corresponding game state Prioritizing the continuous performance (for example, by interrupting the continuous performance or interrupting the continuous performance), if a notification performance is performed to notify that the specific game state has been won, it will be difficult for the player. Interest may decline.

In addition, for example, during the execution of the second variable display (during the consumption of the remaining reserved memory of the second variable display, etc.) during the execution of the continuous effect (continuous chance effect, etc.), the time during which the specific game state (for example, the high support state) does not occur is shortened. mode, etc.) is satisfied and when the specific condition is not satisfied, and if the game mode after the end of the continuous effect (for example, the game ball shooting mode) is different, the player However, when the continuous effect is finished, the game mode cannot be determined (changed), and there is a possibility that problems such as wasteful consumption of game balls may occur.

Therefore, the conventional pachinko machines are required to be more interesting for players.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in order to solve the problems exemplified above. To provide a game machine capable of improving interest.

Means WC1. a first executing means capable of executing a first game rotation operation when a first starting condition is satisfied;
a second executing means capable of executing a second game rotation operation upon establishment of a second starting condition different from the first starting condition;
a first storage means capable of storing the establishment of the first starting condition up to a predetermined upper limit;
a second storage means capable of storing the establishment of the second starting condition up to a predetermined upper limit;
A game machine comprising auxiliary means capable of switching a state between a first auxiliary state that facilitates establishment of the second starting condition and a second auxiliary state that makes establishment of the second starting condition difficult, wherein ,
a first counting means capable of executing a count corresponding to the second game rotation motion in a predetermined game state;
subtraction means capable of subtracting predetermined numerical information of the first counting means based on establishment of a predetermined subtraction condition;
effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect as a corresponding effect during execution of the second game rotation motion in the predetermined game state;
Counting corresponding to the specific game can be executed when a specific condition capable of generating a specific game state capable of executing the specific game is established during the execution of the second game rotation operation during execution of the specific effect. an information setting means capable of setting specific numerical information in the second counting means;
update means for updating the specific numerical information of the second counting means based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition;
During execution of the second game rotation operation during execution of the specific effect, when the specific condition is satisfied, at least the first counting means is subtracted and the specific effect is maintained during a predetermined state until it reaches a specific value. a continuation means capable of continuing the
Specific numerical information is set in the second counting means when the specific condition is satisfied during execution of the second game rotation operation during execution of the specific effect, and the set specific numerical value of the second counting means. The specific numerical information of the second counting means is updated when the update condition is established during the execution of the second game rotation operation during execution of the specific effect without executing the specific correspondence display corresponding to the information. The specific correspondence display corresponding to the updated specific numerical information of the second counting means is not executed, and the specific correspondence display corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time based on the end of the specific effect. and a specific correspondence display execution means for executing
A game mode after the end of the specific effect when the specific condition is met during execution of the second game rotating motion during execution of the specific effect, and the second game rotating motion during execution of the specific effect. is the same as the game mode after the end of the specific effect when the specific condition is not satisfied during the execution of.

According to the means WC1, the same effect as the means WA1 can be obtained. In addition, in this means, during the execution of the second game rotation operation during execution of the specific effect, when the specific condition is satisfied, the game mode after the specific effect (for example, the game ball shooting mode) and the specific condition is the same as the game mode after the end of the specific effect when is not established.

As a result, regardless of whether or not the specific condition is satisfied, the player can decide (change) the game mode when the specific effect is finished, thereby avoiding wasteful consumption of game balls. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of defects. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

Means WC2. a launching means for launching a game ball;
a game area in which the launched game ball is guided;
A game ball is provided so as to be able to enter a position where a game ball fired (for example, "left-handed") by the shooting means can reach at least a first area of the game area. a first starting ball entry means;
A game ball is provided so as to be able to enter at a position where the game ball fired (for example, "right-handed") by the shooting means can reach at least the second area in the game area. a second starting ball entry means;
A first lottery means for performing a first winning lottery (for example, a jackpot lottery) with a first winning probability due to the entry of a game ball into the first start ball entry means or the second start ball entry means;
a second lottery means for performing a second winning lottery (for example, a small winning lottery) with a second winning probability higher than the first winning probability due to the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entering means; ,
After performing the first variation display as the first game rotation operation, the lottery of the first win-or-fail lottery resulting from the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry means that satisfies the first start condition. a first special display means as the first execution means for performing stop display in a specific mode based on the result;
After performing the second variation display as the second game rotation operation, the first winning lottery or the a second special display means as the second execution means for performing a stop display in a specific mode based on the lottery result of the second lottery;
Generation of a first special game state for generating a first special game state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot state in which the player obtains a large number of game balls) when a winning result is obtained by the first lottery. means and
a second special game state generating means for generating a second special game state (for example, a small winning state) that is less advantageous to the player than the first special game state when a winning result is obtained by the second lottery; ,
an open state provided at a position where a game ball shot by the shooting means can reach at least to pass through the second area, and a game ball flowing down the second area can enter; a first special variable ball entry means (for example, a jackpot winning device) having at least one opening/closing member that can be displaced between a closed state in which a ball cannot be entered;
an open state provided at a position where a game ball shot by the shooting means can reach at least to pass through the second area, and a game ball flowing down the second area can enter; a second special variable ball entry means (for example, a small prize winning device) having at least one opening/closing member that can be displaced between a closed state in which a ball cannot be entered;
a first opening/closing control means for controlling opening/closing of the first special variable ball entry means when the first special game state occurs;
a second opening/closing control means for controlling opening/closing of the second special variable ball entry means when the second special game state occurs;
a specific ball-entering section into which the gaming ball entered by the second special variable ball-entering means can enter;
A game according to means WC1, further comprising specific ball-entering portion first special game state generating means for generating said first special game state when a game ball enters said specific ball-entering portion. machine.

According to the means WC2, the same effect as the means WA2 can be obtained.

Means WC3. Trigger ball entry means (for example, a through gate) provided at a position where only game balls fired by the shooting means can reach so as to pass through the second area,
The auxiliary means is
When a predetermined release condition is satisfied due to the entry or passage of the game ball into the trigger ball entry means, the second auxiliary state (low support state) is set such that the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter. Means WC2 characterized by being at least one opening/closing member displaceable between a closed state and an open state in which a game ball can enter or is easily entered as the first auxiliary state (high support state). The gaming machine described in .

According to the means WC3, the same effect as that of the means WA3 can be obtained.

Means WC4. The first special game state generating means is
A plurality of types of the first special game states having different game values (for example, high support state, number of support, number of rounds, etc.) to be given to the player can be generated,
The entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry means is more important than the first special game state generated based on the first lottery resulting from the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry means. The first special game state generated based on the first winning lottery, and the first special game state generated due to the entry of the game ball into the specific ball entry section are the player's A gaming machine according to means WC2 or WC3, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to increase the rate at which a more advantageous gaming value (for example, a high support state) is given.

According to the means WC4, the same effects as those of the means WA4 can be obtained.

Means WC5. As the first storage means, the lottery result of the first lottery resulting from the entry of the game ball into the first starting ball entry means is stored, and executed by the first special display means based on the lottery result. a first holding means for waiting the first variable display to be executed until after the end of the first variable display that has already been executed;
As the second storage means, the lottery result of the first lottery or the second lottery resulting from the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry means is stored, and the second lottery is stored based on the lottery result. a second holding means for waiting the second variable display executed by the special display means until after the already executed second variable display is completed;
Means WC2 to WC4, characterized in that when there is a variable display waiting by the first holding means and the second holding means, the variable display waiting by the second holding means is preferentially executed. The gaming machine according to any one of

According to the means WC5, the same effect as that of the means WA5 can be obtained.

Means WC6. According to any one of the means WC1 to WC5, the specific correspondence display executing means, when executing the specific correspondence display, clearly indicates a numerical value corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time. game machine.

According to the means WC6, the same effect as that of the means WB1 can be obtained.

Means WC7. During execution of the second game rotation operation during execution of the specific effect, the effect display mode after the end of the specific effect is different depending on whether the specific condition is satisfied or not satisfied. A gaming machine according to any one of means WC1 to WC6, characterized in that it is configured differently.

According to the means WC7, effects similar to those of the means WD1, which will be described later, are achieved.

Means WC8. A game machine according to any one of means WC1 to WC7, wherein, during the specific game state, a predetermined time for game rotation motions is set according to the number of game rotation motions scheduled to be executed.

According to the stage WC8, effects similar to those of means WE1, which will be described later, are exhibited.

Means WC9. A means capable of notifying or suggesting that fact, in addition to the specific correspondence display, when the specific condition is satisfied during execution of the second game rotation operation during execution of the specific effect. A game machine according to any one of means WC1 to WC8 characterized by the above.

According to WC9, the same effects as those of means WF1, which will be described later, are achieved.

Conventional problem WD. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines have a plurality of game states with different degrees of advantage.

As a type of gaming machine, a game is played by shooting game balls into a game area, a lottery is conducted based on the game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means, and when a predetermined result is obtained by the lottery. , a pachinko machine that generates a game state advantageous to the player is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-31769).

Game states such as normal state, time saving state with electric sapo (electric chew support), time saving state without electric sapo, variable state with time saving, variable state without time saving are basically established independently, and in between When the condition is established, the game state is shifted to a higher game state or to a lower game state.

Further, depending on the gaming machine, a higher game state may occur in duplicate during execution of a predetermined game state.

In this case, it is desirable for the player that a higher game state occurs. It can provide great interest.

However, there is no precedent for a gaming machine in which lower-level game states are overlapped in the middle, and in such a gaming machine, it is necessary to make a suitable notification without reducing the player's interest.

For example, under the configuration related to the 1 type 2 type mixing machine described in the conventional problem WA, in recent years, in the high support state after the end of the jackpot state, a predetermined effect (such as a rush effect) is performed on the variable display means. At the same time, after the end of the high support state, during execution of the second variable display that was held and stored by entering the second start ball entry means during the high support state (while the remaining hold of the second variable display is being consumed) There are also gaming machines that aim to increase the interest of the player by executing continuous effects (continuous chance effects, etc.) on the variable display means.

Furthermore, in order to further improve interest, while the continuous performance is being executed, a specific game state (for example, the time when the high support state does not occur) that is not more advantageous to the player than the jackpot, small win, high support state, etc. It is also conceivable to add a configuration that performs a lottery that generates a short mode, etc.

However, since such a specific game state is a game state in which the degree of interest for the player is low compared to the jackpot, small win, etc., even if the specific game state is won during the execution of the continuous effect, the corresponding game state Prioritizing the continuous performance (for example, by interrupting the continuous performance or interrupting the continuous performance), if a notification performance is performed to notify that the specific game state has been won, it will be difficult for the player. Interest may decline.

On the other hand, for example, during the execution of the second variable display (during the consumption of the remaining reserved memory of the second variable display, etc.) during the execution of the continuous effect (continuous chance effect, etc.), the specific game state (for example, the high support state) When a specific condition that can generate a short mode, etc.) is established, the specific game state is progressed internally, such as starting the counting of the second variable display related to the specific game state, but the notification effect corresponding to this , etc. is not executed, and after the end of the continuous effect, if the specific corresponding display is executed for the remaining number of times at that point, after the continuous effect ends, the specific response suddenly occurs without any warning. There is a risk that the configuration will start to display correspondence.

Therefore, the conventional pachinko machines are required to be more interesting for players.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in order to solve the problems exemplified above. To provide a game machine capable of improving interest.

Means WD1. a first executing means capable of executing a first game rotation operation when a first starting condition is satisfied;
a second executing means capable of executing a second game rotation operation upon establishment of a second starting condition different from the first starting condition;
a first storage means capable of storing the establishment of the first starting condition up to a predetermined upper limit;
a second storage means capable of storing the establishment of the second starting condition up to a predetermined upper limit;
A game machine comprising auxiliary means capable of switching a state between a first auxiliary state that facilitates establishment of the second starting condition and a second auxiliary state that makes establishment of the second starting condition difficult, wherein ,
a first counting means capable of executing a count corresponding to the second game rotation motion in a predetermined game state;
subtraction means capable of subtracting predetermined numerical information of the first counting means based on establishment of a predetermined subtraction condition;
effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect as a corresponding effect during execution of the second game rotation motion in the predetermined game state;
Counting corresponding to the specific game can be executed when a specific condition capable of generating a specific game state capable of executing the specific game is established during the execution of the second game rotation operation during execution of the specific effect. an information setting means capable of setting specific numerical information in the second counting means;
update means for updating the specific numerical information of the second counting means based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition;
During execution of the second game rotation operation during execution of the specific effect, when the specific condition is satisfied, at least the first counting means is subtracted and the specific effect is maintained during a predetermined state until it reaches a specific value. a continuation means capable of continuing the
Specific numerical information is set in the second counting means when the specific condition is satisfied during execution of the second game rotation operation during execution of the specific effect, and the set specific numerical value of the second counting means. The specific numerical information of the second counting means is updated when the update condition is established during the execution of the second game rotation operation during execution of the specific effect without executing the specific correspondence display corresponding to the information. The specific correspondence display corresponding to the updated specific numerical information of the second counting means is not executed, and the specific correspondence display corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time based on the end of the specific effect. a specific correspondence display executing means for executing
During execution of the second game rotation operation during execution of the specific effect, the effect display mode after the end of the specific effect is different depending on whether the specific condition is satisfied or not satisfied. A game machine characterized by being configured differently.

According to the means WD1, effects similar to those of the means WA1 can be obtained. In addition, this means is configured such that the effect display mode after the end of the specific effect differs depending on whether or not the specific condition is established at the end of the specific effect.

Such a configuration can serve as a display effect for the player as to whether or not to shift to the specific game state after the specific effect ends. It is possible to give new hope to the game and improve the desire to play. As a result, it is possible to stepwisely perform an effect that gives the player a feeling of anticipation, thereby improving the interest of the player.

Means WD2. a launching means for launching a game ball;
a game area in which the launched game ball is guided;
A game ball is provided so as to be able to enter a position where a game ball fired (for example, "left-handed") by the shooting means can reach at least a first area of the game area. a first starting ball entry means;
A game ball is provided so as to be able to enter at a position where the game ball fired (for example, "right-handed") by the shooting means can reach at least the second area in the game area. a second starting ball entry means;
A first lottery means for performing a first winning lottery (for example, a jackpot lottery) with a first winning probability due to the entry of a game ball into the first start ball entry means or the second start ball entry means;
a second lottery means for performing a second winning lottery (for example, a small winning lottery) with a second winning probability higher than the first winning probability due to the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entering means; ,
After performing the first variation display as the first game rotation operation, the lottery of the first win-or-fail lottery resulting from the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry means that satisfies the first start condition. a first special display means as the first execution means for performing stop display in a specific mode based on the result;
After performing the second variation display as the second game rotation operation, the first winning lottery or the a second special display means as the second execution means for performing a stop display in a specific mode based on the lottery result of the second lottery;
Generation of a first special game state for generating a first special game state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot state in which the player obtains a large number of game balls) when a winning result is obtained by the first lottery. means and
a second special game state generating means for generating a second special game state (for example, a small winning state) that is less advantageous to the player than the first special game state when a winning result is obtained by the second lottery; ,
an open state provided at a position where a game ball shot by the shooting means can reach at least to pass through the second area, and a game ball flowing down the second area can enter; a first special variable ball entry means (for example, a jackpot winning device) having at least one opening/closing member that can be displaced between a closed state in which a ball cannot be entered;
an open state provided at a position where a game ball shot by the shooting means can reach at least to pass through the second area, and a game ball flowing down the second area can enter; a second special variable ball entry means (for example, a small prize winning device) having at least one opening/closing member that can be displaced between a closed state in which a ball cannot be entered;
a first opening/closing control means for controlling opening/closing of the first special variable ball entry means when the first special game state occurs;
a second opening/closing control means for controlling opening/closing of the second special variable ball entry means when the second special game state occurs;
a specific ball-entering section into which the gaming ball entered by the second special variable ball-entering means can enter;
A game according to means WD1, further comprising specific ball-entering portion first special game state generating means for generating said first special game state when a game ball enters said specific ball-entering portion. machine.

According to the means WD2, the same effect as that of the means WA2 can be obtained.

Means WD3. Trigger ball entry means (for example, a through gate) provided at a position where only game balls fired by the shooting means can reach so as to pass through the second area,
The auxiliary means is
When a predetermined release condition is satisfied due to the entry or passage of the game ball into the trigger ball entry means, the second auxiliary state (low support state) is set such that the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter. Means WC2 characterized by being at least one opening/closing member displaceable between a closed state and an open state in which a game ball can enter or is easily entered as the first auxiliary state (high support state). The gaming machine described in .

According to the means WD3, the same effects as those of the means WA3 can be obtained.

Means WD4. The first special game state generating means is
A plurality of types of the first special game states having different game values (for example, high support state, number of support, number of rounds, etc.) to be given to the player can be generated,
The entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry means is more important than the first special game state generated based on the first lottery resulting from the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry means. The first special game state generated based on the first winning lottery, and the first special game state generated due to the entry of the game ball into the specific ball entry section are the player's A gaming machine according to means WD2 or WD3, characterized in that it is constructed such that the rate at which a more advantageous game value (for example, a high support state) is imparted is increased.

According to the means WD4, the same effects as those of the means WA4 can be obtained.

Means WD5. As the first storage means, the lottery result of the first lottery resulting from the entry of the game ball into the first starting ball entry means is stored, and executed by the first special display means based on the lottery result. a first holding means for waiting the first variable display to be executed until after the end of the first variable display that has already been executed;
As the second storage means, the lottery result of the first lottery or the second lottery resulting from the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry means is stored, and the second lottery is stored based on the lottery result. a second holding means for waiting the second variable display executed by the special display means until after the already executed second variable display is finished;
Means WD2 to WD4, characterized in that when there is a variable display waiting by the first holding means and the second holding means, the variable display waiting by the second holding means is preferentially executed. The gaming machine according to any one of

According to the means WD5, the same effects as those of the means WA5 can be obtained.

Means WD6. According to any one of the means WD1 to WD5, the specific correspondence display executing means, when executing the specific correspondence display, clearly indicates a numerical value corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time. game machine.

According to the means WD6, effects similar to those of the means WB1 can be obtained.

Means WD7. A game mode after the end of the specific effect when the specific condition is met during execution of the second game rotating motion during execution of the specific effect, and the second game rotating motion during execution of the specific effect. is the same as the game mode after the end of the specific effect when the specific condition is not satisfied during the execution of .

According to the means WD7, the same effect as the means WC1 can be obtained.

Means WD8. The gaming machine according to any one of means WD1 to WD7, wherein during the specific game state, a predetermined game rotation time is set according to the number of game rotations scheduled to be executed.

According to the stage WD8, effects similar to those of means WE1, which will be described later, are exhibited.

Means WD9. A means capable of notifying or suggesting that fact, in addition to the specific correspondence display, when the specific condition is satisfied during execution of the second game rotation operation during execution of the specific effect. The gaming machine according to any one of means WD1 to WD8 characterized by the above.

According to WD9, the same effect as means WF1, which will be described later, can be achieved.

Conventional problem WE. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines have a plurality of game states with different degrees of advantage.

As a type of gaming machine, a game is played by shooting game balls into a game area, a lottery is conducted based on the game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means, and when a predetermined result is obtained by the lottery. , a pachinko machine that generates a game state advantageous to the player is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-31769).

Game states such as normal state, time saving state with electric sapo (electric chew support), time saving state without electric sapo, variable state with time saving, variable state without time saving are basically established independently, and in between When the condition is established, the game state is shifted to a higher game state or to a lower game state.

Further, depending on the gaming machine, a higher game state may occur in duplicate during execution of a predetermined game state.

In this case, it is desirable for the player that a higher game state occurs. It can provide great interest.

However, there is no precedent for a gaming machine in which lower-level game states are overlapped in the middle, and in such a gaming machine, it is necessary to make a suitable notification without reducing the player's interest.

For example, under the configuration related to the 1 type 2 type mixing machine described in the conventional problem WA, in recent years, in the high support state after the end of the jackpot state, a predetermined effect (such as a rush effect) is performed on the variable display means. At the same time, after the end of the high support state, during execution of the second variable display that was held and stored by entering the second start ball entry means during the high support state (while the remaining hold of the second variable display is being consumed) There are also gaming machines that aim to increase the interest of the player by executing continuous effects (continuous chance effects, etc.) on the variable display means.

Furthermore, in order to further improve interest, while the continuous performance is being executed, a specific game state (for example, the time when the high support state does not occur) that is not more advantageous to the player than the jackpot, small win, high support state, etc. It is also conceivable to add a configuration that performs a lottery that generates a short mode, etc.

However, since such a specific game state is a game state in which the degree of interest for the player is low compared to the jackpot, small win, etc., even if the specific game state is won during the execution of the continuous effect, the corresponding game state Prioritizing the continuous performance (for example, by interrupting the continuous performance or interrupting the continuous performance), if a notification performance is performed to notify that the specific game state has been won, it will be difficult for the player. Interest may decline.

On the other hand, for example, during the execution of the second variable display (during the consumption of the remaining reserved memory of the second variable display, etc.) during the execution of the continuous effect (continuous chance effect, etc.), the specific game state (for example, the high support state) When a specific condition that can generate a short mode, etc.) is established, the specific game state is progressed internally, such as starting the counting of the second variable display related to the specific game state, but the notification effect corresponding to this , etc., is not executed, and after the end of the continuous production, if it is configured to execute the specific correspondence display for the remaining number of times at that time, various productions will be performed during the continuation period of the specific game state. If you try, the process may become complicated.

Therefore, the conventional pachinko machines are required to be more interesting for players.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in order to solve the problems exemplified above. To provide a game machine capable of improving interest.

Means WE1. a first executing means capable of executing a first game rotation operation when a first starting condition is satisfied;
a second executing means capable of executing a second game rotation operation upon establishment of a second starting condition different from the first starting condition;
a first storage means capable of storing the establishment of the first starting condition up to a predetermined upper limit;
a second storage means capable of storing the establishment of the second starting condition up to a predetermined upper limit;
A game machine comprising auxiliary means capable of switching a state between a first auxiliary state that facilitates establishment of the second starting condition and a second auxiliary state that makes establishment of the second starting condition difficult, wherein ,
a first counting means capable of executing a count corresponding to the second game rotation motion in a predetermined game state;
subtraction means capable of subtracting predetermined numerical information of the first counting means based on establishment of a predetermined subtraction condition;
effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect as a corresponding effect during execution of the second game rotation motion in the predetermined game state;
Counting corresponding to the specific game can be executed when a specific condition capable of generating a specific game state capable of executing the specific game is established during the execution of the second game rotation operation during execution of the specific effect. an information setting means capable of setting specific numerical information in the second counting means;
update means for updating the specific numerical information of the second counting means based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition;
During execution of the second game rotation operation during execution of the specific effect, when the specific condition is satisfied, at least the first counting means is subtracted and the specific effect is maintained during a predetermined state until it reaches a specific value. a continuation means capable of continuing the
Specific numerical information is set in the second counting means when the specific condition is satisfied during execution of the second game rotation operation during execution of the specific effect, and the set specific numerical value of the second counting means. The specific numeric information of the second counting means is updated when the update condition is established during the execution of the second game rotation operation during execution of the specific effect without executing the specific correspondence display corresponding to the information. does not execute the specific correspondence display corresponding to the updated specific numerical information of the second counting means, and the specific correspondence corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time based on the end of the specific effect a specific correspondence display execution means for executing display,
The game machine is characterized in that, during the specific game state, a predetermined time for the game rotation motion is set according to the number of game rotation motions scheduled to be executed.

According to the means WE1, the same effect as that of the means WA1 can be obtained. In addition, in this means, during the specific game state, it is configured to set the time of the predetermined game round motion according to the number of game round motions scheduled to be executed.

Such a configuration includes an operation pattern table that defines the operation time of each game rotation operation during the continuation period of the specific game state (for example, the first game rotation operation time "5 seconds", the second game rotation operation time "7 seconds", . . , the 30th game rotation operation time “10 seconds”, etc., and an operation pattern table that defines the operation time for 30 game rotations, etc.).

Thereby, it is possible to execute a series of effects (continuous effects) over a plurality of game rotation motions during the continuation period of the specific game state. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player. In addition, since it is not necessary to perform the process of determining the operation time every time each game rotation operation is executed, the process can be simplified.

Means WE2. a launching means for launching a game ball;
a game area in which the launched game ball is guided;
A game ball is provided so as to be able to enter a position where a game ball fired (for example, "left-handed") by the shooting means can reach at least a first area of the game area. a first starting ball entry means;
A game ball is provided so as to be able to enter at a position where the game ball fired (for example, "right-handed") by the shooting means can reach at least the second area in the game area. a second starting ball entry means;
A first lottery means for performing a first winning lottery (for example, a jackpot lottery) with a first winning probability due to the entry of a game ball into the first start ball entry means or the second start ball entry means;
a second lottery means for performing a second winning lottery (for example, a small winning lottery) with a second winning probability higher than the first winning probability due to the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entering means; ,
After performing the first variation display as the first game rotation operation, the lottery of the first win-or-fail lottery resulting from the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry means that satisfies the first start condition. a first special display means as the first execution means for performing stop display in a specific mode based on the result;
After performing the second variation display as the second game rotation operation, the first winning lottery or the a second special display means as the second execution means for performing a stop display in a specific mode based on the lottery result of the second lottery;
Generation of a first special game state for generating a first special game state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot state in which the player obtains a large number of game balls) when a winning result is obtained by the first lottery. means and
a second special game state generating means for generating a second special game state (for example, a small winning state) that is less advantageous to the player than the first special game state when a winning result is obtained by the second lottery; ,
an open state provided at a position where a game ball shot by the shooting means can reach at least to pass through the second area, and a game ball flowing down the second area can enter; a first special variable ball entry means (for example, a jackpot winning device) having at least one opening/closing member that can be displaced between a closed state in which a ball cannot be entered;
an open state provided at a position where a game ball shot by the shooting means can reach at least to pass through the second area, and a game ball flowing down the second area can enter; a second special variable ball entry means (for example, a small prize winning device) having at least one opening/closing member that can be displaced between a closed state in which a ball cannot be entered;
a first opening/closing control means for controlling opening/closing of the first special variable ball entry means when the first special game state occurs;
a second opening/closing control means for controlling opening/closing of the second special variable ball entry means when the second special game state occurs;
a specific ball-entering section into which the gaming ball entered by the second special variable ball-entering means can enter;
A game according to means WE1, further comprising specific ball-entering portion first special game state generating means for generating said first special game state when a game ball enters said specific ball-entering portion. machine.

According to the means WE2, the same effect as the means WA2 can be obtained.

Means WE3. Trigger ball entry means (for example, a through gate) provided at a position where only game balls fired by the shooting means can reach so as to pass through the second area,
The auxiliary means is
When a predetermined release condition is satisfied due to the entry or passage of the game ball into the trigger ball entry means, the second auxiliary state (low support state) is set such that the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter. Means WC2 characterized by being at least one opening/closing member displaceable between a closed state and an open state in which a game ball can enter or is easily entered as the first auxiliary state (high support state). The gaming machine described in .

According to the means WE3, the same effect as that of the means WA3 can be obtained.

Means WE4. The first special game state generating means is
A plurality of types of the first special game states having different game values (for example, high support state, number of support, number of rounds, etc.) to be given to the player can be generated,
The entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry means is more important than the first special game state generated based on the first lottery resulting from the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry means. The first special game state generated based on the first winning lottery, and the first special game state generated due to the entry of the game ball into the specific ball entry section are the player's A gaming machine according to means WE2 or WE3, characterized in that the gaming machine is constructed so as to increase the rate at which a more advantageous gaming value (for example, a high support state) is given.

According to the means WE4, the same effect as that of the means WA4 can be obtained.

Means WE5. As the first storage means, the lottery result of the first lottery resulting from the entry of the game ball into the first starting ball entry means is stored, and executed by the first special display means based on the lottery result. a first holding means for waiting the first variable display to be executed until after the end of the first variable display that has already been executed;
As the second storage means, the lottery result of the first lottery or the second lottery resulting from the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry means is stored, and the second lottery is stored based on the lottery result. a second holding means for waiting the second variable display executed by the special display means until after the already executed second variable display is completed;
Means WE2 to WE4, characterized in that when there is a variable display on standby by said first holding means and said second holding means, the variable display on standby by said second holding means is preferentially executed. The gaming machine according to any one of

According to the means WE5, the same effect as that of the means WA5 can be obtained.

Means WE6. Any one of the means WE1 to WE5, characterized in that when the specific correspondence display executing means executes the specific correspondence display, a numerical value corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time is indicated. game machine.

According to the means WE6, the same effect as that of the means WB1 can be obtained.

Means WE7. A game mode after the end of the specific effect when the specific condition is met during execution of the second game rotating motion during execution of the specific effect, and the second game rotating motion during execution of the specific effect. is the same as the game mode after the end of the specific effect when the specific condition is not satisfied during the execution of .

According to the means WE7, the same effect as that of the means WC1 can be obtained.

Means WE8. During execution of the second game rotation operation during execution of the specific effect, the effect display mode after the end of the specific effect is different depending on whether the specific condition is satisfied or not satisfied. A gaming machine according to any one of means WE1 to WE7, characterized in that it is configured differently.

According to the means WE8, the same effect as that of the means WD1 can be obtained.

Means WE9. A means capable of notifying or suggesting that fact, in addition to the specific correspondence display, when the specific condition is satisfied during execution of the second game rotation operation during execution of the specific effect. A gaming machine according to any one of the means WE1 to WE8 characterized by the above.

According to WE9, the same effect as means WF1 described later can be achieved.

Conventional problem WF. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines have a plurality of game states with different degrees of advantage.

As a type of gaming machine, a game is played by shooting game balls into a game area, a lottery is conducted based on the game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means, and when a predetermined result is obtained by the lottery. , a pachinko machine that generates a game state advantageous to the player is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-31769).

Game states such as normal state, time saving state with electric sapo (electric chew support), time saving state without electric sapo, variable state with time saving, variable state without time saving are basically established independently, and in between When the condition is established, the game state is shifted to a higher game state or to a lower game state.

Further, depending on the gaming machine, a higher game state may occur in duplicate during execution of a predetermined game state.

In this case, it is desirable for the player that a higher game state occurs. It can provide great interest.

However, there is no precedent for a gaming machine in which lower-level game states are overlapped in the middle, and in such a gaming machine, it is necessary to make a suitable notification without reducing the player's interest.

For example, under the configuration related to the 1 type 2 type mixing machine described in the conventional problem WA, in recent years, in the high support state after the end of the jackpot state, a predetermined effect (such as a rush effect) is performed on the variable display means. At the same time, after the end of the high support state, during execution of the second variable display that was held and stored by entering the second start ball entry means during the high support state (while the remaining hold of the second variable display is being consumed) There are also gaming machines that aim to increase the interest of the player by executing continuous effects (continuous chance effects, etc.) on the variable display means.

Furthermore, in order to further improve interest, while the continuous performance is being executed, a specific game state (for example, the time when the high support state does not occur) that is not more advantageous to the player than the jackpot, small win, high support state, etc. It is also conceivable to add a configuration that performs a lottery that generates a short mode, etc.

However, since such a specific game state is a game state in which the degree of interest for the player is low compared to the jackpot, small win, etc., even if the specific game state is won during the execution of the continuous effect, the corresponding game state Prioritizing the continuous performance (for example, by interrupting the continuous performance or interrupting the continuous performance), if a notification performance is performed to notify that the specific game state has been won, it will be difficult for the player. Interest may decline.

On the other hand, for example, during the execution of the second variable display (during the consumption of the remaining reserved memory of the second variable display, etc.) during the execution of the continuous effect (continuous chance effect, etc.), the specific game state (for example, the high support state) When a specific condition that can generate a short mode, etc.) is established, the specific game state is progressed internally, such as starting the counting of the second variable display related to the specific game state, but the notification effect corresponding to this , etc. is not executed, and after the end of the continuous effect, if the specific corresponding display is executed for the remaining number of times at that point, after the continuous effect ends, the specific response suddenly occurs without any warning. There is a risk that the configuration will start to display correspondence.

Therefore, the conventional pachinko machines are required to be more interesting for players.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in order to solve the problems exemplified above. To provide a game machine capable of improving interest.

Means WF1. a first executing means capable of executing a first game rotation operation when a first starting condition is satisfied;
a second executing means capable of executing a second game rotation operation upon establishment of a second starting condition different from the first starting condition;
a first storage means capable of storing the establishment of the first starting condition up to a predetermined upper limit;
a second storage means capable of storing the establishment of the second starting condition up to a predetermined upper limit;
A game machine comprising auxiliary means capable of switching a state between a first auxiliary state that facilitates establishment of the second starting condition and a second auxiliary state that makes establishment of the second starting condition difficult, wherein ,
a first counting means capable of executing a count corresponding to the second game rotation motion in a predetermined game state;
subtraction means capable of subtracting predetermined numerical information of the first counting means based on establishment of a predetermined subtraction condition;
effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect as a corresponding effect during execution of the second game rotation motion in the predetermined game state;
Counting corresponding to the specific game can be executed when a specific condition capable of generating a specific game state capable of executing the specific game is established during the execution of the second game rotation operation during execution of the specific effect. an information setting means capable of setting specific numerical information in the second counting means;
update means for updating the specific numerical information of the second counting means based on the establishment of a predetermined update condition;
During execution of the second game rotation operation during execution of the specific effect, when the specific condition is satisfied, at least the first counting means is subtracted and the specific effect is maintained during a predetermined state until it reaches a specific value. a continuation means capable of continuing the
Specific numerical information is set in the second counting means when the specific condition is satisfied during execution of the second game rotation operation during execution of the specific effect, and the set specific numerical value of the second counting means. The specific numerical information of the second counting means is updated when the update condition is established during the execution of the second game rotation operation during execution of the specific effect without executing the specific correspondence display corresponding to the information. The specific correspondence display corresponding to the updated specific numerical information of the second counting means is not executed, and the specific correspondence display corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time based on the end of the specific effect. a specific correspondence display executing means for executing
and means capable of notifying or suggesting that fact, aside from the specific correspondence display, when the specific condition is satisfied during execution of the second game rotation operation during execution of the specific effect. A game machine characterized by

According to the means WF1, the same effect as the means WA1 can be obtained. In addition, in this means, when a specific condition is satisfied during execution of the second game rotation operation during execution of the specific effect, it is possible to notify or suggest that effect separately from the specific correspondence display (display means). It is configured to include means (for example, predetermined light emitting means, means for outputting sound, etc.).

As a result, the player can predict that the specific condition is established before the end of the specific effect, and the player can make preparations after the end of the specific effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of troubles such as wasteful consumption of game balls, and to suppress the decrease in interest of the player.

Means WF2. a launching means for launching a game ball;
a game area in which the launched game ball is guided;
A game ball is provided so as to be able to enter a position where a game ball fired (for example, "left-handed") by the shooting means can reach at least a first area of the game area. a first starting ball entry means;
A game ball is provided so as to be able to enter at a position where the game ball fired (for example, "right-handed") by the shooting means can reach at least the second area in the game area. a second starting ball entry means;
A first lottery means for performing a first winning lottery (for example, a jackpot lottery) with a first winning probability due to the entry of a game ball into the first start ball entry means or the second start ball entry means;
a second lottery means for performing a second winning lottery (for example, a small winning lottery) with a second winning probability higher than the first winning probability due to the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entering means; ,
After performing the first variation display as the first game rotation operation, the lottery of the first win-or-fail lottery resulting from the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry means that satisfies the first start condition. a first special display means as the first execution means for performing stop display in a specific mode based on the result;
After performing the second variation display as the second game rotation operation, the first winning lottery or the a second special display means as the second execution means for performing a stop display in a specific mode based on the lottery result of the second lottery;
Generation of a first special game state for generating a first special game state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot state in which the player obtains a large number of game balls) when a winning result is obtained by the first lottery. means and
a second special game state generating means for generating a second special game state (for example, a small winning state) that is less advantageous to the player than the first special game state when a winning result is obtained by the second lottery; ,
an open state provided at a position where a game ball shot by the shooting means can reach at least to pass through the second area, and a game ball flowing down the second area can enter; a first special variable ball entry means (for example, a jackpot winning device) having at least one opening/closing member that can be displaced between a closed state in which a ball cannot be entered;
an open state provided at a position where a game ball shot by the shooting means can reach at least to pass through the second area, and a game ball flowing down the second area can enter; a second special variable ball entry means (for example, a small prize winning device) having at least one opening/closing member that can be displaced between a closed state in which a ball cannot be entered;
a first opening/closing control means for controlling opening/closing of the first special variable ball entry means when the first special game state occurs;
a second opening/closing control means for controlling opening/closing of the second special variable ball entry means when the second special game state occurs;
a specific ball-entering section into which the gaming ball entered by the second special variable ball-entering means can enter;
A game according to means WF1, further comprising specific ball-entering portion first special game state generating means for generating said first special game state when a game ball enters said specific ball-entering portion. machine.

According to the means WF2, the same effect as the means WA2 can be obtained.

Means WF3. Trigger ball entry means (for example, a through gate) provided at a position where only game balls fired by the shooting means can reach so as to pass through the second area,
The auxiliary means is
When a predetermined release condition is satisfied due to the entry or passage of the game ball into the trigger ball entry means, the second auxiliary state (low support state) is set such that the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter. Means WC2 characterized by being at least one opening/closing member displaceable between a closed state and an open state in which a game ball can enter or is easily entered as the first auxiliary state (high support state). The gaming machine described in .

According to the means WF3, the same effects as those of the means WA3 can be obtained.

Means WF4. The first special game state generating means is
A plurality of types of the first special game states having different game values (for example, high support state, number of support, number of rounds, etc.) to be given to the player can be generated,
The entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry means is more important than the first special game state generated based on the first lottery resulting from the entry of the game ball into the first start ball entry means. The first special game state generated based on the first winning lottery, and the first special game state generated due to the entry of the game ball into the specific ball entry section are the player's A gaming machine according to means WF2 or WF3, characterized in that it is configured such that the rate at which a more advantageous game value (for example, a high support state) is imparted is increased.

According to the means WF4, the same effect as the means WA4 can be obtained.

Means WF5. As the first storage means, the lottery result of the first lottery resulting from the entry of the game ball into the first starting ball entry means is stored, and executed by the first special display means based on the lottery result. a first holding means for waiting the first variable display to be executed until after the end of the first variable display that has already been executed;
As the second storage means, the lottery result of the first lottery or the second lottery resulting from the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry means is stored, and the second lottery is stored based on the lottery result. a second holding means for waiting the second variable display executed by the special display means until after the already executed second variable display is completed;
Means WF2 to WF4, wherein when there is a variable display waiting by the first holding means and the second holding means, the variable display waiting by the second holding means is preferentially executed. The gaming machine according to any one of

According to the means WF5, the same effect as the means WA5 can be obtained.

Means WF6. According to any one of the means WF1 to WF5, the specific correspondence display executing means, when executing the specific correspondence display, clearly indicates a numerical value corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time. game machine.

According to the means WF6, the same effect as the means WB1 can be obtained.

Means WF7. A game mode after the end of the specific effect when the specific condition is met during execution of the second game rotating motion during execution of the specific effect, and the second game rotating motion during execution of the specific effect. is the same as the game mode after the end of the specific effect when the specific condition is not satisfied during the execution of .

According to the means WF7, the same effect as the means WC1 can be obtained.

Means WF8. During execution of the second game rotation operation during execution of the specific effect, the effect display mode after the end of the specific effect is different depending on whether the specific condition is satisfied or not satisfied. A game machine according to any one of means WF1 to WF7, characterized in that it is configured differently.

According to the means WF8, the same effect as that of the means WD1 can be obtained.

Means WF9. A gaming machine according to any one of the means WF1 to WF8, characterized in that, during the specific game state, a predetermined time for game rotation motions is set according to the number of game rotation motions scheduled to be executed.

According to the stage WF9, effects similar to those of the means WE1 can be obtained.

In addition, for a game machine having a configuration of any part or all of the above means WA1 to WA10, a configuration of any part or all of the means WA1 to WA10 and the configuration of the means WB1 to WB9 Configuration of any part or all, configuration of any part or all of means WC1 to means WC9, configuration of any part or all of means WD1 to means WD9, or means WE1 to means WE9 and any part or all of the above means WF1 to WF9 may be implemented in any combination.

Similarly, for a game machine having a configuration of any part or all of the means WB1 to WB9, any part or all of the means WA1 to WA10 and the means WB1 to WB9 configuration of any part or all of the means WC1 to means WC9, configuration of any part or all of the means WD1 to means WD9, the means WE1 to means At least one of the configuration of any part or all of WE9 and the configuration of part or all of any of the means WF1 to WF9 may be arbitrarily combined and implemented.

Similarly, for a game machine having a configuration of any part or all of the means WC1 to WC9, any part or all of the means WA1 to WA10 and the means WB1 to WB9 configuration of any part or all of the means WC1 to means WC9, configuration of any part or all of the means WD1 to means WD9, the means WE1 to means At least one of the configuration of any part or all of WE9 and the configuration of part or all of any of the means WF1 to WF9 may be arbitrarily combined and implemented.

Similarly, for a game machine having a part or all of the means WD1 to WD9, any part or all of the means WA1 to WA10 and the means WB1 to WB9 configuration of any part or all of the means WC1 to means WC9, configuration of any part or all of the means WD1 to means WD9, the means WE1 to means At least one of the configuration of any part or all of WE9 and the configuration of part or all of any of the means WF1 to WF9 may be arbitrarily combined and implemented.

Similarly, for a game machine having a configuration of any part or all of the means WE1 to WE9, any part or all of the means WA1 to WA10 and the means WB1 to WB9 configuration of any part or all of the means WC1 to means WC9, configuration of any part or all of the means WD1 to means WD9, the means WE1 to means At least one of the configuration of any part or all of WE9 and the configuration of part or all of any of the means WF1 to WF9 may be arbitrarily combined and implemented.

Similarly, for a game machine having a part or all of the means WF1 to WF9, any part or all of the means WA1 to WA10 and the means WB1 to WB9 configuration of any part or all of the means WC1 to means WC9, configuration of any part or all of the means WD1 to means WD9, the means WE1 to means At least one of the configuration of any part or all of WE9 and the configuration of part or all of any of the means WF1 to WF9 may be arbitrarily combined and implemented.

The basic configuration of various gaming machines to which the above means are applied is shown below.

(b) The game machine in each of the above means is a pinball game machine. As a more detailed example of a mode, "an operation means (shooting handle, etc.) operated by a player, a shooting means (shooting device, etc.) for flipping and shooting a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, and the shot A pinball game machine equipped with a game area (game board, etc.) in which game balls are guided, and each ball entry means (general winning opening, variable winning device, starting winning opening, etc.) arranged in the game area. mentioned.

(b) The game machine in each of the above means or each pinball game machine is a pachinko machine or a game machine conforming to a pachinko machine.

[Fourth embodiment]
Hereinafter, a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. However, portions (same components, same processing contents, etc.) that overlap with those of the above-described first to third embodiments will be described using the same member names and the same reference numerals.

The game machine according to the present invention (the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment) includes a movable body as the movable means of the present invention, a display control section as the display control means of the present invention, and a movable control means as the movable control means of the present invention. a movable control section, a determination function section as determination means of the present invention, and an end function section as termination means of the present invention.

The "display means" is provided in the game area, and it is sufficient if it can execute one specific effect determined from among a plurality of effect display modes according to the results of various lotteries, and can realize the gist of the present invention. If so, it can be anything. For example, at least the game area when viewed from the front of the game machine, such as those provided on the center frame attached to the game board that constitutes the game area, and those provided on the back side of the game board having translucency. provided within the range of.

The "specific effect" may be any display effect that can be executed by the display means, and may be anything as long as the gist of the present invention can be realized. For example, a pattern variation effect in which patterns are displayed in a variable manner, various ready-to-win effects performed in a ready-to-win state or their development effects, winning notification effects to notify the winning of a big win state or a small win state advantageous to the player, a big win state or a small win state Hit type confirmation production or promotion production that determines the type of state, opening production performed at the start of the big win state or small win state, round production, promotion production or continuous production performed during the round of the big win state or small win state, jackpot Winning effect performed over multiple rounds during the state or the small win state, ending effect performed at the end of the big win state or the small win state, mode determination effect for determining the type of game mode given after the end of the big win state , a support continuation effect or the like that determines whether or not the support mode advantageous to the player is to be continued.

The "movable means" is provided in the game area, and it is sufficient if it can execute one movable mode determined from a plurality of movable modes during the display of a specific effect on the display means, and its shape, size, As long as the gist of the present invention can be realized, any arrangement position, movable mode, and the like may be used. For example, a display device attached to a game board that constitutes a game area or a display device placed on a center frame surrounding it, a display device attached to a decorative member attached to a game board, a variable winning device attached to a game board, or If it is provided at least within the range of the game area when viewed from the front of the game machine, such as those arranged in the inner area, those arranged on the back side of the game board having translucency good.

A "series of specific actions" refers to a plurality of predetermined actions that allow the movable means to be positioned at or near the first position between the first position, which is the initial position side, and the second position, which is the most movable position. Any method may be used as long as it is executed multiple times, as long as it can realize the gist of the present invention. For example, a movable means capable of sliding or vibrating vertically, horizontally, forwards and backwards, or obliquely performs an operation of moving back and forth between a first position and a second position a plurality of times; A movable means capable of rotating, swinging, or tilting as a core may perform an operation of moving back and forth between the first position and the second position a plurality of times.

The "operating condition" may be anything as long as it causes the movable means to perform a series of specific actions based on the establishment of the condition. the start of the variable display; the elapse of a predetermined period after the start of the variable display; the execution of a predetermined effect a predetermined number of times; A game ball enters, a lottery is drawn with a specified probability based on the entered ball and a specified result is obtained, a specified operation means is operated or is operated a specified number of times, based on the operation Anything may be possible, such as performing a lottery with a predetermined probability and obtaining a predetermined result, or reaching a predetermined count value reaching an upper limit.

"Specific information" is set corresponding to one movable mode, and based on this, it is sufficient if the movable means can execute a series of specific actions. , a group of setting information such as information defining the direction of motion, information defining the distance of motion, information defining the time of motion, information defining the number of times the motion is to be executed, information defining the conditions for terminating the motion, or a table of these It can be anything, such as information stored in the configuration.

The "terminating condition" may be any condition as long as the movable means is stopped and a series of specific actions is terminated when the condition is satisfied. The means is operated or operated a predetermined number of times, the predetermined period elapses, the variable display is stopped, the stop of the variable display is confirmed, the predetermined period has passed after the variable display is stopped, the predetermined A game ball enters the ball entry area, or a prescribed number of game balls enter, a prescribed action is completed a prescribed number of times, a prescribed number of game balls are shot or paid out, etc. may

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there are game machines that allow a movable body to perform a plurality of types of movable modes. In the case of operating the movable body in one movable mode, if the corresponding motion data is read in advance for each motion in one movable mode, depending on the movable mode, it is necessary to read a huge number of times, resulting in poor control. It's a big burden. In order to solve this problem, setting motion data corresponding to a series of motions and executing a series of motions based on the motion data reduces the control load, but a desirable determination of the end of the series of motions is required. be done.

166 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 167 is a perspective view, and FIG. 168 is a perspective view showing a state in which the inner frame 12 and the front frame set 14 are opened. FIG. 169 is a front view showing the structure of the inner frame 12, the game board 30, and the like. 170 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 171 is a perspective view showing a state in which the inner frame 12, the back pack unit 203 and the like are opened. However, in FIG. 168, for the sake of convenience, nails and various accessories provided on the surface of the game board 30, the glass unit 137 attached to the front frame set 14, and the like are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 168, etc., the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that constitutes the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10. An inner frame 12 is supported on one side of the outer frame 11 so as to be openable and closable. .

As shown in FIG. 171 and the like, the outer frame 11 has an upper frame-constituting portion 11a and a lower frame-constituting portion 11b made of wooden plate material, and a left frame-constituting portion 11c and a right side frame-constituting portion 11d made of aluminum alloy by extrusion molding. These frame-constituting parts 11a to 11d are assembled into a rectangular frame as a whole by detachable fasteners such as screws.

An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left side frame-constituting portion 11c (see FIG. 166). The upper and lower parts of the inner frame 12 are rotatably supported by the upper hinge 81 and the lower hinge 82, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed. A space formed inside the outer frame 11 accommodates the inner frame 12 and the like.

An extension wall portion 83 that protrudes toward the inner side of the outer frame 11 from the vicinity of the rear end in the width direction is formed on the right side frame-constituting portion 11d. The extending wall portion 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see FIG. 171) provided on the right side back side of the inner frame 12 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 170). In addition, as shown in FIG. 168, a pair of upper and lower receiving portions 84 and 85 to which the locking member of the locking device 600 is locked is provided on the front side of the extending wall portion 83 . A pressing portion 86 that abuts on an inner frame open detection switch 92 (to be described later) protrudes toward the inside of the outer frame 11 from the lower receiving portion 85 .

Further, a resin-made curtain plate decoration 87 is attached to the lower side frame-constituting portion 11b. A rib 88 protruding upward is integrally formed in the inner part of the upper surface of the curtain plate decoration 87 . This makes it difficult for a gap to be formed with the inner frame 12 .

As shown in FIG. 168, the opening/closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set vertically along the left side of the pachinko machine 10 when viewed from the front, and the inner frame 12 can be opened forward with this opening/closing axis as the axis. It has become. The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 38 having a rectangular outer shape, and a substantially elliptical window hole 39 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 38 .

A front frame set 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so that it can be opened and closed. As with the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 can be opened forward with an opening/closing axis set along the top and bottom on the left side of the pachinko machine 10 as viewed from the front.

The front frame set 14 has a rectangular outer shape like the inner frame 12, and covers substantially the entire front side of the inner frame 12 in the closed state. A substantially elliptical window portion 101 is formed in the central portion of the front frame set 14 . Thereby, the game board 30 (game area) attached to the rear surface of the inner frame 12 can be visually recognized from the outside through the window portion 101 of the front frame set 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12 . A detailed configuration of the game board 30 will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 166, on the front side of the front frame set 14, a lower tray 15 as a ball receiving tray is provided at the center of the lower portion, and the game balls discharged from the outlet 16 are stored in the lower tray 15. It is possible. Further, on the front side of the lower tray 15, a ball extracting lever 25 for ejecting game balls from the inside of the lower tray 15 is provided.

In addition, on the left side of the lower plate 15, a performance button 125 is provided as an operating means that can be operated by the player. The effect button 125 is configured to be capable of being pressed (operated downward) by the player. Further, inside the lower plate 15, an operation detection switch (not shown) is provided as operation detection means for detecting a pressing operation of the effect button 125. As shown in FIG. When the performance button 125 is pressed, an operation detection signal is output from the operation detection switch to the sub-controller 262, which will be described later. As a result, when the player presses the effect button 125, a predetermined effect is performed in the effect display device 42, the speaker SP, the LED boards 48A, 48B, 48C, etc., which are the objects to be controlled, as will be described later. Content may be changed.

On the right side of the lower plate 15, there is provided a game ball shooting handle (hereinafter simply referred to as "handle") 18 protruding forward. It should be noted that the handle 18 as an operating means that can be operated by the player is, for example, a base portion fixed to the front frame set 14, and a rotation operating portion as a first operating portion rotatably assembled to the base portion. , a variable resistor as an operation amount detection means for detecting the operation amount of the rotary operation part, and a shooting stop switch as a second operation part that can select whether or not to shoot the game ball to the game area. .

An upper plate 19 is provided above the lower plate 15 . The upper tray 19 is a ball receiver that once stores game balls and guides them toward a game ball launching device (hereinafter simply referred to as "shooting device") 60 as shooting means to be described later while aligning them in a row. When the upper tray 19 is filled with game balls, the game balls to be paid out are guided to the lower tray 15 via a lower tray communication passage 71 and a discharge port 16, which will be described later.

The upper plate 19 is provided with a ball lending button 121 and a returning button 122 as operating means that can be operated by the player. As a result, when the ball lending button 121 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like, the ball lending button 121 is operated. A rented ball is supplied to the upper tray 19 . A return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. However, the ball lending button 121 and return button 122 are unnecessary in a pachinko machine in which game balls are directly lent to the upper tray 19 from a ball lending device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine.

Further, the upper plate 19 is provided with a ball-removing button 123 as an operation means that can be operated by the player. By pressing the ball removal button 123, a communication hole (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the ball guide path of the upper tray 19 and communicating with the lower tray 15 is opened and stored in the upper tray 19. The game ball is guided (dropped) to the lower tray 15. - 特許庁That is, the player can move the game ball on the upper tray 19 to the lower tray 15 at any time by operating the ball removal button 123 .

Further, the front face of the front frame set 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it. These light emitting means play a role of increasing the effect during the game by changing and controlling the light emitting mode such as lighting and blinking in accordance with the change of the game state such as at the time of a big win or a predetermined ready-to-win state. For example, a frame lamp 102 containing a light emitting means such as an LED is provided on the periphery of the window portion 101 . Also, on both sides of the frame lamp 102, there are provided error display lamps 104 which light up when a predetermined error occurs. A large number of fine through holes are formed in the frame lamps 102 above the error display lamps 104 so as to correspond to the speakers SP (see FIG. 168) provided on the rear surface of the front frame set 14 .

A glass unit 137 is attached to the rear side of the front frame set 14 . The glass unit 137 is not a conventional front and rear pair of rectangular plate glasses that are attached separately as a front and rear pair, but is formed in a round shape as a whole and attached after being assembled.

Further, as shown in FIG. 168 , a ball passage unit 70 is provided on the back side of the front frame set 14 below the window portion 101 . The ball passage unit 70 includes a lower tray communication path 71 that connects the payout mechanism 352 to the outlet 16 of the lower tray 15 and an upper tray communication path 73 that connects the payout mechanism 352 to the upper tray 19 .

In addition, the ball passage unit 70 is provided with a full detection switch (not shown) for detecting game balls positioned in the lower tray communication passage 71 . Due to the presence of the full detection switch, it is grasped that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls (that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls and that the game balls are staying in the lower tray communication passage 71). be able to.

Next, the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to FIG. At the lower front portion of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), that is, below the window hole 39 (game board 30), there is a shooting device 60 and a shooting rail 61 for guiding game balls immediately after being shot from the shooting device 60. installed. In this embodiment, as the launching device 60, a solenoid type launching device having a plunger serving as a driving member is adopted.

In this embodiment, control is performed such that launching of the launching device 60 is prohibited based on the game ball being continuously detected for a predetermined period of time by the full detection switch. On the other hand, when the stagnation of the game balls in the lower tray communication passage 71 is eliminated and the game balls are no longer detected by the full detection switch (when the game balls are no longer detected continuously for a predetermined time), the launching of the shooting device 60 is permitted.

A ball feeder 63 is provided above the launcher 60 . The ball feeding device 63 guides the game balls guided from the upper tray 19 one by one to the shooting position of the shooting device 60 by driving means such as a solenoid.

Reference numeral 67 in FIGS. 168 and 169 denotes a payout passage for guiding game balls paid out by a payout mechanism 352 (to be described later) to the front of the inner frame 12. ) and a passage leading to the lower tray communication passage 71 (lower tray 15).

Further, a shutter 68 is provided below the payout passage 67, and when the front frame set 14 is opened, the shutter 68 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring or the like so as to close the outlet of the payout passage 67. It has become.

On the other hand, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the shutter 68 is pushed open by the entrance-side rear ends of the lower tray communicating path 71 and the upper tray communicating path 73 . In the closed state of the front frame set 14, the inlets of the lower tray communicating path 71 and the upper tray communicating path 73 are adjacent to the dispensing path 67 with a predetermined distance therebetween, and the gap between them is filled with a game ball. can pass through.

In addition, since the entrance portion of the lower tray communication passage 71 and the entrance portion of the upper tray communication passage 73 are provided adjacent to each other, when the upper tray 19 and the upper tray communication passage 73 are filled with game balls, the game balls are paid out. The game balls flow toward the lower tray communication path 71 (overflow to the inlet side of the lower tray communication path 71) and are paid out to the lower tray 15 through the lower tray communication path 71. - 特許庁

As described above, the game board 30 is attached behind the window hole 39 to the inner frame 12 (resin base 38). The game board 30 is attached with its peripheral portion in contact with the back side of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38). Therefore, a substantially central portion of the front surface of the game board 30, which serves as a game area, is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39 of the resin base 38. As shown in FIG.

Here, the configuration of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 30 in the present embodiment is based on a transparent plate which is a light-transmitting member formed in a flat plate shape from a resin material having light-transmitting properties (light-transmitting properties) such as polycarbonate, acrylic resin, and ABS resin. (game board main body). Here, "transparent" does not only mean that an object existing in the rear area of the game board 30 can be visually recognized in a completely transparent state, but at least a part of the light is transmitted so that the existence of the object can be recognized. It may also include a so-called translucent state of some degree.

With this configuration, the player can visually recognize various objects such as lamps and display devices arranged in the rear region of the game board 30 from the front of the game board 30 through the game board 30 . For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 169, LED boards 48A, 48B, and 48C mounted with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means are arranged behind a predetermined area of the game area, and the player can , the light emitted from the LED can be visually recognized from the front of the game board 30 through the game board 30 . Incidentally, the LED board 48A and the like are controlled to light up and blink in a predetermined light emission mode corresponding to various game effects, and serve to enhance the effect of the game during the game.

In addition, the game board 30 includes an inner rail component 51 and an outer rail component 52 formed of strip-shaped metal plates. is installed. As a result, the game ball shot with the rotating operation of the handle 18 is guided into the game area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137 through the shooting rails 61 and 50 .

A return ball prevention member 53 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion in FIG. 169) of the inner rail constituting portion 51 . As a result, the game ball once guided from the rail 50 to the game area is prevented from returning into the rail 50 again. Further, a return rubber 54 is attached to substantially the leading end portion (upper right portion in FIG. 169) of the outer rail constituting portion 52 . As a result, the game ball shot with more than a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 54 and is returned to the substantially central portion side of the game board 30.例文帳に追加

In this embodiment, the outer rail component 52 ends at the upper right portion of the game board 30 , and the inner rail component 51 ends at the lower right portion of the game board 30 . Therefore, the play area is defined by the rails 50 and the inner peripheral surfaces of the window holes 39 of the resin base 38 . However, since the game ball hit by the launching device 60 may flow backward on the rail 50 until it passes the return ball prevention member 53, the parallel parts of the inner and outer rail constituent parts 51 and 52 are excluded from the game area. .

In addition, there is a gap of a predetermined distance between the launch rail 61 provided on the inner frame 12 and the rail 50 (outer rail constituting portion 52), and the ball passage unit 70 receives a game ball dropped from the gap. A foul ball passage 72 is formed leading to the plate 15 . As a result, if a game ball shot from the shooting device 60 does not reach the return-ball prevention member 53 and travels back along the rail 50 as a foul ball, the foul ball passes through the foul ball passage 72 to the lower tray 15. Ejected.

The game board 30 includes a general winning port (general winning portion) 31, a variable winning device 32, an upper starting winning port 33YA, a lower starting winning port 33YB, a through gate 34, a variable display device unit 35, a first special display device 43L and The second special display device 43R and the like are arranged so as to be fitted into mounting holes formed through the transparent plate.

Furthermore, in the front area of the game board 30, that is, in the game area formed on the front side of the game board 30, in order to distribute the falling direction of the game ball in a predetermined area and to guide the game ball to a predetermined position, A large number of nails 49, windmills 57 and the like are arranged.

The game balls guided to the game area flow down along various routes while being changed in the direction of flow and the direction of rotation by the nails 49 and the like. Some of the plurality of game balls guided to the game area are guided to the windmill 57 while relatively moving through various paths, and the windmill 57 distributes the falling routes to the left and right.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the game area is expanded in the left-right direction, by providing the windmill 57, etc., the game ball can be moved from the top start winning opening 33YA, the variable winning device 32, etc. It is configured so that it can be easily guided in the direction. In addition, the nail 49 and the like are adjusted in advance on the game board 30 so that the winning to the upper start winning opening 33YA, the variable winning device 32 and the like occurs with an appropriate probability.

In addition, the game board 30 is provided with winning detection switches as ball-entering detection means for detecting game balls that have entered the various winning holes (ball-entering means) corresponding to the various winning holes (ball-entering means) such as the general winning hole 31. It is Specifically, as shown in FIG. 169 , a general prize winning switch 221 is provided at a position corresponding to the general prize winning port 31 , and a count switch 223 is provided to the variable prize winning device 32 . In addition, the upper start prize winning port 33YA is provided with a first start prize winning switch 224A, and the lower start prize winning port 33YB is provided with a second start prize winning switch 224B. Furthermore, a through gate switch 225 is provided at a position corresponding to the through gate 34 .

As is well known, when a game ball enters various winning ports such as the general winning port 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper starting winning port 33YA, and the lower starting winning port 33YB, it is detected by various detection switches, and the upper tray 19 (or lower plate 15), a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. For example, when there is a prize in the upper start prize-winning port 33YA, 3 pieces, when there is a prize in the lower start prize-winning port 33YB, 1 prize, and when there is a prize in the general prize-winning port 31, 10 15 game balls are paid out to the upper tray 19 (lower tray 15) when there is a prize to the variable prize winning device 32.例文帳に追加Here, the upper starting winning opening 33YA and the lower starting winning opening 33YB constitute starting ball entry means in this embodiment. In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an out port 36, and game balls that do not enter various prize winning ports such as the general winning port 31 are discharged out of the game area through the out port 36. .

The variable winning device 32 includes a large winning opening 32a into which a game ball can enter, a rectangular plate-shaped opening and closing shutter 32b as a movable body that is tiltably pivoted to open and close the large winning opening 32a, and the opening and closing shutter 32b. It is provided with a large winning opening solenoid 32c as driving means for opening and closing, and is controlled by a main controller 261, which will be described later. Here, the big winning opening solenoid 32c has a plunger as a driving member that can be retracted with respect to the main body, a coil spring as an urging means, and the like.

Under this configuration, the variable winning device 32 projects the plunger from the main body by the urging force of the coil spring in the normal state when the predetermined condition is not satisfied (the large winning opening solenoid 32c is not energized). In this state, the open/close shutter 32b is in a vertical state along the top and bottom, and is in a state of being in contact with a contact portion (not shown) provided inside the peripheral edge of the big winning opening 32a. As a result, the variable winning device 32 is positioned at the closing position as the first position, which is the initial position side where the open/close shutter 32b closes the big winning opening 32a, and makes the predetermined area behind the big winning opening 32a invisible or difficult to see. A first state is established, and a game ball flowing down the game area becomes a closed state in which it is impossible to enter the big winning opening 32a.

On the other hand, when a predetermined condition is met, such as when a big win or a small win, which will be described later, is established, the solenoid 32c for the big winning opening is energized, and the plunger moves inside the main body against the urging force of the coil spring. As a result, the opening/closing shutter 32b tilts forward with its lower side as a rotation axis, and contacts a predetermined contacted portion provided outside the peripheral edge of the big winning opening 32a in a substantially horizontal state. state. As a result, the variable winning device 32 is positioned at the open position as the second position where the opening/closing shutter 32b opens the big winning opening 32a, and the second state in which the predetermined area behind the big winning opening 32a is visible or easy to see. As a result, the game ball flowing down the game area becomes an open state in which the ball can enter the big winning opening 32a.

A game ball can always win a prize in the upper starting prize-winning opening 33YA. On the other hand, the lower start winning opening 33YB is provided with an opening/closing accessory 37Y as an opening/closing type winning auxiliary device.

The opening/closing accessory 37Y includes a pair of left and right movable blades 37Ya as a movable body that rotates in the left-right direction about the lower end side, and a starting prize opening solenoid 37Yb as a driving means for opening and closing the movable blades 37Ya. In addition, the movable blade 37Ya opens and closes according to the establishment of a predetermined condition, so that the game ball flowing down the game area can enter the lower start winning opening 33YB, and the game ball enters the lower starting winning opening 33YB. It is configured so that the state can be changed between a closed state in which a prize cannot be won.

As described above, the upper start prize winning port 33YA and the lower start prize winning port 33YB are provided with the first start prize winning switch 224A and the second start prize winning switch 224B as entering ball detection means for detecting the winning game balls, respectively. there is Then, when a game ball is detected by the starting prize winning switches 224A and 224B, various lotteries such as a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot state etc. The effect display device 42 is configured to perform variable display and predetermined effects. Here, when winning a lottery, a jackpot state or the like is provided.

Hereinafter, the jackpot type in this embodiment will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 203, in this embodiment, as the jackpot types, "16R probability variable jackpot A", "16R probability variable jackpot B", "4R probability variable jackpot A", "4R probability variable jackpot B", "16R normal jackpot A" , “16R normal jackpot B”, “4R normal jackpot A”, “4R normal jackpot B” and “JUB (Jump Up Bonus) jackpot”.

In the jackpot state of "16R probability variable jackpot A", a series of specific actions are performed with "long open" as one special prize state (one round), which is repeated 16 times (16 rounds).

In the present embodiment, the "long open" means that the open/close shutter 32b of the variable prize winning device 32 is switched from the closed state of the first position to the open state of the second position and controlled to stop, and then the second control period. On the condition that the specified time of 30 seconds has passed or that the specified number of 10 game balls wins in the big winning hole 32a, the opening and closing shutter 32b returns to the first position or its vicinity until it is closed. It refers to one opening/closing operation, which is a predetermined operation.

In the jackpot state of "16R probability variable jackpot B", "long open" is one special prize state (1 round), and after this is repeated 4 times (4 rounds), "short open" is further performed once As a grand prize state (1 round), a series of specific actions that repeat this 12 times (12 rounds) are performed.

In the present embodiment, "short opening" means that the open/close shutter 32b of the variable prize winning device 32 is switched from the closed state of the first position to the open state of the second position and is controlled to stop, and then the first control period. On the condition that a specified time of 0.4 seconds elapses or a specified number of three game balls enter the big winning opening 32a, the open/close shutter 32b returns to the first position or its vicinity to be closed. It refers to one opening and closing operation that is a predetermined operation up to.

In the present embodiment, game balls are shot toward the game area from the shooting device 60 at a rate of one every "0.6 seconds" based on the operation of the handle 18 by the player. On the other hand, in the above-mentioned "short opening", the prescribed opening time of the open/close shutter 32b is 0.4 seconds. That is, in the case of "short opening", the opening time of the open/close shutter 32b once is shorter than the shooting cycle of the game ball. Therefore, even one game ball may not win a prize with only one "short release". For this reason, the opening/closing shutter 32b is rarely closed based on the condition related to the number of winning prizes (the number of winning prizes is 3) among the above two closing conditions corresponding to the "short opening", and once the opening/closing shutter 32b is opened. will normally be closed based on the lapse of a specified time (0.4 seconds). This avoids changing the execution period each time during the "short open" execution period.

In the jackpot state of "4R probability variable jackpot A" and "4R probability variable jackpot B", a series of specific actions that repeat this four times (4 rounds) with "long open" as one special prize state (1 round) are performed. will be

In the jackpot state of "16R normal jackpot A", "long open" is one special prize state (1 round), and after repeating this eight times (8 rounds), "short open" is one special prize. As a state (1 round), a series of specific actions that repeat this eight times (8 rounds) are performed.

In the jackpot state of "16R normal jackpot B", "long opening" is one special prize state (1 round), and after repeating this four times (4 rounds), "short opening" is one special prize. As a state (1 round), a series of specific actions that repeat this 12 times (12 rounds) are performed.

In the jackpot state of "4R normal jackpot A" and "4R normal jackpot B", a series of specific actions are performed, with "long open" as one special prize state (1 round), which is repeated four times (4 rounds). will be

In the jackpot state of "JUB jackpot", "Short opening" is set as one special prize state (1 round), and after repeating this five times, "Long open" is set as one special prize state (1 round). , a series of specific actions that repeat this 15 times. It should be noted that a configuration may be adopted in which the "short release" is performed five times in the first round, and the "long release" is performed in each of the second to sixteenth rounds.

In addition, when the various "probability variable jackpots" and "JUB jackpots" occur, a "high probability mode (high probability state)" is given as a lottery mode after the jackpot state. On the other hand, when various "normal jackpots" occur, a "low probability mode (low probability state)" is given after the jackpot state ends.

"High-probability mode" refers to a state in which the jackpot probability is increased compared to the "low-probability mode" normally set. The "high probability mode" set after the end of the big win continues until the next big win state occurs.

After the end of the various jackpots, a winning support mode related to the opening/closing accessory 37Y is performed while the special display devices 43L and 43R are performing variable display for a predetermined number of times or until the next jackpot state occurs. As a "high support mode (high ball state)" is given.

"High support mode" means that the ratio of the open state to the closed state per unit time in the opening and closing accessory 37Y of the lower start winning opening 33YB is higher than the "low support mode (low ball entry state)" set at normal times. It refers to the state where there are many.

For example, as the "high support mode", (1) a state in which the fluctuation display time in the normal symbol display device 41 described later is shorter than in the "low support mode", (2) the movable wings 37Ya of the opening/closing accessory 37Y A state in which the opening time (prescribed time) is longer than in the "low support mode", and (3) a state in which the prescribed number of game balls that can win prizes per opening of the movable blade 37Ya is greater than in the "low support mode". , (4) When a winning result is obtained by the opening lottery of the opening and closing accessory 37Y caused by the game ball passing through the through gate 34, the number of execution times of the opening and closing processing of the movable feather 37Ya performed per time is "low support mode (5) a state in which the winning probability in the open lottery for the opening/closing accessory 37Y is higher than that in the "low support mode". The high support mode in this embodiment employs the configurations (1), (2), and (5) above. Of course, without being limited to this, any one of the configurations (1) to (5) or any combination of the configurations (1) to (5) may be adopted as the “high support mode”. As a result, game balls are likely to frequently win prizes in the lower starting prize-winning port 33YB, the number of times the big winning lottery is executed increases, and the state of holding the balls becomes good.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the "high support mode" is provided, by changing the variation pattern table to a table for the "high support mode" as described later, the first and second special display devices 43L , 43R (effect display device 42) are configured to be shorter than in the "low support mode".

In this embodiment, after the end of the "16R probability variable jackpot A" and "4R probability variable jackpot A", the "high support mode" is provided until the next jackpot state occurs. The "high support mode" is hereinafter referred to as "until the next time/high support mode".

After the end of "16R probability variable jackpot B" and "4R probability variable jackpot B", "20 times", "30 times", "40 times" or "50 times" are displayed on the special display devices 43L and 43R. "High Support Mode" is granted while The "high support mode" is hereinafter referred to as "20 times/high support mode", "30 times/high support mode", "40 times/high support mode" or "50 times/high support mode", respectively.

After the end of the "16R normal jackpot A" and "4R normal jackpot A", the "high support mode" is provided while the special display devices 43L and 43R perform "30 times" variable display. The "high support mode" is hereinafter referred to as "30 times/high support mode S".

After the end of "16R normal jackpot B" and "4R normal jackpot B", "20 times/high support mode", "30 times/high support mode", "40 times/high support mode" or "50 times/high support mode" Support mode" is given.

After the end of the "JUB jackpot", "until next time/high support mode" is provided.

In this embodiment, various game states occur by combining the various modes described above.

For example, if "high probability mode" and "high support mode" are given, it becomes a so-called "probability change state (probability change state)".

When the state in which the "low probability mode" and the "low support mode" are provided, it becomes a so-called "normal state".

If "low probability mode" and "high support mode" are given, it will be a so-called "time reduction state (time reduction state)".

When the "high-probability mode" and the "low-support mode" are added, a so-called "latent certainty state (variable latent certainty state)" occurs. In other words, when it comes to the "latent certainty state", the probability of hitting the jackpot is simply increased, and on the surface it is the same as the "normal state", so the state where the "high probability mode" is given It becomes difficult for the player to recognize it.

Further, in the present embodiment, apart from the various "big wins", a "small win" is generated when a predetermined result is obtained in the winning lottery. In the small winning state, a series of specific actions are performed in which "short opening" is set as one special prize state (one round), and this is repeated five times (five rounds). However, the lottery mode and winning support mode provided after the end of the small winning state are the original modes before the occurrence of the small winning state. For example, if the lottery mode before the occurrence of the small winning state is the "high probability mode", the "high probability mode" is maintained even after the small winning state ends.

In addition, although it will be described later in detail, in this embodiment, when the game ball wins the upper starting winning opening 33YA and when winning the lower starting winning opening 33YB, it is awarded when winning by lottery. The distribution of the jackpot types is different. When winning the winning lottery triggered by the winning of the game ball to the upper start winning opening 33YA, "16R probability variable jackpot A", "16R probability variable jackpot B", "4R probability variable jackpot A", "4R probability variable jackpot B , ``16R normal jackpot A'', ``16R normal jackpot B'', and ``4R normal jackpot B'', and wins the winning lottery triggered by the winning of the game ball to the lower start prize winning opening 33YB. , it is distributed to one of "16R probability variable jackpot A", "4R probability variable jackpot A", "4R normal jackpot A" and "JUB jackpot". In addition, regarding the "small hit", it is configured to occur only when winning the winning lottery triggered by the winning of the game ball to the lower start winning opening 33YB.

The first and second special display devices 43L and 43R are each composed of two segment display devices and installed below the game board 30 . Each segment display device is provided with eight display segments. Each display segment has an individual light source composed of LEDs, and by controlling the on/off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light only one display segment, and any combination display segment can be illuminated. As a result, predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers) are individually displayed on each segment display device.

Then, when the game ball enters the upper starting prize-winning port 33YA, the first special display device 43L performs a variable display, and when the game ball enters the lower starting prize-winning port 33YB, the second special display device 43R. The variable display is performed at . The display contents of the special display devices 43L and 43R are directly controlled by the main control device 261, which will be described later.

Further, after the variable display is performed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, whether or not the jackpot lottery is won is definitely displayed by the display mode when the variable display is stopped. be. For example, when a game ball wins in the upper starting prize-winning opening 33YA, the corresponding first special display device 43L displays a variable display at high speed, and when a predetermined time elapses, one of the display modes is stopped and displayed (for example, stopped for several seconds )do. Then, when the big win lottery is won, numerical values corresponding to various big wins (see FIG. 203) are displayed when fluctuation stops, and a big win state occurs.

As shown in FIG. 203, for example, when "16R probability variable jackpot A" is won, "9-" is stopped and displayed on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, and "50 times/high support mode". When winning the "16R probability variable jackpot B" with "84" is stop-displayed on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R. Further, when the "JUB jackpot" is won, "1.-" is stopped and displayed on the first or second special display devices 43L and 43R, and when the "small win" is won, the first or second 2 "1-" is stopped and displayed on the special display devices 43L and 43R. Here, like the stop mode “1.-” related to the “JUB big win” and the stop mode “1-” related to the “small win”, in order to enhance the production effect of the “JUB big win”, both stop modes It is preferable that the configuration is confusing.

Of course, the mode of stopping the special display devices 43L and 43R corresponding to various wins is not limited to the mode described above. For example, there may be a plurality of stop modes of the first or second special display devices 43L and 43R indicating one winning type, instead of one. For example, when "16R probability variable jackpot A" is won, one of "91", "92", "93", . It may be configured to be

Even when there are a plurality of stop modes of the first or second special display devices 43L and 43R indicating one type of win, a plurality of stop modes related to the "JUB big win" and a plurality of stop modes related to the "small win" It is preferable that a plurality of stop modes be confusing. For example, any one of ``-1.'', ``-2'', ``-3.'', ``-4'', . Any one of "-1", "-2.", "-3", "-4.", . In such a configuration, a pair of specific symbols ("1", "2", "3", . One of them is included in a plurality of stop modes related to "JUB big win" and the other is included in a plurality of stop modes related to "small win", and they are alternately interleaved.

In addition, the configuration may be such that the colors displayed in any or all of the display segments can be changed as appropriate.

Further, when a game ball newly wins the starting winning opening 33YA, 33YB during the variable display of the first or second special display devices 43L, 43R, the variable display for that amount is performed at that time. It is configured to be performed after the end of the variable display. That is, the variable display is put on standby (suspended). The maximum number of times the variable display is suspended is determined for each pachinko machine model. , up to 4 variable displays (a total of 8 variable displays) are reserved. In addition, the number of times of suspension is displayed by the first suspension lamp 46a and the second suspension lamp 46b. In addition, when a game ball newly wins the starting prize-winning openings 33YA and 33YB during the jackpot state, the variable display for that amount is also suspended.

Basically, the variable display triggered by the winning of the upper start winning opening 33YA is memorized in the order in which the corresponding game balls have won in the upper starting winning opening 33YA, and is digested in the order of winning. The variable display triggered by the winning to the 33YB is stored in the order in which the corresponding game balls have entered the lower start winning port 33YB and is completed in the order in which they have won. However, when both the variable display triggered by the winning to the upper starting winning port 33YA and the variable display triggered by winning to the lower starting winning port 33YB are suspended (the first suspension lamp 46a and the second When one or more of the pending lamps 46b are lit), the variable display triggered by the winning to the lower start winning opening 33YB is preferentially extinguished. That is, unless the variable display triggered by the winning to the lower start winning opening 33YB is completely extinguished, the variable display triggered by winning to the upper starting winning opening 33YA is not performed. For example, in a state where one first holding lamp 46a is lit, the game ball wins in the lower starting winning prize port 33YB, and one second holding lamp 46b lights up, the winning to the upper starting winning prize port 33YA The variable display triggered by the winning is postponed, and the variable display triggered by the winning to the lower start winning opening 33YB is performed first. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the variable display triggered by winning the upper start prize-winning port 33YA will be referred to as "first variable display", and the variable display triggered by winning the lower start prize-winning port 33YB will be referred to as "second variable display". ” is also called.

In addition, the through gate 34 is configured so that game balls flowing down the game area can pass one by one. Although the details will be described later, the through gate 34 includes a through gate switch 225 capable of detecting a game ball passing through the through gate 34, and when a game ball is detected by the through gate switch 225, the switch is opened or closed. An open lottery is performed to determine whether or not the accessory 37Y (lower start winning opening 33YB) is to be opened, and the normal symbol display device 41 is configured to perform variable display. Then, when the lottery is won in the open lottery, the opening/closing accessory 37Y is kept open for a specified time.

The variable display device unit 35 includes a normal pattern display device 41 that variably displays when the through gate 34 is passed, and an effect display device 42 that variably displays according to the variable display by the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. and are provided.

Further, in the variable display device unit 35, the variable display performed by the effect display device 42 is a variable specification indicating which of the upper starting winning opening 33YA and the lower starting winning opening 33YB corresponds to winning. A lamp 40 is provided.

The normal symbol display device 41 is configured to be able to light up and display "○" or "X" as a normal symbol. The display is changed at high speed such as "○"→. Then, when the variable display stops at the "O" symbol (winning symbol) for several seconds, the opening/closing accessory 37Y of the lower start winning opening 33YB is opened for a predetermined time. Display contents of the normal symbol display device 41 are directly controlled by a main control device 261 which will be described later.

In addition, when a game ball newly passes through the through gate 34 during the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41, the variable display for that amount is performed after the variable display being performed at that time is finished. It has become. That is, the variable display is put on standby (suspended). The maximum number of times of the variable display to be held is determined for each pachinko machine model, but in this embodiment, it is held up to four times, and the number of times of holding is displayed by the holding lamp 44. there is

The effect display device 42 is composed of a liquid crystal display device, and display contents are controlled by a sub-control device 262 and a display control device 45, which will be described later. That is, in the effect display device 42, based on the command from the main control device 261, the sub-control device 262 performs auxiliary control so as to correspond to the results displayed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. The content to be displayed is determined and displayed by the display control device 45, which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 209, the effect display device 42 is provided with, for example, upper, middle and lower three pattern display areas. ), and thereafter, the symbols are stopped and displayed in order for each symbol display area (for example, in the order of upper symbol display area→lower symbol display area→middle symbol display area). For example, when the various "probability variable jackpots" or various "normal jackpots" are determined by the main controller 261, the first or second special display devices 43L and 43R display corresponding to the jackpots, and the effect display device. At 42, symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination corresponding to the big win (for example, the symbols stopped and displayed in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas are the same), and the big win state is started. be. Incidentally, in the case of a "JUB big win" or a "small win", the combination of symbols stop-displayed on the effect display device 42 does not correspond to the big win, as will be described later.

Further, when the symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination corresponding to a big hit, as a preliminary step, for example, the same symbols are stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area. The ready-to-win state is the state in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area and the variable display is still performed in the middle symbol display area.

Even if the ready-to-win state occurs, if the jackpot state does not occur, a symbol different from the symbols stop-displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area. Also, in the case of various types of "probability variable jackpots" or various types of "normal jackpots", the double number is stopped and displayed on the effect display device 42 as described above, but in this embodiment, it is stopped and displayed. Depending on the type of symbol, it is impossible to determine the game state ("high probability mode" or not) given after the end of the jackpot.

Further, in the case of a "JUB big win" or a "small win", a combination of predetermined specific numbers (hereinafter referred to as chance symbols) is stop-displayed instead of double eyes. For example, in this embodiment, "3", "4", and "1" are stop-displayed in the upper, middle, and lower pattern display areas. As a result, when the chance symbols are stopped and displayed, the player cannot distinguish between the "JUB jackpot" that is more advantageous to the player and the "small win" that is not so advantageous. , it is possible to suppress the decline in interest of the player.

Of course, different combinations of specific numbers to be stopped and displayed in the upper/middle/lower pattern display areas may be used depending on whether the "JUB big win" or the "minor win". Also, in the case of "JUB big hit" or "small hit", instead of a combination of predetermined specific numbers, it seems that random combinations of odds are stopped and displayed, just like when they are lost. can be

Also, the performance display device 42 is configured to display the pending number of the variable display on the special display devices 43L and 43R corresponding to the above pending lamps 46a and 46b (see FIG. 209, etc.).

In the present embodiment, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the special display devices 43L, 43R and the holding lamps 46a, 46b are covered by the front frame set 14, making them invisible to the player. . Therefore, the player can grasp the game state, lottery result, etc., solely by the display contents (symbol display, hold display, etc.) of the effect display device 42 .

Of course, the configurations of the special display devices 43L, 43R and the reserve lamps 46L, 46R are not limited to such configurations, and other configurations may be employed. For example, the special display devices 43L and 43R may be configured to be visible. However, the special display devices 43L and 43R are provided in inconspicuous places such as the lower corners of the game area as described above, and the size of the display portion is small, and characters for identification are displayed stopped. relatively short time. Therefore, it is practically impossible to grasp the given game state unless one carefully observes the special display devices 43L and 43R.

The variable specific lamp 40 has an LED with a blue emission color and an LED with a red emission color, and the effect display device 42 performs a variable display triggered by winning the upper start winning opening 33YA. When the variable display triggered by the winning to the lower start winning opening 33YB is performed, the light is emitted in red.

Next, the configuration of the variable display device unit 35 will be described in detail. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 172 and 173, the center frame 47 is fixed to the front side of the game board 30, and the frame cover 213 is fixed to the back side of the game board 30, thereby forming the variable display unit 35. It has an integrated configuration.

A rectangular opening 213a (see FIG. 171) is formed in the center of the frame cover 213, and an effect display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device, is detachably attached to the rear side thereof. The liquid crystal display section 42a of the effect display device 42 is a known one in which a liquid crystal panel formed by laminating various translucent members is arranged on the front side of a backlight as light emitting means.

The center frame 47 has a frame shape with a substantially circular opening 751 formed in the center thereof, and the liquid crystal display section 42a of the effect display device 42 can be visually recognized through the opening 751 .

Note that the center frame 47 is not composed of a single member. For example, the base member is plated with various decorative members, or a lens member made of transparent resin that transmits light such as an LED. is assembled.

A stage portion 770 is provided on the upper surface of the lower side portion 47b of the center frame 47 along the left-right direction. Gentle undulations are formed on the stage portion 770 along the left-right direction.

A drop hole 774 is formed in the central portion of the rear wall portion 772 of the stage portion 770 so as to open forward and allow the game ball to drop. A communicating passage 775 leading to the drop hole 774 is provided below (inside) the central portion of the stage portion 770 . The other side of the communication path 775 is opened to the front side of the lower side portion 47b of the center frame 47 and serves as a discharge port 776 for discharging the game ball that has fallen into the drop hole 774 onto the game board 30 surface. Incidentally, when the center frame 47 is arranged on the game board 30, as shown in FIG.

In the central portion of the stage portion 770 , a guide groove (not shown) is formed at a position in front of the drop hole 774 so as to slope gently downward toward the back side. As a result, the game ball can drop from the stage portion 770 to the drop hole 774 .

The left side portion 47c of the center frame 47 is formed therein with a ball passage (warp passage) 764 through which game balls pass. An entrance portion 764a of the ball passage 764 opens at the substantially central portion in the vertical direction of the left side portion 47c of the center frame 47, while an exit portion 764b faces the upper surface (stage portion 770) of the lower side portion 47b of the center frame 47. It is open. This ball passage 764 can guide a game ball flowing down on the surface of the game board 30 onto a stage portion 770 within the center frame 47 .

The game ball guided onto the stage portion 770 rolls on the stage portion 770 and then falls from the front onto the surface of the game board 30 or into the drop hole 774 described above. Of these, the game ball that has fallen into the drop hole 774 is guided onto the game board 30 surface via the communication path 775 . A game ball discharged from the discharge port 776 enters the upper start prize winning port 33YA with a relatively high probability.

Also, the variable display device unit 35 is provided with an upper performance accessory unit 761 between the center frame 47 and the frame cover 213 . Here, the configuration of the upper production accessory unit 761 will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

As shown in FIGS. 172 and 173, the upper performance accessory unit 761 is provided on the back side of the upper side portion 47a of the center frame 47, and during normal operation (see FIG. 172), most of it is covered by the upper side portion 47a and the like. It is covered, making it difficult for the player to see it.

The upper performance accessory unit 761 includes a unit base portion 810 arranged on the front upper portion of the frame cover 213, a movable accessory 811 as a movable body provided to be vertically movable with respect to the unit base portion 810, and the A vertical driving mechanism 1812 for vertically moving the movable accessory 811 is provided.

As shown in FIGS. 174(a) and (b), the vertical drive mechanism 1812 includes a support portion 1814 that supports the movable accessory 811, and a vertical drive motor 1815 as driving means for driving the support portion 1814. I have.

Although not shown, the unit base portion 810 is formed with a guide groove portion extending in the vertical direction, and the support portion 1814 is formed with a ridge portion to be assembled with the guide groove portion. As a result, the support portion 1814 can be slidably displaced in the vertical direction, and positional displacement in the horizontal direction during the vertical movement is restricted.

A rack portion 1814a is formed on the right edge portion of the support portion 1814. As shown in FIG. A rack portion 1814a of the support portion 1814 and a pinion gear 1815a attached and fixed to the rotary shaft of the vertical drive motor 1815 are meshed.

With such a configuration, the vertical drive motor 1815 rotates, so that the movable accessory 811 can be slidably displaced in the vertical direction.

Normally, most of the movable accessory 811 is positioned at the standby position behind the upper side 47a of the center frame 47, and is in a standby state that is difficult for the player to see (see FIGS. 172 and 174(a)). . Then, the vertical drive motor 1815 rotates forward, and the support portion 1814 slides downward, so that the entire movable accessory 811 is positioned on the front side of the display portion 42a of the effect display device 42. 173 and 174(b)), which is visible to the player.

Further, from this state, the vertical drive motor 1815 rotates in reverse, and the support portion 1814 slides upward, whereby the movable accessory 811 returns to the normal standby state.

The vertical drive motor 1815 is a stepping motor whose rotation is controlled by the applied drive pulse signal. That is, by adjusting the drive pulse signal, the vertical movement amount and movement speed of the movable accessory 811 can be controlled. At the same time, by monitoring the number of input drive pulse signals, it is possible to grasp the amount of vertical displacement of the movable accessory 811 from the reference position.

More specifically, a position detection sensor 1816 for detecting the vertical position of the movable accessory 811 is attached to the unit base portion 810 . In this embodiment, as the position detection sensor 1816, a known photosensor in which a light-emitting element and a light-receiving element are spaced apart and opposed to each other is employed.

Correspondingly, the support portion 1814 is formed with a light shielding piece 1814b protruding in the vicinity of the lower end thereof. Then, by detecting the light shielding piece 1814b by the position detection sensor 1816, it is grasped that the movable accessory 811 (support portion 1814) is at the reference position. Incidentally, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 172, the standby position where the movable accessory 811 is in the standby state is the reference position.

Here, although illustration is omitted, the unit base section 810 receives instructions from the sub-control device 262, and controls the drive of the vertical drive motor 1815 and the monitoring control of the position detection sensor 1816. are arranged.

Here, the movable accessory 811 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 215 to 219. FIG. The movable accessory 811 includes a base portion 817 fixed to the lower end of the support portion 1814 and a rotating body 820 rotatably supported on the front side of the base portion 817 .

The base portion 817 has a substantially circular shape when viewed from the front, and a support shaft portion 818 is formed at the center thereof so as to protrude forward. The support shaft portion 818 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape with a closed front side and an open rear side.

A rotating body driving motor 821 is attached and fixed to the back side of the base portion 817 . A pinion gear 821b is attached and fixed to the front end portion of the rotating shaft 821a of the rotating body drive motor 821 . The driving force of the rotor drive motor 821 is transmitted to the rotor 820 via the pinion gear 821b.

An annular cover body 822 is attached and fixed to the front portion of the base portion 817 . A circular opening 822 a is formed in the central portion of the cover body 822 .

The rotating body 820 mainly consists of a rotating base plate 823 and six movable pieces 825 annularly arranged on the front side thereof.

The rotary base plate 823 has a cylindrical portion 826 extending in the front-rear direction and six extending pieces 827 radially extending from the outer peripheral wall portion of the cylindrical portion 826 toward the outside in the radial direction. The six extending pieces 827 are provided at equal intervals (at intervals of 60°) in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 826 .

The cylindrical portion 826 is fitted onto the support shaft portion 818 of the base portion 817 . As a result, the rotary base plate 823 is rotatably supported on the base portion 817 . Although illustration is omitted, the cylindrical portion 826 or the support shaft portion 818 is provided with restricting means for preventing the rotation base plate 823 (cylindrical portion 826) from falling off from the base portion 817 (support shaft portion 818). ing.

Each extension piece 827 is formed with a slit 829 that penetrates in the front-rear direction and is formed along the radial direction of the rotary base plate 823 . A cylindrical pinion support shaft 830 is formed so as to protrude rearward from the rear surface of each extension piece 827 near the tip.

An annular central gear member 831 is fitted onto the cylindrical portion 826 of the rotary base 823 from behind.

The central gear member 831 is integrally formed with a large-diameter gear portion 831a provided on the front side and a small-diameter gear portion 831b provided on the rear side so as to form steps in the front-rear direction.

A pinion gear 832 is fitted on each of the pinion support shafts 830 and meshes with a large-diameter gear portion 831 a of a central gear member 831 .

Further, an annular holding plate 835 is attached to the back side of the rotary base plate 823 (see FIG. 219). The circular opening 835a of the pressing plate 835 is slightly larger in diameter than the small-diameter gear portion 831b of the central gear member 831 so that the small-diameter gear portion 831b can be inserted therethrough, and has a smaller diameter than the large-diameter gear portion 831a.

Thereby, the holding plate 835 covers the six pinion gears 832 and the large-diameter gear portion 831a from behind, and is fixed to the tip of the pinion support shaft 830 while inserting the small-diameter gear portion 831b. As a result, the central gear member 831 is rotatably held around the cylindrical portion 826 of the rotary base 823 .

A pinion gear 821b of a rotor drive motor 821 is meshed with the small diameter gear portion 831b of the central gear member 831 . As a result, the rotation of the rotor drive motor 821 is transmitted to the central gear member 831 .

In other words, the pinion gear 821b, the central gear member 831, the pinion gear 832, etc. transmit the power of the rotating body drive motor 821 to the rotating body 820 to slide the movable piece 825 and rotate the rotary base 823. A driving main power transmission mechanism is constructed.

Furthermore, a second driving gear 841 is attached and fixed to the rear end of the cylindrical portion 826 of the rotary base plate 823 . As shown in FIG. 219, the second drive gear 841 is meshed with the second transmission gear 842 . The second transmission gear 842 is connected to the oil damper 843 . A support member 844 is fitted to the oil damper 843 from behind, and the support member 844 is attached and fixed to the base portion 817 .

As a result, the rotation board 823 is braked so as not to rotate at a low torque of a predetermined level or less. Here, the second drive gear 841, the second transmission gear 842, and the like constitute a regulating power transmission mechanism that transmits the force of the oil damper 843 to the rotating body 820 to restrict the operation of the rotating body 820. FIG.

The regulating power transmission mechanism is not connected to the main power transmission mechanism, and power is directly transmitted between the rotor drive motor 821 and the oil damper 843 without the rotation base 823. configured not to be transmitted.

As can be seen from FIG. 215 and the like, the rotating body 820 is formed with a motif of one flower, and each movable piece 825 is formed to imitate one petal.

Each movable piece 825 is made of a translucent transparent resin material. However, the surface of the general portion of each movable piece 825 is formed with fine irregularities (not shown). As a result, the general portion of the movable piece 825 diffuses and transmits the light emitted from the display portion (liquid crystal display portion) 42a of the effect display device 42 located behind, and the entire portion is in a state of uniform surface emission.

A linearly extending rack portion 838 is integrally formed on the rear surface of the movable piece 825 . The rack portion 838 is inserted into the slit 829 of the extension piece 827 of the rotary board 823 . This allows the movable piece 825 to slide along the radial direction of the rotary substrate 823 (extending direction of the extending piece 827). Although not shown, the rack portion 838 or the slit 829 is provided with restricting means for preventing the movable piece 825 from falling off from the rotary substrate 823 .

The rack portion 838 of the movable piece 825 meshes with the pinion gear 832 on the rear surface of the extension piece 827 . As a result, the movable piece 825 is moved along the slit 829 of the extension piece 827, that is, along the radial direction of the rotary base 823 by transmitting the power of the rotor drive motor 821 through the main power transmission mechanism. slide displacement becomes possible.

Under such a configuration, the rotating body 820 is in a diameter-reduced state in which the movable pieces 825 of the six radially arranged extending pieces 827 are slid to the innermost side in the radial direction during a normal standby state. (See FIGS. 215 and 216).

In the diameter-reduced state of the rotating body 820, the base end portions of the six movable pieces 825 are in a state of substantially contacting the outer peripheral portion of the cylindrical portion 826 of the rotary base plate 823. Both side edge portions on the base end side are in a state of substantially abutting on the base end side edge portions of the adjacent movable pieces 825 respectively.

On the other hand, when a predetermined effect is executed, the rotor 820 expands in diameter by simultaneously displacing the movable pieces 825 of the six radially arranged extending pieces 827 radially outward ( 217 and 218).

A motor control board (motor driver) 845 that receives instructions from the sub-control device 262 and controls the rotor drive motor 821 is attached to the back side of the base portion 817 .

The rotating body drive motor 821 is a stepping motor whose rotation is controlled by a drive pulse signal applied via the motor control board 845, and the rotation angle changes according to the number of input pulses. That is, by adjusting the driving pulse signal, the rotational displacement amount and the rotational speed of the rotor 820 can be controlled. At the same time, by monitoring the number of input drive pulse signals, it is possible to grasp the rotational displacement amount of the rotating body 820 from the reference position.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 219, a position detection sensor 846 is attached to the front surface of the base portion 817 to detect the rotational position of the rotating body 820 (rotating base plate 823). In this embodiment, as the position detection sensor 846, a known photosensor in which a light-emitting element and a light-receiving element are spaced apart and opposed to each other is employed.

Correspondingly, a light shielding piece 847 is formed to protrude from the rear side of the rotary substrate 823 (the second drive gear 841 in this embodiment). By detecting the light shielding piece 847 by the position detection sensor 846, it is recognized that the rotating body 820 is at the reference position.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 215, the reference position is the position where the predetermined movable piece 825 is arranged along the horizontal direction in the front view of the rotating body 820 .

Although not shown, the base portion 817 is provided with a control board that receives instructions from the sub-controller 262 and performs monitoring control of the position detection sensor 846 and the like.

Under such a configuration, if it is assumed that the rotor drive motor 821 rotates once with 360 pulses of the excitation signal (driving pulse signal), the angle change (angle change per step) based on the excitation signal of 1 pulse is 1°. becomes.

Assuming that the gear ratio (gear ratio) between the pinion gear 821b of the rotor drive motor 821 and the small-diameter gear portion 831b of the central gear member 831 is 1:4, the rotor drive motor 821 is driven as described above. Under the configuration in which the excitation signal of 360 pulses makes one rotation, the rotor 820 makes one rotation with 1440 pulses (=360 pulses×4).

However, the amount of change in angle based on the excitation signal of one pulse, the gear ratio between the pinion gear 821b and the small diameter gear portion 831b, etc. are not limited to the values exemplified above, and different configurations may be adopted.

As shown in FIG. 217 and the like, when the rotation of the rotating body 820 is stopped, the six movable pieces 825 are set at six predetermined positions in the rotating direction (clockwise direction in this embodiment) of the rotating body 820, respectively. Stop positions EA1 to EA6 (specifically, a first stop position EA1 located on the right side of the rotating body 820, a second stop position EA2 located diagonally downward to the right, and a third stop position EA3 located diagonally downward to the left). , a fourth stop position EA4 located on the left side, a fifth stop position EA5 located diagonally upward left, or a sixth stop position EA6 located diagonally upward right.

Here, the operation mode of the rotating body 820 configured as described above will be described. As shown in FIGS. 215, 216, etc., during normal times when the character object presentation is not performed, the six movable pieces 825 are positioned at the radially inner slide limit positions of the rotor 820, respectively. In other words, the rotating body 820 is in a state of contracting the diameter most.

In this state, when the rotor drive motor 821 is rotated forward, the central gear member 831 first starts to rotate clockwise in front view via the pinion gear 821b.

At the beginning of the rotation, the braking force of the oil damper 843 is applied to the rotary base 823 via the regulating power transmission mechanism, so the rotary base 823 remains stationary and does not move.

On the other hand, when the central gear member 831 rotates clockwise in a front view, the six pinion gears 832 meshed with the large-diameter gear portion 831a rotate. Power is transmitted to the six movable pieces 825 via the rack portion 838 meshed with each of the pinion gears 832, and the six movable pieces 825 move along the slits 829 of the extension pieces 827. , radially slidably displaced toward the radially outer side of the rotating body 820 . That is, the rotating body 820 expands in diameter.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 217, 218, etc., when the six movable pieces 825 each reach the radial outer slide limit position of the rotating body 820 and the rotating body 820 expands to the maximum diameter, the rotating base plate 823 is moved. In contrast, rotational power is transmitted. Then, when the torque exceeds a predetermined level, the rotary board 823 starts to rotate clockwise when viewed from the front.

After that, when the rotating body driving motor 821 stops, the rotating body 820 stops, and the six movable pieces 825 stop at any of the stop positions EA1 to EA6.

In addition, when the performance of the character is finished and the normal operation is to be performed, first, the rotating body drive motor 821 is rotated in the reverse direction, and the central gear member 831 is rotated counterclockwise in front view via the pinion gear 821b. .

Even in this case, at the beginning of the rotation of the central gear member 831, the braking force of the oil damper 843 is applied to the rotary base 823 via the regulating power transmission mechanism, so that the rotary base 823 stops. It remains stationary, and only the movable piece 825 operates.

As a result, the six pinion gears 832 meshed with the large-diameter gear portion 831a of the central gear member 831 rotate. Power is transmitted to the six movable pieces 825 via the rack portion 838 meshed with each of the pinion gears 832, and the six movable pieces 825 move along the slits 829 of the extension pieces 827. , the rotor 820 is slid radially inward, and the diameter of the rotor 820 is reduced.

After that, when each of the six movable pieces 825 slides to the radially inner slide limit position of the rotating body 820, the rotating body drive motor 821 is stopped. As a result, the rotating body 820 returns to its normal diameter-reduced state.

Next, the rear configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 170, 171 and the like. On the back of the pachinko machine 10, various control boards are arranged vertically and horizontally, and some of them are arranged so as to be overlapped in the front and back, and a game ball supply device (payout mechanism) for supplying game balls. and a resin protective cover, etc. are attached. Since the dispensing mechanism and the protective cover are integrated as one unit, and the resin portion is generally called the back pack, the unit is called "back pack unit 203" here.

First, the rear configuration of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. 171 and the like. As described above, on the rear side of the variable display device unit 35 (see FIG. 169) arranged corresponding to the through hole in the center of the game board 30, there is a resin frame cover 213 covering the center frame 47 from behind. It is provided so as to protrude to the rear. In addition, on the rear side of the frame cover 213, the effect display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device facing forward from the opening of the frame cover 213, the display control device 45, and the sub-control device 262 are detachably stacked in the front-rear direction. installed.

The performance display device 42 is housed in a storage box (reference numerals omitted) having an opening for exposing the display portion (liquid crystal screen) of the performance display device 42 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and is attached to the frame cover 213. It is fixed on the back side. The display control device 45 is housed in a substrate box 45a and fixed to the back side of the effect display device 42 (storage box). The sub-controller 262 is accommodated in a substrate box 262a and fixed to the rear side of the display control device 45 (substrate box 45a). The board boxes 45a and 262a are made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the inside can be visually recognized. An LED control board or the like for driving the LED or the like built in the center frame 47 is arranged inside the frame cover 213 .

Below the frame cover 213, a back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 so as to cover the general winning port 31, the variable winning device 32, the start winning ports 33YA, 33YB and the like from behind. The back frame set 215 is provided with a ball recovery mechanism for recovering game balls that have moved from the front side to the back side of the game board 30 through different paths such as the above-mentioned various prize winning ports and the out port 36 (not shown). . The game balls collected by this ball collecting mechanism are guided to a discharge passage portion 217 which will be described later, and discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 from a discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217 .

Also, although not shown, the back frame set 215 is provided with a first board relay board that is electrically connected to the general winning switch 221, the count switch 223, and the through gate switch 225 via cable connectors. . This first board relay board relays the general winning switch 221 and the like and the main controller 261, and is electrically connected to the main controller 261 via a cable connector.

On the other hand, the starting winning switches 224A and 224B for detecting winning to the starting winning ports 33YA and 33YB are directly connected to the main controller 261 via connector cables without passing through the relay board.

The detection results detected by various winning detection switches are taken into the main controller 261 . Then, a payout command (the number of game balls to be paid out) according to the winning situation of each time is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the payout control device 311, and based on the output signal from the payout control device 311, a predetermined number of game balls is sent. is paid out (except when detected by the through gate switch 225).
Also, in this embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the main controller 261 . More specifically, a substrate box 263 in which a main controller 261 is mounted is rotatably pivoted to the back frame set 215 and can be opened rearward.

The main controller 261 is housed in a substrate box 263 made of transparent resin material or the like. The board box 263 includes a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and these box base and box cover are connected by a sealing member. The board box 263 connected by the sealing member is configured so that it cannot be opened unless a predetermined trace is left. As a result, it is possible to easily discover that the board box 263 has been illegally opened.

Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in FIG. 170, the back pack unit 203 is formed by integrating a resin-molded back pack 351 and a game ball payout mechanism 352 . The back pack unit 203 is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the left side (the right side in FIG. 170) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened rearward about the opening/closing axis extending along the vertical direction. ing. In addition, an external relay terminal plate 240 is provided on the upper left portion of the back pack unit 203 (upper right portion in FIG. 170).

The external relay terminal board 240 is for relaying transmission of various information to a game hall computer or the like, and is provided with a plurality of external connection terminals. For the sake of convenience, no reference numerals are attached, but for example, terminals for outputting information about the current game state (jackpot state, high probability mode, etc.), front frame set 14 detected by open detection switches 91 and 92 described later, and inner A terminal for outputting information about the opening of the frame 12, a terminal for outputting information about various error states such as winning error, lower tray full error, no ball error, payout error, and prizes paid out from the payout control device 311 A terminal for outputting information about the number of balls is provided.

However, in the present embodiment, a terminal for outputting information about the "small win" is not provided, and the "small win" occurrence information is not output. In this embodiment, during the "high support mode", "small win" is likely to occur relatively frequently, so every time a "small win" occurs, the occurrence information should not always be output. , can lead to a significant increase in the output signal. Therefore, when such a problem is relatively unlikely to occur, for example, during the "low support mode", it may be configured to output the occurrence information of the "small win".

In addition, the output of the occurrence information of the "JUB jackpot" is, for example, after five "short openings" related to the "JUB jackpot" are completed, that is, after the situation in which it is impossible to distinguish from the case of the "small hit" is resolved. At the timing of outputting the opening command (jackpot notification effect), etc., it is preferable to output the "JUB jackpot" when the occurrence of the "JUB jackpot" is confirmed. In a situation where it is not yet possible to distinguish from the case of "small win", if only the occurrence information of "JUB big win" is output first, the information display device etc. installed on the island facility of the hall corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 , the player may grasp the occurrence of the "JUB jackpot" in advance, and the effect of the "JUB jackpot" may be diminished.

The back pack 351 is integrally formed of, for example, ABS resin, and has a protective cover portion 354 that protrudes rearward from the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 354 has a shape in which left and right side surfaces and an upper surface are closed and only a lower surface is opened, and has a size sufficient to cover at least the frame cover 213 . However, in this embodiment, the protective cover portion 354 is configured to cover the upper portion and the right portion (the left portion in FIG. 170) of the board box 263 as well. As a result, in the closed state of the back pack unit 203, the sealing member provided on the right side of the board box 263 and the terminal section (board side connector) provided along the upper edge of the main controller 261 are covered. It will happen.

The dispensing mechanism section 352 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover section 354 . Namely, above the protective cover portion 354, a tank 355 which opens upward is provided, and the tank 355 is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall. Below the tank 355, for example, a tank rail 356 having two rows of ball passages for causing game balls to flow sideways and gently sloping toward the downstream side is connected. A case rail 357 for vertically flowing down is connected. A payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 357, and payout of the required number of game balls is appropriately performed by a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor. The game balls paid out from the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper tray 19 and the like.

In the payout mechanism section 352, a payout relay board 381 for relaying a payout command signal from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358 is installed, and a power switch board 382 for taking in the main power supply from the outside is installed. there is The power switch board 382 is supplied with a main power supply of, for example, 24 V AC via a voltage converter, and is turned on or off by a switching operation of the power switch 382a.

Below the back pack unit 203 (board box 263), a lower frame set 251 that is pivotally supported by the left side (the right side in FIG. 170) of the inner frame 12 and that can be opened rearward is provided. As shown in FIG. 171, the lower frame set 251 is formed with a discharge passage portion 217 into which the game balls collected by the ball collection mechanism described above flow in. A discharge chute (not shown) is formed for discharging to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 . The game ball rotates and flows down while contacting and being affected by the nail 49, the pinwheel 57, etc. in the game area. The game balls that have won the prize-winning openings such as the general prize-winning opening 31 are gathered through the ball recovery mechanism of the back frame set 215 and discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217 . Incidentally, the out port 36 is similarly connected to the discharge passage portion 217, and the game balls that do not win in any of the prize winning ports are also discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute. In this embodiment, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are configured as separate bodies and can be opened and closed independently, but the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are integrally formed. It is also possible to

Further, as shown in FIG. 170, on the back side of the lower frame set 251, a payout control device 311, a firing control device 312, a power supply device 313, and a card unit connection board 314 as payout control means are stacked one on top of the other. is detachably attached.

The firing control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are housed in a board box 313 a and fixed to the back side of the lower frame set 251 . For the sake of convenience, the launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are described as independent control devices, but they are actually configured by one substrate (printed circuit board).

Also, the payout control device 311 is housed in the board box 311a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (the firing control device 312 and the power supply device 313). The board box 311a housing the payout control device 311 is provided with a sealing member in the same manner as the board box 263 housing the above-described main control device 261 so that a trace of the opening of the board box 311a remains. It's becoming

In addition, the card unit connection board 314 is housed in a board box 314a and fixed to the rear side of the board box 313a (the firing control device 312 and the power supply device 313).

The board boxes 311a, 313a, and 314a are made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the inside can be visually recognized.

Also, the payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 321 projecting outward from the substrate box 311a. For example, when the state recovery switch 321 is pressed when a payout error such as a ball clogging occurs in the payout motor, the payout motor is rotated forward or reverse to clear the ball jam (return to normal state).

Further, the power supply device 313 is provided with a RAM erase switch 323 projecting outward from the board box 313a. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, and even in the event of a power failure, it can retain the state at the time of the power failure, and can be restored to the state at the time of the power failure when recovering from the power failure (recovery of power). can. Therefore, when the power is turned off in a normal procedure (for example, when the game hall is closed), the state before the power is turned off is stored. to put in.

Further, as shown in FIG. 171, a locking device 600 is provided on the back side of the right side portion of the inner frame 12 . The locking device 600 is provided with a cylinder lock 600a (see FIG. 166, etc.) exposed on the front side of the front frame set 14. A key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 600a and turned to one side to open the lock. The frame 12 can be unlocked, and the front frame set 14 can be unlocked by rotating it in the other direction. In this embodiment, inner frame 12 is locked to outer frame 11 and front frame set 14 is locked to inner frame 12 .

As described above, the right-side frame-constituting portion 11d of the outer frame 11 is formed with the extending wall portion 83 that covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the rear side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 170). reference). As a result, it becomes difficult to insert a wire or the like from the back side of the outer frame 11 and operate the locking device 600 with the wire or the like. As a result, the defense performance can be improved. Furthermore, the extending wall portion 83 is configured to cover the right end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 170) of the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 from the rear side, and in the closed state of the inner frame 12, The rear pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 cannot be opened.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 169, a front frame open detection switch 91 for detecting the opening of the front frame set 14 is provided at the lower right portion of the front side of the inner frame 12 (the right side of the launcher 60). As shown in , an inner frame open detection switch 92 for detecting opening of the inner frame 12 is provided at the lower right portion of the back side of the inner frame 12 (lower left in FIG. 170). The front frame open detection switch 91 and the inner frame open detection switch 92 each have a detection part that can appear and disappear with respect to the switch body, and the front frame open detection switch 91 is provided so that the detection part faces forward, The inner frame open detection switch 92 is provided so that the detection portion faces rearward. When the detector is in a state of protruding from the switch body, an ON signal is output to the main controller 261, and when the detector is pushed toward the switch body and retracted into the switch body, an OFF signal is output. It is configured to output to the main controller 261 . That is, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the detection part of the front frame open detection switch 91 is pressed by the back surface of the front frame set 14 and is turned off. It turns on. Similarly, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the inner frame open detection switch 92 is turned off by pressing the pressing portion 86 integrally formed with the receiving portion 85 of the outer frame 11. When the inner frame 12 is opened, the switch 92 is turned off. The part returns to the protruding state and is turned on.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 175 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The main controller 261 (main substrate) is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device. The CPU 501 includes a ROM 502 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 501, and a RAM 503 that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 502. Also, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. However, the CPU, ROM, and RAM may not be integrated into one chip, but may be integrated into chips for each function.

The RAM 503 includes a stack area that stores the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 501 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 501, and a work area (work area) that stores various flags, counters, I/O values, and the like. ) and a backup area 503a.

The RAM 503 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. All data stored in the

The backup area 503a is designed to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power cut when the power is turned off when the power is turned off due to a power cut or the like. (similarly)) and the values of each register, I/O, etc. are stored. Writing to the backup area 503a is executed by the main processing when the power is turned off, and conversely, each value written to the backup area 503a is restored when the power is turned on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation; the same applies hereinafter). is executed in The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 is configured to receive a power failure signal SK1 output from a power failure monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, when the power supply is interrupted due to a power failure or the like. Upon occurrence, power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing) is immediately executed.

If at least the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a are backed up, it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

An input/output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 containing the ROM 502 and RAM 503 via a bus line 504 including an address bus, a data bus, and the like. Connected to the input/output port 505 are a RAM erasing switch circuit 543, payout control device 311, sub-control device 262, first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, normal symbol display device 41, etc., which will be described later. With this configuration, the special display devices 43L, 43R and the normal symbol display device 41 are directly controlled by the main control device 261. FIG. On the other hand, the effect display device 42 as display means is controlled via the sub-control device 262 . The sub control device 262 constitutes light emission control means in this embodiment.

In addition, although illustration of various relay boards and the like is omitted for convenience, the input/output port 505 includes various detection switches such as the general winning switch 221, the count switch 223, the start winning unit switches 224A and 224B, the through gate switch 225, Various electric parts such as various substrates are connected. In other words, the main controller 261 is provided with a plurality of terminal portions (board-side connectors) for connecting connectors of various cable connectors.

The sub-control device 262 (sub-control board) includes a CPU 551 that is an arithmetic device, a ROM 552 that stores various control programs and fixed value data that are executed by the CPU 551, and various control programs that are stored in the ROM 552. It has a RAM 553 which is a memory for temporarily storing data, etc., an input/output port 554, a bus line 555, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit (not shown). The RAM 553 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when various programs are executed by the CPU 551 .

The input/output port 554 is connected to the CPU 551 , the ROM 552 and the RAM 553 via a bus line 555 and also to the display control device 45 . Furthermore, the input/output port 554 is connected with the speaker SP, the effect button 125, the effect accessory unit 761, various illumination parts and the lamps 102, 104.

The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 causes the display control device 45 to execute display control based on commands (for example, variation pattern commands) transmitted from the main control device 261, for example, and causes the effect display device 42 to display. As described above, in this embodiment, the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R controlled by the main control device 261 are adapted to display whether or not there is a big hit. In the performance display device 42 controlled by , a display is performed in accordance with the display of the special display devices 43L and 43R. Also, the sub-control device 262 performs drive control of the upper production accessory unit 761 .

The payout control device 311 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 358 . A CPU 511, which is an arithmetic device, includes a ROM 512 storing control programs executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 513 used as a work memory and the like.

Similar to the RAM 503 of the main controller 261, the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 includes a stack area for storing the contents of the internal register of the CPU 511 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 511, various flags and counters, It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored, and a backup area 513a.

The RAM 513 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 313 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. data is backed up. If at least the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a are backed up, it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

Backup area 513a, when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power cut when the power is turned on again, the stack pointer at the time of power cut, each register, This is an area for storing values such as I/O. Writing to the backup area 513a is executed by the main process when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the backup area 513a is executed by the main process when the power is turned on. As with the CPU 501 of the main controller 261, the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SK1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 when the power supply is interrupted due to a power failure or the like. When input to the CPU 511, NMI interrupt processing is immediately executed as power failure processing.

In the work area, a payout permission flag set to allow the payout of prize balls by the payout control device 311, a command reception flag set when a command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received, and a main control device 261 A command buffer is provided in which commands sent from are stored.

The payout permission flag is a flag for setting the payout permission of prize balls, and is turned on when a specific command permitting the payout of prize balls is transmitted from the main controller 261 and the specific command is received. or when it returns to the state before power-off. In this embodiment, the specific commands are a payout initialization command that instructs the initialization process of the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, a prize ball command that instructs the payout of prize balls, and a There are three payout return commands sent in the case.

The command reception flag is a flag for confirming whether or not the payout control device 311 has received a command, and is turned on when any command is received. It is turned off when returning to the previous state, and is turned off when the received command is determined by the command determination process.

The command buffer consists of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main controller 261 .

An input/output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 containing the ROM 512 and RAM 513 via a bus line 514 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 515 is connected to the RAM erasing switch circuit 543, the main controller 261, the firing controller 312, the dispensing device 358, and the like.

The card unit connection board 314 includes a ball rental operation unit (ball rental button 121 and return button 122) on the front of the pachinko machine 10, and a card unit (ball rental unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like. and are electrically connected to each other, take in the command of the player's ball lending operation, and output it to the card unit. Note that the card unit connection board 314 may be omitted in a cash machine in which game balls are directly lent to the upper tray 19 from a ball lending device or the like without going through the card unit.

The shooting control device 312 permits or prohibits shooting of game balls by the shooting device 60, and the shooting device 60 is allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, a firing permission signal is output from the payout control device 311, a sensor signal detects that the player is touching the handle 18, and a firing stop switch for stopping firing is operated. On the condition that the shooting device 60 is not set, the shooting device 60 is driven, and the game ball is shot with an intensity corresponding to the amount of operation of the handle 18.例文帳に追加As a result, the player can change the amount of movement and motion mode of the game ball guided to the game area.

The display control device 45 follows the instruction from the sub-control device 262 and executes the variable display of the decorative symbols on the effect display device 42 . The display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, a video display processor (VDP) 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, and bus lines 530, 531. and An input/output port 554 of the sub-controller 262 is connected to the input port 527 . Also, the CPU 521 , program ROM 522 , work RAM 523 and VDP 526 are connected to the input port 527 via the bus line 530 . An output port 529 is connected to the VDP 526 via a bus line 531, and the effect display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device, is connected to the output port 529. FIG.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the display command transmitted from the sub-control device 262 via the input port 527, analyzes the received command or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received command, and controls the VDP 526. (specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 526). Thereby, display control in the effect display device 42 is performed.

A program ROM 522 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 521, and a work RAM 523 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various programs are executed by the CPU 521. is.

The video RAM 524 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the effect display device 42. By rewriting the contents of the video RAM 524, the display contents of the effect display device 42 are changed. The character ROM 525 is a memory for storing character data such as patterns displayed on the effect display device 42 .

The VDP 526 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an LCD driver (liquid crystal driving circuit) incorporated in the effect display device 42 . Since the VDP 526 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 526 adjusts the timing of each of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524, etc., and intervenes in the reading and writing of data.

In addition, the power supply device 313 includes a power supply unit 541 that supplies power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM deletion switch circuit 543 that is connected to the RAM deletion switch 323. and

The power supply unit 541 supplies necessary operating power to each of the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 541 takes in an AC 24V power supply supplied from the outside, and generates +12V power supply for driving various switches and motors, +5V power supply for logic, backup power supply for RAM backup, etc. These +12V power supply, +5V power supply and backup power supply are supplied to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like. An operating power source (+12V power source, +5V power source, etc.) is supplied to the launch control device 312 via the payout control device 311 . Similarly, various switches, motors, and the like are supplied with operating power through the control device to which they are connected.

The power failure monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power failure signal SK1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 and the CPU 511 of the payout controller 311 when the power is shut off due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 542 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and determines that a power failure (power failure) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. A power failure signal SK1 is output to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. By the output of this power failure signal SK1, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 recognize the occurrence of power failure and execute power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing).

Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 541 normally outputs 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the power failure processing. configured to maintain value. Therefore, the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311 can normally execute and complete the power failure process.

The RAM erase switch circuit 543 is a circuit that takes in the switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323 and clears the backup data of the RAM 503 of the main controller 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout controller 311 according to the state of the switch 323 . When the RAM erasing switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erasing switch circuit 543 outputs a RAM erasing signal SK2 to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the RAM erasing switch 323 is pressed (including power-on due to power failure cancellation), the data in the RAMs 503 and 513 of the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311 are cleared. be.

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

In this embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 performs lottery using various counter information during the game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176, a jackpot random number counter CD1 used for a jackpot lottery (win/fail lottery) to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot state, and a jackpot type determination counter used to determine the jackpot type (lottery) CD2, a reach selection counter CD3 used for determining (lottery) whether or not to generate a reach state when the effect display device 42 is deviated and fluctuated, determining the type of reach to be generated (lottery), etc., and a jackpot random number. The initial value random number counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the counter CD1, the fluctuation of the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R (the production display device 42), the determination of the display time (lottery), and the fluctuation in the production display device 42 Variation type counters CS1 and CS2 used for determining (lottery) etc. of pattern (production pattern) and lottery of normal design display device 41 (opening and closing accessory 37Y of lower start winning opening 33YB opening whether to open or not A lottery) is used with a normal symbol random number counter CD4.

Each of the counters CD1, CD2, CD3, CINI, CS1, CS2, and CD4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 as the lower limit after reaching the upper limit. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 (except for the random number initial value counter CINI).

The RAM 503 has a special variation holding area in which the values of the jackpot random number counter CD1, the jackpot type determination counter CD2, and the reach selection counter CD3 are stored, and a normal fluctuation holding area in which the value of the normal symbol random number counter CD4 is stored. is provided. The normal variable holding area comprises one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area).

In addition, the special variable reservation area comprises a first special variable reservation area and a second special variable reservation area each having four reservation areas (first reservation to fourth reservation area), and one execution area.

In each reservation area of the first special variable reservation area, each value of the jackpot random number counter CD1, the jackpot type determination counter CD2, and the reach selection counter CD3 is set according to the winning history of the game ball to the upper start winning opening 33YA. Stored sequentially.

In each reservation area of the second special variable reservation area, each value of the jackpot random number counter CD1, the jackpot type determination counter CD2, and the reach selection counter CD3 is set according to the winning history of the game ball to the lower start winning port 33YB. Stored sequentially.

In each holding area of the normal fluctuation holding area, the values of the normal symbol random number counter CD4 are stored chronologically according to the passage history of the game ball to the through gate 34.例文帳に追加

By adopting such a configuration, as described above, the variable display on the special display devices 43L, 43R and the normal symbol display device 41 can be suspended up to four times.

To explain each counter in detail, the jackpot random number counter CD1 is, for example, incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 599, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 599) as the closing value, 0, which is the lower limit value as the opening value. It is configured to return to Normally, when the jackpot random number counter CD1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the jackpot random number counter CD1. The initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter CD1 (value = 0 to 599), and is updated once for each timer interrupt and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of normal processing. On the other hand, the jackpot random number counter CD1 is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the jackpot random number counter CD1 is stored in the jackpot random number counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball enters the upper starting winning opening 33YA or the lower starting winning opening 33YB, the value of the jackpot random number counter CD1 stored in the jackpot random number counter buffer is changed to the first special fluctuation holding area or the second special fluctuation. Stored in the holding area. Therefore, such processing constitutes a part of various lotteries.

The value of the random number that becomes a jackpot is set to two types, a "low probability mode" and a "high probability mode". There are two, and the value is "7, 307", and the number of random number values that will be a big win in the "high probability mode" is 20, and the value is "7 to 16, 307 to 316". That is, in the "low-probability mode", the lottery is won with a probability of 1/300 (a big win state occurs), and in the "high-probability mode", the lottery is won with a probability of 1/30.

In this embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with a success/fail determination table that is referred to when determining whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter CD1 corresponds to a jackpot. In this embodiment, there are two right/wrong determination tables. be.

In addition, in this embodiment, the value of the big hit random number counter CD1 is also used when determining the "small hit". There are 50 random number values that are "small hits", and the values are "101 to 125, 401 to 425". That is, the winning lottery is won (a small winning state occurs) with a probability of 1/12.

The jackpot type determination counter CD2 is, for example, incremented by one within the range of 0 to 19, and after reaching the upper limit (that is, 19), it returns to 0, which is the lower limit. In this embodiment, the jackpot types, that is, "16R probability variable jackpot A", "16R probability variable jackpot B", "4R probability variable jackpot A", "4R probability variable jackpot B", "16R normal jackpot A" are determined by the jackpot type determination counter CD2. , "16R normal jackpot B", "4R normal jackpot A", "4R normal jackpot B" or "JUB jackpot" is determined.

The ROM 502 is provided with a jackpot type determination table that is referred to when determining which jackpot the value of the jackpot type determination counter CD2 corresponds to. Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the upper starting winning opening 33YA and when entering the lower starting winning opening 33YB, the sorting of the jackpot types is different. That is, in this embodiment, there are two jackpot type determination tables, the first jackpot type determination table that is considered when the game ball enters the upper start winning opening 33YA, and the game ball enters the lower starting winning opening 33YB. There is a second jackpot type determination table that is taken into consideration when winning a prize.

Specifically, when the game ball wins to the upper start winning opening 33YA, the value of the jackpot type determination counter CD2 is "0, 1" by referring to the first jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 204) Granting of "16R probability variable jackpot A" is determined.

Also, if the value of the jackpot type determination counter CD2 is "2", the grant of "16R probability variable jackpot B" with "20 times/high support mode" is determined, and if it is "3", "30 times/high support The grant of "16R probability variable jackpot B" with mode" is decided, and if it is "4", the grant of "16R probability variable jackpot B" with "40 times / high support mode" is decided, and if it is "5", "50 The grant of “16R probability variable jackpot B” with “times / high support mode” is decided.

If the value of the jackpot type determination counter CD2 is "6", the grant of "4R probability variable jackpot A" is determined.

If the value of the jackpot type determination counter CD2 is "7", it is decided to give "4R probability variable jackpot B" with "20 times/high support mode", and if it is "8", "30 times/high support mode". Granting of "4R probability variable jackpot B" with is determined, and if "9", granting of "4R probability variable jackpot B" with "40 times/high support mode" is determined, and if "10", "50 times/ Giving of “4R probability variable jackpot B” with “high support mode” is determined.

If the value of the jackpot type determination counter CD2 is "11", the grant of "16R normal jackpot A" is determined.

If the value of the jackpot type determination counter CD2 is "12", it is decided to give "16R normal jackpot B" with "20 times/high support mode", and if it is "13", "30 times/high support mode" is given. The grant of "16R normal jackpot B" is decided, and if "14", the grant of "16R normal jackpot B" with "40 times/high support mode" is decided, and if "15", "50 times/ Giving of “16R normal jackpot B” with “high support mode” is determined.

If the value of the jackpot type determination counter CD2 is "16", it is decided to give "4R normal jackpot B" with "20 times/high support mode", and if it is "17", "30 times/high support mode" is given. The grant of "4R normal jackpot B" is decided, and if it is "18", the grant of "4R normal jackpot B" with "40 times/high support mode" is decided, and if it is "19", "50 times/ Giving of “4R normal jackpot B” with “high support mode” is determined.

That is, when winning the winning lottery triggered by winning the upper starting prize opening 33YA, it becomes "16R probability variable jackpot A" with a probability of 10%, "16R probability variable jackpot B" with a probability of 20%, and 5 ``4R probability variable jackpot A'' with a probability of 20%, ``4R probability variable jackpot B'' with a probability of 20%, ``16R normal jackpot A'' with a probability of 5%, and ``16R normal jackpot B'' with a probability of 20%. , "4R normal jackpot B" with a probability of 20%.

On the other hand, when the game ball enters the lower start winning opening 33YB, the second jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 205) is taken into consideration, and if the value of the jackpot type determination counter CD2 is "0 to 9", " Giving of 16R probability variable jackpot A" is determined, if it is "10, 11", grant of "4R probability variable jackpot A" is determined, and if it is "12, 13", grant of "4R normal jackpot A" is determined. , If it is "14", it is decided to give "4R normal jackpot B" with "20 times/high support mode", and if it is "15", "4R normal jackpot B" with "30 times/high support mode" is decided. is determined, and if it is "16", the grant of "4R normal jackpot B" with "40 times / high support mode" is determined, and if it is "17", "4R with "50 times / high support mode" If the number is "18, 19", the award of the "JUB jackpot" is determined.

That is, if you win the winning lottery triggered by winning the lower start winning opening 33YB, there is a 50% probability that it will be "16R probability variable jackpot A", and a 10% probability will be "4R probability variable jackpot A". 10% probability of "4R normal jackpot A", 20% probability of "4R normal jackpot B", and 10% probability of "JUB jackpot".

Incidentally, the jackpot type determination counter CD2 is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the jackpot type determination counter CD2 is stored in the jackpot type determination counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball enters the upper start winning opening 33YA or the lower starting winning opening 33YB, the value of the jackpot type determination counter CD2 stored in the jackpot type determination counter buffer is changed to the special variation holding area (first special stored in the variable reservation area or the second special variable reservation area). Therefore, such processing constitutes a part of various lotteries.

Also, the reach selection counter CD3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 as the lower limit after reaching the upper limit (that is, 238). In the present embodiment, the ready-to-win selection counter CD3 determines that after the ready-to-win has occurred with respect to the decorative pattern, the final stop symbol is shifted forward or backward by one before and after the ready-to-win symbol and stops. A lottery is drawn for "reach other than front and back out" in which the symbol stops outside the reach symbol and "complete out" in which the reach does not occur. In this embodiment, a reach determination table is stored in the ROM 502 and is referred to when determining whether or not the value of the reach selection counter CD3 corresponds to the occurrence of a reach state and to which reach. is provided. The value of "0 to 238" is stored in the reach determination table. It has a configuration that corresponds to the outside.

The reach selection counter CD3 is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the reach selection counter CD3 is stored in the reach selection counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball enters the upper start winning opening 33YA or the lower starting winning opening 33YB, the value of the reach selection counter CD3 stored in the reach selection counter buffer is changed to the special fluctuation holding area of the RAM 503 (first special fluctuation holding area or second special variable reservation area). Therefore, such processing constitutes a part of various lotteries.

Also, one of the two fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and after reaching the upper limit (that is, 198), it is the lower limit. It is configured to return to 0, and the other fluctuation type counter CS2 is, for example, incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 240, and after reaching the upper limit (that is, 240), it returns to 0, which is the lower limit. It has become. In the following description, CS1 is also referred to as "first variation type counter" and CS2 as "second variation type counter". This notation is also shown in FIG. 176 .

For example, in the probability variable jackpot time/variation pattern table (see FIG. 207) related to the normal state, the first variation type counter CS1 determines the reach type of decorative symbols such as so-called normal reach, super reach, and premium reach, and other rough fluctuation modes. A second variation type counter CS2 determines a more detailed variation mode such as a variation time. Therefore, by combining these fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2, it is possible to easily realize diversification of fluctuation patterns. Of course, it is also possible to determine the variation mode only by the first variation type counter CS1.

Incidentally, the normal reach pattern is a reach pattern in which no special effect display is performed other than the variation of the decorative pattern. Super ready-to-win is a ready-to-win pattern in which a character or the like is displayed on the effect display device 42 in addition to the decorative symbols during the variable display of the decorative symbols (after establishment of the ready-to-win state), thereby giving the player a sense of anticipation. . Premium reach is a production mode that can be derived only when the jackpot state occurs, and during the variable display of decorative patterns (after the reach state is established), characters with patterns different from super reach are displayed in addition to decorative patterns. It is a reach pattern that is performed in a manner that is expected to give the player a sense of expectation.

Further, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once each time the normal processing described later is executed, and are repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal processing. Then, the buffer values of CS1 and CS2 are acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation of the decorative symbols by the effect display device 42.例文帳に追加

Note that the size and range of each counter is merely an example and can be changed arbitrarily. However, it is desirable that the magnitudes of the jackpot random number counter CD1, the reach selection counter CD3, and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are all different prime numbers and are not synchronized in any case.

In addition, the normal symbol random number counter CD4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 9, for example, and returns to the lower limit value of 0 after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 9). The random number counter CD4 is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and when the game ball passes through the through gate 34, the value of the normal symbol random number counter CD4 is obtained.

Then, when the value of the winning normal symbol random number counter CD4 is acquired, the normal symbol display device 41 performs variable display for a predetermined time, and then the symbol corresponding to winning (“○” in this example) is stopped and displayed. Then, the opening/closing accessory 37Y of the lower start winning opening 33YB is in an open state for a predetermined time.

In this embodiment, in the "low support mode", the two random numbers "0 and 1" are selected. On the other hand, in the "high support mode", the winning random number values are eight "0 to 7". That is, in the "low support mode", the opening and closing accessory 37Y is in the open state with a probability of 1/5, and in the "high support mode", the opening and closing accessory 37Y is in the open state with a probability of 4/5.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 will be described with reference to flowcharts. The processing of the CPU 501 can be broadly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 2 msec in this embodiment), and a stop signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt processing and the NMI interrupt processing will be explained first, and then the main processing will be explained.

The NMI interrupt process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt, the state of the main controller 261 at the time of power failure is stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. FIG.

That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like, a power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main controller 261. FIG. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control being executed, starts NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information as power-off occurrence information setting in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503, and ends the NMI interrupt processing.

Incidentally, the above NMI interrupt processing is similarly executed in the payout control device 311, and information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 by such NMI interrupt. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 interrupts the control being executed. to start NMI interrupt processing. The contents are as described above.

FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing, which is executed by the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 every 2 msec, for example.

In FIG. 179, first, in step SD301, reading processing of various prize detection switches is executed. Here, the states of various winning detection switches (general winning switch 221, count switch 223, starting winning switches 224A and 224B, through gate switch 225) connected to the main controller 261 are read, and the state of the switches is determined. to save the detection information.

In step SD302, random number initial value update processing is executed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the upper limit (599 in this example).

Also, in step SD303, random number update processing is executed. Specifically, a jackpot random number counter CD1, a jackpot type determination counter CD2, a reach selection counter CD3 and a normal symbol random number counter CD4 are each incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the upper limit. Then, the updated values of the respective counters CD1, CD2, CD3 and CD4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM503.

After that, in step SD304, a starting prize winning process accompanying a prize winning to the starting prize winning openings 33YA, 33YB is executed, and in step SD305, a through gate passing process accompanying the passage of the game ball to the through gate 34 is executed. After that, the timer interrupt processing is once terminated.

Here, the starting winning process of step SD304 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In addition, the execution area and each reservation area of the special change reservation area include a jackpot random number storage area that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter CD1, a jackpot type random number storage area that stores the value of the jackpot type determination counter CD2, and a reach selection counter CD3. A reach random number storage area for storing the value of is provided.

First, in step SD501, it is determined based on the detection information of the second start winning switch 224B whether or not the game ball has won the lower start winning opening 33YB. When an affirmative determination is made in step SD501, in step SD502, the value of the lower hold counter Nb that counts the number of holdings of the variable display triggered by the winning of the lower start winning opening 33YB is the upper limit value (in this embodiment, "4 ”). If a negative determination is made in step SD502, the process proceeds to step SD509. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step SD502, the process proceeds to step SD503, and the lower reservation counter Nb is incremented by one.

In the following step SD504, the values of the jackpot random number counter CD1, the jackpot type determination counter CD2, and the reach selection counter CD3 updated in the random number update process of step SD303 are stored in the vacant reservation area of the second special change reservation area. Store in the first area. After step SD504, the process proceeds to step SD505.

In step SD505, a jackpot determination process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter CD1 newly stored in the second special change reservation area is a value corresponding to a jackpot. Details of the big hit determination process will be described later.

In the following step SD506, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter CD1 corresponds to the jackpot in step SD505, based on the value of the jackpot type determination counter CD2 newly stored in the second special change reservation area Then, a second jackpot type determination process for determining the jackpot type is performed.

Here, first, it is determined whether or not the big-hit schedule flag is set in the previous big-hit determination process, and if a negative determination is made, this process ends. On the other hand, when the affirmative determination is made, the value of the jackpot type determination counter CD2 newly stored in the second special variable reservation area corresponds to "16R probability variable jackpot A" by referring to the second jackpot type determination table. If it was any of the values ``0 to 9'', turn on the ``16R probability variable jackpot A flag'' and the value ``10, 11'' corresponding to the ``4R probability variable jackpot A'' If it was either , turn on the "4R probability variable jackpot A flag", and if the value is either "12, 13" corresponding to the "4R normal jackpot A", turn on the "4R normal jackpot A flag", If it is one of the values ``14 to 17'' corresponding to the ``4R normal jackpot B'', turn on the ``4R normal jackpot B flag'' and either of the values ``18, 19'' corresponding to the ``JUB jackpot'' If so, the "JUB jackpot flag" is turned on.

In addition, if you win "16R probability variable jackpot A", "4R probability variable jackpot A" or "JUB jackpot" here, that is, if "until the next time / high support mode" is given after the jackpot ends, after the jackpot For a predetermined period of time (20 times of variable display in this embodiment), an effect lottery for whether or not to perform a non-notification effect that does not notify that the given "high support mode" is "until the next time / high support mode" is performed. It is performed with a lottery probability of about 1/100. Then, when it is determined as a result of the lottery that the non-informative effect is performed, the non-informative effect execution flag is turned on.

In the following step SD507, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter CD1 is not a value corresponding to the jackpot in step SD505, based on the value of the reach selection counter CD3 newly stored in the second special change reservation area , perform reach determination processing for determining the type of reach. Details of the reach determination process will be described later.

In step SD508 that follows, processing for setting a hold control command is performed. The hold control command is a command for notifying the sub-controller 262 in advance of various hold information (information used to determine the content of the variable display) held and stored in the second special variable hold area. be. The hold control command set in this process is output to the sub-controller 262 in the next external output process (see step SD201). The hold control command includes, for example, as hold information, information indicating the results of the jackpot determination process and the jackpot type determination process, and information indicating whether the variable display is triggered by the winning of the start winning port 33YA or 33YB. be

Here, the details of the jackpot determination process in step SD505 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step SD5101, the value of the jackpot random number counter CD1 newly stored in the second special change reservation area is either the value "7" or "307" corresponding to the jackpot stored in the first success/failure determination table. Determine whether or not they match. In addition, in FIG. 181, the processing of the step SD5101 is described in a simplified manner for convenience, but in reality, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter CD1 is "7", and the determination is negative. If it is determined, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter CD1 is "307". If a negative determination is also made in step SD5101, a negative determination is made in step SD5101.

When an affirmative determination is made in step SD5101, that is, when it is determined that a jackpot state occurs, the process ends after turning on the jackpot schedule flag in step SD5102.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SD5101, it is determined in step SD5103 whether or not it is in the "high probability mode" based on the value of the lottery mode flag, which will be described later.

If the affirmative determination is made in step SD5103, that is, if it is in the "high probability mode", in step SD5104, the value of the jackpot random number counter CD1 newly stored in the second special change reservation area is the second propriety determination. It is determined whether the values corresponding to the jackpots stored in the table are any of "8 to 16, 308 to 316" excluding "7" and "307". Incidentally, in the determination process, it is actually determined one by one whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter CD1 and each value corresponding to the jackpot match as described above.

If the determination at step SD5104 is affirmative, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot state will occur in the "high probability mode", after turning on the jackpot schedule flag at step SD5102, this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step SD5103 or step SD5104, that is, if it is not a "jackpot", the process proceeds to step SD5105.

Also, in step SD5105, the value of the big hit random number counter CD1 newly stored in the second special change reservation area determines whether or not it matches the value "101 to 125, 401 to 425" corresponding to the small hit. .

When the affirmative determination is made in step SD5105, that is, when it is determined that a small hit state occurs, after turning on the small hit schedule flag in step SD5106, this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SD5105, this processing ends.

Next, the reach determination processing in step SD507 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step SD5301, it is determined whether or not the hit schedule flag (big hit schedule flag or small hit schedule flag) is set in the big hit determination process performed immediately before. When an affirmative determination is made in step SD5301, that is, when a big hit state or a small hit state occurs, this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SD5301, that is, if the hit state does not occur, in step SD5302, the reach determination table is taken into consideration, and the value of the reach selection counter CD3 newly stored in the second special change reservation area matches one of the values "0, 1" corresponding to the "outside reach". If the determination in step SD5302 is affirmative, in step SD5303, the front-rear out flag indicating the occurrence of the front-rear out-of-reach reach is turned on, and then this process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SD5302, the reach determination table is considered in step SD5304, and the value of the reach selection counter CD3 newly stored in the second special change reservation area is "reach other than front and back out" It is determined whether it matches any of the values "2 to 21" corresponding to . If the determination in step SD5304 is affirmative, the flag other than front-rear deviation is turned on in step SD5305, and then this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step SD5304, that is, if the result is "completely out of line", this process ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 180, after the processing of step SD508, or when a negative determination is made in step SD501, in step SD509, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the upper start winning opening 33YA. The determination is made based on the detection information of the switch 224A. If a negative determination is made in step SD509, this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the affirmative determination is made, in step SD510, the value of the upper suspension counter Na that counts the number of suspensions of the variable display triggered by the winning of the upper start winning opening 33YA is the upper limit value (in this embodiment, "4 ”). If a negative determination is made at step SD510, this process is terminated. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step SD510, the process proceeds to step SD511, and the upper reservation counter Na is incremented by one.

In the following step SD512, the values of the jackpot random number counter CD1, the jackpot type determination counter CD2, and the reach selection counter CD3 are stored in the first area among the vacant reservation areas of the first special change reservation area. After step SD512, the process proceeds to step SD513.

In step SD513, a jackpot determination process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter CD1 newly stored in the first special change reservation area is a value corresponding to a jackpot. The big win determination process in step SD513 is the same as the big win determination process in step SD505 except for the small win determination, and the information regarding the variable display to be processed is based on the winning to the upper start winning opening 33YA. , and detailed description thereof is omitted for the sake of convenience.

In the following step SD514, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter CD1 corresponds to the jackpot in step SD513, based on the value of the jackpot type determination counter CD2 newly stored in the first special change reservation area Then, a first jackpot type determination process for determining the jackpot type is performed.

Here, first, it is determined whether or not the big-hit schedule flag is set in the previous big-hit determination process, and if a negative determination is made, this process ends. On the other hand, if the determination is affirmative, the value of the jackpot type determination counter CD2 newly stored in the first special variable reservation area corresponds to "16R probability variable jackpot A" by referring to the first jackpot type determination table. If it was either of the values “0, 1”, turn on the “16R probability variable jackpot A flag”, and the value corresponding to “16R probability variable jackpot B” “2 to 5” If it was either turns on the "16R probability variable jackpot B flag", and if the value corresponding to "4R probability variable jackpot A" is "6", turns on the "4R probability variable jackpot A flag" and corresponds to "4R probability variable jackpot B" If it is one of the values ``7 to 10'', turn on the ``4R probability variable jackpot B flag'', and if the value ``11'' corresponding to the ``16R normal jackpot A'' is ``16R normal jackpot A flag" is turned on, and if it is one of the values "12 to 15" corresponding to "16R normal jackpot B", turn on "16R normal jackpot B flag" and correspond to "4R normal jackpot B" If it is one of the values ``16 to 19'', turn on the ``4R normal jackpot B flag''.

It should be noted that here, if "16R probability variable jackpot A" or "4R probability variable jackpot A" is won, that is, if "until the next time, high support mode" is given after the jackpot ends, the above-mentioned non-notification as in step SD506 A performance lottery is performed to decide whether or not to perform a performance. Then, when it is determined as a result of the lottery that the non-informative effect is performed, the non-informative effect execution flag is turned on.

In the following step SD515, when it is determined in step SD513 that the value of the jackpot random number counter CD1 is not a value corresponding to the jackpot, based on the value of the reach selection counter CD3 newly stored in the first special change reservation area , perform reach determination processing for determining the type of reach. It should be noted that the reach determination process of step SD515 is the same as the reach determination process of step SD507, and differs in that the information regarding the variable display to be processed is based on the ball to the upper start winning opening 33YA. For the sake of convenience, detailed description is omitted.

In step SD516, which follows, processing for setting a hold control command is performed. After that, this process is terminated. It should be noted that the process of setting the pending control command in step SD516 is the same as the process of setting the pending control command in step SD508, and the information regarding the variable display to be processed is based on the ball to the upper start winning opening 33YA. , and detailed description thereof is omitted for the sake of convenience.

Next, the through gate passage processing of step SD305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step SD601, whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 is determined based on the detection information of the through gate switch 225. FIG.

If a negative determination is made in step SD601, this process ends. On the other hand, when the affirmative determination is made in step SD601, that is, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, in step SD602, the number of suspensions of variable display performed by the normal symbol display device 41 is counted. It is determined whether or not the value of the normal reservation counter Nc is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made here, the processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the determination in step SD602 is affirmative, that is, if the passage of the game ball to the through gate 34 is confirmed, and the value of the normal reservation counter Nc is <4, the process proceeds to step SD603, and the normal reservation counter Increment Nc by one.

In addition, in the subsequent step SD604, a random number relating to the success or failure is acquired. Specifically, the value of the normal symbol random number counter CD4 updated in the random number update process of step SD303 is stored in the first area of the free storage areas of the normal fluctuation reservation area of the RAM503. After that, the through gate passage processing ends.

Next, the flow of main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. This main process is activated upon resetting when the power is turned on.

First, in step SD101, initial setting processing is executed upon power-on. Specifically, in order to set a predetermined value in the stack pointer and wait for the sub-side control devices (sub-control device 262, payout control device 311, etc.) to become operable, for example, 1 Executes wait processing for about a second. In the following step SD102, RAM access is permitted.

After that, data backup processing is executed for the RAM 503 in the CPU 501 . That is, in step SD103, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply device 313 is pressed (ON). do. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 has not been pressed, it is determined in the next step SD104 whether or not power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 or not. Here, if it is not set, backup data is not stored, so in this case also, the process proceeds to step SD112. If power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a, the RAM determination value is calculated in step SD105, and in subsequent step SD106, it is determined whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value saved at the time of power failure. , that is, determine the validity of the backup. If the RAM determination value calculated here does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power failure, the backed-up data is destroyed, and in this case also, the process proceeds to step SD112.

In the processing of step SD112, an initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the sub-control device 262 and the payout control device 311, etc., which are sub-side control devices. In addition, the sub-control device 262 that has received the initialization command executes its own initialization processing as described later, and sets the game state determination value Xj corresponding to the initial setting “normal state” to “0”. Store in the state storage area.

Thereafter, the process proceeds to RAM initialization processing (step SD113, etc.). Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 503 . Instead of using this RAM determination value, it is also possible to determine the validity of the backup based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 503 is correctly saved.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is powered on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323 when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 323 is ON, the process proceeds to RAM initialization processing (step SD113, etc.). Also, when power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process of the RAM 503 (step SD113, etc.) is similarly performed. That is, in step SD113, the used area of RAM 503 is cleared to 0, and in subsequent step SD114, the initial value of RAM 503 is set. After that, in step SD115, the interrupt permission is set, and the process shifts to normal processing, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed (step SD103: NO), the condition is that power failure occurrence information is set and that the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. Then, the power recovery process (power recovery process) is executed. That is, at step SD107, the stack pointer before the power failure is restored, and at step SD108, the power failure occurrence information is cleared.

At step SD109, a game state check process for grasping the game state stored in the RAM 503 at the time of power failure is executed.

In the subsequent step SD110, a return command is transmitted to return the sub-control device 262, payout control device 311, etc., to the gaming state at the time of power interruption. The return command transmitted to the sub-controller 262 includes information (game state determination value Xj, which will be described later) relating to the game state at the time of power failure specified in the game state check process.

At step SD111, the used register is restored from the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. FIG. After that, in step SD115, the interrupt permission is set, and the process shifts to normal processing, which will be described later.

Here, the game state check processing of step SD109 will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 and 185. FIG. FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing the game state check process, and FIG. 185 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence relationship between a lottery mode flag, a support mode flag, a game state identification counter Kj and a game state determination value Xj, which will be described later. The game state check process is also executed in the variable display setting process (step SD807) and ending end setting process (step SD1214), which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 184, in step SD1901, a process of reading various information related to the gaming state at the time of power failure, which is backed up in the RAM 503, is executed. Specifically, the value of the lottery mode flag, the value of the support mode flag, and the value of the game state identification counter Kj are read from the RAM 503, respectively.

The lottery mode flag is state discrimination information for determining whether the lottery mode is "low probability mode" or "high probability mode". "50 (H)" is set in the case of "high probability mode", and "53 (H)" is set in the case of "high probability mode". The upper 4-bit value "5" in the lottery mode flag is uniformly added for noise countermeasures, and is not used for determining the game state.

The support mode flag is state determination information for determining what kind of state the winning support mode is in. The flag value is "A0 ( H)” is set. The upper 4-bit value "A" in the support mode flag is uniformly added for noise countermeasures, and is not used for determining the game state.

In addition, when the winning support mode is "20 times/high support mode", "30 times/high support mode", "40 times/high support mode" or "50 times/high support mode", the flag value is "A1(H)" is set.

Further, when the winning support mode is "30 times/high support mode S", "A2(H)" is set as the flag value, and when it is "until the next time/high support mode", the flag value is "A3(H)" is set.

The game state identification counter Kj counts the number of times the variable display is executed after the end of the big win, and is state discrimination information for specifying the switching timing of the game state. is subtracted by 1 each time is performed. For example, as will be described later, "50" is set as the initial value of the game state specifying counter Kj, and if the value of the counter Kj is "31" after that, the variation display at that time is, after the big win, It can be identified as the 20th variable display.

In this embodiment, when "16R probability variable jackpot B", "4R probability variable jackpot B", "16R normal jackpot B" or "4R normal jackpot B" is won, that is, after the jackpot ends "20 times/high support mode", When "30 times/high support mode", "40 times/high support mode" or "50 times/high support mode" is given, "50" is set as an initial value.

In addition, when "16R normal jackpot A" or "4R normal jackpot A" is won, that is, when "30 times/high support mode S" is given after the jackpot ends, "30" is set as the initial value. be.

Also, if you win the "16R probability variable jackpot A", "4R probability variable jackpot A" or "JUB jackpot", that is, if "until the next time / high support mode" is given after the jackpot ends, the initial value is "0 ” is set. However, when the non-informative effect execution flag is turned on and the non-informative effect is executed, "30" is set as the initial value. The non-notification effect execution flag is turned off after setting the initial value.

Returning to the description of FIG. 184, at step SD1902, the value of the lottery mode flag read at step SD1901 and the value of the support mode flag are added.

In the subsequent step SD1903, the addition value calculated in step SD1902 and a predetermined mask value ("07(H)" in this embodiment) are ANDed, and the lower 3-bit data is extracted, and a predetermined operation is performed. It is set in the area as the gaming state determination value Xj.

At step SD1904, it is determined whether or not the gaming state determination value Xj is "1". That is, the lottery mode is "low probability mode" and the winning support mode is "20 times/high support mode", "30 times/high support mode", "40 times/high support mode" or "50 times/high support mode". mode” is determined.

If a negative determination is made here, the process moves to step SD1905 to determine whether or not the gaming state determination value Xj is "4". That is, the lottery mode is "high probability mode" and the winning support mode is "20 times/high support mode", "30 times/high support mode", "40 times/high support mode" or "50 times/high support mode". mode” is determined.

If the determination in step SD1904 or SD1905 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step SD1909. On the other hand, if the determination in step SD1905 is negative, the process proceeds to step SD1906.

At step SD1906, it is determined whether or not the gaming state determination value Xj is "2". That is, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the "low probability mode" and the winning support mode is the "30 times/high support mode S".

If a negative determination is made here, the process moves to step SD1907 to determine whether or not the gaming state determination value Xj is "5". That is, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the "high probability mode" and the winning support mode is the "30 times/high support mode S".

If an affirmative determination is made in step SD1906 or SD1907, the process proceeds to step SD1912. On the other hand, if the determination in step SD1907 is negative, the process proceeds to step SD1908.

At step SD1908, it is determined whether or not the gaming state determination value Xj is "6". That is, it is determined whether or not the lottery mode is the "high probability mode" and the winning support mode is the "until next time/high support mode".

If an affirmative determination is made here, the process proceeds to step SD1914. On the other hand, if the determination is negative, the process proceeds to step SD1916, stores the value "6" of the gaming state determination value Xj in a predetermined area of the RAM 503, and terminates this processing.

Now, in step SD1909 to which an affirmative determination is made in step SD1904 or step SD1905, it is determined whether or not the value of the game state identification counter Kj is "31". That is, it is determined whether or not the variation display after the end of the jackpot is the 20th time. If the determination here is affirmative, the process proceeds to step SD1913, and if the determination is negative, the process proceeds to step SD1910.

At step SD1910, it is determined whether or not the value of the game state identification counter Kj is "21". That is, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation display after the end of the jackpot is the 30th time. If the determination here is affirmative, the process proceeds to step SD1913, and if the determination is negative, the process proceeds to step SD1911.

At step SD1911, it is determined whether or not the value of the game state identification counter Kj is "11". That is, it is determined whether or not the variation display after the end of the jackpot is the 40th time. If the determination is affirmative, the process proceeds to step SD1913, and if the determination is negative, the process proceeds to step SD1912.

At step SD1912, it is determined whether or not the value of the game state identification counter Kj is "1". That is, it is determined whether it is the “50th time (in the case of the initial value “50”)” or the “30th time (in the case of the initial value “30”)”.

If a negative determination is made here, the process proceeds to step SD1916, and the game state determination value Xj (“1”, “4”, “2” or “5”) is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 503, and this End the process.

On the other hand, if the determination in step SD1912 is affirmative, that is, if the value of the game state identification counter Kj is "1", the process proceeds to step SD1913 and changes the value of the game state determination value Xj to "7". . After that, the process moves to step SD1916, stores the value "7" of the gaming state determination value Xj in a predetermined area of the RAM 503, and ends this process.

An affirmative determination is made in step SD1908, and in step SD1914, it is determined whether or not the value of the game state specifying counter Kj is "0". That is, it is determined whether or not the winning support mode is the "until next time/high support mode" in which the non-notification effect is not performed. If an affirmative determination is made here, the value "6" of the gaming state determination value Xj is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 503, and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made at step SD1914, that is, if the non-notification effect is performed "until the next time, high support mode", the process proceeds to step SD1915, and the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is set to "5". change to Thereafter, the process proceeds to step SD1916, stores the value "5" of the gaming state determination value Xj in a predetermined area of the RAM 503, and terminates this process. As a result, even in the state of "until the next time, high support mode", the lottery mode is "high probability mode" and the winning support mode is "30 times" for a predetermined number of times (20 times in this embodiment).・The same effect as in the state of "high support mode S" will be performed.

Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. Main processing of the game is executed in this normal processing. As an overview, the processing of steps SD201 to SD210 is executed as periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps SD211 and SD212 is executed during the remaining time.

First, in step SD201, a control signal based on the control contents of the special display devices 43L, 43R, the variable winning device 32, the opening/closing accessory 37Y, etc., which have been updated in the previous process, is transmitted to each device, or output data such as a command is transmitted. to each control device on the sub side. Some more detailed examples are given below.

For example, based on the detection information of the various detection switches, it is determined whether or not game balls have entered various prize-winning ports such as the general prize-winning port 31. If there is a prize, the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize is determined A payout command is transmitted to the payout control device 311 .

Also, when a command or the like for blinking the error display lamp 104 is set, the command is output to the sub-controller 262 .

In addition, in the external output process, information for grasping the game state is externally output to the hall computer of the game hall by taking into consideration various information such as the lottery mode flag and the jackpot medium flag to be described later. Furthermore, the output of error information and the like to the hall computer is also executed in this output process.

For example, when a prize winning error is detected, an ON signal (pulse signal) is output to the hall computer of the game hall via a predetermined terminal of the external relay terminal board 240, and if there is no prize winning error, an ON signal (pulse signal) is output. A signal is output.

In addition, when the effect display device 42 performs a variable display of decorative patterns, a variable pattern command, a pattern command, and the like are transmitted to the sub-control device 262 . On the other hand, the sub-control device 262, which has input a variation pattern command, a pattern command, etc., determines the variation mode of the effect display device 42 based on such various commands, and displays the variation mode on the effect display device 42 (variation display) is issued to the display control device 45.

At step SD202, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated. More specifically, like the other counters, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach the upper limit values (198 and 240 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0. do. Then, the updated values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 503. FIG.

In the subsequent step SD203, the prize ball count signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step SD204, the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

After that, in step SD205, the first display control process is executed. In this process, the control contents of the special display devices 43L and 43R are set as to what kind of control is to be performed in the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, and the judgment of the big hit and the decoration pattern in the effect display device 42 are performed. setting of the fluctuation pattern of . Details of the first display control process will be described later.

At step SD206, a variable winning device control process is executed. In this processing, setting of the control content of the variable winning device 32 is performed as to what kind of control is performed in the variable winning device 32 . As a result, when a big win state or a small win state occurs, the opening/closing process of the opening/closing shutter 32b of the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times. The details of the variable winning device control process will be described later.

At step SD207, a second display control process is executed. In this processing, the setting of the control contents of the normal design display device 41 and the like are performed as to what kind of control is performed in the normal design display device 41 . The details of this second display control process will be described later.

In step SD208, an open/close accessory control process is executed. In this process, the control contents of the opening/closing role 37Y are set as to what kind of control is performed in the opening/closing role 37Y. The details of this opening/closing accessory control process will be described later.

After that, in step SD209, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 or not. Here, if power failure occurrence information is not set in the backup area 503a, in step SD210, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time has passed since the start of the previous normal process. Then, it is determined whether or not 4 msec) has elapsed. Then, if the predetermined time has already passed, the process proceeds to step SD201, and the processes after step SD201 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not passed since the start of the previous normal processing, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal processing. Repeat execution (step SD211, step SD212).

That is, in step SD211, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the upper limit (599 in this example).

Also, in step SD212, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated (similar to step SD202). Specifically, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the upper limits (198 and 240 in this example). Then, the changed values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM503.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps SD201 to SD209 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter CD1) can be randomly updated and similarly fluctuated. The type counters CS1 and CS2 can also be randomly updated.

Now, if the power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step SD209: YES), it means that the power has been shut off, so the processes from step SD213 onward are executed as power failure processing at the time of power failure. will be In the power failure process, first, in step SD213, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited. In step SD214, the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 are saved in the stack area. memorize to After that, in step SD216, a power cutoff notification command indicating that the power has been cut off is transmitted to other control devices (payout control device 311, etc.). Then, in step SD217, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the backup area 503a. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of RAM 503 . Thereafter, in step SD218, RAM access is prohibited, and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed.

It should be noted that the processing of step SD209 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed at steps SD201 to SD208, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of steps SD211 and SD212 performed within the remaining time. It is executed at different times. Therefore, in the normal processing of the main controller 261, since information on occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the end of each processing, the amount of data to be stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is smaller than when each processing is in progress. and can be easily memorized. In addition, when returning to the state before the power shutdown, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, it can be easily restored, and the processing load on the main controller 261 can be reduced. . Furthermore, since the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited (step SD213) before data is stored, it is possible to prevent the data from being changed when the power is cut off, so that the state before the power cut-off can be reliably stored. .

Next, the first display control processing of step SD205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In FIG. 186, in step SD801, by referring to various hit medium flags (big hit medium flag and small hit medium flag) to be described later, it is determined whether or not it is currently in a hit state (during a big hit state or a small hit state). judge.

During the winning state (during the big winning state, during the small winning state), there is a round period during which the variable winning device 32 is open, and an interval period during which the variable winning device 32 is closed between the round periods. , the opening period before the start of the first round (the first special display device 43L or the second special display device 43R stops displaying the variable display in a manner corresponding to the win (big win or small win), and then the variable winning device 32 a predetermined period until the first round starts), an ending period after the end of the final round (after the final round ends and the variable winning device 32 is closed, the first special display device 43L or the first 2 a predetermined period until the variable display can be started on the special display device 43R).

If the determination in step SD801 is affirmative, that is, if the hit state is in progress, the process is terminated as it is. By looking at the setting state of the middle flag, it is determined whether or not the first or second special display device 43L, 43R (effect display device 42) is performing a variable display. Specifically, when the first display flag is set (in the ON state), it is considered that the variable display is in progress, and when the first display flag is cleared (in the OFF state), the variable It is considered that the display is stopped, which corresponds to a state in which the display is stopped. Although details will be described later, the first display flag is turned on when starting the variable display of the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R (see step SD920 and step SD807). It is turned off when the variable display of the second special display devices 43L and 43R is stopped (see step SD814).

Then, if a negative determination is made in step SD802, that is, if the winning state is not in progress and the variation display is not in progress, the process proceeds to step SD803, and the variation display (second variation It is determined whether or not the value of the lower suspension counter Nb that counts the number of suspensions displayed) is greater than zero.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SD803, that is, if even one second variation display is retained and stored, 1 is subtracted from the lower retention counter Nb in step SD804. Note that, in this embodiment, if the second variable display is reserved and stored by the determination processing in step SD803, the second variable display is executed without executing the first variable display. That is, even if the first variable display is retained and stored earlier than the second variable display, the second variable display is given priority (the first variable display is postponed). ing.

At subsequent step SD805, a process of shifting the data stored in the second special change reservation area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth reservation areas of the second special variable reservation area to the execution area side. The data in each area is shifted in the following order: area→reserved first area, reserved third area→reserved second area, reserved fourth area→reserved third area, and so on. After step SD805, in step SD806, the process of turning on/off the second reservation lamp 46b and the process of making the change specific lamp 40 emit red light are performed, and then the process proceeds to step SD807.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step SD803, that is, if no second variable display is stored pending, in step SD808, variable display (first It is determined whether or not an upper suspension counter Na that counts the number of suspensions for variable display) is greater than 0. If a negative determination is made in step SD808, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the determination in step SD808 is affirmative, 1 is subtracted from the upper reservation counter Na in step SD809. At subsequent step SD810, a process of shifting the data stored in the first special change reservation area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth reservation areas of the first special variable reservation area to the execution area side. The data in each area is shifted in the following order: area→reserved first area, reserved third area→reserved second area, reserved fourth area→reserved third area, and so on. After step SD810, in step SD811, the process of turning on/off the first reservation lamp 46a and the process of causing the change specific lamp 40 to emit blue light are performed, and then the process proceeds to step SD807. In the present embodiment, there is only one execution area for the special change reservation area, and the data stored in the first special change reservation area and the second special change reservation area are used when performing a change display based on the data. will be shifted to the common execution area.

At step SD807, variable display setting processing is performed. Here, the details of the variable display setting process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in the pre-processing of step SD900, a small hit determination process, a big hit determination process, a game state check process, etc. are executed.

In the small hit determination process, it is determined whether the value of the big hit random number counter CD1 stored in the execution area of the special change reservation area is a value corresponding to the small hit, and if it is a value corresponding to the small hit sets the small hit winning flag to ON. It should be noted that it may be determined whether or not the variation display corresponding to the small winning is determined by determining whether or not the small winning schedule flag in the execution area of the special variation holding area is set to ON. Further, the small hit schedule flag is turned off after the small hit winning flag is set to ON.

Similarly, in the jackpot determination process, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter CD1 stored in the execution area of the special variation reservation area is a value corresponding to the jackpot. sets the jackpot winning flag to ON. Here, it may be determined whether or not the variation display corresponding to the big win is determined by determining whether or not the big win schedule flag of the execution area of the special variation holding area is set to ON. Further, the big-hit schedule flag is turned off after the big-hit winning flag is turned on.

The small hit determination process, the big hit determination process, the big hit type determination process, the reach determination process, etc. constitute a part of various lotteries in this embodiment, and the function of the main controller 261 that executes this part of the lottery means is configured.

Since the game state check process is the same as the game state check process (see FIG. 184) in step SD109, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the following step SD901, it is determined whether or not the small hit winning flag is ON, thereby determining whether or not the variable display corresponds to the small hit.

Here, when it is determined that it corresponds to a small hit, the process proceeds to step SD910. On the other hand, if it is determined that the win is not a small win, the process proceeds to step SD902.

In step SD902, it is determined whether or not the variable display corresponds to a big win by determining whether or not the big win winning flag is ON.

Here, when it is determined that the game corresponds to a big hit, the process proceeds to step SD903. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is neither a big win nor a small win, that is, if it is a loss, the process proceeds to step SD912.

In step SD903, the various probability variable jackpot flags ("16R probability variable jackpot A flag", "16R probability variable jackpot B flag", "4R probability variable jackpot A flag", "4R probability variable jackpot B flag”) is turned on, it is determined whether or not the variable display corresponds to the “probability variable jackpot”.

If the affirmative determination is made in step SD903, that is, if it is a "probability variable jackpot", the variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern table corresponding to "probability variation jackpot" in step SD904, and set to the variation pattern command. . Subsequently, in step SD905, the symbol table corresponding to the "probability variable jackpot" is considered to determine the jackpot symbol (in this embodiment, whether it is an odd number symbol or an even number symbol), and the corresponding symbol command (this embodiment Then, set "BZ1" or "BZ2" to be described later. After that, the process moves to step SD920.

If a negative determination is made in step SD903, the process proceeds to step SD906, and the various normal jackpot flags (“16R normal jackpot A flag”, “16R normal jackpot B flag”, “4R normal jackpot A flag”, “4R normal It is determined whether or not the variable display corresponds to the "normal jackpot" by determining whether or not any of the "jackpot B flags") is on. If the determination in step SD906 is affirmative, that is, if it is a "normal jackpot", the fluctuation pattern is determined by referring to the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "normal jackpot" in step SD907, and set as a fluctuation pattern command. do. Subsequently, in step SD908, the symbol table corresponding to the "normal jackpot" is considered to determine the jackpot symbol (in this embodiment, whether it is an odd numbered symbol or an even numbered symbol), and the corresponding symbol command (this embodiment Then, set "BZ1" or "BZ2" to be described later. After that, the process moves to step SD920.

However, in the present embodiment, depending on the type of symbols stopped and displayed on the effect display device 42 as described above, it is impossible to determine the game state such as the lottery mode provided after the end of the big win. In other words, if it is a "probability variable jackpot", the "odd number pattern" will be stopped and displayed, and if it is a "normal jackpot", the "even number pattern" will be stopped and displayed. is not clearly associated, but in the present embodiment, according to the above various tables, for example, if it is a "probable variable jackpot", it is easy to stop and display with an "odd number pattern". They are simply divided into tables so that patterns and designs appear at different rates. Therefore, for example, at the time of the big win, regardless of the kind of the big win such as "probable variable big win" or "normal big win", the variation pattern or the stop symbol may be selected based on one big win table.

If a negative determination is made in step SD906, the process proceeds to step SD909, and it is determined whether or not the JUB jackpot flag is on, thereby determining whether the variable display corresponds to the "JUB jackpot". determine whether If the determination at step SD909 is affirmative, that is, if it is a "JUB jackpot", the process proceeds to step SD910.

In step SD910, a variation pattern table corresponding to "JUB big win" and "minor win" is taken into consideration to determine a variation pattern and set it as a variation pattern command. Thereafter, at step SD911, a symbol command (in this embodiment, "BZ6" to be described later) corresponding to the chance symbol is set, and the process proceeds to step SD920.

If a negative determination is made in step SD902, that is, if the determination is "out", it is determined in step SD912 whether or not the front-rear deviation flag is ON.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SD912, that is, if it is "before and after reach", in step SD913 the variation pattern table corresponding to "before and after reach" is taken into consideration to determine the variation pattern, and the variation pattern command and turn off the anteroposterior deviation flag. Subsequently, at step SD914, a symbol command (in this embodiment, "BZ3" to be described later) corresponding to the front and back off symbol is set. After that, the process moves to step SD920.

On the other hand, if the determination in step 912 is negative, it is determined in step SD915 whether or not the flag other than front-rear deviation is on. If the determination in step SD915 is affirmative, i.e., if it is "reach other than front-rear deviation", the variation pattern table corresponding to "reach other than front-rear deviation" is taken into consideration at step SD916 to determine the variation pattern, Set it to the fluctuation pattern command and turn off the flag other than the front and back deviation. Subsequently, at step SD917, a symbol command (in the present embodiment, "BZ4" to be described later) corresponding to a symbol other than front and rear deviation is set. After that, the process moves to step SD920.

Further, if the determination in step SD915 is negative, that is, if it is "completely out", in step SD918 the variation pattern table corresponding to "completely out" is taken into consideration to determine the outlier variation pattern, and the variation pattern command set to Subsequently, in step SD919, a symbol command corresponding to a completely missing symbol (in this embodiment, "BZ5" to be described later) is set. After that, the process moves to step SD920.

Here, for convenience, the variation pattern table and variation pattern commands will be described. In the present embodiment, a variation pattern table corresponding to the above-described "probability variable jackpot" (hereinafter referred to as "probability variable jackpot/variation pattern table"), a variation pattern table corresponding to "normal jackpot", "JUB jackpot" and "small hit" Fluctuation pattern table corresponding to , Fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "Reach off front and back", Variation pattern table corresponding to "Reach other than front and back off", and Variation pattern table corresponding to "Complete off" (hereinafter referred to as when completely off A plurality of variation pattern tables are provided according to the respective game states (values "0" to "7" of the game state determination value Xj).

For example, regarding the probability variable jackpot/variation pattern table, as shown in FIG. A probability variable jackpot time/fluctuation pattern table is stored.

Similarly, at "address 101", a probability variable jackpot/fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the value of game state determination value Xj being "1" is stored, and at "address 102", the value of game state determination value Xj is "2". A probability variable jackpot time/variation pattern table corresponding to is stored at "103 address", and a probability variable jackpot time/variation pattern table corresponding to the game state determination value Xj value of "3" is stored at "104 address" , when the game state determination value Xj corresponds to "4", the variation pattern table is stored, and at "105 address", when the probability variable jackpot corresponds to the game state determination value Xj of "5" A fluctuation pattern table is stored, and at "106 address", a variable jackpot time/variation pattern table corresponding to the value of the game state determination value Xj corresponding to "6" is stored, and at "107 address", the game state determination value Xj is stored. A probability variable jackpot/variation pattern table corresponding to the value "7" is stored.

Further, regarding the completely out of line/fluctuation pattern table, as shown in FIG. 206(b), at "700 address" which is the reference address, the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "0" and corresponds to the "normal state". A complete deviation/fluctuation pattern table is stored.

Similarly, at "address 701", a completely out-of-office/fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the value of game state determination value Xj being "1" is stored, and at "address 702", the value of game state determination value Xj is "2". is stored at "address 703", and at "address 704" is stored a change pattern table at "complete failure" corresponding to the gaming state determination value Xj of "3", and at "address 704" , When the game state determination value Xj is completely out of line corresponding to "4" ・The fluctuation pattern table is stored, and at "705 address", when the game state determination value Xj is completely out of line corresponding to "5" A variation pattern table is stored, and at "address 706", a completely out-of-state/variation pattern table corresponding to the game state determination value Xj value of "6" is stored, and at "address 707", the game state determination value Xj A complete deviation/variation pattern table corresponding to the value "7" is stored.

Although not shown, the variation pattern table corresponding to the above-mentioned "normal jackpot", the variation pattern table corresponding to "JUB jackpot" and "small hit", the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "front and back reach", and Regarding the variation pattern table corresponding to "Reach other than front and back failure", the value of the game state determination value Xj "0" to A plurality of table groups corresponding to "7" are stored with serial numbers from a predetermined reference address.

Therefore, when determining the variation pattern in step SD904, step SD907, step SD910, step SD913, step SD916, and step SD918, first, based on the game state determination value Xj specified in the game state check process (step SD900) Then, a process of selecting a table corresponding to a predetermined game state (values "0" to "7" of the game state determination value Xj) from among a plurality of table groups is performed. At this time, by adding the value of the game state determination value Xj to the reference address (for example, "100 address" in the case of the probability variable jackpot/variation pattern table), the address where the table to be selected is stored is specified. can do. That is, the game state determination value Xj plays the role of the offset value as it is.

Then, the variation pattern is determined based on the selected variation pattern table (for example, the probability variable jackpot time variation pattern table corresponding to "normal state (Xj = 0)" stored in "100 address": see Fig. 207) and set the corresponding variation pattern command.

The variation pattern command in this embodiment consists of 2 bytes, and the upper 4 bits in the upper byte consist of information specifying the gaming state. In this embodiment, the gaming state determination value Xj is set as it is. In addition, the lower 4 bits of the upper byte are configured by information specifying the jackpot type, etc., and the 8 bits of the lower byte are configured by information specifying the variation pattern (variation time, reach type, etc.).

For example, as can be seen by referring to the probability variable jackpot time/variation pattern table (see FIG. 207) related to the normal state (Xj=0), in the probability variable jackpot time/variation pattern command related to the normal state, the upper 4 bits in the upper byte "0", which is the value of the gaming state determination value Xj, is set, and "F" indicating "probability variable jackpot" is set in the following four bits. Then, a value specifying a variation pattern corresponding to the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503 is set to the remaining 8 bits of the lower byte. In the sub-control device 262, the relationship between these variation pattern commands and the variation mode (effect pattern) of the decorative pattern is stored in a table, and when the variation pattern command is received, the variation corresponding to the variation pattern command is stored. A pattern (effect pattern) becomes executable.

Next, the design command will be described in detail. The symbol command is a command for causing the sub-control device 262 to determine a stop symbol. In this embodiment, there are 6 categories: combination of odd-numbered jackpot symbols, combination of even-numbered jackpot symbols, combination of front and rear missing symbols, combination of symbols other than front and back missing symbols, combination of completely missing symbols, and combination of chance symbols. is specified. These divisions are indicated by, for example, "BZ1", "BZ2", "BZ3", "BZ4", "BZ5", and "BZ6", any one of which is set as a symbol command. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between these commands and the stop symbols in a table. Then, the sub-control device 262 displays the stop symbol corresponding to the symbol command.

The combination of odd-numbered jackpot symbols is a combination of symbols consisting of numbers 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9, and "BZ1" is set as the symbol command corresponding to the combination of odd-numbered jackpot symbols. be. Then, when the symbol command is set to "BZ1" indicating an odd jackpot symbol, the sub-control device 262 selects one of the symbol combinations consisting of double numbers 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9. One symbol is determined as the stop symbol.

The combination of even-numbered jackpot symbols is a combination of symbols consisting of numbers 0, 2, 4, 6, and 8, and "BZ2" is set as the symbol command corresponding to the combination of even-numbered jackpot symbols. be. Then, when the symbol command is set to "BZ2" indicating an even-numbered jackpot symbol, the sub-control device 262 selects one of symbol combinations consisting of 0, 2, 4, 6, and 8 numbers. One symbol is determined as the stop symbol.

The combination of front-rear deviating symbols corresponds to "front-rear deviating reach" in which the final stop symbol deviates from the ready-to-win pattern by one before and after the occurrence of the ready-to-win pattern and stops. "BZ3" is set in the symbol command.

The combination of symbols other than front and back off corresponds to "Reach other than front and back off" in which the final stop symbol stops at a place other than the front and rear of the reach symbol after the occurrence of reach, and the symbol corresponding to the combination of symbols other than front and back off. "BZ4" is set in the command.

The combination of completely missing symbols corresponds to "completely missing" in which reach does not occur, and "BZ5" is set to the symbol command corresponding to the combination of completely missing symbols.

Also, "BZ6" is set as the symbol command corresponding to the combination of chance symbols. Incidentally, there is only one type of chance symbol, and in this example, as described above, the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in each symbol display area are "3", "4", and "1" from the top.

Although details will be described later, when "BZ3" to "BZ5" are set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 stops symbol combinations stored in the counter buffer of the corresponding RAM 553. Determined as Specifically, when "BZ3" indicating a combination of front and rear deviating symbols is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 that has received the symbol command outputs the front and rear deviating reach symbol buffer stored in the RAM 553. A combination of symbols corresponding to the out-reach is determined as a stop symbol. When "BZ4" indicating a combination of symbols other than front-rear deviance is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols corresponding to reach other than front-rear detachment stored in the reach pattern buffer other than front-rear detachment of RAM 553 is transmitted to the sub-control device. 262 is determined as the stop symbol. When "BZ5" indicating a combination of completely lost symbols is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 uses the symbol combination corresponding to the completely lost stored in the completely lost symbol buffer of the RAM 553 as a stop symbol. decide.

Also, when "BZ6" is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 selects a chance symbol as a combination of decorative symbols.

Incidentally, the variation pattern command and the symbol command set as described above are output in the external output process (step SD201) to be described later. Then, the sub-control device 262 that has input these commands determines the variation mode of the effect display device 42 based on the command, and controls the display so that the variation mode is displayed (variation display) on the effect display device 42. A command is issued to the device 45 .

Now, in step SD920, start setting processing is performed to indicate that the conditions for performing variable display in the special display devices 43L and 43R have been met. In this start setting process, a first display flag indicating whether or not the special display devices 43L and 43R are performing variable display is turned on, and a first display timer setting process is performed.

The first display timer is means for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time of the fluctuation display) in the special display devices 43L and 43R, and is taken into consideration when determining whether a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation display. .

The variable display times of the special display devices 43L and 43R in this embodiment are set to values corresponding to the variation patterns of the decorative symbols selected by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2. Based on such setting of the first display timer, when a control signal for starting variable display is output to the special display devices 43L and 43R in the next external output processing of the normal processing, the special display device A variable display is started at 43L and 43R. Then, after step SD920 ends, the variable display setting process ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 186, if the determination in step SD802 is affirmative, that is, if the variable display is in progress, the process proceeds to step SD812 to perform first display timer subtraction processing. Each time this processing is performed, the value of the first display timer is decremented by 4 msec. For example, if the variable time is 10 seconds (10000 msec), "2500" is set for the first display timer, and 1 is subtracted every 4 msec.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step SD813, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed by taking into consideration the value of the first display timer after the subtraction. At this time, an affirmative determination is made in step SD813 when the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the first display timer has become "0".

If a negative determination is made in step SD813, in step SD817 switching display settings are made to continue the variable display of the special display devices 43L and 43R, and this process ends. In addition, based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, a control signal for switching display is output to the special display devices 43L and 43R in the external output processing in the next normal processing. As a result, switching display (variable display) of the special display devices 43L and 43R is realized at the timing of the first display control process, that is, every 4 ms.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SD813, the first display flag is cleared (turned off) in step SD814, and stop display setting for performing stop display on the special display devices 43L and 43R is performed in step SD815. .

In addition, based on the setting contents of the stop display setting, a control signal for performing stop display is output to the special display devices 43L and 42R in the next external output process in the normal process. For example, in the case of "16R probability variable jackpot A", "9-" is stopped and displayed (for example, lit for several seconds).

Subsequently, in step SD816, after performing a fluctuation end time setting process, this process is terminated. Here, the fluctuation end time setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step SD1001, it is determined whether or not the stop display corresponds to the big hit or the small hit by considering the big hit winning flag and the small hitting winning flag. Here, when corresponding to a big win or a small win, it is assumed that a predetermined operating condition is established, and the process proceeds to step SD1002 to set a win.

Specifically, setting processing such as a big hit middle flag, a small hit middle flag, an opening flag, a first open flag, a first variable timer, a round number counter Rx and a winning counter Vx etc. is performed, and a big hit or a small hit is started. And setting processing of an opening command that tells the winning type is also performed. Then, after step SD1002 is finished, the fluctuation end time setting process is finished.

The jackpot flag is state determination information for determining whether or not the jackpot state is in progress. Here, "1" indicating the occurrence of the jackpot state is set (turned on) as a flag value. It should be noted that it may be determined whether or not the jackpot is in progress by determining whether or not the value of the round number counter Rx for the jackpot is greater than 0 instead of using the flag during the jackpot. Also, the jackpot winning flag is turned off after the jackpot middle flag is set to on.

The small hit medium flag is state discrimination information for determining whether or not the small hit state is in progress. Here, as with the big hit medium flag, "1" indicating the occurrence of the small hit state is set as the flag value. (turned on). It should be noted that the small hit winning flag is turned off after the small hit medium flag is set to ON.

The opening flag is state determination information for determining whether or not it is during the opening period. Here, "1" indicating that it is during the opening period is set (turned on) as a flag value.

The first open flag is state determination information for determining whether or not the variable winning device 32 is in the open state (during the round period).

The first variable timer is a measuring means for measuring the opening time (round period) of the variable winning device 32, the interval period between rounds, etc., and a specified time has elapsed from the opening start or end of the opening and closing shutter 32b. It is taken into account when determining whether or not In the win setting process of step SD1002, predetermined values corresponding to various wins are set with reference to the opening/closing pattern control table (see FIG. 208).

For example, when the first time is the "long open" like "16R probability variable jackpot A", the first variable timer is set to "7500", and the first time is the "short open" like "JUB jackpot" In this case, "100" is set to the first variable timer. As a result, the maximum opening time (prescribed time) per opening/closing operation of the opening/closing shutter 32b is set to "30 seconds" or "0.4 seconds". That is, the main controller 261 as a movable control unit selects the opening/closing pattern, which is one of the movable modes of the opening/closing shutter 32b that is movable during the jackpot performance, among the plurality of opening/closing patterns (the number of rounds) stored in the opening/closing pattern control table. will be determined and executed.

As shown in FIG. 208, the opening/closing pattern control table as specific information includes, as setting information, the number of occurrences of the special prize state (number of rounds) in each winning state, and the opening/closing shutter 32b in each special prize state (each round). , the interval time between each special prize state, etc. are set in advance.

The round number counter Rx is the number of occurrences of the special prize state (round) executed during the big win state or the small win state, that is, the number of execution times of the opening/closing process (“long opening” or “short opening”) of the variable prize winning device 32. is state determination information for determining In the win setting process of step SD1002, an opening/closing pattern control table (see FIG. 208) is taken into account to set initial values corresponding to various wins. For example, in the case of "16R probability variable jackpot A", "16" is set as information indicating 16 times, which is the second specific period, and in the case of "4R probability variable jackpot A", 4 times, which is the first specific period "4" is set as the information indicating the . In the case of a "JUB jackpot", "20" is set as the initial value as information indicating 20 times, which is the sum of five "short openings" and fifteen "long openings". In addition, the number of rounds is determined by the jackpot type determination process, and after the information indicating the number of rounds is first set as an initial value, the set information does not increase on the way. Based on this, the end determination will be made.

The winning counter Vx is winning counting means for counting the number of game balls that have won the variable winning device 32 . In this embodiment, in the switch reading process (see FIG. 179) of the timer interrupt process, it is determined whether or not there is a winning to the variable winning device 32 based on the detection information of the count switch 223, and the winning to the variable winning device 32 is determined. If it is determined that there is, 1 is added to the value of the winning counter Vx.

In addition, in the winning setting process of step SD1002, the opening/closing pattern control table (see FIG. 208) is taken into consideration, and the maximum number of prizes to be awarded to the variable winning device 32 per one opening/closing operation (one round) of the opening/closing shutter 32b. Set the specified number Vo. As described above, the prescribed number Vo is determined in advance for each type of opening such as "long opening" or "short opening" (operation mode of the opening/closing member for one opening/closing operation). For example, "10" is set as the specified number Vo for "long open", and "3" is set as the specified number Vo for "short open".

Now, in step SD1001, when it is determined that the stop display does not correspond to the big win or the small win, the process moves to step SD1003.

In step SD1003, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the support number counter is "0". The support number counter is a means to measure the duration of the "high support mode" (how many times the variable display), and as described later, after the jackpot ends, the value corresponding to each jackpot is set as the counter value. be.

Here, if the counter value of the support number counter is "0", this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the support number counter is set (when the counter value is other than "0"), it is assumed that the high support mode is being set, and in step SD1004, the value of the support number counter is decremented by 1. . At step SD1004, a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the game state identification counter Kj is also performed. After that, the process moves to step SD1005.

In step SD1005, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the support number counter is "0". That is, it is determined whether or not the current variation display is the predetermined number of variation displays after the end of the big win (after the high support mode is given). Here, if the value of the support number counter is "0", the value of the support mode flag is changed to "A0(H)" indicating "low support mode" at step SD1006, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step SD1005 that the counter value of the support number counter is not "0", this processing ends.

Next, the variable winning device control processing of step SD206 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step SD1201, various hit medium flags (large hit medium flag and small hit medium flag) are referred to, and it is determined whether or not it is currently in a hit state (during a big hit state or a small hit state). If a negative determination is made here, this processing is terminated as it is.

If the determination in step SD1201 is affirmative, then in step SD1202, the value of the first variable timer is decremented by one.

In subsequent step SD1203, it is determined whether or not the first open flag is ON, that is, whether or not the round period is in progress. If the determination here is affirmative, the process proceeds to step SD1204 to determine whether the value of the first variable timer is "0", that is, the round period ("30 seconds" for "long open", "short open ”, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of “0.4 seconds”).

When a negative determination is made in step SD1204, the process proceeds to step SD1205 to determine whether or not the value of the winning counter Vx is equal to or greater than the specified number Vo, that is, the number of game balls winning the variable winning device 32 during the round period. has reached a prescribed number Vo (“10 pieces” in the case of “long opening” and “3 pieces” in the case of “short opening”), which is the maximum expected prize winning number. If a negative determination is made in step SD1205, that is, if the timing for closing the variable prize winning device 32 (end timing of the round period) has not yet arrived, this process ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SD1204 or SD1205, that is, if it is time to end the round period, the process proceeds to step SD1206, and 1 is subtracted from the value of the round number counter Rx.

After that, the process advances to step SD1207 to determine whether or not the value of the round number counter Rx is "0", that is, whether or not the number of executions of rounds ("long open" or "short open") has reached a specified number. Determined by the functional unit. That is, it is determined whether or not a condition for ending a series of round opening/closing motions in the winning state is satisfied.

It should be noted that the end timing of each round period varies depending on the behavior of the game ball shot by the player operating the handle 18 and the state of the nail 49 or the like arranged in the game area. Therefore, each round period may end after the stipulated time (“30 seconds” for “long open” and “0.4 seconds” for “short open”), or the stipulated It ends on the condition that a specified number of game balls ("10" in the case of "long opening" and "3" in the case of "short opening") enter the big winning opening 32a before the time elapses. Sometimes. In other words, at least one of the conditions for ending the winning state can be established based on the player's ball shooting operation, and the establishment timing is changed.

Alternatively, in step SD1002, the value of the round number counter Rx is set to the initial value "0", and in step SD1206, the value of the round number counter Rx is incremented by 1. Then, in step SD1207, the value of the round number counter Rx has reached the specified number of rounds corresponding to various hits (for example, "16" in the case of "16R probability variable jackpot A"). good too.

However, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the end condition is established only when the big winning opening 32a is closed (when the open/close shutter 32b is at the initial position). This is because the termination condition cannot be satisfied when the big winning opening 32a is opened, and it is irrational to determine whether the termination condition is satisfied at this timing. This is because judgment is required.

If the determination in step SD1207 is affirmative, ending setting processing is performed in step SD1208, and this processing ends. That is, the movement of the opening/closing shutter 32b positioned at the closed position (initial position) is stopped as it is, and the series of round opening/closing operations is terminated by the end function unit.

In addition, in the ending setting process of step SD1208, the first open flag is turned off, the ending flag is turned on, and an ending command is set to convey information to the sub-controller 262 to start the ending. A process of setting a value corresponding to a predetermined ending period (the ending period for the big hit or the ending period for the small hit) is performed on the variable timer.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SD1207, that is, if the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the specified number of times, in step SD1209 interval setting processing for stop control is performed, and this processing ends.

In the interval setting process of step SD1209, the first open flag is turned off, the interval command is set to notify the sub-control device 262 of the start of the interval, and the opening/closing pattern control table (Fig. 208) to set a value corresponding to a predetermined interval period (“3 seconds” or “1 second”) to the first variable timer.

Now, if a negative determination is made in step SD1203, that is, if it is a predetermined period (opening period, interval period, or ending period) other than the round period, the process proceeds to step SD1210, and the value of the first variable timer is "0". That is, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the predetermined period (opening period, interval period, or ending period).

If a negative determination is made in step SD1210, this process ends. On the other hand, if the determination in step SD1210 is affirmative, it is determined in step SD1211 whether or not the opening flag (see step SD1002) is turned on.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SD1211, that is, if it is the end timing of the opening period, in step SD1212 opening end setting processing is performed, and then this processing ends.

In the opening end setting process of step SD1212, the opening flag is turned off, the first open flag is turned on, the round command is set to convey information to the sub-control device 262 to start the round, and the opening/closing pattern control is performed. With reference to the table (see FIG. 208), the first variable timer corresponds to a predetermined round period (“30 seconds” for “long open” and “0.4 seconds” for “short open”) It performs processing such as setting the value to be used.

On the other hand, if the determination in step SD1211 is negative, it is determined in step SD1213 whether or not the ending flag (see step SD1208) is turned on. If an affirmative determination is made in step SD1213, that is, if it is the end timing of the ending period, in step SD1214, ending end setting processing (end setting of win state) is performed, and this processing ends.

In the ending end setting process of step SD1214, the hit medium flag (big hit medium flag or small hit medium flag) and the ending flag are turned off, and the winning end command that conveys the information that the hitting state ends for the sub control device 262 A process of setting (a large winning end command to convey information that the big winning state ends or a small winning ending command to convey information that the small winning state ends) is performed.

Further, in the ending end setting process, lottery mode flag switching process, support mode flag switching process, support number counter setting process, game state notification command setting process, and the like are performed.

In the lottery mode flag switching process, the lottery mode flag switching setting is performed based on the various jackpot flags described above. As a result, when the "high probability mode" is set after the jackpot ends (various "probability variable jackpot flags" or "JUB jackpot flags" are on), "53 (H)" indicating the occurrence of the "high probability mode" is set as the flag value. On the other hand, when the "low probability mode" is set (various "normal jackpot flags" are on), "50 (H)" indicating the occurrence of the "low probability mode" is set as the flag value.

However, when the small hit medium flag is on (when the big hit medium flag is off), the lottery mode flag switching processing is not performed, and the flag value related to the original mode is set as it is. For example, if the "high probability mode" is set before the occurrence of the small hit state (flag value "53 (H)" of the lottery mode flag), the "high probability mode (lottery mode)" A flag value "53 (H)") of the flag is set.

In the support mode flag switching process, the support mode flag switching setting is performed based on the various jackpot flags described above. As a result, when "20 times/high support mode", "30 times/high support mode", "40 times/high support mode" or "50 times/high support mode" is given after the end of the jackpot, the flag value "A1 (H)" is set as the flag value, and in the case of "30 times/high support mode S", "A2 (H)" is set as the flag value, and in the case of "until the next time/high support mode" "A3(H)" is set as the flag value.

In the support number counter setting process, the support number counter switching setting is performed based on the various jackpot flags described above. As a result, if "20 times/high support mode", "30 times/high support mode", "40 times/high support mode" or "50 times/high support mode" is given after the jackpot ends, support As the value of the number counter, "20" corresponds to 20 times of variable display, "30" corresponds to 30 times of variable display, "40" corresponds to 40 times of variable display, or "50" corresponds to 50 times of variable display. set. Further, when "30 times/high support mode S" is provided, "30" corresponding to 30 times of variable display is set as the value of the support number counter. When "until the next time, high support mode" is given, the value of the support number counter is set to a value that cannot be practically reached (for example, "99999" corresponding to 99999 fluctuation displays).

The game state notification command is a command for notifying the sub-control device 262 of the game state set after the end of the jackpot. In setting the command, first, a game state check process is performed. Since the game state check process is the same as the game state check process (see FIG. 184) in step SD109, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

The game state notification command includes the game state determination value Xj related to the new game state grasped by the game state check process. As will be described later, the sub-control device 262 that has received this switches the game state (game state determination value Xj) that it has grasped to a new game state (game state determination value Xj). Incidentally, the game state notification command may be omitted, and instead, the game state determination value Xj may be included in, for example, a jackpot end command for announcing the end of the jackpot state.

It should be noted that the various "jackpot flags" are turned off after various processes such as the switching process of the lottery mode flag are completed. Also, when the winning setting (step SD1002) is performed in the setting process at the end of fluctuation in FIG. 188, the lottery mode flag is reset once (set to "50 (H)") A configuration in which the “high-probability mode” is interrupted may be employed.

If a negative determination is made in step SD1213, that is, if it is time to end the interval period, round start processing is performed in step SD1215, and then this processing ends.

In the round start process of step SD1215, the first open flag is turned on, and a round command is set to convey information to the sub-controller 262 to start the round.

Furthermore, in the round start process, the opening and closing pattern control table (see FIG. 208) is taken into consideration, and the opening time for the next round (“30 seconds” in the case of “long opening” and 30 seconds in the case of “short opening”) "0.4 seconds") to set the value corresponding to the first variable timer, and the specified number Vo related to the next round ("10" for "long open", "short open" for "3"), resetting the winning counter Vx to "0", and the like.

Various control signals are output to the variable winning device 32 in the external output process of the next normal process based on the on/off state of the first open flag. When the first open flag is ON, a control signal for opening the open/close shutter 32b is output to the variable winning device 32, and the big winning opening 32a is opened. At the same time, control is performed to emit light from a light-emitting means such as an LED provided in the large winning opening 32a, thereby making it easier for the player to visually recognize the large winning opening 32a. On the other hand, when the first open flag is off, a control signal for closing the open/close shutter 32b is output to the variable winning device 32, and the big winning opening 32a is closed. At the same time, control is performed to extinguish the light emitting means such as the LED.

Next, the second display control processing of step SD207 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In FIG. 190, in step SD2101, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol display device 41 is performing variable display by looking at the setting state of the second display flag indicating whether or not the normal symbol display device 41 is performing variable display. judge. Specifically, when the second display flag is on, it is considered that the normal symbol display device 41 is in the process of variable display, and when the second display flag is off, the normal symbol display device 41 varies. It is considered that the display is stopped, which corresponds to a state in which the display is stopped.

If the determination in step SD2101 is negative, the process advances to step SD2102 to determine whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is greater than zero. At this time, if the value of the normal reservation counter Nc is 0, the process is terminated.

If the variable display is not in progress and the value of the normal hold counter Nc>0, the process proceeds to step SD2103. At step SD2103, 1 is subtracted from the normal hold counter Nc. At step SD2104, a process of shifting the data stored in the normal variation reservation area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth reserve areas of the normal variable reserve area to the execution area side. The data in each area is shifted in the order of reserved first area, reserved third area→reserved second area, reserved fourth area→reserved third area, and so on.

After that, in step SD2105, start setting processing is executed. In this process, a process is performed to indicate that the condition for performing variable display in the normal symbol display device 41 has been established. Specifically, the setting process of the second display timer is performed while turning on the second display flag. The second display timer is a means for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time) of the fluctuation display performed by the normal symbol display device 41, and is taken into consideration when determining whether a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation display. be done.

In this embodiment, during the "low support mode", since the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed by the normal symbol display device 41 is set to 2 seconds, the second display timer is set to "500". . Further, during the "high support mode", since the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed by the normal symbol display device 41 is set to 0.4 seconds, the second display timer is set to "100".

Based on the setting in the start setting process, in the next normal process external output process, when a control signal to the effect of starting the variable display is output to the normal symbol display device 41, the normal symbol display device 41 fluctuates Display starts. As described above, the normal symbol display device 41 is configured to light up and display "o" or "x" as a normal symbol. , the display is switched to "○". After step SD2105 ends, the second display control process ends.

Now, when an affirmative determination is made in step SD2101, that is, when the variable display is being performed on the normal symbol display device 41, the process proceeds to step SD2106, and the second display timer subtraction process is performed. The value of the second display timer is decremented by one each time this process is performed.

Subsequently, proceeding to step SD2107, it is determined whether or not the value of the second display timer is "0", that is, whether or not the variable time has elapsed. When an affirmative determination is made in step SD2107, the flag during the second display is turned off in step SD2108, and normal symbol stop display setting for performing stop display on the normal symbol display device 41 is performed in step SD2109. Then, based on the setting contents of the normal symbol stop display setting, a control signal to the effect that the normal symbol display device 41 performs the stop display is output in the external output process in the next normal process. That is, if the winning pattern is selected, the "O" symbol (the winning symbol) is stopped and displayed (for example, it lights up only for several seconds), and if the winning pattern is lost, the "X" symbol is stopped and displayed.

In addition, as described above, it is determined whether or not winning is based on the value of the normal symbol random number counter CD4 stored in the execution area of the normal variation reservation area.

Specifically, among the numerical values 0 to 9 of the normal symbol random number counter CD4, the winning value is two of "0, 1" in "low support mode", and "0 to 7" in "high support mode". 8 pieces.

Subsequently, the flow advances to step SD2110 to perform fluctuation end time setting processing, and terminates this processing. In this process, if the stop display corresponds to winning, a setting process for opening/closing the opening/closing accessory 37Y is performed. Specifically, the second open flag is turned on, and the open time is set in the second variable timer.

The second open flag is state determination information for determining whether or not the opening/closing accessory 37Y is in the open state.

The second variable timer is a means for measuring the opening time (remaining time) of the opening/closing accessory 37Y, and is taken into consideration when determining whether or not a specified time has elapsed from the start of opening. In this embodiment, the opening time of the opening and closing accessory 37Y differs between the "high support mode" and the "low support mode", and in the "high support mode", the second variable timer is set to "1000". In the "low support mode", "100" is set for the second variable timer.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step SD2107, in step SD2111, switching display setting is performed to continue the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41, and this processing ends. Then, based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, a control signal for performing switching display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the external output processing in the next normal processing. Specifically, if the current lighting is "o", the display is switched to "x", and if it is "x", the display is switched to "o". As a result, the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41 is realized at the timing of the second display control process, that is, every 4 ms.

Next, the opening/closing accessory control processing of step SD208 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step SD2201, it is determined whether or not the second opening flag indicating whether or not the opening/closing accessory 37Y is in the open state is on. Here, when it is determined that the second open flag is not ON (the opening/closing accessory 37Y is in the closed state), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step SD2201, that is, if the second open flag is ON, it is assumed that the opening/closing accessory 37Y is in the open state, and the second variable timer subtraction process is performed in step SD2202. Each time this process is performed, the value of the second variable timer is decremented by one.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step SD2203, and it is determined whether or not the specified opening time has elapsed, taking into consideration the value of the second variable timer after the subtraction. Here, an affirmative determination is made in step SD2203 when the specified opening time has passed, that is, when the value of the second variable timer becomes "0". If a negative determination is made here, the processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SD2203, the process moves to step SD2204, performs end setting processing in step SD2204, and ends this processing. In the end setting process of step SD2204, a process of turning off the second open flag is performed.

In addition, based on the ON/OFF state of the second open flag, various control signals are output to the opening/closing accessory 37Y in the external output process of the next normal process. When the second opening flag is ON, a control signal for opening the movable blade 37Ya is output to the opening/closing accessory 37Y, and the opening/closing accessory 37Y is in an open state. On the other hand, when the second opening flag is off, a control signal for closing the movable blade 37Ya is output to the opening/closing accessory 37Y, and the opening/closing accessory 37Y is closed. This makes it impossible for the game ball to enter the lower start winning opening 33YB.

Next, the payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. For convenience of explanation, reception interrupt processing will be described first with reference to FIG. 192, and then main processing will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing reception interrupt processing executed by the payout control device 311. FIG. The reception interrupt process is a process that is executed by interrupting when the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261 . When the payout control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, other processing executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 is put on standby for a while, and reception interrupt processing is executed. When the reception interrupt process is executed, the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is first stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513 at step SD3001, and the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is stored at step SD3002. Turns on the command reception flag and terminates this reception interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referenced and stored in a predetermined storage area, and the storage pointer is used to store the next received command in the next storage area. is updated.

In this embodiment, the reception processing of a command transmitted from the main controller 261 is performed by interrupt processing executed when the command is received. In timer interrupt processing, it is checked whether or not a command has been received before command determination processing (step SD3201) is performed. The command reception flag may be turned on, and if the command has not been received, the process may proceed to the command determination process. In such a case, whether or not the command has been received is checked by checking the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port at predetermined intervals.

Next, the main processing of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 193 is a flow chart showing the main processing of the payout control device 311, and this main processing is activated upon resetting when the power is turned on.

First, in step SD3101, initial setting processing is executed upon power-on. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. Then, in step SD3103, RAM access is permitted, and in step SD3104, an external interrupt vector is set.

After that, in step SD3106, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 or not. If power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a, a RAM determination value is calculated in step SD3107, and in subsequent step SD3108, whether the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value saved at the time of power failure. No, that is, the validity of the backup is determined. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of RAM 513 . It is also possible to determine the effectiveness of the backup by checking whether the keywords written in a predetermined area of the RAM 513 are correctly saved.

If power failure occurrence information is not set in step SD3106, or if backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) in step SD3108, the process proceeds to the initialization processing of the RAM 513 after step SD3115. Transition.

At step SD3115, the entire area of RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and at step SD3116 the initial value of RAM 513 is set. After that, in step SD3117, the CPU peripheral device is initialized, and in step SD3114 the interrupt is permitted.

On the other hand, on the condition that power failure occurrence information is set in step SD3106, and that the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal in step SD3108, processing at the time of power recovery process). That is, at step SD3109, the stack pointer before the power interruption is restored, at step SD3110, the power interruption occurrence information is cleared, and at step SD3111, the payout permission flag for permitting the payout of prize balls is cleared. In step SD3112, the CPU peripheral device is initialized, and in step SD3113, the used register is restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM513. Furthermore, at step SD3114, interrupts are permitted.

After the interrupt is permitted in step SD3114, in the process of step SD3122, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a. Here, if the power failure occurrence information is set, it means that the power has been shut down, so the processing from step SD3123 onwards is performed as power failure processing at the time of power failure. In the power failure process, first, in step SD3123, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited, and in the next step SD3124, command determination processing, which will be described later, is executed. After that, in step SD3125, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 are saved in the stack area, in step SD3126 the value of the stack pointer is stored in the backup area 513a, and in step SD3127 the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the backup area 513a. , the RAM access is prohibited in step SD3128, and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area backed up in the RAM 513 .

In the process of step SD3122, the power failure occurrence information is confirmed after the power-on process is completed. less and can be easily memorized. In addition, when returning to the state before the power shutdown, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, the return can be easily performed, and the processing load of the payout control device 311 can be reduced. .

Next, timer interrupt processing of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This timer interrupt process is started periodically (with a cycle of 2 msec in this embodiment).

In the timer interrupt processing, first, a command is acquired from the main control device 261, and judgment processing of the command is performed (step SD3201). This command determination processing will be described below with reference to FIG.

FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing command determination processing performed by the payout control device 311. FIG. In the command determination process (steps SD3124, SD3201), first, it is determined whether or not the command reception flag is turned on in step SD3301. The command reception flag is turned on when a command transmitted from main controller 261 is received in the above-described reception interrupt processing (see FIG. 192).

If it is determined in step SD3301 that the command reception flag is off, no new command has been received from main controller 261, so this process ends. On the other hand, if the command reception flag is determined to be ON in step SD3301, the received command is read from the RAM 513 in step SD3302, and the command reception flag is turned OFF in step SD3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step SD3303, the processing of steps SD3302 to SD3311 can be skipped until a new command is received, so the control of the payout control device 311 can be reduced.

The type of command read out from the RAM 513 is discriminated in the processing of steps SD3304 to SD3306. At step SD3304 it is determined whether the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout initialization command, at step SD3305 it is determined whether it is a payout return command, at step SD3306 whether it is a prize ball command No is determined.

If the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a payout initialization command, it is determined in step SD3307 whether or not the payout permission flag has already been turned on. Since the controller 261 has instructed the RAM 513 to be initialized, the working area (area) of the RAM 513 other than the stack area is cleared to 0 in step SD3308, and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set in step SD3309. After that, at step SD3311, the payout permission flag is turned on to set the payout permission of prize balls.

As described above, the main controller 261 performs the initialization process of the RAM 503 after transmitting the payout initialization command, and the payout control device 311 initializes the RAM 513 after receiving the payout initialization command. is performed, the timing at which the RAM 503 is initialized and the timing at which the RAM 513 is initialized are substantially the same. Therefore, even if the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261, the RAM 513 is initialized due to the timing of initialization being shifted, and control corresponding to the received command cannot be performed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of harmful effects. Also, since the payout permission flag is turned on after the RAM 513 is initialized, the payout permission of prize balls can be reliably set.

On the other hand, if the payout permission flag is already turned on in step SD3307, this command determination process is terminated without clearing the work area of the RAM 513 and initializing the RAM 513. FIG. That is, the process of step SD3307 prohibits the RAM 513 from being initialized while the payout permission flag is set. Since the payout initialization command is a command that is transmitted only when the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on when the power is turned on, it will not be received with the payout permission flag turned on. It is conceivable that the payout control device 311 has recognized it as a payout initialization command due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, if the work area of the RAM 513 is cleared (step SD3308) and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set (step SD3309) while the payout permission flag is turned on, it will not be paid out if there are prize balls remaining. A bad effect occurs and a loss is given to the player, but since the RAM 513 is prevented from being initialized while the payout permission flag is turned on, the loss to the player can be prevented.

Also, if the command sent from the main control device 261 is a payout return command (step SD3304: NO, step SD3305: YES), the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power shutdown, A payout permission flag is turned on at step SD3311 to allow the payout of prize balls. That is, when there is power-off occurrence information and the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power-off, payout of prize balls is permitted. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step SD3311, it means that the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so the read pointer is set to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

Furthermore, if the command sent from the main controller 261 is a prize ball command (step SD3305: NO, step SD3306: YES), in step SD3310, the received number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls and stored. , the payout permission flag is turned on at step SD3311 to allow the payout of prize balls. At this time, the payout control device 311 sequentially reads the prize ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer), and adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the commands to the total number of prize balls stored in a predetermined buffer area. and memorize it. Since the payout of prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls is performed based on the prize ball command transmitted from the main controller 261, the prize ball command is a payout instruction command for instructing the payout of prize balls. . In addition, when the prize ball command is received, the payout permission is set immediately, so the prize balls can be paid out early for the win. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step SD3311, it means that the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so the read pointer is set to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

It should be noted that the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is neither a payout initialization command (step SD3304: NO), nor a payout return command (step SD3305: NO), nor a prize ball command (step SD3306: NO), The command determination process is ended without turning on the payout permission flag.

Here, returning to the flowchart of FIG. 194, description will be made. When the command determination process ends, it is determined in step SD3202 whether or not the payout permission flag has been turned on in the command determination process. Here, if the payout permission flag is not turned on, this processing is terminated as it is. In other words, it is possible to prevent the prize balls from being paid out before the command is transmitted from the main controller 261 .

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SD3202, the firing control device 312 is set to permit firing in step SD3203, and the state return switch 321 is checked in step SD3204. Execute the return operation. By this process, when the state recovery switch 321 is pressed when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging occurs in the dispensing motor, the dispensing motor is rotated forward and reverse, and the ball clogging is resolved (returned to a normal state). .

After that, in step SD3205, setting of the lower tray full state or the lower tray full state canceled state is executed according to the change in the state of the lower tray 15. FIG. That is, the full state of the lower tray 15 is determined by the detection signal of the lower tray full switch. , execute the setting of the lower tray full state release state. Further, in step SD3206, the setting of the no-ball-in-tank state (out-of-ball state) or no-ball-in-tank state (with-ball state) is executed according to the change in the state of the ball in the tank. That is, the no-ball-in-tank state is determined by the detection signal of the no-tank-ball switch, the no-ball-in-tank state is set, the no-ball-in-tank state is set, and the no-ball-in-tank state is canceled. Run the settings.

After that, in step SD3207, it is determined whether or not there is a state to be notified, such as an error state, and if there is a state to be notified, it is notified.

Subsequently, a prize ball and rental ball payout control process is executed. Specifically, payout number setting processing is performed in step SD3208, motor control state acquisition processing is performed in step SD3209, and motor drive processing is performed in step SD3210.

In step SD3211, the state return switch 321 is checked, and on the condition that the ball removal is not possible and the ball removal operation is not started, the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the ball removal process. In the following step SD3212, control of vibrator 360 (vibration motor control) is executed on condition that the balls are clogged. After that, it returns to the beginning of this timer interrupt processing.

Next, normal processing of the sub-controller 262 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that this normal processing is a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 msec in this embodiment).

In this normal process, first, in step SD3901, the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port 554 is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main controller 261 has been received.

If a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of RAM 553 at step SD3902. A command buffer of the RAM 553 is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main controller 261 .

The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area. It is configured to update the Return to Beginning command. Therefore, when a command is stored and read, the store pointer and read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

In the following step SD3903, command determination processing is performed. Here, command determination processing will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step SD4101, the received command is read from the command buffer of RAM553. It is determined in step SD4102 whether or not the command is an initialization command, in step SD4103 it is determined whether or not it is a return command, in step SD4104 it is determined whether or not it is a pending control command, and step SD4110. At step SD4111, it is determined whether or not it is a variation pattern command, and at step SD4112 it is determined whether or not it is a pattern command.

It should be noted that with respect to the command (opening command, round command, interval command, ending command, jackpot end command, small hit end command, etc.) related to the hit effect, command determination is performed in the command determination process of step SD3903, but this is not executed, and processing corresponding to these commands is performed in the display setting processing (during-hit display processing) of step SD3907, which will be described later.

If the command sent from the main controller 261 is an initialization command, it means that the main controller 261 instructs the RAM 553 to be initialized when the power is turned on. Set the initial value of the RAM 553 . As a result, the game state information storage area of the RAM 553 stores the value “0” of the game state determination value Xj corresponding to the initial setting “normal state”. After that, this process is terminated.

Also, if the command sent from the main controller 261 is a return command (step SD4102: NO, step SD4103: YES), the main controller 261 returns to the state before the power shutdown. At step SD4107, the control device 262 reads the game state determination value Xj (one of "0" to "7") included in the return command, and stores it in the game state information storage area of the RAM553. After that, this process is terminated.

Furthermore, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a hold control command (step SD4103: NO, step SD4104: YES), in step SD4108, various information included in the hold control command (jackpot determination information and jackpot type information, information indicating whether the variable display is triggered by the winning of the start winning port 33YA or 33YB, etc.) is stored in the sub-variation reservation area, and this processing ends.

The sub-variation reservation area is provided corresponding to the special variation reservation area of main controller 261 . That is, the sub-variation reservation area includes a first sub-variation reservation area corresponding to the upper start winning opening 33YA, a second sub-variation reservation area corresponding to the lower starting opening winning opening 33YB, and one sub execution area. Each of the two sub-variable reservation areas has four reservation areas (reservation first to reservation fourth areas).

In each reservation area, according to the reception history (receiving order) of the reservation control command and the winning history of the game ball included in the reservation control command (whether it is based on the winning of the start winning opening 33YA or 33YB, etc.) Information (jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, etc.) related to the variable display executed by the effect display device 42 is stored in time series. Thereby, the sub-control device 262 can grasp the number of suspensions of the variable display and the contents thereof.

If the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a game state notification command (step SD4104: NO, step SD4110: YES), at step SD4107, the game state determination value Xj included in the game state notification command ( Any one of "0" to "7") is read out and stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM553. After that, this process is terminated.

If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a variation pattern command (step SD4110: NO, step SD4111: YES), it is the timing to start the variation display in the effect display device 42, so start setting is made in step SD4113. process and move to step SD4114.

In the start setting process of step SD4113, various settings related to the variable display performed by the effect display device 42 are performed.

In this start setting process, first, as in the case of the special variation reservation area of the main controller 261, the data stored in the sub-variation reservation area is sequentially shifted to the sub-execution area side. Subsequently, the variation time corresponding to the received variation pattern command is set in the variation display timer. The variable display timer is means for measuring the variable time (remaining time of variable display) in the effect display device 42, and is taken into account when determining whether or not a predetermined time has passed since the start of variable display.

In addition, in the start setting process, a variable display flag is turned on, which is taken into consideration when determining whether or not the effect display device 42 is performing variable display.

In this embodiment, based on the variation pattern information stored in the variation pattern command, the effect pattern related to the variation display of the decorative pattern is selected, and based on the hit type information (including "loss"), stop display after the variation time has elapsed Determine the stop symbol (combination of stop symbols) to be played. Information about the effect pattern and the stop symbol determined here is added to the sub-execution area of the sub-variation reservation area. It should be noted that the correspondence between the variable time information and the performance pattern and the correspondence between the jackpot type information and the stop symbols are stored in the ROM 552 of the sub-controller 262 as a table.

In addition, in the sub-controller 262, similarly to the main controller 261, the variation pattern corresponding to the "probability variable jackpot", the variation pattern corresponding to the "normal jackpot", the variation pattern corresponding to the "JUB jackpot" and the "small hit" , with respect to the variation pattern corresponding to the “outside reach”, the variation pattern corresponding to the “reach other than the outside”, and the variation pattern corresponding to the “complete loss”, the value of the game state determination value Xj is “0” to “ 7”, a plurality of corresponding table groups are stored with serial numbers from a predetermined reference address.

That is, when determining the display mode of the effect display device 42, the sub-control device 262 selects a predetermined game state (game state determination value A table corresponding to the values of Xj (“0” to “7”) is selected. At this time, by adding the value of the gaming state determination value Xj to the reference address, specifying the address where the table to be selected is stored is the same as when selecting the variation pattern table.

Therefore, the sub-control device 262 constitutes the display control unit in this embodiment, and according to the winning lottery result by the main control device 261, the variable display of the decorative pattern, which is one specific effect executed by the effect display device 42 Such an effect pattern is determined from among a plurality of effect display modes and executed.

If the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a design command (step SD4111: NO, step SD4112: YES), design setting processing is performed in step SD4116, and this processing ends.

In the design setting process of step SD4116, based on the winning type information stored in the reservation area of the sub-variation reservation area, the design stored in the counter buffer (see FIG. 197) of the RAM 553 described later is displayed on the effect display device It is set in the sub-execution area as a stop symbol to be stopped and displayed.

More specifically, when "BZ1" is set in the symbol command, any one of the 1st, 3rd, 5th, 7th and 9th symbol combinations is determined as the stop symbol. On the other hand, when "BZ2" is set in the symbol command, a combination of any of the 0, 2, 4, 6 and 8 symbols is determined as the stop symbol. Further, when "BZ3" is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols stored in the front-rear out-of-reach ready-to-win symbol buffer is determined as the stop symbol. When "BZ4" is set in the symbol command, a combination of symbols stored in the ready-to-win symbol buffer other than front and rear out is determined as a stop symbol. When "BZ5" is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols stored in the completely lost symbol buffer is determined as the stop symbol. When "BZ6" is set in the symbol command, a combination of symbols "3", "4" and "1" corresponding to the upper, middle and lower symbol display areas of the effect display device 42 is used as the stop symbol. decide.

Now, in step SD4114, it is determined whether or not the value of the game state determination value Xj included in the variation pattern command and the value of the game state determination value Xj stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 553 match. Here, if the two values match, the process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if both values are different, the state error flag is turned on at step SD4115, and at step SD4117, the game state determination value Xj included in the newly received variation pattern command is regarded as an appropriate value. , the value of the game state determination value Xj is stored in the game state information storage area. After that, this process is terminated. By turning on the state error flag, if the two values are different, the error display lamp 104 or the like informs the difference. Of course, the notification means is not limited to the error display lamp 104, and the effect display device 42, the speaker SP, or the like may be used to notify the error.

In recent years, game machines have a backup function in the main control unit, etc., so even if the power supply is cut off due to a power failure, etc., various data such as the game mode (game state) at that time can be stored. Since it can be held, even if the power is cut off during the high probability mode, the player can resume the game in the high probability mode when the power is restored.

However, if the backup function is used, it becomes possible to set the game machine to the high-probability mode from the start of business in the game hall, which is commonly called "morning". Such acts are performed in order to increase the power of attracting customers at the opening of the game hall, but there is a risk that the gambling spirit of the players will be seen as a prank. Various methods are conceivable as the setting method of the above action, but one example is a method of not resetting the gaming machine whose game mode was the high-probability mode at the end of business on the previous day. Further, as in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine is powered on or the like, in the configuration in which the main control device transmits the information regarding the game mode (game state determination value Xj) to the sub control device by a return command or the like, If the cable connector that connects the main control device and the sub control device is removed when the power is turned on, the sub control device cannot grasp the actual game mode set by the main control device, and the default game mode That is, the control related to the "normal mode" is performed.

In a general game machine, when performing effects on display effects means such as a liquid crystal display device, the display mode (for example, background color) is made different between the normal mode and the high probability mode so that the player, etc. This makes it easy to grasp the current game mode.

Also, in general, the sub-controller that controls the liquid crystal display device and the like does not have a backup function, so when the power is turned off, the default game mode ("normal mode") will be controlled.

Therefore, by using this, it is possible to change the display mode of the liquid crystal display device to that of the normal mode even though the actual game mode set by the main controller is the high probability mode. In that case, the current game mode cannot be easily determined just by looking at the liquid crystal display device, etc., and it becomes substantially difficult to confirm this action by a predetermined investigation or the like.

In particular, in a game machine in which a high-probability mode that is difficult to distinguish from a "normal mode" is set, such as the "variable latent probability state" of the present embodiment, the high-probability mode is set to open the game hall by the above action. If it is set from time to time, the actual game mode cannot be determined from the display mode of the liquid crystal display device.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the value of the game state determination value Xj included in the variation pattern command and the value of the game state determination value Xj stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 553 are different. If so, an error notification is given to that effect, and the value of the game state determination value Xj included in the newly received variation pattern command is stored in the game state information storage area. That is, the sub-control device 262 can grasp the appropriate game mode at that time. As a result, even if the action such as "Morning" is performed and the actual game mode set by the main controller 261 is the high probability mode, the presentation mode in the sub-controller 262 is the mode in the normal mode. Even if it is, when the variation pattern command is received, it is notified that the game mode is different, and the effect mode corresponding to the game state determination value Xj included in the variation pattern command is provided. As a result, actions such as the above-mentioned "morning" by the game hall can be suppressed.

Returning to the description of FIG. 196, after step SD3903 or if a negative determination is made in step SD3901, the process proceeds to step SD3904, and whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, the start of the previous normal process. It is determined whether or not a predetermined period of time (1 msec in this example) has passed since. If the predetermined time has already passed, the process proceeds to step SD3905. On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the previous normal process, the process proceeds to step SD3912.

In step SD3905, update processing of various counters is executed. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 uses various counter information when displaying decorative symbols. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 197, a decorative pattern counter CD5 at the time of a big hit, a role product production counter CD8 as a determination counter, and each outlier pattern in the upper pattern display area, the middle pattern display area, and the lower pattern display area. The upper, middle, and lower outlier symbol counters CL, CM, and CR used for setting are used.

The out-of-symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured such that register values are added using an R register (refresh register) in the CPU 551, and as a result, numerical values change randomly. The values of these counters are appropriately stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 553 .

The jackpot decoration pattern counter CD5 is for determining a pattern (jackpot pattern) to be stop-displayed on the effect display device 42 in the case of a jackpot ("probability variable jackpot" or "normal jackpot"). In this embodiment, 5 odd-numbered symbols and 5 even-numbered symbols are set as the jackpot symbols. Therefore, five counter values (0 to 4) are prepared as the jackpot decoration symbol counter CD5. That is, the jackpot decoration symbol counter CD5 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 4, and returns to 0 after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 4). Then, when the symbol command transmitted from the main controller 261 is "BZ1" indicating a combination of odd-numbered jackpot symbols, based on a table (not shown) (a table that associates counter values with decorative symbols), for example, the counter value If is 0, it is ``1'', if it is 1, it is ``3'', if it is 2, it is ``5'', if it is 3, it is ``7''. ), and if it is 4, it is "9" (double eyes), and so on.

Further, when the symbol command is "BZ2" indicating a combination of even-numbered jackpot symbols, based on a table (not shown) (a table that associates counter values with decorative symbols), for example, if the counter value is 0, "0" (Vertical), if 1, "2" (Vertical), if 2, "4" (Vertical), if 3, "6" (Vertical), if 4, " A combination of even-numbered jackpot symbols is determined in such a manner as "8" (double order of).

The jackpot decoration symbol counter CD5 is periodically updated in the counter update process of step SD3905, and is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 553 at the timing when the sub-controller 262 receives the symbol command as described above. In this embodiment, the jackpot decorative pattern counter CD5 is stored in the RAM 553 jackpot decorative pattern counter buffer. can be

The role product effect counter CD8 is for determining whether or not to execute a role product effect (additional effect), which will be described later, and the type thereof. 400 counter values (0 to 399) are prepared for the role product effect counter CD8. That is, the role product effect counter CD8 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 399, and returns to 0 after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 399).

The role product effect counter CD8 is periodically updated in the counter update process of step SD3905 and stored in the role product effect counter buffer of the RAM553. Then, it is taken into consideration in the role product effect setting process of step SD3910, which will be described later.

The upper, middle, and lower losing pattern counters CL, CM, and CR determine each stop pattern (combination of losing patterns) in the upper, middle, and lower pattern display areas when the jackpot lottery results in "losing". Since one of ten decorative patterns is displayed in each row, ten counter values (0 to 9) are prepared for each row. A stopped pattern in the upper symbol display area is determined by the upper/missing symbol counter CL, a stopped symbol in the middle symbol display area is determined by the middle/missing symbol counter CM, and a stopped symbol in the lower symbol display area is determined by the lower/missing symbol counter CR. is determined.

In this embodiment, the values of the counters CL, CM, and CR are randomly updated by using the numerical value of the R register built into the CPU 551 . That is, when each outlier symbol counter CL, CM, CR is updated, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous value, and when the addition result exceeds the upper limit value, 10 is subtracted to determine the current value. be. The outlier symbol counters CL, CM, CR are updated so that the update times do not overlap, and the combinations of the outlier symbol counters CL, CM, CR are the front and back off reach symbol buffers of the RAM 553, the front and back non-outlier reach symbol buffers, and the It is stored in any of the complete missing design buffers.

Here, update processing of each outlier symbol counter CL, CM, CR will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 198, in step SD4001 it is determined whether or not it is time to update the top/outside symbol counter CL, and in step SD4002 it is determined whether or not it is time to update the inside/outside symbol counter CM. It should be noted that the upper, middle, and lower outlier symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured to be updated one by one in one update process. Therefore, when the bottom/outside symbol counter CR has been updated in the previous update process, the determination at step SD4001 is affirmative. Also, when the top/outside symbol counter CL has been updated in the previous update processing, the determination at step SD4002 is affirmative. Then, if it is time to update the top/missing symbol counter CL (YES at step SD4001), the process proceeds to step SD4003 to update the top/missing symbol counter CL. If it is time to update the inside/outside design counter CM (YES at step SD4002), the process proceeds to step SD4004 to update the inside/outside design counter CM. Further, if it is time to update the bottom/missing symbol counter CR (NO in both steps SD4001 and SD4002), the process proceeds to step SD4005 to update the bottom/missing symbol counter CR. In steps SD4003-SD4005 of the outlier pattern counters CL, CM, and CR are updated, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous counter value, and 10 is subtracted when the addition result exceeds the upper limit. , the calculation result is used as the current value of the outlier symbol counters CL, CM, CR.

According to the updating process of CL, CM, and CR, the upper, middle, and lower outlier symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated one by one in one update process, and the updating timing of each counter value overlaps. never. As a result, one set of the lost symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is updated each time the updating process is executed three times.

After that, in step SD4006, the combination of the updated outlier symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is the combination of the ready-to-win symbols (the symbol in the upper symbol display area and the symbol in the lower symbol display area are the same, and the upper and lower symbol display areas and the pattern in the middle pattern display area are different), and if it is a combination of reach patterns (step SD4006 is YES), further in step SD4007, it is a front and rear out reach It is determined whether or not. If the outlier symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are a combination of front and rear outlier reach (front and backer outlier symbols) (YES at step SD4007), proceed to step SD4008, and determine the combination of the outlier symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at that time. It is stored in the front-rear deviating reach pattern buffer of the RAM 553 . If the losing pattern counters CL, CM, CR are a combination of reach (symbols other than front-rear losing) (step SD4007 is NO), the process proceeds to step SD4009, and the losing pattern counters CL, CM, CR at that time. The combination of is stored in the reach pattern buffer of the RAM 553 except for the front and back deviation.

Also, if the combination is other than the ready-to-win pattern (step SD4006 is NO), proceed to step SD4010, determine whether or not the combination of the losing pattern counters CL, CM, CR is a combination of losing patterns, If the combination of outliers (completely outliers) is selected (YES at step SD4010), the process proceeds to step SD4011, and the combination of outliers counters CL, CM, and CR at that time is stored in the completely outliers design buffer of RAM 553. do. If both step SD4006 and step SD4010 are NO, the top, middle and bottom symbols are aligned, that is, it corresponds to a combination of jackpot symbols. This processing ends without storing in the .

In the present embodiment, the chance symbols to be stop-displayed in the case of a "JUB jackpot" have a combination of decorative symbols of one pattern ("3", "4", "1"). There is no need to use counter information for display.

Returning to the description of FIG. 196, at step SD3907, display setting processing for performing various displays on the effect display device 42 is performed. In the display setting process, the effect display device 42 mainly performs a variable display setting process for performing variable display of decorative symbols, a pending display setting process for performing a pending display, and a performance display during a winning state. Display processing during the hit for the purpose is performed.

First, the variable display setting process will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 200, in step SD4301, it is determined whether or not the effect display device 42 is performing variable display by looking at the setting status of the variable display flag. Specifically, when the variable display flag is set (when it is ON), it is considered that the variable display is being performed, and when the variable display flag is canceled (when it is OFF), the variable display is performed. It is considered to be in a stop display corresponding to a stopped state. The variable display flag is turned on when the variable display of the effect display device 42 is started (the start setting process of step SD4113) as described above, and when the variable display of the effect display device 42 is stopped and displayed (step SD4305) is turned off.

If the determination here is affirmative, that is, if it is at the start of fluctuation or during fluctuation, the process proceeds to step SD4302, and if the determination is negative, this processing ends.

In step SD4302, a change display timer subtraction process is performed. Each time this process is performed, the value of the display timer is decremented by 4 msec. For example, if the variable time is 10 seconds (10000 msec), "2500" is set for the variable display timer, and 1 is subtracted every 4 msec.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step SD4303, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed by considering the value of the fluctuation display timer after the subtraction. At this time, an affirmative determination is made in step SD4303 when the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the fluctuation display timer becomes "0".

When a negative determination is made in step SD4303, in step SD4304, variation execution processing for performing variation display of the effect display device 42 is performed, and this processing ends.

In this variation execution process, for example, based on various information stored in the execution area of the sub-variation reservation area of the RAM 553, various calculation processes such as generating a display command to be output to the display control device 45 and output setting of the command are performed. .

As a result, the display control device 45 performs the drawing process according to the command from the sub-control device 262 and starts the variable display of the pattern on the effect display device 42 . Then, once the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 261, until the variation time of the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern command elapses (the value of the variation display timer set in the start setting process of step SD4113 is Until it becomes "0"), the variable display of the pattern is continued under the cooperation of the sub-control device 262 and the display control device 45 .

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SD4303, that is, if it is determined that the value of the variable display timer is "0", in step SD4305 the effect display device 42 performs a stop display setting for performing a stop display. and terminate this process. In the stop display setting, the variable display flag is cleared (turned off), and a stop command for instructing the display control device 45 to stop the variable display in the effect display device 42 is set.

In addition, in the variation execution process of step SD4304, an effect mode switching setting process for performing the display mode in the effect display device 42 in a mode (effect mode) corresponding to the type of the game state is also performed.

Production mode in the present embodiment, depending on the game state (value of the game state determination value Xj), "normal mode" in which the "high support mode" is not provided, "high support mode" is provided. ``Chance mode'' and ``Until the next time/high support mode'', whose duration is unknown, and ``Gold mode'' that explicitly informs the player set to switch between

More specifically, when the game state determination value Xj stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 553 is "0", that is, when the "low probability mode" and the "low support mode" are provided, The effect mode in the effect display device 42 is set to "normal mode" (see FIG. 209).

In addition, when the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "3", that is, after the "high support mode" for a predetermined period ends, the state in which the "high probability mode" and the "low support mode" are given is a so-called Since it is in the "potential state", even in such a case, the effect mode in the effect display device 42 is set to the "normal mode" in order to make the state superficially the same as in the case of the "normal state".

When the game state determination value Xj stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 553 is "1", "2", "4", "5" or "7", that is, "20 times/high support mode" , “30 times, high support mode”, “40 times, high support mode”, “50 times, high support mode”, “30 times, high support mode S”, “until the next time, high support mode” non-notification production Alternatively, the effect mode in the effect display device 42 is set to the "chance mode" during the period of the "support continuation effect" to be described later (see FIG. 211).

When the value of the game state determination value Xj stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 553 is "6", that is, in the state where "until the next time, high support mode" is given (excluding the non-notification effect period) , the effect mode in the effect display device 42 is set to "gold mode" (see FIG. 212).

Next, the pending display setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. First, in step SD4501, among the sub-fluctuation reservation areas, the winning type information stored in the reservation first to fourth areas of the second sub-variation reservation area corresponding to the lower start winning opening 33YB is information corresponding to the small winning (small hit information).

If a negative determination is made here, that is, if the small hit information is not included, normal pending display update processing is performed in step SD4502. As shown in FIG. 209, in the normal reserved display, in the first reserved display region W3a and the second reserved display region W3b, reserved images TA1 to four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas) corresponding to TA4, TB1 to TB4 are displayed. Normally, as each of the holding images TA1 to TA4 and TB1 to TB4, a "holding lamp image" imitating a circular holding lamp is displayed.

Then, in the normal pending display update process of step SD4502, according to the increase or decrease in the number of pending in the sub-variation pending area, the display update to increase or decrease the number of pending images TA1 to TA4, TB1 to TB4 displayed in the lighting mode or the extinguished mode processing will be performed.

On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step SD4501, that is, if the small hit information is included in any of the holding first to fourth areas of the second sub-variation holding area, in step SD4503, the holding display change process and then terminate this process.

By performing the pending display change process of step SD4503, among the four pending images TB1 to TB4 displayed in the second pending display area W3b, of the pending images TB1 to TB4 corresponding to the pending area containing the small hit information One of them replaces the "holding lamp image" in the normal holding display with the "star image". For example, in the example shown in FIG. 214, the third reserved image TB3 is changed to a "star image".

Next, the winning display process performed in the display setting process of step SD3907 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step SD4701, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received from the main controller 261 to tell the start of the winning state (big winning state or small winning state).

When an affirmative determination is made in step SD4701, in step SD4702, an initial value corresponding to each type of winning is set for a round grasping counter for grasping the number of remaining rounds, based on the winning type information included in the opening command. set. For example, in the case of “16R probability variable jackpot A”, “16” indicating 16 times is set as the initial value, and in the case of “JUB jackpot”, 5 times of “short opening” and 15 times of “long opening” is set as the initial value, and "5" indicating 5 times is set as the initial value in the case of a "minor win".

After that, in step SD4703, which is the notifying means, the setting of the opening effect (setting of the image of the effect display device 42, the sound of the speaker SP, and the lighting mode of various lamps) is performed, and then this processing is finished.

The sub-control device 262 is provided with a table or the like that stores the correspondence between the win type, the number of remaining rounds, and various effects during the win state. Choose and do it. In other words, the sub-control device 262 determines the result of various lotteries by the main control device 261 (for example, the type of winning such as a variable probability jackpot or a normal jackpot) and the gaming state at the time of winning (for example, whether it is a high support mode or a low support mode). mode type), the number of remaining rounds, etc., the table is referred to, and the contents of the opening performance as the specific performance executed by the performance display device 42 and the round performance during the jackpot are displayed in one of a plurality of performance display modes. Decide and execute.

If a negative determination is made in step SD4701, it is determined in step SD4705 whether or not a round command has been received. When an affirmative determination is made in step SD4705, in step SD4706, which is an informing means, effect setting during the round such as display of the number of rounds is performed, and then this processing ends.

Here, in each round of "long opening", the effect is set to be 30 seconds at the maximum for each round, while in each round of "short opening", the specified opening time of the opening and closing shutter 32b is set to 0.4 seconds. Since it is short, a series of continuous effect settings are performed over a plurality of round periods (including an interval period, which will be described later). Of course, even in the case of "short opening", the configuration may be such that individual effect setting is performed for each round. In addition, even in the case of "long open", a series of effect setting may be performed continuously over a plurality of round periods (including an interval period described later). In other words, the open/close shutter 32b is opened and closed during the execution of the jackpot effect over a plurality of round periods from the start of the first round (end of the opening effect) to the end of the final round (start of the ending effect). may be configured to open and close multiple times.

If a negative determination is made in step SD4705, it is determined in step SD4707 whether or not an interval command has been received. If the determination in step SD4707 is affirmative, the round grasp counter is decremented by 1 in step SD4708, and the effect during the interval is set in step SD4709, after which this process ends.

Here, in the interval period between each round of "long opening", the effect setting of 3 seconds is performed for each interval, while in the interval period of each round of "short opening", a plurality of rounds are performed as described above. A series of production settings that are continuous with the production are performed.

If a negative determination is made in step SD4707, it is determined in step SD4710 whether or not an ending command has been received. When an affirmative determination is made at step SD4710, the round grasp counter is decremented by 1 at step SD4711, the ending effect is set at step SD4712, and this process ends. Incidentally, in the ending effect setting process, one ending effect pattern may be selected from a plurality of ending effect patterns and executed. Of course, regardless of whether the first ending display control as the first specific control is executed or the second ending display control as the second specific control is executed, these is performed in a state where the opening/closing shutter 32b is positioned at the closing position for closing the big winning opening 32a.

When a negative determination is made in step SD4710, it is determined whether or not a hit end command (big hit end command or small hit end command) is received in step SD4713. When an affirmative determination is made in step SD4713, in step SD4714, a winning display ending process for ending the ending display is performed, and this process ends. If a negative determination is made in step SD4713, this processing ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 196, in the lamp setting process of step SD3908, the lighting pattern of lamps/electrical decorations is set in order to synchronize with the display effect performed by the effect display device 42. FIG.

In the sound setting process of step SD3909, the output pattern of the speaker SP is set in order to synchronize with the display effect performed by the effect display device 42. FIG. Also, when a command related to sound such as notification of error occurrence is transmitted from the main controller 261, settings for performing these controls are also performed in step SD3909.

At step SD3910, a role product effect setting process is executed. In the role product performance setting process, various settings related to the role product performance using the upper performance role product unit 761 are performed. Note that the character object effect setting process is a process that is performed as an additional effect when a support continuation effect (roulette effect), which will be described later, is performed, and is executed only when the support continuation effect (roulette effect) is executed. processing. Details of the role product effect setting process in step SD3910 will be described later.

In step SD3911, other processing such as control setting of customer waiting effect (for example, demo screen display set to be displayed after a predetermined time has passed while the variable display of the effect display device 42 is not being performed) is performed. .

In step SD3912, an external output process is executed to transmit control signals to each device based on the settings in steps SD3905 to SD3911. For example, a display command is transmitted to the display control device 45 when the effect display device 42 performs a variable display of decorative symbols. In addition, when executing the role product production, it outputs various control signals to the role product control board of the upper production role product unit 761 or the like.

After the processing of steps SD3905 to SD3912, which is performed every 1 msec, is executed, or if a negative determination is made in step SD3904, the process proceeds to step SD3913 to determine whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 553. determine whether Note that the power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 261 .

If the power failure occurrence information is not stored, the process advances to step SD3914 to determine whether or not the RAM 553 has been destroyed. If the RAM 553 is not destroyed here, the process returns to step SD3901 and the normal process is repeated. On the other hand, if the RAM 553 has been destroyed, the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step SD3913 that information on occurrence of power failure is stored, power failure processing is executed in step SD3915. In the power-off processing, generation of interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased. After executing the power-off process, the process loops infinitely.

Next, the display mode and the like on the display section 42a of the effect display device 42 will be described together with the flow of the game played by the player.

In the display section 42a of the effect display device 42, in the normal state (when the value of the game state determination value Xj is "0"), a variable display area W1 consisting of upper, middle and lower three pattern display areas is set. (See FIG. 209). In addition, an instruction display area W2 for instructing (recommending) the shooting mode of the game ball to the player is set below the variable display area W1, and the pending number of the variable display is displayed further below it. A reserved display area W3 is set.

The reservation display area W3 is set corresponding to the sub-variation reservation area. That is, the reservation display area W3 is divided into a first reservation display area W3a and a second reservation display area W3b corresponding to the first sub-variation reservation area and the second sub-variation reservation area. The reserved images TA1 to TA4 and TB1 to TB4 corresponding to four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area) are displayed in the reserved display areas W3a and W3b (see FIG. 209).

The reserved images TA1 to TA4 and TB1 to TB4 are normally displayed in a light-off state (see the hatched portion) at the normal time (when not on hold), and when the variable display is held in a predetermined reserved area, the Reservation images TA1 to TA4 and TB1 to TB4 corresponding to the reservation area are switched and displayed in the lighting mode (see the white portion).

In the example shown in FIG. 209, the first reserved image TA1 and the second reserved image TA2 of the first reserved display area W3a are displayed in a lighting mode, and the remaining reserved images TA3, TA4, TB1 to TB4 are displayed in a lighting mode. state is shown. That is, the variable display is reserved in the first reserved area and the second reserved area of the first sub-variation reserved area, and the number of reservations of the current variable display is "2" related to the upper start winning opening 33YA. It is shown.

In the normal state, the instruction display area W2 displays "←" to encourage the player to shoot a game ball toward the left side area of the variable display unit 35 (this action is hereinafter referred to as "left hitting"). left-handed” is displayed. In accordance with this, the player plays the game by "playing left".

When left-handed, most of the game balls are guided toward the upper start winning opening 33YA located below the variable display device unit 35 by the nail or the like. Among them, how many game balls will enter the upper start winning opening 33YA.

In this embodiment, the through gate 34 that triggers the opening of the lower start winning opening 33YB (opening/closing accessory 37Y) flows down the right side area of the variable display unit 35, that is, the left side area of the variable display unit 35. Since the game ball is placed at a position where it cannot be reached, when the player continues to "hit left", the opening/closing accessory 37Y is not opened, and the game ball enters the lower start winning opening 33YB. never.

In other words, in the normal state, the game is set so that the game can be played with a greater advantage if the game is played with a "left shot".

When the game ball enters the upper start winning opening 33YA, in the variable display area W1 of the effect display device 42, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are variably displayed for each of the symbol display areas. In this embodiment, decorative patterns Z with numbers "1" to "9" are displayed. Various decorative patterns Z are scrolled and variably displayed from right to left with periodicity in ascending or descending numerical order, thereby forming a series of pattern rows.

In this case, in the upper design display area, various decorative designs Z are displayed in descending order (in decreasing order of attached numbers), and in the middle design display area and lower design display area, various decorative designs Z are similarly displayed in ascending order (applied displayed in ascending order). Then, when a predetermined time has passed, the variable display stops in the order of the upper design display area→the lower design display area→the middle design display area, and the decorative design Z is stopped and displayed in each design display area.

When a big winning lottery is won based on the winning of the game ball into the upper start winning opening 33YA, the decoration pattern Z of the big winning combination is stop-displayed on the predetermined big winning line through the ready-to-win state. In the normal state of the present embodiment, the jackpot line is composed of left, middle and right vertical lines and two diagonal lines (referred to as 5 lines). Therefore, in the upper, middle, and lower pattern display areas, when three decorative patterns Z of a combination of big wins are stopped and displayed side by side on any one of the five lines, the occurrence of a big win state is determined.

When a big win state occurs, the opening/closing shutter 32b of the variable prize winning device 32 is opened to allow the game ball to enter the big prize winning port 32a, and a predetermined big win effect is displayed on the display part 42a of the effect display device 42. is started. Here, the number of jackpot rounds may be displayed.

However, in this embodiment, since the variable winning device 32 is arranged in the right side area of the variable display unit 35 (the position where the game ball flowing down the left side area of the variable display unit 35 cannot reach), If the player continues to "hit left", the variable winning device 32 cannot win the game ball. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 210, when the big win effect is started, an action of the player shooting a game ball toward the right side area of the variable display unit 35 (this action will be hereinafter referred to as , "Right-handed") is displayed as "Right-handed →". Accordingly, the player performs a jackpot game by switching from ``left hitting'' to ``right hitting'' so that the game ball passes above the variable display device unit 35 and heads toward the right side area of the variable display device unit 35. .

Here, when the game ball is "right-handed", most of the game balls are guided toward the variable winning device 32 by the nail or the like, and win the variable winning device 32.例文帳に追加This allows the player to acquire more game balls.

On the other hand, game balls that do not enter the variable winning device 32 and pass through the variable winning device 32 flow down toward the upper starting winning port 33YA or the lower starting winning port 33YB by the nail or the like.

In addition, in the right side area of the variable display device unit 35, a through gate 34 is provided that triggers the opening of the lower starting prize opening 33YB (opening/closing accessory 37Y) on the way down to the variable prize winning device 32. of game balls pass through the through gate 34 .

Here, when the game ball wins the open lottery that is performed due to passing through the through gate 34, the opening/closing accessory 37Y is opened, and the game ball can enter the lower start winning opening 33YB. It becomes possible.

After the end of the jackpot, during the period when the special display devices 43L and 43R (the performance display device 42) perform the variable display for a predetermined number of times, or until the next jackpot state occurs, the winning support related to the opening/closing accessory 37Y. "High support mode" is given as a mode.

Along with this, in the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42, a predetermined support effect (a "chance mode" effect or a "gold mode" effect) relating to the "high support mode" is performed, and the variable display area W1 is reduced. Is displayed. In the reduced variable display area W1, the upper, middle, and lower pattern display areas are switched to the left, middle, and right pattern display areas, and the number of jackpot lines is one.

Further, during the support effect, a support count display area W4 is set in the display section 42a of the effect display device 42 (see FIGS. 211 and 212). The support number display area W4 displays the number of support that is apparently determined to be given. Therefore, for example, even if the number of support times of "50 times" has been confirmed in the internal lottery, "20 times" is initially displayed for presentation.

More specifically, winning "16R normal jackpot B" or "4R normal jackpot B", "20 times high support mode", "30 times high support mode", "40 times high support mode" or When "50 times/high support mode" is provided, that is, when the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "1", "20 times" is initially displayed in the support times display area W4. Each time the variable display is performed, the value is decremented by one.

Similarly, winning "16R probability variable jackpot B" or "4R probability variable jackpot B", "20 times / high support mode", "30 times / high support mode", "40 times / high support mode" or "50 times When "high support mode" is provided, that is, when the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "4", "20 times" is initially displayed in the number of times of support display area W4. Each time the variable display is performed, the value is decremented by one.

On the other hand, when "16R normal jackpot A" or "4R normal jackpot A" is won and "30 times/high support mode S" is given, that is, the game state determination value Xj is "2" or "5". (except Xj=“5” in the case of the non-notification effect), “30 times” is initially displayed in the support number display area W4. Each time the variable display is performed, the value is decremented by one.

Also, if you win the "16R probability variable jackpot A", "4R probability variable jackpot A" or "JUB jackpot" and the "until the next time / high support mode" is given, that is, the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is " 6”, “Until the next time” is displayed in the support count display area W4 from the beginning. However, when the non-notification effect is performed, "30 times" is initially displayed in the support number display area W4. Each time the variable display is performed, the value is decremented by one.

As described above, while the "high support mode" is provided, the game ball is likely to enter the lower start winning port 33YB. In order to obtain an opportunity to release the object 37Y, it is preferable to continuously perform the “right stroke”. In other words, during the "high support mode", it is set so that the game can be played more advantageously by playing the game with the "right hand". Therefore, in the instruction display area W2 of the effect display device 42 in the "high support mode", "Right Hit" is displayed to recommend "Right Hit" to the player.

In the present embodiment, when the "high support mode" changes in general times (when the number of times display in the support times display area W4 does not become the end value "1 time"), that is, the value of the game state determination value Xj is "1", "2", "4", and "5", the variation time is set to "1 second" by the variation pattern table selected based on each gaming state determination value Xj (at the time of the jackpot except for). Then, in the display section 42a of the effect display device 42 during the support effect, a display effect corresponding to this is determined by the sub-control device 262 and executed.

Also, when the "high support mode" fluctuates for a specific number of times (when the number of times display in the support number display area W4 changes to the end value "1 time", that is, after the jackpot ends, "20th time", "30th time" , "40th time" or "50th time"), that is, when the value of the game state determination value Xj is "7", is selected based on the value "7" of the game state determination value Xj. It is set to "25 seconds" by the fluctuation pattern table (excluding the time of the big hit). Then, in the display section 42a of the effect display device 42 during the support effect, a display effect corresponding to this is determined by the sub-control device 262 and executed.

In the display section 42a of the effect display device 42 at the time of the specific times fluctuation (variation of 25 seconds), there is a continuous support effect that excites the player's interest, such as determining by lottery whether or not the "high support mode" is to be continued. done.

For example, in the present embodiment, a roulette effect is performed as the display effect (support continuation effect) at the time when the specific times change. In the roulette effect, as shown in FIG. 213, a roulette pattern TR is displayed. The roulette pattern TR includes "end" indicating that the number of supports ends here, "+10 times" indicating that the number of supports will be added by 10 times, and "next time" indicating that the number of supports will continue until the next big win. "until" is described.

In the roulette effect, the roulette pattern TR rotates and stops at the position indicated by the arrow TY to determine the subsequent game state.

Here, which item to stop depends on the number of grants of "high support mode" determined at the time of the jackpot lottery ("20 times", "30 times", "40 times", "50 times" or "until the next time ”) and the number of support grants (the value of the support number counter) at that time. Then, the determined item is displayed in the support count display area W4.

For example, if you win "16R normal jackpot B" with "50 times/high support mode", and after initially displaying "20 times" in the support count display area W4, the roulette effect is reached, the upper limit is not "until the next time", and the number of times support is left is "30 times", so the item "+10 times" is selected.

Also, for example, if you win the "4R normal jackpot A" with "30 times/high support mode" and after "30 times" is initially displayed in the support number display area W4, the roulette effect is reached, Since the upper limit is not "until the next time" and there is no remaining number of support grants, the item "end" is selected.

Also, for example, "16R probability variable jackpot A" with "until next time/high support mode" is won, non-notification effect is performed (game state determination value Xj becomes "5"), and support number display area W4 After "30 times" is initially displayed, when the roulette effect is reached, the upper limit is "until the next time", so the item "until the next time" is selected.

Now, when the "high support mode" ends and returns to the "low support mode", the display mode on the display section 42a of the effect display device 42 returns to the same state as the normal state (see FIG. 209). Therefore, the instruction display area W2 of the display section 42a displays "←left strike".

However, in this embodiment, if a small hit is won during the "high support mode" and the small hit information is stored in one of the reserved areas of the second sub-fluctuation reserved area related to the lower start winning opening 33YB , among the reserved images TB1 to TB4 displayed in the second reserved display area W3b, the display mode of the reserved images TB1 to TB4 corresponding to the reserved area storing the small winning information is an image of a form different from the normal form. is changed (see FIG. 214). In the example shown in FIG. 214, the third reserved image TB3 is changed to a "star image". In the present embodiment, along with this, "Right hit →" is displayed in the instruction display area W2.

For this reason, even when the "high support mode" ends and the "low support mode" is returned to, if the small win information is stored in the holding area, the above display is performed and the small win is given to the player. It is suggested that it occurs.

As described above, since the opening time of the variable winning device 32 in the small winning state is extremely short, switching from the "left hitting" state to the "right hitting" after the occurrence of the small winning will not be in time, and the variable winning device In order to win the game ball to 32, it is necessary to "right hit" in advance. In this regard, in the present embodiment, the player can grasp that a small win will occur based on the suggestion of the small win, so that the player can prepare in advance and the chances of missing a small win are reduced.

Incidentally, as described above, when the support continuation effect (roulette effect) is performed, the accessory effect using the upper effect accessory unit 761 may be performed as an additional effect.

Here, the role product effect setting processing in step SD3910 will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 221 and 222. FIG.

First, in step SD6001, it is determined whether or not the current variable round is the round for execution of the roulette effect (support continuation effect), taking into account the value of the gaming state determination value Xj.

Here, if a negative determination is made, that is, if the roulette effect is not to be executed, the value of the effect state flag JF, which will be described later, is reset to "0" in step SD6002, and this processing ends.

The effect state flag JF is determination information for determining the effect state of the additional effect (mainly the performance using the upper effect accessory unit 761).

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SD6001, that is, if the current variable round is a roulette performance execution round, the process proceeds to step SD6003.

In step SD6003, the value of the effect state flag JF is taken into consideration to determine whether or not the present stage is before the start of the additional effect (JF=0). Here, if a negative determination is made, ie after the start of the additional effect (JF≧1), the process proceeds to step SD6006.

On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step SD6003, that is, when the stage is before the start of the additional effect, the process proceeds to step SD6004.

In step SD6004, based on the value of the role product performance counter CD8 stored in the role product performance counter buffer of the RAM 553, performance determination processing is performed to determine whether or not the performance of the role product performance and its type are determined.

The correspondence relationship between the value of the character product effect counter CD8 and whether or not the character product effect is executed and its type is stored in the ROM 552 of the sub-control device 262 as a character product effect pattern determination table.

In the present embodiment, in the roulette effect of the effect display device 42, a plurality of accessory effect pattern determination tables are set corresponding to the confirmed display item of the roulette pattern TR that finally stops at the position indicated by the arrow TY. .

Specifically, "End" indicates that the support count ends here, "+10 times" indicates that the support count will be added to the next 10 times, and "Until the next time" indicates that the support count will continue until the next jackpot. corresponding to the three fixed display items such as "end" time, character effect pattern determination table, "+10 times" time, character effect pattern determination table, "until next time" time, character effect pattern determination table. There are 3 tables available.

In each table, the rate at which various performance patterns are selected differs depending on whether it corresponds to "end", "+10 times" or "until the next time". Then, if the number of times of support is continued, and if it corresponds to "until the next time", the presence or absence of the execution of the character production, and furthermore the development production pattern described later, than the case of "end" Various tables are configured so that the rate at which the

For example, when the fixed display item in the roulette effect is "end", the "at the time of 'end'/accessory effect pattern determination table" as shown in FIG. 223(a) is referred to. In this case, when the value of the character effect counter CD8 is 0 to 249, "no character effect" is selected and no character effect is performed as an additional effect.

On the other hand, when the value of the character effect counter CD8 is 250 to 399, "with character effect" is selected, and the character effect is executed as an additional effect. Out of these, when CD8=250 to 329, the "non-development pattern" character effect is performed, and when CD8=330 to 379, the "first development pattern" character effect is performed. In the case of 380-399, the "second development pattern" performance is executed. The details of these various character effects will be described later.

Further, when the fixed display item in the roulette effect is "until the next time", the "until the next time" time/accessory effect pattern determination table as shown in FIG. 223(b) is referred to. In this case, when the value of the character object effect counter CD8 is 0 to 9, "No character effect" is selected, and no character effect is performed as an additional effect.

On the other hand, when the value of the character effect counter CD8 is 10 to 399, "with character effect" is selected, and the character effect is executed as an additional effect. Out of these, when CD8=10 to 199, the "non-development pattern" character effect is performed, and when CD8=200 to 299, the "first development pattern" character effect is performed. In the case of 300 to 399, the "second development pattern" performance is executed.

It should be noted that the specific contents of the "+10 times" character effect pattern determination table" referred to when the fixed display item in the roulette effect is "+10 times" are not shown in the drawings, but are described above. Tables having contents different from those of the 'end' time/accessory effect pattern determination table' and the 'until the next time' time/accessory effect pattern determination table' are set.

Here, when the above "no character effect" is selected, the value of the character effect pattern flag PF is set to "0". The role product effect pattern flag PF is discrimination information for discriminating the role product effect pattern.

Similarly, when the character effect of "no development pattern (no rotation effect)" is selected, the value of the character effect pattern flag PF is set to "1". When the "first development pattern (low speed rotation)" character effect is selected, the value of the character effect pattern flag PF is set to "2". When the "second development pattern (high-speed rotation)" character effect is selected, the value of the character effect pattern flag PF is set to "3".

Therefore, when performing the effect determination process of step SD6004, the sub-control device 262 first selects a predetermined display item from the plurality of accessory effect pattern determination tables based on the information related to the confirmed display items in the roulette effect. A role product production pattern determination table corresponding to the confirmed display item is selected, and a role product production pattern is determined based on the selected table. At this time, the determined result is stored in a predetermined storage area within the RAM 553 .

In other words, in the present embodiment, the sub-control device 262 as the movable control unit controls the movable accessory 811 as the movable body (rotating body 820 ) is determined from among a plurality of movable modes and executed.

After the start request setting process is performed in the following step SD6005, this process ends.

In the start request setting process of step SD6005, as the value of the effect state flag JF, "1" is set to indicate that it is during the start request period of the character effect effect, and the value of the operation valid timer ST is set to a predetermined value (this 5 seconds in the embodiment).

The operation valid timer ST is a timer for measuring the operation valid period of the effect button 125. FIG.

Further, in this start request setting process, the display setting process for performing the start request display effect on the display section 42a of the effect display device 42 is performed.

By performing such display setting processing, in addition to the roulette effect, characters such as "press the button" are displayed on the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42. A display effect prompting an operation is executed.

Now, in step SD6006 to which a negative determination is made in step SD6003, the value of the effect state flag JF is considered, and whether or not it is currently in the period requesting the start of the character effect (JF=1) is determined. judge. Here, if a negative determination is made, that is, if it is not during the start request period of the character object presentation (JF≧2), the process proceeds to step SD6012.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SD6006, that is, if it is currently in the period of requesting the start of the character production, it is determined in step SD6007 whether or not the value of the operation valid timer ST is "0". do.

Here, if the determination is affirmative, that is, if the value of the operation valid timer ST is "0", the player does not press the production button 125 during the start request period of the role product production, and the operation valid period has passed, the process proceeds to step SD6008.

In step SD6008, the value of the effect state flag JF is set to "9", which means that the character effect will not progress any further, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SD6007, that is, if the value of the operation validity timer ST is not "0", the process proceeds to step SD6009.

In step SD6009, the value of the button operation flag BF is taken into account to determine whether or not the player presses the production button 125 (BF=1) during the start request period of the role product production (during the operation valid period). judge.

The button operation flag BF is determination information for determining whether or not the effect button 125 has been pressed during the valid period of operation. , and the value is maintained at "0" while no pressing operation is performed.

If a negative determination is made in step SD6009, that is, if the effect button 125 has not been pressed, the process ends. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made, that is, when the effect button 125 is pressed, effect pattern setting processing is performed in step SD6010.

In the effect pattern setting process of step SD6010, a value corresponding to the effect pattern selected in the effect determination process of step SD6004 is set as the value of the effect state flag JF.

Specifically, in consideration of the value of the character effect pattern flag PF, when "no character effect" is selected, the value of the effect state flag JF is set to "2". On the other hand, when "with character effect (non-development pattern, first development pattern, second development pattern)" is selected, the value of the effect state flag JF is set to "3".

After that, in step SD6011, the value of the button operation flag BF is reset to "0", and this processing ends.

Now, in step SD6012 to which a negative determination is made in step SD6006, the value of the effect state flag JF is considered, and whether or not the effect pattern of the additional effect is "no character effect (JF=2)". judge.

Here, when an affirmative determination is made, that is, when the effect pattern is "no character effect", notification setting processing is performed in step SD6013.

By performing the notification setting process, the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 displays characters such as "Unfortunately it doesn't move", for example, to notify that the character effect will not be performed. executed.

After that, in step SD6014, the value of the effect state flag JF is set to "9", which means that the character effect will not progress any more, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step SD6012, the process proceeds to step SD6015, and it is determined whether or not the value of the effect state flag JF is "3".

If an affirmative determination is made here, the effect pattern is "with a character object effect (JF=3)", but it is considered that a predetermined operating condition, which is the stage before the start of the character object-driven effect, is satisfied, and step In SD6016, character object appearance setting processing is performed, and this processing ends.

In the present embodiment, the presentation mode at the time of appearance of the character (the initial stage of presentation after the execution of the performance of the role is started and before the development of the presentation) is "non-development pattern (PF=1)", "first development pattern (PF=2)” or “second development pattern (PF=3)” are the same.

Of course, not limited to this, depending on which one of "no development pattern (PF = 1)", "first development pattern (PF = 2)", or "second development pattern (PF = 3)" is set, A configuration may be adopted in which the mode of presentation (operation time, etc.) at the time of character appearance is different.

Here, the character object appearance setting processing in step SD6016 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. First, in step SD8001, sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the value of appearing operation flag MF is "1".

It should be noted that the appearing operation flag MF is state determination information for determining whether or not the movable accessory 811 is in the appearing operation. is set to "1" (turned on), and the value is set to "0" (turned off) when the movable accessory 811 is not appearing. The appearance motion of the movable accessory 811 corresponds to a series of specific motions of the movable object in this embodiment.

If a negative determination is made in step SD8001, the process proceeds to step SD8002, where the role object appearance operation control table (see FIG. 225) as specific information is read from the ROM 552 in one process, and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 553 once. Set by processing. In other words, a series of operations can be executed with the information read and set in one process.

As shown in FIG. 225, in the role object appearance operation control table, a plurality of control process data defining the operation process of the appearance operation of the movable role object 811 (motor control of the vertical drive motor 1815), etc. are stored in accordance with the execution order. stored in chronological order.

Each control process data includes, for example, data defining an operation process for driving and controlling the vertical drive mechanism 1812 (vertical drive motor 1815) of the upper production accessory unit 761 to lower or raise the movable accessory 811. etc., the content of the control processing executed by the sub-controller 262 is defined.

For example, the control process data related to drive control of the vertical drive motor 1815 includes, as setting information, the rotation direction of the vertical drive motor 1815 (moving direction of the movable accessory 811), the rotational speed of the vertical drive motor 1815 (movable role movement speed of the object 811), excitation time of the vertical drive motor 1815 (operation time of the movable accessory 811), de-excitation time of the vertical drive motor 1815 (stop time of the movable accessory 811), etc. are defined.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there are game machines that allow a movable body to perform a plurality of types of movable modes. In the case of operating the movable body in one movable mode, if the corresponding motion data is read in advance for each motion in one movable mode, depending on the movable mode, it is necessary to read a huge number of times, resulting in poor control. It's a big burden. In order to solve this problem, setting motion data corresponding to a series of motions and sequentially executing the sequence of motions based on the motion data reduces the control load, but terminates the sequence of motions in the middle. Then, when the next operation is to be executed, a suitable end determination of the series of operations is required.

As an example, when the movable accessory 811 as a movable body is caused to perform a series of actions, the sub-control device 262 creates an action control table (action process data group) that defines various action processes related to the series of actions in chronological order. ) is read out from the ROM 552 and set in the RAM 553, the operation process data are sequentially read out from the operation control table, and a series of operation control of the movable accessory 811 is executed.

For example, when a role object appearance effect is executed based on the conventional action control table for role object appearance effect shown in FIG. After performing a predetermined operation (first operation) returning to the reference position H0 twice, performing a predetermined operation (second operation) of descending from the reference position H0 to the second height position H2 and returning to the reference position H0 again (second operation) twice, Furthermore, after that, a series of operations are performed in which a predetermined operation (third operation) of descending from the reference position H0 to the third height position H3 and returning to the reference position H0 is performed twice.

Then, after the series of operations described above, the process proceeds to the next step. For example, if the condition for developing the character performance is not established, the character performance is terminated. On the other hand, when the development condition for the character performance is satisfied, the sub-control device 262 newly reads from the ROM 552 an operation control table for the development performance, which defines various operational processes to be executed next in chronological order, and sets it in the RAM 553. After that, the motion process data is sequentially read out from the motion control table, and the development effect of the movable accessory is executed.

However, when the conditions for ending the series of actions are satisfied in the middle of the series of actions of the movable accessory 811, it is desirable to terminate the series of actions favorably.

For example, if the player operates the production button 125 during the performance of the appearance of the role object, if the player attempts to perform an effect in which the performance of the role product moves to the next stage (development or end), the player operates the production button 125. Even if the operation determination flag is set to ON at the timing, in the conventional configuration, the flag determination process is executed only after all the series of motion processes defined in the motion control table for character object appearance are completed. , and depending on the operation timing, after the player operates the production button 125, there is a possibility that the performance of the role product does not move to the next stage immediately.

As a result, there is a risk that the performance will be prolonged and the interest of the player will decrease.

Further, in a conventional motion control table without an end determination process in the middle, as shown in FIG. 229, it is difficult to divert the motion control table to the motion control of a series of a plurality of specific motions.

In order to solve the above problem, for example, the conventional operation control table shown in FIG. and a third operation control table defining the operation process of the third operation for the above two times), and set these separately as individual operation control. Although it is conceivable that such a configuration is adopted, the frequency of execution of the read processing of each table and the like increases, and there is a risk that the control load will increase significantly.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as an example, when the movable accessory 811 as a movable body is caused to perform a series of actions, the sub-control device 262 defines various action processes related to the series of actions in chronological order. The character object appearance operation control table (see FIG. 225) is read from the ROM 552 in one process and set in a predetermined area of the RAM 553 in one process.

As a result, for example, compared to a configuration in which corresponding operation process data is read in advance for each operation process in a series of operations, it is possible to reduce the control load without requiring a huge number of reading processes.

Furthermore, based on the role object appearance operation control table read and set in one process as described above, during the execution of the role object appearance operation, the movable accessory 811 repeats the up-and-down motion multiple times. Each time the controller returns to the reference position H0, a process of determining whether or not the conditions for ending the role object appearance action are satisfied is executed, and the next action is started from the reference position H0. .

In other words, even during execution of the role product appearing motion, if the conditions for ending the role product appearing motion are satisfied, the role product appearing motion is promptly terminated and the next motion is performed. can be done. On the other hand, if the end condition is not satisfied, the character object appearing motion can be continued.

Especially in this embodiment, the timing for determining whether or not the end condition for the role object appearance action is satisfied is the timing when the movable role object 811 returns to the reference position H0. , the movable accessory 811 can be quickly returned to the initial state or moved to the next operation.

As a result, the movable accessory 811 can be suitably controlled, and the performance is not delayed, thereby improving the interest of the player.

Furthermore, the role object appearance action control table shown in FIG. 225 and the like facilitates a configuration in which the action control table is repeatedly referred to a plurality of times and a series of specific actions defined in the action control table are repeatedly executed in multiple sets. can be realized. As a result, one motion control table can be used for motion control of a series of a plurality of specific motions, and versatility can be enhanced. As a result, it is possible to reduce the amount of data to be stored in advance in storage means such as ROM, and to effectively utilize storage means such as ROM, which has a limited storage capacity.

In addition, according to the present embodiment, for example, by using a plurality of tables set by subdividing the role object appearance operation control table related to the role object appearance operation of the movable accessory 811, the operation control related to the plurality of tables can be performed. It is possible to reduce the execution frequency of the table reading process and the like, and reduce the control load, compared to a configuration in which the processes are executed sequentially.

Following step SD8002, the value of the appearing action flag MF is set to "1" (turned on) at step SD8003, the value of the button operation flag BF is reset to "0" at step SD8004, and step SD8005. , the instruction display setting process is performed. After that, the process moves to step SD8006.

By performing the instruction display setting process in step SD8005, the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 displays, for example, characters such as "Attack!" is executed.

At step SD8006, 1 is added to the value of the process pointer CP. Incidentally, the process pointer CP is discrimination information for specifying various control process data defined in the role object appearance operation control table (see FIG. 225). As will be described later, the sub-controller 262 reads the control process data associated with the process number PN designated by the process pointer CP, and executes control processing according to the contents. At the start of the character object appearance setting process, the value of the process pointer CP is set to "0", and is incremented by one each time the control process progresses.

Instead of this, a predetermined value is set in the value of the process pointer CP at the start of the role object appearance setting process, and the control process of the role object appearance operation control table is decremented by one each time the control process progresses. It may be configured to grasp the data.

In the subsequent step SD8007, it is determined whether or not the current value of the process pointer CP exceeds the maximum value PNmax (“30” in this example shown in FIG. 225) of the process number PN in the role object appearance operation control table. . That is, it is determined whether or not all the control processes defined in the role object appearance operation control table have been completed.

If the determination in step SD8007 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step SD8012. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SD8007, the process proceeds to step SD8008, and the character appearance operation control table (see FIG. 225) set in the RAM 553 is taken into consideration, and the value of the current process pointer CP is specified. Read out the control process data corresponding to the process number PN.

The process of step SD8002 for setting the role object appearance operation control table in the RAM 553 is omitted. The control process data corresponding to the process number PN may be read out.

In the following step SD8009, based on the control process data read out in step SD8008, it is determined whether or not the current control process is an end determination process for executing end determination processing of the appearance motion of the movable accessory 811.

If a negative determination is made in step SD8009, that is, if the current control process is not the end determination process but the normal operation process related to the vertical drive motor 1815, the process proceeds to step SD8010.

At step SD8010, based on the control process data read out at step SD8008 (operation process data of the vertical driving motor 1815, etc.), the appearance operation setting process of the movable accessory 811 is performed. After that, this process is terminated.

Specifically, in the appearing action setting process of step SD8010, the process of setting the time specified in the control process data (see FIG. 225) to the appearing action process timer PT is performed. For example, if the operation time specified in the control process data is 1000 msec, "250" is set for the appearing operation process timer PT. Then, the value of the appearing motion process timer PT is decremented by 1 every 4 msec in a subtraction process to be described later.

In the appearance operation setting process of step SD8010, output setting process such as a motor control signal (excitation control data) for driving and controlling the vertical drive motor 1815 as specified in the control process data is performed. Thereby, the motor control signal is output to the role product control board (motor driver) of the upper production role product unit 761 or the like sequentially at a predetermined timing (the external output process of step SD3912). As a result, the accessory control board performs energization processing to the excitation phase specified by the motor control signal, and by performing the excitation processing, the vertical drive motor 1815 is driven and controlled.

On the other hand, if the determination in step SD8009 is affirmative, that is, if the current control process is the termination determination process, the process proceeds to step SD8011, which is a determination function unit. In step SD8011, the value of the button operation flag BF is considered, and it is determined whether or not the player presses the production button 125 (BF=1) while the movable accessory 811 is appearing. It is determined whether or not a termination condition for the appearance operation of the role object 811 is satisfied.

When the negative determination is made in step SD8011, that is, when the effect button 125 is not pressed during the appearance operation of the movable accessory 811, the process returns to step SD8006, 1 is added to the value of the process pointer CP, and the next Move to control process.

On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step SD8011, that is, when the production button 125 is pressed during the appearance operation of the movable accessory 811, the process proceeds to step SD8012.

At step SD8012, it is determined whether or not the value of the character product effect pattern flag PF is "1" corresponding to the "no development pattern".

If the determination in step SD8012 is affirmative, that is, if the performance of the character product does not progress any further, the process proceeds to step SD8013, which is an end function unit, and after performing end setting processing of the performance of the character product, this processing ends. .

In step SD8013, in the process of setting the end of the character production, the value of the production state flag JF is set to "9", which means that the character production will not progress any further, and the flag MF and the button operation flag BF are set. The value is reset to "0", and this processing ends.

In addition, by performing the role product effect end setting process in step SD8013, the effect display device 42 displays characters such as "Unfortunately it did not develop" on the display unit 42a, so that no development effect is performed. A notification effect for notifying that effect is executed. Further, in performing the appearance operation end setting process, a configuration may be adopted in which a position adjustment process for aligning the initial position of the movable accessory 811 is performed.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SD8012, that is, if the effect pattern develops into the "first development pattern (PF=2)" or the "second development pattern (PF=3)" (PF≧2), , the process proceeds to step SD8014, which is an end function unit.

In the development effect transition setting process of step SD8014, the sub control device 262 first sets "4" indicating that it is the development transition period of the character object effect as the value of the effect state flag JF.

Subsequently, the sub-control device 262 reads, from the ROM 552, the development transition operation control table that defines the operation process of the movable role object 811 (rotating body 820) corresponding to the development transition operation of the character object presentation, and stores it in the RAM 553 as a predetermined table. Store in area.

In this embodiment, the presentation mode during the development transition period is the same regardless of whether the "first development pattern" or the "second development pattern" is set. Of course, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the presentation mode (operation time, etc.) during the development transition period differs depending on whether the "first development pattern" or the "second development pattern" is set.

After that, each time this process is performed, the sub-controller 262 sequentially reads out the plurality of motion process data contained in the evolution transition motion control table in accordance with the order of execution, and reads out the motion defined by the motion process data. A time is set in the development transition operation process timer, and the processing corresponding to the operation process data is executed while managing the operation time based on the value of the development transition operation process timer.

It should be noted that the decrementing process of the process timer for development transition operation is performed separately in the other process (step SD3911) in the normal process. In addition, the operation process data defined in the development transition operation control table includes, for example, an operation process for driving and controlling the vertical driving motor 1815 to lower the movable accessory 811, and driving and controlling the rotating body driving motor 821. It includes data defining an operation process for expanding and contracting the rotating body 820, and the like.

In other words, the sub-control device 262 executes development transition motion control of the movable accessory 811 based on the development transition motion control table while taking into account the value of the process timer and the like.

In addition, in the development effect transition setting process of step SD8014, the values of the appearing operation flag MF and the button operation flag BF are reset to "0", and the value of the operation valid timer ST is set to a predetermined value (5 seconds in this embodiment). ).

Furthermore, the sub-control device 262 performs a sound output setting process for outputting the sound effect related to the development transition operation of the movable accessory 811 from the speaker SP. By performing such audio output setting processing, a sound effect such as "Shaki~n" is output.

At the same time, display setting processing for performing the development request display effect on the display section 42a of the effect display device 42 is performed. By performing such display setting processing, an instruction display prompting the player to operate the effect button 125 is displayed on the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42, for example, characters such as "Press the button!" A performance is performed.

When the development transition operation of the movable accessory 811 is performed by the above series of setting processes, the movable accessory 811 that has returned to the back side of the upper side portion 47a of the center frame 47 (reference position H0) after completing the above-described appearance operation. Appears in a sudden drop with the above sound effect, and stops at a predetermined performance position. The effect position may be the third height position H3, which is the lowest point of the appearance operation of the movable accessory 811, or a position further below the third height position H3. It may be the fourth height position H4.

Subsequently, the rotating body 820 stopped at the rendering position performs an operation in which each movable piece 825 radially slides outward in the radial direction of the rotating body 820 (an operation in which the rotating body 820 expands its diameter), and each movable piece 825 It is in an expansion/contraction state in which the rotating body 820 is alternately slid toward the inner side in the radial direction (the rotating body 820 is reduced in diameter).

Further, on the display section 42a of the effect display device 42, the roulette pattern TR (see FIG. 213) is displayed in a reduced size, hidden behind the rotating body 820, and thus is difficult for the player to visually recognize. An instruction display effect such as "Press the button!" is executed.

Now, if the determination in step SD8001 is affirmative, that is, if the movable accessory 811 is in the process of appearing, the process proceeds to step SD8020. In step SD8020, 1 is subtracted from the value of the appearing action process timer PT.

Note that the processing of step SD8020 is omitted, and the subtraction processing of the appearing action process timer PT related to step SD8020 is performed separately in the other processing (step SD3911) in the above normal processing, as with other various process timers. can be

In the following step SD8021, it is determined whether or not the value of the appearance action process timer PT is "0".

If a negative determination is made in step SD8021, that is, if the value of the appearing action process timer PT is not "0", this processing ends. On the other hand, if the determination in step SD8021 is affirmative, that is, if the value of the appearing action process timer PT is "0", the process returns to step SD8006, adds 1 to the value of the process pointer CP, and executes the next control process. Move to

Here, the appearance operation mode of the movable role object 811 executed based on the role object appearance setting process of step SD6016 will be described.

When the appearance motion of the movable role object 811 is executed based on the role object appearance operation control table shown in FIG. 225, as shown in FIG. 0) to the first height position H1 (process 1: 500 ms), temporarily stop at the first height position H1 (process 2: 100 ms), and then rise again to the reference position H0 (process 3: 500 ms ), and temporarily stop at the reference position H0 (process 4: 100 ms).

Then, at the timing of returning to the initial position side, the completion determination processing of the appearance motion of the movable accessory 811 is executed (process 5).

When the end condition is satisfied at this timing (when the production button 125 is pressed), the appearance operation of the movable accessory 811 is immediately terminated, and the next stage (end of production or development of production) is started early. transition to

On the other hand, if the end condition is not satisfied at this timing, then the movable accessory 811 descends from the reference position H0 to the first height position H1 (process 6: 500 ms), and the first height position H1 (process 7: 100 ms), move up again to the reference position H0 (process 8: 500 ms), and stop once at the reference position H0 (process 9: 100 ms).

Then, at the timing of returning to the initial position side, the process of judging the completion of the appearance motion of the movable accessory 811 is executed again (process 10). If the termination condition is satisfied at this timing, the action of appearing the movable accessory 811 is immediately terminated, and the next stage is quickly shifted to, similarly to the above.

On the other hand, if the termination condition is not satisfied at this timing, then the movable accessory 811 descends from the reference position H0 to the second height position H2 (process 11: 1000 ms), and the second height position H2 (process 12: 100 ms), move up again to the reference position H0 (process 13: 1000 ms), and stop once at the reference position H0 (process 14: 100 ms).

In the present embodiment, the first control period is defined as the period of descending to the first height position H1 (process 1: 500 ms) and temporarily stopping at the first height position H1 (process 2: 100 ms). In this case, a second control period in which a period (process 12: 100 ms) for descending to the second height position H2 (process 11: 1000 ms) and temporarily stopping at the second height position H2 is longer than the first control period. is equivalent to the control period of

Then, at the timing of returning to the initial position side, the process of judging the end of the appearance motion of the movable accessory 811 is executed again (process 15). If the termination condition is satisfied at this timing, the action of appearing the movable accessory 811 is immediately terminated, and the next stage is quickly shifted to, similarly to the above.

On the other hand, if the end condition is not satisfied at this timing, then the movable accessory 811 descends from the reference position H0 to the second height position H2 (process 16: 1000 ms), and the second height position H2 (process 17: 100 ms), move up again to the reference position H0 (process 18: 1000 ms), and stop once at the reference position H0 (process 19: 100 ms).

Then, at the timing of returning to the initial position side, the process of judging the completion of the appearance motion of the movable accessory 811 is executed again (process 20). If the termination condition is satisfied at this timing, the action of appearing the movable accessory 811 is immediately terminated, and the next stage is quickly shifted to, similarly to the above.

On the other hand, if the termination condition is not satisfied at this timing, then the movable accessory 811 descends from the reference position H0 to the third height position H3 (process 21: 1500 ms), and the third height position H3 (Process 22: 100 ms), move up again to the reference position H0 (Process 23: 1500 ms), and stop once at the reference position H0 (Process 24: 100 ms).

In the present embodiment, the period during which the robot descends to the second height position H2 (process 11: 1000 ms) and stops temporarily at the second height position H2 (process 12: 100 ms) is regarded as the first control period. In this case, the period for descending to the third height position H3 (process 21: 1500 ms) and temporarily stopping at the third height position H3 (process 22: 100 ms) is longer than the first control period. 2 control periods.

Then, at the timing of returning to the initial position side, the process of judging the end of the appearance motion of the movable accessory 811 is executed again (process 25). If the termination condition is satisfied at this timing, the action of appearing the movable accessory 811 is immediately terminated, and the next stage is quickly shifted to, similarly to the above.

On the other hand, if the end condition is not satisfied at this timing, then the movable accessory 811 descends from the reference position H0 to the third height position H3 (process 26: 1500 ms), and the third height position H3 (process 27: 100 ms), move up again to the reference position H0 (process 28: 1500 ms), and stop once at the reference position H0 (process 29: 100 ms).

Then, at the timing of returning to the initial position side, the process of judging the end of the appearance motion of the movable accessory 811 is executed again (process 30). If the termination condition is satisfied at this timing, the action of appearing the movable accessory 811 is immediately terminated, and the next stage is quickly shifted to, similarly to the above.

On the other hand, since this timing is the completion timing of the role object appearance operation at which all the series of control processes defined in the role object appearance operation control table are completed, if the termination condition is not satisfied at this timing, the After completion determination processing (step SD8007) of the role object appearance operation, the process proceeds to the next stage.

In addition, in order to improve versatility, the character object appearance operation control table shown in FIG. The end determination process is incorporated in the final process (process 30) so that it can be executed, and the end determination process can be executed at that timing as well. Of course, it is not limited to this, and a role object appearance operation control table in which the end determination process is not incorporated in the final process may be adopted.

As described above, in the present embodiment, one lifting operation consisting of one lowering operation and one rising operation (for example, processes 1 to 4, processes 6 to 9, processes 11 to 14, processes 16 to 19, processes 21 to 24 , processes 26 to 29) constitute the "predetermined motion", the reference position H0 constitutes the "first position on the initial position side", and the third height position H3 constitutes the "second position on the most movable position". position”. A position different from the reference position H0, which is the initial position (standby position) (for example, a position below the reference position H0), may be set as the first position, which is the starting point of the character object appearing action.

In addition, after the completion of the character object appearing motion, control related to the "non-development pattern" character performance, control related to the "first development pattern" character performance, and control related to the "second development pattern" character performance. Any one of the controls corresponds to the first specific control in this embodiment, and another control different from this corresponds to the second specific control.

Now, returning to the description of FIG. 221, at step SD6017 after a negative determination was made at step SD6015, the value of the effect state flag JF is taken into consideration, and the character object effect is currently in the development transition period (JF=4). It is determined whether or not.

If a negative determination is made in step SD6017, that is, if it is not during the development transition period of the performance of the character (JF≧5), the process proceeds to step SD6025.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SD6017, that is, if it is during the development transition period of the performance of the character product, it is determined in step SD6018 whether or not the value of the operation effective timer ST is "0".

Here, if the determination is affirmative, that is, if the value of the operation valid timer ST is "0", the player does not press the production button 125 during the development transition period of the character production, and the operation valid period has passed, the process proceeds to step SD6019.

In step SD6019, the value of the effect state flag JF is set to "9", which means that the character effect will not progress any further, and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SD6018, that is, if the value of the operation valid timer ST is not "0", the process proceeds to step SD6020 (see FIG. 222).

As shown in FIG. 222, in step SD6020, the value of the button operation flag BF is taken into consideration, and the player presses the production button 125 during the development transition period of the character production (during the operation valid period) (BF = 1).

If a negative determination is made in step SD6020, that is, if the production button 125 is not pressed, the process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination is affirmative, that is, if the effect button 125 is pressed, the process proceeds to step SD6021, and the value of the character object effect pattern flag PF is set to " 2” is determined.

If the determination here is affirmative, that is, if the development effect pattern is the "first development pattern", a first development effect setting process is performed in step SD6022, and this process ends.

In the first development effect setting process, the sub-control device 262 first sets the value of the effect state flag JF to "5", which means that the character object effect has been developed.

Subsequently, the sub-control device 262 reads from the ROM 552 the first development effect control table that defines the operation process of the movable accessory 811 (rotator 820) corresponding to the first development pattern, and stores it in a predetermined area of the RAM 553. Store.

After that, each time this process is performed, the sub-control device 262 sequentially reads out a plurality of motion process data contained in the first development effect control table in accordance with the order of execution, and the motion process data defined by the motion process data The operation time is set in the first development effect process timer, and the process corresponding to the operation process data is executed while managing the operation time based on the value of the first development effect process timer.

The same applies to other developmental effect patterns, but the plurality of motion process data includes, for example, motion process data such as driving and controlling the rotating body drive motor 821 to rotate and stop the rotating body 820 . It contains data that stipulates

That is, the sub-control device 262 takes into account the rotational position information of the rotating body 820 (the amount of rotational displacement based on the number of drive pulse signals) and the value of the process timer for the first development effect based on the first development effect control table. While doing so, the motion control of the movable accessory 811 corresponding to the first development pattern is executed. Incidentally, the subtraction process of the process timer for the first development effect is performed separately in the other process (step SD3911) in the normal process.

Further, based on the contents of various setting processes performed in this process, in the next external output process (step 3912), control signals are sequentially output to the movable accessory 811, and various controls related to the movable accessory 811 are performed. It will be done. When the operation control of the movable accessory 811 corresponding to the first development pattern is started, the operation control continues until the value of the process timer for the first development effect becomes "0". will be

Under this configuration, when the first development effect pattern is executed in the present embodiment, on the front side (effect position) of the display section 42a of the effect display device 42, as shown in FIG. Control is performed to rotate clockwise at low speed.

Now, if a negative determination is made in step SD6021, the process proceeds to step SD6023 to check whether or not the value of the character product effect pattern flag PF is "3" corresponding to the "second development pattern (high speed rotation)". judge.

If the determination here is affirmative, that is, if the development effect pattern is the "second development pattern", a second development effect setting process is performed in step SD6024, and this process ends.

In the second development effect setting process, the sub-control device 262 first sets the value of the effect state flag JF to "5", which means that the character object effect has been developed.

Subsequently, the sub-control device 262 reads from the ROM 552 the second development effect control table that defines the operation process of the movable accessory 811 (rotating body 820) corresponding to the second development pattern, and stores it in a predetermined area of the RAM 553. Store.

After that, each time this process is performed, the sub-control device 262 sequentially reads out a plurality of action process data contained in the second development effect control table in accordance with the order of execution and The operation time is set in the second development effect process timer, and the process corresponding to the operation process data is executed while managing the operation time based on the value of the second development effect process timer.

That is, the sub-control device 262 takes into account the rotational position information of the rotating body 820 (rotational displacement amount based on the number of driving pulse signals) and the value of the process timer for the second developmental effect based on the second developmental effect control table. While doing so, the motion control of the movable accessory 811 corresponding to the second development pattern is executed. Incidentally, the subtraction process of the process timer for the second development effect is performed separately in the other process (step SD3911) in the normal process.

Further, based on the contents of various setting processes performed in this process, in the next external output process (step 3912), control signals are sequentially output to the movable accessory 811, and various controls related to the movable accessory 811 are performed. It will be done. Then, when the operation control of the movable accessory 811 corresponding to the second development pattern is started, the operation control continues until the value of the process timer for the second development effect becomes "0". will be

Under this configuration, when the second development effect pattern is executed in the present embodiment, on the front side (effect position) of the display section 42a of the effect display device 42, as shown in FIG. Control is performed to rotate clockwise at high speed.

Now, in step SD6025 to which a negative decision was made in step SD6017, the value of the production state flag JF is considered, and it is determined whether or not the character production is currently in the developing state (JF=5). . If a negative determination is made here, the processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SD6025, that is, if the character object presentation is in progress, the process proceeds to step SD6026.

In step SD6026, it is determined whether or not it is now time to end the character development effect by referring to the various development effect control tables. If a negative determination is made here, the processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SD6026, that is, if it is time to end the character development effect, end setting processing is performed in step SD6027, and this processing ends.

In the end setting process of step SD6027, the sub-control device 262 first sets "9" as the value of the effect state flag JF, which means that the character effect will not progress any further.

Subsequently, the sub-control device 262 reads out from the ROM 552 the role product presentation end control table that defines the ending process of the role product development presentation, and stores it in a predetermined area of the RAM 553 .

Based on this, stop processing of the rotating body 820 (rotating body drive motor 821), operation setting processing for raising the movable accessory 811 to the standby position, and the like are sequentially performed, and the accessory presentation is completed.

As described in detail above, in this embodiment, as an example, when the movable accessory 811 as a movable body is caused to perform a series of actions, the sub-control device 262 executes various action processes related to the series of actions. A character object appearance operation control table (see FIG. 225) defined in series is read out from the ROM 552 in a single process and set in a predetermined area of the RAM 553 in a single process.

As a result, for example, compared to a configuration in which corresponding operation process data is read in advance for each operation process in a series of operations, it is possible to reduce the control load without requiring a huge number of reading processes.

Furthermore, based on the role object appearance operation control table read and set in one process as described above, during the execution of the role object appearance operation, the movable accessory 811 repeats the up-and-down motion multiple times. Each time the controller returns to the reference position H0, a process of determining whether or not the conditions for ending the role object appearance action are satisfied is executed, and the next action is started from the reference position H0. .

In other words, even during execution of the role product appearing motion, if the conditions for ending the role product appearing motion are satisfied, the role product appearing motion is promptly terminated and the next motion is performed. can be done. On the other hand, if the end condition is not satisfied, the character object appearing motion can be continued.

Especially in this embodiment, the timing for determining whether or not the end condition for the role object appearance action is satisfied is the timing when the movable role object 811 returns to the reference position H0. , the movable accessory 811 can be quickly returned to the initial state or moved to the next operation.

As a result, the movable accessory 811 can be suitably controlled, and the performance is not delayed, thereby improving the interest of the player.

In addition, according to the present embodiment, for example, by using a plurality of tables set by subdividing the role object appearance operation control table related to the role object appearance operation of the movable accessory 811, the operation control related to the plurality of tables can be performed. It is possible to reduce the execution frequency of the table reading process and the like, and reduce the control load, compared to a configuration in which the processes are executed sequentially.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the movable accessory 811 performs a series of appearance motions that repeat the up-and-down motion multiple times, after performing the upward motion to position the movable accessory 811 on the initial position side, After performing the descent motion to position the accessory 811 on the performance position side, it is configured to execute predetermined stop control (process 2, 4, etc.) for stopping the movable accessory 811 respectively. As a result, the moving direction of the movable accessory 811 is suddenly reversed, the load on the movable accessory 811 and the like can be reduced, and the durability of the movable accessory 811 and the like can be improved.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in the above-described embodiment, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Here, each of the following configurations may be applied to the above embodiment individually, or may be applied to the above embodiment by combining a part or all of them. Moreover, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments.

(a) The pachinko machine 10 according to the above-described embodiment is the first type in which the variable winning device 32 opens and closes in a jackpot state when a jackpot win is won in a winning lottery based on the ball entering the starting prize-winning openings 33YA and 33YB. is a gaming machine.

Not limited to this, it may be implemented as another type of pachinko machine that provides a predetermined game value. The game value includes, for example, game media such as prize balls paid out to the player, a special prize state (round) given during the big win, and a game mode such as a high-probability mode given after the big win. . In addition to the pachinko machine, it can also be implemented as various game machines such as an arrangement ball machine and a mammoth ball.

(a-1) For example, a variable prize winning device is provided that opens when a small winning lottery based on a ball entering a predetermined starting prize winning portion is won, and a game ball that enters the variable prize winning device is a predetermined value. It may be implemented as a second type gaming machine in which a ball enters the special prize winning portion (V prize opening) to generate a jackpot state. Here, without performing a predetermined lottery process when a game ball enters the starting winning part (or a lottery process with a winning probability of 100% may be performed), based on the ball entering the starting winning part, A variable winning device may be in an open state, and a game ball entering the variable winning device may enter a V winning port or the like to generate a big win state.

(a-2) Also implemented as a third-type gaming machine (for example, a so-called one-kind-two-kind machine) that combines the functions of the first-type gaming machine and the second-type gaming machine. You may

Incidentally, the winning probabilities related to various lotteries related to pachinko machines (soft lottery processing, mechanical lottery, etc.) are appropriately set for each model, and any value can be adopted. Further, as will be described later, it goes without saying that the configuration of the board surface of the game board 30 can also be changed as appropriate. In other words, various configurations such as installation positions and movable modes of various devices such as the variable winning device 32 provided on the game board 30 are not limited to the above-described embodiments, and different configurations may be adopted. For example, it may be configured to include a variable winning device that opens and closes the winning opening by sliding the open/close shutter in the front-rear direction.

(a-3) Moreover, it may be implemented as a type of game machine that circulates game balls in the game machine so as not to pay out the game balls directly to the player, that is, a so-called enclosed pachinko machine.

(b) The types of jackpots (the number of rounds, the content of the configuration, etc.) are not limited to the above embodiment, and different configurations may be adopted.

For example, in the above embodiment, a 16R jackpot in which 16 special prize states (rounds) are performed, a 4R jackpot in which 4 special prize states (rounds) are performed, etc. are set, but not limited to this, the number of rounds A configuration in which other different jackpot states occur is also possible.

Of course, the gaming machine may be implemented as a gaming machine in which only one type of jackpot state (for example, 15R jackpot) occurs instead of a gaming machine in which multiple types of jackpot states can occur.

(c) The configuration of the game mode to be awarded after the end of the jackpot state (granting period, configuration content, etc.) is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and a different configuration may be adopted.

For example, in the above embodiment, regardless of the type of jackpot, "high support mode" is always given after the end of the jackpot. good too.

In addition, it is implemented as a pachinko machine that does not switch the lottery mode (“high probability mode” or “low probability mode”), but only switches the winning support mode (“high support mode” or “low support mode”). may Alternatively, or in addition to the payout of prize balls, a pachinko machine may be implemented in which points corresponding to the prize balls won by the player are given to a storage medium such as a magnetic card.

Of course, the game machine may be configured such that the time reduction mode, the high probability mode, etc. are not provided after the end of the jackpot state.

(d) The configuration related to the game board is not limited to the above embodiment. For example, the game board 30 according to the above-described embodiment is configured using a transparent plate as a translucent member as a base, but is not limited to this. good.

(d-1) In the above embodiment, the LED boards 48A, 48B, and 48C mounted with a plurality of LEDs are arranged at the rear position of the predetermined area of the game area so that various light emitting effects can be executed. there is Not limited to this, a configuration in which other light emitting means such as a lamp or a liquid crystal display device is arranged at the rear position of the game board 30 instead of or in addition to the LED board 48A or the like may be employed.

(d-2) Instead of the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 according to the above-described embodiment, a display screen having a size covering substantially the entire back side of the game area or substantially the entire back side of the game board 30 at the rear position of the game board 30 may be provided with a display device having

Alternatively, the game board 30 may be arranged so as to cover the front side of the display portion 42a of the effect display device 42 without providing an opening for mounting the effect display device 42 thereon. At this time, a nail or the like may be placed on the front surface of the game board 30, which is the area in front of the effect display device 42, so that this area can be used as the area where the game ball can flow down. Of course, this may be set as an area where game balls cannot flow down.

(e) The configuration related to the movable means is not limited to the above embodiment, and other different configurations may be adopted.

(e-1) For example, in the above embodiment, the movable accessory 811, which is the movable means, is configured to operate on the front side of the display section 42a of the effect display device 42, but the area where the movable means operates is not limited to this.

For example, a configuration in which the movable means operates in the center frame 47 may be employed. A configuration in which the movable means operates in a decorative member attached to the game board 30 may be employed. A configuration may be adopted in which the movable means operates in a predetermined internal area of the winning device. The movable means may operate in the front area (game area) of the game board 30 . A configuration in which the movable means operates at a position below the performance display device 42 by being fitted from the front side into a hole or recess formed in the game board 30 may be employed. The movable means may operate on the back side of the game board 30 having translucency.

(e-2) The shape, size, material, etc. of the movable means are not limited to those in the above embodiment, and other different configurations may be adopted.

The movable accessory 811 according to the above embodiment has a structure including a rotating body 820 having six movable pieces 825 . Not limited to this, for example, the movable accessory 811 may be configured by a mere spherical member or plate-shaped member.

(e-3) In the above embodiment, the movable accessory 811 is configured to move up and down. good too.

For example, the movable accessory 811 may be slid in the left-right direction or the front-rear direction, and a series of specific actions may be performed in which the first position is the waiting position and the second position is the rendering position. . In addition, the movable accessory 811 (or the support part 1814) is pivotally supported so as to be able to rotate, swing, or tilt about the vertical, horizontal, front-rear, or oblique directions, and the movable accessory 811 is in the standby position, which is the first position. and the effect position, which is the second position, for a plurality of times. Of course, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of motions such as linear motions and curvilinear motions are combined to move between the standby position and the performance position.

Incidentally, when the movable means performs an operation including displacement in the front-rear direction, at least a part of the movable means may be configured to protrude forward from the front surface of the game board 30 . As a result, the movable means moves beyond the front surface of the game board 30 and performs an approaching motion to approach a position closer to the player, so that more dynamic and powerful performances can be performed, which is of interest to the player. can be improved.

(e-4) When the movable means such as the movable accessory 811 is positioned at the standby position, which is the first position, the predetermined area (for example, part of the display section 42a of the effect display device 42) becomes invisible or difficult to see. The second state may be such that the predetermined area is visible or easily visible when positioned at the effect position, which is the second position.

For example, under the configuration in which the eyeball is arranged in the eyeball as a predetermined area provided in the dragon role modeled on the head of the dragon, the eyelid member as a movable means normally makes the eyeball (inside the eyehole) invisible or invisible. While the eyelids of the dragon character are closed so as to be difficult to see, the eyelid member of the dragon character blinks a plurality of times when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied. After that, the eyelid member of the dragon character may be configured to be in the second state in which the eyelid member of the dragon character is opened so that the eyeball (inside the eye hole) of the dragon character can be visually recognized or easily visually recognized.

(e-5) A configuration including a light emitting means that lights when the movable means such as the movable accessory 811 is positioned at the second position, which is the performance position, and turns off when the movable means is positioned at the first position, which is the standby position. may be

For example, an eyeball provided with an LED as a light emitting means is placed in the eye socket of the dragon role as a predetermined area, and in a first state (normal time) in which the eyelids of the dragon role are closed, the eyeball While the (LED) is turned off, the eyeball (LED) is turned on when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied and the eyelid member of the dragon character opens to the second state. may be Of course, the position where the light emitting means is provided is not limited to the above-described predetermined area, and may be other positions such as a position where the predetermined area can be illuminated from the outside.

(f) The drive means for driving the movable means is not limited to the above embodiment, and other different configurations may be adopted.

(f-1) For example, in the vertical drive mechanism 1812 of the above-described embodiment, a stepping motor is used as the vertical drive motor 1815 serving as the driving means. Not limited to this, other motors such as a servo motor, a DC motor, and a linear motor may be employed as the vertical drive motor 1815 .

In addition, the configuration is not limited to the motor, and may be a configuration using another actuator such as a solenoid as the driving means, or a configuration using a mechanism combining a motor and a solenoid. Even when a solenoid is used, control can be performed using an operation control table in the same manner as the motor control according to the above embodiment. Of course, the number of motors and solenoids is not limited to one, and a configuration using a plurality of motors and solenoids is also possible.

(f-2) When the movable accessory 811 is at the reference position H0, which is the first position, a part of the movable accessory 811 (or the support portion 1814) is placed on the first cover provided on the unit base portion 810. It is good also as a structure which contacts with a contact part (stopper part).

Similarly, when the movable accessory 811 is at the second position (the third height position H3 or the fourth height position H4) that is the lowest point of operation, a part of the movable accessory 811 (or the support part 1814) may be configured to abut on a second abutted portion (stopper portion) provided on the unit base portion 810 .

With such a configuration, it is possible to omit the process of checking whether the movable accessory 811 is positioned at a predetermined position, the process of correcting the position of the movable accessory 811, and the like, thereby reducing the control load. can.

(f-3) A configuration may be provided with biasing means such as a coil spring that biases the movable accessory 811 (or the support portion 1814) toward the reference position H0.

If the position where the movable accessory 811 stands by deviates from the preset reference position H0 due to an assembly error or aged deterioration of the movable accessory 811, there is a risk that the operation control related to the movable accessory 811 will be hindered. . In addition, there is a possibility that the display effect and the action of the movable accessory 811 may deviate from each other, and the interest of the player may decrease.

On the other hand, by adopting the above configuration, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation of the movable accessory 811 and, in turn, the motional deviation. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest of the player.

(g) The configuration related to the operation means, such as the shape, function, and arrangement of the operation means, is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and other different configurations may be adopted.

(g-1) In the above embodiment, the effect button 125 that can be pressed by the player is provided as an operation means for effect. The configuration is not limited to this, and a configuration including movable operating means such as a jog dial or a slide lever may be employed.

(g-2) In the above embodiment, when the player operates the effect button 125, the movable accessory 811 stops moving or the development effect is started. The configuration is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the development effect is started in accordance with a predetermined effect program without being triggered by the operation of the operating means.

(g-3) A configuration may be adopted in which the movement mode of the movable accessory 811 can be changed according to the operation mode of the operation means operated by the player. Here, the "operation mode of the operation means" includes the number of operations, the amount of operation displacement, and the like. For example, it includes the number of times a button-type operating means has been pressed, and the amount of operation displacement of a movable operating means such as a jog dial or a slide lever.

For example, depending on the operation mode of the predetermined operation means operated by the player, the timing at which the end condition of the series of specific actions of the movable means such as the movable accessory 811 is satisfied may be changed. As an example, a character is displayed on the display unit 42a in connection with the movement of the movable accessory 811 to descend, and a display effect is performed in which the movable accessory 811 is pushed upward to prevent execution of the development effect. The player repeatedly hits the production button 125 to stop the movable accessory 811 which is about to be pushed upward against the .

(h) The timing at which the performance using the movable means is performed, that is, the timing at which the specific performance is performed by the performance display device 42 is not limited to the above embodiment, and other configurations may be adopted.

(h-1) In the above embodiment, the support continuation effect (roulette effect) for determining whether or not the support mode advantageous to the player is to be continued is performed by the effect display device 42. 811 is used to produce a character performance.

Not limited to this, for example, a pattern variation effect in which patterns are displayed in a variable manner, various ready-to-win effects performed in the ready-to-win state or their development effects, winning notification effects to notify the winning of a big win state or a small win state advantageous to the player, Winning type confirmation production or promotion production for confirming the type of big win state or small win state, opening production performed at the start of the big win state or small win state, round production or promotion production performed during the round of the big win state or small win state Alternatively, it determines the type of continuous performance, winning performance performed over multiple rounds during the big win state or the small win state, ending performance performed at the end of the big win state or the small win state, and the game mode given after the end of the big win state. A configuration may be adopted in which the movable means such as the movable accessory 811 operates when the mode determination effect for the purpose is performed by the effect display device 42 .

(h-2) In the above embodiment, depending on the degree of expectation that the high support mode will continue to be given (the degree of expectation that the game value can be given), the role production using the movable accessory 811, and further the development production is configured to change the rate at which

Not limited to this, for example, if a winning result is obtained by a predetermined lottery process (a result of giving a game value such as a big hit or a small hit, a high probability mode, a high support mode, etc.) , a configuration may be adopted in which the proportion of the performance of the role product using the movable accessory 811 and the further performance of the development performance is higher than in the case where the winning result is not obtained.

Also, only when the high support mode is continued (when the game value is given), or when the winning result is obtained by the predetermined lottery process (jackpot or small win, high probability mode, high support mode Only when a game value such as a game value is given) is obtained, the role production using the movable accessory 811 and further the development production may be performed as the fixed production.

(h-3) The operating conditions for the movable means to perform a series of specific actions and the termination conditions for the movable means to finish the series of specific actions are not limited to the above embodiments, and other different configurations are adopted. You may

For example, in the above-described embodiment, the action of appearing the movable accessory 811 is executed as a series of specific actions under the operating condition that the accessory effect (variable display effect) using the movable accessory 811 is executed. When the player presses the effect button 125 during the appearance action of the object 811, or when all the action processes (processes 1 to 30) defined in the role appearance action control table are finished, the end condition is It is established and the appearance operation of the movable accessory 811 ends.

For example, the start of the variable display, the elapse of a predetermined period after the start of the variable display, the execution of a predetermined effect a predetermined number of times, the game ball entering a predetermined ball entry area, or the predetermined A number of game balls enter, a lottery is drawn with a specified probability based on the entered ball, and a specified result is obtained, a specified operation means is operated or operated a specified number of times, and the operation Based on this, a lottery is drawn with a predetermined probability and a predetermined result is obtained, a predetermined count value reaches an upper limit, etc., as operating conditions. good too.

Further, for example, a predetermined operating means is operated a predetermined number of times, a predetermined period of time has passed, the variable display is stopped, the stop of the variable display is confirmed, a predetermined period of time has passed after the variable display is stopped, The end conditions include the entry of a game ball into a prescribed ball entry area or the entry of a prescribed number of game balls, the completion of a prescribed number of prescribed operations, the shooting or payout of a prescribed number of game balls, and the like. Alternatively, the movable means such as the movable accessory 811 may end a series of specific actions.

(i) The structure of the role object appearance operation control table, that is, the appearance operation mode of the movable role object 811 is not limited to the above embodiments shown in FIGS. You may

(i-1) For example, based on the role object appearance operation control table shown in FIG. 227, the appearance operation of the movable role object 811 may be executed in the operation mode shown in FIG.

In such a configuration, the movable accessory 811 first descends from the initial position, the reference position H0 (process 0), to the first height position H1 (process 1: 500 ms), and stops temporarily at the first height position H1. After that (process 2: 100 ms), it rises again to the reference position H0 (process 3: 500 ms) and temporarily stops at the reference position H0 (process 4: 100 ms).

Then, at the timing of returning to the initial position side, the completion determination processing of the appearance motion of the movable accessory 811 is executed (process 5). When the end condition is satisfied at this timing (when the production button 125 is pressed), the appearance operation of the movable accessory 811 is immediately terminated, and the next stage (end of production or development of production) is started early. transition to

On the other hand, if the end condition is not satisfied at this timing, then the movable accessory 811 descends from the reference position H0 to the first height position H1 (process 6: 500 ms), and the first height position H1 (process 7: 100 ms), move up again to the reference position H0 (process 8: 500 ms), and stop once at the reference position H0 (process 9: 100 ms).

Then, at the timing of returning to the initial position side, the process of judging the end of the appearance motion of the movable accessory 811 is executed again (process 10). If the termination condition is satisfied at this timing, the action of appearing the movable accessory 811 is immediately terminated, and the next stage is quickly transitioned to, similarly to the above.

On the other hand, if the termination condition is not satisfied at this timing, then the movable accessory 811 descends from the reference position H0 to the second height position H2 (process 11: 1000 ms), and the second height position H2 (process 12: 100 ms), rise to the first height position H1 (process 13: 500 ms), and stop once at the first height position H1 (process 14: 100 ms).

Then, at the timing of returning to the initial position side, the process of judging the end of the appearance motion of the movable accessory 811 is executed again (process 15). If the termination condition is satisfied at this timing, the action of appearing the movable accessory 811 is immediately terminated, and the next stage is quickly shifted to, similarly to the above.

On the other hand, if the end condition is not satisfied at this timing, then the movable accessory 811 descends from the first height position H1 to the second height position H2 (process 16: 500 ms), After temporarily stopping at the height position H2 (process 17: 100 ms), it rises to the first height position H1 (process 18: 500 ms) and temporarily stops at the first height position H1 (process 19: 100 ms).

Then, at the timing of returning to the initial position side, the process of judging the completion of the appearance motion of the movable accessory 811 is executed again (process 20). If the termination condition is satisfied at this timing, the action of appearing the movable accessory 811 is immediately terminated, and the next stage is quickly shifted to, similarly to the above.

On the other hand, if the termination condition is not satisfied at this timing, then the movable accessory 811 descends from the first height position H1 to the third height position H3 (process 21: 1000 ms), and moves to the third height position. After temporarily stopping at the height position H3 (process 22: 100 ms), it rises to the second height position H2 (process 23: 500 ms) and temporarily stops at the second height position H2 (process 24: 100 ms).

Then, at the timing of returning to the initial position side, the process of judging the end of the appearance motion of the movable accessory 811 is executed again (process 25). If the termination condition is satisfied at this timing, the action of appearing the movable accessory 811 is immediately terminated, and the next stage is quickly shifted to, similarly to the above.

On the other hand, if the end condition is not satisfied at this timing, then the movable accessory 811 descends from the second height position H2 to the third height position H3 (process 26: 500 ms), and moves to the third height position. After temporarily stopping at the lower position H3 (process 27: 100 ms), it rises again to the reference position H0 (process 28: 1500 ms) and stops once at the reference position H0 (process 29: 100 ms).

Then, at the timing of returning to the initial position side, the process of judging the end of the appearance motion of the movable accessory 811 is executed again (process 30). If the termination condition is satisfied at this timing, the action of appearing the movable accessory 811 is immediately terminated, and the next stage is quickly shifted to, similarly to the above.

On the other hand, since this timing is the completion timing of the role object appearance operation at which all the series of control processes defined in the role object appearance operation control table are completed, if the termination condition is not satisfied at this timing, the After completion determination processing (step SD8007) of the role object appearance operation, the process proceeds to the next stage.

225 and 227, the character object appearing motion control tables are configured such that temporary stop periods (processes 2, 4, etc.) are set between various displacement motions (processes 1, 3, etc.). However, a table configuration (operation mode) that omits such a stop period may be used.

(i-2) In the above embodiment, the value of the process pointer CP (process number PN) is incremented by one each time the value of the appearing operation process timer PT, which is decremented for each timer interrupt, becomes "0". , the control processes specified in chronological order in the role object appearance action control table are sequentially executed. By incrementing the value of the process pointer CP (process number PN) one by one, a configuration may be adopted in which the control processes defined in the character object appearance operation control table in time series for each timer interrupt are sequentially executed. .

(i-3) The setting information defined in the role object appearance operation control table as the specific information is not limited to the above embodiment, and other different configurations may be adopted. For example, the configuration may be such that number information defining the number of executions of a predetermined action to be executed in a series of specific actions, condition information defining conditions for ending the predetermined action, and the like are set as setting information.

The "specific information" only needs to be stored so as to allow the movable means to execute a series of specific actions such as the appearance action of the movable accessory 811 based on the "specific information". It does not have to be stored.

(i-4) In the above embodiment, only one pattern of appearance operation mode of the movable role object 811 can be executed based on the role object appearance operation control table shown in FIG. The configuration is not limited to this, and a plurality of patterns of appearance operation modes of the movable accessory 811 may be set.

For example, the period during which a series of specific actions of the movable means, such as the action of appearing the movable accessory 811, is performed may include at least a first specific period and a longer second specific period.

At this time, one action control table, such as the character object appearance action control table shown in FIGS. 225 and 227, is repeatedly referred to a plurality of times, and a series of specific actions defined in the action control table are repeatedly executed in a plurality of sets. It is good also as a structure which carries out.

For example, the end determination process is set at an intermediate position (for example, 5 seconds position) and final position (for example, 10 seconds position) of one operation control table that defines a series of specific actions for a first specific period (for example, 10 seconds). By doing so, for example, the operation control table can be repeatedly referred to twice and a half times, and a series of specific operations for a second specific period (for example, 25 seconds) can be executed and terminated.

As a result, one motion control table can be used for motion control of a series of a plurality of specific motions, and versatility can be enhanced.

In addition, it is possible to reduce the amount of data to be stored in advance in storage means such as ROM, and to effectively utilize storage means such as ROM, which has a limited storage capacity. Furthermore, the table reading process from the storage means such as ROM can be done only once, and the control load can be reduced.

(i-5) In the role object appearance motion control table shown in FIGS. 225 and 227, as a process executed at the timing when the movable role object 811 returns to the initial position side, determination of completion of the appearance motion of the movable role object 811 is performed. It has a configuration in which processing is set. It is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that the appearance operation of the movable role product 811 can be terminated immediately at least at this timing. good.

As an example, in addition to the processing related to the role object appearance operation control table, an end determination process is performed to determine whether or not the condition for ending the appearance operation of the movable accessory 811 is satisfied. It is provided with an end flag that is turned on, and in the role object appearance operation control table, it is determined whether or not the end flag is turned on as a process that is executed at the timing when the movable role object 811 returns to the initial position side. A configuration in which flag determination processing is set may also be used. Then, the flag determination process is executed as a process related to the role object appearance operation control table, and if the end flag is turned on, the appearance operation of the movable role object 811 is immediately terminated, and the next stage is quickly shifted to. . At the same time, the end flag is turned off. On the other hand, if the end flag is not turned on, the processing relating to the role object appearance operation control table is continued.

(j) Although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, various notifications may be made in relation to the operation of movable means such as the movable accessory 811 .

(j-1) For example, based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition, in the stage before the movable means such as the movable accessory 811 starts a series of specific actions, a notification means (start notification means) is provided to notify that effect. may be configured as follows.

If the movable means were to suddenly operate without warning, the player, who had not paid attention to the movable means until then, would not be able to grasp the situation and might be confused. On the other hand, by providing the notifying means, it is possible to make the player aware in advance that the movable means will perform a series of specific actions. As a result, it is possible to increase the attention level of the game performance using the movable means, and to further improve the interest of the player.

(j-2) For example, in a series of specific actions, there may be provided a notification means (number of times notification means) capable of notifying the number of executions of a predetermined action executed by the movable means such as the movable accessory 811 .

By providing the notification means, the player can easily recognize the current situation in the series of specific actions. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

For example, the character moves a generator and charges an electric device on the display means, while the moving means moves up and down. ) may be configured to perform an effect that increases.

Examples of the notification means (start notification means and frequency notification means) include notification display by predetermined display means, audio notification by predetermined audio means, and light emission notification by various light emitting means.

[Appendix]
Technical ideas that can be grasped from the above embodiments will be described below together with their effects.

Conventional problem XA. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a game area. For example, a pachinko machine is known in which a lottery is performed based on the entry of a game ball into a predetermined ball-entering means, and when a predetermined result is obtained by the lottery, a game state advantageous to the player is generated. .

Among game machines, there are those that cause a movable means (movable body) to execute a series of actions in which a predetermined action (for example, rocking, vibration, reciprocating action, etc.) is repeated multiple times (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-184066). ).

A series of such operations of the movable means are executed based on setting information stored in advance in a storage means such as a ROM.

For example, when the sub-control device executes the performance control using the movable accessory (moving means) based on the command from the main controller, the movable accessory is caused to perform a series of actions, for example, the sub-control device Reads an operation control table (operation process data group) as specific information defining various operation processes related to the series of operations in chronological order from the ROM and sets it in the RAM, and then sequentially reads the operation process data from the operation control table. is read out to execute a series of motion control of the movable accessory.

For example, when a role object appearance effect is executed based on the conventional action control table for role object appearance effect shown in FIG. After performing a predetermined operation (first operation) returning to the position H0 twice, performing a predetermined operation (second operation) of descending from the reference position H0 to the second height position H2 and returning to the reference position H0 again (second operation) twice, and further After that, a series of operations are performed in which a predetermined operation (third operation) of descending from the reference position H0 to the third height position H3 and returning to the reference position H0 is performed twice.

Then, after the series of operations described above, the process proceeds to the next step. For example, if the condition for developing the character performance is not established, the character performance is terminated. On the other hand, when the development condition for the character performance is satisfied, the sub-control device newly reads out from the ROM an operation control table for the development performance, which defines the various operational processes to be executed next in chronological order, and sets it in the RAM. After that, the motion process data is sequentially read out from the motion control table, and the development effect of the movable accessory is executed.

However, when a condition for terminating the series of actions is satisfied in the middle of the series of actions of the movable accessory (movable means), it is desirable to terminate the series of actions favorably.

For example, if the player operates the production button during the above-mentioned character appearance production, if the character production is to move to the next stage (development or end), at the timing when the player operates the production button Even if the operation determination flag is set to ON, in the conventional configuration, the flag determination process can be executed only after all the series of motion processes defined in the action control table for character object appearance are completed. First, depending on the operation timing, after the player operates the effect button, there is a possibility that the character object effect does not move to the next stage immediately.

As a result, there is a risk that the performance will be prolonged and the interest of the player will decrease.

In order to solve the above problem, for example, the conventional operation control table shown in FIG. and a third operation control table defining the operation process of the third operation for the above two times), and set these separately as individual operation control. Although it is conceivable that such a configuration is adopted, the frequency of execution of the read processing of each table and the like increases, and there is a risk that the control load will increase significantly.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably controlling movable means and enhancing the interest of players. to provide.

Means XA1. Starting ball entry means provided in the game area;
A lottery means capable of executing various lotteries when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means;
Display control capable of determining and executing one specific effect (for example, effect mode related to variable display) to be executed by the display means provided in the game area corresponding to the result of the lottery from among a plurality of effect display modes. means and
movable control means provided in the game area and capable of determining and executing one movable mode of the movable means operable during display of the specific effect on the display means from among a plurality of movable modes. A game machine that
The movable control means controls the movable means based on specific information set corresponding to one of the movable modes determined from among the plurality of movable modes based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition. It is the one that causes the action to take place,
The movable means is movably controlled between a first position, which is the initial position side, and a second position, which is the most movable position in the series of specific operations,
The series of specific actions are configured to be able to perform a predetermined action of positioning the movable means at or near the first position a plurality of times,
The movable control means is
determination means capable of determining whether or not a condition for ending the series of specific actions is satisfied when the predetermined action is executed;
terminating means capable of terminating the series of specific actions by stopping the movable means positioned at or near the first position when the determining means determines that the termination condition is satisfied; A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the means XA1, for example, specific information (various setting information groups such as operation mode, operation time, number of operations, operation order, operation end conditions, etc.) stored in advance in a storage means such as a ROM as one operation control table, etc. ), the movable means executes a series of specific actions (a series of actions defined in one action control table) in which predetermined actions are repeated multiple times, and based on the specific information, the movable means moves to the first position ( A process for determining whether or not a condition for ending the series of specific motions is established at a timing at or near the initial position or the motion starting point is executed.

That is, even if the series of specific actions based on the specific information is being executed, the series of specific actions can be terminated quickly if the conditions for ending the series of specific actions are satisfied. On the other hand, if the end condition is not met, the series of specific actions can be continued.

Incidentally, if it is determined whether or not the end condition of the series of specific actions is satisfied at the timing when the movable means is positioned on the second position side, it may take a predetermined time before the movable means returns to the initial position side. Since it takes time, a time lag occurs before the movable means starts the next operation or the like.

On the other hand, in this means, the timing for determining whether or not the condition for ending the series of specific actions is satisfied is the timing when the movable means is positioned at or near the first position, which is the initial position side. After completing the series of specific actions, the movable means can be quickly returned to the initial state or shifted to the next action.

As a result, the movable means can be suitably controlled, and the performance is not delayed, thereby enhancing the interest of the player.

In addition, according to this means, for example, compared to a configuration in which a plurality of tables set by subdividing one operation control table related to the series of specific operations is used to sequentially execute operation control related to the plurality of tables. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the execution frequency of the table reading process and reduce the control load.

The movable control means is obtained based on a predetermined determination counter used for determining the movable mode (movable pattern), the results of the various lotteries, and the ball entered into the starting ball entry means, for example. and a predetermined control table for determining one of the plurality of movable modes based on the value of the determination counter.

Means XA2. The gaming machine according to means XA1, characterized by comprising at least a first specific period and a longer second specific period as the period for executing the series of specific actions.

According to the above means XA2, it is possible to diversify the effects related to the series of specific actions of the movable means, and to further improve the interest of the player.

In the case where a plurality of series of specific actions with different lengths (periods) are to be executed as in the above means XA2, conventionally, there is an action control that defines the contents of a plurality of series of specific actions with different lengths. Each table should be prepared separately. For example, a first action control table defining a series of specific actions for a first specific period (e.g. 10 seconds) and a second action control table defining a series of specific actions for a second specific period (e.g. 15 seconds) Tables must be prepared in advance. For this reason, conventionally, there is a risk that the amount of data to be stored in advance in storage means such as a ROM will increase.

On the other hand, according to this means, it is possible to repeatedly refer to one operation control table a plurality of times and repeatedly execute a series of specific operations defined in the operation control table for a plurality of sets. For example, the end determination process is set at an intermediate position (for example, 5 seconds position) and final position (for example, 10 seconds position) of one operation control table that defines a series of specific actions for a first specific period (for example, 10 seconds). By doing so, for example, the operation control table can be repeatedly referred to twice and a half times, and a series of specific operations for a second specific period (for example, 25 seconds) can be executed and terminated.

As a result, one motion control table can be used for motion control of a series of a plurality of specific motions, and versatility can be enhanced.

In addition, it is possible to reduce the amount of data to be stored in advance in storage means such as ROM, and to effectively utilize storage means such as ROM, which has a limited storage capacity. Furthermore, the table reading process from the storage means such as ROM can be done only once, and the control load can be reduced.

Moreover, in a configuration in which a plurality of series of specific actions having different lengths and different ending timings are executed as in this means, the action and effect of the above means XA1 are more effective.

Means XA3. The determination means determines that a condition for terminating the series of specific actions is satisfied during a period during which the movable means is controlled toward the second position (including at least a stop period during which stop control is performed on the second position side). The gaming machine according to means XA1 or XA2, characterized in that it does not determine whether or not it is.

If a configuration is provided in which it is possible to determine whether or not conditions for ending a series of specific actions are satisfied during a period in which the movable means is controlled to the second position side, the movable means is moved to the initial position side from the determination. Since it takes a predetermined time to return to , a time lag occurs before the movable means starts the next operation, etc., and the movement of the movable means may become unnatural. As a result, the player may feel uncomfortable and lose interest.

On the other hand, according to the means XA3, during the period in which the movable means is controlled to the second position side, it is not determined whether or not the conditions for ending the series of specific actions are satisfied. Under the configuration, by judging the end condition at the timing when the movable means returns to the first position side, the time lag from the judgment until the movable means returns to the initial position is reduced, and the effect on the subsequent performance is reduced. can do. As a result, the action and effect of the means XA1 can be enhanced.

Means XA4. A period during which the movable means is controlled to the second position side (including at least a stop period during which stop control is performed at the second position side) includes at least a first control period and a second longer control period. and a control period.

If the movable means is configured to perform the same action each time, there is a risk that the production associated with the series of specific actions of the movable means will become monotonous. On the other hand, according to the above means XA4, it is possible to diversify the effects related to the series of specific actions of the movable means, and to further improve the interest of the player.

It should be noted that, as in the above means XA4, under a configuration in which a plurality of periods are set during which control is performed toward the second position, which is the farthest from the first position, which is the initial position, if the movable means is positioned at the second position, In the case where it is determined whether or not the end condition of the series of specific actions is satisfied at the timing determined, depending on the length of the period during which the movable means is controlled to the second position side, the movable means is determined from the determination. The time it takes to return to the initial position, and the time it takes for the movable means to start the next operation, varies. If such a variation occurs, there is a possibility that there will be a gap between the effect associated with the series of specific actions of the movable means and the specific effect executed by the display means.

On the other hand, in this means, regardless of the length of the period during which the movable means is controlled to the second position side, under the configuration related to the means XA1, the end condition is set at the timing when the movable means returns to the first position side. By determining , it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem such as variations in the time from the determination until the movable means returns to the initial position, and in turn, the time until the movable means starts the next operation.

Means XA5. At least a first specific control and a second specific control different from the first specific control can be executed as controls to be executed after the series of specific actions are completed,
In both cases, the first specific control is executed and the second specific control is executed with the movable means positioned on the first position side. The gaming machine according to any one of means XA1 to XA4, characterized by:

According to the means XA5, regardless of whether the first specific control is executed or the second specific control is executed after completing the series of specific actions, the movable means is used in common in both cases. Since it is configured to be executed in a state where it is positioned on the side of the first position, which is the starting point, the movable means can be smoothly shifted to the next control.

Means XA6. The gaming machine according to any one of means XA1 to XA5, characterized in that at least one of the end conditions for the series of specific actions can be established based on the player's operation of a predetermined operating means.

According to the above means XA6, by providing the operation means that can be operated by the player, the player can actively participate in the production related to the series of specific actions of the movable means, which further enhances the interest of the player. can be improved.

As in the above means XA6, when the timing at which the condition for ending the series of specific actions is established is an event that cannot be determined when the condition is established, such as the operation of the operating means by the player, the effect of the above means XA1 is It will be more successful.

Means XA7. Any one of the means XA1 to XA6, characterized in that the timing at which the condition for ending the series of specific actions is satisfied changes according to the operation mode of the predetermined operation means operated by the player. The game machine described.

According to the above means XA7, by providing the operation means that the player can operate, the player can actively participate in the production related to the series of specific actions of the movable means, which further enhances the interest of the player. can be improved.

For example, in conjunction with the downward motion of the movable means, a character is displayed on the display means, and a display effect is performed to push the movable means upward to prevent the execution of the development effect. A configuration may be adopted in which the player repeatedly hits the operation means to stop the movable means that is about to be pushed up.

Here, the "operation mode of the operation means" includes the number of operations, the amount of operation displacement, and the like. For example, it includes the number of times a button-type operating means has been pressed, and the amount of operation displacement of a movable operating means such as a jog dial or a slide lever.

Means XA8. Means XA1 characterized in that the control executed after the series of specific actions is completed includes control relating to a predetermined controlled object (for example, the display means, various lamps, speakers, etc.) different from the movable means. The gaming machine according to any one of means XA7.

According to the means XA8, by providing a predetermined controlled object different from the movable means, in addition to the production related to the series of specific actions of the movable means, the production using the controlled object can be performed. It is possible to improve the interest of the further.

It should be noted that, as in the above means XA8, in a configuration in which the first control related to a series of specific operations of the movable means and the second control related to a predetermined controlled object are executed together, the execution timing of both controls A time lag may occur.

On the other hand, according to the present means XA8, it is possible to reduce an operation deviation or the like between two types of controlled objects (moving means and predetermined controlled object) operated by different controls.

Means XA9. The determining means determines whether or not a condition for ending the series of specific actions is satisfied after executing the last predetermined action of the predetermined actions that are performed multiple times in the series of specific actions. The gaming machine according to any one of means XA1 to XA8, characterized in that it is configured to be able to

According to the above means XA9, for example, in the action control table that defines a series of specific actions, it is possible to determine whether or not the conditions for ending the series of specific actions are satisfied after the last predetermined action is executed. By using the motion control table, it is possible to repeatedly refer to the motion control table a plurality of times and repeatedly execute a series of specific motions defined in the motion control table.

As a result, one operation control table can be used for a plurality of operation controls. The storage means can be effectively used.

Means XA10. The movable means enters a first state in which a predetermined region (for example, part of a predetermined display means, etc.) is invisible or difficult to see when positioned at the first position, and when positioned at the second position. A game machine according to any one of means XA1 to XA9, characterized in that the predetermined area is in a second state in which the predetermined area is visible or easily visible.

According to the above means XA10, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect of the movable means and further improve the interest of the player.

For example, under the configuration in which the eyeball is arranged in the eyeball as a predetermined area provided in the dragon role modeled on the head of the dragon, the eyelid member as a movable means normally makes the eyeball (inside the eyehole) invisible or invisible. While the eyelids of the dragon character are closed so as to be difficult to see, the eyelid member of the dragon character blinks a plurality of times when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied. After that, the eyelid member of the dragon character may be configured to be in the second state in which the eyelid member of the dragon character is opened so that the eyeball (inside the eye hole) of the dragon character can be visually recognized or easily visually recognized. Of course, the "predetermined area" is not limited to this, and may be another area such as part of the display screen.

Means XA11. Any one of the means XA1 to XA10, characterized by comprising a light emitting means which can be turned on when the movable means is positioned at the second position and can be turned off when the movable means is positioned at the first position. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above-mentioned means XA11, it is possible to perform an effect by light together with the motion effect of the movable means. As a result, the presentation effect of the movable means can be enhanced, and the player's interest can be further improved.

For example, an eyeball provided with an LED as a light emitting means is placed in the eye socket of the dragon role as a predetermined area, and in a first state (normal time) in which the eyelids of the dragon role are closed, the eyeball While the (LED) is turned off, the eyeball (LED) is turned on when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied and the eyelid member of the dragon character opens to the second state. may be Of course, the position where the light emitting means is provided is not limited to the above-described predetermined area, and may be other positions such as a position where the predetermined area can be illuminated from the outside.

Means XA12. The gaming machine according to any one of means XA1 to XA11, characterized by comprising a biasing means (for example, a coil spring) for biasing the movable means toward the initial position side (first position side). .

If the position where the movable means stands by deviates from the preset initial position (reference position) due to assembly error of the movable means, deterioration over time, etc., there is a risk of interfering with the operation control of the movable means. In addition, there is a possibility that the display effect and the operation of the movable means may be out of sync with each other, resulting in a loss of interest for the player.

On the other hand, according to the means XA12, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation of the movable means and, in turn, the operational deviation. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest of the player.

The position where the urging means is provided is not particularly limited, and for example, it may be provided on the side of the movable means, or may be provided on the side of the driving means that drives the movable means.

Means XA13. In executing the series of specific actions, the movable control means executes a predetermined action of positioning the movable means at or near the first position once, and then performs a predetermined stop control to stop the movable means. The gaming machine according to any one of means XA1 to XA12, characterized by being executable.

After the movable means performs the predetermined movement to return to the first position once, the direction of movement of the movable means is reversed to the second position. Therefore, if the above stop control is not executed, the direction of movement of the movable means will be suddenly reversed, and there is a risk that a large load will be applied to the movable means and the drive means that drives it due to the influence of inertia and the like. be. As a result, there is a risk that durability will be reduced, such as rattling in the assembled state of the movable means and the driving means.

On the other hand, according to the means XA13, by performing the stop control, the load on the movable means, the driving means, etc. can be reduced, and the durability of the movable means, the driving means, etc. can be improved.

Means XA14. XA1 to XA13, wherein the movable control means is configured to be capable of executing a predetermined stop control for stopping the movable means at the second position when executing the series of specific actions. The gaming machine according to any one of

According to the means XA14, the same effects as those of the means XA13 can be obtained.

Means XA15. the predetermined motion is a motion including displacement in the front-rear direction of the movable means;
Means XA1 to XA1 characterized in that, at least when the movable means is positioned at the second position, at least a part of the movable means protrudes from the front surface of the game board forming the game area. The gaming machine according to any one of means XA14.

According to the above means XA15, the movable means moves beyond the front surface of the game board and performs an approaching motion to approach a position closer to the player. It is possible to improve the interest of people.

It should be noted that "movement including displacement in the front-rear direction of the movable means" includes movement including sliding displacement in the front-rear direction, and posture displacement in the front-rear direction with the vertical or horizontal direction as the rotation axis (rotation, rotation, etc.). motions including rocking, tilting, etc.).

Means XA16. The game machine according to any one of means XA1 to XA15, wherein the movable means is provided below the display means.

Usually, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when display means is provided in the game area, starting ball entry means is provided below the display means. Therefore, while playing a game while looking at the display means, the player's line of sight is frequently directed to the lower position of the display means provided with the starting ball entry means toward which the game balls shot into the game area are directed. Become. Therefore, if the movable means is provided at a position above the display means, even if an effect is performed by the movable means, the player may hardly notice the effect.

On the other hand, according to the means XA16, by providing the movable means below the display means frequently viewed by the player, the player can easily notice the change of the movable means. As a result, the player will not miss the performance by the movable means, and the player's interest can be improved.

Incidentally, "provided at a position below the display means" includes, for example, being provided at a position on the back side of a transparent game board, or being fitted from the front side into a hole or recess formed in the game board. One example is that

Means XA17. According to any one of means XA1 to XA16, the movable means is configured to abut on a predetermined abutted portion (stopper portion) when positioned at the first position. game machine.

If the movable means does not come into contact with the predetermined abutted portion when it returns to the first position, it is not possible to know whether the movable means has returned to the preset initial position. It is necessary to check whether or not the means has returned to the initial position, and to correct the position of the movable means to the initial position if the position is shifted.

On the other hand, according to the present means, it is only necessary to control the movable means so as to abut on the predetermined abutted portion, and it is possible to omit the position check processing and the position correction processing after the predetermined operation. The processing load on the control means can be reduced.

Means XA18. According to any one of means XA1 to XA17, the movable means is configured to abut on a predetermined abutted portion (stopper portion) when positioned at the second position. game machine.

According to the means XA18, the same effects as those of the means XA17 can be obtained.

Means XA19. Means XA1 to Means, characterized by comprising notifying means (start notifying means) for notifying that in a stage prior to the start of the series of specific actions by the movable means based on the establishment of the operating condition. The gaming machine according to any one of XA18.

If the movable means were to suddenly operate without warning, the player, who had not paid attention to the movable means until then, would not be able to grasp the situation and might be confused.

On the other hand, according to the means XA19, by providing the notification means, the player can be made aware in advance that the movable means will perform a series of specific actions. As a result, it is possible to increase the attention level of the game performance using the movable means, and to further improve the interest of the player.

Examples of the notification means (start notification means) include notification display by predetermined display means, audio notification by predetermined audio means, light emission notification by various light emitting means, and the like.

Means XA20. XA1 to XA19 according to any one of the means XA1 to XA19, further comprising a notification means (number of times notification means) capable of notifying the number of execution times of the predetermined action executed by the movable means in the series of specific actions. game machine.

According to the means XA20, provision of the notification means makes it easier for the player to recognize the current situation in the series of specific actions. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

For example, the character moves a generator and charges an electric device on the display means, while the moving means moves up and down. ) may be configured to perform an effect that increases.

Examples of the notification means (number of times notification means) include notification display by predetermined display means, audio notification by predetermined audio means, light emission notification by various light emitting means, and the like.

The basic configuration of various gaming machines to which the above means are applied is shown below.

(b) The game machine in each of the above means is a pinball game machine. As a more detailed example of a mode, "an operation means (shooting handle, etc.) operated by a player, a shooting means (shooting device, etc.) for flipping and shooting a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, and the shot A game area (game board, etc.) to which game balls are guided, and predetermined ball entry means (general winning opening, variable winning device, starting winning opening, etc.) that allows game balls guided to the game area to enter. Equipped with a pinball game machine" can be mentioned.

(b) The game machine in each of the above means or each pinball game machine is a pachinko machine or a game machine conforming to a pachinko machine.

10... Pachinko machine 30... Game board 42... Effect display device 125... Effect button 761... Upper effect accessory unit 811... Movable accessory 820... Rotating body 1812... Vertical drive mechanism 1815... Vertical drive motor, 262 ... sub-controller.

Claims (2)

Starting ball entry means provided in the game area;
A lottery means capable of executing various lotteries when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means;
display control means capable of determining and executing one specific effect to be executed by the display means provided in the game area according to the result of the lottery from among a plurality of effect display modes;
movable control means provided in the game area and capable of determining and executing one movable mode of the movable means operable during display of the specific effect on the display means from among a plurality of movable modes. A game machine that
The movable control means controls the movable means based on specific information set corresponding to one of the movable modes determined from among the plurality of movable modes based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition. It is the one that causes the action to take place,
The movable means is movably controlled between a first position, which is the initial position side, and a second position, which is the most movable position in the series of specific operations,
The series of specific actions are configured to be able to perform a predetermined action of positioning the movable means at or near the first position a plurality of times,
The movable control means is
determination means capable of determining whether or not a condition for ending the series of specific actions is satisfied when the predetermined action is executed;
terminating means capable of terminating the series of specific actions by stopping the movable means positioned at or near the first position when the determining means determines that the termination condition is satisfied; A game machine characterized by comprising: 2. A gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein said gaming machine is a pachinko machine.

Images